i1000SR Service Manual PDF

ARCHITECT i1000SR Service and Support Manual
Manual Revision Number
201970-115
Front Matter Content Control Number
201971-115
© 2002, 2015 Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL. All rights reserved.
Revision Log
Click for Chapter 4 Removal and Replacement and Chapter 5 Verification Procedure Revision History
Other revision history is located in the table.
REVISION DATE SECTIONS REVISED/ADDED TSBs INCORPORATED ISAs INCORPORATED
201970-115 APR//2015 i1000 Revision 201970-115 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-114 JUN//2012 i1000 Revision 201970-114 Change Listing N/A ISA 117-020
201970-113 NOV/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-113 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-112 AUG/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-112 Change Listing N/A ISA 117-018
201970-111 JUL/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-111 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-110 MAY/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-110 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-109 JUN/2009 i1000 Revision 201970-109 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-108 MAR/2009 i1000 Revision 201970-108 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-107 DEC/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-107 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-106 SEPT/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-106 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-105 MAY/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-105 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-102 JAN/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-102 Change Listing N/A N/A
201970-101 JAN/2007 ALL (NEW PUBLICATION) N/A N/A
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-115) • © 2007, 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are
registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various
jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Proprietary Information
(Document Control Number 204668-102)
The information, documents and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that
the copyright notice appears on all copies;

use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
the Information is not modified in any way; and
no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and
may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior notification.
Qualifications:
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for information and illustration purposes only and shall not be
used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient
names or test results.
The information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories-trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or
experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision and with cooperation from Abbott
Laboratories technical support or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or
arising from the use of the information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to
those persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, under the supervision
and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information should make any oral, written
or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such
response and any information submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to
reproduce, publish or otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the research,
development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such information. The sender of any information to
Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other
person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the
most current information.
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates.
No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name may be made without the prior written authorization of
Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names,
and trade names are the property of their respective companies. All rights reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT
TO THE INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000 amd ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions.
i1000 Revision 201970-102 Change Listing
This page lists the changes from 201780-101 to Revision 201970-102. The revisions to the manual are indicated below. Be sure
that the manual contains the latest revision number of all pages.
Sections
Section
Revised / Revision
Numbers
Added
FRONT TItle Change Manual Revision Number to 201970-102
FRONT TItle Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 201971-102
FRONT Prop Info Update trademark and copyright information
FRONT Rev Log Add 201970-102 Change Listing
1 Gen Data Changed Document Control Number 201972-102
1.1 Updated text in Overview table
1.1 Updated text in Instrument or Part Decontamination
1.1 Deleted table in ESD Procedure
1.2 Updated text in title Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste
1.2 Updated text in Hardware Description of Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste
1.2 Updated and added text to Wash Cup Assembly
1.2 Updated graphic 5A_9010b
1.2 Updated text in Vacuum Subsystem
1.2 Updated and added text in Liquid Waste
1.2 Updated i1000SR Pumps table
1.2 Updated text in Overview of Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring
1.2 Updated and added text in RSH Sample Processing
1.2 Updated text in Overview of Temperature and WAM
1.2 Updated text in Hard Description of Temperature and WAM
1.2 Updated and added text to Trigger and Pre-trigger Heater, Reagent Cooler and Ambient
Temperature Monitoring
1.2 Updated and added text to Temperature Set Points table
1.2 Updated text in Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
1.2 Updated and added text in Temperature Subsystem Channels table

1.2 Added text to Temperature Subsystem Initialization
1.2 Added text to Reagent Carousel Area in Reagent Management
1.2 Updated graphics 5A_1050b and 5A_1051b
1.2 Added Carrier Positioner to Reagent Management
1.2 Updated text to Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly
1.2 Added text to Carrier Latch Actuator Assembly
2 Troubleshooting Changed Document Control Number 201973-102
2 Updated graphic 5A_9001b
2 Updated graphic 5A_9006b 1 of 2
2 Updated graphic 5A_9006b 2 of 2
2 2.3 Updated table in i1000 System Electronic
2 Updated table in CMIA Optics Board
2 Updated table in 900085 DC Driver I/O (DC Solenoid Driver) Board Fuses
2 Updated table in Limit Switch Inputs
2 Updated table in Stepper Motor Driver Boards
2 Updated table in 97280 HEater Cooler Board Fuses
2 Added new table Heater Cooler Board LEDs
2 Updated table in Temperature Controller Board
2 Added new content area Liquid Level Sensor (LLS) Board
2 Added new graphic 5A_1005a
2 Added new content area Carrier Transport Board LEDs
2 Added new graphic 5A_1004a
2 Added new content area Pipettor Board LEDs

2 Added new content area Processing Distribution Board LEDs
2 Added new content area Reagent Distribution Board LEDs
2 Added new content area Fluidics Distributions Board LEDs
2 Added new content area RSH Distribution Board LEDs
2 Updated table in RSH Distribution Board
2 Updated table in Upper Card Cage Boards
2 Updated table in Lower Card Cage Boards
2 Updated table in Direct Connection Cables
4 R&R Changed Document Control Number 201975-102
4 A1.01 Updated text in Verification
4 A1.04 Updated text in Install RV Loader Assembly
4 A1.05 Updated graphic 5A_8320b
4 A1.10 Updated text in Remove and Install RV Pickup Assembly
4 B1.06 Updated text in Preparation, Remove RV Loader, and Remove Wash Zone Probe Mount
4 B1.06 Updated text and graphics (5A_8305a, 5A_8307a, & 5A_8306a) in Remove Wash Manifold and
Buffer Heater Assembly
4 B1.06 Updated text and graphics (5A_1285a & 5A_8308a) in Remove Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold and
Heater Assembly
4 B2.06 Updated text in Remove and Install RV Unload Diverter Assembly
4 B2.10 Updated graphic callouts in Preparation

4 C1.02 Updated text in Remove Shutter Assembly and Verification
4 D1.10 Updated graphic callouts in Remove Reagent Carousel
4 D1.10 Updated text in Remove Reagent Carousel Slide
4 D2.01 Updated part number
4 D2.01 Updated text in Remove and Install Reagent Carousel Cover and Install Cables, Reagent Access
Door Assembly and Cover
4 D2.02 Updated part number and part name
4 D2.05 Updated text in Install Reagent Access Door Motor
4 D3.02 Updated part name
4 E1.03 Updated text in Install Lead Screw with Lifter, Install Gearbox, and Install Pipettor Assembly
4 E1.04 Updated text in Install Probe Tubing Assembly and Pressure Monitor and Install Pipettor Assembly
PCB
4 E1.06 Updated text in Install Probe

4 E1.08 Updated text in Install Pressure Monitor
4 E3.03 Updated text in Verification
4 E3.04 Added tool to Tools/Materials, updated text in Remove Valve and Gasket, Install Valve, and
Verification
4 G1.02 Added tool to Tools/Materials, updated text in Remove Valve WZ Manifold, Install Valve on WZ
Manifold, and Install WZ Heater
4 G1.07 Updated text and graphic 5A_1217a in Remove CMIA Wash Zone Mechanism
4 H1.03 Added tool to Tools/Materials,
4 H1.03 Updated text in Remove and Install Pre-trigger/Trigger (PT-T) Manifold Assembly
4 H1.03 Added text to new area Install Valve on Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold
4 H1.08 Updated text in Preparation, Remove Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold or Wash Zone Manifold Valves
4 H1.08 Updated text in Install Valve(s) (WZ Manifold Only) and Install Valve(s) (Pre-Trigger/Trigger
Manifold Only)
4 M1.01 Update part name, and updated text in Remove Card Cage
4 M1.03 Updated part number and part name
4 M1.07 Updated part name and updated entire procedure added graphics 5A_1267a and 5A_1173a
4 M1.09 Updated procedure title, part number and part name
4 N1.02 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport from RSH, Remove and Install Carrier Transport PCB
4 N1.03 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport from RSH
4 N1.04 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport from RSH and Remove and Install Carrier Transport PCB
4 N1.05 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport from RSH and Install Theta Shaft
4 N1.06 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport from RSH
4 N1.07 Updated text in Remove and Install Carrier Transport Arm Sensor
4 N1.08 Updated text in Remove Carrier Transport Assembly
4 N1.09 Updated text in Remove X Home Sensor
4 N2.03 Updated procedure title and updated text in Install Load - Unload Assembly
4 N2.07 Updated text in Remove Priority Load_Unload Board and Standard Load_Unload Board
4 P1.02 Added new procedure and graphics 5A_8326a, 5A_8327a, 5A_8328a, 5A_8329, and 5A_8320a
5 Procedures Changed Document Control Number 201976-102
5 P-401 Added new procedure (Alignment of i1000SR Processing Center Cover) and graphics 5A_8331a,
5A_8332a, 5A_8333a, 5A_8334a, 5A_8335a, 5A_8336a, 5A_8337a, 5A_8338a, 5A_8339a,
5A_8340a, and 5A_8341a,
5 P-402 Added new procedure (Heater Cooler Board Diagnostic) and graphics 5A_1181a, 5A_1006a,
5A_1007a, 5A_1008a, 5A_8013a, 5A_6014a, 5A_6015a, 5A_6016a, 5A_6017a,5A_6018a,
5A_6019a, and 5A_6020a
5 P-404 Added new procedure (Reagent Access Door Lubrication) and graphic 5A_8182a
5 5.2 Removed all table numbers in this section
5 5.2 Updated content in table Temperature Channel Descriptions
5 5.2 Updated content in table DIO Bit Identifiers

5 5.2 Updated content in table V1, Solenoid Identifiers
6 Planned Maint. Changed Document Control Number 201977-102
6 All content added this revision
7 System Spec Changed Document Control Number 201978-102
7 7.1 Updated table Clearance Measurement for Operation and Service
7 7.1 Updated table Water and Water Specification
7 7.2 Updated table Pre-Site Checklist
7 7.2 Added text and table Pre-Site Open Action Item Summary
8 Install. & Setup Changed Document Control Number 201979-102
8 8.2 Updated Materials in table i1000SR Installation
8 8.2 Updated text in Open Crate and Unpack
8 8.2 Updated text in Prepare for Pallet Ramp Installation
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Pallet Ramp
8 8.2 Updated text in Remove Packing Material
8 8.2 Updated text in Installation Option

8 8.2 Updated Text in Install Pipettor Probe
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Wash Zone Probes
8 8.2 Updated text in Install the RV Loader
8 8.2 Updated text in Install RV Loader Assembly
8 8.2 Updated text in Preparation in the Monitor Support Arm Installation section
8 8.2 Updated text in Attach Support Arm to Instrument
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Keyboard Tray
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Keyboard and Mouse
8 8.2 Updated Wrap Cables with Corrugated Tube in SCC- Hardware and Cabling Installation section
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Cable Covers
8 8.2 Updated text in Install Cable Plug and Attach Cable Ties
8 8.2 Updated text in Complete Keyboard Installation Without Hand Held Bar Code Wand
8 8.2 Updated text in Connect Mouse, Keyboard and Monitor Cable to CPU
8 8.2 Updated graphic 5A_9013b
8 8.2 Updated text in Install System Software
8 8.2 Updated entire Processing Module Preparation and Decontamination procedure
8 8.2 Added new procedure Processing Module Verification

i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-102) • Copyright 2007, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All
rights reserved.
Sections
Section
Revised / Revision
Numbers
Added
Front Title Change 201970-102 to 201970-103
Front TItle Change Document Control Number to 201971-103
Front Prop Info Change Control Number 204688-101
Front Rev Log Add 201970-103 content
Chap 4 Title Document Control Number, change to 201975-103

Chap 4 Locator Parts and RR names will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU
Table
Chap 4 All RR Parts and verification information will be pulled directly from approved records in FRU. A note
procedures dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace
if necessasry.", has been added at the beginning of the RR. An additional verification procedure, G110,
has been added as the final verification of each RR.
Chap 5 Title Change Document Control Number to 201976-103
Chap 5 All VPs Two notes dynamically sourced from FRU, "Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired
and replace if necessary." and "At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.", have been added
at the beginning of the procedure.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • © 2007, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
Section Sections Revised /

Revision
Numbers Added
Global All Replaced the word “Copyright” with symbol © in all footers. Added or changed copyright
date to 2008.
Global All Deleted “Center” in Shutdown Processing Center Module.
Front Title Change 201970-102 to 201970-104
Front TItle Change Document Control Number to 201971-104
Front Revision Log Add 201970-104 content
Chap 1 General Data Document Control Number, change to 201972-103

Chap 1 Changed Temperature Set Points table in Temperature and WAM.
Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed document control Number to 201973-103.
Chap 2 Updated Block Functional Diagram/Temperature Subsystem graphic.
Chap 2 Added text to W006 in Direct Connection Cables table.
Chap 2 Added text to W009 in Direct Connection Cables table.
Chap 2 Added W200 to Direct Connection Cables table.
Chap 2 Added W212 to Direct Connection Cables table.
Chap 2 Updated Card Cage Backplane graphic 5A_1176b.
Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Change Document Control Number to 201977-102.
Chap 6 Deleted Filter, Buffer in Suggested PM Parts and Materials.
Chap 6 Updated text in Processing Module Verification.
Chap 6 Updated Notes from 56_3 to 56_2.
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Document Control Number, change to 201979-103.

Chap 8 Changed text in i1000SR Installation Checklist.
Chap 8 Added Processing Module Calibration in i1000SR Installation Checklist.
Chap 8 Deleted Serial Numbers and ABBOTT Field Service Representative from form in i1000SR
Installation Checklist.
Chap 8 Added text to Materials Required in i1000SR Installation.
Chap 8 Added text to Remove Packing Materials Unpack.
Chap 8 Added step 7 to Install Pipettor Probe Module Component Installation.
Chap 8 Changed heading from Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Adaptor Kit Installation
(Optional) to (Future).
Chap 8 Added text to Monitor Support Arm Installation – Preparation.
Chap 8 Added text to Monitor Support Arm Installation – Install Keyboard Tray.
Chap 8 Added text to Hardware and Cabling Installation – Optional Serial Expansion and
Optional SCC…(UPS).
Chap 8 Added text to Install Keyboard and Mouse.
Chap 8 Added text to Install Touchscreen Monitor Cables.
Chap 8 Added text to Label Mouse and Keyboard Extension Cables.
Chap 8 Added text to Wrap Cables with Corrugated Tube.
Chap 8 Deleted text and added text to Install Cable Covers.
Chap 8 Updated text in Install Cables Plug and Attach Cable Ties.
Chap 8 Updated text in Complete Mouse Installation.
Chap 8 Updated text in Connect Cables for automatic Reconstitution Module.
Chap 8 Added text to Load Consumables Processing Module Preparation and Decontamination.
Chap 8 Updated text in Perform 2190 Internal Decontamination.
Chap 8 Added text to Perform 2137 Flush Fluids.
Chap 8 Deleted Perform 3420 Level Sensors Test and all related steps Processing Module
Calibration.
Chap 8 Deleted Verify CMIA Optics Operations and related steps Processing Module Verification.
Chap 8 Deleted Perform 1047 Optics Verification and related steps.
Chap 8 Updated Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
Chap 8 Updated Perform Run Initialization.
Chap 8 Added text to Perform P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions SCC Installation Verification.
Section Numbers Sections Revised / Added Revision
Front Title Changed 201970-104 to 201970-105
Front Title Changed Document Control Number to 201971-105
Front Rev Log Changed content, created single link
Chap 1 General Data Changed 201972-103 to 201972-104
Chap 1 General Data Updated text to Temperature Set Points in Temperature and WAM
Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed 201973-103 to 201973-104
Chap 2 Troubleshooting Updated text in Board, Cable, and Connector Table
Chap 4 RR Procedures Updated text in E2.01 LLS Sample Antenna PCB
Chap 4 RR Procedures Added new section: D3.05 Cooler Cable
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Changed Document Control Number 201979-103 to 201979-104
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Updated text in Installation Checklist
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Updated text in Processing Module Preparation Decontamination
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Updated text in SCC-Hardware and Cabling Installation
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Installation - created new link, updated text.
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Processing Module Calibrations - updated text.
Chap 8 Installation & Setup Processing Module Decontamination - new.
Front Title Changed Manual Revision to 201970-106
Front Title Changed Front Matter Content Control Number to 201971-106
Front Rev Log Updated Revision Log 201970-106

Chap 6 Planned Maintenace
Changed Document Control Number 201977-102 to 201977-103
Added Suggested PM Parts and Materials table
Updated Reagent Carousel Area

Chap 7 System Specifications
Deleted Water Quality
Updated Pre-Site Checklist

Chap 8 Installation & Setup
Updated i1000SR Installation Links
Modified Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)
Modified Install Touchscreen Monitor Cables
Modified Connect Hub and Ethernet Cables
Modified graphic 5A_9013a ub i1000SR Installation
Updated Processing Module Preparation
Updated Processing Module Internal Decontamination
Updated Processing Module Calibrations
Updated Processing Module Preparation
Updated Processing Module Verification

Updated i1000SR System Packing
Front Title Changed Manual Revision to 201970-107
Front Title Changed Front Matter Content Control Number to 201971-107
Front Rev Log Updated Revision Log 201970-107

Chap 1 General Data Changed Document Control Number 201972-104 to 201972-105
Fluidics, Vacuum and Waste: Modified text
Fluidics, Vacuum and Waste: Modified text
Fluidics, Vacuum and Waste: Updated graphic 5A_1211a to 5A_1211b

Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed Document Control Number 201973-104 to 201973-105
Modified graphic 5A_9007c in Liquid Waste and Vacuum
Updated Engineering Schematics log
Updated graphic 5A_9036a to 5A_9036b
Created new graphic 5A_9050a
Front Title Changed manual revision number from "201970-107” to “201970-108".
Front Title Changed Front Matter Content Control Number "201971-107” to "201971-108".

Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed document control number from "201973-105” to “201973-106”.
Updated text in PM Procedures.
Updated “Fluidics” diagram.
Updated “Liquid Waste and Vacuum” diagram.

Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Changed document control number from "201977-103” to “201977-104”.
Updated text in Suggested PM Parts and Materials Checklist.

Sections
Section
Revised / Revision
Numbers
Added

Chap 1 General Data Changed document control number from "201972-105” to “201972-106”.
Added Note to Robotic Sample Handler about referring to the c4000 Service and Support Manual
for information regarding ci4100 the integrated system.

Chap 2 Troubleshooting Changed document control number from "201973-106” to “201973-107”.
Added Note to Robotic Sample Handler diagram page about referring to the c4000 Service and
Support Manual for information regarding ci4100 the integrated system.

Chap 6 Planned Changed document control number from "201977-104” to “201977-105”.
Maintenance
Added Note to PM Procedure about referring to the c4000 Service and Support Manual for
information regarding ci4100 the integrated system.

Chap 7 System Changed document control number from "201978-103” to “201978-104”.
Specification
Service and Support Manual for information regarding ci4100 the integrated system.

Chap 8 Installation & Changed document control number from "201979-105” to “201979-106”.
Setup
Added Note to i1000SR Installation Checklist about referring to the c4000 Service and Support
Manual for information regarding ci4100 the integrated system.
Sections
Section
Revised / Revision
Numbers
Added

Revised Sodium Azide statement per ER 259078.
Modified text in sections: Electrical Hazard Laser Light–Laser Caution Label Biological Hazard–
Precautions and Spill Cleanup Procedures Chemical Hazard
Section
Sections Revised / Added Revision
Numbers
Front Title Changed manual revision number from "201970-110” to

“201970-111".
Front Title Changed Front Matter Content Control Number "201971-110” to

"201971-111".

Chap 7 Pre-Site Interview & Inspection Changed document control number from "201978-104” to
“201978-105".
Pre-Site Checklist Removing all references to Automatic Reconstitution Module

(ARM)
System Specifications (i1000) Removing all references to Automatic Reconstitution Module

(ARM)

Chap 8 Installation & Setup Changed document control number from "201979-106” to
“201979-107".
i1000SR Installation Checklist Deleted Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Adaptor Kit
Installation (Future) from Table
i1000SR Installation Deleted Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Adaptor Kit

Installation (Optional) from Table
Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Adaptor Deleted entire procedure

Kit Installation (Future)
Section
Numbers
Front Proprietary Information Changed Manual Revision Number to 204668-102
Updated trademark information.

Remove the statement, “Do not autoclave product or waste containing sodium azide.”
Updated text in Wash Cup Assembly.
Updated Laser Caution Labels graphics to 5A_8180b & 5A_8181b.
Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Changed document control number from "201977-105” to “201977-106".
Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Updated Suggested PM Parts and Materials table.
PM Procedures Replace entire PM Procedure table.

Chap 8 Installation & Setup Changed document control number from "201979-107” to “201979-108".
i1000SR Installation Checklist Replaced i1000 Installation Checklist with new reformatted checklist.
SCC – Hardware and Cabling Updated text in several to make more readable and Updated graphics 5A_9031d and
Installation 5A_9049b
SCC Power Connections with Moved SCC Power Connections with Module UPS Diagram (and graphic), before
Module UPS Diagram SCC Power Connections with SCC UPS Diagram (and graphic).
Section
Numbers
Front Title Changed Front Matter Content Control Number "201971-112” to "201971-
113".

Added additional information to the sodium azide statement.

Chap 7 Pre-Site Specification and Changed document control number from "201978-105” to “201978-106".
Checklist
Added ‘Sodium Azide Awareness” statement to Pre-Site Checklist table.

Revision
Numbers Added

Chap 1 General Data Changed document control number from "201972-113" to "201972-114".
Chap 1 General Data Update to How to Use this Manual section to include attention activators.

Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Changed document control from "201977-106" to "201977-107".
Chap 6 Planned Maintenance Replacing procedures and checklist with a link to ISA 117-20.

Chap 8 Installation Changed document control number from "201979-108" to "201979-109".
Chap 8 Installation Updates to installation procedures per ER 283046 to add attention activators and
verification statements.
Chap 8 Installation Added electric shock hazard symbol to SCC Installation Verification .

Revision
Numbers Added

Chap 8 Installation Changed document control number from "201979-109" to "201979-110".
Add note to i1000SR,Installation Checklists to verify module serial numbers (S/N)

configured in the SCC with S/N on instruments.
General Data
(Document Control Number 201972-110
How to Use This Manual
Links
Biological Hazards
Chemical Hazards
Electrical Hazards
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Hazards
Laser Light
Mechanical Hazards
Overview
Safety Icons and Hazard Symbols
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide information for servicing the ARCHITECT i1000SR system. It is composed of the following
sections:
Section Topic
General Data This section contains a product overview, information on manual usage, accident prevention symbols, and
system specifications.
Troubleshooting This section contains reference and normal operation information for the system. The information may include
block and functional diagrams, mechanism and motor listings, and LED operating conditions.
Removal & This section contains Removal & Replacement procedures which are indexed by number to the Parts Lists.
Replacement
Verification This section contains configuration, adjustment, calibration, checks, and test procedures used to setup or verify
Procedures instrument operation. Procedures are also used to assist in troubleshooting.
Maintenance This section contains preventive maintenance (PM) recommendation checklists. These recommendations may
be subject to change due to local business or regulatory needs.
Pre-Site This section includes the site specifications and a checklist that outlines the activities of the Field Service
Specification & Representative/Field Service Engineer/Technical Executive (FSR/FSE/TE). An open action item summary is
Checklist included in the checklist.
Installation This section outlines the activities required to install or relocate a system.
Hazards
Introduction
The i1000SR has been designed for optimum operator safety. However, this does not reduce the importance of safety awareness
where hazards exist. This section describes the types and locations of potential hazards that could cause physical harm or damage
to the laboratory environment or where failure to follow instructions may result in instrument failure or generation of erroneous
patient results.
Warnings are inserted throughout this Service and Support manual to alert Field Service Representatives (FSRs) to potential
hazards.
Hazard Signal Words
Standard warning conventions, including hazard signal words and symbols are described below.
Signal
Definition
Word
DANGER Denotes an immediate hazard which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. This signal word
represents the highest level of any hazardous situation.
WARNING Denotes a hazard which could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
Caution Denotes potential hazards that could result in minor injury.
Note Denotes operator or service information.
Safety Icons and Hazard Symbols
Safety icons in this manual and on the i1000SR identify potentially dangerous conditions. Field Service Representatives (FSRs)
must recognize the icons and understand the type and degree of potential hazard. The following icons may be used with text or in
lieu of text. If text accompanies the icon, it describes the nature of the hazard and is labeled with DANGER, WARNING or
CAUTION. In some situations, instrument labels refer FSRs to the manual for specific information.
Safety Icon Definition and Descriptions
Symbol Classification Symbol Description
Caution Identifies an activity where it may be required to lift or move a heavy

Lifting object. Obtain assistance when moving and/or use appropriate lifting
Hazard devices.
Caution Identifies an activity or area where moving parts are present.

Moving
Parts
WARNING Identifies an activity or an area where hazardous chemicals are present.

Chemical Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), or package insert for
Hazard specific safety information.
WARNING Identifies where fluids may be under pressure.
Splash/
Spray
Hazard
Caution Identifies an area where electrostatic discharge may be present. A ground

Electrostatic strap must be worn while servicing the system.
Discharge
Note Identifies the location on the card cage where the ground strap is clipped.
Card Cage
Ground
WARNING Identifies an activity or area where potentially infectious materials may be

Potential present. Follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards.
Biohazard
WARNING Identifies the possibility of electrical shock if procedural or engineering

Electrical controls are not observed.
Shock
Hazard
WARNING Identifies the possibility of puncture in noted activity or at posted location.

Probe
Stick
Hazard
DANGER Alerts the user to the possibility of electrical shock in noted activity or at
High posted location in the power supply.
Voltage
DANGER Identifies high voltage areas over 600 volts.

High
Voltage
Caution Identifies an area where a hot surface is present.

Hot Surface
Caution Warns against direct viewing into the bar code laser beam or reflections
Class 2 from the beam.
Laser
Radiation
The labeling of ARCHITECT i1000SR reagents/calibrators/controls or liquid consumables may include one or more of the following
hazard symbols. The symbols and/or other country specific warnings are used to convey properties of the chemical or chemical
mixture, and to notify the user that precautions should be taken when handling the material. Always consult the specific Package
Insert or Material Safety Data Sheet for further information.
Hazard Symbol Definition / Description (with Standard Abbreviation)
Indicates that the material has Oxidizing (O) properties.
Indicates that the material has Highly Flammable (F) or Extremely Flammable (F +) properties.
Indicates that the material has Toxic (T) or Very Toxic (T +) properties.
Indicates that the material has Harmful (Xn) or Irritant (Xi) properties.
Indicates that the material has Corrosive (C) properties.
Indicates that the material has Dangerous for the environment (N) properties.
Electrical Hazards
The i1000SR does not pose uncommon electrical hazards if it is installed properly and connected to a power source that meets
required specifications. Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of any system. It is recommended that
a ground fault circuit interrupter be used when working in a wet environment.
Only qualified personnel should perform electrical servicing. Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the
following:
Inspect electrical cabling into and on the i1000SR periodically for signs of wear and damage.
Turn the instrument OFF before disconnecting the power cord and before servicing any electrical or internal components.
Determine the cause of a blown fuse or thrown circuit breaker and correct the problem before attempting to resume
operation of the equipment. Only use replacement fuses of the specified type and electrical rating.
Verify the power to the instrument is turned OFF. Be aware that a high voltage charge may remain on the power supply with
the power OFF.
Use an electrically insulated tool to disconnect the power supply and short both male pins to the instrument chassis.
Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components. Unplug the instrument before clean-up of
major liquid spills.
Make sure hands are dry prior to touching any switches or outlets.
Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the i1000SR.
Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as those supplied with the instrument, to protect against
electric shock.
Connect the power cords only to properly grounded outlets.
A ground fault circuit interrupter should be used when working in a wet environment.
Mechanical Hazards
The i1000SR is an automated system that operates under computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is potential
for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical components whenever the instrument is in operation. The i1000SR minimizes
mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components.
The i1000SR requires accurate positioning of all samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and consumables before executing any
program. If safeguards must be removed or disconnected during setup and testing procedures, use caution. Stay a safe distance
away from the moving components. Fast moving parts may cause injury. Always replace the safeguards upon completion of setup
and testing procedures. It is never acceptable for instrument operators to reach into the instrument when it is in an operating mode.
Should intervention be necessary during a run, the run should be interrupted according to instructions defined in the Operation
Manual.
Injury may result in the event of an instrument malfunction or an unexpected sequence of mechanical component movements.
Basic elements of mechanical equipment safety include but are not limited to:
Never bypass or override a safety device unless during setup or testing activities.
Never operate the instrument without protective covers and barriers in place unless during setup or testing activities.
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the i1000SR.
Never allow any part of the body to enter a range of mechanical movement during system operation.
Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the i1000SR.
Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the i1000SR.
Be especially cautious when performing adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, or repair procedures.
Use caution when loading sample carriers and reagents.
Laser Light
The i1000SR is a Class 2 laser product. When this product is used according to its operating instructions, the laser does not
present a hazard to the eyes. Never stare directly into the beam, look into the aperture, place any optics into the beam or bypass
interlocks. Failure to follow proper procedures may result in an eye injury.
Only Abbott trained Field Service Representatives should remove the inner protective covers that enclose the embedded laser.
Do not remove, damage or obliterate any of the laser warning labels. If any of them become illegible, replace them.
Laser Caution Labels
The inner protective cover laser warning labels must not be removed and are to remain legible. The protective housing labels
(Abbott PN 96124-101, 202222-101) are shown in Laser Caution Label 96124-101 and Laser Caution Label 202222-101. The
labels consist of black lettering against a yellow background. This labels appear on the RSH left support and the processing
module cover window.
For beam alignment and other open beam configurations, follow instructions provided by the Service Manual, Advisories, and
Bulletins regarding the requirement for using laser safety eyewear. If required, verify laser eyewear is not damaged and has an
optical density of 1-2 at a wavelength of 650 nm. During open beam configurations, verify that the beam is confined to the laser
bench area and only personnel with proper eye protection are present.
Laser Caution Label 96124-102

Laser Caution Label 202222-102
Biological Hazards
The following activities may involve the presence of potentially infectious materials:
Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls

Cleaning spills
Handling and disposing of waste
Moving the system
Performing maintenance procedures
Performing decontamination procedures
Performing component replacement procedures
Precautions
All instruments that have been used to process clinical specimens, reagents, calibrators, and control that contain human sourced
material must be treated as potentially infectious. Follow ADD's biosafety procedures, which include, but are not limited to the
following precautions:
Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eyewear when handling human sourced material or contaminated instrument
components.
Do not pipet by mouth.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses when handling human sourced material or contaminated
instrument components.
Clean the spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated instrument components with a detergent followed by an
appropriate disinfectant, such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectant.
Decontaminate and dispose of all potentially contaminated materials into the appropriate biohazard waste system at the
facility. Probes and other sharp objects should be placed in puncture resistant sharps containers for disposal.
If exposed to infectious or potentially infectious materials, immediately cleanse the affected area, then seek medical attention as
soon as possible:
1. Eyes-rinse with water for 15 minutes.

2. Mouth-rinse with water.
3. Skin-wash the affected area with soap and water.
4. Puncture wound-allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area with soap and water.
Note
Report all accidents to your Manager and Workers' Compensation Administrator.
Spill Cleanup Procedures
Clean in accordance with established biosafety practices and follow instructions provided in the MSDS. In general, safe work
practices for cleaning spills include:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves, lab coat, and protective eyewear.
2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
4. Wipe the area with an appropriate disinfectant such as a 0.1% sodium hypochlorite (10% solution of chlorine bleach
containing at least 5% sodium hypochlorite).
5. Dispose of spilled and contaminated material in accordance with the facility's waste disposal procedures.
Instrument or Part Decontamination
Any part subject to user handling, such as keyboards, printers, monitors, disk drives, and front panels, require decontamination
prior to servicing or shipment. When handling or decontaminating spare parts for shipping or repair, use safety precautions as listed
below:
Caution
Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (gloves, lab coat, protective eyewear) while performing
decontamination activities.
1. Remove all specimens, reagents, calibrators, and controls from the instrument.
2. Cycle sodium hypochlorite solution (chlorine bleach) through the fluid pathway, if applicable, that contacted the human
sourced material or products containing potentially infectious material. Allow the solution to set for a minimum of 10 minutes.
If a chlorine bleach solution cannot be used, cycle buffer or water through the fluid pathway to thoroughly flush the fluid
pathway.
3. Remove all waste materials from the instrument, if present.
4. Rinse waste containers with 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectants prior to shipping or disposal.
5. Wipe down the surface of each instrument and component with a detergent solution followed by an appropriate disinfectant
such as 0. 1% sodium hypochlorite.
Note
Under normal circumstances, printed circuit boards do not require decontamination. Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
enclosed inside the skins of computer and peripheral equipment are not considered to be contaminated.
WARNING
Decontamination may affect the performance of a printed circuit board or internal computer component.
Waste Handling and Disposal
It is the responsibility of each facility to label all waste containers and to characterize its waste stream to ensure the waste is
disposed of in accordance with the appropriate waste disposal regulations.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container.
Products That Contain Thimerosal or Mercury
Some reagents, calibrators, and controls contain thimerosal or mercury, and may be considered hazardous by various
environmental regulatory agencies. Do not directly sewer waste fluids that contain thimerosal or mercury.
Products That Contain Guanidine (Thiocyanate)
Do not mix oxiding agents, such as sodium hypochlorite (chlorine bleach) or with liquid waste. Toxic gases may be generated.
Chemical Hazards
FSRs may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, or liquid consumables (including
bleach). Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay Package Inserts and
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Exposure levels are further reduced by the design features of the instrument when it is used
properly.
Precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals:
Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for safe use instructions and precautions.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves, a lab coat, and protective
eyewear.
Always maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
If irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure, seek medical attention.
Hazard symbols that appear on the i1000SR product labeling are accompanied by Risk (R) and Safety (S) numbers and represent
specific risk and safety phrases as defined by applicable European Community Directives. These risk and safety phrases describe
precautions to be used when working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture. Refer to the corresponding phrases indicated
in the Package Insert or similar document for all (R) and (S) numbers that appear on product labeling. Other country-specific
warning and precautions may be included on the labeling.
Sodium Azide
Some products contain sodium azide. Observe the following precautions when using products that contain sodium azide:
Do not mix any chemical or product with a pH below 6 with solutions or residues that contain sodium azide (such as wash
buffer). Sodium azide releases hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas when the pH is lower than 6.
Caution
The pre-trigger solution has a pH lower than 6. Allowing the pre-trigger solution to contact wash buffer or dried wash
buffer residue may result in the release of hydrazoic acid, a very toxic and pungent-smelling gas. Care must be taken
to clean up any spills or residue that may have occurred due to leaking components (ex. pumps in the pump bay)
identified during servicing of the instrument.
Flush drains thoroughly with water several times a day to prevent potentially explosive metal azides from forming on lead,
copper or brass components or on solder in laboratory plumbing if product and/or instrument waste is released to a drain.
Detailed information about azides in laboratory drains is available in Current Intelligence Bulletin No. 13 Explosive Azide
Hazard (August 16, 1976), a publication issued by the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), at
cdc.gov/niosh.
A copy of the bulletin is also available on the Abbott Diagnostics Global internet site at abbottdiagnostics.com (select the
International region), under Support - Technical Library - Other Reference Documents, or by contacting your Abbott
representative.
Physical Hazards
Safe practices should be observed when exposed to the following physical hazards.
Sharps and Probes
In general, the use of sharps and glassware should be minimized.
The probes, vent needles, aspiration probes, and leaf springs are sharp and may be contaminated with infectious materials. Avoid
contact with these components and handle them cautiously in order to prevent injury. Use forceps to remove contaminated broken
glassware.
Dispose of sharps in an appropriately marked, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal.
Heavy Objects
The system is heavy and sections of the shell are unsupported. Ensure that you have adequate help before attempting to move the
system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on unsupported sections of the shell.
The high-concentration waste container and wash buffer reservoir is heavy when full. Use care when handling the container to
reduce the risk of injury.
When moving or lifting heavy objects, obtain assistance and always use proper lifting techniques.
Hot Objects
The buffer heaters, lamp and lamp housing may be hot. Allow the surface to cool before touching and handling. Use temperature-
resistant gloves, if necessary.
Trip Hazard
The i1000SR is equipped with a power cord and various computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high
traffic areas are properly stowed.
Many of the electronic components on circuit boards are susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Static discharge of as little as
100 - 200 volts can damage or destroy a component. Always wear a wrist ground strap and discharge static electricity from your
body prior to touching and working on the instrument.
Note
All PC boards are shipped in a static protective bag. This symbol is placed on the card cage to identify the appropriate
ground location.
Static Hazard
Static protective procedures are used during the manufacture of PC boards. Replacement PC board assemblies are also protected
by use of static protective packaging as well as boxed to prevent physical damage. Assemblies that have failed and are returned
for repair are also handled at the repair shop under static protection procedures.
Handling Guidelines - PC Subassemblies
These guidelines assure protection against failures created by static.
Retain spare PC board subassemblies in the static-protective bags.

Use an approved static-protective field service kit, or the ground strap shipped with the board, whenever a board is removed
from an instrument or protective bag.
Replace the defective PC board in the same protective bag to return for repair.
Note
Continued use of the protective shipping boxes, both during shipping and storage, eliminates most failures caused by
physical damage.
Static Protective Service Kit
The static protective service kit is designed to keep the FSE/FSR, replacement part, work surface, and instrument at the same
ground level. Generally, an instruction set accompanies the kit, however, in the absence of specific instructions, follow the "ESD
Procedure".
ESD Procedure
Note
Use where ESD symbol is present and static protective equipment is not shipped with a replacement part.
1. Place the work mat on a solid surface close to the instrument, allow the ground strap to reach the instrument.
2. Attach the ground clip to the instrument chassis.
3. Attach the other end of the ground clip cable and the connector from the wrist strap to the work mat. (Exception: Some wrist
strap cables provide a clip to connect to the same ground source as the mat cable).
4. Attach the wrist strap to your wrist, make sure the metallic button on the inside of the wrist strap is in direct contact with
your skin.
5. Place PC boards, removed from the instrument, on the work mat.
6. Replacement PC boards should be placed on the work mat before removing from the protective bag and remain on the mat
until installation.
7. Defective PC boards should be replaced in the static-protective bag before removal from the work mat area.
Miscellaneous Symbols
Attention Activator
i1000SR Module Overview
Links
Assay Pipetting Protocols

Card Cage
CMIA Optics
Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste
Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring
Power Supply and Distribution
Process Path
Reaction Vessel Loader
Reagent Management
Robotic Sample Handler
Temperature and WAM
rights reserved.
CMIA Optics
Overview
The ARCHITECT i1000SR System uses chemiluminescence to detect and quantify the presence of specific antigens, antibodies
and analytes in samples. A chemiluminescent reaction occurs through the interaction of paramagnetic microparticles coated with a
capture molecule, an acridinium labeled conjugate, pre-trigger and trigger solutions.
The optics subsystem and associated components are designed to detect and measure photon emissions produced by this
chemiluminescent reaction.
Hardware Description
The CMIA Optics subsystem has three principal assemblies:
CMIA Reader Assembly

Reader Magnet
Shutter Assembly
Functional Description
Functional Diagram Links
CMIA Optics
CMIA Reader Assembly
The CMIA reader is a "passive" optics device that does not require a lamp light source to produce a detectable light emission; the
chemiluminescent reaction generates the light photons that are detected by the CMIA reader. The reader consists of a light pipe
that collects and directs photons produced from the chemiluminescent reaction, onto the photo cathode of a photo multiplier tube
(PMT). The resultant photoelectric signal is processed by the CMIA optics board and converted to a numerical value. The reader is
protected from magnetic interference though shielding around the outside of the PMT, and a crosshair in front of the PMT. This
crosshair deflects the magnetic field while still allowing the light photons into the PMT.
Shutter Assembly
The Shutter Assembly isolates the reaction vessel from background light that will interfere with the optics read. When the shutter is
open, the reaction vessels are free to move in the process path. During the CMIA optics read cycle, the shutter activates, closing
off the process path around the RV, isolating it from background light. At this time the primary entrance to the chamber is at the
Trigger nozzle. The shutter assembly also includes an actuating solenoid and a sensor board.
Reader Magnet
During the CMIA optics read cycle, the paramagnetic microparticles contained in the reaction mixture are attracted to a wall of the
reaction vessel by means of the reader magnet. This prevents the microparticles from interfering with the chemiluminescent
reaction.
Circuit Boards
In addition, the following circuit boards are also used in the CMIA optics subsystem:
CMIA Optics Board
Module Controller Board
DC Driver I/O Board
Processing Center Distribution Board
Normal Read Process
The following is the sequence of events for the normal read process for a 2-step assay.
Note
Each RV containing a sample reaction mixture has undergone incubation and wash cycles, prior to reaching this stage of the
assay sequence:
1. The RV is indexed to the pre-trigger dispense position, where pre-trigger is added. The RV is vortexed. Pre-trigger
(hydrogen peroxide) has 3 functions:
Creates an acidic environment preventing the early release of light emissions
Prevents microparticle clumping
Splits off the acridinium dye from the conjugate-bound immune complex, readying it for the action of the trigger
2. The RV is then indexed to the optics read position. This position is in front of the reader magnet, which pulls the
microparticles to the wall of the RV.
3. The shutter closes to block out external light from the RV.
4. The high voltage to the PMT is turned on.
5. A 6 second delay occurs, during which time the PMT response stabilizes and microparticle capture occurs. Following this
delay, a background read is taken. The light pipe directs any light photons present, to the PMT in the CMIA reader. The
CMIA reader converts the detected photons to a count value. The PMT output signal is interfaced through the CMIA optics
board. The count data is transferred to the module controller and is used to calculate the relative light unit (RLU) value for
the background read.
6. The foreground activated read is initiated and then sodium hydroxide is dispensed into the reaction vessel. The
chemiluminescent reaction occurs which results in the emission of light photons.
7. The light pipe directs the emitted light photons to the PMT, in the CMIA reader. The CMIA reader collects the emitted
photons of light and converts them to counts. The PMT output signal is interfaced through the CMIA optics board. The count
data is transferred to the module controller and is used to calculate the relative light unit (RLU) value for that sample. This
RLU value is then converted to a result unit by the Architect software.
8. The high voltage to the PMT is turned off.
9. After a specified delay has occurred, a command to open the shutter assembly is generated by the module controller.
10. The next reaction vessel is indexed by the process path into the read position.
Note
Refer to the Operations Manual for a detailed explanation of the chemiluminescent reaction
CMIA Optics Normal Read Process

Activated Optics Read
The CMIA optics measures the amount of light emission over a pre-defined time - this is the activated read. The optics read is
taken over 3 seconds for both the background read and the activated or foreground read. Each read involves 30 subreads at 100
millisecond intervals.
The signal in the result log file is the sum of these 30 background reads and 30 foreground reads. The corrected or final count is
obtained by subtracting the background from the foreground read.
The foreground read is initiated just prior to the trigger dispense. When the thirty 100 millisecond subreads are plotted for a normal
read, a bell shaped curve with a left bias is obtained. The first subread is usually very low or zero as the reaction has not initiated
yet. As the chemiluminescent flash occurs with the trigger addition, the peak signal occurs between the 4th and 6th reads, and
typically at the 5th read. This peak will vary depending on the specific assay, and analyte concentrations. The reaction then
degrades over the remainder of the 3 seconds to near zero again at the final read.
The final optics read = foreground read - background read.
The final read is measured in relative light units (RLU).
The system verifies that the background read counts fall within an acceptable range, and the activated read profile falls within an
acceptable read profile or count range. There are read validity checks that monitor for unusual spikes and peaks, excess noise and
other abnormalities related to the optics or fluidics.
Here is an example of optics read data from a typical calibrator run. The raw RLU counts and corresponding graphical
representation are included for both a low and a high RLU calibrator.
Low RLU Calibrator
CAL A - 3.0 Second Triggered Read Profile in the Linear Region (~34,000 RLUs)
Time RLU Time RLU Time RLU
0.1 0 1.1 214 2.1 14
0.2 35 1.2 123 2.2 11
0.3 1377 1.3 77 2.3 10
0.4 7231 1.4 52 2.4 11
0.5 10417 1.5 37 2.5 8
0.6 7686 1.6 27 2.6 9

0.7 3713 1.7 23 2.7 9
0.8 1715 1.8 20 2.8 8
0.9 827 1.9 15 2.9 8
1.0 400 2.0 15 3.0 7
Note
Note the peak RLU count at the 5th read.
High RLU Calibrator

CAL B - 3.0 Second Triggered Read Profile in the Non-Linear Region (~1,700,000 RLUs)
Time RLU Time RLU Time RLU
0.1 0 1.1 13164 2.1 633
0.2 2954 1.2 7185 2.2 584
0.3 100138 1.3 4243 2.3 526
0.4 344832 1.4 2749 2.4 506
0.5 441146 1.5 1901 2.5 469
0.6 361286 1.6 1445 2.6 449
0.7 206482 1.7 1441 2.7 438
0.8 105852 1.8 952 2.8 412
0.9 52057 1.9 806 2.9 398
1.0 25688 2.0 705 3.0 390
Note
Note the peak RLU count at the 5th read.
Initialization Sequence
Module Initialization
During the module initialization the shutter is left in the open state. Power to the PMT is disabled. Power to the shutter solenoid is
disabled, allowing the shutter to open (in case the solenoid was active and closed when the system status changed to stopped).
The trigger and pre-trigger pumps are homed.
Run Initialization
During Run Initialization, the PMT high voltage is disabled and the shutter moves out of its home position, and then back again.
Next, the Shutter Assembly closes and its position is verified. The high voltage to the PMT is turned on. After a short delay, a
verification of reader functionality is performed and the PMT high voltage is turned off. The Shutter Assembly then remains in the
closed position until it is necessary to index the process path. If indexing is immediate, a short delay is necessary after turning the
PMT high voltage off before opening the shutter.
rights reserved.
Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste
Overview
The fluidics subsystem is responsible for the movement of buffer, reagents and liquid waste throughout the Architect i1000SR
system. The fluidics subsystem performs the following functions:
Aspiration of sample from a sample tube or cup, and dispense into a reaction vessel
Aspiration of reagent from a reagent bottle, and dispense into a reaction vessel
Dispense of wash buffer into a reaction vessel for on-board sample dilution
Supply of wash buffer to the wash cup for pipettor probe washing and flushing
Supply and dispense of wash buffer into reaction vessels for washing during the CMIA wash process
Supply and dispense of pre-trigger and trigger solutions for the CMIA reaction process, and for priming and flushing of the
pre-trigger and trigger manifolds
Various reagent and buffer pumps move the liquids from the storage reservoirs to the appropriate manifolds. Pipettor robotics
positions the probe to the appropriate sample container, reagent bottle or reaction vessel for the aspiration and dispense process.
Liquids are aspirated and dispensed through the probe by syringe action. Pressure monitoring and liquid level sense hardware
monitor for correct liquid aspiration and dispense.
The vacuum subsystem is used to:
Remove wash buffer waste from the wash cup

Remove liquid waste from the pre-trigger, trigger and washzone prime / flush bypass lines
Aspirate liquid from the reaction vessels at the CMIA Wash Zone during the CMIA wash process
A vacuum pump creates the vacuum used in the vacuum subsystem, and distributes it via a vacuum accumulator. The waste liquid
is drawn to, and collected in the vacuum accumulator and is then pumped to a floor drain or to the onboard waste container via a
peristaltic waste pump.
The following main hardware components are used in the fluidics and vacuum subsystems.
Pipettor, pipettor probe and tubing

Pipettor syringe assembly
Wash cup assembly
Wash zone assembly
FMI buffer pump
FMI wash pump
FMI trigger pump
FMI pre-trigger pump
Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold assembly
On-board pre-trigger and trigger reservoirs
On-board buffer reservoir
Buffer transfer pump assembly
Buffer transfer flow sensor
Upper waste manifold
Lower waste manifold
Vacuum accumulator assembly
Vacuum pump with filter
Liquid waste pump
On-board liquid waste container
Solid waste container
In addition, the following circuit boards are also used in the fluidics and vacuum subsystem:

Motor Driver Boards #1 and #2
Indexer Boards #1 and #2
DC Driver IO board
Liquid Level Sense Board (used for LLS and PM data)
CMIA Optics Board
Heater Cooler Board
Reagent Distribution Board
Fluidics Distribution Board
Pipettor Board
Buffer Delivery Buffer Delivery

Fluidics Fluidics
Fluidics Area Engineering Schematic 5A_9039.PDF
Fluidics Distribution Board Fluidics Distribution Board
Liquid Waste and Vacuum Liquid Waste and Vacuum
Pre-trigger / Trigger Delivery Pre-trigger / Trigger Delivery
Pipettor Assembly
The pipettor assembly controls the probe movement through horizontal (theta) and vertical (z) movement. The pipettor probe,
together with a syringe and valve assembly, is used to aspirate sample from sample tubes or cups and dispense into a reaction
vessel. It is also used to aspirate reagent from reagent bottles and dispense into a reaction vessel. The probe is washed with wash
buffer solution via active wash protocols using an active wash cup assembly. During active wash, the inside of the probe is flushed
with buffer while the exterior is washed with buffer, and the waste buffer is removed by the vacuum system. The pipettor motors
are 36 volt DC stepper motors.
Pipettor Syringe Assembly
The syringe is used to accurately aspirate and dispense sample and reagent volumes by means of positive displacement of a
plunger within a barrel. A syringe valve controls buffer flow to the syringe. During pipettor probe priming and flushing, or on-board
buffer dilution, the syringe valve is open allowing the buffer pump to move buffer from the on-board buffer reservoir, through the
syringe and up to the pipettor probe. During aspiration and dispense of reagent or sample, the valve is closed and displacement of
the syringe plunger provides the positive and negative pressure to aspirate or dispense fluid through the pipettor probe. The
syringe plunger is driven by a 36 volt stepper motor, and has a sensor board for home positioning and valve control. The syringe
valve is also 36 volt DC powered.
Wash Cup Assembly

The wash cup assembly is a block manifold with two or three solenoid valves and two wells. It is used to wash the pipettor probe
during the aspiration and dispense cycles. The outer well is the waste well and the central well is the main wash well. The outer
waste well contains a removable insert called a baffle. This baffle can be removed for cleaning as required. The central well has a
threaded insert that can also be removed for cleaning. The three solenoid valves are connected to vacuum. Solenoid S1 in the
upper position is called the Upper Solenoid Valve, and is used to vacuum aspirate the wash buffer from the central wash well, and
air dry the probe. Solenoid S2 in the middle position is called the Outer Drain Valve and drains the outer waste well. Solenoid S3
(if present) in the lower position is called the Inner Drain Valve. S3 is initialized during startup and never used during any system
operation (see Note below). A third channel in the manifold directs liquid overflow, in the event of a wash cup blockage, to drain
into the base of the processing center. This prevents potential damage to any process path components if a flooding event occurs.
Note
Systems manufactured prior to unit serial number 2500 had three solenoid valves. The S3 valve was removed and the hole
in the wash cup body plugged.
The process for a probe wash is as follows:
1. The probe moves to the outer waste well and discards any residual liquid (serum, reagent or buffer). This liquid waste is
removed under vacuum by the Outer Drain Valve - S2.
2. The probe moves to the central wash well which contains clean buffer from the previous wash cycle. The probe aspirates a
small air sip (10 µl) during this move.
3. The probe moves down into the wash well, aspirating 150 µl of clean buffer. This process washes the probe internally and
externally.
4. The Upper Solenoid Valve (S1) opens and vacuum aspiration commences at the upper waste orifice, near the top of the
wash well. Six milliliters of clean buffer is pumped through the probe to flush the inner surface. This also flushes out the 150
µl of aspirated buffer in step 3. Wash buffer is vacuum aspirated through the upper waste orifice, to the waste system.
5. The probe retracts out of the central wash well. As it moves past the upper waste orifice, air is drawn under vacuum over
the probe surface, which dries the outer surface of the probe. Excess buffer continues to be aspirated to waste. Finally the
probe is completely retracted from the wash well and has been air dried. The central wash well now contains clean buffer,
from the 6 ml pump flush in Step 4, ready for the next wash cycle to commence.
Wash Zone Assembly
The wash zone assembly consists of a manifold with 3 dispense nozzles and 4 valves, and a wash assembly that moves 3 wash
aspirate probes up and down. Wash zone valves are used to dispense heated wash buffer into reaction vessels for the CMIA wash
process. The wash assembly then lowers the probes into the reaction vessels, and vacuum aspirates the waste liquid through the
upper waste manifold. During the wash process, the RVs are positioned in front of the wash magnet in the process path, causing
microparticle capture to occur. This allows the reaction mircroparticles to be washed, but prevents them being aspirated to waste
when the waste liquid it vacuum aspirated. Three valves are used to dispense wash buffer to three reaction vessels in sequence.
The 4th valve is for flushing and priming the manifold and is a bypass line to waste. A 36-volt DC stepper motor drives the wash
assembly, and the wash manifold valves, are all 36 volt DC powered.
The sequence of events at the wash zone assembly for an RV is as follows:
Sequence Event
Process Path Valve 1 dispenses heated wash buffer into RV giving a final volume of 400 µl; actual dispense volume is
wash position 1 variable and assay dependent.
Process Path WZ probe 1 aspirates liquid from RV. Valve 2 dispenses 500ul heated wash buffer into RV. After a 5 second
wash position 2 delay, liquid is again aspirated and another 1000ul buffer dispensed into RV.
Process Path WZ probe 2 aspirates liquid from RV. Valve 3 dispenses 1000ul heated wash buffer into RV. Liquid again
wash position 3 aspirated and another 1000ul buffer dispensed into RV.
Process Path WZ probe 3 aspirates liquid from RV and then after a 6 second delay, repeats the procedure to ensure all
wash position 4 liquid is aspirated.
Pre-trigger / Trigger Manifold Assembly
This is the dispense manifold for the Pre-trigger and Trigger solutions. There are two valves for each reagent - a dispense valve,
and a bypass valve (for flushing the manifold to waste). A dispense nozzle corresponds to each of the two dispense valves, and
directs the specific solution into the reaction vessel. The bypass valves direct Pre-trigger or Trigger solution to a waste line. All the
valves are 36 volt DC driven.
Upper Waste Manifold
The upper waste manifold sits to the left of the wash zone buffer heater and wash zone assemblies. The pre-trigger and trigger
bypass waste lines, and the wash zone manifold bypass waste line all connect to this manifold. Additionally the three wash zone
thermistor tubing also connect to this manifold and are actually held in place by the manifold itself. These three tubing are
connected to the wash zone probes and are used to aspirate the waste liquid from the RVs during the washing process. A vacuum
solenoid on the waste manifold, also known as the wash zone aspirate valve, opens to allow vacuum to remove waste liquid from
the upper waste manifold to the vacuum accumulator. This vacuum solenoid is 36VDC powered.
Vacuum Subsystem
The vacuum subsystem consists of the vacuum accumulator assembly and the vacuum pump with filter. The vacuum system is
used to supply vacuum to the sample wash cup and the upper waste manifold, which removes liquid waste from the wash zone
manifold and the T/PT manifold. Vacuum is used to aspirate and remove this liquid waste, and transfer it to the vacuum
accumulator. The vacuum pump creates vacuum in the accumulator. Measured vacuum levels in the accumulator, monitored by a
vacuum sensor, govern pump operation. The vacuum pump can generate a maximum of 27" Hg. The vacuum sensor is polled at
the beginning of each 18 second lock step during assay processing, and is also checked during any activity requiring vacuum
(including priming, flushing and other M&D procedures). If the measured level is less than 9" Hg, an error condition is generated.
The actual vacuum used during assay processing varies between 9" and 27" Hg depending on how much vacuum is required at
that time. A vacuum filter is used to filter the vacuum pump air supply, and the pump exhaust is directed through a muffler to
reduce noise. A metal outlet on the muffler is directed towards the solid waste container, and allows any condensate that collects in
the muffler to drain to the waste container. The vacuum pump is a 24volt DC diaphragm pump. When vacuum is required to
aspirate liquid waste, a solenoid valve opens at the relevant manifold, allowing the vacuum to aspirate liquid from that location. This
waste liquid is drawn into the accumulator. When the vacuum aspiration cycle has completed, the solenoid valve closes leaving the
waste liquid in the vacuum accumulator to be removed by the waste pump. The vacuum accumulator has a level sensor, which
monitors liquid levels in the event that the waste pump fails. If the level sensor is tripped, an error message is generated and the
system will stop running until the issue is rectified. The vacuum accumulator has a drain valve attached and the waste liquid is then
pumped out by a waste pump into either the on-board liquid waste container, or else to the laboratory floor drain. The vacuum filter
has a drying valve attached for removal of condensate build-up. This is opened during the Daily Maintenance procedure. The
vacuum pump draws air through this valve and through the filter to dry any moisture.
Liquid Waste
Liquid waste is first collected in the vacuum accumulator. The i1000SR system software monitors the waste accumulation and
when 225 milliliters of liquid waste accumulates, the waste pump is activated. The waste pump is a peristaltic pump driven by a 36
volt DC stepper motor. It will pump the liquid waste, through the lower waste manifold, to either the onboard waste container or to
an external drain. The on-board waste container has a weight platform sensor that triggers a message to alert the operator that the
on-board waste must be emptied, when approximately 10 liters of liquid waste has collected. There is also a waste pump pressure
switch in-line between the waste pump and the liquid waste container. Error 5307 "liquid waste high pressure condition detected"
will be generated if a high pressure condition is detected by this pressure switch that lasts for 15 minutes. This pressure switch
allows the i1000SR system to keep running while the on-board liquid waste container is removed for emptying. Once this error
occurs, if the liquid waste container has not been reconnected by the time 225 mls of waste has collected in the vacuum
accumulator, then the system will go to Stopped with an error condition. The waste switch will also detect an over-pressure
condition caused by a waste tubing blockage, or waste container sensor failure (causing the waste container to fill to capacity), but
only when the waste pump activates to evacuate the vacuum accumulator.
Condensate generated by the reagent cooler is also removed by the waste pump, through the liquid waste system. When the
processing module is first powered on and initialized, the waste pump will run for two minutes to evacuate any cooler condensate
that has collected, moving this liquid from the cooler through the lower waste manifold to either the onboard liquid waste container
or an external waste drain. A small in-line filter is located between the cooler and the lower waste manifold, and protects the
manifold valve from blockage due to particulate matter in the condensate. Approximately every three hours, the system software
will also run the waste pump for about one minute to evacuate any cooler condensate that has collected. This will occur in any
system state, including Stopped status.
Waste Drawer
Used RVs are discarded from the process path to the solid waste container. Both the liquid and solid waste containers sit on a
slide-out platform called the waste drawer, with the liquid waste container in front. Sitting beneath the waste drawer is the waste
pan. An optical sensor is mounted in the wall of the rear fluidics area, and detects the presence of the solid waste container. This
container can be removed for emptying during assay processing; however this will cause RVs to drop from the process path and
collect in the waste pan. The system software will allow 25 RVs to be discarded in this way, while the solid waste container is
being emptied. If the container has not been replaced when 25 RVs have been discarded, the system will go to Scheduled Pause
with error 2021 "solid waste pan full".
The liquid waste container sits on a weighted platform mounted to the waste drawer, with a cantilevered arm and magnet attached.
The magnet lines up with a magnetic sensor mounted to the rear wall of the waste area. As the liquid waste container gradually
fills with liquid waste, the weight of the container will push down on the weighted platform, which in turn lifts the arm and magnet
up and away from the magnetic sensor. When approximately 10 liters of liquid waste has collected, this magnet will have moved
sufficiently away from the sensor to cause a sensor state change. This in turn generates error 2017 "liquid waste inventory full,
empty the container".
It should also be noted that if the waste drawer is not completely closed, the arm and magnet may also be separated from the
magnetic sensor, which will also generate the same error 2017 "liquid waste inventory full, empty the container".
Lower Waste Manifold
The lower waste manifold is mounted to the left side wall of the lower fluidics bay, at the back of the instrument. It has two
solenoid valves with 2 inlet waste liquid lines, and one outlet waste line that connects directly to the peristaltic waste pump. One
solenoid valve opens to drain the reagent cooler condensate. The other opens to remove liquid in the vacuum accumulator. Waste
liquid flowing through this manifold is directed to either the on-board liquid waste container, or an external floor drain, through the
action of the peristaltic waste pump.
Buffer Transfer Assembly
A transfer pump is used to load buffer from the preparation container, into the on-board buffer reservoir. Transfer tubing is
connected to an inlet fitting situated on the front of the i1000SR instrument. A command through the user interface initiates the
transfer pump operation. A buffer filter between the pump and the on-board reservoir ensures the buffer solution is clean. An air
detect sensor located between the inlet and the transfer pump monitors buffer flow and will stop the transfer pump operation when
air is detected, indicating that the preparation container is empty. A level sensor in the on-board reservoir also detects when the
full position is reached, and stops the transfer pump operation before the reservoir can overflow. The transfer pump is 24DC.
i1000SR Pumps
There are a number of different pumps on the i1000SR system:
Pump Pump Power Logic

Function Specifications
Name Type Control Control
Buffer FMI Move buffer from onboard 36 volt DC stepper motor, displacement 200 µl / rev. (100 Motor CMIA
Pump double- reservoir to pipettor µl/head) Max flow rate 2.5ml / sec. Driver optics
headed syringe and pipettor #1 board
probe (home
I/O)
Indexer
#1
(motor
limit
and
home
sensor)
LLS
board
(stop)
Washzone FMI Move buffer from onboard 36 volt DC stepper motor, displacement 100 µl / rev. (50 Motor CMIA
Pump double- reservoir to washzone µl/head) Flow rate 0.5 ml / sec. Driver optics
headed manifold and valves #2 board
(home
I/O)
Indexer
#2
(motor
limit
and
home
sensor)
Trigger FMI Move trigger reagent from 36 volt DC stepper motor, displacement 200 µl / rev. (100 Motor CMIA
Pump double- on-board reservoir to µl/head) Flow rate 0.8 ml / sec. Driver optics
headed trigger dispense manifold #2 board
and valves (home
I/O)
Indexer
#2
(motor
limit
and
home
sensor)
Pre- FMI Move pre-trigger reagent 36 volt DC stepper motor, displacement 100 µl / rev. (100 Motor CMIA
trigger single- from on-board reservoir µl/head) Flow rate 0.4 ml / sec. Driver optics
Pump headed to pre-trigger dispense #2 board
manifold and valves (home
I/O)
Indexer
#2
(motor
limit
and
home
sensor)
Buffer DC motor Move buffer from 24v DC - brush DC motor; 13.6 liters / minute max flow Heater CPU
Transfer preparation container to rate. Normally will pump 10 liters buffer in less than 3 Cooler board
Pump on-board reservoir minutes. Flow is NOT reversed if motor rotation reversed Board (on/off)
- no reverse pump out procedure.
Vacuum BLDC Create vacuum in 24v DC - brushless DC motor, diaphragm pump Heater CPU
Pump motor vacuum accumulator Cooler board
Board (on/off)
Waste Peristaltic Move waste from 36v DC - flow rate of 150 ml / minute against accumulator Heater CPU
Pump stepper accumulator to external vacuum Cooler board
motor waste drain or on-board Board (on/off)
liquid waste reservoir
FMI Pump Home Sensors
The FMI buffer pump, wash zone pump, trigger pump and pre-trigger pump all have their home sensor outputs routed to both the
CMIA Optics Board and an Indexer Board. Using two boards for the pump home sensor analysis allows motor step loss detection
on these pump motors that do not have mechanical hard stops.
The Indexer Board uses the home sensor signal from the pump as part of its embedded motor control home sensor input. This
input allows the motor controller to properly handle all of the pump motor homing operations, and to keep an absolute reference
position for that pump.
The CMIA Optics Board uses the home sensor signal from the pump as a general-purpose digital input. This input causes the
generation of an "interrupt" signal whenever the home sensor changes from one state to another. When a pump motor operates, its
home sensor state will change at least once during a single rotation of that motor. Subsequently, when a motor move command is
sent to a specific pump motor, the embedded software on the Module Controller Board keeps track of how many times a home
sensor interrupt occurs on the CMIA Optics Board. This information is then used by the embedded software on the Controller
Board to provide a means of detecting a motor step loss condition on that motor.
A motor step loss condition will be detected if the proper number of interrupts from the CMIA Optics Board does not occur for a
motor move request. For example, a pump may be commanded to move 720 degrees, or 2 motor shaft rotations. If there are 2
home sensor state changes and thus 2 interrupts generated per shaft rotation for that pump, the CMIA Optics Board would expect
to receive 4 interrupts in total for that move command. If less than 4 interrupts are received, the Module Controller Board
determines that a motor step loss has occurred.
Mechanisms that are linear in nature (i.e. that have mechanical hard stops at each end of their travel) do not require this additional
level of step loss detection because the Indexer Board firmware provides its own algorithms for detecting motor step loss
conditions. Only mechanisms such as pumps and carousels that are rotational in nature (i.e. have no mechanical hard stops),
require some additional level of step loss detection capability. Some of these mechanisms use an incremental encoder (e.g. the
Process Path and Reagent Carousel motors) to provide the necessary step loss detection. However the pump motors use this dual
home sensor signal routing method for motor step loss detection.
Liquid Level Sense and Pressure Monitoring
Overview
The Architect i1000SR system uses liquid level sensing and pressure monitoring to detect liquid and ensure that the aspiration of
sample and reagent liquids occurs correctly in the assay reaction sequence. The liquid level sense hardware is used to detect
when the pipettor probe makes contact with liquid, while the pressure monitoring hardware determines that the correct volume of
liquid is aspirated and that clots, bubbles or other types of interference do not interrupt the liquid aspiration. The liquid level sense
(LLS) board enables the Architect i1000SR system's pipettor to detect fluid and monitor the quality of an aspiration by using
features that detect signals transmitted from the probe and monitoring the pressure in the fluid lines during aspiration.
Liquid Level Sense Subsystem
During aspirations, the LLS board sends commands to stop the Z motion of the pipettor when fluid is detected. The detection
system is comprised of a conductive probe, low frequency data acquisition circuit boards, cables, and amplified antennas. The LLS
board develops a frequency that is routed to and transmitted from the pipettor probe and is received by amplified antennas that are
placed in aspiration locations. There is no level sense monitoring during the dispense process.
The Architect i1000SR LLS circuit uses a signal frequency at 100 KHz.
The LLS circuit has three detection modes of operation
LLS mode with Z stop (normal operation)

LLS mode with theta / Z stop (Theta Train operation)
Ground Mode with Z and theta stop (ground feature train operation)
Normal Aspiration Mode
During a normal aspiration process, the robotics positions the probe over a vessel of fluid. As the pipettor lowers the probe, the
frequency transmitted from the probe is received by the antenna. When the probe contacts fluid the signal received by the antenna
increases abruptly and the change in amplitude and rate of change are then analyzed to determine if fluid has been contacted.
Once fluid is contacted, the downward movement (Z axis) of the pipettor stops. The pipettor then moves down and through fluid
surface to the desired in-depth. During aspiration, as the syringe draws fluid from the vessel, the pipettor Z axis moves the probe
down to keep the probe at the desired in-depth. During this mode, the LLS system also monitors for error conditions such as lost
LLS during aspiration, board failures or Z "probe crash" limit actuation. If the probe contacts a solid object, the movement of the
probe is detected by the Z Limit optical sensor board located at the end of the arm.
Aspiration and Dispense Process
1. Pipettor robotics position the probe over the required aspiration location. The z-limit circuitry is enabled and the pipettor
drives the probe down to a safe "start" position over the liquid vessel.
2. The LLS circuitry is enabled and the probe continues in a downward Z motion until fluid contact occurs. At fluid contact, a
fluid LLS sense signal is generated, a limit signal is sent to the indexer board and the Z motion is halted.
3. The syringe motor profile is sent to the PM processor, allowing the PM processor to determine appropriate volume aspiration
parameters for the volume of liquid being aspirated. The probe is then driven slowly into the liquid to a specified "in depth".
4. The pressure-monitoring circuitry is activated and the probe continues to drive into the liquid while the syringe aspiration
cycle occurs. During this time, liquid contact is monitored by the LLS circuitry.
5. Upon completion of aspiration cycle, the system checks the "liquid contact broken" status to verify that there was no loss of
liquid contact. The pipettor robotics then moves the probe out of the liquid.
6. The PM processor analyzes the pressure transducer data, determines the PM status for the aspiration, generates an
interrupt and reports the PM status to the system.
7. Pipettor robotics positions the probe over the required dispense location and drives the probe down to the specified
dispense height position.
8. The dispense cycle occurs. There is no PM or LLS monitoring used for the dispense cycle.
9. Once the dispense process completes, pipettor robotics positions the probe at the wash cup and the probe wash cycle
occurs.
10. Once probe washing has completed, the probe is raised to the correct z-clear height.
Probe Calibration
The LLS hardware is designed to require no mechanical adjustments. 2 types of calibration process are used during the pipettor
robocal:
Theta / z train mode - This is used to train the pipettor probe to the reagent carousel and the load platform (sample carrier).
The probe is lowered and moved toward the target in the left/right direction. When the target is touched, the signal
increases, which halts the pipettor movement.
Theta / z ground mode - This is used to train the pipettor probe to the washcup and process path. These assemblies are
physically connected together and subsequently there is only one target for both assemblies. When the probe touches the
grounded target, the signal decreases suddenly. This signal loss is detected and the pipettor movement halted.
After detecting each target, the specific mechanical offsets are saved in a system file. These system file parameters are loaded
during system initialization and assure that the pipettor is calibrated to the system.
Pressure Monitoring Subsystem
The pressure monitoring (PM) system monitors the aspiration of liquid for abnormalities including serum clots, clogged probes,
bubbles, foam and tubing leaks. The system is comprised of a pressure transducer (PT), pressure monitoring circuitry contained on
the pipettor board, and cables. Pressure monitoring is accomplished by placing a PT in the fluid line between the syringe and
probe. During liquid aspiration, the full pressure profile is measured and analyzed for conformance to a normal pattern. If an
abnormality is detected, an aspiration error will be generated for that aspiration cycle. Pressure monitoring is not performed on the
dispense cycle. The PM hardware is designed to require no adjustments.
The following hardware components are used in the LLS and PM subsystems:
Liquid Level Sense Board - located in card cage

Pipettor Board mounted to the pipettor assembly
Receiver antennas
Conductive pipettor probe
Signal cables
Pressure monitor (transducer) - located in-line between syringe and probe
LLS and PM LLS and PM

LLS Antenna Engineering Schematic 5A_9042.PDF
Pipettor Board Engineering Schematic 5A_9040.PDF
On the i1000SR instrument, the LLS signal is transmitted from the pipettor probe at a frequency of 100 KHz. There are signals on
the backplane, which interface to the LLS/PM Controller and set the backplane communication address and operating mode of the
LLS/PM controller, including the proper operating frequency for the LLS oscillator and PM interrupt. The Field-Programmable Gate
Arrays (FPGA) located on the board performs the frequency selection. The FPGA outputs the correct frequency 50% duty cycle
TTL signal to the low pass filter. The low pass filter strips the higher order harmonics from the TTL signal and the resulting signal
is an approximate sine wave at the correct frequency. The signal is fed to the variable gain transmit amplifier and also to a
multiplier circuit. This variable gain transmit amplifier is controlled through system software parameters. The output signal from the
transmit amplifier is connected to the pipettor probe.
When the probe contacts a conductive fluid, the signal received by the antenna increases which results in a subsequent increase
in the signal from the antenna. The antenna signal is fed into a variable gain receiver amplifier, which can be controlled by
software, but is set to the maximum gain. The signal is then fed to one input of a multiplier. The other input to the multiplier is from
a local oscillator on the LLS/PM controller board. The multiplier is used to discriminate the low level LLS signal from noise, which
may be present on the received LLS signal. The output signal of the multiplier when viewed on an oscilloscope is the combination
of a DC offset and a signal that is two times the frequency of the transmit signal. The low pass filter removes this 2 X transmit
signal frequency component. This filtered output is then input to an A/D converter where it is digitized. The digital signal is then fed
into the Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
In simplest terms, the algorithm calculates the difference in LLS signal ADC readings and compares the difference to a threshold
set in the LLS.DAT system file. The DSP waits for a set number of consecutive readings to discriminate between a good liquid
sense and a random event. When a good liquid sense is detected, a limit signal is sent to the appropriate motor indexer board to
stop Z-axis motion for the pipettor.
Note
The LLS system is not used during dispense operations.
Note
LLS status and motor positions are saved in the system LLS log file for use in troubleshooting.
Each type of fluid vessel has a minimum volume at which the LLS system is able to detect fluid.
Vessel Minimum Volume
Sample Tube Dead volume of 0.3 inch above tube bottom or separator
Sample Cup 50 µl
Reaction Vessel 50 µl
Conjugate Bottle 0.770 ml dead volume
Microparticle Bottle 1.5ml dead volume
Assay Specific Diluent Bottle 5.0 ml dead volume
During the aspiration cycle, the pressure monitoring subsystem measures and analyzes the pressure response in order to detect
and communicate aspiration errors. The pressure measurements are obtained by placing a pressure monitor in the fluid line
between the syringe and the probe. The pressure monitoring circuitry on the pipettor board is used to condition and digitize the
signal from the pressure monitor. The digital signal is then sent to the card cage Liquid Level Sense Board for analysis. As an
aspiration begins, the syringe velocity, acceleration, and motor steps are communicated to the PM processor on the LLS/PM
Controller board. Given this information, the pressure profile is analyzed for abnormalities compared to the expected values.
rights reserved.
Power Supply and Distribution
Overview
The i1000SR power supply provides DC voltages to various parts of the instrument in order to operate fans, motors, solenoids, the
reagent cooler and the system electronics. It converts an AC input voltage to 6 stable DC voltages that are routed to the instrument
subsystems. The input voltage can be in the range 110 - 240 VAC and 47 - 63 Hz. There are no AC voltages used in the i1000SR
instrument.
The Architect i1000SR power supply is a self-contained unit within an EMI enclosure. It is an auto-selecting power supply so no
further voltage configuration is required. The main power switch is a 20 amp circuit breaker. The main power input is a type
IEC320 C19 connector. The enclosure contains a cooling fan, which draws air in through the front of the power supply, expelling it
out through the fan enclosure at the back. This fan is the only field-replaceable part other than the entire power supply. There are
no field-replaceable fuses in the power supply. The power supply has a direct connection to the card cage backplane; no extra
cabling is required to connect the two assemblies.
Status LEDs display voltage status information on the Power Supply.
Power Supply Functional Schematic and LEDs

Power Supply Input Panel
The power supply consists of the following functional units:
AC input power module -The incoming mains power can be in the range 110 - 240 VAC ±10% and 47 - 63 Hz, and is
automatically selected by the power supply circuitry. The AC input circuitry has EMI filtering and both EFT (electrical fast
transient) and surge protection. The EMI filter prevents noise and switching transients generated by the power supply
through the mains AC interaction. EFT and surge protection isolate the power supply outputs from AC line disturbances
through a transient suppression network.
DC power converters -The AC input voltage is routed through an EMI filter to the 6 Power-Factor-Corrected (PFC) AC-DC
converters. These converters step down the voltage using switching regulators and rectify it to produce a stable, specific DC
output, which is then distributed to the instrument systems via a direct connection with the card cage backplane. Power
Factor Correction is implemented to minimize harmonic emissions to acceptable levels. All DC outputs are short-circuit
protected and are isolated from the chassis ground.
Power Supply Error Monitoring
The power supply verifies proper function through monitoring several signals. The following four signals are monitored for error
conditions by the module controller:
AC Power Fail
Over-temperature
Under-voltage
Over-voltage
The AC Power Fail signal indicates that AC power is insufficient to maintain regulation of DC outputs. The Over-temperature signal
indicates cooling fan failure, or excessive AC-DC converter temperatures. The Under-voltage signal indicates under-voltage
conditions for either the DC outputs or AC input voltage. The Over-voltage signal indicates over-voltage conditions on the DC
outputs or the AC input. System over-current protection is provided by a circuit breaker that also serves as the main power switch.
The power supply will also run in "Maintenance Mode". In this mode the +36Vdc output is disabled so field personnel can safely
unplug solenoids and stepper motors without powering down the instrument. Maintenance Mode is enabled by typing the CLI
commend DIO 37 SET 1 and is disabled via the command DIO 37 SET 0.
Power Supply - DC Outputs
Total
Full Load Full Load Power
DC Load Voltage(DC) Regulation
Current (Amps) (Watts)
(VDC)
Card Cage Backplane and Logic Boards +5 ±0.10 12 60

Distribution Boards throughout system
Distribution Boards throughout system +12 -0.36 to +0.96 4 48

Analog electronics on LLS Bd, Pipettor Bd and
Sample Antenna Bd,
Card Cage Logic Boards
LLS Sample Antenna Board - 12 -0.96 to +0.36 3 36
Reagent Cooler +17.5 ±0.875 31 542.5
Cooling Fans and Heaters +24 ±1.20 15 360

Vacuum Pump
Transfer Pump
Card Cage Backplane -Power Boards 36 ±0.36 12 432

Stepper Motors
Solenoids
FMI Pumps
Waste Pump
rights reserved.
Card Cage
Overview
The i1000SR card cage assembly houses the system control (logic) and driver (power) printed circuit boards (PCB's). The main
instrument Power Supply connects to the card cage backplane through a single direct connector, and supplies the various DC
voltages to the card cage PCB's. The card cage PCB's then supply power and logic signals to the different system sub assemblies
and components. These signals are carried by cables that interface to the card cage PCB's through the card cage backplane. The
backplane has additional fuses for protection of the various DC loads.
Card Cage Boards
The table below describes the printed circuit boards contained within the card cage, along with their basic functionality
Location Board Name Function Type
Indexer Motor control Logic

Monitors home sensor signals (provides motor position)
Monitors motor encoder signals (monitors motor movement)
Communicates with motor driver and controller boards
LLS / PM Sets transmitting frequency for pipettor probe Logic

Processes data from LLS antennae
Processes data from PM transducer
CMIA Optics Controls high voltage to optics PMT Logic

Upper
Amplifies output from CMIA optics and converts optics signal to digital signal
Monitors other sensor outputs for different system components
Temperature Provides heater control instructions for heater power, to the Heater Cooler PCB Logic
Controller Monitors feedback from heater thermistors
Module Controller CPU for processing module and RSH Logic

Controls all instrument functions and communicates with other card cage boards, system
devices and the SCC
Motor Driver Provides power to system motors Power

Receives motor control signals from indexer boards
Heater Cooler Provides power to system heaters, reagent cooler and some pumps Power
Lower
Receives heater control signals from temperature controller board
DC Driver I/O Provides power to energize solenoids, valves and vortexers Power
Minimum Board Configuration
The minimum board configuration required to perform an instrument boot-up and initialization to the snapshot screen is:
Module Controller and CMIA Optics boards.
The system will boot-up with just the module controller but will have numerous errors.
Occasionally some systems fail to complete the boot sequence, due to a board failure or error. This is because some board failures
affect the card cage, preventing the system from completing a normal initialization. The minimum board configuration can assist in
diagnosing the cause of boot-up failures.
Distribution Boards
The card cage power and logic signals are routed through cables, from the back plane, to four distribution boards throughout the
instrument. Additional cables then route these signals from the distribution boards to the sub assemblies and components.
The four distribution boards on the Architect i1000SR are:

RSH Distribution Board
In addition both the Carrier Transport and Pipettor Assemblies have circuit boards that interface power and logic signals.
Card Cage Backplane

Card Cage Board Location
Card Cage Fuses

rights reserved.
Process Path
Overview
The Architect i1000SR process path provides the incubated environment for the reaction process to occur. Reaction vessels
containing sample and reagent are held in a disk that sits on top of a circular, heated track. This disk rotates in a counter-
clockwise direction, moving one position every 18 seconds. The process path provides access points for various sub assemblies to
perform steps involved in the assay sequence and reaction process. These include loading the RV into the path, liquid aspiration
and dispense locations, mixing (vortexing) locations, a reaction mixture washing location, the optics reading location and unloading
the RVs to waste.
The following main hardware components are used in the Process Path sub-assembly:
Process Path
Process Path Disk
Process Path Cover
Process Path Motor
Card Cage Boards (Module Controller, Stepper Driver, Indexer, DC Driver I/O)
Processing Center Processing Center

Processing Center Distribution Board Processing Center Distribution Board
Processing Center Engineering Schematic 5A_9037.PDF
Process Path
The process path is a machined circular assembly that has two channels or tracks, which enclose the RV body. The process path
controls the incubation via heaters, which are mounted to the underside of the assembly. Thermistors for measuring the process
path temperature are embedded in the assembly. Two permanent magnets are mounted in the process path, at the optics read and
wash zone locations, and are used for microparticle capture when the RVs are positioned in front of these locations.
Process Path Disk
The process path disk supports the RVs as they sit in the process path. The disk indexes one RV position (832 steps) every 18
seconds, in a counter-clockwise direction, guiding the RVs as they are moved to the various locations. The process path motor
assembly rotates the disk. The disk has 23 RV positions. An optical home sensor is used as an absolute reference point during the
process path disk homing operation, and the home reference can be at any one of the 23 RV locations. The home sensor uses the
edge of the RV slot in the disk to monitor the disk position.
Process Path Cover
The process path cover sits over the disk, mounted to the process path assembly. It provides a mounting platform for the various
sub-assemblies that are attached to the path. The cover also acts to block stray light during the optics read process and assists in
maintaining the heated environment for RV incubation.
Process Path Motor
The process path disk is rotated by a 36VDC stepper motor. The motor is encoded so that each RV position has a "home" position.
The process path motor encoder monitors the disk rotation, and monitors for step-loss errors. Signals to and from the process path
motor and encoder route through the processing center distribution board. The process path motor is driven by motor driver board
#1, and encoder signals return to indexer board #1. The process path home sensor signal also returns to indexer board #1 via the
processing center distribution board.
Assay-Processing Sub-Assemblies
The following sub-assemblies are attached to the process path, and are used in the assay-processing sequence:
Vortexers (VTX)
Wash zone inlet diverter
Wash zone outlet diverter
RV unloader
RV unload diverter
Process Path Sub-Assemblies
In addition, the following sub-assemblies interface with the process path. These are covered in their relevant overview sections:
Optics read station (refer to overview section - CMIA Optics)

Wash zone assembly (refer to overview section - Fluidics and vacuum)
Process path LLS antennae (refer to overview section - Liquid level Sense)
RV loader (refer to overview section - Reaction Vessel Loader)
Heaters and thermistors (refer to overview section - Temperature and WAM)
Vortexers
Two vortexers are mounted to the process path:
Vortexer 1 is mounted to the inside of the process path and mixes the RV after sample and reagent have been dispensed,
at RV position 3, before the incubation period commences.
Vortexer 2 is mounted on the outside of the path and mixes the RV after pre-trigger solution has been added, prior to the
addition of trigger solution and the optics read process.
The vortexer motors are powered by 36VDC supplied by the DC Driver I/O board. The vortexer up/down sensor signals return to
the DC Driver I/O board. All power and sensor signals are routed through the processing center distribution board.
Wash Zone Inlet Diverter
This assembly diverts the RV into the wash zone path or keeps the RV traveling along the inner path. The diverter action is
solenoid controlled and powered by 36VDC from the DC Driver I/O board. The "on" sensor signal returns to the module controller
board while the "off" sensor signal returns to the CMIA optics board. All power and sensor signals are routed through the
Wash Zone Outlet Diverter
This assembly diverts the RV out from the wash zone path back into the inner path, or keeps the RV traveling along the outer
path. The diverter action is solenoid controlled and powered by 36VDC from the DC Driver I/O board. The "on" sensor signal
returns to the module controller board while the "off" sensor signal returns to the CMIA optics board. All power and sensor signals
are routed through the processing center distribution board.
Unloader
This is a molded plug that acts as a passive diverter, channeling the RV to the solid waste opening. The RV is unloaded from the
outer track to the solid waste container, following the optics read process. It can be removed and reinserted upside down, allowing
RVs to bypass the waste unload and continue in the process path track. This is required during some M&D procedures. An optical
sensor positioned in the process path ensures that the unloader is in position; otherwise the system will not run. The sensor signal
returns to the CMIA optics board via the processing center distribution board.
Unload Diverter
This assembly unloads RVs used for pretreatment or sample dilutions, from the inner track to the solid waste container. It is used
in all pre-treatment protocols and some sample dilution assay protocols. The diverter action is solenoid controlled and powered by
36VDC from the DC Driver I/O board. The "on" sensor signal returns to the module controller board while the "off" sensor signal
returns to the CMIA optics board. All power and sensor signals are routed through the processing center distribution board.
rights reserved.
Assay Pipetting Protocols
Overview
The Architect i1000SR supports a number of different assay pipetting protocols, which have different process path reaction
sequences. These protocols are used for the processing of different assays. For a complete description of the assay pipetting
protocols, please refer to the Operations Manual, section 3. For a listing of the assay protocol type used by each Architect system
assay, please refer to the GSS website and the iSystem Assay Quick Reference Guide.
Protocols
Below is a summary of the five main assay pipetting protocols used on the Architect i1000SR system.
Protocol: One Step 25
Process Path Position Outer

Activity Process Path Position Inner Track
Track
Sample dispense RV 1
Microparticle and conjugate dispense RV 2
Vortex RV 3 - vortexer #1
Incubation 25 minute incubation - 3 revolutions of process

path
Diversion of RV WZ inlet diverter directs RV to outer track (into the

wash zone track)
RV washing Wash zone
Pre-trigger dispense and vortexing Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and

vortexer #2
Background read / trigger dispense and Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and

activated read CMIA optics
RV unloading Unloader
Protocol: Two Step 18-4
Activity Process Path Position Inner Track Process Path Position Outer Track
Microparticle dispense RV 2
Incubation 18 minute incubation - 2 revolutions of

process path
Diversion of RV WZ inlet diverter directs RV to outer track

(into the washzone track)
RV washing (first) Wash zone
Diversion of RV WZ outlet diverter directs RV to inner track

(out of the wash zone track)
Conjugate dispense RV 2
Incubation 4 minute incubation

(into the wash zone track)
RV washing (second) Wash zone
Pre-trigger dispense and vortexing Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and vortexer #2
Background read / trigger Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and CMIA optics

dispense and activated read
Protocol: STAT Assay Two Step 4-4
Activity Process Path Position Inner Track Process Path Position Outer Track
Microparticle dispense RV 2

(into the washzone track)
RV washing (first) Wash zone
Diversion of RV WZ outlet diverter directs RV to inner track

(out of the wash zone track)
Conjugate dispense RV 2

(into the wash zone track)
RV washing (second) Wash zone
Pre-trigger dispense and vortexing Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and vortexer #2
Background read / trigger Pre-trigger/trigger manifold and CMIA optics

dispense and activated read
Protocol: Pretreatment 7
Process Path Position

Outer Track
Pretreatment reagent dispense RV 2
Incubation 7 minute incubation - 1 revolution of process path
Transfer of pretreatment mixture Pretreatment RV is at RV position 2 - mixture transferred into

into new RV new RV at RV position 1
1-step or 2-step protocol RV 1

commences
RV unloading of pretreatment RV Unload Diverter
Protocol: Pretreatment 7-7

Outer Track

#1

RV at position 1 is indexed to
position 2

#2

1-step or 2-step protocol RV 1

commences
RV unloading of pretreatment Unload diverter

RVs x 2
rights reserved.
Reaction Vessel Loader
Overview
The RV Loader provides onboard storage for the reaction vessels (RVs) orients the RVs and inserts the RVs into the inner track
on the process path.
RV Loader subsystem consists of:
Upper Hopper
Lower Hopper
RV Picker and Motor
RV Loader Chute
Sensors
Upper Hopper
The upper hopper is a staging hopper section that can hold up to 125 RVs. It is designed so that the RVs can be poured into this
hopper through the RV hopper cover in the processing center cover. Between the upper and lower hopper is a solenoid driven
door.
Lower Hopper
The lower hopper is the main RV storage area and can hold up to 175 RVs in any orientation. The lower hopper has an infrared
sensor that will detect when the RV inventory falls below 50 (approximately). When this occurs, a signal is sent to the SCC. The
Architect software also tracks RV usage and monitors inventory, and when needed, actuates the RV hopper door solenoid, allowing
the RVs stored in the upper hopper to fall through into the lower hopper.
RV Picker
The RV picker has three fingers for picking and orientating the RV out of the RV inventory. A stepper motor rotates the picker.
Each finger is aligned with a slot in the home sensor flag. The motor power setting causes the picker assembly to vibrate as it
rotates - this assists in mixing the RVs which increases the efficiency of the picker fingers engaging with and picking up the
individual RV's. An RV remover brush located on the side of the RV hopper, just before the load chute entrance, will push into
place any RVs not fully seated on the picker finger as the picker assembly rotates.
RV Loader Chute
The RV loader chute guides the RV from the loader assembly and drops it into the process path track. One end engages at the top
of the hopper. The RV picker rotates with RVs trapped on the three fingers; at the top of the picker rotation, the RV is dropped into
the top of the chute. The loader chute lower opening interacts with the process path at the RV insertion point, allowing the RV to
fall cleanly into place in the process path disk. The loader chute pivots and can be folded up against the side of the RV loader
assembly, for ease of removal and replacement.
RV Picked Sensor
The RV picked sensor sits at the top of the loader at the opening to the RV loader chute. When the RV picker drops an RV into
the loader chute, the RV moves an arm, which interrupts an optical sensor, telling the system that an RV was successfully picked
up. During operation the picker is homed and the RV picked sensor is checked for presence of an RV. After the process path is
loaded with 23 RV's, one RV is staged at the RV picked sensor, ready for the next RV load when required. A hall effect (micro
switch) sensor also sits in the process path one position down from the insertion point, confirming the successful placement of an
RV in the path.
RV Loader
rights reserved.
Note
Refer to the c4000 Service and Support Manual for information regarding the ci4100 integrated system.
Overview
The ARCHITECT i1000SR RSH (Robotic Sample Handler) is the interface through which reagents are loaded on the reagent
carousel, and samples are presented to the system for identification, aspiration and processing. The operator places reagents or
samples into carriers, which are inserted on the load unload platform. The load unload platform contains 13 sections. The carrier
transport picks carriers from the load unload platform sections, positions them at the barcode reader for barcode label identification,
and then places the reagent carriers on the reagent carousel, and the sample carriers on the aspiration platform for sample
processing.
The following main hardware components are used in the RSH sub-assembly:
Load Unload Platform

Carrier Transport
Left and Right Supports
Aspiration Platform
Bottle Rotator
Barcode Reader
Priority and Standard Load Unload Boards
Card Cage Boards (Module Controller, CMIA Optics, Motor Driver, Indexer)
Load Unload Platform
Operators load sample and reagent carriers on the load unload platform, which positions each carrier for transporting by the carrier
transport. The base of the load unload platform is called the section tray, and is separated into 13 sections by partitions. Each
section accommodates either a sample or a reagent carrier and can distinguish between the two carrier types. In the base of each
section tray is the carrier present flag, which interacts with a set of sensors mounted on the load unload sensor board. When a
carrier is inserted into a section, the carrier present flag is actuated and trips these sensors, indicating the presence and type of the
carrier. Light indicators attached to the load unload sensor board indicate the state of that particular section to the operator.
The load unload sensor board is actually 2 sensor boards linked using a single connector. These two boards mount to the front of
the load unload platform, behind a cover. They are held in place by three locating features and leaf springs. The first sensor board
is the priority load unload board while the second board is the standard load unload board. LEDs on the load unload sensor board
indicate carrier status. Green LEDs indicate the section is available or completed, while amber LEDs indicate a processing state.
Blue LEDs indicate that the section is a priority section. Up to seven sections can be configured for priority processing.
The cable chain guide is the structure located behind the load unload platform. It provides a guide for the movement of the carrier
transport flex cable, and protects the load unload carrier detection system from damage through flex cable movement. It also
provides support for the load unload platform.
Left and Right Supports
The left and right supports provide the mounting structure for the load unload platform. The left support also provides the mounting
structure for the bottle rotator, the barcode reader and the RSH distribution board.
Aspiration Platform
The aspiration platform sits behind the load unload platform and in front of the pipettor and washcup. It is the location at which the
sample carrier is placed for sample aspiration.
Carrier Transport
The carrier transport is a robotic device that interacts with the load unload platform, the aspiration platform and the reagent
carousel. The carrier transport assembly moves along the length of the load unload platform, riding on a linear rail guide. It
interacts with each section to pick up the sample or reagent carrier, and then places that carrier on the aspiration platform (sample)
or on the reagent carousel (reagent). It also returns sample carriers and empty reagent kits to the load unload platform for
unloading. The carrier transport consists of the following major components:
Carrier Transport Board: printed circuit board mounted to the carrier transport frame that interfaces all motor and sensor
signals
Theta Shaft with Motor: moves carriers in theta axis during pick and place operations
Carrier Transport Arm: attaches to theta shaft, supporting and retaining the carrier during pick and place operations
Carrier Transport Arm Sensor: sensor in carrier transport arm that detects presence of a carrier
Lifter with Leadscrew and Motor: attaches to the carrier transport arm and moves carriers in the Z (vertical) direction, raising
and lowering carriers during pick and place operations
X-axis Motor: drives the carrier transport along the rail guide in the x axis
Flex Cable: cable that carries the control and power signal information between the carrier transport board and the RSH
distribution board.
Bottle Rotator
The bottle rotator mounts to the left support. It is a rotating disk that engages with the reagent carrier drive cog, spinning the
microparticle bottle during the barcode scanning process.
Bar Code Reader
The bar code reader mounts to the left support and scans reagent bar codes, sample carrier ID bar codes and sample ID bar
codes.
The RSH distribution board is mounted to the left support, behind a protective cover. It provides the interface circuitry for all of the
RSH sensors and motors, the bar code reader, the reagent bottle rotator and the ambient temperature thermistor.
Operational Description
Section Indicator Status
Indicates the status of sample processing and when samples can be accessed.
Indicators off - no sample or reagent carriers are loaded in the section.

Green (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are loaded, but processing has not begun. Samples can be accessed.
Amber (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are processing and cannot be accessed.
Green (blinking) - processing is complete and sample or reagent carriers can be accessed.
Amber (blinking) - unloading a reagent carrier is in process so this section is unavailable for loading carriers.
Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred. Carriers can be accessed.
Note
If tests for a sample are added or rerun before it is unloaded, the indicator for the section changes back to amber
while the sample is re-aspirated.
Carrier Detection
The load unload platform contains a carrier detection sensor system that can detect the presence of a carrier, and can differentiate
between a sample and a reagent carrier. Each section of the load/unload platform has a sensor arm (carrier present flag) recessed
in the base of the section tray. This sensor arm is spring loaded and in the resting state, remains in the raised position. When a
carrier is inserted into that section, the carrier presses down on the carrier present flag which then interrupts a set of optical
sensors.
There are 2 optical sensors in a staggered position, which can distinguish 4 states:
State 1 - No carrier inserted

State 2 - Partial carrier inserted - error status
State 3 - Sample carrier fully inserted
State 4 - Reagent carrier fully inserted
Sample and reagent carriers are differentiated through their different widths.
The narrower sample carrier presses down on the front section of the carrier present flag which drives the carrier present flag down
to interrupt both optical sensors.
The reagent carrier is wider and rides up on a ridge on the section tray. When sitting on this ridge, the reagent carrier presses
down on an extra sensor arm feature, which drives the carrier present flag down completely through the first optical sensor and
leaving it interrupting only the second optical sensor.
RSH Sample Processing
Samples, in primary tubes or sample cups, are placed in sample carriers. The sample carriers are then inserted into sections on
the load unload platform. Carriers in the priority sections are processed first, in the order they were inserted, followed by carriers
loaded in the routine sections.
Once sample carriers are loaded onto the load unload platform, the following occurs:
The carrier transport (CT) moves to the first carrier and picks it up out of that section. The system software and the carrier
detection sensors have already determined which sections contain reagent carriers and which contain sample carriers. The
system software prioritizes the processing order of the carriers.
The CT moves the carrier to the barcode reader where the carrier ID and sample IDs are scanned. The CT then returns the
carrier to its original section.
Based on the SID scanned, the system determines whether a test order request exists for each sample in the carrier. If test
orders exist, the CT picks up the carrier and places it on the aspiration platform. Module optimization software determines
the processing order for each test requested on that carrier.
The pipettor aspirates from each sample, as determined by the optimization (scheduling) software. The CT then picks up the
carrier and moves it to each subsequent sample position for aspiration. In this way, each sample that has test orders is
presented for sample aspiration by the pipettor. However, each carrier is not necessarily processed in the sample position
order 1 - 5. Once sample aspiration is complete for all samples in the carrier, the CT moves the carrier back to the load
unload platform.
Blinking green indicator lights on the load unload platform indicate that sample aspiration for all samples on that carrier has
been completed and the carrier can be removed by the operator.
Module Optimization software maximizes sample processing throughput, by determining the most efficient processing order for all
tests on the samples in each carrier. The software sets the order in which tests in a carrier are scheduled, and applies optimization
rules to each test to find the most efficient lockstep for that test initiation. A test that is scheduled first does not necessarily mean
that it will be initiated first. The time of initiation is determined by the optimization rules.
There are several steps the software goes through to schedule and process tests for i1000SR.
Sample orders downloaded - All the samples in a carrier are scanned by the bar code reader and orders are downloaded
from the SCC.
Scheduling tests for samples in the carrier - the software schedules any RETEST tests first followed by PRE-TREATMENT
tests, STAT-Protocol tests, and then ROUTINE-Protocol tests. A scheduling window of 10 possible test initiation locksteps
for each test is established.
Optimization of test schedule for the carrier - Three optimization rules are applied to each lockstep in the scheduling window
and then the software determines the lockstep to be used to initiate the test. The software reschedules STAT-protocol and
ROUTINE-protocol tests of the same type to improve module throughput.
RSH Reagent Processing
Reagent kits are loaded onto the reagent carousel through the load unload platform in an automated process. Kits are loaded on
reagent carriers. Each carrier has a specific, color-coded seat for each type of reagent bottle. The microparticle bottle position is a
rotating seat, connected to a cogwheel.
This cogwheel engages with the bottle rotator at the bar code reader scan position so that when a reagent carrier is presented for
scanning, the microparticle bottle is rotated in front of the bar code reader beam, allowing a successful label read.
The cogwheel also engages with the support gear ring on the reagent carousel causing microparticle bottle dispersion when the
reagent carousel rotates.
When a reagent kit is presented to the load unload platform for loading, the system software determines when an acceptable timing
opportunity exists in between sample processing, to allow the reagent to be loaded without interrupting the lockstep routine.
Upon initiation of the reagent loading, the carrier transport picks up the reagent carrier and moves it to the bar code read position.
The CT lowers the carrier until the microparticle seat cogwheel engages with the spinning bottle rotator disk. All 3 bottle positions
are then scanned. If a valid read is obtained, the carrier transport then moves the reagent carrier to the reagent carousel load
position and loads it on the carousel. This process is covered in more detail in the reagent handling overview.
The system software automatically schedules an empty reagent kit or a kit with LLS failure for unloading. When there is a timing
opportunity as determined by the software, the carrier transport picks up the reagent carrier from the reagent carousel and moves it
back to the load unload platform for removal by the operator.
Robotic Sample Handler Robotic Sample Handler

RSH Distribution Board RSH Distribution Board
RSH Engineering Schematic(1 of 2) 5A_9035.PDF
RSH Engineering Schematic(2 of 2) 5A_9036.PDF

Temperature and WAM
Overview
The temperature subsystem on the Architect i1000SR instrument allows the monitoring and control of sub assemblies that are
required to operate at specific temperatures. Temperature control includes the ability to both monitor a temperature and provide
feedback to adjust that temperature in order to maintain a desired set point. Temperature monitoring involves reading a
temperature for reporting purposes, but without the means to adjust that temperature. Temperatures are monitored by using
embedded thermistors in the various heater subassemblies. A thermistor is a temperature dependent variable resistor. Because the
resistance of a thermistor changes as its temperature fluctuates, it can be used as a temperature sensor.
The areas with temperature control are the Process Path, the Wash Zone, the Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold, the Reagent Cover and
the Reagent Cooler. The Wash Zone aspiration process uses temperature monitoring (Wash Aspirate Monitoring) to verify a
successful washing step in the reaction sequence.
Biological reactions usually occur at human body temperature; subsequently assay reactions occur most efficiently when the
reagents and samples are incubated. During the Architect i1000SR assay sequence, the sample / reagent mixture in the RVs is
incubated in the Process Path, which is divided into 3 heating zones. Temperature control is used to maintain the correct
incubation temperature of the Process Path heaters. At the Wash Zone, temperature control is used to ensure that the wash buffer
solution introduced into reaction vessels does not adversely change the incubation temperature. At the Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold,
temperature control is used to ensure that Pre-trigger or Trigger solution introduced into reaction vessels does not adversely
change the incubation temperature. Temperature control is used to ensure that the Reagent Cooler maintains the reagent carousel
bay at the correct temperature for optimal reagent kit performance and stability. The Reagent Cover Heater also uses temperature
control to prevent condensation from forming around the pipettor access holes, in conditions of extreme humidity.
Temperature monitoring is used during wash aspiration to verify that heated wash buffer is actually aspirated and the wash process
is completed successfully. An ambient temperature sensor also measures the environment temperature within the processing
module enclosure.
The following main hardware components are used in the temperature control and monitoring subsystems:
Temperature Controller Board

Heater Cooler Board
Reagent Cooler Assembly
Process Path Heaters
Trigger / Pre-trigger Heater
WZ Buffer Heater
Reagent Cover Heater
Thermistors
The Temperature Controller Board is located in the instrument card cage. Settings for temperature control are stored in the
embedded software. Its main function is to receive information from thermistors, process the information received and issue heater
control instructions to the Heater Cooler Board.
Heater Cooler Board
The Heater Cooler Board provides the power control for the system heaters and thermoelectric coolers. It receives heater control
commands from the temperature controller board and directs power to the applicable heaters. All heaters operate at 24 VDC and
the reagent cooler operates at 17.5 VDC. The Heater Cooler Board also provides power to drive the Vacuum Pump, the Transfer
Pump and the Waste Pump. The Heater Cooler Board is located in the instrument card cage.
Distribution Boards
Various distribution boards located throughout the processing module are used to route the heater power and thermistor signals,
between the card cage and the heater assemblies.
Process Path Heater
The Process Path is heated by a flexible heater pad mounted to the base. The heater pad is divided into 3 heating zones. There is
one power input connection for the entire pad, but each zone is controlled independently for better temperature distribution around
the process path, and each zone has its own thermistor for feedback control. The main function of these heaters is to provide the
heat necessary to maintain the process path at the set incubation temperature. The 24 VDC to drive these heaters is supplied by
the Heater Cooler Board. Thermistor signals return to the Temperature Controller Board. The heater power and thermistor
monitoring signals are routed via the Processing Center Distribution Board.
WZ Buffer Heater
The WZ Buffer Heater preheats wash buffer before it is dispensed into reaction vessels during the CMIA wash cycle. The Buffer
Heater is a cylindrical tubing block containing a heating element and thermistor, and has one connector for both power input and
thermistor signal return. The 24 VDC to drive this heater is supplied by the Heater Cooler Board. The thermistor signal returns to
the Temperature Controller Board. The heater power and thermistor monitoring signals are routed via the Processing Center
Distribution Board.
Trigger and Pre-trigger Heater
The Trigger / Pre-trigger heater preheats the Trigger and Pre-trigger Solutions before they are dispensed into reaction vessels. The
solutions are heated in the one heater device, which maintains separation of the 2 reagent lines. The T/PT Heater is a cylindrical
tubing block containing a heating element and thermistor, and has one connector for both power input and thermistor signal return.
The 24 VDC to drive this heater is supplied by the Heater Cooler Board. The thermistor signal returns to the Temperature
Controller Board. The heater power and thermistor monitoring signals are routed via the Reagent Distribution Board.
Reagent Cover Heater
The Reagent Cover Heater is embedded in the reagent cover assembly, and consists of a heating pad that encircles each of the
three (3) pipettor access holes. This heater assembly contains the heater element and the control thermistor, and has one
connector for both power input and thermistor signal return. The 24 VDC to drive this heater is supplied by the Heater Cooler
Board. The thermistor signal returns to the Temperature Controller Board. The heater power and thermistor monitoring signals are
routed via the Processing Center Distribution Board. Currently this heater is not replaceable, and if failure occurs, must be replaced
as part of the complete Reagent Cover assembly.
Reagent Cooler
The i1000SR Reagent Cooler is a Thermo Electric Device (TED) based cooling system. It maintains the reagent carousel area at
the correct temperature by providing and circulating chilled air, thus ensuring reagent stability is maintained. There are eight TEDs
sandwiched between cold and hot-side heat sinks. An upper fan mounted on the top of the cooler (on the cold-side heat sink)
pushes and circulates the air over the reagents. A lower fan mounted to the underside of the reagent carousel area and hot-side
heat sink removes any heat generated to the environment.
The Reagent Cooler is mounted on the instrument base, inside the reagent carousel area and a handle is provided to lift the cooler
out of the reagent carousel area if required. The Cooler is powered by 17.5 VDC supplied by the Heater Cooler Board.
Temperature control is achieved using a PID controller and a thermistor mounted on the cold-side heat sink. This thermistor signal
returns directly to the Heater Cooler Board. Based on this thermistor feedback, the PID controller regulates the power to the Cooler
TEDs using Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), maintaining them at the designated set point. A separate thermistor is mounted inside
the reagent carousel area and provides the temperature monitoring function. This thermistor signal is fed back to the Temperature
Controller and represents the current temperature inside the reagent carousel area.
The Reagent Cooler uses eight Thermo Electric Devices or TEDs. A TED takes the place of a compressor-driven refrigerator, and
can provide the same cooling effect in a smaller space. A TED is a semi-conductor based electronic component that acts like a
heat pump. By applying a DC power source to the TED, heat is moved from one side to the other. This cools one face while
simultaneously heating the other. In a thermoelectric cooling system, a semiconductor material takes the place of the liquid
refrigerant and compressor and heat sinks replace the condenser and evaporator. The application of DC current to the TED causes
electrons to move through the semiconductor material from one side to the other. At the cold or freezer end, heat is absorbed by
the electron movement, moved through the material and expelled at the hot end. Because the hot end is attached to a heat sink,
the heat is transferred to the environment by the lower fan. The eight TEDs are arranged electronically as four individually
controlled channels (TED channels 1-4), where each channel consists of two TED devices in series. If any single TED device fails,
it will cause an entire channel (two TED devices) to fail to operate. However, the other three channels will remain operational.
Condensate generated by the Reagent Cooler is removed by the waste pump, through the liquid waste system. When the
processing module is first powered on and initialized, the waste pump will run for two minutes to evacuate any cooler condensate
that has collected, through the lower waste manifold to the onboard liquid waste reservoir, or to external waste. The system
software will also run the waste pump for about a minute to evacuate any cooler condensate that has collected, approximately
every three hours. This will occur in any system state, including Stopped status. Additionally, any excess condensate not evacuated
through the waste system, will overflow into a collection area in the baseplate underneath the cooler, and will be evaporated by the
cooler fan. There is an additional overflow drain to the floor that will prevent excess condensate overflowing into the processing
module, if either of the first two condensate-removal systems fail.
Ambient Temperature Monitoring
Ambient temperature monitoring is used to measure the environment temperature within the processing module enclosure, and is
an aid for troubleshooting temperature problems that may be environmental in nature. The ambient temperature thermistor is
mounted on the RSH distribution board. Ambient temperature measurements are not used in any active feedback or control on the
instrument, and are not linked to any error generation.
Wash Aspirate Monitoring (WAM)
The dispense and aspiration of heated wash buffer solution into an RV during the wash process, is monitored using Wash Aspirate
Monitoring (WAM). Wash Aspirate Monitoring confirms that the wash buffer was dispensed and subsequently aspirated completely
within the allotted time. A WAM determination is based on temperature measurements taken at 1 millisecond intervals. The WAM
thermistor is located inside the temperature tubing and sensor that is connected to the Wash Zone Probe. A normal wash
aspiration produces a temperature profile with predictable characteristics.
As the Wash Zone Probe descends into the reaction vessel, vacuum is applied causing ambient air to be drawn through the tubing.
This results in a small decrease in temperature sensed by thermistor. As heated buffer is aspirated from the RV and drawn into the
tubing, the temperature sensed by thermistor rises abruptly. When the RV is empty and the probe is clear, free-flowing air over
residual buffer droplets, results in evaporative cooling. This is sensed by thermistor as a drop in temperature.
In a normal aspiration, the magnitude of the temperature change due to evaporative cooling is substantial. The resulting
temperature drop is compared to a pre-determined threshold. From this comparison, determination of failure or success of the
aspiration is made. Wash aspiration failure can be caused by probe or tubing blockage, vacuum system malfunction or buffer
dispense system malfunction.
WAM temperature measurements are saved in a WAM log file on the module, for use in troubleshooting. The information saved in
the WAM log includes the peak temperature read during aspiration as well as the subsequent cooling temperature change.
Temperature entries in the log are reported in degrees Celsius.
The WAM thermistor monitoring signals are routed back to the card cage via the Processing Center Distribution Board.
Temperature Set Points
The i1000SR temperature set points are determined by the system software and are not adjustable in the field. Temperatures are
reported in degrees Celsius
Heater Temperature Range Temperature Set Point

Process Path Zone 1 36.4 - 37.6°C 37.0°C
Trigger / Pre-trigger 32.0 - 37.6°C 36.0°C
Wash Zone Buffer 34.0 - 36.5°C 35.5°C
Reagent Cover 34.0 - 44.5°C 35.0°C
Reagent Cooler 2.0 - 12.0°C N/A - displays current reading
Ambient N/A N/A - displays current reading
Heater Cooler Board Heater Cooler Board

Heater Cooler Board Engineering Schematic 5A_9041.PDF
Temperature Controller Board Temperature Controller Board
Temperature Subsystem Temperature Subsystem
Temperature Subsystem Heating and Control
Each Architect i1000SR heater consists of a heating element and thermistor, embedded in the heater assembly or process path.
The thermistor sends temperature signals to the Temperature Controller Board in the card cage, which processes the signals and
sends control signals to the Heater Cooler Board also located in the card cage. The Heater Cooler Board, based on the control
signal it receives, either increases or decreases power to the heater to maintain temperature at a specific set point and within a
specific range. The temperature range and set point for each heater is set by the temp.dat system file. This temperature control
system for each heater uses two electronic control techniques.
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Control
PID control is an electronic feedback-based control system that eliminates the need for continuous operator attention. PID control
uses a microcontroller to automatically adjust a variable to maintain that variable at a designated set point. Cruise control in a car
is a common example of PID control. The Architect i1000SR heaters are PID controlled systems. Each heater is maintained at a
temperature set point, which is determined by the temp.dat system file. The Temperature Controller Board sends commands to the
Heater Cooler Board to switch power to a heater on or off depending on whether the temperature rises above, or falls below the
set point. Each heater has a control thermistor which provides the current temperature feedback to the Temperature Controller. If a
heater temperature falls below the set point, the controller commands the Heater Cooler board to direct power to the heater until
the set point is reached, at which point the controller commands the HC board to turn power off again. PID control is a constantly
cycling, active control circuit.
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
PWM is an electronic method for controlling analog circuits using a digital signal. The Architect i1000SR heater thermistor circuits
are analog and have a continuously varying value, as each heater temperature gradually rises or falls. PWM is an efficient way of
providing power to the heater elements using a digital square wave signal to switch the heaters on and off at a set rate. The
frequency of this switching signal determines how much power is supplied to the heater and therefore how quickly the heater can
reach is temperature set point and maintain that setting. Circuitry on the Temperature Controller Board sets the PWM frequency,
which in turn switches the heater power outputs, located on the Heater Cooler Board, on and off as required.
Temperature Subsystem Channels
The temperature controller board has 32 channels, used for both active heater and monitoring circuits and also for reference
circuits.
6 channels are used for the active heater circuits - process path zones x 3, the WZ buffer heater, the T/PT heater, and the
Reagent Cover Heater.
4 channels are internal reference channels.
5 channels are used for thermistor monitoring - the reagent cooler temperature monitoring, the 3 WAM thermistors and the
ambient temperature monitor.
10 channels are reserved and require a temperature controller board hardware change prior to usage.
7 channels are spare and are reserved for future usage.
The heater and cooler circuits are referenced by their channel numbers in user-interface error messages. The following table
names each heater and the corresponding channel identification.
Heater Channel Number
Process Path Heater Zone 1 4

Wash Zone Buffer Heater 21
Trigger / Pre-trigger Heater 16
Reagent Cooler Monitor 7
Reagent Cover Heater 17
WAM Temperature Sensor 1 6
Ambient Temperature Thermistor 28
Error Handling
Heater Control Error Handling
The temperature controller board monitors the temperature of each heater zone for stability using temperature interrupts. A heater
zone generates a temperature interrupt when the temperature signal received by the temperature Controller Board is outside of the
range set in the temp.dat file. A heater zone is flagged as unstable when ten temperature interrupts are received within two
minutes. An error message is generated if any heater zone becomes unstable, and the zone is disabled.
Reagent Cooler Error Handling
The refrigerator cooling and control is controlled through the Heater Cooler board. LEDs for over and under temperature are
located on the board. The Heater Cooler board also monitors for the following four alarm states, and generates an error message
accordingly:
Cooler thermistor shorted

Cooler thermistor open
Reagent cooler fan stalled
Cooler control out of sync
If the cooler temperature exceeds the programmed limits for longer than two hours, the shelf life of the reagents is threatened. This
is determined in software by keeping track of interrupts. If more than 430 interrupts occur within any half-hour period, a message is
sent to the SCC to alert the operator of a temperature control failure. Following this alert, further alerts are suppressed until after
the alert is reset and the equilibration timer expires.
Temperature Subsystem Initialization
When the processing module is first powered up, the temperature system remains inactive until the TFTP download and POST has
completed. At this point the Temperature Controller Board initializes and power to the heaters is switched on. The heater zones are
powered constantly until the various set points are reached. When set points are achieved, the PID controller continues to monitor,
and maintains the heater zone temperatures based on the temperature feedback loop.
The reagent cover heater is treated a little differently when an instrument is first powered up. The system software will treat the
reagent cover heater channel as immediately warmed up, meaning that the instrument can enter the ready state without waiting for
the reagent cover heater channel to warm. Control of the channel will be immediately turned on but monitoring will be delayed for 1
hour. The reason for this is that the cover heater can take substantial time to reach its set point from a cold start, which would keep
the instrument in Warming status until this occurs. However, this heater is present only to evaporate condensation around the
pipettor access holes, which may occur in conditions of extreme humidity. The build up of condensation takes quite a few hours to
occur when high humidity is present, and so this heater is not functionally required until the instrument has been running in a high
humidity environment for a considerable period of time. During this 1-hour delay, control of the channel is enabled so that the
heater continues to warm up, but the stability interrupt errors will not be monitored until the 1-hour time period has elapsed. Once
the delay time has elapsed, normal channel monitoring will be enabled and any temperature alarms from this point on will be
handled in the same way as for all heater channels.
Reagent Management
Overview
The Architect i1000SR Reagent Management System stores, refrigerates and monitors the on-board reagents, and positions the
reagents for aspiration by the pipettor when required during assay processing. The reagent carousel area is an insulated chamber
that houses both the reagent carousel and reagent cooler, and provides on-board refrigerated storage for the assay reagents. The
reagent cooler provides and circulates chilled air, maintaining the reagents at the appropriate temperature for optimum stability and
performance. The reagent carousel can hold 25 reagent carriers, and positions the reagents for aspiration by the pipettor as
required. Reagent carriers are loaded onto the reagent carousel by the carrier transport assembly, through an access door in the
carousel area.
The following main hardware components are used in the Reagent Management System:
Reagent Carousel Area (cooling bay)

Reagent Carousel
Dispersion Ring Gear
Reagent Carousel Motor
Carrier Latch Actuator
Reagent Carrier
Card Cage and Distribution boards
The Reagent Cooler is covered in detail in the Temperature and WAM section and the Carrier transport assembly is covered in
detail in the RSH subsystem section.
Reagent Carousel Area
The Reagent Carousel Area is an insulated chamber that is built up from the instrument base. It has a hinged cover with counter-
balance so the cover will stay raised when opened by an operator. The cover locks in place using a catch that rotates into the
locked position by a twist handle. The reagent carousel area houses the reagent carousel, the reagent cooler and associated
structures. The reagent carousel area cover has an access door that opens to allow the carrier transport to load a reagent carrier
onto the carousel. When reagent carriers are not being loaded, the cover remains closed in order to maintain the refrigeration
temperature. The cover also contains an embedded heater assembly that prevents condensation from forming around the pipettor
access holes.
A sensor monitors the reagent carousel area cover. If the cover is opened, the system software will initiate the unloading of all
reagent carriers currently loaded on the reagent carousel. This requires that they be re-scanned before reloading, to ensure the
correct identification of each reagent kit in each carousel position. A second, battery powered auxiliary sensor is also used so that
the system software can still determine if the reagent carousel area cover is opened when the Processing Module is powered
down. Upon initialization of the Processing Module once it is powered on, the system software interrogates the auxiliary sensor; if it
is determined that the cover has been raised during the time that the Processing Module has been powered off, then all reagent
carriers will be unloaded from the reagent carousel. If the cover has not been opened, the system software determines that the
reagent kit identification has not been compromised and does not initiate the reagent kit unloading.
Reagent Carousel Area without Carousel

Reagent Carousel Area with Carousel
Reagent Carousel
The reagent carousel is held in position by three v-wheels, mounted to the central dispersion ring gear. The external edge of the
carousel sits in the V-wheel groove allowing its rotation. Two of the v-wheels are in fixed positions while the third is mounted to a
spring-loaded retaining structure. This is attached to a release lever, allowing easy removal and installation of the carousel. Along
the inner edge of the carousel is a molded gear ring that engages with the carousel drive motor causing it to rotate. The carousel
home flag is an embedded ferrous pin that also acts as a training tool for aligning the pipettor with the carousel, during the pipettor
calibration. The home sensor is a magnetic hall-effect sensor. The reagent carousel home sensor signal routes through the
reagent distribution board back to the card cage.
The reagent carousel can hold 25 reagent carriers. Each carrier is held in an individual position on the carousel and is locked in
place by a retaining slide (known as a carrier slide) and spring. The reagent carrier is placed into the initial load position on the
carousel by the carrier transport. The carrier slide, which is under pressure from the spring, then pushes the reagent carrier forward
until it engages with the ring gear. The spring maintains this pressure on the slide, keeping the carrier engaged with the ring gear.
Carrier Positioner
The Carrier Positioner is a passive device mounted to the inside wall of the reagent carousel area, and is used to ensure the
carriers are fully engaged with the dispersion ring gear while seated on the carousel. As the carousel rotates, carriers will rotate
past and engage with the Carrier Positioner, which will push each carrier fully into the engaged position with the ring gear. This
ensures each carrier is seated correctly on the carousel and that optimal reagent dispersion is occurring.
Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly
The reagent carousel motor assembly engages the drive motor pinion gear with the reagent carousel ring gear. The drive motor
mount is a spring-loaded assembly. The motor pinion gear engages the carousel ring gear when the carousel motor assembly is
locked into position. When the assembly is unlocked, the motor is pulled away from the drive gear, allowing the carousel to rotate
freely in the v-wheels, and be removed as required. The carousel motor assembly is locked and unlocked by a release lever.
Turning the release lever counter-clockwise unlocks and releases the motor, while turning the lever clockwise engages the motor
pinion gear with the carousel. The reagent carousel motor rotation is monitored by an encoder, which monitors for step loss events.
Signals for both the motor and encoder route through the reagent distribution board.
Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor
The reagent carrier detect sensor is mounted on the ring gear, and detects the presence of a reagent carrier in each position of the
carousel as the carousel rotates. The reagent carrier detect sensor signal routes through the reagent distribution board back to the
card cage.
Dispersion Ring Gear
The dispersion ring gear assembly provides a fixed gear that interacts with gears on the individual reagent carriers in order to
rotate the microparticle reagent bottles. Microparticle dispersion occurs when the drive motor rotates the reagent carousel. As the
carousel rotates, each reagent carrier dispersion gear, already engaged with the fixed gear ring, also rotates, causing the reagent
dispersion action. The ring gear assembly also provides a mounting support for the three v-wheels, allowing smooth rotation of the
reagent carousel. The ring gear is mounted to the reagent carousel area base structure.
Reagent Access Door
The reagent access door is a sliding door that moves on a linear bearing, driven by a gear assembly connected to a motor. Two
through-beam sensors provide positional control. One sensor is the home position, when the door is closed. The other sensor is
the door open position. The drive motor is a 24VDC stepper motor. The motor power and two sensor signals are all routed through
one connector and route between the card cage and the assembly via the reagent distribution board.
Carrier Latch Actuator Assembly
The carrier latch actuator assembly mounts to the instrument base in the reagent carousel area.
The carrier latch actuator arm rotates on a shoulder screw, and is held in place by an extension spring attached to the cooling
chamber base. When the latch actuator is not engaged by the carrier transport, the extension spring pulls the actuator into the
resting position, away from the carousel so as to not interfere with carousel rotation. A sensor detects whether the latch actuator is
engaged or not. However, this sensor is only used during the Carrier Transport robocal procedure to set the correct engagement
position, and is not utilized during routine loading and unloading of reagent carriers. This sensor signal routes via the reagent
distribution board.
When the carrier transport is loading or unloading a reagent carrier on the carousel, the carrier transport engages with and pushes
in the carrier actuator lever. The lever in turn causes the actuator arm to pull back, also pulling back on the retaining slide. This
positioning of the retaining slide ensures the carrier, whether loading or unloading, is positioned with the retaining tabs free of the
retaining slots. When the carrier transport withdraws, the carrier actuator lever, under pressure from the extension spring, returns to
its resting position, away from the carrier. This allows the carrier latch spring to extend, pushing the slide forward. This in turn
causes the carrier retaining tabs to engage with the slots, locking the carrier into position, also causing the dispersion gear to
engage with the gear ring.
Reagent Carrier
The reagent carrier holds the Architect assay reagent bottles. Each carrier can hold up to three bottles for a kit. Most assays use
two or three bottles but there are some pre-treatment assays that require up to six bottles, spread over two carriers. The dispersion
position rotates, driven by a dispersion gear wheel. Refer to the operations manual for more information on the reagent kit bottles,
and assay types.
The reagent carrier has 2 retaining tabs on the underside of the base. These slide into corresponding retaining slots, located in
each carrier position on the reagent carousel. These retaining tabs ensure the carrier remains locked into position, and engaged
with the dispersion ring gear. There is also an engagement slot for the retaining slide to hook into, so it can move the carrier
forwards or backwards as dictated by the latch actuator operation.
Reagent Carousel Area Reagent Carousel Area

Reagent Carousel Area Engineering Schematic 5A_9038.PDF
Reagent Distribution Board Reagent Distribution Board
rights reserved.
1.2 ARCHITECT Automatic Reconstitution Module (ARM) Overview
Links
ARCHITECT ARM Connections
ARCHITECT ARM Electrical Connection Diagram
ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode
ARM Specifications
Electrical Components
Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode
Modes of Operation
Overview
Overview
The ARCHITECT ARM is designed to automatically dilute concentrated wash buffer to the correct concentration and to deliver it to
the wash buffer reservoir on the processing module. The module is connected to a DI water supply and is loaded with a 10 L
container of wash buffer. A single motor, operating at a constant speed geared to drive two pumps at a 9:1 ratio to each other,
pumps the necessary portions of water and concentrated wash buffer into a mixing chamber. The diluted wash buffer is then
delivered to the buffer valve on the inlet buffer assembly in the processing module. From the buffer valve, the diluted wash buffer
is delivered to the on board wash buffer reservoir.
In its current configuration, the ARCHITECT ARM can only be used as an automatic system controlled by system software.
However, previous versions of the module could be used in a manual mode to dilute buffer for manual loading and some of these
previous version units are still in use in the field.
Input pressure regulator Regulates the incoming DI water to 15 psig before entering Inlet Cell
Accepts up to 100 psig from the external DI source
Solenoid valve block Solenoids on the valve block control the flow of the incoming water after the inlet cell.
Inlet cell located within the DI water temperature is checked

valve block Inlet water quality is checked for a purity level >/= 1 mega ohm, compensated for temperature
Input pressure sensor Checks for low incoming DI pressure from the regulator
Gives a low pressure error if < 0.5 psig is detected to prevent damage to the dual head pump if
there is not enough DI water
Dual head FMI pump Provides a 9:1 ratio of DI water and concentrated buffer
Outlet cell Receives the 9:1 DI water to buffer concentrate ratio from the dual headed pump
Ensures the DI water and buffer concentrate mixture is thoroughly mixed before it is delivered to
the instrument
Sensor in the cell checks the DI water and mix quality
Sensor in the cell is temperature compensated during the DI and mix quality check
Outlet pressure sensor Stops the pump if pressure exceeds 15 psig between the ARCHITECT ARM and the processing
module.
Power Supply Supplies +5 VDC, +/-12 VDC, and 36 VDC
Main Board Provides all logic control of the ARCHITECT ARM system
Stepper Board Controls the rotation of the FMI Pump
Sensor Board Processes sensor information from the inlet cell, outlet cell, input pressure sensor, and output
pressure sensors
Keypad Provides a local interface for the operator to control the operation of the ARCHITECT ARM.
RS-232 Interface Provides an interface between the ARCHITECT ARM and the System Control Center (SCC)
ARCHITECT ARM Connections
ARCHITECT ARM Rear Connectors
The rear of the ARCHITECT ARM has five fluidics ports for input and output, and one communication port.
1 Diluted Wash Connection from the ARCHITECT ARM to the buffer

Buffer Output input on the rear left of the processing module for
transfer of diluted wash buffer to the wash buffer
reservoir
2 Decontamination Connection for flushing a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite

Port 1 solution through the ARCHITECT ARM (for
decontamination)
3 Water Inlet Connection from the ARCHITECT ARM to the

pressurized DI water system
4 Waste 1 Connection from the internal drip pan, located inside

(Pressurized) the ARCHITECT ARM, to the external waste pump or
Port floor drain
5 Waste 2 Connection from the internal drip pan, located inside

(Gravity) Port the ARCHITECT ARM, to the external waste pump or
floor drain
Note
The tubing must be routed downward and
vented to the atmosphere
6 RS-232 Port Connection for communication between the

ARCHITECT ARM and the SCC
Note
During normal installation and operation, all ports, except
Decontamination port 1, are connected.
ARCHITECT ARM Left Side Connectors
The left side of the ARCHITECT ARM has the connector for the power cord and the power switch.
1 Fuses
2 Fuse compartment
3 Power switch
4 Power cord
Note
When the ARCHITECT ARM arrives at the customer site, the
fuses are in a small bag taped on to the power cord. Refer to
illustration A1_1771 for correct insertion in the fuse holder. In
order to open the main compartment, the power cord must be
unplugged from the side of the module.
ARCHITECT ARM Top Connectors
During normal operation, a level sensor and pickup tubing is placed into a 10 L CUBITAINER of concentrated wash buffer.
Level sensor reading:
Silicone pressure sensor that converts head pressure reading to signal-conditioned voltage
Transmits signal to the main board in the ARCHITECT ARM through the level sensor cable
Software interprets the signal and the appropriate level LED indicator on the keypad is activated
1 Concentrated Connection that allows transfer of
Wash Buffer concentrated wash buffer to the mixing
Inlet chamber of the ARCHITECT ARM
2 Level Sensor Connection from the tubing assembly to

Cable the ARCHITECT ARM
3 Concentrated Provides concentrated wash buffer to

Wash Buffer the ARCHITECT ARM for dilution prior
(10 L Container) to delivery to the processing module
4 Level Sensor Detects the level of concentrated wash

buffer in the 10 L container
5 Decontamination Connection that for flushing the

Port 2 ARCHITECT ARM with DI water
(removes the 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
solution)
6 Tubing Holder for the tubing assembly when

Assembly replacing the concentrated wash buffer
Holder container
Note
During normal operation, Decontamination port 2 is not
used. The tubing assembly holder holds the level
sensor and pickup tubing during a 10 L container
change.
ARCHITECT ARM Keypad
The ARCHITECT ARM keypad provides input to the module and status information to the user including error condition notification.
1 Water Quality Illuminates red if the incoming water does not meet the NCCLS Type II resistivity standard
Error Indicator
Note
When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
2 Buffer Quality Illuminates red if the diluted buffer mixture is outside acceptable limits (the up arrow indicates too little
Error Indicator water (high conductivity); the down arrow indicates too much water. (low conductivity))
Note
When either occurs, the system stops transfer of buffer.
3 Flood Indicator Illuminates red if liquid is detected in the flood pan
Note
4 Water Illuminates red if incoming water temperature is outside the range of 15° - 37° C
Temperature
Indicator Note
5 Low Inlet Illuminates red if incoming water pressure or the flow rate is too low
Pressure
Indicator Note
6 High Outlet Illuminates red if the outgoing wash buffer pressure exceeds the pressure limit of the inlet valves
Pressure
Indicator Note
7 Inventory Level Indicates the volume of buffer remaining in the container.

Indicator
2 bars illuminate = mid (50%)
1 bar illuminates = low (20%)
No bar illuminates = empty (<2%). The red indicator illuminates and the ARCHITECT ARM stops.
8 Start Key
9 Decontamination
Key
10 Flush to Drain
Key
11 Bottle Load Key
12 Stop Key
ARM Specifications
Water Specification
The ARCHITECT ARM site water specification includes:
Type: Reagent grade type II water or better

Pressure: 8-100 psi
Flow rate: 100 L/hr if pressure is greater than 15 psig, or 132 L/hr or greater if pressure is 8-15 psig
During operation of the module, the water temperature must be between 14.7° C and 37.0° C. This is required for assay
performance on the processing module. The water quality, pressure, temperature, and flow are monitored by the module hardware
and if any of these requirements are not met, the hardware does not function.
Electrical Specification
The ARCHITECT ARM site electrical specification includes:
Line voltage: 90-132 VAC at 60 Hz or 180-264 VAC at 50 Hz
The system is shipped with power cords and fuses for both line voltages. The system has a maximum current rating of 1.5 Amps.
Modes of Operation
When power is applied to the ARCHITECT ARM the unit goes to a Stop Mode. This mode indicates that power is applied, but the
unit is not in operational mode and does not respond to buffer transfer requests. Whenever the Stop key is pressed, the system
stops all operations and the red indicator below the key illuminates.
During system installation, the buffer pickup assembly must be calibrated. This procedure is only needed when a buffer pickup
assembly is installed. The level sensor is connected while the buffer pickup assembly is hanging freely and not placed in liquid.
The Bottle Load key is pressed and the amber indicator below the key flashes. While the indicator is flashing, the level sensor
cable is disconnected.
Whenever a new 10 L container is loaded, the unit must be placed in Bottle Load Mode from the Stopped Mode. The buffer
pickup assembly is placed in the new 10 L container, the level sensor cable is connected, and the tubing is connected to the
concentrated wash buffer inlet. The bottle Load key is pressed and the amber indicator under the key illuminates. During this time,
the level of the tubing in the 10 L container is read and the buffer level is calibrated to full. The indicator under the Flush Key
illuminates briefly and then the green Start indicator illuminates.
The green Start Key is pressed to prepare the module to respond to buffer transfer requests. Once the key is pressed, the unit is
placed in Ready Mode and the green indicator below the Start Key illuminates. While in Ready Mode, the module responds to
buffer transfer requests.
The SCC generates a buffer transfer request when both of the following occur:
Buffer is being consumed during an auto flush or test processing

The lower or middle sensor on the buffer level sensor of the processing module changes state
Note
Selecting Update Supplies (Supply Status Screen) and Add Buffer also generates a transfer request.
Once a transfer request is received, the unit goes to Initialize Mode.
Initialize Mode (see Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode)
Valve 3 opens and DI water is flushed for 15 seconds to drain (indicated by the green line in Fluidics Components, Normal
Operation Mode).
Water pressure, temperature and resistance are checked.
If the checks pass, the pump begins to open valves 1 and 4 and closes valve 3 (indicated by the red line in Fluidics
Components, Normal Operation Mode).
The buffer is sent to the drain until the temperature, water, and buffer quality are correct.
The Green indicator below the Start key illuminates.
If all of the initialization checks pass, the ARCHITECT ARM transitions to Run Mode with no additional user input.
Run Mode (see Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode)
Buffer delivery request received from the System Control Center.

Buffer delivery mode entered by opening valve 2 and closing valve 4 (indicated by the blue line in Fluidics Components,
Normal Operation Mode).
All initialization checks pass.
Temperature, inlet pressure, outlet pressure, quality of buffer, flood, and CUBITAINER buffer level constantly monitored.
Green LED under the Start Key flashes (as buffer is being delivered to the ARCHITECT ARM).
Fluidics Components, Normal Operation Mode
Decontamination Mode (see ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode)
The decontamination mode provides a routine method to eliminate any microbial growth that may occur normally within the system.
Although the buffer contains an antimicrobial agent, the decontamination mode is still a beneficial part of routine maintenance. The
decontamination must be followed carefully to ensure that only properly diluted buffer is transferred to the i System.
Before entering the decontamination mode, the stop key is pressed and the diluted wash buffer output tubing is disconnected from
the rear of the ARCHITECT ARM. Additional tubing is used to connect the diluted wash buffer outlet port and decontamination
port 1, and to connect decontamination port 2 and the concentrated wash buffer inlet.
Both the Start and Decon keys are pressed at the same time.
The green LED under the Start key illuminates and the Decon LED blinks.
Valves 1, 2 and 4 open and the pump flushes water for 10 minutes.
Valves 3 and 4 are opened and the pump continues for an additional 5 minutes.
After 15 minutes, the Decon LED stops blinking and illuminates green.
The pump stops and all valves are closed.
To exit the decontamination mode, the tubing installed is removed, the normal operation tubing is reconnected, and Stop is
pressed.
ARCHITECT ARM Fluidics Flush Mode
Electrical Components
The electrical system is designed for simplicity with limited component replacement. Chassis ground cannot be used when
checking voltages on the circuit boards. When checking voltages on the circuit boards, the positive and negative test points on the
board must be used.
ARCHITECT ARM Electrical Connection Diagram

i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-124) • © 2002, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are
1.4 System Control Center Overview
The System Control Center (SCC) provides a centralized interface through which the operator can control the instrument and enter
the patient, calibrator or control sample information into the system. It is also the interface for entry and receipt of test order
information, either through operator entry or through a Laboratory Information System (LIS) interface.
The SCC is common to the i System modules and is comprised of components of a personal computer workstation. Software
resident in the SCC module performs data reduction and release of test results, and provides an interface to the sample handlers.
The SCC is shared by assay processing modules in multi-module instruments through networking hardware and software; there is
a single SCC per product configuration. An Ethernet controller on the controller boards allows the processing module and sample
handler communications with the SCC. Additional external SCC hardware components allow connectivity to a variety of products
via the Ethernet network. The additional SCC connectivity hardware is comprised of an external network hub and cables.
Note
The Ethernet network is only used for the Abbott components (modules). It is not intended for connecting to external
systems (i.e. to a LIS).
The following common components make up an SCC:
CPU Assembly
Touch screen Interface Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Network Hub
The following optional components are country specific.
Modem
Printer
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Bar Code Reader
Computer Cart (not used on i1000SR)
Speakers
SCC Input and Output
The SCC receives input from the keyboard, touch screen or bar code reader through serial, RS232 or Ethernet connection and
provides output to various devices. Multiple connections are available for this purpose.
1 Touchscreen Monitor 10 CPU COM1 (Serial Port)
2 Touchscreen Monitor Connector 11 CPU Video Out
3 Video In 12 CPU LPT1 (Parallel Port)
4 Modem 13 Printer
5 DIGIBOARD 14 Mouse
6 CPU Audio In 15 Ethernet Hub
7 CPU Audio Out 16 Keyboard
8 CPU Microphone In 17 Bar Code Scanner
9 Ethernet
Operating System and User Interface
The system runs under WINDOWS 2000 operating system. However the customer user interface is an Abbott proprietary software.
The customer does not have access to the underlying capabilities of the operating system. Abbott service personnel have access
to the system through a service password. The customer user interface utilizes the full display screen regardless of the monitor
size or resolution. The customer user interface is divided into three zones: Menu Bar, Information Area, and Function Bar Buttons.
These distinct areas allow the user to navigate and interact with the services and functions provided.
1 Menu Bar Icons provide navigational and status indication support. Each icon zone has a drop down menu that displays
when you select the icon.
2 Information Contains all information pertaining to a screen, including the screen name. Windows are used to provide
Area additional information, such as alert notifications.
3 Function Bar Contains function buttons associated with the screen currently displayed in the information area.
Buttons
Handheld Barcode Scanner Default
Default settings for the Handheld Barcode Scanner are:
Code Setting
Check Sum Digit Disabled

Code 39 Check Sum Digit Output Disabled
Start and Stop Character Match Disabled
Start and Stop Character Not Transmitted

Codabar Check Sum Digit Disabled
Check Sum Digit Not Transmitted
Check Sum Digit Disabled
Check Sum Digit Output Disabled

Code I 2 of 5 Code Length #1 = 10
Code Length #2 = 8
Code 128 Fixed Code Length Disabled

i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-115) • Copyright 2002, 2007• ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
Troubleshooting
Block/Functional Diagrams
Block Diagram
Buffer Delivery
CMIA Optics
Fluidics
Liquid Waste and Vacuum
LLS and PM
Pre-trigger / Trigger Delivery
Processing Center
RV Loader
Temperature Subsystem
rights reserved.
CMIA Optics
rights reserved.
Fluidics
Fluidics System - Sensor Signals

Liquid Waste and Vacuum
Buffer Delivery
rights reserved.
Pre-trigger / Trigger Delivery
rights reserved.
LLS and PM
rights reserved.
RV Loader
rights reserved.
Temperature Subsystem
Processing Center
rights reserved.
rights reserved.
Note
Power Supply
Power and Logic Links
Backplane Pin Designation

rights reserved.
rights reserved.
rights reserved.
Backplane Pin Designation
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
1 +5v 12 AC Fail- 23 +24 v
2 +5v ground 13 Over temperature - 24 +24 v ground
3 +12v 14 Under Voltage + 25 +36 v sense +
4 +5v sense + 15 Over Voltage + 26 +36 v sense -
5 +5v sense - 16 Under Voltage - 27 +36 v ground
6 +12v ground 17 Over Voltage - 28 +17.5 v
7 -12v 18 Power Supply ON / OFF 29 +17.5 v
8 -12v ground 19 Maintenance Mode 30 +17.5 v sense +
9 No Connection 20 +24 v sense + 31 +17.5 v ground
10 AC Fail + 21 +24 v sense - 32 +17.5 v ground
11 Over Temperature + 22 +36 v 33 +17.5 v sense -
rights reserved.
i1000SR System Electronics
Device Assignments Links
5-Port Ethernet Hub

Board, Cable and Connector Table
Card Cage Backplane
Card Cage Fuses
Carrier Transport Board
CMIA Optics Board
DC Driver IO (Solenoid Driver) Board
Heater Cooler Board
Indexer Boards
Liquid Level Sensor (LLS) Board
Miscellaneous Motor Control
Module Controller (CPU) Board
Pipettor Board
Stepper Motor Driver Boards
Vortexer Motor Control
rights reserved.
CMIA Optics Board
The following table documents the Discrete IO bits controlled by the CMIA Optics board:
Note
Use DIO CLI commands.
Bit Input / Device Active

Name System Area If Active
# Output Type Logic
48 Input SPARE
49 Input SPARE
50 Input SPARE
51 Input Not currently planned but reserved Reagent Thru- Access Cover is Open
for Carousel Beam
Reagent Access Cover Open Area
Sensor
52 Input Not currently planned but reserved Reagent Thru- Access Cover is Closed
for Carousel Beam
Reagent Access Cover Closed Area
Sensor
53 Input SPARE
54 Input SPARE
55 Input SPARE
56 Input SPARE
57 Input Unload Diverter ON Sensor Processing Thru- 1 Diverter Solenoid is Energized

Center Beam
58 Input WZ Inlet Diverter ON Sensor Processing Thru- 1 Diverter Solenoid is Energized

Center Beam
59 Input WZ Outlet Diverter ON Sensor Processing Thru- 1 Diverter Solenoid is Energized

Center Beam
60 Input Trigger Pump Home Sensor Card Cage Thru- 1 Pump is Home
Beam
61 Input Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor Card Cage Thru- 1 Pump is Home
Beam
62 Input Reagent Bottle Rotator Home Card Cage Thru- 1 Reagent Bottle Rotator is Home
Sensor Beam
63 Input Buffer Pump Home Sensor Card Cage Thru- 1 Pump is Home
Beam
64 Input WZ Pump Home Sensor Card Cage Thru- 1 Pump is Home

Beam
65 Input Shutter Open Sensor (does not Processing Thru- 1 Shutter is Open
require interrupts) Center Beam
66 Input Shutter Closed Sensor Processing Thru- 1 Shutter is Closed

Center Beam
67 Input RV Picked Sensor (does not Processing Thru- 0 RV Present at Drop Point
require interrupts) Center Beam
68 Input Lower Hopper Level Sensor (may Processing Reflective 0 RV Hopper Level is Low
not require interrupts) Center
69 Input RV Present Sensor Processing Thru- 0 RV Present in Process Path

Center Beam
70 Input Reagent Access Door Open Reagent Thru- 0 Reagent Access Door is open
Sensor Carousel Beam
Area
71 Input Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor Reagent Reflective 1 Reagent Carrier Present
Carousel
Area
72 Input Reagent Carousel Cover Interlock Reagent Thru- 1 Access Cover is Open
Sensor Carousel Beam
Area
73 Input Solid Waste Container Present Fluidics Area Reflective 1 Waste Container Not Present or sensor
Sensor is disconnected
74 Input RV Gate Sensor Processing Thru- RV Gate is closed

Center Beam
75 Input Liquid Waste Level Sensor Fluidics Area Reed 1 Liquid Waste is Full or Sensor is
Switch disconnected
76 Input SPARE
77 Input RV Unloader Sensor Processing Thru- 0 RV Eject Plug is Installed

Center Beam
78 Input RESERVED - SPARE CARRIER RSH

TRANSPORT SENSOR
79 Input Carrier Transport Arm Sensor RSH Thru- 0 Carrier is Present in Transport Arm
Beam
80 Input Reagent Carrier Latch Sensor Reagent Thru- 0 Reagent Carrier is free to be picked
Carousel Beam
Area
81 Input Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor Fluidics Area Flow 0 Fluid is in the Transfer Line
82 Input RSH I/O Interrupt RSH 1 RSH Distribution Board discrete input
(SIO) bit has changed state
83 Input SPARE
84 Input Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor Fluidics Area Pressure 0 Vacuum Pressure is sufficient or Sensor
Switch is disconnected
85 Input SPARE
86 Input Liquid in Accumulator Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Liquid is in Accumulator or Sensor is
Disconnected
87 Input SPARE
88 Input Buffer Full Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Buffer Level is Full or sensor is
disconnected
89 Input Buffer Low Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Buffer Level is Low or sensor is
disconnected
90 Input Buffer Empty Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Buffer Level is Empty or sensor is
disconnected
91 Input Trigger Level Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Trigger level low or sensor is
disconnected
92 Input Pre-trigger Level Sensor Fluidics Area Float 0 Pre-trigger level low or sensor is
disconnected
93 Input Top Cover Sensor (used by Assay Processing Reed 1 Top Cover is Closed
Module software) Center Switch
94 Input Aux Reagent Carousel Cover Reagent Reed 1 Reagent Carousel Cover remains
Sensor Carousel Switch closed during power off.
Area
95 Input Top Cover Sensor (used by RSH Processing Reed 1 Top Cover is Closed
Module software) Center Switch
rights reserved.
DC Driver IO (Solenoid Driver) Board
The following table documents the Solenoids controlled by the DC Driver IO (solenoid driver) board:
Note
Solenoid # 2-8, 13-16, 21-28, 44-45 are spare, and reserved for future use.
Solenoid Active
# Logic
0 Pipettor Syringe Valve Fluidics Area 1 Opens Valve
1 WZ Pump Valve Fluidics Area 1 Opens Valve
9 WZ Dispense Valve #1 Processing Center 1 Opens Valve
12 WZ Bypass Valve Processing Center 1 Opens Valve
17 Trigger Dispense Valve Reagent Carousel 1 Opens Valve

Area
18 Trigger Bypass Valve Reagent Carousel 1 Opens Valve

Area
19 Pre-trigger Dispense Valve Reagent Carousel 1 Opens Valve

Area
20 Pre-trigger Bypass Valve Reagent Carousel 1 Opens Valve

Area
29 RV Hopper Door Solenoid Processing Center 1 Opens door

30 WZ Aspirate Valve Processing Center 1 Apply vacuum
31 Reagent Access Cover Solenoid (not currently Reagent Carousel 1 Opens access hole
installed) Area
32 WZ Outlet Diverter Solenoid Processing Center 1 Diverts RV to Inner Lane
33 Shutter Solenoid Processing Center 1 Closes Shutter
34 Unload Diverter Solenoid Processing Center 1 Diverts RV to Waste
35 Reagent Cooler Condensate Valve Fluidics Area 1 Drain Reagent Cooler

Condensate
36 WZ Inlet Diverter Solenoid Processing Center 1 Diverts RV to Outer Lane
37 RV Gate Solenoid Processing Center 1 RV Gate is Open
38 Wash Cup Upper Valve Processing Center 1 Apply Vacuum
39 Wash Cup Outer Drain Valve Processing Center 1 Allow wash cup to drain
40 Wash Cup Inner Drain Valve Processing Center 1 Allow wash cup to drain
41 Buffer Inlet Valve Fluidics Area 1 Allow buffer to be transferred
42 Vacuum Filter Valve Fluidics Area 1 Allow filter to be dried
43 Accumulator Drain Valve Fluidics Area 1 Drain Liquid Waste
900085 DC Driver I/O (DC Solenoid Driver) Board Fuses
Fuse
System Area Type Assignment
Name
F1 Processing Center 2.5 Vortexer 1 (Reagent Dispense)

Amp
F2 Card Cage 2.5 Unused

Amp
F3 Fluidics Area 2.5 Buffer Inlet Valve, Vacuum Filter valve, Accumulator Drain Valve
Amp
F4 Fluidics Area 2.5 Washcup Upper Valve and Outer and Inner Drain Valves
Amp
F5 Processing Center/Reagent Carousel 2.5 Reagent Cooler Condensate Valve, Washzone Inlet Diverter
Area Amp Solenoid
F6 Processing Center/Fluidics Area 2.5 Washzone Aspirate Valve, Washzone Outlet Diverter Solenoid
Amp
F7 Processing Center 2.5 RV Hopper Door Solenoid

Amp
F8 Card Cage 2.5 CMIA Optics BD Solenoid Control Bits

Amp

Amp
F10 Processing Center 2.5 Vortexer 2 (Pretriggger)

Amp
Amp
F12 Processing Center 2.5 Shutter Solenoid, Unload Diverter Solenoid

Amp
F13 Card Cage 2.5 DC Driver I/O Board +12V

Amp
F14 Fluidics Area 2.5 Pipettor Syringe Valve, Washzone Pump Valve
Amp
F15 Fluidics Area 2.5 Washzone Dispense Valves 1, 2 and 3

Amp
F16 Card Cage 2 Amp DC Driver I/O Board +36V
F17 Fluidics Area 2.5 Pre-trigger Waste Valve

Amp
F18 Fluidics Area 2.5 Trigger Dispense Valve, Trigger Waste Valve, Pre-trigger
Amp Dispense Valve
F19 Fluidics Area 2.5 Washzone Waste Valve,
Amp

Amp
rights reserved.
Indexer Boards
The following table documents the IO bits controlled by Indexer Boards 1 and 2:
Discrete IO Bits
Note
Use EIEIO CLI commands.
Note
Indexer #1: bits 0-7 and 9-15 are spare.
Note
Indexer #2: bits 16-23 and 25-31are spare.
Bit Input / System Device Active

Name I/O Type If Active
# Output Area Type Logic
8 Output Indexer Board #1 Fault / Card Single- LED 1 Ready LED is ON, Fault LED
Ready LEDs Cage Ended is OFF
24 Output Indexer Board #2 Fault / Card Single- LED 1 Ready LED is ON, Fault LED
Ready LEDs Cage Ended is OFF
Limit Switch Inputs
Note
Use OMS CLI commands.
Note
I/O type is always differential.
Motor Axis Indexer Active

Limit Switch Input Name Signal/Device Connection If Active
# Designator # Logic
0 X Process Path Motor Limit 1 1 UNUSED
0 X Process Path Motor Limit 2 1 UNUSED
1 Y Reagent Carousel Motor Limit 1 UNUSED

1
1 Y Reagent Carousel Motor Limit 1 UNUSED

2
2 Z Reagent Access Door Motor 1 UNUSED

Limit 1
2 Z Reagent Access Door Motor 1 Reagent Access Door Open 0 (Low) Motor motion is
Limit 2 Sensor stopped
3 T RV Loader Motor Limit 1 1 UNUSED
3 T RV Loader Motor Limit 2 1 UNUSED
4 U Pipettor Theta Axis Motor 1 LLS Board Theta Stop 0 (Low) Motor motion is
Limit 1 stopped
4 U Pipettor Theta Axis Motor 1 LLS Board Theta Stop 0 (Low) Motor motion is
Limit 2 stopped
5 V Pipettor Z Axis Motor Limit 1 1 UNUSED
5 V Pipettor Z Axis Motor Limit 2 1 LLS Board LLS Detect 0 (Low) Motor motion is
stopped
6 R Pipettor Syringe Motor Limit 1 1 LLS Board Stop FMI 0 (Low) Motor motion is
stopped
6 R Pipettor Syringe Motor Limit 2 1 LLS Board Stop FMI 0 (Low) Motor motion is
stopped
7 S Buffer Pump Motor Limit 1 1 LLS Board Stop FMI 0 (Low) Motor motion is
stopped
7 S Buffer Pump Motor Limit 2 1 LLS Board Stop FMI 0 (Low) Motor motion is
stopped
8 X Carrier Transport X-Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is

8 X Carrier Transport X-Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is

9 Y Carrier Transport Theta Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is
9 Y Carrier Transport Theta Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is
10 Z Carrier Transport Z-Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is

10 Z Carrier Transport Z-Motor 2 Carrier Transport Arm 1 (High) Motor motion is

11 T Wash Zone Motor Limit 1 2 UNUSED
11 T Wash Zone Motor Limit 2 2 UNUSED
12 U Pre-trigger Pump Motor Limit 2 UNUSED

1
12 U Pre-trigger Pump Motor Limit 2 UNUSED

2
13 V Trigger Pump Motor Limit 1 2 UNUSED
13 V Trigger Pump Motor Limit 2 2 UNUSED
14 R Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor 2 UNUSED

Limit 1
14 R Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor 2 UNUSED

Limit 2
15 S WZ Pump Motor Limit 1 2 UNUSED
15 S WZ Pump Motor Limit 2 2 UNUSED

Home Switch Inputs
Note
Use OMS CLI commands.
Note
I/O type is always differential.
Motor Axis Indexer Active

Home Switch Input Name Signal/Device Connection If Active
# Designator # Logic
0 X Process Path Motor Home 1 Process Path Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is
Home
1 Y Reagent Carousel Motor Home 1 Reagent Carousel Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is
Home
2 Z Reagent Access Door Motor 1 Reagent Access Door Home 0 (Low) Motor is
Home Sensor Home
3 T RV Loader Motor Home 1 RV Loader Home Sensor 1 (High) Motor is

Home
4 U Pipettor Theta Axis Motor 1 Pipettor Theta Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is
Home Home
5 V Pipettor Z Axis Motor Home 1 Pipettor Z Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is

Home
6 R Pipettor Syringe Motor Home 1 Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is
Home
7 S Buffer Pump Motor Home 1 Home Sensor 1 (High) Motor is

Home
8 X Carrier Transport X-Motor 2 Carrier Transport X Home 0 (Low) Motor is

Home Sensor Home
9 Y Carrier Transport Theta Motor 2 Carrier Transport Theta Home 0 (Low) Motor is
Home Sensor Home
10 Z Carrier Transport Z-Motor 2 Carrier Transport Z Home 0 (Low) Motor is

Home Sensor Home
11 T Wash Zone Motor Home 2 Wash Zone Home Sensor 0 (Low) Motor is
Home
12 U Pre-trigger Pump Motor Home 2 Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor 1 (High) Motor is
Home
13 V Trigger Pump Motor Home 2 Trigger Pump Home Sensor 1 (High) Motor is
Home
14 R Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor 2 Reagent Bottle Rotator Home 1 (High) Motor is
Home Sensor Home
15 S WZ Pump Motor Home 2 WZ Pump Home Sensor 1 (High) Motor is

Home
rights reserved.
Module Controller (CPU) Board
The following table documents the Discrete IO bits controlled by the Module Controller (CPU) board:
Note
Use DIO CLI commands.
Bit Input / Active

# Output Logic
0 Input AC Fail Power Supply 0 No AC Input
1 Input AC Over Voltage Power Supply 0 AC Input too High
2 Input AC Under Voltage Power Supply 0 AC Input too Low
3 Input Power Supply Over Temperature Power Supply 0 Power Supply Hot
4 Input SPARE
5 Input SPARE
6 Input SPARE
7 Input Cooler Control Error Card Cage 0 Cooler Temperature Control Error
8 Input WZ Inlet Diverter OFF Sensor Processing 1 Diverter Solenoid is De-Energized

Center
9 Input WZ Outlet Diverter OFF Sensor Processing 1 Diverter Solenoid is De-Energized

Center
10 Input Unload Diverter OFF Sensor Processing 1 Diverter Solenoid is De-Energized

Center
11 Input Waste Pump Pressure Switch Fluidics Area 1 Pressure too high or switch
disconnected
12 Input SPARE
13 Input SPI Comm Error Card Cage 1 SPI Command Not Recognized
14 Input SPARE
15 Input SPARE
16 Input Motor Driver Overtemperature Card Cage 1 Driver Board in Card Cage Too Hot
17 Input Power Board Fault Card Cage 1 Fault Condition on Power Board
18 Input Backplane +12V Fuse Card Cage 0 Fuse Blown
19 Input Backplane -12V Fuse Card Cage 1 Fuse Blown
22 Input Module ID 0 (LSB) Card Cage X 00 = Module #1 01 = Module #2

23 Input Module ID 1(MSB) Card Cage X 10 = Module #3 11 = Module #4
24 Output Power Supply All Off Power Supply 0 Power Supply OFF
25 Output Vacuum Pump On/Off Fluidics Area 1 Vacuum Pump ON
26 Output RSH Reset RSH 1 Reset RSH Distribution Board
27 Output Heaters On/Off Card Cage 0 Heater Power OFF
28 Output SPARE
29 Output SPARE
30 Output SPARE
31 Output SPI Decode 0 Card Cage X Bit 0 of SPI Address (LSB)
32 Output SPI Decode 1 Card Cage X Bit 1 of SPI Address
33 Output SPI Decode 2 Card Cage X Bit 2 of SPI Address
34 Output SPI Decode 3 Card Cage X Bit 3 of SPI Address (MSB)
35 Output RESERVED (SPI Decode 4) Card Cage X Bit 4 of SPI Address
36 Output RESERVED (SPI Decode 5) Card Cage X Bit 5 of SPI Address (MSB)
37 Output Power Supply Maintenance Mode Power Supply 1 Turn OFF Power Supply +36V Output
38 Output Transfer Pump On/Off Fluidics Area 1 Transfer Pump ON
39 Output Coolers On/Off Card Cage 0 Reagent Cooler Power OFF
40 Output SPARE
41 Output SPARE
42 Output Solenoid Board HP Solenoid Card Cage 1 Solenoid is ON

Control

Control

Control

Control
46 Output SPARE
47 Output Waste Pump On/Off Card Cage 1 Waste Pump ON
rights reserved.
Stepper Motor Driver Boards
The following table documents the Stepper motors controlled by the Stepper Motor Driver boards 1 and 2:
Note
These motors use OMS CLI commands.
Table Column Key
Column Definition
M Motor #
MDB Motor Driver Board
IB Indexer Board #
HS Home Sensor
HPL High Power Level
LPL Low Power Level
HLL Home Logic Level
HS MotorTimeout Total Travel

M MDB IB Motor Name Comments HPL LPL HLL
Blocked (ms) (µsteps)
0 1 1 Process Path 23 positions not home 9 12 0 6500 19136 / csl rev

832 steps / position
1 1 1 Reagent Carousel 25 positions home 5 12 0 19000 32000 / crsl rev
1280 steps / position
2 1 1 Reagent Access home 5 15 0 12000 9600 open to

Door closed
3 1 1 RV Loader 533.333 steps / RV attempt not home 1 12 1 4000 1600 / shaft rev
4 1 1 Pipettor Theta not home 5 12 1 9000 Approx 18000
5 1 1 Pipettor Z home 3 12 0 5000 Approx 12000
6 1 1 Pipettor Syringe home 0 9 0 42000 Approx 82000
7 1 1 Buffer Pump double headed pump; 200 not home 3 12 1 35000 3200 / shaft rev
µl / rev.
flow rate = 2.5 ml / sec
8 2 2 Carrier Transport home 0 3 0 7500 Approx 15000

X
9 2 2 Carrier Transport home 5 12 0 2500 Approx 19000

Theta
10 2 2 Carrier Transport Z home 5 8 0 6500 Approx 9000
11 2 2 Wash Zone home 0 12 0 3000 Approx 17000
12 2 2 Pre-trigger Pump single headed pump, 100 µl not home 3 12 1 33000 3200 / shaft rev
/ rev.
13 2 2 Trigger Pump double headed pump; 200 not home 3 12 1 19000 3200 / shaft rev
µl / rev.
14 2 2 Reagent Bottle 4 home sensor slots. not home 5 12 1 4500 3200 / shaft rev
Rotator 800 steps / slot
15 2 2 WZ Pump double headed pump; 100 not home 3 12 1 26000 3200 / shaft rev
µl / rev.
rights reserved.
Heater Cooler Board
97280 Heater Cooler Board Fuses
Fuse Name System Area Type Assignment
F1 Card Cage 2 Amp Process Path Heater 3
F2 Card Cage 2 Amp Pre-trigger/Trigger Heater
F5 Card Cage 2 Amp Wash Zone Buffer Heater
F6 Card Cage 2 Amp Reagent Cover Heater
F7 Card Cage 6.3 Amp Transfer Pump Motor
F8 Card Cage 6.3 Amp Vacuum Pump Motor
F9 Card Cage 3 Amp Waste Pump Motor
F10 Card Cage 10 Amp Reagent Cooler TED Channel 2
Note
Each pair of TEDs is tied to one channel. There are eight TEDs in total.
Heater Cooler Board LEDS
Note that DS25 is the top LED and DS1 is the bottom LED.
DS# LED DESCRIPTION COLOR FUNCTION
DS1 +36V 36 V power Green Illuminated when +36V is applied to the board
DS2 +24V 24 V power Green Illuminated when +24V is applied to the board
DS3 +17.5 V 17.5 V power Green Illuminated when +17.5V is applied to the board
DS4 5V PWR 5 V power (power Green Illuminated when +5V is applied to the board
interface)
DS5 +5V 5 V power (digital Green Illuminated when +5V is applied to the board
interface)
DS6 WASTE Waste pump is Green Illuminated when the waste pump ON / OFF signal is asserted, and the
PUMP ON running waste pump enabled signal is active. The waste pump begins to run
DS7 VACUUM Vacuum pump is Green Illuminated when the vacuum pump ON / OFF signal is asserted and the
PUMP ON running vacuum pump begins to run
DS8 TRANSFER Transfer pump is Green Illuminated when the transfer pump ON / OFF signal is asserted and the
PUMP ON running transfer pump begins to run
DS9 PWM PATH Process path zone 1 Green Illuminated when the PWM signal for the heater is asserted and the heater
#1 heater is on is ON. The heaters ON / OFF signal (HEATING ENABLED) must first be
asserted before this LED will turn on.
This LED will cycle on / off with the PWM cycle
asserted before this LED will turn on.
This LED will cycle on / off with the PWM cycle
asserted before this LED will turn on. This LED will cycle on / off with the
PWM cycle
DS12 PWM TRIG Trigger / pretrigger Green Illuminated when the PWM signal for the heater is asserted and the heater
/ PRETRIG heater is on is ON. The heaters ON / OFF signal (HEATING ENABLED) must first be
PWM cycle
DS13 PWM Buffer heater is on Green Illuminated when the PWM signal for the heater is asserted and the heater
BUFFER is ON. The heaters ON / OFF signal (HEATING ENABLED) must first be
PWM cycle
DS14 PWM PC Reagent Cover Green Illuminated when the PWM signal for the heater is asserted and the heater
SPARE Heater is on is ON. The heaters ON / OFF signal (HEATING ENABLED) must first be
PWM cycle.
DS15 COOLER Cooler controller Amber Illuminated when the reagent cooler controller detects an error condition.
ERROR error detected The Cooler fan PWM will be placed at minimum PWM duty cycle. Error
conditions detected can be:
Control thermistor open

Control thermistor shorted
Cooler fan stalled
Cooler controller out of synchronization
DS16 TEMP Cooler temperature Amber Illuminated when reagent cooler temperature rises above temp HIGH alarm
HIGH is above high alarm limit, set to 10 degrees C. LED is off when cooler temperature is below this
limit high alarm limit
DS17 TEMP LOW Cooler temperature Amber Illuminated when reagent cooler temperature drops below temp LOW alarm
is below lower alarm limit, set to 0 degrees C. LED is off when cooler temperature is above this
limit low alarm limit
DS18 TEMP OK Cooler temperature Green Illuminated when the reagent cooler temperature is within temp LOW and
is between low and HIGH range. LED is off when temp out of range detected
high alarm limit
range
DS19 CPU ALIVE Temperature Green LED will blink at 1 sec intervals if controller is functioning correctly and no
controller CPU error condition detected
active
DS20 WASTE Waste Pump Green This LED is driven by the waste pump pressure switch and is Illuminated
PUMP enabled with no when there is no over-pressure condition detected. LED is off if an
ENABLED high-pressure overpressure condition exists
condition
DS21 COOLING Cooling ON Green Illuminated when the cooling ON / OFF signal is asserted and the PWM
ENABLED signal is driving the cooler TEDs. LED is off if cooling is disabled
DS22 HEATING Heaters ON Green Illuminated when the heaters ON / OFF signal is asserted and PWM signals
ENABLED are driving heaters. LED is off if heating is disabled
DS23 FAN PWM Fan Pulse Width Green Illuminated when the fan PWM signal is asserted. Intensity of LED is
Modulation proportional to the PWM duty cycle
DS24 PWM Reagent Cooler Green Illuminated when the PWM cooler TEDs and cooler ON / OFF signals are
COOLER Pulse Width asserted. Intensity of LED is proportional to the PWM duty cycle
Modulation
DS25 BOARD Board Error Amber Illuminated when an error condition is detected on the board
FAULT
Blown fuse
Overcurrent condition on a motor, heater driver or TEC driver
Heater cooler board is in reset
rights reserved.
The following table documents the Temperature Control Channels:
Channel Type Key
Channel Type Definition Thermistor Temperature Range (degrees C
HR Heater Reference NA 37.002°C
RR Refrigerator Reference NA 5.351°C
WR WAM Reference NA 25.006°C
HC Heater Control 30 K-Ohm 12.630 - 47.402°C
CL Clot Control 10 K-Ohm 12.225 - 47.170°C
RM Refrigerator Monitor 30 K-Ohm -0.647 - 59.034°C
HM Heater Monitor 30 K-Ohm 12.630 - 47.402°C
WM WAM Monitor 10 K-Ohm 12.225 - 47.170°C
Channel Channel
Channel Description System Area Comment
Number Type
0 MUX 0 Reference Card Cage HR Reference for Channels

4,8,12,16,20,24,28
1 MUX 1 Reference Card Cage HR Reference for Channels

5,9,13,17,21,25,29
2 MUX 2 Reference Card Cage WR Reference for Channels

6,10,14,18,22,26,30
3 MUX 3 Reference Card Cage RR Reference for Channels

7,11,15,19,23,27,31
4 Process Path Heater Zone #1 Processing Center HC Process Path Heater Control
6 WZ Temperature Sensor #1 Processing Center CL WAM Channel
7 Reagent Cooler Monitor Processing Center RM Reagent Cooler Temperature Monitor
9 SPARE HC
11 RESERVED RM Requires TCB hardware change for use
12 SPARE HC
13 SPARE HC
16 Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater Reagent Carousel HC Pre-trigger/Trigger Integrated Heater

Area Control
17 Reagent Cover Heater Reagent Carousel HC Reagent Cover Heater Control

Area
18 SPARE CL
20 RESERVED HC Requires TCB hardware change for use
21 WZ Buffer Heater Processing Center HC WZ Buffer Heater Control
22 SPARE CL
24 SPARE HC
25 RESERVED HC Requires TCB hardware change for use
26 SPARE CL
28 Ambient Temperature HM Ambient Air Temperature Monitor

Thermistor
29 RESERVED HM Requires TCB hardware change for use
30 RESERVED WM Requires TCB hardware change for use
rights reserved.
Card Cage Backplane
Card Cage Test Point Ranges
Testpoint Range
+5 VDC +4.9 to +5.1 VDC
+12 VDC +11.64 to +12.96 VDC
-12 VDC -12.96 to -11.64 VDC
+17.5 VDC +16.625 to +18.375 VDC
+24 VDC +22.8 to +25.2 VDC

+36 VDC +35.64 to 36.36 VDC
Card Cage Fuses
The following table documents the Card Cage Backplane Fuses:
Fuse Name System Area Type Assignment
F1 Card Cage 3 Amp Fluidics Distribution Board +5V
F2 Card Cage 1.33 Amp CMIA Reader +5V
F3 Card Cage 2 Amp Card Cage Fans +24V
F4 Card Cage 1.33 Amp Pipettor Board +12V
F5 Card Cage 3 Amp Processing Center Distribution Board +5V
F6 Card Cage 1.33 Amp Processing Center Distribution Board +12V
F7 Card Cage 10 Amp RSH Distribution Board +5V
F8 Card Cage 2 Amp Reagent Distribution Board +5V
F9 Card Cage 1.33 Amp Reagent Distribution Board +12V
F10 Card Cage 2 Amp Pipettor Board +5V
F11 Card Cage 3 Amp Spare I/O Distribution +5V
F12 Card Cage 3.5 Amp Reagent Cooler Fans +24V
F13 Card Cage 1.33 Amp LLS Sample Antenna Board +12V
F14 Card Cage 1.33 Amp LLS Sample Antenna Board -12V
F15 Card Cage 1.33 Amp Fluidics Lower Fan +24V - fuse is populated but circuit is not currently used
F16 Card Cage 1.33 Amp Processing Center Fan +24V - fuse is populated but circuit is not currently used
rights reserved.
rights reserved.
Vortexer Motor Control
Motor # Card Cage Board Motor Name System Area
0 DC Driver IO (solenoid driver) Vortexer #1 Processing Center
1 DC Driver IO (solenoid driver) Vortexer #2 Processing Center
rights reserved.
Liquid Level Sensor (LLS) Board
Overview
This document lists the output codes and meanings associated with the LLS 4-digit display and the 12 discrete LEDs on the LLS
PCB. When troubleshooting the LLS sub-system, this display can help the process by providing the lower level operational
information leading to a system fault. The display cycles through 8 modes listed below. Each mode is depicted by a short (up to 4-
digit) message that displays a mode and is followed by the value of the mode listed below. The first message displays the overall
mode of the LLS PCB itself.
4 Digit Display
Mode Display Meaning
1 Last command received "ON" Received enable command from i1000SR controller.
(one of these will be "clr" Received disable command from i1000SR controller.
displayed) "IDLE" Received idle command from i1000SR controller.
"DET" LLS detection
"DETG" LLS ground detection
"ADA" LLS fluid contact broken (Air During Aspiration)
"TRN1" Theta LLS detect enable (used for Robotic Calibrations - Training -non-ground targets)
"TRN2" Ground detect enable (used for Robotic Calibrations - Training -grounded targets)
"PASS" Self test pass
"FAIL" Self test fail
"DUMP" Data dump mode
2 Noise "n" Following the "n", display the Noise, a disconnected motor ground or other electrical
problems can cause this number to be high enough to fail (see DS10 in chart below).
3 ADA "a" Following the "a", display the number of "Air During Aspiration" errors occurred since
last reset.
4 FNF "f" Following the "f", display the number of "Fluid Not Found" errors since last reset.
5 Duty Cycle "%" Following the "%", display the relative percent of sine wave value above ground,
should be 100%).
6 Phase Difference "P" Following the "P", display the number of clock counts between reference and antenna
signal, should be 0 indicating the two are in phase.
7 Data "xxxx" Display the raw A/D data in decimal.
8 Data "xxxx" Display the raw A/D data in decimal.
LED Indicators
LED
Function LED Name Color
Location
DS1 The PM Self Test LED comes ON when the board is reset and goes ON if the self test Self Test PM Green
fails. Fail
DS2 The LLS Self Test LED comes ON when the board is reset and goes ON if the self Self Test LLS Green
test fails. Fail
DS3 This LED is ON if the aspiration fails to pass all tests. PM Pass/Fail Green
DS4 LED is ON if limit to the FMI pump is active. FMI Limit Green
DS5 LED is ON if limit to the pipettor theta axis is active. Theta Limit Green
DS6 LED is ON if limit to the pipettor z axis motor is active. Z Limit Green
DS7 This LED is ON if any type of detection is active (TRN1, TRN2 or ENABLE). LLS Threshold Green
DS8 This LED is ON if the crash sensor is active. Crash Sensor Green
DS9 ON when the +5V is present. +5V Green
DS10 This LED is ON if the A/D data is greater than 25% of the threshold setting. LLS Noise Amber
DS11 This LED indicates a normal LLS detection has occurred. LLS Detect Green
DS12 * See Note Below LLS CPU Alive Green
* DS12 is a blinking LED on the LLS/PM board to indicate if the LLS is alive. This LED is controlled by the LLS processor only
and does not indicate the status of the PM DSP. The LED blinks fast at power on, before the LLS thresholds are sent (about 5
times a second). If the LLS POST (power on self test) fails the LED blinks slowly (about 1 time every 2 seconds). The LED will
begin the normal blink mode after system parameters have been loaded from the Module Controller. In normal operation the LED
will blink about 2 times per second. This allows a quick inspection to indicate if a problem occurred during power on or if the
initialization parameters have been sent to the LLS DSP. The LED display will provide additional information if the board has
detected a failure. If the firmware is not operating correctly the LED may either be on or off indicating an active interrupt.
rights reserved.
Miscellaneous Motor Control
Motor Name Card Cage Board System Area Type
Card Cage Fans Backplane Card Cage 24V DC
Processing Center Fan Optional Not used yet Not installed yet
Lower Fluidics Fan Optional Not used yet Not installed yet
Reagent Cooler Upper Fan Heater Cooler Reagent Area 24V DC
Reagent Cooler Lower Fan Heater Cooler Reagent Area 24V DC
Vacuum Pump Motor Heater Cooler Fluidics Area 24 V DC Motor (brushless motor)
Transfer Pump Motor Heater Cooler Fluidics Area 24 V DC Motor
Waste Pump Motor Heater Cooler Fluidics Area 36 V DC Stepper Motor
rights reserved.
Carrier Transport Board
Carrier Transport Board LEDS
DS1 CPLD CPLD Error Amber Illuminated if there is an error on the CPLD chip, or a RESET
ERR command is being received
DS2 RAIL Carrier Transport Arm (Rail Green Illuminated when Carrier Transport Arm sensor optical beam is blocked
GUIDE Guide) Sensor or the sensor test mode is enabled
DS3 Z HOME Z Home Sensor Green Illuminated when z-axis motor home sensor is blocked
DS4 X HOME X Home Sensor Green Illuminated when z-axis motor home sensor is blocked
DS5 THETA Theta Home Sensor Green Illuminated when theta axis home sensor is blocked
HOME
DS6 +5V 5 volt power Green Illuminated when +5V is applied to the board
rights reserved.
Pipettor Board
Pipettor Board LEDS
DS2 THM Theta Home Green Illuminated when theta axis home sensor is unblocked
DS3 PCR Probe Crash Amber Illuminated if probe crash sensor is blocked (in a crash condition) or if connector J1 is
disconnected
DS4 ZHM Z Home Green Illuminated when z-axis motor home sensor is blocked
DS5 ALV Alive Green Indicates CPLD chip is active
Blinking
DS6 PMF Pressure Amber Illuminated if pressure monitor is disconnected, or if there is error with PM or PM
Monitor Fault connection. Note that this LED will blink during an aspiration, dispense or wash
DS7 +12VA 12 volt power Green Illuminated when +12V is applied to the board
rights reserved.
Processing Distribution Board LEDS
DS2 TOP COVER Main processing module cover Amber Illuminated when top cover interlock sensor detects top cover
OPEN is open is open
DS3 RV LOADER RV loader motor is in home Green Illuminated when RV loader motor is in home position
HOME position
DS4 RV PICKED RV present at top of load Green Illuminated when sensor detects an RV is present on a picker
chute finger at top of load chute
DS5 HOPPER RV hopper is empty Amber Illuminated when the RV hopper sensor detects insufficient
EMPTY RVs
DS6 RV GATE Not used Not Not used

SENSOR used
DS7 RV PRESENT RV present sensor active Green Illuminated when the RV present sensor detects an RV
present in the process path
DS8 RV RV unloader block is present Green Illuminated when the RV unloader block is installed correctly in
UNLOADER the process path
DS9 PROCESS Process path disk is in a Green Illuminated when the process path disk is in a home position,
PATH HOME home position which can be at any of the 23 RV positions
DS10 WASHZONE Washzone assembly motor is Green Illuminated when the washzone motor assy is in the home
HOME home position
DS11 VTX1 UP Vortexer 1 (at RV3) in UP Green Illuminated when vortexer 1 is in the raised or UP position
position
DS13 INLET Process path inlet diverter Green Illuminated when the inlet diverter is in the active or ON
DIVERT ON solenoid ON sensor position
DS14 OUTLET Process path outlet diverter Green Illuminated when the outlet diverter is in the active or ON
DS15 UNLOAD Process path unload diverter Green Illuminated when the unload diverter is in the active or ON
DS16 SHUTTER Shutter solenoid closed sensor Green Illuminated when the shutter solenoid is in the active or
CLOSED CLOSED position
DS17 INLET Process path inlet diverter Green Illuminated when the inlet diverter is in the inactive or OFF
DIVERT OFF solenoid OFF sensor position
DS18 OUTLET Process path outlet diverter Green Illuminated when the outlet diverter is in the inactive or OFF
DS19 UNLOAD Process path unload diverter Green Illuminated when the unload diverter is in the inactive or OFF
DS20 SHUTTER Shutter solenoid open sensor Green Illuminated when the shutter solenoid is in the inactive or
OPEN OPEN position
rights reserved.
Reagent Distribution Board LEDS
DS2 CAROUSEL Reagent Green Illuminated when optical sensor is blocked by carousel home flag
HOME Carousel
Home Sensor
DS3 CARRIER Reagent Green Illuminated when magnetic sensor detects magnet in carrier handle, when
DETECT Carrier Detect reagent carrier is in carousel position in front of sensor
Sensor
DS4 COVER Reagent Amber Illuminated when carousel cover is opened

INLK Carousel
Cover Interlock
DS5 CARRIER Reagent Green Illuminated when optical sensor is blocked, when carrier transport has engaged
LATCH Carrier Latch latch actuator
Sensor
DS6 REAGENT Reagent Green Illuminated when optical sensor is blocked - this indicates home position
ACCESS Access Door
DOOR Closed
CLOSED
DS7 COVER Reagent Green Blinks at 0.5 Hz rate when cover is closed and power is applied. Blinks at 2 Hz
MONITOR Carousel when cover is opened. Blinks at 4 Hz (alternating with the OPEN status LED) to
ALIVE Cover Memory indicate low battery power (< 1.5volts) and that battery replacement is required
Sensor
DS8 REAGENT Reagent Green Illuminated when optical sensor is blocked - this indicates open position
ACCESS Access Door
DOOR Open
OPEN
DS9 COVER Reagent Amber Illuminated (steady light) when cover is opened or was opened during previous
MONITOR Carousel power down cycle. Blinks at 4 Hz (alternating with the ALIVE status LED) to
OPEN Cover Memory indicate low battery power and that battery replacement is required
Sensor
DS10 SPARE Spare Amber Spare
rights reserved.
Fluidics Distribution Board LEDS
DS1 PIPETTOR Syringe motor home sensor Green Illuminated when syringe motor is in home position
SYRINGE HOME
DS2 TRIGGER PUMP Trigger pump motor home sensor Green Illuminated when pump motor is in home position
HOME
DS3 PRE-TRIGGER Pre-trigger pump motor home Green Illuminated when pump motor is in home position
PUMP HOME sensor
DS4 WZ PUMP HOME Washzone pump motor home Green Illuminated when pump motor is in home position
sensor
DS5 BUFFER PUMP Buffer pump motor home sensor Green Illuminated when pump motor is in home position
HOME
DS7 TRIGGER EMPTY Trigger bottle level sensor Amber Illuminated when bottle float sensor detects no liquid
DS8 PRE-TRIGGER Pre-trigger bottle level sensor Amber Illuminated when bottle float sensor detects no liquid
EMPTY
DS9 BUFFER Buffer transfer air detect sensor Amber Illuminated when no pressure differential is detected
TRANSFER AIR detecting air and end of fluid flow during buffer transfer. Also illuminated at the end of
DETECT SENSOR the buffer transfer process.
DS10 BUFFER FULL Buffer reservoir level sensor Green Illuminated when reservoir float sensor detecting full
position
DS11 BUFFER LOW Buffer reservoir level sensor Amber Illuminated when reservoir float sensor detecting low
position
DS12 BUFFER EMPTY Buffer reservoir level sensor Amber Illuminated when reservoir float sensor detecting
empty position
DS13 VACUUM LOW Vacuum accumulator vacuum Amber Illuminated when vacuum switch (sensor) detecting
sensor detecting insufficient less than 9 " Hg
vacuum
DS14 LIQUID IN Vacuum accumulator liquid Amber Illuminated when liquid float sensor is tripped,
ACCUMULATOR sensor detecting high liquid level indicating high liquid level in accumulator
in accumulator
DS15 SOLID WASTE Solid waste container sensor Amber Illuminated when solid waste container sensor does
CONTAINER not detect solid waste container
MISSING
DS16 WASTE PUMP Waste pump overpressure sensor Amber Illuminated when the waste pressure switch (sensor)
OVER PRESSURE detects high pressure condition detects over pressure condition
DS17 ACCUMULATOR Vacuum accumulator drain valve Green Illuminated when the accumulator drain valve is
DRAIN VALVE activated
DS18 REAGENT Reagent cooler condensate drain Green Illuminated when the condensate drain valve is
COOLER valve activated
CONDENSATE
VALVE
DS19 LIQUID WASTE Liquid waste container platform Amber Illuminated when the liquid waste container platform
FULL sensor magnetic sensor does not detect magnet
rights reserved.
RSH Distribution Board LEDS
DS1 + 5V POWER 5 V power active Green Illuminated when +5V is applied to the board
DS2 RGNT BOT Reagent bottle rotator Green Illuminated when reagent bottle rotator home sensor optical beam is
ROTAT HM home unblocked
DS3 CPLD ERR CPLD communication Amber Illuminated if there is an error on the CPLD chip, or a RESET
error command is being received
The following table documents the Discrete IO bits controlled by the RSH Distribution board:
Note
All device types for bits 0-25 are thru-beam.
Note
All IO types are single-ended.
Bit Input / Device Active

Name If Active
# Output Type Logic
0 Input Load_Unload Section 1 Sensor A X

AB = 00 = Sample carrier present
1 Input Load_Unload Section 1 Sensor B X AB = 01 = Reagent carrier present
AB = 10 = Carrier Partially Inserted
AB = 11 = No carrier present





12 Input Load_Unload Section 7 Sensor A X AB = 00 = Sample carrier present

AB = 01 = Reagent carrier present
13 Input Load_Unload Section 7 Sensor B X AB = 10 = Carrier Partially Inserted

14 Input Load_Unload Section 8 Sensor A X AB = 00 = Sample carrier present

AB = 01 = Reagent carrier present
15 Input Load_Unload Section 8 Sensor B X AB = 10 = Carrier Partially Inserted






Note
Bit # 26-60 are all spare.
61 Input Load_Unload Board LED Error LED 0 LED failure on Load_Unload Board
62 Input Load_Unload Board Sensor Error Thru-Beam 0 Sensor failure on Load_Unload

Board
63 Input RSH CPLD Error CPLD 0 RSH CPLD Error has occurred
64 Output Section 1 Access LED (GREEN) LED 1 LED is ON
65 Output Section 1 In-Process LED (AMBER) LED 1 LED is ON


86 Output CSection 12 Access LED (GREEN) LED 1 LED is ON
Note
160 Output Section 1 Sensor Emitter Power Thru-Beam 1 Sensor Emitter Power is ON
Note
208 Output Section 1 Priority LED (BLUE) LED 1 LED is ON

216 Output SPARE
217 Output SPARE
218 Output SPARE
219 Output SPARE
220 Output SPARE
221 Output Carrier Transport Arm Sensor Emitter Thru-Beam 0 Sensor Emitter Power is ON
Power
222 Output Carrier Transport Theta Encoder Home 1 Set Absolute Encoder Home
223 Output RSH CPLD Reset 0 Reset RSH CPLDs
rights reserved.
5-Port Ethernet Hub
Front Panel LED Connections
Led Status Description
Power ON Power On
ON A valid connection
Link/Act Blink Receiving Packets
ON FDX connection
OFF HDX connection

FDX/COL
Blink Collision upon HDX mode
rights reserved.
Board, Cable and Connector Table
Upper Card Cage Boards
Distribution Bd
To Distribution Bd - Cable / To Card Cage - Cable
Board Sub-assembly / Component (Connector Out to
Connection / Connection
CC)
Process Path Home Sensor W102 J3 Processing Center W002 PC Digital J32
Distribution Board J27
RV Loader Home Sensor W106 J16 W002 PC Digital J32
Pipettor Theta Home Sensor directly mounted on pipettor

board
Pipettor Board J5 W017 Pipettor Sensor /
Pipettor Z Home Sensor directly mounted on pipettor directly to cardcage Encoder / PM J35
board
Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor W300 J1

Indexer #1
Buffer Pump (Pipettor) Home W302 J3 Fluidics Distribution
W012 Sensors J29
Sensor Board J15
Reagent Carousel Encoder W205 J8
Reagent Carousel Home W206 J2

Sensor Reagent Distribution W008 Rgnt Carousel
Board J11 Area Sensors J31
Reagent Access Door Home & W213 J3
Open Sensors
Probe Crash Limit Sensor J1 on Pipettor board
Pressure Monitor directly mounted to board Pipettor Board J5 W017 Pipettor Sensor /
LLS / PM
directly to cardcage Encoder / PM J35
LLS Transmit directly mounted to board
WZ Home Sensor W105 J6 Processing Center W002 PC Digital J32

Carrier Transport X Home J10 on CT board - W500 Flex

Sensor cable to J12 RSH Dist Bd
Carrier Transport Z Home directly mounted to CT board -

Sensor W500 to RSH Dist Bd J12
RSH Distribution W016 RSH Sensors -
Carrier Transport Theta Home directly mounted to CT board - Board J11 Communications J34
Indexer #2 Sensor W500 to RSH Dist Bd J12
Reagent Bottle Rotator Home W506 J2 on RSH Dist Bd

Sensor
Pre-trigger Pump Home W301 J2

Sensor
Fluidics Distribution
Trigger Pump Home Sensor W301 J2 W012 Sensors J29
Board J15
WZ Pump Home Sensor W302 J3
RV Picked Sensor W106 J16
Lower Hopper Level Sensor W106 J16
RV Present Sensor W103 J5
WZ Inlet Diverter OFF Sensor W115 J8
WZ Outlet Diverter OFF W116 J9

Sensor Processing Center
W002 PC Digital J32
Unload Diverter OFF Sensor W117 J14
RV Unloader Sensor W118 J2
Shutter Open and Closed W114 J10

Sensor (Dual Sensor)
Top Cover Sensor W121 J23
Carrier Transport Arm (Rail J1 on CT board - W500 Flex

Guide) Sensor cable to J12 RSH Bd
RSH Distribution W016 RSH Sensors -
Reagent Bottle Rotator Home W506 J2 on RSH Bd Board J11 Communications J34
Sensor
Buffer Full / Low / Empty W310 J6

Sensors
Trigger Level Sensor W313 J4
Pre-trigger Level Sensor W313 J4
Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor W303 J11

CMIA Optics Liquid In Accumulator Sensor W303 J11
Solid Waste Container Present W304 J13

Sensor
Liquid Waste Container Sensor W311 J20 Fluidics Distribution

W012 Sensors J29
Board J15
Buffer Transfer Air Detect W312 J7
Sensor
Pre-trigger Pump Home W301 J2

Sensor
Trigger Pump Home Sensor W301 J2
WZ Pump Home Sensor W302 J3
Buffer Pump (Pipettor) Home W302 J3

Sensor
Reagent Carousel Cover W208 J1

Interlock Sensor
Reagent Access Door Open W213 J3

Sensor
Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor W207 J4 Reagent Distribution W008 Rgnt Carousel
Aux Reagent Carousel Cover W204 J7
Sensor
Reagent Carrier Latch Actuator W211 J5

Sensor
Process Path Thermistors - W111 J19

zones 1-3
WZ Temperature (WAM)
Sensors 1-3 W113 J12 Processing Center

WZ W001 PC Analog J37
Temperature Buffer Thermistor W112 J17
Controller Reagent Cover Heater W122 J20
Ambient Temperature Mounted directly to board RSH Distribution W016 RSH Sensors -
Thermistor Board J11 Communications J34
Pre-trigger / Trigger Thermistor W202 J6 Reagent Distribution W008 Rgnt Carousel

WZ Inlet Diverter ON Sensor W115 J8
WZ Outlet Diverter ON Sensor W116 J9 Processing Center

W002 PC Digital J32
Unload Diverter ON Sensor W117 J14
Barcode Reader (RS232) W503 J5
Carrier Transport Theta J5 on CT board - W500 Flex

Module Encoder cable to J12 RSH Bd
Controller Load Unload Board Sensors & W504 J8 RSH Distribution W016 RSH Sensors -
LEDs Board J11 Communications J34
Carrier Transport Arm (Rail J1 on CT board - W500 Flex

Guide) Sensor Emitter Power cable to J12 RSH Bd
Waste Pump Pressure Switch W308 J14 Fluidics Distribution W012 Sensors J29
Board J15
Lower Card Cage Boards
Distribution Bd
Sub-assembly / To Distribution Bd - Cable / To Card Cage - Cable /
Board (Connector Out to
Component Connection Connection
CC)
Process Path Motor + W100 J15

Encoder Processing Center W004 PC Motors - Heaters
RV Loader Motor W106 J16 Distribution Board J26 J48
Pipettor Theta Motor J6 on Pipettor Bd

Pipettor Board J8
Pipettor Z Motor J7 on Pipettor Bd W018 Pipettor Motors J45
directly to cardcage
Motor
Driver #1 Pipettor Syringe Motor W300 J1
Buffer Pump (Pipettor) W302 J3 Fluidics Distribution

W011 Motors J52
Motor Board J9
Reagent Carousel Motor W205 J8

Reagent Distribution W007 Reagent Crsl Area
Reagent Access Door Motor W213 J3
Board J10 Motors / Solenoids J44
Washzone Motor W104 J13 Processing Center W004 PC Motors - Heaters

Distribution Board J26 J48
Reagent Bottle Rotator W505 J9

Carrier Transport X Motor J3 out on CT Bd - W500 Flex
and Encoder cable to J13 on RSH Bd
Carrier Transport Theta J3 out on CT Bd - W500 Flex RSH Distribution Board

W015 RSH Motors J53
Motor Motor and Abs Encoder cable to J13 on RSH Bd J10
Driver #2
Carrier Transport Z Motor J3 out on CT Bd - W500 Flex
and Encoder cable to J13 on RSH Bd
Pre-trigger Pump Motor W301 J2
Trigger Pump Motor W301 J2 Fluidics Distribution

W011 Motors J52
Board J9
WZ Pump Motor W302 J3
Process Path Heater - W110 J11

Zones 1-3
Processing Center W004 PC Motors - Heaters
WZ Buffer heater W112 J17
Distribution Board J26 J48
Reagent Cover Heater W122 J20
Heater Trigger / Pre-trigger Heater W202 J6 Reagent Distribution W007 Reagent Crsl Area
Cooler Board J10 Motors / Solenoids J44
Waste Pump Motor W307 J19
Vacuum Pump Motor W306 J5 Fluidics Distribution

W011 Motors J52
Board J9
Transfer Pump Motor W305 J8
Vortexer # 1 Up / Down W108 J18

Sensor
Vortexer # 2 Up / Down W109 J22

Sensor Processing Center
W001 PC Analog J37
Vortexer # 1 Hall Sensor W108 J18
Vortexer # 2 Hall Sensor W109 J22
Vortexer # 1 Power W108 J18
Vortexer # 2 Power W109 J22
WZ Dispense Valves 1-3 W119 J7
WZ Bypass (Waste) Valve W119 J7
WZ Inlet Diverter Solenoid W115 J8
WZ Outlet Diverter Solenoid W116 J9
WZ Aspirate Valve (upper W120 J4 Processing Center W003 PC Solenoids / Fans

waste manifold) Distribution Board J24 J46
DC
Washcup Outer & Inner W120 J4
Driver
Drain Valves
I/O
(Solenoid Washcup Upper Valve W120 J4
Driver)
Unload Diverter Solenoid W117 J14
RV Hopper Door Solenoid W106 J16
Shutter Solenoid W114 J10
Reagent Cooler W309 J16

Condensate Valve
Accumulator Drain Valve W309 J16
Pipettor Syringe Valve W300 J1 Fluidics Distribution

W010 Solenoids J50
Board J12
Buffer Inlet Valve (optional - W315 J18
only for ARM install)
Vacuum Filter Valve W314 J10
Trigger Dispense & Bypass W201 J9

Valves
Reagent Distribution W007 Reagent Crsl Area
Pre-trigger Dispense & W201 J9 Board J10 Motors / Solenoids J44
Bypass Valves
Direct Connection Cables
No Distribution Boards
Cable Origin Card Cage Connection / Card Cage Board
W005 Ethernet SCC ethernet port J36 Module Controller
CLI Diagnostic Optional cable - serial adapter (Edgeport) or laptop J38 Module Controller
Card Cage Fan #1 J25
Card Cage Fan #2 J26
W013 LLS Sample Antenna Signal (Coaxial) J40 LLS / PM
W014 LLS Sample Antenna Power J42 LLS / PM
W006 Reagent Cooler (routes through bulkhead) J51 Heater Cooler
W009 Reagent Cooler Thermistor-Fan (bulkhead to cardcage) J39 Heater Cooler, Temperature Controller
W212 Reagent Cooler Thermistor-Fan (cooler to bulkhead) Connect to W009
W200 Lower Fan (to bulkhead) Connect to W009
W019 CMIA Reader (Optics) - Optics Power J27 CMIA Optics
W019 CMIA Reader (Optics) - Signal (Coaxial) J30 CMIA Optics (Input)
Engineering Schematics
Links
Carrier Transport Board 5A_9050.PDF

Detailed Top Level 5A_9032.PDF
Expanded Top Level 5A_9033.PDF
Fluidics Area 5A_9039.PDF
General Top Level 5A_9030.PDF
Heater Cooler Board 5A_9041.PDF
LLS Antenna 5A_9042.PDF
Load/Unload Board 5A_9036.PDF
Pipettor Board 5A_9040.PDF
Processing Center Distribution Board 5A_9037.PDF
Reagent Distribution Board 5A_9038.PDF
RSH Distribution Board 5A_9035.PDF
SCC Interface 5A_9034.PDF
Upper Fluidics Area
Cable_ Fluidics Sensors (97226) W012

Shield G +5V LED Pre-trigger
Trigger Pump
+5V Fused (4 Pins) Fluidics Distribution Board (98010) Trigger Pre-trigger Pump Motor
TP +5V Motor (96344)
GND (4 Pins) Pump Pump (96345)
Cable_ Pipettor Syringe (98040) W300 14 Pipettor Syringe
Liquid in Accumulator Sensor TP GND Home Home
Sensor Interface Electronics & Diagnostic LED’s 3 Pins
Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor Sensor Sensor
Buffer Full Sensor Pipettor Syringe Motor and Valve 6 (76480) (76480)
Buffer Full Sensor & LED FMI FMI
Buffer Low Sensor Buffer Low Sensor & LED
Buffer Empty Sensor Buffer Empty Sensor & LED 12 Pins (77650) 4
Trigger Level Sensor Pre-trigger Level Sensor & LED 4
Trigger Level Sensor & LED Cable_ Upper Motor_Sensors (97243) W301 Pins 8 8
Pre-trigger Level Sensor 4 Pins
Liquid in Accumulator Sensor & LED Pins 4 Pins
Solid Waste Container Present Snsr 2 Trigger Pump Home Sensor
Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor & LED
Liquid Waste Level Sensor 2 Trigger Pump Motor 4
Waste Pump Pressure Switch & LED
Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor 2 Liquid Waste Level Sensor & LED Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor
4
Waste Pump Pressure Switch 2 Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor & LED Pre-trigger Pump Motor
Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor 2 Solid Waste Container Present Sensor & LED
Buffer Pump Home Sensor 2 Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor & LED
Buffer Pump Home Sensor & LED
20 Pins
Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor 2 Trigger Pump Home Sensor & LED Cable_ Sensor Trigger Level (200570) W313
Trigger Pump Home Sensor 2 Pre-Trigger Pump Home Sensor & LED
WZ Pump Home Sensor 2 Wash Zone Pump Home Sensor & LED
40 Pins
Cable_ Fluidics Solenoids (97230) W010 7 Pins
Pipettor Syringe Valve 2
WZ Pump Valve 2 Cable_ Lower Motor_Sensors (97245) W302
WZ Pump Valve ( Optional Configurations for WZ Pump )
Buffer Inlet Valve 2
Reagent Cooler Condensate Valve 2 WZ Pump Motor
Accumulator Drain Valve 2 WZ Pump Home Sensor
Vacuum Filter Valve 2 Buffer Pump Motor
Lower Fluidics Fan Accumulator Buffer Pump Home Sensor
2
Drain Valve
Shield LED
4 3
24 Pins 4 4 4 2 2
16 Pins 6
4
G G Pins
Cable_ Fluidics Motors (97225) W011 Reagent Cooler Condensate 4 Pins
4 Valve LED
Pipettor Syringe Motor
Trigger Pump Motor 4
Pre-trigger Pump Motor 4 Buffer Pump WZ Pump
4 Home 8
WZ Pump Motor Home Sensor 8 14
Buffer Pump Motor 4 (76480) Sensor Pins Pins 2
Pins 2
Transfer Pump Motor 2 (76480) Pins
WZ Pump Pins
Vacuum Pump Motor 2 W W
Motor
Waste Pump Motor 4 FMI FMI P P
Shield
36 Pins
(77650)
4 Pins
Buffer Pump
Cable_ Solid Waste Sense (98047) W304

WZ Pump Trigger Level Pre-trigger Level
6 Pins
Cable_Transfer Pump (201539) W305
Cable_Accum. Drain-Cooler Cond. Valves
8 Pins
6 Pins
4 Pins
3 Pins
3 Pins
3 Pins
4 Pins
9 Pins
4 Pins
Motor Motor Sensor (float) Sensor (float)

5 Pins
Cable_Buffer Level Sense (98036) W310
Cable_ Vacuum Filter Valve
(96343) (96346) (200105) (200104)

Cable_ Buffer Inlet Valve
W306
W307
W308
(201540) W314
(201873) W315
Cable_Buffer Transfer Air Detect
Cable_Lower Fluidics Fan
(98037) W309
2
Sense (201538) W312
Lower Fluidics Area

W311
4 2
2 4 2
3 Pins
3 Cable_ Liquid in Accum.- 2
Lower Pins
2 2 2 Vacuum Low
Fluidics 2 2 (98031) W303
Area 2
Vacuum
Pins
2 Pins Filter
WP WP Waste
WP 4 Valve Buffer
2 Pump
Pins Inlet 2
Pins Motor 2
Valve
2
S2
S1
WP (200083) 3
Pins 3
WP
Pins 2 Pins
Flow 2 Pins
Accumulator Reagent Waste
Switch Liquid Drain Cooler Pump Liquid in Vacuum
Waste Valve Condens Pressure
Lower Buffer Accumulator Pressure Low
Level (200079) ate Valve Switch Solid Waste
Fluidics Fan Transfer Sensor Sensor
Sensor (200079) (200108) Container
(optional) Air Detect (200089) (77716)
(91543) Buffer Level Present
Sensor Vacuum Pump Transfer
(200103) Sensors (3) Manifold Motor Pump Motor Sensor 5A_9039a
(200107) Assembly (200101) (200100) (100038)
(200077)
RV Sense
Plate (on
board)
To Card Cage
6 Pins
Cable_ LLS_Antenna_Power (97248) W014 +12V LED

G
+12v Fused
TP +12V LLS Sample Antenna Board (97255)
-12v Fused
TP -12V
GND (2 Pins) G
-12V LED
Shield LLS
TP LLS
Coax TP Analog GND output Process
Cable_ LLS_Antenna_Signal (97249) W013 Path
Antenna
LLS Antenna Output 2 OUT LM6171 Assembly
IN
GREEN Amplifier (202062)
Coax
TP Bandpass Coax
2
Out
OUT Amplifier IN OUT Lead IN OUT Amplifier IN
Compensation (97239) W400
RED
Lead OUT
IN
Compensation
Coax
Lead 2
OUT Amplifier IN OUT IN OUT Amplifier IN
Compensation
BLUE
IN LLS
Low Pass High Pass Summing Reagent
IN OUT IN
OUT Filter OUT Filter
IN
Amplifier Antenna
Lead Assembly
IN OUT Amplifier IN OUT IN OUT Amplifier IN
Compensation (97247)
Sample Sense Plate
(on Board)
Reagent Sense
Plate
(on board)
5A_9042a
To Card Cage Stepper
55 +36V 125
Pins Heater_Cooler Board (97280) Power
Motor
Rref Header Pins To Card Cage
Reagent Cooler Control CPLD Reset
75K, 0.1% IN (optional)
Thermistor+ Cooler Control Therm+ Waste Pump PWR High
IN
Stepper 3 Waste Pump Motor A
TP Stepper Motor Overcurrent 2
Reagent Cooler Control TP Therm TP Vref+ OUT Motor OUT 3 Waste Pump Motor A*
Thermistor- Cooler Control Therm- Vref- In Driver 3 Waste Pump Motor B
Waste Pump Step Pulse OUT 3 Waste Pump Motor B*
IN
RESERVED +5V Logic Power
2 4 3 OUT
SPI Transmit 2
P0[5] P0[1] Stepper Motor Driver Fuse Blown
SPI Receive 2 P0[3] +24V Power
2 UART TXD 1 12 CPU Alive
SPI Clock MAX3232 RS232 P0[7] P1[3] G
RS232 Debug Port 2 LED
SPI Comm Error 2
(9 Pin D) Level Shifter UART RXD 27
Vacuum Pump On/Off I 5 Vacuum Pump Motor Power
P0[6] 17 Temp OK N OU
SPI Decode 0-5 6 P1[4] DC Motor 5 Vacuum Pump Motor Return
Thermoelectric G Transfer Pump On/Off I T
SPI Enable TP Fan Tach LED Power Drivers 5 Transfer Pump Motor Power
Fan PWM TP Fan PWM Cooler DC Motor Overcurrent N OU
11 2 OU (2) 5 Transfer Pump Motor Return
LED G
Fan Tach
Temperature P1[5] A Temp Low T OU T
Reagent Cooler Lower Fan Tach 8 Controller LED
P2[1] T
18 DC Motor Driver Fuse Blown 2 +24V Power
Reagent Cooler Lower Fan PWM Fan PWM 21 A Temp High +5V Logic
P2[2] Cypress Micro P1[6] 2 Process Path Heater 1 Power
LED Heater Overcurrent 6
Cooler Error CY8C29466 Power OUT
Cooler Error 10 OUT 2 Process Path Heater 1 Return
LED A P1[7] PSOC
Process Path
+5V Logic Power (12 MHz Clock) 2 Process Path Heater 2 Power
+5V Logic 1 Heater 1 PWM IN
(201845)
Power 28 OUT 2 Process Path Heater 2 Return
Vcc Process Path
P1[0]
15 ISSP Data 5 ISSP
Reset Heater 2 PWM 2 Process Path Heater 3 Power
Cooler Control Error 2
OUT 75C1168 IN Switch P1[1]
13 ISSP Sclk 4 Header IN
MAX6467 Reset (5 Pin, Process Path OUT 2 Process Path Heater 3 Return
Differential 14 +5V Logic 2 Resistive
Waste Pump Pressure Switch 2 Generator P1[2] P2[4] P2[0] Vss OUT I O I I I I Heater 3 PWM
Transceiver XRES Return Single U N IN Heater Power 2 Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater Power
IN OUT N N N N Drivers (6)
+5V Logic 1K 19 16 22 20 Row) OUT T Pre-trigger_Trigger OUT 2 Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater Rtn
Controller Reset 3 Heater PWM
Power IN
OUT 2 Wash Buffer Heater Power
System Reset TP PWM CPLD Wash Buffer
IN Buffer OUT Cooler Rst CPLD Reset Heater PWM OUT 2 Wash Buffer Heater Return
IN OUT IN IN
Vacuum Pump On LED G Spare
Vacuum Pump On/Off 2 Spare Heater Power
Vacuum Pump On/Off IN OUT IN Heater
Transfer Pump On LED G Xilinx PWM OUT Spare Heater Return
Transfer Pump On/Off Transfer Pump On/Off IN 2
IN OUT IN XC95288XL-144 OUT
Slow CLK CPLD 6
Waste Pump 2 Khz IN
G ENABLE Waste Pump On IN OUT
G Clk (201573)
Waste Pump On/Off Enabled LED Buffer LED Waste Pump On/Off
IN OUT IN OUT IN
Heating Enabled 1 Mhz Clk Stepper Motor CLK Thermoelectric
Heaters On/Off G
LED IN OUT IN Cooler Power
ENABLE
PWM Path 1 LED G Drivers (4) 7 Reagent Cooler TED 1 Power
Process Path Heater 1 PWM Control I OU Path 1
IN PWM Path 1 OUT OUT
N T OUT IN 7 Reagent Cooler TED 1 Return
PWM Path 2 LED G Path 2
Process Path Heater 2 PWM Control I OU PWM Path 2
IN OUT IN OUT
N T PWM Path 3 LED G
Process Path Heater 3 PWM Control I OU Path 3 PWM Path 3
Buffer IN OUT IN OUT 7 Reagent Cooler TED 2 Power
N T
Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater PWM Control I OU PWM Trig_Pretrig LED G Trig_Pretrig PWM Trig_Pretrig OUT Reagent Cooler TED 2 Return
IN OUT IN OUT 7
N T G
Wash Buffer Heater PWM Control I OU PWM Buffer LED Buffer PWM Buffer
IN OUT IN OUT
N T PWM PC_Spare LED G
Spare Heater PWM Control I OU PC_Spare 7 Reagent Cooler TED 3 Power
IN PWM PC_Spare
N T OUT IN OUT
OUT 7 Reagent Cooler TED 3 Return
Coolers On/Off PWM Cooler
+5V Logic Heater Driver
Power Board Fault Power IN Fuse Blown
EN OUT PWM Cooler
+5V Buffer IN OUT IN IN 7 Reagent Cooler TED 4 Power
TP +5V
+5V Logic Power 4 LED Cooling Enabled Cooler Overcurrent 4 OUT Reagent Cooler TED 4 Return
G G IN OUT 7
LED
+5V Logic Return 4 TP Dig Board Fault LED TED Control
+5V Logic 4
TP 5V Pwr Gnd A OUT IN Chassis Ground
+5V Driver Power 4 Power
G 5V Pwr PWM OUT
G
+5V Driver Return 4 LED Cooler Board
LED Fault Cooler Driver
TP PCC Gnd OUT IN OUT Fuse Blown
4 +17.5V
IN
110 Pins Cooler
Opto - Test Power
Chassis Ground 5 JTAG Header
Couplers Header
TP +24V VCC (6 Pins)
+24V Power 15
G
+24V (14 Pins)
LED
TP +17.5V TP +3.3V
+5V Logic +5V Driver LTC1117 3.3V
+17.5V Cooler Power 30
G
+17.5V 8-Pos Dipswitch Regulator
+5V Driver
LED TP Sig Gnd Power Power
(Optional) Power
Power Return 50
TP +36V
+36V Power 5 +36V
G 5A_9041a
LED
To
Card
Cage Pipettor Board (97290)
10
Cable_ Pipettor Motors (97203) W018 Pins
Pipettor Z Axis Motor 4 4 6 Pins 4 Pipettor

Z Axis Motor
Pipettor Theta Axis Motor 4 4 6 Pins 4 (97144)
Probe Crash Limit Sensor LED
Shield Pipettor Theta Home Sensor LED G PM Data A
A
Fault LED Pipettor Z Home Sensor
CPLD Alive LED G G
LED
Pipettor
1 MHz Theta Axis
Testpoint Header 5
Motor
Oscillator
(6 Pins) (200559)
Xilinx Voltage
XC95144XL-100 Reference TP A/D TP PM
CPLD Input Bias
Cable_ Pipettor Sensor-PM (97204) W017
(98185) 6 Pins
MAX206E 4
Pressure
Pressure Monitor 5 5 3 OUT TI ADS8320E 3 Instrumentatio 4
RS232 Level Monitor
+5V +5V A/D Converter OUT n Amplifier
G LED Shifter Fused IN IN (98144)
+5V Fused (2 Pins)
TP +5V Digital
G +12V LT1117
+12V Analog Fused LED
TP +12V Analog 3.3V 6 JTAG Header TP +5V
Regulator
GND (3 Pins) TP +3.3V (6 Pins) Analog
TP Digital GND Digital
Shield
Pipettor
Theta Home
Sensor +12V Analog LT1117 TP Analog
Pipettor Theta Home Sensor Fused GND
2
IN
Output 5V
OUT
Regulator
Pipettor Z
Home Sensor
Pipettor Z Home Sensor 2 Pipettor Z
Output
OUT IN Home
Sensor
Pipettor
Probe Crash Limit Theta
Probe Crash Limit Sensor 2 Home
Sensor Output
OUT IN Sensor
LLS Transmit 2
TI AM26LV31
24 Pins Differential Line
Driver
TP LLS 7 Pins Cable_ Pipettor Boom (97234)
Transmit
Probe Crash Sensor PCB
Probe
Probe Crash Limit Sensor Output 6 Crash
Limit
LLS Transmit
Sensor
LLS
Transmit Probe
1 Pin
5A_9040a
Upper Fluidics Area
Cable_ Fluidics Sensors (97226) W012

Shield G +5V LED Pre-trigger
Trigger Pump
+5V Fused (4 Pins) Fluidics Distribution Board (98010) Trigger Pre-trigger Pump Motor
TP +5V Motor (96344)
GND (4 Pins) Pump Pump (96345)
Cable_ Pipettor Syringe (98040) W300 14 Pipettor Syringe
Liquid in Accumulator Sensor TP GND Home Home
Sensor Interface Electronics & Diagnostic LED’s 3 Pins
Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor Sensor Sensor
Buffer Full Sensor Pipettor Syringe Motor and Valve 6 (76480) (76480)
Buffer Full Sensor & LED FMI FMI
Buffer Low Sensor Buffer Low Sensor & LED
Buffer Empty Sensor Buffer Empty Sensor & LED 12 Pins (77650) 4
Trigger Level Sensor Pre-trigger Level Sensor & LED 4
Trigger Level Sensor & LED Cable_ Upper Motor_Sensors (97243) W301 Pins 8 8
Pre-trigger Level Sensor 4 Pins
Liquid in Accumulator Sensor & LED Pins 4 Pins
Solid Waste Container Present Snsr 2 Trigger Pump Home Sensor
Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor & LED
Liquid Waste Level Sensor 2 Trigger Pump Motor 4
Waste Pump Pressure Switch & LED
Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor 2 Liquid Waste Level Sensor & LED Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor
4
Waste Pump Pressure Switch 2 Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor & LED Pre-trigger Pump Motor
Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor 2 Solid Waste Container Present Sensor & LED
Buffer Pump Home Sensor 2 Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor & LED
Buffer Pump Home Sensor & LED
20 Pins
Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor 2 Trigger Pump Home Sensor & LED Cable_ Sensor Trigger Level (200570) W313
Trigger Pump Home Sensor 2 Pre-Trigger Pump Home Sensor & LED
WZ Pump Home Sensor 2 Wash Zone Pump Home Sensor & LED
40 Pins
Cable_ Fluidics Solenoids (97230) W010 7 Pins
Pipettor Syringe Valve 2
WZ Pump Valve 2 Cable_ Lower Motor_Sensors (97245) W302
WZ Pump Valve ( Optional Configurations for WZ Pump )
Buffer Inlet Valve 2
Reagent Cooler Condensate Valve 2 WZ Pump Motor
Accumulator Drain Valve 2 WZ Pump Home Sensor
Vacuum Filter Valve 2 Buffer Pump Motor
Lower Fluidics Fan Accumulator Buffer Pump Home Sensor
2
Drain Valve
Shield LED
4 3
24 Pins 4 4 4 2 2
16 Pins 6
4
G G Pins
Cable_ Fluidics Motors (97225) W011 Reagent Cooler Condensate 4 Pins
4 Valve LED
Trigger Pump Motor 4
Pre-trigger Pump Motor 4 Buffer Pump WZ Pump
4 Home 8
WZ Pump Motor Home Sensor 8 14
Buffer Pump Motor 4 (76480) Sensor Pins Pins 2
Pins 2
Transfer Pump Motor 2 (76480) Pins
WZ Pump Pins
Vacuum Pump Motor 2 W W
Motor
Waste Pump Motor 4 FMI FMI P P
Shield
36 Pins
(77650)
4 Pins
Buffer Pump
Cable_ Solid Waste Sense (98047) W304

WZ Pump Trigger Level Pre-trigger Level
6 Pins
Cable_Transfer Pump (201539) W305
Cable_Accum. Drain-Cooler Cond. Valves
8 Pins
6 Pins
4 Pins
3 Pins
3 Pins
3 Pins
4 Pins
9 Pins
4 Pins
Motor Motor Sensor (float) Sensor (float)

5 Pins
Cable_Buffer Level Sense (98036) W310
Cable_ Vacuum Filter Valve
(96343) (96346) (200105) (200104)

Cable_ Buffer Inlet Valve
W306
W307
W308
(201540) W314
(201873) W315
Cable_Buffer Transfer Air Detect
Cable_Lower Fluidics Fan
(98037) W309
2
Sense (201538) W312
Lower Fluidics Area

W311
4 2
2 4 2
3 Pins
3 Cable_ Liquid in Accum.- 2
Lower Pins
2 2 2 Vacuum Low
Fluidics 2 2 (98031) W303
Area 2
Vacuum
Pins
2 Pins Filter
WP WP Waste
WP 4 Valve Buffer
2 Pump
Pins Inlet 2
Pins Motor 2
Valve
2
S2
S1
WP (200083) 3
Pins 3
WP
Pins 2 Pins
Flow 2 Pins
Accumulator Reagent Waste
Switch Liquid Drain Cooler Pump Liquid in Vacuum
Waste Valve Condens Pressure
Lower Buffer Accumulator Pressure Low
Level (200079) ate Valve Switch Solid Waste
Fluidics Fan Transfer Sensor Sensor
Sensor (200079) (200108) Container
(optional) Air Detect (200089) (77716)
(91543) Buffer Level Present
Sensor Vacuum Pump Transfer
(200103) Sensors (3) Manifold Motor Pump Motor Sensor 5A_9039a
(200107) Assembly (200101) (200100) (100038)
(200077)
Reagent Cooler Assembly
(97180)
Reagent Cooler
TED's 1-4
(200934) Reagent Cooler
Reagent Cooler Connector Panel (200448) Reagent Cooler Upper Lower Fan
J1 P1
Fan (100042) (201473)
Cable_ Reagent Cooler (97212) W006 9 9 Pins 8
2 Pins
J2 P2 2 Cable_ Reagent Cooler Thermistor Assembly (200344) W212
Cable_ Reagent Cooler Therm-Fan (97213) W009 14 9 10 Pins 2 Reagent Cooler
2
T Monitor Thermistor
J3 P3 Reagent Cooler
5 5 Pins 4 Cable_ Cooling Fan (97219) W200 T Control Thermistor
5 Pins
Cable_ Reagent Carousel Area Mtrs-Sol (97244) W007

Reagent Distribution Board (98000) 10 Pins
Trigger Bypass Valve 2 (98030) W201
Trigger Dispense Valve 2
Pre-trigger Bypass Valve 2
Pre-trigger Dispense Valve 2
2 2 2 2
2 3 2 3
Pins Pins Pins Pins
Shield
V2
V3
V4
V1
Pre-trigger_Trigger
Heater (97332)
7 Pins 2
Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater 2 T Pre-trigger Trigger Trigger
Dispense Pre-trigger Dispense Bypass
W202 2 Valve Bypass Valve Valve
Valve
(77612) (200607) (77612) (200607)
12
Pins (98033) W213 J1 P1 Reagent Carousel Cover (97014)
Reagent Access Door Motor 4 4 5 Pins (201113) W203 4 Reagent Access
To Door Motor
Reagent Carousel Motor 4 J2 P2
Card 3 4 Pins (97208) W209 3 Reagent Access
Cover Monitor Cover Opened /
Cage 3V
Alive LED
+5V Door Open Sensor
Battery Battery Status LED Fused
22 Pins G A +5V Monitor J3 P3
Battery Monitor 3 3 Pins (98211) W210 Reagent Access
3
3 9 8 13 Door Home Sensor
CA5 P2.1 P2.0 P1.0
2 XIN 6
VCC Reagent Cooler Aux Reagent Carousel
Cover Monitor 32 KHz
Cable_ Reagent Carousel Area Cover Sensor
Crystal
Sensor (97242) W008 XOUT 5 3 Pins (reed switch)
TI MSP430F2101 11 Reed Switch Input (202022) W204 2
LT1117 3.3V Microcontroller P2.3
Cover Status Regulator
(32 KHz Clock)
Aux Reagent Carousel Cover Sensor Output 10 Pins 8 Pins
P1.2 (201999) 6 (Motor) 4
15 JTAG Header Reagent
5 Pins Carousel Motor/
Pre-trigger_Trigger Thermistor 2 (97215) W205 (Encoder) 4 Encoder (97009)
Sensor Interface Electronics &
Reagent Carousel Encoder (2 Twisted Pairs) 4 (200662)
Diagnostic LED’s 5 Pins
Reagent Carousel Home Sensor 2 (97385) W206 3 Reagent Carousel
Home Sensor
Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor 2
Reagent Carousel Home Sensor & LED 4 Pins Reagent Carrier
Reagent Carousel Cover Interlock Sensor 2 Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor & LED (97449) W207 3 Detect Sensor
2 Reagent Carousel Cover Interlock Sensor & LED (200584)
Reagent Access Door Open Sensor
Reagent Carrier Latch Sensor & LED 7 Pins
Reagent Access Door Home Sensor 2 Reagent Access Door Open Sensor & LED (98032) W208 5 Reagent Carousel
Reagent Carrier Latch Sensor Reagent Access Door Home Sensor & LED Cover Interlock Sensor
2
4 Pins
(97214) W211 3 Reagent Carrier
+12V Analog Fused Power/Return (2 Pins)
+5V LED Latch Sensor
+5V Fused (4 Pins) G
TP +5V
GND (4 Pins)
TP GND
Shield (2 Pins)
34 Pins 5A_9038a
(Motor) 8 RV
Pins Present
Process Path Sensor
Cable_ PC Motor-Heater (97237) W004 12 Home Sensor (77579)
Processing Center Distribution Board (97275)
Shield Pins Process
Process Path Motor 4 (98027) W100 4 Path Motor/
Wash Zone Motor 4 4 (Encoder) 5 Pins Encoder
RV Loader Motor 4 (98155)
Heaters 10 5 Pins 4 3 Pins
(98055) W102
4 Pins 3 (97209) W103
24 Pins
Cable_ PC Solenoid-Fan (97221) W003 5 Pins 4 Wash Zone Wash Zone
W104
Motor (98181) Home Sensor
Shutter Solenoid 2 Lower
6 Pins 5 Hopper
WZ Inlet Diverter Solenoid 2 (98059) W105
WZ Outlet Diverter Solenoid 2 Level
RV Loader RV Picked
Unload Diverter Solenoid 2 Sensor
20 4 Pins Home Sensor Sensor
WZ Dispense Valve #3 2 4 (100038)
Pins RV Loader Motor
WZ Dispense Valve #2 2
(97048)
WZ Dispense Valve #1 2 (98028) 5
WZ Bypass Valve 2 W106 5 3 Pins
WZ Aspirate Valve 2 3
Wash Cup Upper Valve 2 2 Pins RV Hopper 2 Pins
2 RV Gate
Wash Cup Inner Drain Valve 2 Door Solenoid
10 Pins Solenoid
Wash Cup Outer Drain Valve 2 2 (77366)
(optional)
RV Hopper Door Solenoid 2
Processing Center Fan 4 16
Vortexer #1 Motor 3 Pins (Motor) 3 14 Pins W107 RV Gate
Vortexer #1 5
Shield (2 Pins) (97228) W108 10 Sensor
(76656) (optional)
RV Gate Solenoid 2 16
Pins (Motor)
Vortexer #2 Motor 3 3 14 Pins
Vortexer #2
(97229) W109 10
(76656)
40 Pins 8 2 Pins Process Path
Process Path Heater
Cable_ PC Digital (97222) W002 Pins (97060) W110 2 Zone #1 2 Thermistor Zone #1
T (77991)
+5V
Vortexer #1 Sensors (4 Twisted Pairs) 8 LED Process Path 2 Pins
Threshold 2 Process Path
Vortexer #2 Sensors (4 Twisted Pairs) 8 Heater 2
G Adjuster 8 (98026) W111 Zone #2
T Thermistor Zone #2
+5V Fused (4 Pins) Pins (77991)
TP +5V (optional) Process Path Heater 2 Pins
GND (4 Pins) 2 Zone #3 2
TP GND T
Shield (2 Pins) Sensor Interface Electronics Process Path Home Sensor & Process Path
Sensors (18 Twisted Pairs + 1) & Diagnostic LED’s LED Thermistor Zone #3
37 WZ Outlet Diverter On Sensor &
Wash Zone Home Sensor & LED
LED 8 (77991)
RV Loader Home Sensor & LED Vortexer #1 Up/Down Sensor & 2
WZ Outlet Diverter Off Sensor & Pins
RV Picked Sensor & LED LED
64 Pins Vortexer #2 Up/Down Sensor &
LED
2 Spare Heater/Thermistor
Lower Hopper Level Sensor & Unload Diverter On Sensor & LED
LED WZ Buffer
LED Unload Diverter Off Sensor & LED
WZ Inlet Diverter On Sensor & 8 Heater (97309)
Cable_ PC Analog (97224) W001 RV Gate Sensor & LED Shutter Open Sensor & LED
RV Present Sensor & LED LED Pins W112 2
Shutter Closed Sensor & LED T
RV Unloader Sensor & LED WZ Inlet Diverter Off Sensor &
Thermistors (8 Twisted Pairs) 16 Top Cover Sensor & LED
LED 2
+12V Analog Fused Power/Return (2 Pins)
TP +24V 4 Pins Top Cover Sensor
Shield 2
(200789) W121 (reed switch) 2
TP +24V
GND Pins
20 Pins WZ Temperature
8 Pins (98025) W113 2
T Sensor #1
10
(77726)
Pins 2
3 Pins 6 Pins 11 14 12 2 Pins WZ Temperature
(98029)
Cable_Processing Center Fan
(98044) 9 Pins 16 Pins Pins 2 Pins Pins T

W120 W119 Sensor #2
2 4 Unload 2 4 2 4 2 2
Cable_ CMIA Optics (97223) W019 Diverter WZ Outlet (77726)
2 Diverter Pins
PMT HV +5V Power & Return 2 2 2 2 5 Sensor WZ Inlet Shutter 2
2 T
(Dual) Sensor Diverter Sensor WZ Temperature
2
PMT Out (Coax) 3 2 2 2 (98051) 4 (Dual) Sensor (Dual) Sensor #3
2 Pins Pins Pins W117 (98053) (Dual) (98054) (77726)
2 2 Pins
Pins 2 Pins W116 (98052) W114
Coax WP WP WP WP W115
V4
V1
V2
V3
2 Pins 2 Pins WH
4 Pins BLK BLU
CMIA T
S3
S1
S2
Reader Unload WZ Outlet

WZ WZ WZ RV WZ Inlet Shutter
(97313) 2 Diverter Diverter
WZ Bypass Dispense Dispense Dispense Unloader Diverter Solenoid
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
WZ Valve Valve #1 Valve #2 Valve #3 Sensor (98056)
2 Pins Wash Wash (98174) (98173) (98172)
Aspirate (200607) (77612) (77612) (77612) (98057)
Cup Cup Wash W118
Valve
Outer Inner Cup
(20079)
Drain Drain Upper
Valve Valve Valve Manifold
Processing
(200079) (200079) (200079) Assembly
(20080)
Center Fan
(optional) Manifold Assembly
(98192) 5A_9037a
Load/Unload Board Engineering Schematic
Cable_ Load_Unload
Board (97206) W504
Shield A
+5V Fused (4 Pins) B
GND (4 Pins) C
SPI 0 Master Out / Slave In D
SPI 0 Serial Clock (250 KHz) E
To SPI 0 Slave Select F

RSH LED Intensity/Blank (1 KHz) G
Dist.
LED Errors H
Board
Carrier Sensor Error I
Carrier Sensor Emitters Off J
SPI 0 Master In / Slave Out K
SPI 1 Slave Select L
SPI 1 Serial Clock (250 KHz) M
SPI 1 Master In / Slave Out N
Priority Load_Unload Board (900050) Standard Load_Unload Board (900055)
+5V Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13
LED LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs +5V LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs LEDs
G
G TP G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G Access & In-Process LED LED G G G G G G G G G G
+5V G G G G G G G G Power Bus G G G G G
TP
Access & In-Process LED
20 Pins
+5V
Power Bus
B B B B B B B B Priority LED Power Bus
A Shield
B A A A A A A A A A A A A A
TP A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A +5V Fused (4 Pins) TP A A A A A A A A A A
C
GND GND (4 Pins) GND
Out 0-15 Out 0-15 Out 0-15 Out 0-7 Out 0-15 Out 0-13
5 SIN TI TLC5921 LED Driver SOUT 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 28 5 TI TLC5921 Out 0-9
D
SCLK XLAT BLANK XDOWN LED Driver LED Driver LED Driver LED Driver LED Driver LED Driver LED Driver
Carrier Sensor Emitter Power Bus

4 3 2 29 4 3 2 29 4 3 2 29 4 3 2 29 4 3 29 2 Out 0-15 4 3 2 29 4 3 2 29 4 3 29 2 28
E
Carrier Sensor Emitter Power Bus

F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M 2 CP 2 CP 1 /PL 2 1 2 CP 1 /PL
1 /PL
9 Q7 74HC165 Shift Register DS 10 9 Q7 74HC165 Shift Register DS 10 9 Q7 CP 74HC165 Shift Register /PL 10 9
N
Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag Diag
4 LED2 3 14 LED3 11
6 LED1 5 13 12 LED4 11 6 LED5 5 4 LED6 3 14 LED7 13 12 LED8 11 6 LED9 5 4 LED10 3 14 LED11 13 12 LED12 6 LED13 5
G A G A G A G A GA G A GA G A G A G A G A G A G A
20
Pins
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
5A_9036b
Reagent
Reagent Bottle Bottle Rotator Flex Cable
Rotator Motor Home Sensor Assembly (97210)
W505
(200066) (200686) W500
25 4 W506 5 15
Cable_ RSH Motor (97240) W015 Pins 6 Pins 8 Pins Pins
Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor 4 Shield
RSH Distribution Board (97265)
Carrier Transport X-Motor 4 Carrier Transport X-Motor 4
Carrier Transport Theta Motor 4 Carrier Transport Theta Motor 4 To
Carrier Transport Z-Motor 4 Carrier Transport Z-Motor 4 Carrier
Shield Reagent Bottle CPLD Error Transport
JTAG Header Test Header A +5V Fused 2
Rotator G LED Board
Home Sensor LED 6 6 GND 2
Cable_ RSH Sensor-Comm. (97241) W016 2 CPLD Comm Interface (666,666 Commands / Sec; 222,222 Sensor Data Packets / Sec) 2
2 75C1168 6
Reagent Bottle Rotator Home Sensor 12 Carrier Transport Theta Absolute Encoder Read / Home Set / Data CPLD Comm Interface 6
Differential
Carrier Transport X Encoder 4 2 4 CPLD SPI Interface (18.75 KHz) Shield
Transceiver
Carrier Transport X Home Sensor 2 CPLD Clock (8 MHz) CPLD Clock
TI AM26LV31 Xilinx CPLD Reset (8 MHz)
Carrier Transport Theta Home Sensor 2 15
Differential XC95288XL CPLD Error
Carrier Transport Z Home Sensor 2 Theta Encoder Home Set Pins
Line Drivers CPLD (98183)
Carrier Transport Z Encoder 4 2 Rail Guide Sensor Test 4 MHz Crystal
(3) RSH I/O Interrupt
Rail Guide Sensor 2
Spare Carrier Transport Sensor 2
2 2
RSH I/O Interrupt 2 64 59 58 22 57 3 46
RSH Distribution Board RS232 2
SPI 2 (port H)
MAX6467 Reset
PWM1
EXTAL
MAX3232 RS232 Level
SCI 1
SCI 0
PA7
PA2
PA1
PA0
Generator
PJ0
To LT1117 3.3V 2 Shifter
Card Regulator TP +3.3V 47 12
Cage XTAL
Opto- RS232 Debug Port (9 Pin D)
RSH Reset Reset Button 42 Cypress Micro
Coupler /RESET
52 CY8C29466 2 75C1168
SPI 1 MISO ISSP 5
50 PSOC Differential
+5V LED SPI 1 SCK Header
G 49 (12 MHz Clock) Transceiver
SPI 1 SS (201844)
+5V Fused (5 Pins) TP +5V 93 SPI 0 MISO XRE
GND (5 Pins) 2 PP2 1S
30 9
Shield (3 Pins) TP PB6 Motorola
GND 29 PB5 MC9S12DP256
Carrier Transport Theta Encoder RS422 4
4 Microcontroller
PWM0 (24 MHz Clock)
96 (201843)
Bar Code Reader RS232 & Power 6 SPI 0 SS
95 SPI 0 SCK 4 BDM Header (6
94 SPI 0 MOSI PIN DIN)
Ambient Temperature Thermistor 2 Ambient Temperature
7 Pins
+5V Fused (5 Pins) Thermistor
6 Bar Code
GND (5 Pins) W503
Reader
60 (97325)
Pins
20
Pins
Cable_ Load_Unload
Board (97206) W504
Shield
+5V Fused 4
GND 4 To
Priority
SPI 0 Master Out / Slave In Load_Unload
Board
SPI 0 Serial Clock (250 KHz)
SPI 0 Slave Select
LED Intensity/Blank (1 KHz)
LED Errors
Carrier Sensor Error
Carrier Sensor Emitters Off
SPI 0 Master In / Slave Out
SPI 1 Slave Select

SPI 1 Serial Clock (250 KHz)
SPI 1 Master In / Slave Out
5A_9035a
Optional Modem
(7D07-12) Printer Power Cord
(USB cable included) (included w/ printer)
External Module UPS USB Cable 100 to 240 Vac
(optional) Optional @50/60 Hz Input
Cables Routed Thru Mounting Arm AbbottLink
Adapter
(USB-Eth.) Printer
(interface cable included)
Keyboard Mouse (7D08-11)
Touchscreen Monitor (7D11-01) (7D01-99) Optional Optional
(interface cables included) DB9/DB25 DB9/DB25 USB Parallel
(200606) Adapter Adapter
AC (100348) (100348)
OptionalBC
Power USB Video
R
Wedge Panel PCB Mount Assy (201816)
USB USB USB USB Eth Eth Eth Eth
LIS ARM Printer
Instrument Boundary #1 #2 #3 #4 #1 #2 #3 #4
9 Pins 9 Pins 25 Pins
Printer USB Cable (100340) (optional)

USB
(Optional Cable, Cat 5, 3')

Modem USB Cable (100340)
Ethernet Cable (100349)

SCC UPS Power Cord SCC UPS
Printer Parallel Cable (100351)

Kbd Cable (100151)
AC (7D06-11)
(Ext. Cable, PS2)
(Extension Cable, DB25, 6')

(Ext. Cable, PS2)
(included w/ SCC UPS)
(Extension Cable, Monitor, 6')
Mouse Cable
Power or Internal Module
Touchscreen Cable (100152)
ARM Cable (202391)

90 to 240 Vac AC LIS Cable
SCC UPS Interface Cable (USB)
(100151)
(Cable, DB9/DB25)
Video Cable (100153)
Input UPS USB Cable
(optional)
(Extension Cable, USB)
Monitor Power Cord (100343)
@50/60 Hz Input (7D06-22) Power (100340)
(100350) (Cable,
(included w/ SCC UPS)

DB9/DB9, 6')
Out (optional)
(Power Cord, 2.5M)

9 Pins
SCC UPS AC Out Cord
(100344) (Power Cord, 3.05M) Keyboard Mouse RS232 USB
Module UPS Power Cord
(optional) Video
90 to 240 Vac USB
System Control Center
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
@50/60 Hz Input USB (7D01-04) 25 Pins
(99018) Parallel
USB
USB SCC Power Cord AC Network Hub

AC Power AC Power Ethernet Cable
USB USB Ethernet Ethernet (7D04-60)
Input Out (100346 or 100347) Power (included w/ network hub)
AC AC Power
Power Input USB / Power Cable
Out AC Power (included w/ serial
Out adapter) Network Hub Power Cable
Power Ethernet
(included w/ network hub)
Optional US
AC Power
Module UPS B
AC Out External Multi-Port
Power Entry
(replaces SCC UPS Power Serial Adapter (7D01-40)
Outlet Strip
& SCC UPS Cables) Out Port #4 Port #3 Port #1 Port #2
(100345) AC Power
Out RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
25 Pins Null Modem 25

25
Adapter Pins Pins
Module UPS AC Out Cord #1
Module UPS AC Out Cord #2 (100037)
(optional) CLI Diagnostic Port Cable CLI Loopback Cable
(100344) 25
(optional) (202391) Pins (included w/ Serial
(Cable, DB9/DB25) Adapter)
Module Power Cord (200970 or AC Power Supply 9 Pins

200969) W020 Power (97306) AC/DC CLI Port
110 to 240Vac Input Converter (RS232)
@50/60 Hz Input
CARD CAGE
(97010) 5 Pins
SCC Port Ethernet Cable (97201) Ethernet Cable
Main Circuit Breaker (Ethernet) (included w/ network hub)
IEC Power Cord Interface
& On/Off Switch
Power Supply OFF
Chassis Reagent Cooler Connector Panel (200448)

Reference
5A_9034a
System Control Center
(SCC) (99018)
Controller Board 110 - 240VAC
Serial Channels 50/60Hz
CLI Diagnostic
Port
Card Cage Fans
(RS232) (77147) +5v
+12v Analog
Indexer Board Indexer Board Fused
Module Power Cord
SCC Ethernet #1 Discrete I/O #2 Discrete I/O
(200970 or 200969)
+24v W020
Port Fused
Card Cage (97010) ON/OFF
Switch
Backplane (97295) Temperature Controller Board RS232 Backplane Fuses AC/DC
Converter
+5v
+ 12v Analog +5v, + 12v DC
Power Output Signals
Controller CMIA Optics Indexer Board A-ISA Bus Indexer Board Liquid Level Temperature Power Supply
Spare Logic
Board Board #1 #2 Sense Board Controller Board +36v
(92375)
Board Slot (97306)
(78665) (76185) (90370) (90370) (78560) +24v
Discrete
I/O +17.5v Cooler +17.5v, +24v, +36v DC
Carrier Transport
Sol Ctrl Power Output Signals
Theta Encoder RS422
DC Driver I/O Motor Driver Motor Driver Heater_Cooler
Discrete Board
Board Board #1 Board #2
I/O SPI (900085) (900080) (900080) (97280)
Status & Control Signals
RSH
Distribution
Board +24v Fused +12v Analog +5v
RS232 +5v Fused Fused Fused
Bar Code +12v Analog Stepper

DC Motor DC Heaters
Reader Fused
Sensors Motors
DC Heater Reagent
RS232 Distribution
Brushless DC Home Temp Sensors Temp Sensor
Motors Sensors +5v +12v Analog Board (98000)
Reagent Cooler
Fused Fused Stepper
Cooling Fan Assy (97180) Solenoids
Sensors Incremental Motors
Encoder (optional) Cooler TED’s
Home
Solenoids Temp Sensors Sensors
Processing Center Distribution Board (97275) Probe Crash
Sensors
Detect Incremental
CMIA +24v Upper Fan Encoder
Carrier Transport Sensors Reader Processing Center Fused
RSH I/O Interrupt Pressure Reagent
RSH Reset +24v
Sensor Cooler Lower Reagent Carousel Area
+5v Fused Fused
Ambient Temperature Fan
Thermistor
PM +5v
Interface Fuse
Stepper Motor d
Carrier Transport Board Drive Signals
(97285) Ambient Home
Stepper Home Temperature Incremental Encoder & Sensors
Motors Sensors RS232 Vacuum
Thermistor Bar Code Reader Home Sensor Signals Pump Sensors Solenoids
Absolute +12v Analog Fused Motor
Encoder
RSH Distribution Reagent Bottle Stepper
Rotator Motors
Board (97265) Waste
Incremental Pump
Sensors LLS Sample
Encoders Motor
Antenna Board Liquid Level
(97255) Sense
Transfer Home
Transmit
Flex Cable Pump Sensors Fluidics
Probe
Sensors LED's Sensors LED's Motor Distribution Board
LLS Reagent LLS Process Pipettor Board Stepper (98010)
Serial Data Cooling
Priority Load_Unload Board Standard Load_Unload Board Antenna Path Antenna (97290) +24v Motors
Transfer Fan
(900050) (900055) Assembly Assembly Fused (optional)
(97247) (202062)
Retest Sample Handler (RSH) Pipettor Fluidics Area
LLS Antennae
5A_9033a
Processing Center
To Cardcage Fused Power:

To Indexer Board #1: To DC Driver I/O Board: To Motor Driver Board #1: Power Supply (97306)
To Card Cage Fused Power: +5V & +5V Return
Process Path Encoder (D) WZ Dispense Valve #1 Process Path Motor
+12V Analog & +12V To Controller Board:
Process Path Home Sensor WZ Dispense Valve #2 RV Loader Motor
Analog Return WZ Inlet Diverter On Sensor To Card Cage Power:
(D) WZ Dispense Valve #3 To Motor Driver Board #2:
(D)
RV Loader Home Sensor (D) WZ Bypass Valve Wash Zone Motor +5V & +5V Return
WZ Outlet Diverter On Sensor To Card Cage +24V Fused +/-12V Analog & +/-12V Analog
To Temperature Controller To Indexer Board #2: WZ Aspirate Valve
(D)
Board: Wash Zone Home Sensor (D) WZ Inlet Diverter Solenoid Power: Return
Unload Diverter On Sensor (D) Processing Center Fan
To DC Driver I/O Board: WZ Outlet Diverter Solenoid +17.5V Cooler & +17.5V Cooler
Process Path Thermistor To CMIA Optics Board:
Vortexer #1 Up/Down Sensor Wash Cup Outer Drain Valve
Zone #1 RV Picked Sensor (D) Return
(D) Wash Cup Inner Drain Valve
Process Path Thermistor Lower Hopper Level Sensor
Vortexer #2 Up/Down Sensor Wash Cup Upper Valve
+24V & +24V Return
(D) +36V & +36V Return
Zone #2 (D) Unload Diverter Solenoid
RV Present Sensor (D)
Process Path Thermistor Vortexer #1 Hall Sensors (D) RV Hopper Door Solenoid
WZ Inlet Diverter Off Sensor
Vortexer #2 Hall Sensors (D) RV Gate Solenoid To Controller Board:
Zone #3 (D) W020
Shutter Solenoid A/C Fail (D)
WZ Temperature Sensor #1 WZ Outlet Diverter Off Sensor
Vortexer #1
Pipettor WZ Temperature Sensor #2 (D)
Vortexer #2
A/C Over Voltage (D) 200970 (250VAC Module Power Cord)
Unload Diverter Off Sensor (D) A/C Under Voltage (D)
WZ Temperature Sensor #3 or
To Card Cage Fused Power: RV Unloader Sensor (D) A/C Power
To Motor Driver WZ Buffer Thermistor To Heater_Cooler Board: Power Supply Over 200969 (125VAC Module Power Cord)
+5V & +5V Return RV Gate Sensor (D)
Board #1: Process Path Heater Zone #1 Temperature (D)
+12V Analog & +12V Analog Spare Thermistor Shutter Open Sensor (D)
Process Path Heater Zone #2
Return Shutter Closed Sensor (D) Power Supply All Off (S)
Process Path Heater Zone #3
Pipettor Theta Axis To CMIA Optics Board: Top Cover Sensor (S)
WZ Buffer Heater
Power Supply Maintenance
To Indexer Board #1: Motor CMIA Reader PMT Control Spare Heater Mode (S)
Pipettor Theta Home Sensor (D) Pipettor Z Axis
Pipettor Z Home Sensor (D)
CMIA Reader PMT Output System Control Center (99018)
Motor
To Liquid Level Sense Board: To Controller Board:
Probe Crash Limit Sensor (D) 97221 (PC Solenoid-Fan) SCC Ethernet Port (D)
Pressure Monitor
97224 (PC Analog)

97237 (PC Motor-Heater) CLI Diagnostic RS232 Port (S)
LLS Transmit
97222 (PC Digital)

Direct Connection
Coax
W002
W019 W005
W001
97223 97201 (Ethernet)
W004
W003
(CMIA Optics)
202391 (CLI Diagnostic RS232)
W018
97203 (Pipettor Motors) | Card Cage Fan 1
(77147)
W017 Card Cage (97010)
97204 (Pipettor Sensor-Encoder-PM) Backplane (97295) Card Cage Fan 2
(77147)
Digital / Analog PC Boards: Power Driver PC Boards: W006
Controller Board (78665) DC Driver I/O Board 97212 (Reagent Cooler)
W016 CMIA Optics Board (76185) (900085) W007
97241 (RSH Sensors-Communication) Indexer Board #1 (90370) Motor Driver Board #1 97244 (Reagent Carousel Area Mtrs-Sol)
W015 Indexer Board #2 (90370) (900080)
97240 (RSH Motors ) | Liquid Level Sense Board W008
Motor Driver Board #2
(92375) 97242 (Reagent Carousel Area Sensor)
(900080)
Retest Sample Handler (RSH) Temperature Controller Heater_Cooler Board W009
Board (78560) (97280) 97213 (Reagent Cooler Therm-Fan)
To Card Cage Fused Power: To Motor Driver Board
+5V & +5V Return #2:
W014
97248
(Coax)
W013
97249
Carrier Transport X-Motor LLS Antennae

To Controller Board: Reagent Carousel Area
Carrier Transport Theta
RSH Reset (S)
(Motor)
97230
(SOL)
(SNSR)
97225
W012
W011
Motor
W010
Bar Code Reader RS232 (S)
97226
Carrier Transport Theta Encoder RS422 Carrier Transport Z-Motor To Card Cage Fused Power:
(D): Reagent Bottle Rotator +/-12V Analog & +/-12V Analog Return To Temperature Controller To Card Cage Fused Power:
Carrier Transport Theta Encoder Data Motor To Liquid Level Sense Board: Board: +5V & +5V Return
Carrier Transport Theta Encoder
LLS Input Reagent Cooler Monitor +12V Analog & +12V Analog To DC Driver I/O Board:
Home Thermistor Return Trigger Dispense Valve
RSH Distribution Board RS232 (S): To Card Cage Fused Power: To Card Cage +24V Fused
+5V & +5V Return
Trigger Bypass Valve
Load_Unload Board Sensors Power:
Load_Unload Board LEDs To Controller Board: To Heater_Cooler Board: To CMIA Optics Board : Pre-trigger Dispense
Lower Fluidics Fan
RSH CPLD Reset Waste Pump Pressure Switch (D) Reagent Cooler Control Reagent Carousel Cover Interlock Valve
Rail Guide Sensor Emitter Power To CMIA Optics Board: To DC Driver I/O Board: Thermistor Sensor (D) Pre-trigger Bypass Valve
Load_Unload Board Sensor Error Buffer Full Sensor (S) Reagent Cooler Lower Fan Reagent Access Door Open
Reagent Cooler Condensate
Load_Unload Board LED Error Buffer Low Sensor (S) PWM
RSH CPLD Error Buffer Empty Sensor (S) Valve Sensor (D) To Heater_Cooler Board:
Trigger Level Sensor (S) Accumlulator Drain Valve Reagent Cooler Lower Fan Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor (D) Reagent Cooler TED's (1-
To CMIA Optics Board: Fluidics Area Pre-trigger Level Sensor (S) Pipettor Syringe Valve Tach Aux Reagent Carousel Cover 4)
Spare Carrier Transport Sensor (D) Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor (S) WZ Pump Valve Sensor (S) Pre-trigger_Trigger
Rail Guide Sensor (D) Liquid in Accumulator Sensor (S) Buffer Inlet Valve To Card Cage +24V Fused Reagent Carrier Latch Sensor (D) Heater
RSH I/O Interrupt (D) Solid Waste Container Present Sensor Vacuum Filter Valve Power:
Reagent Bottle Rotator Home Sensor (D) (D)
Liquid Waste Level Sensor (D) Reagent Cooler Upper Fan To Indexer Board #1: To Motor Driver Board #1:
To Motor Driver Board #1:
To Indexer Board #2: Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor (D) Reagent Cooler Lower Fan Reagent Carousel Encoder (D) Reagent Carousel Motor
Carrier Transport X Encoder (D) Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor (D) Reagent Carousel Home Sensor Reagent Access Door
Buffer Pump Motor
Carrier Transport X Home Sensor (D) Trigger Pump Home Sensor (D) (D) Motor
Carrier Transport Z Encoder (D) WZ Pump Home Sensor (D)
Carrier Transport Z Home Sensor (D) Buffer Pump Home Sensor (D) To Motor Driver Board #2: Reagent Access Door Home
Carrier Transport Theta Home Sensor To Indexer Board #1: Pre-trigger Pump Motor Sensor (D)
(D) Pipettor Syringe Home Sensor (D) Trigger Pump Motor Reagent Access Door Open
Reagent Bottle Rotator Home Sensor (D) Buffer Pump Home Sensor (D) WZ Pump Motor Sensor (D)
To Indexer Board #2:
To Temperature Controller Board: Pre-trigger Pump Home Sensor (D) To Heater_Cooler Board:
Ambient Temperature Thermistor Trigger Pump Home Sensor (D)
To Temperature Controller Board:
Waste Pump Motor
WZ Pump Home Sensor (D) Pre-trigger_Trigger Thermistor
Vacuum Pump Motor
Transfer Pump Motor 5A_9032a
POWER
PROCESSING CENTER SUPPLY
LEGEND:
DC Voltages A/C
Process Path Heating
Solid Black Rectangle Denotes a Status Outputs
Connector Process Path Motor / Home Sensor / Encoder Power
Power OFF Input
RV Loader Motor, Solenoids, & Sensors
Hollow Pipe with Arrowheads Maintenance Mode Input
Diverters
Denotes a Cable
Wash Zone Motor / Home Sensor / Valves / Heater /
Temp Sensors
Vortexers / Up-Down Sensors SYSTEM CONTROL
PIPETTOR Shutter
LLS Transmit Antenna CMIA Reader CENTER
Top Cover Sensor
Pressure Monitor
Probe Crash Sensor
(SCC)
Pipettor Motors / Home Sensors System Control Center Ethernet Port
CLI Diagnostic RS232 Port
Direct Connection
Card Cage
Fans
CARD CAGE
Backplane
Digital PC Boards
Analog PC Boards
Power Driver PC Boards
RETEST SAMPLE HANDLER

(RSH)
Carrier Transport Motors / Home Sensors / Encoders
Bar Code Reader
Load_Unload Area Indicators / Sensors REAGENT CAROUSEL
Serial Communications / Reset / Interrupts AREA
Ambient Temperature Thermistor
Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor / Home Sensor
FLUIDICS AREA Reagent Cooler TED's / Fans / Thermistors
Vacuum System / Sensors Reagent Carousel Motor / Home Sensor / Encoder
Buffer Level Sense Reagent Access Door Motor / Sensors
Pre-trigger / Trigger Level Sensors Aux Reagent Carousel Cover Sensor
LLS Waste Sensors Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor & Carousel Cover
Pre-trigger, Trigger Buffer Pumps / Sensors Interlock Sensor
Antennae Pre-trigger / Trigger Valves & Heater
Dispense Pumps & Sensors
Pipettor Syringe Motor / Sensor / Valve
Liquid Waste System / Sensors
5A_9030a
Carrier Transport Board Engineering Schematic
Flex Cable Assembly

(97210) W500
15 Pins 8 Pins
Cable_ X-Motor (97202) 4
Shield Carrier Transport Board (97285) Carrier Transport X-
4 5 Pins Motor/Encoder (98155)
Carrier Transport X-Motor 4 4 6 Pins Cable_ X-Encoder (97211)
Carrier Transport Theta Motor 4 4 6 Pins (Theta Motor) 4
Carrier Transport Z-Motor 4 4 6 Pins Carrier Transport Theta
To +5V Fused (2 Pins) TP +5V LT1117 3.3V (Theta Encoder) 14 Motor/Abs. Encoder (97142)
+5V
RSH Dist. Board G Regulator
GND (2 Pins) LED
TP (Z-Motor) 4
GND 75C1168 TP +3.3V
CPLD Comm Interface 6 3 Carrier Transport Z-
Differential 4 5 Pins
2 6 Pins Cable_ Z-Encoder (201279) Motor/Encoder (201278)
Shield Transceiver
(9615 Hz) 12 20 Pins

6
15 Pins JTAG Header Xilinx XC95288XL
CPLD (98187) 2 6 Pins
5
GX-Home LED 4 Carrier Transport
Test Header
X Home Sensor
5 Pins (97220)
Z-Home LEDG
Carrier Transport
Z Home Sensor
CPLD Error LED Carrier Transport

A
G Theta Home Sensor
Theta Home LED G Rail Guide LED Rail Guide
4
Sensor
Sensor Emitter Power
(97235)
5 Pins 5A_9050a
A1.01 RV Loader Assembly (written to be customer-replaceable with
Version - 201975-103_421_4
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
List/Part Number Description
7-97003-01 Assy, RV Loader, Complete
7-97003-02 Assy, RV Loader, Complete
Inspect tools for damage, ensure calibration is not expired and replace if necessary.
A1.01 RV Loader Assembly (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Time Required 20 min

Tools/Materials Phillips Head Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Action Steps Reference
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations

Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module status must
be Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
1. Power Off the processing module.
2. Open the processing center cover to

access the RV loader assembly.
3. Position pipettor arm over the

reagent carousel area. [1]
4. Remove and save any RV's from the

upper hopper. [2]
5. Place RV Loader Chute in up

position. [3]
6. Remove Process Path internal cover.
Note
Refer to the processing center
map located on the top cover
for the RV loader location
(RVL).
7. Remove the distribution board

internal cover by loosening the three
(3) green captive screws. [4]
8. Locate the RV loader assembly.
Note
for the RV loader location
(RVL).
VIDEO
Remove RV
Note
Loader
Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly
(If the video does not display, or to view the video full size: Click Here)
Remove RV
Loader
1. Loosen the green captive screw
Assembly
securing the RV loader to the
module. [1]
2. Remove the RV Loader from the

processing module. [3]
3. Disconnect the RV loader assembly

cable W106 from the distribution
board J16 connector. [2]
Replacement
VIDEO
Install RV
Note
Loader
Assembly
Install RV
Loader
1. Connect the cable W106 to the J16
Assembly
connector on the distribution board. [2]
2. Install the RV loader assembly by

aligning it onto the mounting feature.
3. Tighten the green captive screw to

secure the RV loader assembly to the
module. [1]
Note
Ensure Hopper is secured and
stable to the base to allow RVs to
be inserted into the process path
without error.
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
for System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the distribution board internal
Operation Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
cover [1] and tighten the three (3)
screws to secure the cover to the
module.
Note
Ensure the cover is seated inside
the metal guide near the Reagent
Cover to prevent probe damage.
2. Replace RVs to the Upper Hopper

removed previously.
3. Replace the internal process path cover.

Note
Reseat the Process distribution

Board Cover inside the guide if
the process path cover is higher
than Reagent Cover and the
probe hits the process path
cover.
4. Load RV's into upper hopper, if removed

previously.
5. Close the processing center cover.
6. Power ON the processing module.
Note
The system control center power

must be ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to turning on the
processing model to verify proper
initialization.
7. Perform the Startup procedure to

change the status of the processing
module and sample handler status from
Stopped to Ready.
Verification Procedures
Order VP Description VP Detail / Note Expected Results
1 G9 - System Power Verify system powers ON and starts up/
initializes successfully.
Verify system powers ON and starts up/

2 G23 - Initialization/ Startup Verify instrument initializes and/or starts up.
Verify instrument initializes and/or starts up.

N/A G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
released Operation and Service Procedures. If
the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in
specification and calibrate as necessary.
A1.02 RV Hopper Door Solenoid Version - 201975-103_468_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200201-01 Solenoid, RV Hopper Door
A1.02 RV Hopper Door Solenoid

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

Processing System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown.
Module Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Remove
RV Loader
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws and
Assembly
open the RV hopper cover. [1]
2. Disconnect the RV loader cable W106
from the solenoid cable [2] and
distance sensor. [3]
3. Remove RV hopper cover.
Remove
RV
1. Remove screw on left [4] and loosen
Solenoid
screw in middle [5] to lift upper RV
hopper and remove RV hopper door.
2. Remove screw [7] to solenoid cable
clamp and remove clamp from cable.
Note
Hold onto solenoid when
removing nuts that secure
solenoid.
3. Remove two (2) nuts [6] securing

solenoid to RV loader cover.
4. Remove solenoid from RV loader
cover.
Replacement
Install RV Solenoid
1. Secure solenoid on RV cover using two (2) nuts.
2. Install solenoid cable into clamp and secure using screw to RV loader cover.
3. Install hopper door onto solenoid and secure upper hopper using screws.
4. Connect the RV loader cable W106 to solenoid cable and distance sensor.
5. Install RV hopper cover to the RB loader assembly using two (2) captive screws.
1 P-248 Startup and Shutdown Verify and document the following:
Verify processing modules and sample

handler come to a Stopped status without
errors.
handler come to Ready status without errors
when Startup is selected.
A1.03 Upper RV Hopper Version - 201975-103_479_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200274-01 Hopper, Upper, RV Loader
A1.03 Upper RV Hopper

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Remove
Upper RV Caution
Hopper The Upper RV Hopper holds the RV
loader door in place.
1. Open processing center cover.

2. Remove three (3) screws that secure
upper RV hopper to RV hopper
cover.
3. Remove upper RV hopper.
Replacement

Install Upper RV Hopper
1. Verify RV loader door is positioned correctly onto the solenoid mount.
2. Secure upper RV hopper to the RV hopper cover using three (3) screws.
1 4150 - Functional Area Tests
A1.04 RV Loader Motor Version - 201975-103_490_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97371-01 Motor, RV Loader
A1.04 RV Loader Motor

Tools/Materials #1 Phillips Head Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove RV
Loader
Assembly
2. Remove RV's from the upper and lower hoppers, keep
separated.
Note
RV's will be returned to their respective hoppers
during re-installation to keep the system RV
counter synchronized.
3. Remove appropriate internal cover(s).
4. Disconnect cable (W106) from processing center

distribution board at connection J16. [1]
5. Loosen the green captive screw securing RV loader to

instrument base.
6. Remove RV loader from module.
7. Remove RVs. Retain RVs for use later.

Remove RV
Loader Motor
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws and carefully lay
RV hopper cover to the side
2. Disconnect hopper cable W106 from solenoid cable [2]
and sensor.[3]
3. Remove screw securing the pickup to the motor shaft
and remove the pickup. [4]
4. Remove screw securing the motor home sensor cable
to the RV loader assembly. [5]
5. Disconnect cable W106 from RV loader motor.
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the motor to the
mount.
7. Remove RV loader motor.
Replacement
Install RV
Loader Motor
1. Install motor and secure to the RV loader mount
using two (2) screws.
Note
Orient motor so that the cable motor
connector is 90 degrees to the right of the
motor home sensor.
2. Install the pickup to motor [6] shaft by aligning hole

on the pickup and guide pin on shaft.
Note
When placing the RV pickup onto the motor
the arms should be pointing clockwise.
3. Secure the pickup to the shaft using screw. [4]

4. Install the home sensor and secure using screw.
5. Connect the hopper cable to sensor and solenoid on
RV hopper cover
6. Install RV hopper cover.
Install RV
Loader
1. Align the RV loader to mounting feature on
Assembly
instrument base.
2. Secure RV loader assembly using the captive
screw.
3. Connect the cable W106 to connection J16 on
4. Load RVs into upper and lower hoppers exactly as
removed in Step 2 - Remove RV Loader Assembly.

errors.
A1.05 RV Remover Version - 201975-103_501_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200269-01 Remover, RV
A1.05 RV Remover

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove RV
Remover
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws securing the
hopper cover to the hopper. [1]
3. Remove hopper cover from hopper.
4. Unscrew the two (2) captive screws [2] securing the
RV remover to the RV hopper mount.
5. Remove RV remover.
Replacement
Install RV Remover
1. Install RV remover to RV hopper mount using two (2) captive screws.
2. Secure hopper cover to RV loader assembly using two (2) captive screws.

errors.
A1.06 RV Main Chute Cover Version - 201975-103_512_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97378-01 Cover, RV Loader Main Chute
A1.06 RV Main Chute Cover

Tools/Materials Phillips screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite
1. The processing module status must be Stopped
or Offline.
Remove RV Main
Chute Cover
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [1] and
carefully lay the RV hopper cover to the side.
3. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [2] securing
the cover to the chute.
4. Gently pull cover apart from RV hopper mount.
Replacement
Install RV Main Chute Cover

1. Align the holes in RV Main Chute cover with guide pins on mount.
2. Secure cover to mount using two (2) captive screws.
3. Install RV hopper cover using two (2) captive screws.
A1.07 RV Lower Chute Version - 201975-103_523_2
List/Part Numbers
205152-101 Shoulder screw, .25 DIA X .50 SS
205152-102 SCREW, SHOULDER, .25 DIA X .50 SS
7-97376-01 Chute, RV Loader Lower
A1.07 RV Lower Chute

Tools/Materials #1 and #2 Phillips Head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite
or Offline.
Remove RV Lower
Chute
2. Remove shoulder screw [1] holding lower chute to
RV Hopper mount.
3. Remove lower chute. [2]
4. Gently pull plastic cover off of lower chute.[3]
Replacement
Install RV Lower Chute

1. Snap plastic cover onto the lower chute.
2. Install lower chute to mount using shoulder screw.
A1.08 RV Hopper Cover Version - 201975-103_534_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97366-01 Cover, RV Hopper
A1.08 RV Hopper Cover

Tools/Materials 5/16" nut driver
Phillips head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove RV Hopper
Cover
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws. [1]
3. Disconnect the distance sensor [3] and door
solenoid cables [2] and remove the cover.
4. Remove three (3) screws [4] that secure upper
RV hopper to the cover.
Remove RV Hopper
Cover (continued)
1. Remove upper RV hopper.
2. Lift the door from solenoid mount. [5]
3. Remove solenoid by unscrewing the two (2)
nuts [6] using a 5/16" nut driver.
4. Remove screw holding solenoid cable clamp [7]
to cover.
5. Remove two (2) screws [8] securing sensor to
hopper cover.
Replacement
Install RV Hopper Cover

1. Install sensor, solenoid, door and upper hopper onto replacement cover.
2. Connect the cable Hopper connectors to sensor and solenoid.
3. Attach the hopper cover to hopper using the two (2) captive screws.

errors.
A1.09 RV Lower Hopper Version - 201975-103_544_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97041-01 Hopper, Lower, RV Loader
A1.09 RV Lower Hopper

Tools/Materials #1 Phillips head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove RV
Loader Assembly
2. Remove appropriate internal cover(s).
distribution board at connection J16. [1]
4. Loosen the screw securing RV loader to instrument
base.
5. Remove RV loader from module.
6. Remove RVs. Retain for use later.
Remove RV
Pickup Assembly
1. Unscrew the two (2) captive screws securing the
hopper cover to the hopper.
2. Disconnect the hopper cables and remove the
cover.
3. Remove screw securing the pickup to the motor
shaft.
4. Remove the pickup.
Remove RV
Remover
1. Unscrew the two (2) captive screws securing the
remover to the RV loader.
2. Remove RV remover.
Remove RV
Lower Hopper
1. Unscrew the two (2) small Phillips head screws
securing the lower hopper to the mount.
2. Remove lower hopper.
Replacement
Install RV Lower
Hopper
1. Attach the lower hopper to mount using the two (2) small phillips head screws.
Install RV
Remover
1. Align the two (2) captive screws of RV brush with holes in RV hopper and tighten to secure to
RV hopper mount.
Install RV Pickup
1. Align the hole in RV pickup with alignment pin on the shaft of the RV motor. and secure the
RV pickup to motor shaft using the Phillips head screw.
Install RV Loader
Assembly
1. Secure RV loader to instrument base by tightening the two (2) captive screws.
2. Connect the cable (W106) to processing center distribution board at connection J16.
3. Install appropriate internal cover(s).

errors.
A1.10 RV Pickup Assembly Version - 201975-103_422_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97375-01 Assy, RV Pickup
A1.10 RV Pickup Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. The processing module status must be Stopped or
Module
Offline.
Remove RV
Pickup Assembly
2. Remove RV hopper cover by loosing the two (2)
captive screws and carefully laying to the side.
3. Remove screw securing the pickup to the motor
shaft and remove pickup.
Replacement
Install RV Pickup
Assembly
1. Align the hole in RV pickup with alignment pin [6]
on the shaft of the RV motor.
2. Install RV pickup with arms pointing in a clockwise
direction.
3. Secure the RV pickup to motor shaft using the
Phillips head screw.
A1.11 Distance Sensor Version - 201975-103_433_2
List/Part Numbers
7-100038-01 Sensor, Distance Measure Type
A1.11 Distance Sensor

Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit
Soldering kit
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Remove Distance Sensor

(RV Loader Assembly Only)
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [1]
securing the hopper cover to the hopper.
3. Turn over hopper cover.
4. Disconnect the cable [2] from distance
sensor.
5. Remove the two (2) screws [3] securing
the sensor to the cover.
6. Remove distance sensor.
Remove Distance Sensor
(Solid Waste Sensor
1. Remove fluidics panel.
Assembly Only)
2. Remove screw [4] securing solid waste
sensor assembly to instrument wall.
3. Lift up on sensor assembly and remove.
4. Disconnect the cable from distance
sensor.
5. Remove two (2) screws securing
distance sensor to bracket.
6. Remove distance sensor.
Replacement
Install Distance Sensor (RV Loader Assembly Only)

1. Connect the cable to sensor.
2. Attach the sensor to hopper cover using the two (2)
screws.
3. Secure the hopper cover to the hopper using two (2)
captive screws.
4. Close the processing module cover.
Remove Distance Sensor (Solid Waste Sensor

Assembly Only)
1. Secure distance sensor to bracket using two (2) screws.
2. Connect the cable to distance sensor.
3. Secure the sensor assembly to the instrument wall using
a screw.
4. Install fluidics panel.
errors.
3 3190 - Waste Sensors Test
A1.12 RV Loader Motor & Sensor Cable Version - 201975-103_444_3
List/Part Numbers
7-98028-01 Cable, RV Loader, Motor and Sensors, W106
A1.12 RV Loader Motor & Sensor Cable
Time Required 5 min

Tools/Materials #2 Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove RV
Loader Motor and
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws securing cover
Sensor Cable
to RV loader assembly. [1]
2. Turn cover over and disconnect solenoid cable [2]

and distance sensor [3].
3. Remove cover.
4. Remove RV's from the upper and lower hoppers,

keep separated.
Note
RV's will be returned to their respective
hoppers during re-installation to keep the
system RV counter synchronized.
5. Remove cable (W106) from cable clamps.
6. Disconnect the MOTOR end of cable (W106) from

motor. [4]
7. Remove screw securing the HOME sensor end of

cable. [5]
8. Remove screw securing the PICKED sensor. [6]
9. Remove cable (W106).

distribution board at connection J16.
Replacement
Install RV Loader Motor and Sensor

Cable
1. Connect the MOTOR end of cable to loader motor.
2. Install HOME sensor end of cable and secure using screw.
3. Install the PICKED sensor end of cable and secure using screw.
4. Route cable under clamps.
5. Connect the distance sensor and solenoid cable.
6. Tighten two (2) captive screws to secure cover to RV loader assembly.
7. Connect the cable (W106) to processing center distribution board at

connection J16.
8. Load RV's into upper and lower hoppers exactly as removed above.
errors.
B1.01 Process Path Track w/Heater Version - 201975-103_455_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200481-01 Assy, Process Path Track with Heater
7-200481-02 Assy, Process Path Track with Heater
B1.01 Process Path Track w/Heater
Time Required 1.0 hr

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Position pipettor arm over the reagent
carousel area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport to the far left
on the transport guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal covers for the
processing center and the processing
center distribution board.
Remove RV Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the
RV loader to the instrument base.
2. Move the RV loader [3] out of the
processing center area.
Note
Do not disconnect cable
connection to processing center
PCB.
Remove Wash Zone Probe
Mount
1. Loosen the two (2) captive screws that
secure the wash zone assembly (WZ) to
the process path (PP) assembly. [4]
2. Lift the WZ from the PP and place on the
aspiration platform cover. [5]
Note
Do not disconnect tubing or
cables..
Remove Wash Manifold

and Buffer Heater
1. Loosen the thumbscrew that secures the
Assembly
wash zone manifold (WZM) to the PP
cover. [6]
2. Lift the WZM with the buffer heater
assembly from the PP.
3. Disconnect the buffer flush tubing from
the WZM. [7]
4. Carefully lay WZM with heater assembly
clear of PP assembly. [8]
Note
Do not disconnect any other tubing
or cable connectors to the WZM.
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger Manifold
1. Loosen the two (2) thumbscrews that
and Heater Assembly
secure Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold
(PT/TM) to PP. [9]
Note
Do not disconnect any cables or
tubing from manifold heater
assembly.
2. Lift the PT/TM with Pre-trigger/Trigger

(PT/T) heater assembly from PP.
3. Carefully lay manifold with PT/T heater
clear of PP. [10]
Remove ITV Assemblies

1. Press down on green knob and turn
clockwise to release Vortexer 1 from a
locked position.
Note
Arrow should be pointing away
from the process path.
2. Lift the ITV assembly slightly to clear

alignment pins.
3. Lower ITV assembly slightly to clear
underside of the process path assembly
and move away from the process path.
4. Lay ITV assembly on base of processing
chamber.
5. Repeat steps 1-5 for removal of Vortexer
2.
Remove Process Path

Cover
1. Grasp PP motor and the opposite side of
PP cover and carefully lift assembly from
PP track.
Note
connections to processing center
distribution board.
2. Carefully lay PP cover to the side clear of

PP track.
Remove Wash Cup

Assembly
1. Loosen the captive screw that secures
wash cup assembly to PP.
2. Disconnect the three solenoid
connections S1, S2, and S3.
Note
Do not disconnect vacuum
accumulator to wash tubing (VA<->
WC).
3. Position wash cup assembly outside of

process center area.
Remove Optics Assembly

1. Loosen the two (2) silver captive screws
that secure optics assembly to the
process path track.
Note
connections to optics assembly.
2. Remove optics assembly from the

process path track and lay in the base of
instrument.
Caution
Once the CMIA reader is clear of
the process path track place a cap
or thick black cover over lens and
the light pipe.
Remove Shutter Assembly

Caution
Support shutter assembly underneath PP
before loosening the captive screws. The
shutter drops and could be damaged.
1. Loosen the two (2) green captive screws

that secure shutter assembly to PP track.
2. Carefully lay shutter assembly on
instrument base.
Remove Process Path LLS

1. Pull PP LLS straight out from track.
Note
do not disconnect cable
connection.
2. Lay PP LLS on instrument base.
Disconnect Cables at
Processing Center
1. Disconnect the following cables from the
Distribution PCB and
processing center distribution PCB:
Remove Track
PP home sensor W102 at J3
RV present W103 at J5
PP thermistors W111 at J19
PP heater W110 at J11
2. Open tie wrap at processing center

distribution PCB to release cables.
3. Loosen the three (3) green captive
screws that secure PP track to instrument
base plate.
4. Carefully lift PP track from module.
Remove RV Present
Switch, Process Path Home
1. Remove the RV present switch and
Sensor, and iLC Disc
remove cable from clamp.
2. Remove PP home sensor from PP track
and remove cable from clamp.
Note
Do not disconnect cable W103
from sensor.
3. Remove the iLC Disc from PP track.
Remove Shutter, Wash

Magnets and
1. Remove the following components from
Cal_Target_Support
the PP track:
Shutter Magnet
Cal_Target_Support
Wash magnets
2. Do not discard screws or magnets.
Remove Thermistors and

Clamps
1. Disconnect the PP thermistors cable
W111 from thermistors and remove from
PP track.
2. Remove thermistors from PP track using
a 1/4" slotted driver or open-ended
wrench.
3. Remove all remaining clamps from track.
Retain for use later.
Replacement
Install Thermistors and

Clamps
1. Install the clamps removed in previous removal
steps.
2.
Install thermistors to PP track using a ¼"
open-ended wrench or thermistor wrench
provide with new thermistor.
3. Install PP thermistor cable W111 to thermistors
and route cable through clamps.
Install Shutter and

Wash Magnets,
1. Install the following components to the PP:
Cal_Target_Support
Shutter Magnet
Cal_Target_Support
Wash magnets
Install Process Path

Track Caution
Orient cables towards the instrument rear and
verify they do not obstruct track being level on
instrument base.
1. Install PP track onto instrument base using

alignment pins as guides.
2. Use three (3) green captive screws to secure
PP track to instrument base plate.
Install Shutter
Assembly
1. With the shutter positioned underneath the PP
assembly, carefully lift the shutter assembly
through the PP until the assembly bracket is
flush with the PP mounting brackets.
2. While holding assembly flush to PP mounting
bracket, use the two (2) green captive screws
to secure assembly to PP track.
Install Optics
Assembly
1. Remove protective covering from lens and light
pipe.
2. Carefully slide optics assembly into PP and
align with guide pins.
3. Verify optics is flush with PP and secure using
two (2) silver captive screws.
Note
Verify cable connections are secure.
Install Wash Cup

Assembly
1. Connect the three solenoid connections S1,
S2, and S3.
2. Install wash cup assembly.
Note
Verify VA<-> WC tubing is not crimped
or pinched
Install RV Present,
Process Path Home
1. Install the following components:
Sensor and iLC Disc
iLC Disc
RV present sensor
2. Verify switch is mounted flush [1] to the
process path and biased (pushed) [2] toward
the process path disk before tightening the
screw.
Note
Do not over tighten the screw
(could bind the switch
mechanism.
Note
Keep cables from sensor clear of
PP track top surface.
PP home sensor with cable W103
PP LLS PCB
Note
Use graphic as reference for LLS
PCB cable connections.
Connect Cables at
Processing Center
1. Connect the following cables to the processing
Distribution PCB
center distribution PCB:
PP home sensor W102 at J3

RV present W103 at J5
Note
Verify RV present switch
connection has clamp oriented
towards the left when installing.
PP thermistors W111 at J19

PP heater W110 at J11
2. Use tie wrap at processing center distribution

PCB to secure cables.

Cover
1. Carefully install the PP cover onto track using
alignment pins as guides.
Caution
Take care not to damage PP home
sensor and iLC Disc.
2. Verify PP cover is flush with track.

3. Open access door to verify disc moves freely
on the track.
Install ITV Assemblies

1. Tilt the bottom of the ITV assembly underneath
the PP then lift up.
2. Place the assembly on the three (3) alignment
pins.
3. Lock ITV assembly into position.
Note
Verify ITV assembly is seated correctly
on alignment pins and arrow on green
knob is pointing towards the process
path.
Install Pre-
trigger/Trigger
1. Use alignment pins on PP cover and install the
Manifold and Heater
PT/T manifold and the heater assembly onto
Assembly
the PP cover.
2. Secure PT/T manifold to cover using two (2)
thumbscrews
Install Wash Manifold

and Buffer Heater
1. Use alignment pins on PP cover to install the
Assembly
wash manifold and the buffer heater assembly
onto the PP cover.
2. Secure the wash manifold with the buffer
heater assembly to cover using thumbscrew.
Install Wash Zone

Probe Mount
1. Install WZ mechanism onto the process path
and tighten thumbscrews.
Caution
Verify valve cables from wash manifold
are not underneath.
Install RV Loader
1. Install RV loader onto instrument mount and
secure using green captive screw.
2. Install the internal covers for the processing
center and the processing center distribution
board.
7 G4 - Control Run Verify controls are within specifications for Controls within specifications = Pass
assay(s)/ parameter(s).

errors.
3 1022 - Optics Background
2 1032 - Shutter Test
5 1110 - Pipettor Calibration
4 2137 - Flush Fluids Select and flush related fluidics system(s) or Verify there are no leaks and fluid dispenses
pump(s) three (3) times to ensure lines are without error.
filled with fluid.
6 3540 - Temperature Status
B1.02 Thermistor, P Path Version - 201975-103_462_4
List/Part Numbers
7-77991-01 Thermistor, P Path
B1.02 Thermistor, P Path
Note
These videos represent simulated scenarios of instrument access and repair, and some may not accurately depict actual PPE
guidelines. Trained personnel should follow procedures as outlined in Biological Hazards and safety procedures.

Thermistor removal wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown. For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Processing Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Module
Preparation
1. Open the processing module cover.
2. Remove the appropriate internal

components.
3. Locate the process path

thermistor(s) to be replaced.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Process Video contains no audio sound.
Path Note
Thermistor The procedure should be is
performed with the process path
left installed. The video
demonstrates the procedure outside
the instrument for video purposes.
Remove
Process
1. Access the appropriate thermistor.
Path
Thermistor 2. Disconnect thermistor electrical
cable.[1]
3. Using thermistor removal wrench

[2], unscrew thermistor from the
process path.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install Note
Process Video contains no audio sound.
Path Note
Thermistor The procedure should be is performed
with the process path left installed.
The video demonstrates the
procedure outside the instrument for
video purposes.
Install
Process
1. Screw thermistor into the process
Path
path.
Thermistor
Note
The thermistor should turn
easily, if not thermistor is cross
threaded. Remove and reinstall.
Note
Turn the thermistor using the
screw portion of the thermistor
to prevent damage to the cable
wires.
2. Secure thermistor to the process path

using thermistor removal wrench [2]
so it is tight.
Note
Install thermistor until all the
threads are seated into the
process path.
3. Connect thermistor electrical cable. [1]
Prepare for For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Operation Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. Install appropriate internal components
cover.

errors.
B1.03 Thermistors Cable (W111) Version - 201975-103_463_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98026-01 Cable, Process Path Thermistors, W111
7-98026-02 Cable, Process Path Thermistors, W111 (RoHS)
B1.03 Thermistors Cable (W111)

Tools/Materials #1 and #2 Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
P-248 Startup and Shutdown.
Preparation
1. Open the processing module
cover to access the process
path thermistor
2. Remove the appropriate
internal components.
Remove Process For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the
Path Thermistors ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Disconnect the cable from
Cable maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
the process distribution board
connection J19.
2. Disconnect the cable from
the three (3) PP thermistors.
3. Remove cable from clamps
on PP tracks.
4. Remove cable.
Replacement
Install Process Path Thermistors

Cable
1. Connect the cable to the process distribution board connection J19.
2. Route cable through clamps on PP track and connect to the three (3) PP
thermistors.
3. Install the appropriate internal components and cover(s).

errors.
B1.04 RV Present Switch (written to be customer-replaceable with
Version - 201975-103_464_5
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-207288-01 Sensor, RV Present, Narrow Arm
7-77579-03 Sensor, RV Present
B1.04 RV Present Switch (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module status
must be Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
2. Lift the processing center cover to

access the processing center
area.
3. Remove the processing center

internal cover.
4. Locate the RV present switch. [1]
VIDEO -
Remove RV Note
Present Switch
Remove RV
Present Switch
1. Remove the non-captive screw
securing the RV present switch to
the process path. [1]
Note
Use caution when removing
screw; the screw is not
secured to the RV present
switch.
2. Remove the RV present switch

3. Disconnect the RV present switch

cable, W103, from the RV present
switch. [2]
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install RV Note
Present
Switch
Install RV
Present
1. Connect the RV present switch cable,
Switch
W103, to the RV present switch. [1]
2. Slide RV Present Switch arm into the

process path (PP) and seat the switch
securely.
3. Verify switch is mounted flush [2] to the

process path and biased (pushed) [3]
toward the process path disk.
4. Secure to PP track using screw [4].
Note
Over tightening the screw may
inhibit the switch arm movement
and result in RV load errors.

1. Replace the processing center internal
cover.
Note
Reseat the Process distribution
Board Cover inside the guide if
the process path cover is higher
than Reagent Cover and the
probe hits the process path
cover.

Note
processing module to verify
proper initialization.

Stopped to Ready.
B1.05 RV Present Switch Cable (W103) Version - 201975-103_465_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97209-01 Cable, RV Present Sensor, W103
B1.05 RV Present Switch Cable (W103)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Preparation
2. Position pipettor arm over the reagent carousel
area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport to the far left on the
transport guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal covers for the processing center
and the processing center distribution board.
Remove RV
Present Switch
1. Disconnect the RV present switch cable from switch.
Cable
2. Disconnect the cable from the process distribution
board connection J5.
3. Remove cable from clamp on processing center
tracks.
4. Remove cable.
Replacement

Install RV Present Switch
Cable
1. Connect the RV present switch cable to the process distribution board connection
J5.
2. Connect the cable to RV present switch.
3. Install the internal covers for the processing center and the processing center
distribution board.

errors.
B1.06 Process Path Disk Version - 201975-103_466_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97023-01 Disk, Process Path, i1000SR
B1.06 Process Path Disk
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard

Removal
Prerequisite Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown

.
Preparation
3. Move the carrier transport to
the far left on the transport
guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal covers for
the processing center and the
processing center distribution
board.
VIDEO
Remove RV Note
Loader Click the video and arrow icon
in the reference section to
access the video in A1.01 _RV
Loader action section: "VIDEO
- Remove RV Loader
Assembly."
Remove RV
Loader
1. Loosen the green captive
screw securing RV loader to
processing center.
2. Set the RV loader [3] out and

away from the main processing
center area.
Note
It is unnecessary to
disconnect cable from
the processing center
board.
VIDEO
Remove Wash Note
Zone Mechanism Video contains no audio sound.
and Wash
Manifold with
Buffer Heater
Assembly
Remove Wash
Zone Mechanism
1. Loosen the two (2) captive
screws that secure the wash
zone assembly (WZ) to the
process path (PP)
assembly. [4]
2. Lift the WZ from the PP and

carefully place on the
Note
disconnect tubing or
cables.
Note
Ensure probes are free
from damage to prevent
errors.
Remove Wash
Manifold and
1. Loosen the thumbscrew that
Buffer Heater
secures the wash zone
Assembly
manifold (WZM) to the PP
cover. [6]
2. Lift the WZM with the buffer

heater assembly from the PP.
3. Set the WZM and heater

assembly carefully, away from
the main PP assembly. [8]
Note
disconnect the WZM
tubing or cable
connectors.
VIDEO
Remove Pre- Note
Trigger/Trigger Video contains no audio sound.
Manifold and
Heater Assembly
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Loosen the two (2)
Manifold and
thumbscrews [1] that secure
Heater Assembly
Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold
(PT/TM) to PP.
Note
disconnect cables or
tubing from manifold or
heater assembly.
2. Lift the PT/TM with Pre-

trigger/Trigger (PT/T) heater
assembly from PP.
3. Carefully lay PT/TM with PT/T

heater clear of PP. [2]
VIDEO
Remove Process Note
Path Motor and
Process Path
Cover
Remove Process
Path Motor
1. Remove the 2 screws holding
the motor to the PP. [1].
2. Lift the motor from the process

path.
3. Set the PP motor clear of PP

carefully. [2]
Note
disconnect any cables
from the processing
Remove Process
Path Cover
1. Grasp on the opposite side of
PP cover. Carefully lift it from
the PP track.
2. Lift the cover by carefully

rocking it back and forth from
the PP track.
Note
disconnect any cable
from the processing
3. Place the PP cover to the side

away from the PP main area.
VIDEO
Remove Process Note
Path Disk Video contains no audio sound.
Remove Process
Path Disk
1. Remove all RVs in the PP
disk.
2. Remove RV present switch. [1]
Note
RV present switch screw
is non-captive.
3. Remove the process path disk.

Note
Prevent damage to the
PP home sensor [2]
when removing the PP
disk.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Process Note
Path Disk Video contains no audio sound.
Install Process
Path Disk
1. Install the process path disk.
Note
When replacing the disk,
ensure that the PP home
sensor [2] remains
undamaged.
2. Place RV Present Switch [1]

into position on the PP track.
3. Verify that the switch is

mounted flush [1] to the
process path and pushed [2]
toward the process path disk
before tightening the screw.
Note
Overtightening the screw
will prevent the switch
arm movement and will
result in errors.
VIDEO
Install Process Note
Path Cover and Video contains no audio sound.
Process Path
Motor
Install Process
Path Cover
1. Install the PP cover onto the
track carefully. Use the
alignment pins [1] as guides.
2. Verify that the PP cover seats

flush with the track.
3. Open the access door [2] and

move the disk to verify that it
moves freely on the track.
Install Process
Path Motor
1. Place PP motor into the cover.
2. Secure the motor with 2

screws. [1]
3. Open the access door [2] to

verify that the motor and disk
move freely on the track.
Note
Ensure that the motor
cable connectors are
secure. [3]
VIDEO
Install Pre- Note
Manifold and
Heater Assembly
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Use alignment pins on PP
Manifold and
cover and install the PT/T
Heater Assembly
manifold and the heater
assembly onto the PP cover.
2. Secure PT/T manifold to the

cover with two (2)
thumbscrews.
VIDEO
Install Wash Note
Manifold and Video contains no audio sound.
Buffer Heater
Assembly and
Wash Zone
Mechanism
Install Wash
Manifold and
Buffer Heater
cover to install the wash
Assembly and
manifold and the buffer heater
Wash Zone
Mechanism
2. Secure wash manifold with
buffer heater to PP using the
silver thumbscrew.
3. Install the WZ mechanism onto

the process path and tighten
the two green thumbscrews. [2]
Caution
Verify that the valve
cables from the wash
manifold are connected
and free from the
manifold before securing
the screw.
VIDEO
Install RV Loader Note
Assembly Click the video and arrow icon
in the reference section to
access the video in A1.01 _RV
Loader action section: "VIDEO
- Install RV Loader
Assembly."
Install RV Loader
1. Install the RV loader assembly
[1] by aligning it onto the
mounting feature.
2. Tighten the green captive screw

to secure the RV loader
assembly to the module. [2]
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Operation Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and
1. Replace the internal process shutdown.
path and process distribution
board covers.
Note
Reseat the process
distribution board cover
inside the guide if the
process path cover is
higher than the reagent
cover and the probe hits
the process path cover.
2. Lower the RV Loader Chute.
3. Close the processing center

cover.
4. Load RVs into the upper

hopper, if removed previously.
5. Power ON the processing

module.
Note
The system control
center power must be
ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to turning on
the processing model to
verify proper initialization.
6. Perform the Startup procedure

to change the status of the
processing module and sample
handler status from Stopped to
Ready.

errors.
filled with fluid.
B2.01 Process Path Cover Version - 201975-103_467_3
List/Part Numbers
7-206984-01 Cover, Process Path, with Ramp
7-97022-01 Cover, Process Path, with Labels
B2.01 Process Path Cover
Note

Tools/Materials Phillips Head Screwdrivers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite Perform
Preparation
1. Open processing center
cover.
2. Position pipettor arm over

the reagent carousel
area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport to

the far left on the transport
guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal covers
for the processing center.
VIDEO
Remove RV Loader Note
Assembly Click the video and arrow
icon in the reference section
to access the video in A1.01
_RV Loader action section:
“VIDEO - Remove RV
Loader Assembly" .
Remove RV Loader
Assembly
1. Loosen the green captive
screw securing the RV
loader to processing center.
2. Set the RV loader [3] out
and away of the main
Note
disconnect cable from
the processing center
board.
VIDEO
Remove Process Note
Path Motor Assembly Click the video and arrow
to access the video in B2.05
Motor, P Path Assembly
action section: “VIDEO -
Remove Process Path
Drive Motor".
Remove Process
Path Motor Assembly
1. Remove two (2) screws
securing PP motor [1] to the
process path cover.
Note
disconnect any cable
from the processing
center distribution
board.
2. Lift the motor from the

process path.
3. Set the PP motor clear of

PP carefully. [2]
VIDEO
Remove Wash Zone Note
Mechanism and Video contains no audio
Wash Manifold with sound.
Buffer Heater
Assembly
Remove Wash Zone

Mechanism
1. Loosen the two (2) captive
screws that secure the wash
zone assembly (WZ) to the
process path (PP)
assembly. [4]
2. Lift the WZ from the PP and
carefully place on the
Note
disconnect tubing or
cables.
Note
Ensure probes are
free from damage to
prevent errors.
Remove Wash Zone

Manifold and Buffer
1. Loosen the silver
Heater Assembly
thumbscrew that secures
wash zone manifold (WZM)
to PP. [6]
2. Lift the WZM with the buffer
heater assembly from PP.
Note
disconnect WZM
tubing or cable
connectors.
3. Set the WZM and heater

assembly carefully away
from the main PP assembly.
[7]
Note
disconnect WZM
tubing or cable
connectors.
VIDEO
Remove Pre- Note
trigger/Trigger Video contains no audio
Manifold and Heater sound.
Assembly, RV
Access Cover and
Diverters, RV Unload
Sensor, Ejector Plug
and Latch and PP
Cover
Remove Pre-
trigger/Trigger
Manifold and Heater
thumbscrews [1] that secure
Assembly
Pre-trigger /Trigger Manifold
(PT/TM) to PP.
Note
disconnect cables or
tubing from manifold
or heater assembly.
2. Lift the PT/TM with Pre-

trigger/Trigger (PT/T) heater
assembly from PP.
3. Carefully lay the PT/TM with

the PT/T heater clear of PP.
[2]
Remove RV Access
Cover and Diverters Caution
Do not lose spring when
removing latch.
1. Remove screw, spring and

RV access cover [1] from the
PP cover.
2. Loosen 2 screws for the

outlet diverter [2] to PP
cover.
3. Remove 2 clamps securing

outlet diverter then remove
diverter from PP cover and
set aside from the process
path area.
Note
disconnect diverters.
Place the removed
diverter aside for
installation later.
4. Loosen 2 screws on inlet

diverter then remove diverter
from PP cover and set aside
from the process path area.
[3]
5. Remove 2 screws for the

unload diverter [4] then
remove diverter from PP
cover and set aside from the
process path area.
Remove RV Unload
Sensor, Ejector Plug Caution
and Latch Ensure spring is captured
when removing the latch.
1. Remove screw that secures

latch to the process path
cover. Retain screw, washer
and spring. [1]
2. Remove the latch and

ejector plug [2]. Do not
discard.

securing RV unload sensor
to the process path cover.
[3]
4. Remove all cables and the

cable clamp behind PP
motor. [4]
Remove PP Cover
1. Grasp the opposite side of
the PP cover and lift the
cover by carefully rocking it
back and forth from the PP
track pins.
2. Lift the cover by carefully

rocking it back and forth from
the PP track.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Process Path Note
Cover, RV Unload Video contains no audio
Sensor, Ejector Plug sound.
and Latch, RV Access
Cover and Diverters
and Pre-trigger/Trigger
Manifold and Heater
Assembly

Cover
1. Install PP cover onto track
using alignment pins as
guides.
2. Verify bottom surface of

cover is flush with track.
Install RV Unload
Sensor, Ejector Plug
1. Install all cables and cable
and Latch
clamp behind PP motor.
[4]
2. Install 2 screws securing
RV unload sensor to the
process path cover. [3]
3. Insert latch and ejector

plug. [2]
4. Secure the latch to the

process path cover using
the screw, washer and
spring. [1]
Install RV Access
Cover and Diverters
1. Secure 2 screws for the
unload diverter (98171) to
the PP cover. [4]
2. Secure the 2 screws on

inlet diverter (98169) to
the PP cover. [3]
3. Tighten the 2 screws for

the outlet diverter (98170)
to PP cover. [2]
4. Route the outlet diverter
cable counterclockwise
around the cover and
secure the cable with 2
clamps.
5. Attach the RV access

cover [1] to the PP cover
using the screw and
spring.
6. Check the access over

easily moves over the
cover.
Install Pre-
trigger/Trigger Manifold
and Heater Assembly
cover install the PT/T-M
Manifold and the heater
assembly onto the PP
cover.
2. Secure PT/T-M manifold

to cover using
thumbscrews.
VIDEO
Install Wash Manifold Note
with Buffer Heater Video contains no audio
Assembly and Wash sound.
Zone Mechanism
Install Wash Manifold

and Buffer Heater
Assembly
cover to install the WZM
and the buffer heater
assembly onto the PP
cover.
2. Secure WZM and the

buffer heater assembly to
cover using the
thumbscrew. [6]
Install Wash Zone

Probe Mechanism
1. Install the WZ mechanism
onto the process path and
tighten the 2 green
thumbscrews. [4]
Caution
Verify valve cables
from wash manifold
are undamaged or
pinched underneath
WZ mechanism.
Note
Ensure probes are
free from damage
to prevent errors.
VIDEO
Install Process Path Note
Motor Assembly Click the video and arrow
icon in the reference
section to access the
video in B2.05 Motor, P
Path Assembly action
section: “VIDEO - Install
Process Path Drive
Motor".

Motor Assembly
securing PP motor [1] to
the process path cover.
Note
disconnect any
cable from the
processing center
distribution board.
2. Lift the motor from the

process path.
3. Set the PP motor clear of

PP carefully. [2]
VIDEO
Install RV Loader Note
Assembly Click the video and arrow
icon in the reference
section to access the
video in A1.01_RV
Loader action section:
VIDEO - Install RV
Loader Assembly".
Install RV Loader
1. Install RV loader onto
instrument mount.
2. Tighten the green captive

screw to secure the RV
loader assembly to the
module. [2]
Prepare for Operation For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Replace the internal Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
process center covers.
2. Ensure the RV Loader
Chute is lowered.
3. Close the processing
center cover.
module.
Note
The system control
center power must
be ON and at the
Snapshot screen
prior to turning on
the processing
model to verify
5. Perform the Startup

procedure to change the
status of the processing
module and sample
handler status from
Stopped to Ready.

errors.
filled with fluid.
B2.02 Process Distribution Board Version - 201975-103_469_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97275-01 Bd, Processing Center Distribution
B2.02 Process Distribution Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Remove the RV loader.
3. Remove the processing center internal cover.
4. Remove processing distribution board cover.
5. Remove rear access assembly panel.
Remove Process
Distribution Board
1. Disconnect the cables from the following processing
distribution board connectors:
Note
Do not remove cables from cable straps.
Unload Sensor (W118) from J2
PP Home Sensor (W102) from J3
Wash Cup Valve (W120) from J4
RV Present Sensor (W103) from J5
CM14 Wash Sensor (W105) from J6

Wash Zone Sensor (W119) from J7
WZ Inlet (W115) from J8
WZ Outlet Diverter (W116) from J9
Shutter Sensor (W114) from J10
PP Heater (W110) from J11
WZ Temp Sensor (W113) from J12
CM14 Wash Motor (W104) from J13
Upload Diverter (W117) from J14
Process Path Motor (W100) from J15
RV Loader (W106) from J16
WZ Buffer Heater (W112) from J17
Vortexer #1 (W108) from J18
Process Path Thermistor (W111) from J19
Vortexer #2 (W109) from J22

Note
The following connectors, J24-J27,
are located at the rear of the
processing distribution board.
PC Solenoid Fan (W003) from J24
PC Analog (W001) from J25
PC Motor Cable (W004) from J26
PC Digital (W002) from J27
2. Loosen the two (2) green captive screws securing

the board to the rear wall of instrument.
3. Lift out processing distribution board.
Replacement
Install Processing
Distribution Board
1. Attach the processing distribution board to back wall of instrument using the two (2)
green captive screws.
2. Connect all 21 cables to the board.
3. Install processing distribution board cover, processing center internal cover, RV

loader and rear access panel.

<

errors.
filled with fluid.
3 3120 - Vortexer Test
B2.03 Diverter, WZ, Inlet Version - 201975-103_470_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98169-01 Diverter, WZ Inlet
7-98169-02 Diverter, WZ Inlet (RoHS)
B2.03 Diverter, WZ, Inlet

Tools/Material #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport [2] to the far left on the
transport guide rail.
4. Remove the internal covers for the processing
center and the processing center distribution board.
Remove RV
Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the RV loader to
the instrument base.
2. Move the RV loader [3] out of the processing center
area.
Note
Do not disconnect cable connection to
processing center PCB.
Remove Wash
Zone Inlet
1. Disconnect the inlet diverter cable at J8 on the
Diverter
2. Remover diverter cable from any clamps on PP and
the tie wrap at the processing center distribution
board.
3. Remove the two screws securing the inlet diverter
4. Remove the inlet diverter from the module. [3]
Replacement
Install Wash Zone Inlet

Diverter
1. Position the inlet diverter onto the process path cover and secure with screws from
previous removal step.
2. Route the diverter cable to the processing center distribution board in reverse order of
removal step.
3. Secure diverter cable with clamps on PP and tie wrap at the processing center
distribution board.
4. Connect the inlet diverter cable to J8 on the processing center distribution board.
5. Install the RV hopper into the processing center area.
6. Install all appropriate internal components cover(s).

errors.
2 3155 - Diverter Test
B2.04 Diverter, WZ, Outlet Version - 201975-103_471_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98170-01 Diverter, WZ Outlet
7-98170-02 Diverter, WZ Oulet (RoHS)
B2.04 Diverter, WZ, Outlet

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport [2] to the far left on the
Remove RV
Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the RV loader
to the instrument base.
2. Move the RV loader [3] out of the processing
center area.
Note
Remove Wash
Zone Outlet
1. Disconnect the outlet diverter cable at J9 on the
Diverter
2. Remover diverter cable from any clamps on PP and
the tie wrap at the processing center distribution
board.
3. Remove the two screws securing the outlet diverter
4. Remove the outlet diverter [4] from the module.
Replacement
Install Wash Zone Outlet

Diverter
1. Position the outlet diverter onto the process path cover and secure with screws from
previous removal step.
2. Route the diverter cable to the processing center distribution board in reverse order
of removal step.
3. Secure diverter cable with clamps and tie wrap at the processing center distribution
board.
4. Connect the outlet diverter cable to J9 on the processing center distribution board.
6. Install all appropriate internal components cover(s).

errors.
B2.05 Motor, P Path Version - 201975-103_472_3
List/Part Numbers
7-98155-01 Motor, Process Path
B2.05 Motor, P Path

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. Perform
Preparation

3. Move the carrier transport [2] to

the far left on the transport guide
rail.

position.
5. Push in tab on the internal

Process Path cover, lift up and
remove the cover.
6. Remove the distribution board

internal cover by loosening the
three (3) green captive screws. [4]
Remove RV
Loader Note
Remove and save any RV's from
the upper hopper, if present.
1. Loosen the green captive screw

securing the RV loader to the
instrument base.

Note
disconnect the RV Loader
cable.
VIDEO -
Remove
Note
Process Path
(PP) Drive
Motor
Note
Video shows procedure viewed
from the back to easily
demonstrate component and cable
removal.
Remove
Process Path
1. Disconnect the two process path
Drive Motor
motor cables (W100) from the
process path motor.
2. Remove the two screws securing

the process path motor to the
process path cover.
Note
One of the screws also
secures the ground cable
to the process path motor.
3. Remove the process path motor

from the module.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install
Note
Process Path
(PP) Drive
Motor
Note
Video perspective is from the back to
show components.
Install
Process Path
1. Seat the PP motor onto the process
Drive Motor
path cover.
Note
Open the RV access cover
and manually turn the PP disk
to verify the teeth of the PP
motor and process path disk
are engaged properly.
2. Secure the PP motor to the

instrument.
Note
Ensure the ground wire is
secured with a screw.
3. Connect the process PP motor

cables to the PP motor.
Install the
RV Loader
1. Install the RV hopper into the
processing center area by aligning it
onto the mounting feature.
2. Replace the internal components

cover (s).
3. Install the distribution board internal

cover and tighten the three (3)
screws to secure the cover to the
module. [4]
Note
Ensure the cover is seated
inside the metal guide near
the Reagent Cover to prevent
probe damage.

position.
5. Replace RVs to the Upper Hopper
removed previously.
6. Replace the internal process path

cover.
7. Lower the RV Loader Chute.
Note
Reseat the Process
distribution Board Cover inside
the guide if the process path
cover is higher than Reagent
Cover and the probe hits the
process path cover.
Prepare for
Operation
Note
The system control center
power must be ON and at the
Snapshot screen prior to
turning on the processing
model to verify proper
initialization.

module and sample handler status
from Stopped to Ready.
B2.06 Diverter, Unloader RV Version - 201975-103_473_3
List/Part Numbers
7-98171-01 Diverter, Active RV Unload
7-98171-02 Diverter, Active RV Unload (RoHS)
B2.06 Diverter, Unloader RV

Tools/Materials None
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
Remove RV
Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the RV loader to
the instrument base.
center area.
Note
Remove RV
Unload Diverter
1. Disconnect the RV unload diverter cable at J14 on
Assembly
the processing distribution board.
2. Remove RV unload diverter cable from any clamps
on PP and the tie wraps at the processing center
distribution board.
3. Remove the two screws securing the RV unload
diverter to the process path cover.
4. Remove the RV unload diverter assembly from the
module. [4]
Replacement
Install RV Unload Diverter

Assembly
1. Position the RV unload diverter onto the process path cover and secure with screws
from previous removal step.
2. Route the RV unload diverter cable to the processing center distribution board in
reverse order of removal step.
3. Secure RV unload diverter cable with clamps on PP and tie wrap at the processing
4. Connect the RV unload diverter cable to J14 on the processing center distribution
board.
6. Install the appropriate internal components cover(s).

errors.
B2.07 RV Unloader Sensor, Latch Kit, Ejector Plug Version - 201975-103_474_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98057-01 Sensor, RV Unloader
7-98191-01 Latch, Kit, RV Unloader
B2.07 RV Unloader Sensor, Latch Kit, Ejector Plug
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Preparation
carousel area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport to the far left on
the transport guide rail. [2]
Remove RV Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the RV
loader to the instrument base.
Note
Do not disconnect cable connection
to processing center PCB.
Remove RV Unload
Sensor, Ejector Plug, Caution
Latch and PP Home Do not lose spring when removing latch.
Sensor
1. Remove screw that secures latch to the
process path cover. [3]
2. Remove latch and ejector plug.
3. Remove two (2) screws securing RV
unloader sensor to the process path cover.
4. Remove RV unloader sensor cable from
clamp and the tie wrap at the processing
distribution board. [4]
5. Disconnect the sensor cable at J2 on the
processing center distribution board and
remove sensor and cable.
Replacement
Install RV Unload Sensor, Ejector plug, Latch

and PP Home Sensor
1. Install the RV Unload sensor.
2. Route RV unloader sensor cable in reverse order of removal
procedure.
3. Connect the RV unloader cable to J2 on processing center
distribution board.
4. Install the ejector plug and latch kit.
Install RV Loader
1. Install RV loader onto instrument mount and secure with captive
screw.
2. Install the internal covers for the processing center and the
errors.
B2.08 Support, Wash Cup, with Target Version - 201975-103_475_3
List/Part Numbers
7-98196-01 Support, Wash Cup, with Target
B2.08 Support, Wash Cup, with Target

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
board.
Remove Wash
Cup Assembly
1. Loosen the captive screw [3] securing the wash
cup to the support.
2. Lift up on wash cup assembly and lay aside. [4]
Note
Do not disconnect tubing or cables from
wash cup assembly
Remove Wash
Cup Support with
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the wash cup
Target
support to the Process track. Retain screws for
later use [5]
2. Lift up on Wash Cup Support to remove.
Replacement
Install Wash Cup Support with

Target
1. Align the holes in the wash cup support with the guide pins on the Process
Track.
2. Secure the Wash Cup Support to the Process Track using the two (2)
screws.
Install Wash Cup

1. Align holes in wash cup with guide pins on the Wash cup support.
2. Secure the Wash Cup assembly to the support using the green captive
screw.
3. Close the Processing Center cover.

errors.
filled with fluid.
2 P-405 Wash Cup Assembly Check
B2.09 Vortexer, P Path (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott
Version - 201975-103_476_2
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-76656-01 Vortexer, Metal Cup
7-76656-02 Vortexer, Stabilized
B2.09 Vortexer, P Path (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Preparation
1. Power OFF the processing module.

access the vortexer.
3. Remove the processing center

internal cover.
4. Locate the vortexer to be replaced.
Note
for vortexer locations (VTX1 or
VTX2).
VIDEO -
Remove
Note
Vortexer
Note
Video demonstrates Vortexer 1
removal.
Remove
Vortexer
1. Disconnect the Vortexer cable by
pulling the tabs on the connector
away from the connector. [1]
2. Press down and turn the green knob

clockwise to disengage the locking tab
3. Lift the vortexer from the process path

pins.
4. Lower the vortexer slightly to allow the

vortexer cup to clear from the bottom
of the process path.
5. Remove the vortexer from the

module.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install
Note
Vortexer
Note
Video demonstrates Vortexer 1
installation.
Install
Vortexer
1. Grasp vortexer by the green knob and
slide the vortexer cup under the process
path.
2. Lift the vortexer up so that the vortexer

cup fits into the process path hole.
3. Align the mounting pins on the process

path with the mounting holes on the
vortexer.
4. Push down on the vortexer to seat the

vortexer fully into the pins on the
process path. [2]
5. Press down on the green knob and turn

counterclockwise so that the arrow on
the knob points toward the process path
and the locking tab is secured.
6. Connect the Vortexer cable by aligning

the cable to the connector and press
cable firmly into the connector until it
snaps into place and the connector tabs
raise to lock the cable in place.

1. Install the processing center internal
cover.
Note
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.
B2.10 Process Path Home Sensor Version - 201975-103_477_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98055-01 Sensor, Process Path Home, Cable W102
7-98055-02 Sensor, Process Path Home, Cable W102 (RoHS)
B2.10 Process Path Home Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
board.
Remove RV Loader
1. Loosen the captive screw securing the RV
loader to the instrument base.
center area.
Note
Remove Wash Zone
Probe Mount
1. Loosen the two captive screws [4] that secure
the wash zone assembly (WZ) to the process
path assembly (PP).
Note
Do not disconnect tubing or cables to
WZ.
2. Lift the WZ [5] from the process path and

place on reagent area cover.
Remove Wash Zone

Manifold and Buffer
1. Loosen the thumbscrew [6] that secures wash
Heater Assembly
zone manifold (WZM) to PP.
2. Lift the WZM with the buffer heater assembly
from PP.
3. Disconnect the buffer flush tubing [7] from
wash zone manifold.
Note
Do not disconnect any other tubing or
cable connections to WZM.
4. Carefully lay WZM [8] with heater assembly

clear of PP.
Remove Process Path

Cover
1. Open middle tie wrap at the processing center
distribution board.
2. Lift the PP cover from PP track and lay it
within the processing center area to access
the process path home sensor.
Note
Do not disconnect any cable
connections from PP cover.
Remove Process Path
Home Sensor
1. Remove screw securing the process path
home sensor to track. Retain screw for use
later.
2. Remove sensor cable from clamps on PP and
the tie wrap at the processing center
distribution board.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from J3 on the
4. Remove Process Path sensor.
Replacement
Install Process Path Home Sensor

1. Secure the process path home sensor to the PP track with the screw
from the previous removal step.
2. Route sensor cable in reverse order of removal procedure.
3. Connect the process path home sensor cable to J3 on processing center
distribution board.
Install Pre-trigger/Trigger Manifold and

Heater Assembly
1. Use alignment pins on PP cover to install the PT/T-M Manifold and the
heater assembly onto the PP cover.
2. Secure PT/T-M manifold to cover using thumbscrews.
Install Wash Manifold and Buffer

Heater Assembly
1. Connect the buffer tubing to WZM.
2. Use alignment pins on PP cover to install the WZM and the buffer heater
3. Secure WZM and the buffer heater assembly to cover using
thumbscrews.
Install Wash Zone Probe Mount

1. Install WZ mechanism onto the process path and tighten thumbscrews.
Caution
Verify valve cables from wash manifold are not underneath WZ
mechanism.
Install RV Loader
1. Install RV loader onto instrument mount and secure with green captive
screw.
2. Install the internal covers for the processing center and the processing

errors.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • Copyright 2007, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, and ci8200 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
B2.17 VORTEXER PIN Version - 96728-111_343_2
List/Part Numbers
7-78117-01 Vortexer Pin Kit
B2.17 VORTEXER PIN
17 min
Time Required
Small hex wrench

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or
System status.
Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer

to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9:
Service and maintenance, Subsection: Component
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to
replacement.
access the vortexer.
3. Locate the vortexer to be replaced.
Note
Refer to the processing center map for
vortexer locations (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3 and
VTXST).
Note
Vortexer #3 is accessible for replacement
by Field Service only.
4. Remove the appropriate internal components

cover(s).
Remove
Sample
1. Press in on the syringe clamp securing the
Syringe
sample syringe to the module frame [1] and lift the
(Vortexer 1
sample syringe up and away from the mounting
only)
bracket. [2]
2. Set the sample syringe on the process path.
Remove
Vortexer Note
To access vortexer 2, Remove the power supply
panel.
1. Disconnect the vortexer cable by pulling the tabs

on the connector away from the connector. [1]
2. While pressing on top of the green knob, turn the
knob clockwise to disengage the locking tab from
3. Lift the vortexer to disengage the vortexer from the
process path.
4. Pull the vortexer away from the pins on the
process path and then lower the vortexer to
disengage the vortexer cup from the bottom of the
process path. [3]
5. Remove the vortexer from the module.
Remove
Vortexer
1. Locate the hex screw in the center of vortexer
Cup and Pin
cup. Remove the top -screw from the vortexer
cup.
2. Below the first screw is a second screw that
secures the pin in the ramp. While holding the cup
place, loosen the second screw until the pin is
free (less than two full turns).
Note
Do not completely Remove the screw.
3. Remove the broken pin by pushing it out with a

small hex wrench.
Replacement
Install
New Pin
1. Insert the new pin through the ramp and hole in the
and
motor shaft.
Vortexer
2. While holding the pin in place (centered in ramp
Cup
with fingers) tighten the hex screw until it just makes
contact with pin. Tighten the screw approximately
1/8 turn to secure it.
Note
The pin is damaged if you over tighten the
screw.
3. Verify pin is centered on motor shaft and doesn't

protrude from ramp.
4. Insert the second screw into cup and screw it in until
it is just below or even with the cup bottom.
Note
If you screw it in too far, it will fall loose in
the cup and you will have to remove the pin
to retrieve it.
Install
Vortexer
1. Grasp the green knob and slide the vortexer cup
under the process path. [1]
2. Lift the vortexer up as high as it can go so that the
vortexer cup fits into the process path hole.
3. Push the vortexer toward the process path and align
the mounting pins on the process path with the
mounting holes on the vortexer.
4. Push down on the vortexer to seat the vortexer fully
into the pins on the process path.
5. Press down on the green knob and turn
counterclockwise so that the arrow on the knob
points toward the process path. This sets the locking
tab. [2]
6. Connect the vortex cable by aligning the arrows on
the connector. Verify the tabs of the connector are
locked in place. [3]
Install
Sample
1. Slide the sample syringe onto the mounting bracket
Syringe
and press down until the syringe clamp locks into
place. [1]
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

for ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. Install the appropriate internal components cover(s).
Operation Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
2. Close the processing module door(s).
and shutdown.
Note
The system control center power must be ON
prior to turning on the processing module for
4. To change the status of the processing module and
sample handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the
Startup procedure.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
C1.01 CMIA Reader Version - 201975-103_478_2
A Part Number is currently not assigned to this RR. Go to GPPM UserInterface
C1.01 CMIA Reader

Tools/Materials #2 Phillips Head Screwdrivers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Processing Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Module Subsection: System status.
Preparation
area. [1]
Remove
Optics
1. Unscrew two (2) silver captive screws that secure
Assembly
optics assembly to the process path track.
Note
If needed remove the rear access panel to
access captive screws on optics assembly.
2. Disconnect cable W019 from the optics assembly.

3. Remove the optics assembly.
Caution
Once the CMIA reader is clear of the
process path track place a cap or thick black
cover over lens and the light pipe.
Replacement
Install Optics
Assembly Note
Remove cap from optics assembly before installing.
1. Install the Optics assembly and secure to the process path using the two (2) silver captive
screws.
2. Connect the CMIA Optics cable (W019) to the optics.
3. In the Module configuration window on the SCC, configure the Optics Normalization and Linearity
parameters using the values from the CMIA optics assembly.
4. Reboot the SCC.
5. Reinstall the internal covers for the processing center and the processing center distribution
board.
6. Close the processing center cover(s).

errors.
3 1047 - Optics Verification
C1.02 Shutter Assembly Version - 201975-103_480_6
List/Part Numbers
206062-101 Spring, Shutter
7-206062-01 Shutter Spring (RoHS)
7-97036-01 Assy, Shutter, Complete
C1.02 Shutter Assembly

Customer Maintenance Kit
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations

Module
Preparation

carousel area. [1]
3. Move the carrier transport to the far

left on the transport guide rail. [2]

5. Remove the top rear access panel to
access.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Optics Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly Note
The video procedure shows the optics
reader completely removed.
Remove
Optics
1. Loosen the two (2) silver thumbscrews
Assembly
mounting the CMIA [1] reader to the
process path.
2. Remove the CMIA reader from the

module.
3. Cap [3] the optics assembly lens or
light pipe immediately.
Note
The cables are still connected
to the optics; ensure cables are
kept from damage.
Caution
To keep background reads low,
cap or cover the CMIA reader
light pipe.
Note
The black cover is shipped in
the customer maintenance kit.
Note
If sufficient room exists, it may
be possible to remove the
optics, cap the light pipe, and
leave it on the baseplate
without disconnecting the optics
cables prior to removing the
shutter.
4. Unscrew the PMT and disconnect the

power connector [2] from the CMIA
reader.
module.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Shutter Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly Note
The video procedure shows the optics
reader completely removed.
Remove
Shutter Caution
Assembly Support shutter assembly underneath
PP before loosening the captive
screws. The shutter drops and could
be damaged.
1. Disconnect the shutter cable (W114)

from the process distribution board
connection J10.
2. Loosen the two (2) green captive

screws [1] that secure shutter
assembly to PP track.
3. Remove the shutter assembly.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install Note
Shutter Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly
Install
Shutter
1. Slide the shutter assembly underneath
Assembly
the Process Path.
2. Push up on the shutter assembly and

carefully align the fins of the shutter
with the slits in the bottom of the
process path.
3. Secure the shutter assembly to the

process path using the two (2) green
captive screws.
4. Connect the shutter cable (W114) to
the process distribution board
connection J10.
VIDEO -
Install Note
Optics Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly Note
Video shows replacement of the optics
reader if removed completely from the
system previously.
Install
Optics
1. Connect the PMT and power
Assembly
connectors [2].
2. Remove the black light pipe cap [3]

and immediately slide the optics into
the process path
Note
Return the optics black cap to
the customer maintenance kit.
3. Align the CMIA reader on the guide

pins.
4. Secure the 2 captive thumbscrews to

Note
Record the "Normalization" and
"Linearity" values printed on the
CMIA reader label. Ensure any
negative (-) label value is
recorded correctly to prevent
assay errors.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install the rear access panel.
2. Reinstall the internal processing center

cover.
Note
Snapshot screen prior to turning
on the processing model to
5. Log on as FSE.
6. Verify the Normalization and Linearity

values from CMIA reader label match
those recorded previously [1] by
selecting the following from the
SNAPSHOT Screen:
System
Configuration
System Settings radio button
Modules
F6 Configure
Note
If the Normalization and
Linearity values are incorrect,
edit them to match the label
values recorded previously.
module and sample handler status
from Stopped to Ready.

errors.
C1.03 Shutter Solenoid Version - 201975-103_4136_2
List/Part Numbers
206062-101 Spring, Shutter
7-206062-01 Shutter Spring (RoHS)
7-98056-01 Solenoid, Shutter
C1.03 Shutter Solenoid

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Processing Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Module Subsection: System status.
Preparation
area. [1]
Remove
Optics
1. Loosen the two (2) silver captive screws that
Assembly
secure optics assembly to the process path track.
Note
If needed remove the rear access panel to
access captive screws on optics assembly.
Note
Do not disconnect cable connections to
optics assembly.
2. Remove optics assembly from the process path

track and lay in the base of Processing Center
Chamber.
Caution
process path track place a cap or thick black
cover over lens and the light pipe.
Remove
Shutter Caution
Assembly Support shutter assembly underneath PP before
loosening the captive screws. The shutter drops
and could be damaged.
1. Loosen the two (2) green captive screws that

secure shutter assembly to PP track.
2. Disconnect the shutter cable (W114) from the
process distribution board connection J10.
3. Remove the shutter assembly.
Remove
Shutter
1. Remove locking screw on shutter assembly.
Solenoid
2. Unscrew solenoid from shutter mount.
Replacement
Install Shutter
Solenoid Note
Prior to installing new solenoid, remove and discard the shipping nut.
1. Install new solenoid by screwing completely into shutter mount.

2. Verify solenoid is flush with mount.
Note
The locking screw does not install flush with the mount. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN.
3. Install locking screw and tighten.
Install Shutter
Assembly
1. Slide the shutter assembly underneath the Process Path.
2. Push up on the shutter assembly and carefully align the fins of the shutter with the slits in the
bottom of the process path.
3. Secure the shutter assembly to the process path using the two (2) green captive screws.
4. Connect the shutter cable (W114) to the process distribution board connection J10.
Install Optics
Assembly
1. Install the Optics assembly and secure to the process path using the two (2) silver captive
screws.
2. Reinstall the internal covers for the processing center and the processing center distribution
board.

errors.
C1.07 CMIA READER Version - 96728-111_370_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201909-01 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested
7-201909-02 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested (RoHS)
7-78262-02 CMIA Reader
7-78262-03 CMIA Reader, Dry Calibrated
C1.07 CMIA READER
15 min
Time Required
06F75-60 iSystem Optics Verifier Kit

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped,
System status.
or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s)

to access the CMIA reader.
3. Remove the rear cover panel above the pump

bay to gain access to the CMIA reader.
Remove CMIA
Reader from
1. Loosen the two (2) silver thumbscrews
Processing
mounting the CMIA [1] reader to the process
Module
path.
2. Pull back approximately 1/2" (1.5cm) or more
to clear the path and alignment guide pins.
Note
path place a black cover over the light
pipe. The black cover is shipped in the
maintenance kit.
3. Lift up on the CMIA reader, but do not

remove.
4. Disconnect the PMT and remove the power
connector from the bottom of the CMIA
reader.
5. Remove the CMIA reader from the module.
Replacement
Preparation
1. Remove the CMIA reader from its protective
packaging.
Note
If changing reader types (plastic case to
metal or metal case to plastic) install the
proper optics cable W102 first. For the same
type, continue to the next section.
Install
CMIA
1. Connect the PMT and power connectors.
Reader
2. Remove the black light pipe cover and store it in
the maintenance kit.
3. Slide the light pipe end into the process path. [2]
Note
Verify there are no cables/tubing, pinched
between the reader and housing.
4. Align the guide pins.

5. Screw the (2) two thumbscrews into place. [1]
Note
Do not use excess force when installing.
Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
Note and shutdown.
Notice the "Normalization" or "Linearity"
values printed on the CMIA reader label.
Write them down. Values may be positive or
negative.
3. Log on as FSE, then confirm proper optics values

or enter values if the module has been changed.
Use the following sequence to confirm or change:
System tab and Configuration
highlight Modules then Configure F6
Select proper module and confirm serial
number
Verify or enter Normalization or Linearity
values as previously noted from CMIA
reader label
Note
Values may be positive or negative.
Enter the minus (-) sign if shown on
the label. Plus (+) sign is not
required.
Select Done
Reboot and confirm settings remain entered
properly.
Note
The system control center power must be
ON prior to turning on the processing
module for proper initialization.

errors.
4 P-24 Precision Run Confirm the precision results are acceptable
using the Total %CV value listed in the
appropriate assay package insert.
2 2130 - Flush Fluids
C1.08 CMIA READER Version - 201975-103_6074_1
List/Part Numbers
7-201909-01 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested
7-201909-02 CMIA Reader, Metal Case, Tested (RoHS)
C1.08 CMIA READER

Tools/Materials
Standard Tool Kit

Customer Maintenance Kit
06F75-60 iSystem Optics Verifier Kit
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be in
Stopped, or Offline status.
Preparation
2. Remove the top rear cover panel

[1] to gain access to the CMIA
reader.
VIDEO
Remove Note
CMIA Reader Video contains no audio sound.
from
Processing
Module
Remove
CMIA Reader
1. Loosen the two (2) silver
from
thumbscrews mounting the CMIA
Processing
[1] reader to the process path.
Module
module.
3. Cap [3] the CMIA reader lens or

light pipe immediately.
Note
The cables are still
connected to the optics;
ensure cables are kept from
damage.
Caution
To keep background reads
low, cap or cover the CMIA
reader light pipe.
Note
The black cover is shipped in
the customer maintenance
kit.
Note
You may have access to
remove the optics, cap the
lens, and leave it on the
baseplate and remove the
shutter without disconnecting
the optics cables.
4. Unscrew the PMT and disconnect

the power connector [2] from the
CMIA reader.

module.
Replacement

VIDEO
Note
Install
CMIA Video contains no audio sound.
Reader
Install
CMIA Note
Reader Record the "Normalization" and
"Linearity" values printed on the
CMIA reader label. Ensure any
negative (-) label value is
recorded correctly to prevent
assay errors.
1. Connect the PMT and power

connectors. [2]
2. Remove the black light pipe cap [3] and

immediately slide the optics into the
process path.
Note
Return the optics black cap to the
customer maintenance kit.
3. Align the CMIA reader on the guide

pins.
4. Secure the 2 captive thumbscrews to


2. Log on as FSE.
3. Select the following from the Snapshot

screen:
System
Configuration
Modules
F6 Configure
4. Type in the previously recorded

Normalization and Linearity from CMIA
reader label. [1]
Note
The negative (-) sign is
REQUIRED to be entered in with
any associated Normalization and
Linearity optics values to prevent
assay errors.
5. Confirm entered optics values are

correct and Select Done.
6. Reboot the SCC computer and confirm

settings remain entered properly.
Note
processing module for proper
initialization.

errors.
filled with fluid.
D1.01 Reagent Carousel Motor and Pinion Gear Assembly Version - 201975-103_481_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200635-01 Motor, Assy, Reagent Carousel
7-200635-02 Motor, Assy, Reagent Crsl with Replaceble Gear
7-202411-04 Pinion gear kit i1000SR
D1.01 Reagent Carousel Motor and Pinion Gear Assembly
Time Required 20 mins

Tools/Materials #2 Phillips screwdriver
3/32 Hex Head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Preparation For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations

1. Unload all reagents and store them in
a refrigerator.
Note
If a hardware issue exists,
unload the reagents manually.
2. Perform
3. Lift Reagent Carousel Cover.
Note
Hold the probe tubing back
when opening the cover to
prevent tubing damage.
Open
Reagent
Carousel
access the reagent carousel cover.
Cover
2. Turn the knob on the reagent
carousel cover counterclockwise 180º
to open. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Reagent Click the video and arrow icon in the
Carousel reference section to access the video
in D1.12 Reagent Carousel action
section: "VIDEO Remove Reagent
Carousel."
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn reagent carousel release
Carousel
lever [2] counterclockwise to
disengage carousel from reagent
carousel motor.
2. Push the V-wheel release lever [3]

inward.
3. Lift the reagent carousel from the

module.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Pinion Gear Video contains no audio sound.
Only
Remove
Pinion Gear
1. Remove the center Phillips screw.
Only
Note
Motors without a replaceable
gear will have only a pin
holding the gear to the motor.
2. Remove the gear from the motor.
Note
Continue below to action
"Install Pinion Gear only"
VIDEO
Remove Note
Reagent Video contains no audio sound.
Carousel
Motor
Assembly
Remove
Reagent
1. Remove screw [4] from the carousel
Carousel
release lever spring.
Motor
Assembly Note
Use caution when removing
housing not to lose springs
and plunger.
Note
Some systems may have
either a Phillips or 3/32" Hex
screw.
2. Move the lever housing away from

reagent motor assembly.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing

the motor to the base plate.
4. Pull up on the motor gear to access

cable connections.
5. Disconnect the motor encoder and

motor cables W205. [6a]
6. Disconnect the ground wire by pulling

it from motor. [6b]
7. Remove motor assembly from the

module.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Control
Motor Gear
Install
Pinion Gear
1. Turn the gear so the flat side is down
Only
and the concave screw side is up.
2. Align the gear flat spot to the motor

shaft flat spot. [1]
3. Place the gear on the motor shaft.
Note
Ensure the flat surface is
placed down and the gear flat
spot fits properly in the flat spot
on the motor shaft to prevent
errors.
4. Install and tighten the center Phillips

screw.
Note
Continue below to action
"Install Reagent Carousel."
VIDEO
Install Note
Carousel
Motor
Assembly
Install
Reagent
1. Connect the ground wire to the motor.
Carousel
[6b]
Motor
Assembly 2. Connect the motor and encoder
cables. [6a]
3. Insert the motor assembly into the

base plate.
4. Verify that the motor assembly is

seated flush to the system base.
5. Secure the motor assembly to the
base plate with 2 screws.
6. Insert and tighten the screw in the

carousel release lever housing spring
and plunger for the motor assembly.
VIDEO
Install Note
Reagent Click the video and arrow icon in the
Carousel reference section to access the video
in D1.12 Reagent Carousel action
section: "VIDEO Install Reagent
Carousel". Video contains no audio
sound.
Install
Reagent
1. Align reagent carousel on the 2
Carousel
stationary V-wheels. [7]
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to align

carousel in V-wheel attached to the
release lever. [8]
3. Release the lever and turn the

carousel to ensure it moves smoothly.
4. Turn reagent carousel motor release

lever clockwise to engage motor to
reagent carousel.
5. Turn reagent carousel again to verify

it can move freely.
Close
Covers
1. Close the reagent carousel cover and
lock by turning knob 180° clockwise.
[1]
Note


errors.
2 1114 - Carrier Transport Calibration
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.02 Carrier Latch Sensor Version - 201975-103_482_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97214-01 Sensor, Carrier Latch, Cable W211
7-97214-02 Sensor, Carrier Latch, Cable W211 (RoHS)
D1.02 Carrier Latch Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
Module Unload all reagents and store them in a refrigerator. If
a hardware issue exists, unload the reagents
manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Lift the processing center cover to access the reagent
carousel cover.
2. Turn the knob on the reagent carousel cover
counterclockwise 180º to open. [1]
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn the carousel motor lever [2] counterclockwise to
Carousel
release the reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel adjust lever inward [3] and lift the
reagent carousel from the module.
Remove Carrier
Latch Sensor
1. Remove the two screws that secure the carrier latch
sensor [3] to base of instrument.
2. Remove internal covers for the processing center,
processing center distribution board and cable right
assembly.
3. Remove cable W211 from the clamp and cable seal
gasket.
4. Open the tie wrap at the reagent distribution board.
5. Disconnect cable W211 at J5 on the reagent
distribution board.
6. Remove the Carrier Latch Sensor.
Replacement
Install Carrier Latch

Sensor
1. Connect the cable W211 to J5 on the reagent
distribution board.
2. Route the cable in reverse order of removal
steps.
3. Secure cable to instrument using tie wrap at
reagent distribution board, clamp and cable seal
gasket.
4. Use the two (2) screws from removal steps to
secure sensor to cooling chamber base.
Note
Verify the sensor is flush against hard
stop.
Install Reagent
Carousel and
1. Align reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and 2. [7]
Covers
2. Push back on V-wheel lever [8] to align carousel
on V-wheel 3.
3. Turn reagent carousel motor release lever
clockwise to engage motor to reagent carousel.
4. Close the reagent carousel cover and lock by
turning knob 180° clockwise.

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D1.03 Reagent Distribution Board Version - 201975-103_483_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98000-01 Bd, Reagent Distribution
7-98000-02 Bd, Reagent Distribution (RoHS)
D1.03 Reagent Distribution Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution
(ESD) Before continuing, take the appropriate electrostatic
Precaution discharge (ESD) precaution. Use a ground strap or
appropriate grounding tool. Not following these
precautions may damage or destroy the electronic
circuitry of the board.
1. Place a ground strap snugly onto your wrist.

2. Attach the ground strap to any grounded element on the
instrument.
3. Place removed circuit board on or in nonconductive
material.
Remove
Reagent
Distribution
2. Position pipettor arm over the reagent carousel area. [1]
Board
3. Move the carrier transport to the far left on the transport
guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal covers for the processing center,
the processing center distribution board, and the rear
access panel.
5. Disconnect the following cables from the reagent
Note
Do not remove cables from tie wrap.
Cover interlock sensor W208 at J1

Reagent Carousel Home Sensor W206 at J2
Reagent Carousel Cover W213 at J3
Carrier Detect Sensor W2077 at J4
Carrier Latch Sensor W211 at J5
Pre-trigger_Trigger Heater at J6
Reagent Carousel Motor W205 at J8
Pre-trigger_Trigger Valves W201 at J9
Reagent Carousel Area Mtrs-Sol W007 at J10
Reagent Carousel Area Sensor W008 at J11
Note
J10 and J11 are located on the back of the
reagent distribution board
6. Loosen the two (2) green captive screws [3] securing

the board to the instrument.
7. Remove the reagent distribution board.
Replacement
Install Reagent Distribution Board

and Covers
1. Attach the reagent distribution board to the instrument using the two (2)
green captive screws.
2. Reconnect all cables that were removed in the previous removal step.
3. Install all internal covers and rear access panel.

errors.
D1.04 Reagent Carousel Home Sensor Version - 201975-103_484_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97385-01 Sensor, Reagent Carousel Home, Cable W206
7-97385-02 Sensor, Reagent Carousel Home, Cable W206, RoHS
D1.04 Reagent Carousel Home Sensor
Time Required 20 minutes

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
Module Unload all reagents and store them in a
refrigerator. If a hardware issue exists, unload the
reagents manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Lift the processing center cover to access the
reagent carousel cover.

Remove Reagent
Carousel
1. Turn the carousel motor lever [2] counterclockwise
to release the reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel adjust lever inward [3] to

disengage the V-wheel and lift the reagent
carousel from the module.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Home
1. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the
Sensor
reagent carousel home sensor [4] to base of
instrument cooling chamber.

center, processing center distribution board and
cable right assembly.
3. Remove cable W206 from the cable seal gasket.
4. Open tie wrap at the reagent distribution board.
5. Disconnect cable W206 at J2 on the reagent

distribution board.
6. Remove reagent carousel home sensor.
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carousel Home
Sensor
distribution board.
2. Route the cable in reverse order as removal step.
3. Secure cable to instrument using tie wrap at reagent

distribution board and cable seal gasket.
4. Use the two screws from removal steps, loosely

mount the sensor. Move (bias) the sensor [4] toward
the ring gear, then tighten the screws.
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and 2.
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to align carousel on V-

wheel 3.
3. Turn reagent carousel motor release lever clockwise
to engage motor to reagent carousel.
4. Turn reagent carousel to verify it can move freely

and is not obstructed or misaligned.
5. Close the reagent carousel cover and lock by turning

knob 180° clockwise.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.05 Carousel Motor Release Assembly Version - 201975-103_485_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200625-01 Assy, Carousel Motor Release, Complete
D1.05 Carousel Motor Release Assembly

3/32" Hex Head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module Note
Unload all reagents and store them in a
reagents manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
Remove Reagent
Carousel
1. Turn the carousel motor lever [2]
counterclockwise to release the reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel adjust lever inward [3] and lift
the reagent carousel from the module.
Remove Carousel
Motor Release
1. Remove Phillips head screw from center of
Assembly
reagent carousel motor release lever.
2. Remove Hex screw 3/32" from housing. [4]
Note
Use caution when removing housing, not
to lose spring and plunger.
3. Remove carousel motor release assembly.
Replacement
Install Carousel Motor

Release Assembly
1. Install carousel motor release assembly onto
post.
Note
Remove tape before installing hex
screw.
2. Secure the assembly to the post with Phillips

screw from removal step.
3. Position spring and plunger in housing.
4. Secure housing to the reagent motor assembly
with hex screw 3/32".
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and
2. [7]
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to align carousel
on V-wheel 3. [8]
4. Turn reagent carousel to verify it can move
freely and is not obstructed or misaligned.

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D1.06 Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor Version - 201975-103_486_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200584-01 Sensor, Reagent Carrier Detect, Cable W207
D1.06 Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
reagents manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
Remove Reagent
Carousel
1. Turn the carousel motor lever [2] counterclockwise
to release the reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel adjust lever [3] inward to
disengage the V-wheel and lift the reagent
carousel from the module.
Remove Reagent
Carrier Detect
1. Remove the two screws that secure the carrier
Sensor
detect sensor to the ring gear. [3]
2. Remove internal covers for the processing center,
processing center distribution board and cable right
assembly.
3. Remove cable W207 from the ring gear, clamps
and cable seal gasket.
4. Open the tie wrap and disconnect cable W207 at
J4 on the reagent distribution board.
5. Remove reagent carrier detect sensor.
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carrier Detect
Sensor
distribution board.
2. Route the cable in reverse order of removal
steps.
3. Secure cable to instrument using tie wrap at
reagent distribution board, clamp and cable seal
gasket.
4. Route cable on ring gear. [4]
5. Use the two screws from removal steps to secure
sensor to instrument base.
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and
2. [7]
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to align carousel on
V-wheel 3. [8]

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.07 Reagent Carousel Motor Encoder Cable Version - 201975-103_487_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97215-01 Cable, Reagent Carousel Motor-Encoder, W205
7-97215-02 Cable, Reagent Carousel Motor-Encoder W205 (RoHS)
D1.07 Reagent Carousel Motor Encoder Cable

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Removing
Encoder Cable
2. Remove internal covers for the processing center and
3. Remove the SCC and power supply rear panels.
4. Disconnect the cable (W205) from reagent distribution
5. Open the tie wrap securing cables and feed cable
(W205) underneath distribution board to rear of
instrument.
6. Disconnect the cable (W205) from reagent carousel
motor.
7. Remove cable from clips that secure it to side of
instrument.
8. Route cable through rear of instrument and remove.
Replacement

Replacing Encoder Cable
1. Connect the cable to connection J8 on reagent distribution board.
2. Feed cable underneath distribution board to rear of instrument.
3. Route cable to motor and connect.
Note
Secure cable in clips and tie wrap at reagent distribution board to hold in place.
4. Reinstall rear panels.

5. Reinstall covers for the processing center and reagent distribution board.
6. Close the processing cover.

errors.
D1.08 Carrier Latch Actuator Assembly (written to be customer-
Version - 201975-103_488_3
replaceable with Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-97353-01 Assy, Carrier Latch Actuator
D1.08 Carrier Latch Actuator Assembly (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

Tools/Materials #2 Phillips Screwdrivers
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module status must be
Stopped or Offline.
Preparation For information on unloading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
1. Unload all reagents and store the
Reagent inventory management.
reagents in the refrigerator.
Note
Note
Open
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
2. Turn the knob on the reagent carousel
cover counterclockwise 180º to
open. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Carousel
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn the reagent carousel release
Carousel
lever counterclockwise to disengage
reagent carousel motor from reagent
carousel. [2]
2. Push on the V-wheel release lever to

disengage V-wheel from reagent
carousel. [3]

module.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Carrier Video contains no audio sound.
Latch
Actuator
Remove
Carrier
1. Remove Carrier Latch Actuator
Latch
spring. [1]
Actuator
2. Remove the screw securing the carrier
latch actuator into the module. [2]
3. Remove the carrier latch actuator from

the module.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Carrier Video contains no audio sound.
Latch
Actuator
Install
Carrier
1. Mount the carrier latch actuator into the
Latch
module, by aligning the latch into the
Actuator
hole on the mounting feature.
2. Secure the carrier latch actuator to the

module with a shoulder screw. [1]
3. Replace the carrier latch actuator

spring. [2]
VIDEO
Install Note
Carousel
Install
Reagent
1. Align the reagent carousel on the 2
Carousel

release lever. [8]
3. Release the lever and turn the carousel

to ensure it moves smoothly.

reagent carousel.
5. Turn reagent carousel again to verify it

can move freely.
Close
Reagent
Carousel
lock the cover by turning the knob 180°
clockwise. [1]
Note
Hold the probe tubing back when
opening the cover to prevent
tubing damage.
Prepare For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT i System

for Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Operation Reagent inventory management.
Note
processing model for proper
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.
3. Reload the reagents carriers on the

RSH.
2 3002 - Reagent Carousel Test
3 3310 - RSH Test
D1.09 V-Wheel Lever and V-Wheels Version - 201975-103_489_4
List/Part Numbers
7-204783-01 V-Wheels, Carousel, RoHS
D1.09 V-Wheel Lever and V-Wheels
Super Lube Grease 2-94851-02

Aqua Lube / Green
7-14233-01
Grease
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. Unload all reagents and store them in
a refrigerator.
Note
2. Perform
Note
Open
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
to open. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Carousel
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn reagent carousel release lever
Carousel
[2] counterclockwise to disengage
carousel from reagent carousel motor.

inward.

module.
VIDEO
Remove V-
Note
wheels
Note
All three (3) v-wheels and screws are
required to be replaced. Only one V-
wheel is shown in this video.
Remove
Reagent V-
1. Remove the shoulder screw securing
wheels
the V-wheel to the ring gear. [4]
2. Remove the two (2) remaining V-

wheels. [5]
Replacement
VIDEO
Install V-
Note
wheels
Note
All three (3) v-wheels and screws are
required to be replaced. Only one V-
wheel is shown in this video.
Install V-
wheel
1. Use a small amount of Green Grease /
Aqua Lube on the V-wheel shoulder
screw threads.
Note
You can clean & lightly grease
only the hole in V-Wheel Adjust
Lever and the interface between
shoulder screw & lever with
Super Lube Grease, if necessary.
2. Secure the V-wheel to the ring gear with
the shoulder screw.
3. Replace the remaining 2 V-wheels.
Note
Some configurations require
different shoulder screw lengths.
Ensure the replaced screw length
matches the screw length
replaced to prevent errors. The
screw should secure flush to the
component.
Note
Replace the shoulder screw with a
new screw when replacing v-
wheels to ensure the screws
tighten and prevent errors.
Install
Reagent
Carousel

release lever. [8]
3. Release the lever and turn the carousel

to ensure it moves smoothly.

reagent carousel.
5. Turn reagent carousel again to verify it

can move freely.
3 3310 - RSH Test
D1.10 Reagent Carousel Slide Version - 201975-103_491_3
List/Part Numbers
7-14720-01 Spring, Reagent Carousel, 10 ea
D1.10 Reagent Carousel Slide

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
carousel cover.
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn reagent carousel release lever [2]
Carousel
counterclockwise to disengage reagent carousel motor
from reagent carousel.
2. Push on the V-wheel release lever [3] and lift the
reagent carousel from the module.
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn reagent carousel over.
Carousel Slide
2. Push flag of the reagent carousel slide towards the
outer edge of the reagent carousel.
3. Move the reagent carousel slide to the furthest
position toward the outer edge, push up on the slide
from underneath carousel.
Caution
Spring is compressed so use caution to secure
slide when it clears carousel rails.
4. Remove slide from the carousel.
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carousel Slide
1. Insert the slide into hole on outer edge of reagent
carousel at a slight angle until spring compresses.
2. Move the slide into rails of carousel and lower into
place until slide is secured by retaining latches.
3. Connect the slide to the carousel by pushing flag
forward to lock slide into place.
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and 2. [7]
wheel 3. [8]

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.11 Ring Gear w/Supports Assy Version - 201975-103_492_4
List/Part Numbers
205152-101 Shoulder screw, .25 DIA X .50 SS
7-203129-01 Assy, Ring Gear with Supports
7-203129-02 Assy, Ring Gear with Supports, RoHS
D1.11 Ring Gear w/Supports Assy

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
Module Unload all reagents and store them
in a refrigerator. If a hardware
issue exists, unload the reagents
manually.
1. Perform
Open Reagent
Carousel
Cover

carousel cover counterclockwise
180º to open. [1]
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Reagent Click the video and arrow icon in
Carousel the reference section to access the
video in "D1.12 Reagent
Carousel" action section: "VIDEO -
Remove Reagent Carousel".
Remove
Reagent
Carousel
disengage reagent carousel motor
from reagent carousel.
2. Push on the V-wheel release
lever [3] inward.
module.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Carrier Detect Video contains no audio sound.
Sensor and
Bracket And
Remove Ring
Gear
Assembly
Remove
Carrier Detect
1. Remove the two (2) screws [4] that
Sensor and
secure the Carrier Detect Sensor
Bracket
bracket to the ring gear assembly.
2. Move the detect sensor to the side
away from the ring gear.
Remove Ring
Gear
1. Unscrew the three (3) captive
Assembly
screws [5] securing the ring gear to
the module.
2. Remove the ring gear from the
module.
Replacement
VIDEO - Install
Ring Gear And Note
Carrier Detect Video contains no audio sound.
Sensor and
Bracket
Install Ring Gear

1. Install ring gear and secure with
three (3) green captive screws
[1].
Note
Ensure the cable is
secured and flat to
prevent reagent carousel
errors.
Install Carrier
Detect Sensor
1. Attach the carrier detect sensor
and Bracket
bracket and secure to the ring
gear using the two (2) screws.
VIDEO - Install
Reagent Note
Carousel Click the video and arrow icon in
the reference section to access
the video in "D1.12 Reagent
Carousel" action section:
"VIDEO - Install Reagent
Carousel".
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on
the 2 stationary V-wheels. [7]
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to

align carousel in V-wheel
attached to the relesase
lever. [8]

carousel to ensure it moves
smoothly.
4. Turn reagent carousel motor

release lever clockwise to
engage motor to reagent
carousel.
5. Turn reagent carousel again to

verify it can move freely.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close the reagent carousel cover
and lock by turning knob 180°
clockwise [1].
Note
Hold the probe tubing
back when opening the
cover to prevent tubing
damage.

cover.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.12 Reagent Carousel Version - 201975-103_493_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97007-01 Assy, Reagent Carousel, Complete
D1.12 Reagent Carousel

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Preparation
For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
1. Unload all reagents and store them in Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
a refrigerator.
Note
2. Perform
Note
Open
Reagent
Carousel
Cover
to open. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Carousel
Remove
Reagent
Carousel
disengage carousel from reagent
carousel motor.

inward.

module.
Replacement

VIDEO
Install Note
Carousel
Install
Reagent
Carousel

release lever. [8]

carousel to ensure it moves smoothly.

reagent carousel.
5. Turn reagent carousel again to verify

it can move freely.
Close
Covers
lock by turning knob 180° clockwise.
[1]
Note


errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D1.13 Reagent Carousel Pinion Gear Version - 201975-103_5551_2
D1.13 Reagent Carousel Pinion Gear

3/32 Hex Head screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
Module Unload all reagents and store them in a refrigerator.
If a hardware issue exists, unload the reagents
manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn reagent carousel release lever [2]
Carousel
counterclockwise to disengage carousel from reagent
carousel motor.
2. Push the V-wheel release lever [3] inward and lift
the reagent carousel from the module.
1. With the motor power still on, remove the screw

holding the old gear in place.
2. Remove gear and discard per local procedures.
Note
This gear will only work with the 7-200635-02

Reagent Carousel Motor.
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and 2. [7]
wheel 3. [8]
4. Manually turn the reagent carousel to verify the motor
and carousel are aligned properly.
5. Close the reagent carousel cover and lock by turning
knob 180° clockwise.
errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.01 Reagent Carousel Cover Version - 201975-103_494_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200330-01 Counterbalance, Reagent Crsl Cover
7-204450-01 Cover, Reagent Carousel, with Heater and Latch
7-204450-02 Cover, Reagent Carousel, with Heater and Latch
7-97106-01 Hinge, Reagent Crsl Cover
D2.01 Reagent Carousel Cover
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
reagents manually.

2. Turn module power off.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Open the processing center cover.
2. Remove reagent access door cover by loosening
the two (2) captive thumbscrews. [1]
3. Loosen the four (4) screws [2] securing the
reagent access door assembly to the reagent
cover.
4. Remove the screw securing W213 and W122
cables to reagent cover. [3]
5. Disconnect the reagent cover heater cable.
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Carefully lay reagent access door assembly to the
(continued)
side in the processing center area.
2. Turn carousel cover latch knob counterclockwise
180 degrees [4] and open cover slightly above
cooling chamber. [5]
Note
Do not fully open reagent carousel cover.
3. Close the processing center cover slightly to

access reagent carousel cover screws at the rear
of instrument.
4. Remove the two (2) upper screws of the right
reagent cover hinge. [6]
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Remove four (4) screws that secure left
(continued)
counterbalance to module. [7]
2. Open processing center cover and lift reagent
carousel cover from instrument. [8]
Remove Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Remove counterbalance from reagent carousel
(continued)
cover. [9]
Replacement
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Install counterbalance onto reagent carousel
cover. [1]
2. Place reagent carousel cover onto the cooling
chamber loosely.
Note
Do not tighten any screws at this time.
3. Install the two (2) screws removed during cover

removal to top of hinge. [2] Do not tighten.
Install Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Install the four (4) screws to counterbalance. [3]
(continued)
Do not tighten.
2. Close (do not latch) and bias the cover position
toward the right side of module (away from
processing center area).
Note
Verify cover is not contacting carrier
transport rail or pipettor assembly.
3. Latch the cover.

4. Firmly press or pull on the rear of the cover (to
compress gaskets on the cooler housing) and
tighten all screws for the hinge [2] and
counterbalance [3].
5. Verify the cover opens and closes freely and does
not interfere with the pipetor frame or carrier
transport rail.
Install Cables,
Reagent Access
1. Install reagent access door assembly using four
Door Assembly and
(4) screws previously removed.
Cover
Note
Verify ground cable is reconnected.
2. Attach reagent cover heater cable connection.

3. Secure W213 and W122 cables to reagent cover
using screw and clamp from previous removal
steps.
4. Reinstall reagent access door motor cover.
errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.02 Reagent Access Door Assembly Cable Version - 201975-103_495_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98033-01 Cable, Reagent Access Door, W213
D2.02 Reagent Access Door Assembly Cable
Time 20 min
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown Processing For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT
Module Note System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
Unload all reagents and store them in a function, Subsection: System status.
refrigerator. If a hardware issue exists,
Remove Reagent
Access Door Assembly
Cable
reagent access door assembly.
2. Remove reagent access door cover by
loosening the two (2) captive
thumbscrews. [1]
3. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the
top mount to the lower mount and lift off top
mount.
Remove Reagent
Access Door Assembly Note
Cable (continued) The ground cable [3] is disconnected when
the screws are removed.
1. Turn top mount over and disconnect reagent

access assembly cable W213 connectors J1,
J2 and J3 [4] from upper mount.
2. Remove the 2 screws securing cable W213
to reagent carousel cover.
3. Remove internal covers for the processing
center and processing center distribution
board.
4. Loosen the two (2) screws to trigger/pre-
trigger manifold and position out of way to
access right cable assembly cover.
5. Remove cover.
6. Undo the tie wrap at reagent distribution
board and disconnect cable W213 at J3 on
the reagent distribution board.
Replacement

Install Reagent Access
Door Assembly Cable
1. Route reagent access door assembly cable in
reverse order of steps for removal.
2. Secure cable with tie wrap and screws from
removal steps.
3. Install internal covers.
4. Connect the cable W213 connectors J1, J2,
and J3 to P1, P2 and P3 respectively.
5. Evenly apply lubricant along the length of the
gear pin [1] at the 12, 3, 6 and 9 o'clock
positions.
6. Install top mount to lower mount using the four
(4) screws previously removed.
Note
Verify the ground cable is connected.

8. Close the processing center cover

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.03 Reagent Access Door Front and Rear Gaskets Version - 201975-103_496_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203258-01 Gasket, Reagent Access Door, Front
7-203259-01 Gasket, Reagent Access Door, Rear
D2.03 Reagent Access Door Front and Rear Gaskets
#2 Phillips Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Tape Adhesive Remover (Optional)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
manually.

Offline.
Disconnect
Reagent Access
Door Assembly
access door assembly.
2. Remove reagent access door cover by loosening the
two (2) captive thumbscrews .[1]
3. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the reagent
access door assembly to the reagent carousel cover.
Note
Do not disconnect cable connections.
4. Turn assembly on its side to access door gaskets.

Remove
Reagent Access
1. Peel away old reagent access door gaskets. [3]
Door Gaskets
2. Remove as much of the residual gasket material from
the instrument surface as possible with a dull straight
edge such as flat head screwdriver, putty knife, etc.
Note
Avoid very sharp tools that may damage
cooling chamber surface.
3. If necessary remove remaining gasket material from

reagent access door surface using tape adhesive
remover.
Caution
Follow directions on tape removal container for
proper use.
Replacement

Door Gasket
1. Clean the reagent access door surface with alcohol.
2. Apply new gasket to instrument surface.
Note
Bias new gasket towards outer edge of access door.

Door Assembly
1. Use four (4) screws from previous removal steps to install the assembly to the reagent
carousel cover using alignment pins as guides.

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.04 Reagent Access Door Home Sensor Version - 201975-103_497_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98211-01 Sensor, Reagent Access Door Home, Cable W210
D2.04 Reagent Access Door Home Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
reagents manually.
Remove Reagent
Access Door Home
Sensor
2. Remove reagent access door cover by loosening
the two (2) captive thumbscrews.
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the top
mount to the lower mount and lift off top mount.
Note
The ground cable is removed when the
screws are removed.
4. Turn top mount over and disconnect cable

W213 [1] connectors J3
5. Disconnect cable W210 [3] connection P3 from
the upper mount.
6. Remove the 2 screws [2] securing the reagent
access door home sensor and remove sensor
with cable W210. [1]
Replacement
Install Reagent
Access Door Motor
1. Reconnect cable W210 cable P3 connector to
the upper mount.
2. Reconnect cable connection J3 [1] to connector
P3.
3. Secure sensor to top mount using two (2)
screws from previous removal steps.
4. Install top mount to lower mount using four (4)
screws.
Note


errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.05 Reagent Access Door Motor Version - 201975-103_498_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201113-01 Motor, Reagent Access Door, W203
D2.05 Reagent Access Door Motor
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
manually.
Remove
Reagent Access
1. Remove reagent access door cover by loosening the
Door Motor
two (2) captive thumbscrews.
2. Remove the four (4) screws [2] securing the top
mount to the lower mount and lift off top mount.
Note
screws are removed.
3. Turn top mount over and disconnect reagent access

assembly cable W208 connectors J1, J2 and J3 from
P1, P2 and P3 respectively.
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] securing motor to
underside of mount.
5. Flip mount right side up and remove motor with
cable. [1]
Replacement
Action Replacement Reference
Install Reagent
Access Door
1. Insert the motor into mount.
Motor
2. Turn top mount over and secure motor to underside
of top mount.
3. Reconnect reagent access assembly cable W208
connectors J1, J2 and J3 to P1, P2 and P3
respectively.
4. Apply lubricant evenly along the length of the gear
pin [4] at the 12, 3, 6, and 9 o'clock positions.
5. Install top mount to lower mount using four (4)
screws.
Note

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.06 Reagent Access Door Open Sensor Version - 201975-103_499_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97208-01 Sensor, Reagent Access Door Open, Cable W209
D2.06 Reagent Access Door Open Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Processing Note Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Module Unload all reagents and store them in a Subsection: System status.
refrigerator. If a hardware issue exists, unload
the reagents manually.
Remove Reagent
Access Door Open
Sensor
loosening the two (2) captive thumbscrews.
top mount to the lower mount and lift off top
mount.
Note
screws are removed.
4. Turn top mount over and disconnect cable

W213 connector J2 from P2. [3]
5. Move cable W210 away from cable W209.
Note
Do not disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect cable W209 connection P2 from the

upper mount.
7. Remove the two (2) screws [2] securing the
reagent access door open sensor [1] and
remove sensor with cable W209.
Replacement
Install Reagent Access Door Open

Sensor
1. Reconnect cable W209 connection P2 into the upper mount.
2. Route cable W210 on top of cable W209.
3. Reconnect cable W213 connector J2 to connection P2.
4. Secure sensor to top mount using two (2) screws from previous removal
steps.
5. Install top mount to lower mount using the four (4) screws previously
removed.
Note


errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.07 Reagent Access Door with Gasket Assembly Version - 201975-103_500_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201110-01 Assy, Door, Reagent Access with Gaskets
D2.07 Reagent Access Door with Gasket Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Startup Processing Center

Module Note
Unload all reagents and store them in a refrigerator. If a hardware issue exists,
Disconnect Reagent Access

Door Assembly
1. Lift the processing center cover to access the reagent access door assembly.
2. Remove reagent access door cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the reagent access door assembly to the
4. Turn assembly over and disconnect reagent access assembly cable W208
connectors J1, J2 and J3 from P1, P2 and P3 respectively.
5. Remove reagent access door assembly.
Replacement

Door Assembly
1. Connect the reagent access assembly cable W208 connectors J1, J2 and J3 to P1, P2
and P3 on reagent access door assembly.
2. Use four (4) screws from previous removal steps to install the assembly to the reagent
carousel cover using alignment pins as guides.
3. Install reagent access door cover.

errors.
2 3310 - RSH Test
D2.08 Linear Bearing Version - 201975-103_502_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200785-01 Assy, Linear Bearing
D2.08 Linear Bearing

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module Note
Remove Reagent
Access Door and
Motor Mount
reagent access door.
Assembly
loosening the two (2) captive screws. [1]
3. Remove the four (4) Phillips head screws [2]
securing the upper mount to the lower mount
and lift off upper mount.
Note
The ground cable is removed with the
four (4) screws.
4. Lay the upper mount to the side.

5. Remove the four (4) screws securing the lower
mount to the reagent carousel cover and
remove assembly.
Remove Linear
Bearing
1. Remove the five (5) small Phillips head screws
securing the linear bearing to the lower mount.
Note
Slide the door assembly to reveal all
screw holes, as needed.
2. Remove lower mount from the linear bearing.

3. Slide linear bearing out of bearing carriages
attached to door assembly and remove.
Replacement
Install Linear Bearing

1. Slide linear bearing into bearing carriages.
2. Attach the linear bearing to lower mount by aligning linear bearing to guide
pins on lower mount.
3. Secure linear bearing to lower mount using the five (5) small Phillips screws.
Note
Slide the door assembly to reveal all screw holes.
Installing Motor Mount and Door

Assembly
1. Attach the lower motor mount to reagent carousel cover using four (4)
screws.
2. Attach the upper mount to lower mount with four (4) screws.
Note


errors.
D3.01 Reagent Cooler w/Fan and Cables Assembly Version - 201975-103_503_5
List/Part Numbers
7-205252-01 Baffle, Lower Cooler Fan
7-97180-01 Assy, Reagent Cooler, Complete
D3.01 Reagent Cooler w/Fan and Cables Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. Unload all reagents and store
them in a refrigerator.
Note
unload the reagents
manually.
2. Perform
3. Remove left rear panel [1] for

access to cooler cables.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
access the reagent carousel
cover.

carousel cover counterclockwise
180º to open. [1]
3. Lift Reagent Carousel Cover. [1]
Note
VIDEO
Remove Note
Carousel the reference section to access
the video in D1.12 Reagent
Carousel action section: "VIDEO
- Remove Reagent Carousel."
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn the carousel motor lever
Carousel
counterclockwise [2] to disengage
the reagent carousel motor from
the reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel release lever

[3] inward.

module.
VIDEO
Remove: Note
Ring
Gear
Assembly
Reagent
Cooler
Assembly
Cables
Reagent
Cooler
Assembly
Remove Ring
Gear Assembly Note
Do not disconnect carrier detect
sensor on ring gear.
1. Loosen the three (3) captive

screws [1] and place the ring
gear to the side to access the
reagent cooler assembly.
Remove
Reagent Cooler
1. Disconnect reagent cooler cable
Assembly
at P1 [1] from the back of the
Cables
instrument.
2. Disconnect reagent cooler fan

cable W212 at P2 [2] on the SCC
chamber wall.
3. Route cables through right side

opening [3] next to the reagent
carousel motor.
Remove
Reagent Cooler
1. Remove the cooling chamber
Assembly
tubing, screw, and clamp and
move to the side. [2]
2. Remove three (3) green captive

screws [1] securing the reagent
cooler assembly to the cooling
chamber base.
3. Lift reagent cooler and cables out

of module.
Note
If new cooler does not
have a thermistor standoff
[3], remove and install it to
the new cooler.
Replacement
VIDEO Install:
Note
Cooler
Assembly
Ring
Gear
Assembly
Reagent
Cooler
Assembly
Cables
Install Reagent
Cooler
1. Place reagent cooler assembly in
Assembly
module on the baseplate pins and
route the cables in the opening
near the reagent carousel motor.
2. Reinstall condensate tubing [2]

with clamp.
3. Tighten three (3) cooler assembly

screws. [1]
Note
Over tightening the screws
may result in damage.
Install Ring
Gear Assembly
1. Align the ring gear assembly on
the reagent supply center pins.
2. Tighten the 3 captive screws. [1]

Connect
Reagent Cooler
1. Route 2 cooler cables through
Assembly
Cables
carousel motor.
2. Connect reagent cooler fan cable

W212 at P2 [2] on the SCC
chamber wall.
3. Connect reagent cooler cable at

P1 [1] from the back of the
instrument.
VIDEO
Install Reagent Note
– Install Reagent Carousel".
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on the
2 stationary V-wheels. [7]

align carousel in V-wheel
attached to the release lever. [8]

smoothly.

release lever clockwise to engage
motor to reagent carousel.

Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
Operation System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
clockwise. [1]
Note

cover.

module.
Note
power must be ON and at
the Snapshot screen prior
to turning on the
processing model to verify
4. Install left rear panel for access to

cooler cables.

change the status of the
Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
D3.02 Lower Reagent Cooler Fan and Fan Guard Version - 201975-103_504_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201473-01 Fan, Cooler, Lower, Variable Speed
7-204976-01 Fan, Cooler, Lower, Single Speed
D3.02 Lower Reagent Cooler Fan and Fan Guard
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove Lower
Reagent Cooler Note
Fan Fan airflow direction is IN to the cooler's
heat sink fins.
1. Open the right front SCC panel.
2. Disconnect cable W200 from lower reagent cooler
fan cable. [1]
lower reagent cooler fan to cooling chamber.
4. Remove fan and fan guard.
Replacement
Install Lower
Reagent Cooler Fan Note
Verify fan airflow direction is IN to the
cooler's heat sink fins.
1. Secure reagent cooler fan and fan guard to

cooling chamber using four (4) screws.
2. Connect the fan cable to cable W200.
3. Close the SCC front panel.

errors.
2 G14 - Fan Verify that the fan is rotating and that the air
flows in the correct direction.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • © 2007, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200, ci4100 are
D3.03 Cooling Chamber Gaskets Version - 201975-103_505_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201443-01 Gasket, Cooling Chamber, Lower
7-201444-01 Gasket, Cooling Chamber, Left
7-201445-01 Gasket, Cooling Chamber, Right
7-201446-01 Gasket, Cooling Chamber, Front
7-203231-01 Gasket, Cooling Chamber Front Lower
D3.03 Cooling Chamber Gaskets
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
Remove
Cooling
Chamber
2. Open reagent carousel cover.
Gaskets
3. Peal away old cooling chamber gaskets. [2]
4. Remove as much residual gasket material as
possible with a dull straight edge such as flat
head screwdriver, putty knife etc.
Note
Avoid very sharp tools that may damage
cooling chamber surface.
5. If necessary remove remaining gasket material

from reagent access door surface using tape
adhesive remover.
Caution
Follow directions on tape removal
container for proper use.
Replacement
Install Cooling
Chamber
1. Clean the cooling chamber surface with alcohol.
Gaskets
2. Locate the notch on instrument cooling chamber
surface and the cut out on right cooling chamber
gasket. [6]
Install Cooling
Chamber Note
Gaskets Bias the new gaskets toward the inner edge of the
(continued) chamber. Do not compress the gaskets. Be especially
careful with the front lower gasket when installing it
over and down the edge of the cooling chamber
surface.
1. Apply new gaskets in the following order:
Cooling Chamber Right [1]

Cooling Chamber Front [2]
Cooling Chamber Front Lower [3]
Cooling Chamber Lower [4]
Cooling Chamber Left [5]
2. Close the reagent carousel cover.
2 G10 - Covers / Doors / Panels Verify cover/door/panel(s) are correctly
installed and securely fastened and/or
open/close freely.

errors.
D3.04 Upper Reagent Cooler Fan Version - 201975-103_506_3
List/Part Numbers
100042-101 Fan, Cooling, 150CFM, 24VDC, with Term
D3.04 Upper Reagent Cooler Fan

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
Remove Upper
Reagent Cooler Note
Fan Fan airflow direction is DOWN into the cooler
assembly.
1. Open reagent carousel cover.
2. Disconnect the fan cable.
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the fan to the
reagent cooling chamber.
Note
One screw is attached to the ground wire.
4. Remove upper cooler fan and grill.
Replacement
Install Upper
Reagent Cooler Note
Fan Verify fan airflow direction is DOWN into
the cooler assembly.
1. Mount the new fan and grill to the reagent
cooling chamber using the four (4) screws.
Note
Reattach the ground wire to the fan.
2. Connect the fan cable.

3. Close the reagent carousel cover.

errors.
2 G14 - Fan Verify that the fan is rotating and that the air
flows in the correct direction.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • © 2007, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200, ci4100 are
D3.05 Cooler Cable Version - 201975-103_4564_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200344-01 Cable, Reagent Cooler, Thermistors and Fan, W212
7-200344-02 Cable, Rgnt Cooler, Thermistors and Fan, W212, RoHS
7-200344-03 Cable, Rgnt Cooler, Thermistors and Fan, W212, RoHS
D3.05 Cooler Cable

Tools/Materials Phillips Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. Unload all reagents and store Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
them in a refrigerator.
Note
If a hardware issue
exists, unload the
reagents manually.
2. Perform
3. Remove left rear panel [1] for

access to cooler cables.
Note
back when opening
the cover to prevent
tubing damage.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
1. Lift the processing center
cover to access the reagent
carousel cover.

carousel cover
counterclockwise 180º to
open. [1]
Note
back when opening
the cover to prevent
tubing damage.
VIDEO Remove
Reagent Carousel Note
Click the video and arrow
to access the video in D1.12
Reagent Carousel action
section: "VIDEO Remove
Reagent Carousel."
Remove Reagent
Carousel
1. Turn reagent carousel
release lever [2]
counterclockwise to
disengage carousel from
reagent carousel motor.
2. Push the V-wheel release

lever [3] inward.
3. Lift the reagent carousel from

the module.
VIDEO Remove:
Note
Ring Gear Click the video and arrow
Assembly icon in the reference section
Reagent to access the video in D3.01
Cooler Reagent Cooler w/Fan and
Assembly Cables Assembly action
Cables section: "VIDEO – Remove:
Reagent
Ring Gear Assembly
Cooler
Reagent Cooler
Assembly
Assembly Cables
Reagent Cooler
Assembly
Remove Ring Gear
Assembly
Note
Do not disconnect
carrier detect sensor
on ring gear.

screws [1] and place the ring
gear to the side to access
the reagent cooler assembly.
Remove Reagent
Cooler Assembly
1. Remove the cooling chamber
tubing, screw, and clamp and
move to the side. [2]
2. Remove three (3) green

captive screws [1] securing
the reagent cooler assembly
to the cooling chamber base.
3. Lift reagent cooler and

cables out of module.
Note
If new cooler does not
have a thermistor
standoff [3], remove
and install it to the
new cooler.
VIDEO Remove:
Note
Remove Fan Video contains no audio
Remove sound.
Handle/Shroud
Remove
Control
Thermistor
and Ground
Remove Fan
1. Remove and retain screw
securing the Monitor
Thermistor at top handle. [1]
2. Disconnect fan cable at the

fan. [2]
3. Disconnect ground cable

from fan. [3]
Note
Direction of the fan
airflow: the fan blows
down through the heat
sink.
4. Remove remaining screws

(3) [4] securing fan, finger
guard, and remove fan
assembly.
Remove Handle/
Shroud
1. Completely loosen (do not
remove) the screws securing
the handle/shroud assembly
[1].
2. Carefully push the Monitor

Thermistor down while lifting
the handle/shroud from the
assembly and set aside.
Remove Control
Thermistor and 1. Observe orientation of
Ground ground wire, control
thermistor and standoff [1] at
heat sink, and then remove
the screw. [2]
2. Remove clamp and cable
from routing feature. [3]
Note
Check amount of
cable extending
beyond the cable
clamp.
3. Carefully clean residue or

corrosion from the connection
area on the heat sink and
from the lug of the ground
cable.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install new Note
Cable, Install Video contains no audio sound.
Fan
Install New
Cable
1. Insert the new cable into the
routing feature with the same
amount of length extending
beyond cable clamp as the
original cable and attach the
clamp. [1]
2. Secure Control Thermistor and

ground lug to standoff. [2]
3. Route fan cable and thermistor

cable inside shroud/handle before
replacing shroud/handle onto heat
sink.
4. Align mounting holes of

shroud/handle to screw holes in
heat sink.
Install Fan
1. Mount the fan on the fan
shroud/handle.
Note
Verify fan airflow direction
is DOWN through the heat
sink.
2. Secure 3 screws into the fan

finger guard. [4]
3. Connect ground cable [3] from

fan.
4. Connect fan cable [2] at the fan.
5. Secure the screw to Monitor

Thermistor at top handle. [1]
Note
Direction of the fan airflow:
the fan blows down
through the heat sink.
VIDEO Install:
Note
Cooler the reference section to access
Assembly the video in D3.01 Reagent
Ring Cooler w/Fan and Cables
Gear Assembly action section: "VIDEO
Assembly Install:
Reagent
Cooler Reagent Cooler Assembly
Assembly Ring Gear Assembly
Cables Reagent Cooler Assembly
Cables."
Install Reagent
Cooler
1. Place reagent cooler assembly in
Assembly
module on the baseplate pins and
route the cables in the opening
near the reagent carousel motor.
2. Reinstall condensate tubing [2]

with clamp.
3. Tighten three (3) cooler assembly

screws. [1]
Note
Over tightening the screws
may result in damage.
Install Ring
Gear Assembly
1. Align the ring gear assembly on
the reagent supply center pins.
2. Tighten the 3 captive screws. [1]
Connect
Reagent Cooler
1. Route 2 cooler cables through
Assembly
Cables
carousel motor.
2. Connect reagent cooler fan cable

W212 at P2 [2] on the SCC
chamber wall.
3. Connect reagent cooler cable at

P1 [1] from the back of the
instrument.
VIDEO
Install Reagent Note
Install Reagent Carousel".
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on the
2 stationary V-wheels. [7]

align carousel in V-wheel attached
to the release lever. [8]

smoothly.

release lever clockwise to engage
motor to reagent carousel.

clockwise. [1]
Note

cover.
Note
to turning on the processing
initialization.
4. Install left rear panel for access to

cooler cables.

Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-105) • © 2007, 2014 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
E1.01 Pipettor Assembly Version - 201975-103_507_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97004-01 Assy, Pipettor, Complete
7-97004-02 Assy, Pipettor, Complete With LLS Cable Plug
E1.01 Pipettor Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
2. Move the RSH carrier transport [2] to

the far left on the rail guide.
3. Remove internal process center

cover. [2]
4. Remove the pipettor cover.
Remove
Probe
1. Move the probe over the wash cup.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the

probe tubing connection.
3. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe

and remove the probe tubing from
the probe. [1]
4. Loosen the captive screw carefully on
top of the probe clamp until you feel
resistance. [2]
Caution
You can use a screwdriver to
loosen the screw. Loosening
the screw beyond the point of
felt resistance can damage the
probe clamp.
5. Lift the probe clamp up to free the

probe. [3]
6. Lift the probe up [4] to remove it from

the arm.
VIDEO –
Remove Note
Pipettor
Assembly
Remove
Pipettor Note
Assembly Lay absorbent material underneath
the pressure monitor (PM).
1. Disconnect cable W017 at J5 and

W018 at J8 [6] on the pipettor PCB.
2. Disconnect the bottom (S<->PM

syringe to pressure monitor) tubing to
the pressure monitor (PM). [2]
screws [3] that secure the pipettor
assembly to the processing center
base.
4. Remove pipettor assembly.
Replacement
VIDEO –
Install Note
Pipettor Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly
Installing
Pipettor
1. Install pipettor assembly and secure to
Assembly
instrument base using the three (3)
captive screws. [3]
2. Connect the following cables [1] to the

pipettor PCB:
Cable W018 at J8
Cable W017 at J5
3. Connect the bottom PM tubing (S<-

>PM syringe tubing to PM). [2]
VIDEO -
Install Note
Probe Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly
Install
Probe
1. Slide the probe into the arm.
2. Place the probe clamp over the probe

[1] and tighten the captive screw on top
of the probe clamp.
Note
If a screwdriver is used, tighten
the screw until it is only secured.
Over tightening the probe screw
may cause damage and create
LLS errors.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the probe

and finger-tighten the probe fitting. [2]
Note
If securing the probe and tubing
is difficult then connect the probe
and tubing prior to securing the
probe in the clip.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Install the pipettor cover.
Operation Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
2. Install the processing cover.
4. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown

errors.
filled with fluid.
3 3810 - Pressure Monitoring Test
2 5420 - Crash Sensor Test
E1.02 Pipettor Arm Version - 201975-103_508_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98189-01 Arm, Pipettor
E1.02 Pipettor Arm

Tools/Materials #1 or #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Move the RSH carrier transport [2] to the far left on the
rail guide.
3. Remove internal process center cover.
Remove
Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tubing
connection. [2]
2. Loosen the captive screw on top of the probe clamp
until you feel resistance and rotate the probe clamp
backwards to free the probe. [3]
Note
You can use a screwdriver to loosen the screw.
Loosening the screw beyond the point of
resistance can cause the clip to come apart.
3. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe [4] and remove

the probe tubing from the probe.
4. Lift the probe [5] and remove it from the boom arm.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution
1. Place the ground strap snugly onto your wrist.

2. Attach the ground strap to any grounded element on
the instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
1. Remove pipettor assembly cover.
Assembly
2. Disconnect cable W017 at J5 and W018 at J8 on the
pipettor PCB.
Note
Place absorbent material (i.e. paper towel)
underneath pressure monitor.
3. Disconnect the S<->PM tubing.

4. Loosen the four (4) captive screws [13] and remove
pipettor from module.
Remove
Theta Shaft
1. Disconnect the pipettor boom cable connection at J1
and theta axis motor cable at J6 on pipettor PCB.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the gearbox to
transport frame.
3. Carefully pull theta shaft arm from lead screw lifter.
4. Slide theta shaft from transport frame.
Remove
Pipettor Arm
1. Remove screw holding clamp securing the probe
Assembly
tubing assembly to arm.
Remove
Pipettor Arm
1. Remove four (4) screws [14] securing the arm to the
Assembly
gearbox bushing.
(continued)
2. Slide pipettor arm up and off gearbox shaft.
3. Remove probe retainer from pipettor arm assembly.
4. Turn the arm assembly over and remove screw holding
flex cable lug to flag. Remove flex cable.
5. Remove flag and spring from arm assembly.
Note
Retain probe retainer, flag, spring and flex cable
to install on replacement pipettor arm assembly.
Replacement

Install Pipettor
Arm Assembly
1. Insert the probe retainer into pipettor arm.
2. Turn over arm, install spring and then flag over the probe retainer.
3. Press flex cable into the arm and align lug of flex cable over the flag and probe retainer and
install screw.
4. Attach the clamp securing the probe tubing assembly to arm.
5. Install arm assembly over the gearbox shaft and onto the bushing.
6. Align the pin from arm with slot in gearbox bushing and install the four (4) screws.
7. Move the arm up and down the shaft and swing left and right.
8. Verify movement is not obstructed.
Install Theta Shaft

1. Slide theta shaft into transport frame.
2. Carefully push theta shaft arm into lead screw lifter.
3. Orient the alignment pin on gearbox with hole in frame and secure theta motor to the
transport frame using the two (2) screws that were removed earlier.
4. Reconnect pipettor boom cable connection at J1 and theta axis motor cable at J6 on pipettor
PCB.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
1. Secure the pipettor to the module by tightening the three (3) green captive screws.
2. Connect cables W017 at J5 and W018 at J8 on the pipettor PCB.
3. Connect the tubing connection S<->PM tubing.
4. Replace pipettor assembly cover.
Install Probe and

Covers
1. Slide the probe into the boom arm.
2. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and finger tighten the probe fitting.
3. Swing the probe clamp forward and tighten the captive screw on top of the probe clamp.
Caution
If a screwdriver is used do not over tighten the screw. Over tightening may result in
stripping the threads.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E1.03 Pipettor Z Motor Leadscrew with Lifter Version - 201975-103_509_2
List/Part Numbers
7-201305-01 Motor, Pipettor Z with Leadscrew and Lifter
E1.03 Pipettor Z Motor Leadscrew with Lifter

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
rail guide.
Remove
Probe
connection. [2]
Note

Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
2. Disconnect cable W017 at J5 and W018 at J8 [6] on the
pipettor PCB.
Note
3. Disconnect the S<->PM tubing. [7]

4. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [8] and remove
pipettor from module. [9]
Remove
Gearbox
1. Disconnect the pipettor boom cable connection at J1
and theta axis motor cable at J6 on pipettor PCB.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the gearbox theta
motor to transport frame.
3. Carefully pull gearbox shaft from lead screw lifter.
4. Slide gearbox shaft from transport frame.
Remove
Lead Screw
1. Disconnect the Z-axis motor cable at J7 on pipettor
with Lifter
PCB.
2. Remove two (2) screws securing the lead screw motor
to frame.
3. Remove lead screw and motor from carrier.
Replacement
Install Lead Screw

with Lifter Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging the lead screw shaft. Do not handle by the
shaft or turn by the disc at the top of shaft
1. Align lead screw with cables facing the left and install the lead screw onto the carrier
transport frame.
2. Secure motor to frame using two (2) screws.
3. Reconnect Z-axis motor cable at J7 on pipettor PCB.
Install Gearbox
1. Slide gearbox shaft into transport frame.
2. Carefully push theta shaft arm into lead screw lifter.
3. Align the alignment pin on motor with hole in frame and secure the gearbox theta motor to
the transport frame using two (2) screws.
4. Reconnect pipettor boom cable connection at J1 and theta axis motor cable at J6 on
pipettor PCB.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
1. Secure the pipettor to the module by tightening the three (3) captive screws.
Install Probe and

Covers
Caution

errors.
filled with fluid.
E1.04 Pipettor Assembly Frame Version - 201975-103_510_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97074-01 Frame, Pipettor, i1000SR
E1.04 Pipettor Assembly Frame
Time Required Not Assessed

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Removal

Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Move the RSH carrier transport [1] to the far left
on the rail guide.
Remove Probe
1. Place an absorbent towel under the probe
tubing connection. [2]
2. Loosen the captive screw on top of the probe
clamp until you feel resistance and rotate the
probe clamp backwards to free the probe. [3]
Note
You can use a screwdriver to loosen the
screw. Loosening the screw beyond the
point of resistance can cause the clip to
come apart.
3. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe [4] and

remove the probe tubing from the probe.
4. Lift the probe [5] and remove it from the boom
arm.
Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) Caution
Precaution Before continuing, take the appropriate
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. Use a
ground strap or appropriate grounding tool. Not
following these precautions may damage or
destroy the electronic circuitry of the board.

2. Attach the ground strap to any grounded
element on the instrument.
3. Place removed circuit board on or in
nonconductive material.
Remove Pipettor
Assembly
1. Disconnect cable W017 at J5 and W018 at
J8 [6] on the pipettor PCB.
Note
Lay absorbent material underneath the
pressure monitor (PM).
2. Disconnect the S<->PM (syringe to pressure

monitor) tubing to the pressure monitor (PM). [7]
3. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [8] that
secure the pipettor assembly to the processing
center base.
Remove
Pressure Monitor
1. Disconnect the PM cable at J9 [3] on the
and Clip
pipettor assembly PCB.
2. Remove pressure monitor from frame clip. [4]
3. Disconnect the probe tubing assembly from PM
and remove PM. [5]
Remove Probe
Tubing Assembly
1. Disconnect two (2) screws securing probe-
tubing assembly to frame and arm. Retain screw
for use later
2. Remove probe assembly tubing.
Remove Pipettor
Assembly PCB
1. On the pipettor assembly PCB disconnect the
following cable connections:
Pipettor boom cable at J1

Z-axis motor cable at J7
Theta axis motor cable at J6
2. Loosen the four (4) captive screws [13] that

secure pipettor assembly PCB to the frame.
3. Remove pipettor PCB.
Remove
Gearbox and
1. Remove the two (2) screws securing the
Arm Assembly
gearbox motor [10] to pipettor frame.
2. Carefully pull gearbox and arm assembly from
lead screw lifter.
3. Slide gearbox and arm assembly from transport
frame. Retain theta shaft.
Remove
L_Screw with
1. Remove two (2) screws securing the L_screw
Lifter Assembly
with lifter assembly motor to the frame.
from Pipettor
2. Remove the L_screw with lifter assembly from
Assembly Frame
pipettor frame. [11]
Replacement

Install L_Screw with Lifter
Assembly
1. Orient the L_screw with lifter assembly so that the motor cable is facing left and
install onto the pipettor assembly frame.
2. Secure motor to frame with two (2) screws used from previous removal step.
Install Gearbox and Arm

Assembly Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging the gearbox shaft. Do not
handle by the shaft or turn by the flag at the top of the shaft.
1. Position lifter towards center on the L_screw.

2. Attach the gearbox and arm assembly to the L_screw with lifter assembly before
sliding theta shaft into the top of pipettor assembly frame.
3. Orient motor cable to left and align motor with guide on pipettor frame.
4. Secure theta shaft motor to pipettor assembly frame with two (2) screws from
previous removal steps.
Note
Verify lifter moves arm up and down smoothly and that arm can turn
freely.
Install Probe Tubing Assembly

and Pressure Monitor
1. Install PM clip to pipettor frame.
2. Secure probe tubing to arm.
Note
End of tubing with green tab should be oriented towards probe.
3. Connect the probe to the probe tubing assembly.

4. Connect the probe tubing assembly and PM.
5. Install PM in frame clip.
Install Pipettor Assembly PCB
1. Secure pipettor PCB to frame by tightening four (4) captive screws.
2. Connect the following cables to the pipettor PCB:

Z-Axis motor cable at J7
Theta Axis motor cable at J6.
Install Pipettor Assembly

1. Install pipettor assembly and secure to instrument base using the three (3) green
captive screws.
Cable W017 at J5
Cable W018 at J8
PM cable to J9
3. Connect the S<->PM tubing to PM.
Install Probe and Covers

3. Swing the probe clamp forward and hand tighten the captive screw on top of the
probe clamp.
Caution
If a screwdriver is used do not over tighten the screw. Over tightening
may result in stripping the threads.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E1.05 Pipettor Theta Motor with Shaft Version - 201975-103_511_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200559-01 Motor, Pipettor Theta with Shaft
E1.05 Pipettor Theta Motor with Shaft

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
rail guide.
Remove
Probe
connection. [2]
Note

Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
pipettor PCB.
2. Discount PM cable at J9 on the pipettor PCB.
Note
Lay absorbent material underneath the pressure
monitor (PM).
3. Disconnect the S<->PM (syringe to pressure monitor)

tubing to the pressure monitor (PM). [7]
4. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [8] that secure the
pipettor assembly to the processing center base.
5. Remove pipettor assembly. [9]
Remove
Gearbox
1. Disconnect pipettor boom cable connection at J1 and
theta axis motor cable at J6 on pipettor PCB.
2. Remove the two (2) screws securing the gearbox to
transport frame.
3. Carefully pull gearbox shaft from lead screw lifter.
4. Slide Gearbox shaft from transport frame.
Replacement
Install
Gearbox
1. Slide Gearbox Shaft into transport frame.
2. Carefully push Gearbox Shaft into Leadscrew Lifter
3. Orient the alignment pin on gearbox with hole in frame and secure the gearbox theta motor to the
transport frame using the two (2) screws that were removed earlier.
4. Reconnect Pipettor boom cable connection at J1 and theta axis motor cable at J6 on pipettor
PCB.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
1. Install pipettor assembly and secure to instrument base using the three (3) green captive screws.
Cable W017 at J5
Cable W018 at J8
PM cable to J9
3. Connect the S<->PM tubing to PM
Install Probe
and Covers
Caution

errors.
filled with fluid.
E1.06 Probe Retainer Assy Version - 201975-103_513_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98141-01 Kit, Probe Clamp and Flag, i1000SR
E1.06 Probe Retainer Assy

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
rail guide.
Remove
Probe
connection. [2]
Note
Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw.

Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
pipettor PCB.
Note
Lay absorbent material underneath the pressure
monitor (PM).
2. Disconnect the S<->PM (syringe to pressure monitor)

tubing to the pressure monitor (PM). [7]
3. Loosen the three (3) captive screws [8] that secure the
pipettor assembly to the processing center base.
Remove
Probe
1. Turn the Pipettor assembly over to access underneath
Retainer
probe arm.
Assy
2. Remove screw holding flex cable lug to flag.
4. Remove probe retainer assembly. [7]
Replacement
Install Probe Retainer

Assy
2. Turn over arm, install spring and then flag over probe retainer.
Note
Verify that the flag is seated underneath the end of the flex cable
3. Align the lug of flex cable over flag and probe retainer.
4. Install screw.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
Install Probe
Caution
If a screwdriver is used do not over tighten the screw. Over tightening may result
in stripping the threads.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E1.07 Pipettor Assembly PCB Version - 201975-103_514_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97290-01 Bd, Pipettor
7-97290-02 Bd, Pipettor (RoHS)
E1.07 Pipettor Assembly PCB

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
rail guide.
Remove
Probe
connection. [2]
Note

Remove
Pressure
1. Disconnect the PM cable at J9 [3] on the pipettor
Monitor and
assembly PCB.
Clip
2. Remove pressure monitor from frame clip. [4]
3. Disconnect the probe tubing assembly from PM and
remove PM. [5]
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
pipettor PCB.
Note

4. Loosen the three (3) green captive screws and remove
Remove
Pipettor
1. Disconnect the following cables from the pipettor PCB:
Assembly
PCB Pipettor boom cable connection at J1
Z-axis motor cable at J7
Theta axis motor cable at J6
2. Loosen the four (4) captive screws [13] securing the

pipettor PCB to the frame and remove the PCB.
Replacement
Install Pipettor
Assembly PCB
1. Secure pipettor PCB to frame by tightening the four (4) captive screws.

Z-Axis motor cable at J7
Theta Axis motor cable at J6.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
3. Connect the S<->PM tubing connection to the pressure monitor.
4. Replace the pipettor assembly cover.
Install Pressure
Monitor
1. Connect the pressure monitor to probe tubing assembly.
2. Install pressure monitor in frame clip.
3. Connect the pressure monitor cable to J9 on pipettor PCB.
Install Probe and

Covers
Caution
If a screwdriver is used do not over tighten the screw. Over tightening may
result in stripping the threads.

errors.
filled with fluid.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • © 2007, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, and c16000 are registered trademarks of Abbott
Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
E1.08 Pressure Monitor (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott
Version - 201975-103_515_4
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204217-01 Pressure Monitor Sensor, Tested, i1000SR
7-204217-02 Pressure Monitor Sensor, Tested, i1000SR
E1.08 Pressure Monitor (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard

General Precaution:
Pressure Monitor Sensor Assemblies are sensitive to physical damage especially where the wiring extends from the
monitor �s housing. The flex tab holding the wiring to the circuit housing can become unseated if the assembly is
handled improperly.
Removal

be Ready.
2. Unload all reagents and store them

in a refrigerator.
Preparation
3. Locate the pressure monitor sensor

on the pipettor.
VIDEO –
Remove Note
Pressure
Monitor
Remove
Pressure CAUTION
Monitor
Hold the PM Sensor by the
blue case only to prevent
damage.
1. Disconnect the pressure monitor

cable. [1]

pressure monitor.
3. Loosen and remove the probe

tubing from the top part of the
pressure monitor. [2]
4. Loosen and remove the pressure

monitor-to-syringe tubing from the
bottom of the pressure monitor. [3]
5. Loosen the 2 screws securing the

pressure monitor.
6. Remove the pressure monitor from

the module.
Replacement

VIDEO –
Install Note
Pressure
Monitor
Install
Pressure CAUTION
Monitor Use these precautions when handling
the Pressure Monitor Sensor:
Hold the PM sensor by the side of the
casing to prevent damage and errors.
Alternate tightening the 2 PM Sensor
blue case screws to properly seat it to
the frame.
1. Plug the pressure monitor cable into

the back of the pipettor board. [1]
2. Hold the PM Sensor only at the blue

case sides and finger-tighten the
pressure monitor-to-syringe tubing to
the bottom part of the pressure monitor.
[2]
3. Connect the probe tubing to the top

part of the pressure monitor and finger-
tighten the fitting. [3]
4. Hold the Pressure Monitor at the tubing

connectors. Place it onto the pipettor
frame and secure the two (2) screws.
5. Ensure the PM cable is routed against

the pipettor frame to prevent damage.
Note
Damage will occur if the PM
cable is pressed at the sensor
connection. [4]

Note
processing module to verify

Stopped to Ready.
filled with fluid.
E1.09 Pipettor LLS Z Cable Version - 201975-103_516_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97234-01 Cable, Pipettor LLS Z
7-97234-02 Cable, Pipettor LLS Z, (RoHS)
E1.09 Pipettor LLS Z Cable

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
rail guide.
Remove
Probe
connection. [2]
Note

Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Pipettor
Assembly
pipettor PCB.
Note

4. Unscrew the three (3) captive screws and remove
Remove LLS
Z Cable Note
Use caution not to lose spring when removing probe
retainer flag.
1. Disconnect the LLS Z cable at J1 on the Pipettor

PCB. [6]
2. Turn the arm assembly over and remove screw holding
flex cable lug to flag.
4. Pull flex cable from arm and remove from assembly. [7]
Replacement
Install LLS Z
Cable
2. Turn over arm and install spring and then Flag over the probe retainer.
3. Press flex cable into the arm and align lug of flex cable over the flag and probe retainer and
install screw from removal step.
4. Route cable onto arm.
5. Connect the LLS Z cable to J1 on the pipettor PCB.
Install Pipettor
Assembly
3. Connect the S<->PM tubing connection to the pressure monitor.
4. Replace the pipettor assembly cover.
Install Probe and

Covers
Caution
If a screwdriver is used do not over tighten the screw. Over tightening may
result in stripping the threads.

errors.
E1.10 Probe Version - 201975-103_5913_1
E1.10 PROBE
20 min.
Time Required
Standard Tool Kit (optional)

Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential
Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick
Hazard
Removal

Warming or Ready status.
Preparation For further information on performing diagnostic procedures, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 10: Troubleshooting
1. Lift the appropriate processing center
and diagnostics, Subsection: System diagnostics.
cover(s) to access the probe(s).
2. Verify the probe is over the wash For information on the startup procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT
station. System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
3. Select the Pipettor's category from the
diagnostic screen under the system
icon.
4. Initiate Diagnostic procedure M&D

1165 Pipettor Move to move the
probe over the wash station.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Remove
Probe
probe tubing connection.
2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe

and remove the probe tubing from the
probe. [1]
3. Loosen the captive screw carefully on

top of the probe clamp until you feel
resistance. [2]
Note
You can use a screwdriver to
loosen the screw. Loosening
the screw beyond the point of
resistance can cause the clip to
come apart.
4. Move the probe clamp up to free the

probe. [3]
5. Lift the probe [4] to remove it from the

arm.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install Note
Install
Probe
1. Slide the probe into the arm so it sits in
the probe clamp. [1]
2. Swing the probe clamp forward over

the probe and tighten the captive
screw on top of the probe clamp.
Note
If a screwdriver is used, tighten
the screw until it is secured.
Over tightening the probe screw
can create LLS errors.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the probe

and finger-tighten the probe fitting.
Note
If securing the probe and tubing
is difficult then connect the
probe and tubing prior to
securing the probe in the clip.
4. To return the pipettor to the home

position, complete Diagnostic
procedure M&D 1165 Pipettor Move.
Prepare For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Select As Needed category from the
Operation Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
maintenance screen under the system
icon.
2. Perform maintenance procedure M&D

2130 Flush Fluids, to remove any air
that may be present.
3. Visually check for leaks while

performing the flush.
Note
If leaks are seen, repeat the
installation procedure.
4. Remove the absorbent towel.


errors.
filled with fluid.
E2.01 LLS Sample Antenna PCB Version - 201975-103_517_4
List/Part Numbers
7-97248-02 Cable, Sample LLS Antenna Power, W014 RoHS
7-97255-01 Bd, LLS Antenna, Sample
E2.01 LLS Sample Antenna PCB

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Move the pipettor arm over the reagent carousel area.
3. Position the carrier transport in the middle of the

aspiration platform.
Caution
Do not contact the carrier transport board when
removing the aspiration platform.
4. Remove the aspiration platform.
5. Remove the internal processing center cover.

Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove LLS
Sample
1. Remove screw that secures LLS Sample PCB to
Antenna PCB
aspiration platform bracket. [1]
2. Press the LLS cover slightly toward you to clear
platform bracket then slide up to access cables.
3. Slide the LLS sample PCB up and disconnect the
following cables [2] from the PCB:
Power cable W014 at J1

LLS Process Path coax cable W400 at J4 (RED)
LLS output cable W013 at J3 (GREEN)
LLS reagent antenna W401 at J2 (BLUE).
Replacement
Install LLS Sample

Antenna PCB
1. Install the following cables to the LLS sample PCB:
Note
Align the colors on the coax cables with the colors on the aspiration platform
bracket.

LLS reagent antenna W401 at J2 (BLUE)
2. Slide the LLS sample PCB down into the first slot on the aspiration platform bracket.
3. Slide the LLS cover down into the second slot of the aspiration platform bracket.
Caution
May need to press cover slightly toward you to clear the solenoid bracket. The
cover should slide down below the screw hole.
4. Use screw from previous removal step to secure LLS PCB to aspiration platform bracket.
5. Install the aspiration platform.

errors.
filled with fluid.
5 3630 - LLS Test
E2.02 LLS Antenna Process Path Version - 201975-103_518_2
List/Part Numbers
7-202062-01 Bd, LLS Antenna, Process Path
E2.02 LLS Antenna Process Path

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Preparation
area.
center.
Remove Process
Path LLS
1. Pull PP (process path) LLS antenna straight out
from PP track. [1]
2. Disconnect the PP LLS cable from the PP LLS
antenna. [2]
3. Remove the LLS antenna.
Replacement
Install Process Path LLS and

Covers
1. Connect the PP LLS cable to the PP LLS antenna.
2. Press the PP (process path) LLS antenna straight into the PP track.
3. Install the internal covers for the processing center and the processing center
distribution board.

errors.
filled with fluid.
3 3630 - LLS Test
E2.03 Reagent LLS Antenna Version - 201975-103_519_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97247-01 Bd, LLS Antenna, Reagent
E2.03 Reagent LLS Antenna

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Note
manually.
Open Reagent
Carousel Cover
carousel cover.
Remove
Reagent
1. Turn the carousel motor lever counterclockwise to
Carousel
disengage the reagent carousel motor from the
reagent carousel.
2. Push the V-wheel adjust lever inward [3] and lift the
reagent carousel from the module. [4]
Remove
Reagent LLS
1. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the reagent
Antenna
LLS antenna to base of instrument cooling chamber.
2. Remove the internal covers for the processing center
and cable right assembly.
3. Remove cable W401 from the cable seal gasket and
clamp.
4. Disconnect cable W401 at J2 on the LLS sample
antenna PCB. [5]
Replacement
Install Reagent
LLS Antenna
1. Connect cable W401 to J2 on the LLS sample
antenna PCB.
2. Route the cable in reverse order.
3. Secure cable to instrument using clamp and cable
seal gasket.
4. Use the two screws from removal steps to secure
sensor to instrument base.
5. Install internal covers removed in removal steps.
Install Reagent
Carousel
1. Align the reagent carousel on V-wheels 1 and 2.
2. Push back on V-wheel lever to align carousel on
V-wheel 3.
turning knob 180º clockwise.

errors.
filled with fluid.
3 3630 - LLS Test
E3.01 Wash Cup Assembly Version - 201975-103_520_4
List/Part Numbers
7-98192-01 Assy, Wash Cup, Complete
E3.01 Wash Cup Assembly

0.25" Wrench
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
area. [1]
Remove Wash
Cup Assembly
1. Loosen the captive screw [3] that secures wash cup
assembly to the process path.
2. Disconnect the three solenoids connections S1, S2,
and S3 [4] at the wash cup connections bracket.
3. Disconnect the vacuum accumulator to wash tubing
(VA<-> WC). [5]
4. Remove the wash cup assembly.
Replacement
Install Wash
Cup Assembly
1. Connect the VA<-> WC tubing to the wash cup
assembly.
2. Connect the three-solenoid cable connections S1, S2,
and S3 [4] to the valve bracket.
3. Place the wash cup assembly onto the wash cup support
and verify the VA<-> WC tubing is not crimped or
obstructed.
4. Tighten green captive screw that secures wash cup
assembly to the process path.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E3.02 Wash Cup Body and Insert Version - 201975-103_521_5
List/Part Numbers
7-200160-01 Wash Cup, Body only
E3.02 Wash Cup Body and Insert
Note

TEFLON Tape (14246-030)
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal
Shutdown Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown.

Processing
Module
Preparation

reagent carousel area.[1]
3. Move the carrier transport to the

far left on the transport guide rail.
[2]
4. Remove the internal processing

center cover.
VIDEO
Remove Wash Note
Cup Assembly, Video contains no audio sound.
Baffle Insert and Note
Elbow Video shows a 2 valve wash cup
configuration. Some wash cups
may have 2 or 3 valve
configurations.
Remove Wash
Cup Assembly,
1. Disconnect all solenoid cables at
Baffle Insert and
the connector bracket. [1]
Elbow
Note
Wash cups may have a 2
or 3 solenoid configuration.
Ensure all solenoids are
disconnected prior to
removal.
2. Loosen the captive screw�[2]

that secures wash cup assembly
to the process path.
3. Disconnect the vacuum

accumulator to wash tubing (VA<-
> WC) on the bottom of the wash
cup. [3]
4. Disconnect clamp and remove

the wash cup assembly.
Note
A flat head screwdriver
may be used if baffle is
difficult to remove.
5. Remove wash cup elbow [4] and

save for use later.
6. Remove baffle insert [5] from

body. Retain for use later.
Remove
Solenoids
1. Loosen the solenoid end screw
[1] and unscrew the solenoid cap
and spring [2] from the wash cup.
2. Remove the spring plunger. [3]
3. Repeat steps 1-3 to remove the

other solenoid(s) from the wash
cup.
Note
Wash cups can have a 2-
or 3-solenoid
configuration. Ensure that
all solenoids are removed.

dl>
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Solenoids, Video contains no audio sound.
Wash Cup Note
Assembly, Video shows a 3 valve wash cup
Baffle Insert configuration. Some wash cups
and Elbow can have 2 or 3 valve
configuration.
Install
Solenoids
1. Remove cap from solenoid to
verify the spring is present.
2. Install the solenoid spring plunger
[3] and cap [2] into the wash cup
body then hand-tighten it until
snug.
Note
Be sure to orient the three
solenoids cables onto the
wash cup body. Nut on
solenoid can be loosened to
adjust orientation of
solenoid cable.
3. Tighten center solenoid screw and

nut. [1]
4. Repeat steps 1-3 to install all

other solenoid(s).
Note
Wash cups may have a 2
or 3 solenoid configuration.
removed.
Note
Over tightening the
solenoids may cause
damage to the wash cup
body.
Install Wash
Cup Assembly,
1. Remove old TEFLON tape from
Baffle Insert
elbow and tightly wrap new tape
and Elbow
on elbow pipe threads.
Note
Only use enough tape to
wrap around elbow 1-3
times to prevent damage.
Ensure elbow and wash
cup openings are
unobstructed by the tape.
2. Install elbow onto wash cup body
until snug. Orient tubing barb
perpendicular (90�) to the
solenoids. [4]
3. Connect the VA<-> WC tubing to

the wash cup assembly bottom. [3]
4. Place the wash cup assembly onto
the wash cup support and verify
the VA<-> WC tubing is not
crimped or obstructed.
5. Tighten green captive screw [2]
that secures wash cup assembly.
6. Reconnect the solenoids. [1]
7. Slide baffle insert into the wash
cup. [5]
Note
Some wash cups may have
2 or 3 valve configurations;
ensure all valves are
connected.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install internal processing covers.
2. Ensure RV lLoader chute is down.

Note
initialization.

Ready.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E3.03 Syringe Version - 201975-103_522_4
List/Part Numbers
7-37695-01 Syringe Sensor Interface PCB
7-77650-02 Syringe
7-900360-01 PCB Assy, Syringe (RoHS)
E3.03 SYRINGE
13 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Stopped or Offline status.
Preparation For further information on removal of internal covers, refer to the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
2. Lift the processing center cover.
3. Verify the probe is positioned above

the wash station.
Note
The probe will leak once the
syringe tubing is removed.
VIDEO –
Remove Note
Syringe Video contains no audio sound.
Note
Video shows the removal of the
syringe from the back and left side to
visually find key areas of the syringe.
Remove
Syringe
1. Pull out on the syringe pin [1]
(securing the syringe to the module
frame) and lift the syringe up and
away from the mounting bracket. [2]
2. Disconnect the syringe cable from J1

on the syringe board by pushing the
tabs on the connector away from the
connector.

two (2) tubing connections.
4. Loosen and disconnect the side outlet

and bottom inlet tubing from the
syringe head.
5. Drain the buffer from the tubing onto

the absorbent towel.
Replacement
VIDEO –
Install Note
Syringe Video contains no audio sound.
Install
Syringe
1. Place the syringe on an absorbent
towel.
2. Connect the syringe to the inlet (pump)

tubing to the bottom of the syringe
assembly. [1]
3. Connect the outlet tubing (pressure

monitor) to the side port of the syringe.
[2]
4. Connect the syringe cable by aligning

the arrows on the connector and verify
the tabs of the connector are have
locked in place. [3]
Note
Syringe tubing is connected so
fluid input is connected to the
bottom and the top port directs
fluid out from the syringe.
5. Slide the syringe onto the mounting

bracket and check it locks into place.
[4]

Note
Snapshot screen prior to turning
on the processing module to

Stopped to Ready.
open/close freely.
filled with fluid.
E3.04 Syringe Valve Version - 201975-103_524_5
List/Part Numbers
7-77030-02 Valve, Syringe
E3.04 Syringe Valve

Gasket
Lee Valve Tool
Customer Maintenance Kit - O-ring Removal Tool
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Verify the probe is positioned above

the wash station.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Syringe Click the video and arrow icon in the
reference section to access the video
in E3.15 SYRINGE action section:
"VIDEO - Remove Syringe."
Remove
Syringe
1. Disconnect the syringe to pressure
monitor (S<->PM) [1] and the buffer
pump to syringe (BP<->S) [2] tubing.
2. Disconnect the Pipettor syringe

cable. [3]
3. Pull on spring pin and lift syringe from
bracket with mounting tabs. [4]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Valve and Video contains no audio sound.
Gaskets
Remove
Valve and
1. Disconnect the valve electrical cable
Gaskets
[1] from the syringe.
2. Use the valve removal tool to unscrew

and remove the valve. [2]
Note
For the syringe valve, thread
the valve cable in the removal
tool as shown to avoid breaking
the valve cable. [3]
3. Use O-ring removal tool to remove
black gaskets (2).
4. Thoroughly clean the manifold/syringe

with DI water and lint-free tissues.
Note
Using non-lint free tissues may
cause valve ports to clog.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Valve Video contains no audio sound.
and
Gaskets
Install
Valve
1. Ensure that the manifold valve ports
and
openings do not have an old gasket.
Gaskets
2. Place a new gasket (64407) into the
manifold/syringe. [1]
Note
Be very careful to fully insert only
a single gasket into manifold hole
without marking/damaging them
in any way.
3. Place the valves into the appropriate

holes of the manifold/syringe. [2]
4. Gently rotate the valve until the ports
are properly seated and secured into
place.
5. Finger -tighten the valve retaining ring

until it just meets resistance.
6. Place the plastic valve tool over the

retaining ring and make sure the ring is
snug. [3]
Note
For the syringe valve, place the
valve removal tool on top of the
valve and verify the valve cables
are routed through the slot.
7. Turn the valve removal tool another 1/6

to 1/4 turn (about one flat on the
hexagonal top) to make sure the ring is
only snug. [3]
Note
Use caution to ensure no
unnecessary lateral force is
applied to the valves to prevent
valve damage.
8. Place the valve cables [4] into the

routing clips.
9. Connect the valve electrical connector to

the corresponding valve position. [4]
Note
Verify each cable is connected to
the correct valve.
VIDEO
Install Note
Syringe Click the video and arrow icon in the
reference section to access the video in
E3.03 SYRINGE action section: "VIDEO
- Install Syringe."
Install
Syringe
1. Connect the syringe to pressure monitor
(S<->PM) [1] and the buffer pump to
syringe (BP<->S) [2] tubing.
2. Connect the pipettor syringe cable. [3]
3. Pull on spring pin and mount syringe

onto instrument mounting bracket and
ensure it locks into place.
Note
Syringe tubing is connected so
fluid input is connected to the
bottom and the top port directs
fluid out from the syringe.

Note
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.
open/close freely.

errors.
4 2070 - Pipettor Check
filled with fluid.
E3.05 Solenoid Version - 201975-103_525_5
List/Part Numbers
7-200079-01 Solenoid, Manifold Mount, with Labels
7-205710-01 Solenoid, Manifold Mount, TESTED, with Keys
E3.05 Solenoid
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Splash/Spray Hazard
Removal

Processing
Module
Preparation

3. Move the carrier transport to the far

left on the transport guide rail. [2]
4. Remove the internal processing

center cover.
5. Move the RV loader out of
processing center area and set out
of the way in processing cover. [3]
Note
Leave the RV Loader cables
connected to processing
center board.
Remove Wash
Cup
1. Disconnect the solenoid
connections [1] at the wash cup
connections bracket.
Note
Wash cups may have a 2 or
3 solenoid configuration.
removed.
2. Loosen the captive screw [2] that
secures wash cup assembly to the
process path.
3. Lay the Wash Cup horizontally. [3]
VIDEO
Remove Wash Note
cup And Video contains no audio sound.
Solenoids Note
(wash cup The procedure can be performed
only) with the wash cup connected in the
instrument. Video shows the wash
cup removed for video purposes
only.
Remove
Solenoids
1. Loosen the solenoid end screw [1]
(wash cup
and unscrew the solenoid cap [2]
only)
from the wash cup.
2. Remove the spring plunger. [3]
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to remove the

other solenoid(s) from the wash
cup.
Note
Wash cups may have a 2 or
3 solenoid configuration.
removed.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Solenoid Video contains no audio sound.
(upper waste Note
manifold only) The procedure can be performed
with the upper waste manifold
connected in the instrument. Video
shows the manifold removed for
video purposes only.
Remove
Solenoid
1. Release tubing from clamp on
(upper waste
processing center wall. [1]
manifold only)
2. Remove screw securing the upper
waste manifold to the mount [2].
Retain screw for later use.
3. Lift the manifold from instrument

base mount to access solenoid.
Note
It may be necessary to
unseat the connected
thermistors from the
manifold to allow better
access. It is unnecessary to
disconnect them.
4. Disconnect solenoid cable

connection. [3]
5. Loosen the center nut of the

solenoid [4] using a screwdriver.
6. Unscrew and remove the solenoid
cap [5] from the waste manifold.
7. Pull the entire solenoid assembly

(cap and spring plunger) from the
waste manifold.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Solenoids Video contains no audio sound.
(wash cup Note
only) The procedure can be performed with
the wash cup connected in the
instrument. Video shows the wash
cup removed for video purposes only.
Install
Solenoids
1. Remove cap from solenoid to verify
(wash cup
the spring is present.
only)
2. Install the solenoid spring plunger [3]
and cap [2] into the wash cup body
then hand-tighten it until snug.
Note
Be sure to orient the solenoid
cables onto the wash cup
body. Nut on solenoid can be
loosened to adjust orientation
of solenoid cable.
3. Tighten center solenoid screw and
nut. [1]
4. Repeat steps 1- 3 to install all other
solenoids.
Caution
Over tightening can cause
wash cup damage.
Install Wash
Cup
1. Place the wash cup assembly onto
Assembly
the wash cup support and verify the
bottom VA<-> WC tubing is not
crimped or obstructed.
2. Tighten green captive screw [2] that

secures wash cup assembly.
3. Reconnect the solenoids at the wash

cup connections bracket. [1]
4. Proceed to the step "Prepare for
Operation".
Note
Wash cups may have a 2 or 3
valve configuration. Ensure all
valves are connected.
VIDEO
Install Note
Solenoid Video contains no audio sound.
(upper Note
waste The procedure can be performed with
manifold the upper waste manifold connected
only) in the instrument. Video shows the
manifold removed for video purposes
only.
Install
Solenoids
1. Remove cap from solenoid to verify
(upper
the spring is present.
waste
manifold 2. Install the entire solenoid (spring
only) plunger and cap) into the waste
manifold then hand-tighten it until
snug.
3. Tighten the center nut on the
solenoid. [4]
Note
Nut on solenoid can be
loosened to adjust orientation
of solenoid cable.
Note
Hand-tighten until snug
against wash cup body.
4. Connect the solenoid cable. [3]
5. Secure waste manifold to instrument

base with screw from previous
removal step. [2]
6. Place cables in clamp that were

removed in previous removal step. [1]
1. Replace the RV loader on the
processing center area and secure
the green screw.
2. Check the cables remain connected

to the loader and processing
distribution board.
3. Ensure the RV Loader Chute is

lowered.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E3.06 100 µL Buffer Pump Version - 201975-103_526_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96343-01 100uL Buffer Pump
E3.06 100 µL Buffer Pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite
Offline.
Preparation
1. Open waste and supply center door.
2. Remove the liquid and solid waste containers.
3. Disconnect the buffer reservoir to buffer pump (BR<-
>BP) [1] tubing from buffer container.
4. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the 100 µL buffer
pump and tubing with air.
5. Disconnect the buffer level sensor cable W310 and
buffer filter from the inlet straw. [2]
6. Remove the wash buffer container.
Remove
Buffer Pump
1. Disconnect the pump sensor [3] and motor cables. [4]
Note
Place an absorbent towel under the pump and
tubing connections to absorb any buffer leaks
2. Disconnect the buffer pump to syringe (BP<->S) [5]

tubing from the wash zone pump assembly.
3. Disconnect the buffer reservoir to wash zone pump
(BR<->WZP) [6] tubing connection.
4. Loosen the captive screw securing pump to back wall
of instrument.
5. Remove the pump.
6. Remove drip tray from pump.
7. Remove the BR<->WZP tubing from the pump
assembly. [7]
8. Loosen the captive screw securing pump to bracket.
9. Remove bracket.
Replacement
Install Buffer
Pump
1. Attach the bracket to pump and secure using green
captive screw.
2. Attach the BR<->BP tubing to the bottom port (inlet) of
buffer pump.
3. Snap drip tray onto pump.
4. Attach the pump to back wall of instrument and secure
with captive screw.
5. Connect the sensor [3] and motor cables [4] to pump.
6. Connect the BR<->S tubing [5] to top port (outlet) of
pump and tubing BR<->WZP [6] to bottom port (inlet).
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install wash buffer reservoir and connect tubing.
2. Load trigger and pre-trigger solutions.

errors.
filled with fluid.
E3.10A FMI 50ul Wash Zone Pump Version - 96728-111_412_4
List/Part Numbers
7-96346-01 50uL Buffer Pump (WZ)
E3.10A FMI 50µl Wash Zone Pump

#1 Phillips screwdriver
6" Slot screwdriver
Tools/Materials Silicone Compound DC- 111
7-14237-01
or
Silicone Compound DC-4 7-204410-01
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

Ready status.
Access
Appropriate
Pump
2. Open the pump bay access panel.
3. Open the pump bay rack.

Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar removal to the WZ
pumps.
Remove
Appropriate
1. Locate the appropriate pump.
Pump
1 - STP 100µl (i2000SR only)
2 - R2WP 100µl
3 - R1WP 100µl
4 - PTP 100µl
5 - WZ2P 50µl
6 - WZ1P 50µl
7 - R2P 100µl
8 - R1P 100µl
9 - SP 100µl
10 - TP 100µl
Note
The pump bay rack may
need to be separated to
access the appropriate
pump.

pump.
3. Disconnect the input (bottom) and
output (top) tubing from the pump.
Note
Make note of the position of
each tubing so that they can be
replaced in the correct position
on the manifold.
4. Disconnect the home sensor cable

from the pump.
5. Disconnect the pump motor cable
from the pump.
6. Loosen the screw (non-captive) and
remove the pump from the rack.
Replacement
Install
Pump
1. Add Silicone DC-111 or DC-4
compound (grease to completely fill the
motor cable and home sensor cable
connectors as prevention against fluid
damage.
Note
Add enough grease to the pump
connector to provide a protective
seal from leaks.
2. Grasp the pump, then align and tighten
the mounting screw.
3. Connect the home sensor cable to the

pump.
4. Connect the pump motor cable to the

pump.
5. Connect the input (bottom) and output

(top) tubing to the designated ports of
the pump.
6. Smooth in and wipe off of the excess
Silicone Compound squeezed out of the
connector edges to create a continuous
fluid barrier.
Note
Note
STAT Pump shown in video and is a similar removal to the WZ
pumps.

Note
The system control center power For further information on performing maintenance procedures, refer to
must be ON prior to turning on the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
the processing module for proper Maintenance, Subsection: As-needed maintenance procedures.
initialization.
2. Perform 2130 Flush Fluids.

3. Visually check for leaks.
4. Close the pump bay rack.
5. Close the pump bay panel.

errors.
3 2006 - Wash Zone 1 Check Perform to verify wash zone 1
4 2007 - Wash Zone 2 Check Perform to verify wash zone 2
E3.14 BD #8,SENSOR (Pump,Home) Version - 96728-111_413_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76480-01 BD, Sensor #8
7-900265-01 Sensor Board #8 (RoHS)
E3.14 BD #8,SENSOR (Pump,Home)
12 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Electrical Shock Hazard
Removal

Preparation
2. Disconnect the liquid waste outlet.
3. Open the pump bay panel.
4. Open the pump bay rack.
Remove
Sensor
1. Locate the appropriate pump.
Board #8
Note
The pump bay rack may need to
be separated to access the
appropriate pump.
2. Disconnect the pump home sensor cable
from the home sensor board.
3. Remove the screw (non-captive)
securing the sensor board #8 to the
pump.
4. Remove the sensor board and cover.
Replacement
Install Sensor
Board #8
1. Place sensor board #8, and cover, onto the appropriate pump and align the screw hole.
2. Install the screw.
3. Connect the pump home sensor cable.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Close the pump bay rack
Note
If the pump bay rack was separated the rack must be joined prior to closing the pump
bay rack.
2. Close the pump bay panel.

3. Connect the liquid waste outlet.
Note
The system control center power must be ON prior to turning on the processing

errors.
F1.01 Transfer Pump Version - 201975-103_527_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200100-01 Pump, Buffer Transfer
F1.01 Transfer Pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

System status.
or Offline.
Preparation
2. Place absorbent material under buffer filter.
3. Remove tubing from wash buffer reservoir
4. Perform 2136 Air Flush.
5. Disconnect the cable and remove the wash buffer
reservoir.
Remove
Transfer
1. Disconnect the air detect to the transfer pump
Pump
tubing (ADS<->TrP) from the air detect sensor
(ADS).
2. Disconnect the transfer pump to the buffer filter
tubing (TrP<->BF) from buffer filter.
3. Using a 11/32 nut driver, remove the 4 nuts and
washers securing the transfer pump to the back
wall of instrument.
4. Loosen the screw holding ground cable to back
wall.
5. Disconnect the transfer pump motor and sensor
cables from pump.
6. Remove transfer pump.
7. Release clamps to remove tubing ADS<->TrP
and TrP<->BF from pump. Retain tubing and
clamps for use later.
Replacement
Install Transfer
Pump
1. Connect the tubing ADS<->TrP and TrP<->BF to pump.
2. Attach the clamps to secure tubing to pump.
3. Align the pump with screw protruding from back wall and position pump on screws.
4. Install pump to instrument wall using four (4) nuts and washers.
Caution
Do not over tighten nuts. When threads slightly pass through nuts the transfer pump is
secure.
5. Connect the ground cable.

6. Verify the transfer pump is fully seated on screws and secure to back wall using the four (4)
washers and nuts from previous removal step.
7. Connect the tubing TrP<->BF to buffer filter and tubing ADS<->TrP to the ADS.
8. Connect the tubing and cable to wash buffer reservoir.
9. Install wash buffer reservoir.

errors.
2 G63 - Tubing / Fitting / Filter Verify tubing / fitting / filter is securely installed
and does not obstruct instrument components.
Ensure no leaks and/or bubbles are in the
tubing / fitting / filter.
F1.02 Air Detect Sensor Version - 201975-103_528_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200103-01 Sensor, Buffer Transfer Air Detect
F1.02 Air Detect Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Warming or Ready.
Preparation
Note
Place absorbent material under
air detect sensor.
2. Remove tubing from wash buffer

reservoir.
4. Disconnect the cable and remove the
wash buffer reservoir.
Remove Air
Detect
1. Open tie wraps securing the air detect
Sensor
sensor (ADS) to the back of the
instrument.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the air
detect sensor to the transfer pump
(ADS<->TrP).
3. Disconnect the tubing from the buffer
inlet to the air detect sensor (BI<-
>ADS).
4. Disconnect the air detect cable W312.
5. Remove ADS.
Replacement
Install Air
Detect Sensor Note
Verify ADS flow is down.
1. Connect the cable connection to ADS.

2. Connect the tubing buffer Inlet to the air detect
sensor (BI<->ADS).
3. Connect the tubing air detect sensor to the transfer
pump PN; 200382 (ADS<->TrP).
4. Secure ADS to the back of the instrument with tie
wraps.
5. Connect the tubing and cable to wash buffer
reservoir.

errors.
F1.03 Buffer Filter Version - 201975-103_529_2
List/Part Numbers
08C94-29 Filter, Buffer
F1.03 Buffer Filter

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Warming or Ready.
Preparation
Note
Place absorbent material under
buffer filter.
2. Remove tubing from wash buffer

reservoir.
4. Disconnect the cable and remove the
wash buffer reservoir.
Remove
Buffer Filter
1. Remove the filter from the frame feature
securing the buffer filter in the
instrument.
2. Disconnect the tubing at either end of
the buffer filter.
3. Remove filter.
Replacement
Install Buffer Filter

1. Connect the tubing at either end of the buffer filter.
2. Place the buffer filter into the frame feature in the supply and waste center.
3. Connect the tubing and cable to wash buffer reservoir.

errors.
F1.04 FILTER, BUFFER Version - 201975-103_6076_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-28 Filter, Buffer
F1.04 FILTER, BUFFER

Tools/Materials Absorbent towels
Caution
Lifting Hazard
Warning
Chemical Hazard
Removal

1. The processing module must be
in Warming, or Ready status.
Preparation
1. Open the supply and waste center
door.
Note
It may be necessary to
remove the solid waste
container [1] to improve
access, if one is present.
VIDEO
Remove Wash Note
Buffer Reservoir Video contains no audio sound.
And Filter
Remove Wash
Buffer Reservoir
1. Press the dark gray tubing quick
disconnect tab at top of filter. [1]
2. Press the tab on the buffer level

sensor electrical cable to slide
apart and disconnect. [2]
3. Depress the silver tab on the

beige connector on the buffer
outlet assembly. [3]
4. Grasp the top handle or hand

holds on the side of the buffer
reservoir [4] and slide it out.
5. Place the reservoir outside the

processing module on the floor.
Note
Ensure tubing and cable
connections are kept free
from damage.
Remove Filter
1. Press the dark gray tubing
connector at bottom of filter [1] to
disconnect the filter.
2. Remove the buffer filter from the

bracket. [2]
Replacement

VIDEO
Install Filter Note
And Buffer Video contains no audio sound.
Reservoir
Install Filter
1. Insert the buffer filter in the bracket.
[1]
2. Connect the bottom of the buffer filter

to the gray tubing connector [2] to the
bottom tubing from the transfer pump.
[3]
Note
Ensure all tubing is straight
and free of kinks to prevent
errors.
Install
Buffer
1. Grasp the top on the buffer reservoir
Reservoir
and slide the reservoir into the
processing module so the buffer level
sensor [1] is to the front and right
side.
Note
Carefully connect the buffer
level sensor [1] and buffer
outlet assembly [2] to prevent
damage.
2. Connect the buffer level sensor quick

disconnect [3] tubing to the top of
filter.
Note
An audible click will be heard
when the quick disconnect
snaps together securely.
3. Reconnect the grey buffer level

sensor electrical cable connection. [4]
4. Reconnect the beige connector (silver

tab) on the buffer outlet assembly [5]
to the buffer pump tubing.
Prepare for
Operation Note
Replace solid waste container,
if removed previously.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance M&D

2137 Flush Fluids to remove air and
check for leaks.
2. Replace the Close the supply and
waste center door.
Verify tubing / fitting / filter is securely installed

G1.01 Wash Zone Manifold Assembly (written to be customer-
Version - 201975-103_530_2
List/Part Numbers
7-204727-01 Assy, Manifold WZ FEP Tips, with Valves
7-97034-01 Assy, Wash Zone Manifold, with Valves
G1.01 Wash Zone Manifold Assembly (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module status For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
must be Ready, Stopped or Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
Offline.
Preparation
1. Power OFF the
processing module.
2. Open the processing

center cover to access
wash zone manifold
assembly.
3. Remove RV loader and

set inside the top of the
processing cover.
4. Remove the processing

center internal cover.
5. Locate the wash zone

manifold assembly.
VIDEO
Mechanism Assembly, Video contains no audio
Remove Wash Zone sound.
Heater and Remove WZ
Manifold
Remove Wash Zone

Mechanism Assembly
green captive screws [1]
securing WZ mechanism
assembly to WZ
manifold.
2. Lift the WZ mechanism

assembly from WZ
manifold to free from the
guiding pins.
3. Set the wash zone

mechanism assembly
aside.
Remove Wash Zone

Heater
1. Disconnect 4 WZ
manifold valve cables
from connectors V1-V4
on the WZ heater
bracket. [1]
2. Disconnect the tubing

from the WZ heater to
WZ manifold. [2]
3. Loosen the green

captive screw securing
WZ heater to manifold.
[3]
4. Lift out the heater and

lay the WZ heater aside.
Remove Wash Zone

Manifold
1. Loosen the silver
thumbscrew [1] securing
WZ manifold to the
process path.
2. Lift the WZ manifold

from the process path
and disconnect the
WZV<->UWM tubing. [2]
3. Remove WZ manifold
from the Module.
Note
Use caution to
prevent lateral
force and damage
to the valves.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install WZ Manifold Note
Assembly, Install Video contains no audio
WZ Heater and sound.
Install Wash Zone
Mechanism
Assembly
Install WZ Manifold
Assembly
1. Connect the WZV<->UWM
tubing to the bottom of the
WZ manifold. [2]
2. Align the WZ manifold

assembly onto the process
path cover.
3. Secure WZ manifold to the

process path cover using
silver thumbscrew. [1]
Note
Verify that the tubing is
free from kinks and
obstructions.
Install WZ Heater
1. Secure WZ heater to WZ
manifold with green captive
screw. [3]
2. Connect the tubing from the

WZ heater to WZ manifold. [2]
3. Connect the 4 valve cables to

the respective connectors V1-
V4 on heater bracket. [1]
Note
Be sure to secure valve
cables into routing clip
to prevent damage.
Install Wash Zone

Mechanism
1. Install WZ mechanism
Assembly
assembly onto the process
path cover.
2. Verify WZ mechanism
assembly is properly seated
into mounting feature.
3. Secure WZ mechanism
assembly to the WZ manifold
with two green captive
screws. [1]
1. Replace internal processing
covers.
2. Replace the RV Loader on to

the instrument mounting plate
and secure the green screw.
cover.

module.
Note
The system control
ON and at the
Snapshot screen prior
to turning on the
processing model to
verify proper
initialization.

processing module and
sample handler status from
Stopped to Ready.
open/close freely.
1 2052 - WZ Aspiration Test
filled with fluid.
G1.02 Wash Zone Manifold without Valves Version - 201975-103_531_4
List/Part Numbers
7-204726-01 Manifold, WZ FEP Tips, without Valves
7-204726-02 Manifold, WZ FEP Tips, without Valves (RoHS)
7-97039-01 Manifold, WZ, without Valves
G1.02 Wash Zone Manifold without Valves
Note

Gaskets
3X Manifold Valve Kit
Way Bypass Valve
Lee Valve Tool
O-ring Removal Tool
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module status For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
must be Stopped or Offline. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
1. Open waste and supply
maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
center door.
2. Remove tubing from

buffer Reservoir.
3. Perform 2136 Air Flush

to purge the 50 µL
wash zone (WZ) pump
and tubing with air.
Note
Failure to drain
buffer from the
tubing will result
in a leak when
tubing is
removed.
4. Power OFF the
processing module.
5. Open the processing
module cover.
6. Remove the internal
processing covers.
VIDEO
Mechanism Assembly And Video contains no
Remove Wash Zone audio sound.
Heater And Remove WZ
Manifold
Remove Wash Zone

Mechanism Assembly
1. Loosen the two green
captive screws
securing WZ
mechanism assembly
to WZ manifold. [1]
2. Lift the WZ mechanism

assembly from WZ
manifold to free from
the guiding pins.
3. Set the wash zone

mechanism assembly
aside.
Remove Wash Zone

Heater
1. Disconnect 4 WZ
manifold valve cables
from connectors V1-V4
on the WZ heater
bracket. [1]
2. Disconnect the tubing

from the WZ heater to
WZ manifold. [2]
3. Loosen the green

captive screw securing
WZ heater to manifold.
[3]
4. Lift out the heater and
lay the WZ heater
aside.
Remove WZ Manifold
1. Loosen the silver pin
[1] securing WZ
manifold to the process
path.
2. Lift the WZ manifold

from the process path
cover.
3. Disconnect the WZV<-

>UWM tubing from the
bottom of the manifold.
[2].
4. Remove WZ manifold
assembly.
Note
Use caution to
prevent lateral
force and
damage to the
valves.
VIDEO
Remove WZ Manifold Note
Valves Video contains no
audio sound.
Note
Video only shows the
first and last gaskets
removed. All gaskets
are required to be
removed.
Remove WZ Manifold
Valves Note
Use caution to
prevent lateral
force and
damage to the
valves.
1. Use the Lee Valve tool

[1] to remove WZ
valves.
2. Use O-ring removal

tool [2] to remove 2
gaskets. [3]
Replacement
VIDEO
Install WZ Note
Manifold Valves Video contains no audio sound.
Note
Video shows only the V1, V1
gaskets and valve installation.
All gaskets and valves are
required to be installed.
Install Valve on
WZ Manifold Note
Verify that the manifold
valve ports openings do
not have any old gasket
material.
1. Place new gaskets into the

manifold [3] and ensure they
are fully seated to prevent
damage.
Note
The O-ring removal tool
[2] can be used to install
the gaskets.
2. Place the black collar manifold
valves into ports V1 - V3 the
blue collar 2-way bypass valve
into port V4 of the WZ manifold.
3. Gently rotate the valve until the

ports are properly seated and
finger-tighten the retaining ring
ONLY until it just meets
resistance.
Note
Using the valve removal
tool to tighten the valves
will result in manifold
damage and create
leaks.
Note
Prevent manifold
damage and avoid
unnecessary lateral force
to the valves.
4. Check that the ring is snug by
placing the valve removal tool
[1] over the retaining ring and
tighten it ONLY another 1/6 to
1/4 turn using the valve
removal tool (about one flat on
the hexagonal top).
5. Repeats steps for all valve

ports.
6. Connect the valve cable(s) to

their respective connectors on
the WZ heater bracket. [1]
7. Secure valve cables into the

routing clip.
VIDEO
Install Wash Zone Note
Mechanism Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly And
Install Heater And
Install Wash Zone
Mechanism
Assembly
Install WZ
Manifold
1. Secure WZV <-> UWM tubing
Assembly
to the bottom of the WZ
manifold. [2]
2. Align the WZ manifold

assembly onto the process path
cover.
3. Secure WZ manifold to the

process path cover using silver
thumbscrew. [1]
Note
Verify that tubing is free
from kinks and
obstructions.
Install WZ Heater
1. Secure WZ heater to WZ
manifold with green captive
screw. [3]
2. Connect the tubing from the

WZ heater to WZ manifold. [2]
3. Connect the 4 valve cables to

respective connectors V1-V4 on
the heater bracket. [1]
Note
Be sure to secure valve
cables into routing clip to
prevent damage.
Install Wash Zone

Mechanism
1. Install WZ mechanism assembly
Assembly
onto the process path cover.
2. Verify WZ mechanism assembly

is properly seated into mounting
feature.
3. Secure WZ mechanism
assembly to the WZ manifold
with two green captive screws.
[1]
1. Install the internal processing
covers.

cover.

module.
Note
The system control
ON and at the Snapshot
screen prior to turning on
the processing model to

Ready.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.03 Wash Zone Motor Version - 201975-103_532_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98181-01 Motor, WZ, with Cable W104
G1.03 Wash Zone Motor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Open the processing module cover and remove all
Motor
appropriate internal covers to access the CMIA wash
zone (WZ) mechanism assembly.
2. Move the RV loader out of processing center area and
into processing center cover.
Note
Do not disconnect RV loader assembly cable
connection at the processing center distribution
board.
3. Loosen the two green captive screws securing WZ

mechanism assembly to WZ manifold.
4. Lift the WZ mechanism assembly from WZ manifold
and turn over to access WZ motor.
Remove WZ
Motor
1. Remove WZ motor cable W104 from clamp on upper
waste manifold and tie wraps.
2. Disconnect the cable from J13 on the processing center
distribution board.
3. Remove screw to clamp securing cables to WZ
mechanism.
4. Remove WZ motor cable from clamp.
5. Remove two (2) screws securing WZ motor to WZ
mechanism assembly.
6. Slide WZ motor out of mount for probes and remove.
Replacement
Install WZ Motor
1. Place WZ motor onto the Mount for probes.
Note
Verify that the end of the motor is placed between the lower nut and washer.
2. Secure motor to WZ mechanism with two screws from previous removal step.
3. Secure WZ motor cable to WZ mechanism with clamp and screw from previous removal
step.
Install Wash Zone
Mechanism Assembly
1. Place WZ mechanism assembly onto the process path cover.
2. Verify WZ mechanism assembly is properly seated into mounting feature and no cables
or tubings are pinched or obstructed underneath WZ mechanism.
3. Secure WZ mechanism assembly to the WZ manifold with two (2) captive screws.
4. Route WZ motor cable W104 to processing center distribution board in reverse order of
removal step.
5. Secure cable with clamp on the upper waste manifold and tie wraps.
6. Connect to WZ motor cable W104 at J13 and on the processing center distribution
board.
7. Place RV loader assembly back onto mounting feature in processing center and secure
with captive screw.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.04 Wash Zone Buffer Heater Assembly Version - 201975-103_533_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200600-01 Assy, WZ Buffer Heater, Complete
G1.04 Wash Zone Buffer Heater Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
zone (WZ) heater assembly.
2. Move the RV loader out of processing center area
and into processing center cover.
Note
connection at the processing center
distribution board.
Remove Wash
Zone Heater
1. Disconnect the tubing from the WZ heater to WZ
Assembly
manifold.
2. Disconnect the WZ manifold valve cables from
connectors V1-V4 on the WZ heater bracket.
3. Disconnect connectors V1-V4 on WZ temp sensor
cable from heater bracket.
4. Loosen the green captive screw securing WZ heater
to manifold. [4]
5. Disconnect heater cable W112 [6] from J13 on the
processing central distribution board.
6. Lift the WZ heater assembly and disconnect heater
tubing from WZP<->WZH. [5]
7. Remove WZ heater assembly.
Replacement
Install WZ Heater
Assembly
1. Connect the heater tubing to WZP<->WZH.
2. Connect V1-V4 on WZ temp sensor cable to the appropriate slot on the heater bracket.
3. Place and secure WZ heater on WZ manifold with green captive screw
4. Verify no cables or tubing are pinched or obstructed by WZ heater assembly.
5. Connect the tubing from the WZ heater to WZ manifold.
6. Connect V1-V4 valve cables to respective connectors on heater bracket.
7. Place the RV loader assembly onto the mounting feature in the processing center and
secure it with the captive screw.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.05 Wash Zone Buffer Heater Version - 201975-103_535_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97309-01 Heater, WZ Buffer
7-97309-02 Heater, WZ Buffer (RoHS)
G1.05 Wash Zone Buffer Heater

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
zone (WZ) heater assembly.
Note
connection at the processing center
distribution board.
Remove Wash
Zone Heater
1. Disconnect the tubing from the WZ heater to WZ
Assembly
manifold. [2]
2. Disconnect the heater tubing and accumulator tubing
assembly. [3]
3. Loosen the screw to heater bracket and remove
accumulator tubing. [8]
4. Loosen the green captive screw securing WZ heater
to manifold. [4]
5. Remove WZ heater cable W112 from tie wraps.
6. Disconnect the cable from J13 [6] on the processing
7. Remove WZ heater assembly.
8. Loosen the three (3) screws [5] securing heater
bracket to buffer heater and remove buffer heater.
Replacement
Install WZ Heater
Assembly
1. Align the three (3) screws on buffer heater onto heater bracket.
2. Tighten screws to secure buffer heater and heater bracket.
3. Secure WZ heater assembly onto the process path cover with green captive screw.
4. Verify no cables or tubing are pinched or obstructed by WZ heater assembly.
5. Connect the tubing from top of the WZ buffer heater to WZ manifold.
6. Connect the tubing from bottom of WZ buffer heater to accumulator tube assembly.
7. Route WZ heater cable W112 to process distribution board and secure with tie wraps.
8. Connect the cable to J17 on the processing center distribution board.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.06 50 µL Wash Zone Pump Version - 201975-103_555_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96346-01 50uL Buffer Pump (WZ)
G1.06 50 µL Wash Zone Pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite
Offline.
Preparation
2. Remove tubing from the buffer container.
3. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the 50 µL wash zone
(WZ) pump and tubing with air.
Remove Wash
Zone Pump
1. Disconnect the sensor and motor cables.
Note
Place an absorbent towel under the pump and
tubing connections to absorb any buffer leaks.
2. Disconnect the buffer reservoir to pump (BR<->BP)

and the buffer pump to syringe (BP<->S) tubing from
pump assembly.
3. Loosen the captive screw securing pump to back wall
of instrument.
4. Remove the pump.
5. Remove drip tray from pump.
6. Loosen the captive screw securing pump to bracket.
7. Remove bracket.
Replacement
Install Wash Zone

Pump
1. Attach the bracket to pump and secure with captive screw.
2. Snap drip tray onto pump.
3. Attach the pump to back wall of instrument and secure with green captive screw.
4. Connect the sensor and motor cables to pump.
5. Connect the tubing BR<->BP to top port (inlet) of pump and tubing BP<->S to bottom port
(outlet).
Prepare for Operation

1. Install wash buffer reservoir and connect tubing.
2. Install trigger tray.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.07 CMIA Wash Zone Mechanism Version - 201975-103_536_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97035-01 Assy, CMIA Wash Mechanism, Complete
7-97035-02 Assy, CMIA Wash Mechanism, Complete
G1.07 CMIA Wash Zone Mechanism

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove CMIA
Wash Zone
Mechanism
appropriate internal covers to access the CMIA
Assembly
wash zone (WZ) mechanism assembly.
Remove CMIA
Wash Zone
Mechanism
Assembly
(continued) Note
Do not disconnect RV loader assembly
cable connection at the processing center
distribution board. Open probe latch and
remove WZ probes from probe mount.
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws securing WZ
3. Lift the WZ mechanism assembly from WZ
manifold.
4. Remove WZ motor cable W104 and WZ home
sensor cable W105 for clamps and tie wraps.
5. Disconnect the cables from J13 and J6 on the
6. Remove CMIA WZ mechanism.
Replacement
Install Wash Zone

Mechanism Assembly
1. Install WZ mechanism assembly onto the process path cover.
2. Verify WZ mechanism assembly is properly seated into mounting feature and no cables
or tubing are pinched or obstructed underneath WZ mechanism.
3. Secure WZ mechanism assembly to the WZ manifold with two (2) captive screws.
4. Route WZ motor cable W104 and WZ home sensor cable W105 to processing center
distribution board in reverse order of removal step.
5. Secure cables with clamp on the upper waste manifold and tie wraps.
6. Connect to cable W104 at J13 and W105 at J6 on the processing center distribution
board.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.08 Wash Zone Home Sensor Version - 201975-103_537_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98059-01 Sensor, WZ Home, Cable W105
G1.08 Wash Zone Home Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
zone (WZ) mechanism assembly.
2. Move the RV loader out of processing center area and
into processing center cover.
Note
board.
3. Loosen the two green captive screws securing WZ

4. Lift the WZ mechanism assembly from WZ manifold
and turn over to access WZ home sensor.
Remove WZ
Home Sensor
1. Remove WZ home sensor cable W105 from clamp on
upper waste manifold and tie wraps.
2. Disconnect the cable from J6 on the processing center
distribution board.
3. Remove screw to clamp securing cables to WZ
mechanism.
4. Remove WZ home sensor from clamp.
5. Remove screw securing WZ home sensor to WZ
mechanism assembly. Retain screw for use later.
6. Remove WZ home sensor.
Replacement
Install WZ Home
Sensor
1. Secure WZ home sensor to WZ mechanism assembly with screw previous removal
steps.
2. Secure WZ home sensor cable to WZ mechanism assembly with screw and clamp from
removal step.
Install Wash Zone

Mechanism Assembly
1. Install WZ mechanism assembly onto the process path cover.
2. Verify WZ mechanism assembly is properly seated onto mounting feature and no cables
or tubing are pinched or obstructed underneath WZ mechanism.
3. Secure WZ mechanism assembly to the WZ manifold with two green captive screws.
4. Route WZ home sensor cable W105 to processing center distribution board in reverse
order of removal step.
5. Secure cable with clamp on the upper waste manifold and tie wraps.
6. Connect to cable W105 at J6 on the processing center distribution board.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
G1.09 PROBE, WZ Version - 201975-103_6077_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-35 Probe, WZ
G1.09 PROBE, WZ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Warming, or Ready status.
Preparation
access the wash zone probe.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to be

replaced. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Wash Zone Video contains no audio sound.
Probe
Remove
Wash Zone
1. Loosen the screw [1] on the probe
Probe
clip.
2. Turn the probe clip screw

counterclockwise [2] then the clip
away from the wash zone probe.
3. Remove the tubing from the top of

the wash zone guide.
4. Gently slide the tubing off the probe.
5. Lift the probe from the wash zone

mechanism assembly.
Replacement

VIDEO
Install Note
Wash Video contains no audio sound.
Zone
Probe
Install
Wash
1. Slide the probe in the wash zone
Zone
mechanism assembly until it is fully
Probe
seated.
Note
Pull up on the wash zone
mechanism to raise it if the
probes do not fit into the
openings on the wash zone
mechanism assembly.
2. Push the wash zone tubing onto the

probe until it passes the ridge on the
probe. [1]
Note
The tubing will look staggered.
Ensure the tubing passes the
ridge.
3. Place the tubing into the guides on the

top of the wash zone mechanism
assembly.
4. Rotate the WZ probe clip clockwise to

hold the probe in the WZ.
5. Turn the screw clockwise to tighten it.
Note
Ensure WZ mechanism moves
smoothly up and down without
resistance. If resistance occurs
slide the tubing to allow the WZ
Mechanism to move freely.
Prepare
for
Operation
Verify controls are within specifications for

G1.10 TUBING/SENSOR, TEMP, WZ Version - 201975-103_6078_1
List/Part Numbers
08C94-87 Tubing/Sensor, Temperature, WZ
G1.10 TUBING/SENSOR, TEMP, WZ

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

1. The processing module must
be in Warming, or Ready
status.
Preparation
1. Lift the processing center cover
to access the wash zone
probe.
2. Locate the wash zone probe to

be replaced. [1]
VIDEO
Remove Wash Note
Zone Temperature Video contains no audio sound.
Tubing and Sensor
Assembly
Remove Wash
Zone Temperature
1. Remove the tubing from the
Tubing and Sensor
probe by gently pulling and
Assembly
sliding it from the probe.
2. Disconnect the corresponding

temperature sensor connector.
[1]
3. Remove tubing from upper

waste manifold. [2]
4. Pull tubing from barb fitting on

upper waste manifold. [3]
VIDEO
Install Wash Zone Note
Temperature Video contains no audio sound.
Tubing and Sensor
Assembly
Replace WZ
Sensor and Tubing
1. Connect the tubing to the barb
Assembly
fitting on the upper waste
manifold. [1]
2. Attach the temperature sensor

connector to the corresponding
labeled cable.
3. Orient the sensor tubing [2] so

the sensor connector is
oriented toward the top of the
upper waste manifold when
inserted.
4. Press the sensor tubing into

the upper waste manifold
tubing guide on the top.
5. Push the wash zone tubing

onto the wash zone probe until
it passes the ridge [3] on the
probe.
Note
Ensure the tubing is on
the probe past the ridge
line [3] and stops prior
to the bend in the probe.
Note
Ensure the tubing s
staggered across the
probes [4] to prevent
WZ movement errors.
Prepare for
Operation
cover.
Verify controls are within specifications for

H1.01 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold Assembly (written to be customer-
Version - 201975-103_538_1
H1.01 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold Assembly (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
function, Subsection: System status.
Ready, Stopped or Offline.
Perform 2136 Air

Flush WARNING
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-
trigger and trigger solutions
1. Open the supply and waste center door.

2. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
3. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensor for
the pre-trigger/trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-trigger/trigger) in
their container so that the assembly is out of
the solution.
5. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the pre-
trigger/trigger pumps and tubing with air.
Preparation
2. Open the processing module cover and
remove appropriate internal covers to access
the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
Note
Refer to the processing center map
located on the top cover for pre-
trigger/trigger manifold location (PT/T).
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger (PT-T) WARNING
Manifold Assembly Protective eyewear must be worn.
1. Loosen the green captive screw securing the

pre-trigger/trigger heater to manifold. [1]
2. Loosen the two (2) silver pins securing the
pre-trigger/trigger manifold to the process
path. [2]
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger heater
tubing from the manifold.
4. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
valve cables from connectors V1-V4 on the
pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
5. Lay the pre-trigger/trigger heater on the base
of the instrument.
6. Disconnect the PTV <-> UWM and TV<-
>UWM tubing from the pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
7. Remove the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
assembly.
Replacement
Install Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Connect the PTV <-> UWM (left)
Manifold
and TV<->UWM (right) tubing to the
Assembly
pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
2. Connect valve cables V1-V4 to their
respective connectors on the heater
bracket. [1]
3. Align the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
on the process path cover and
secure with the two (2) silver
pins. [2]
4. Connect the trigger (clear) heater
and pre-trigger heater (black) to the
pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
5. Secure the pre-trigger/trigger heater
to the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
with green captive screw. [3]
6. Place the level sensors for the pre-
trigger/trigger back into their
containers
open/close freely.
3 2072 - Pre-Trigger Check
4 2073 - Trigger Check
filled with fluid.
H1.02 Pre-Trigger Pump Version - 201975-103_539_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96345-01 Pre Trigger Pump
H1.02 Pre-Trigger Pump

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function,
Subsection: System status.
Offline.
Preparation
4. Move the RV loader out of the processing center
area and into processing center cover.
Note
board.
Remove
Pre-Trigger
1. Disconnect the pre-trigger pump to pre-trigger heater
Pump
(PTP<->PTH) tubing and motor cable W301. [1]
2. Use a right angle ratchet driver to loosen the captive
screw securing the pump to the instrument frame. [2]
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger to pre-trigger pump (PT<-
>PTP) [3] 200118 tubing and the pre-trigger pump
home sensor cable W301. [4]
4. Remove the pre-trigger pump.
Replacement
Install Pre-Trigger
Pump
1. Connect the PT<->PTP tubing and the sensor cable W301 to the pump.
2. Secure pump to the instrument frame using the green captive screw.
3. Connect the PTP<->PTH tubing and motor cable W301.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.03 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold Version - 201975-103_540_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97046-01 Assy, Pre-Trig Trig Manifold, with Valves
H1.03 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Manifold

Tools/Materials Standard Tool Kit, Standard Tool Kit
Gaskets
(2X) Manifold Valve Kit
(2X) 2 Way Bypass Valve
Lee Valve Tool
O-ring Removal Tool
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
3. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensor for
the pre-trigger/trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-trigger/trigger) in
their container so that the assembly is out of
the solution.
5. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the pre-
trigger/trigger pumps and tubing with air.
7. Open the processing module cover and
remove appropriate internal covers to access
the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger (PT-T) WARNING
Manifold Assembly Protective eyewear must be worn.
1. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
valve cables from connectors V1-V4 on the
pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
2. Remove valve cables from routing clip.
3. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger heater
tubing from the manifold.
4. Loosen the green captive screw securing the
pre-trigger/trigger heater to manifold.
5. Lay the pre-trigger/trigger heater on the base
of the instrument.
6. Disconnect the PTV <-> UWM and TV<-
>UWM tubing from the pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
7. Loosen the two (2) silver pins securing the
pre-trigger/trigger manifold to the process
path.
8. Remove the pre-trigger/trigger manifold
assembly.
Note
Use caution to ensure no unnecessary
lateral force is applied to the valves.
9. Use the Lee Valve tool to remove the valves
from the manifold.
10. Use O-ring removal tool to remove gaskets.
Replacement
Install Valve on Pre-

Trigger/Trigger Manifold
1. Verify that the manifold valve ports openings do not have any old gasket
material.
2. Place new gaskets into the manifold.
Note
Be very careful to fully insert the gaskets into the manifold hole without
damaging them in any way.
3. Place the manifold kit valves into ports V1 and V3 of the Pre-Trigger/Trigger
manifold.
4. Install the 2-way bypass valve into ports V2 and V4 of the Pre-Trigger/Trigger
manifold.
5. Gently rotate the valve until the ports are properly seated.
6. Tighten the retaining ring until it just meets resistance.
Note
Do not use a tool on valve or manifold, finger tighten only.
Note
Use caution to ensure no unnecessary lateral force is applied to the
valves.
7. Place the valve removal tool over the retaining ring and make sure the ring is
snug.
8. Verify the valve cable is routed through the slot with the valve removal tool on
top of the valve.
9. Tighten another 1/6 to 1/4 turn using the valve removal tool (about one flat on
the hexagonal top).
10. Repeats steps for all valve ports.
Install Pre-Trigger/Trigger
Manifold Assembly
1. Connect the PTV <-> UWM (left) and TV<->UWM (right) tubing to the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold.
2. Align the pre-trigger/trigger manifold on the process path cover and secure with
the two (2) silver thumbscrews.
3. Secure the pre-trigger/trigger heater to the pre-trigger/trigger manifold with
green captive screw.
4. Connect the trigger (clear) heater and pre-trigger heater (black) to the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold.
5. Connect the valve cables to their respective connectors on the heater bracket.
6. Secure the valve cables into routing clip.
7. Place the level sensors for the pre-trigger/trigger back into their containers.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.04 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heater Assembly Version - 201975-103_541_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97037-01 Manifold, Pre-Trig_Trig, without Valves
7-97037-02 Manifold, Pre-Trig_Trig, without Valves
H1.04 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heater Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite
1. The processing module status must be Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
WARNING
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and trigger solutions

3. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensor for the pre-trigger/trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-trigger/trigger) in their container so that the assembly is
out of the solution.
5. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the pre-trigger/trigger pumps and tubing with
air.
7. Open the processing module cover and remove appropriate internal covers to
access the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
Remove Pre-Trigger/Trigger
Heater Assembly WARNING
Protective eyewear must be worn for this Action.
1. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold valve cables from connectors V1-V4

on the pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger heater tubing from the manifold.
3. Loosen the green captive screw securing the pre-trigger/trigger heater to
manifold.
4. Disconnect the V1-V4 pre-trigger/trigger valve cables W201 connectors from the
heater bracket.
5. Disconnect the TP<->TH and PTP<-PTH tubing from the heater bracket.
6. Remove the pre-trigger/trigger heater cable W202 from tie wraps.
7. Disconnect the cable from J6 on the reagent distribution board.
8. Remove WZ heater assembly
Replacement
Manifold Assembly
1. Connect the TP<->TH (top) and PTP<-PTH (bottom black) tubing to the heater
bracket.
2. Connect the V1-V4 valve cables W201 connectors to their respective slots on the
heater bracket.
3. Secure the pre-trigger/trigger heater to manifold with the green captive screw.
4. Connect the pre-trigger (left black) and trigger (right) heater tubing to the manifold.
5. Connect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold valve cables to their respective connectors
V1-V4 on the pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
6. Route the pre-trigger/trigger heater cable W202 to the reagent distribution board
and secure with tie wraps.
7. Connect cable W202 to J6 on the reagent distribution board.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.05 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heater Version - 201975-103_542_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200599-01 Assy, Trigger_Pre-Trigger Heater, Complete
7-97332-02 Heater, Trigger_Pre-Trigger (RoHS)
H1.05 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heater

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite
1. The processing module status must be Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
WARNING
Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger and trigger solutions

3. Unscrew and pull up on the level sensor for the pre-trigger/trigger.
4. Angle both sensors (pre-trigger/trigger) in their container so that the assembly is
out of the solution.
5. Perform 2136 Air Flush to purge the pre-trigger/trigger pumps and tubing with
air.
7. Open the processing module cover and remove appropriate internal covers to
access the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
Remove Pre-Trigger/Trigger
Heater Assembly WARNING
Protective eyewear must be worn for this Action.
1. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold valve cables from connectors V1-V4

on the pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger/trigger heater tubing from the manifold.
3. Loosen the green captive screw securing the pre-trigger/trigger heater to
manifold.
4. Disconnect the V1-V4 pre-trigger/trigger valve cables W201 connectors from the
heater bracket.
5. Disconnect the TP<->TH and PTP<-PTH tubing from the heater bracket.
6. Remove the pre-trigger/trigger heater cable W202 from tie wraps.
7. Disconnect the cable from J6 on the reagent distribution board.
8. Remove the pre-trigger/trigger heater assembly.
9. Remove heater bracket from the pre-trigger/trigger heater.
Replacement
Manifold Assembly
1. Align the three (3) screws on the pre-trigger/trigger heater onto heater bracket.
2. Tighten screws to secure the pre-trigger/trigger heater and heater bracket.
3. Connect the TP<->TH (top) and PTP<-PTH (bottom black) tubing to the heater
bracket.
4. Connect the V1-V4 valve cables W201 connectors to their respective slots on the
heater bracket.
5. Secure the pre-trigger/trigger heater to manifold with the green captive screw.
6. Connect Pre-Trigger (left black) and Trigger (right) heater tubing to the manifold.
7. Connect the pre-trigger/trigger manifold valve cables to their respective connectors
V1-V4 on the pre-trigger/trigger heater bracket.
8. Route the pre-trigger/trigger heater cable W202 to the reagent distribution board
and secure with tie wraps.
9. Connect cable W202 to J6 on the reagent distribution board.
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.06 Trigger Pump Version - 201975-103_543_2
List/Part Numbers
7-96344-01 100uL Trigger Pump
7-97332-01 Heater, Trigger_Pre-Trigger
H1.06 Trigger Pump

Tools/Materials Right angle Phillips head Ratchet Driver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal

System status.
Stopped or Offline.
Preparation
4. Move the RV loader out of the processing
center area and into processing center cover.
Note
Do not disconnect RV loader assembly
cable connection at the processing
Remove
Trigger WARNING
Pump Avoid skin and eye contact with pre-trigger
and trigger solutions
WARNING
Protective eyewear must be worn for this
Action.
1. Disconnect the trigger pump to trigger heater
(TP<->TH) and trigger-to-trigger pump (T<-
>TP) tubing.
2. Disconnect the motor cable W301.
3. Using a right angle ratchet driver, loosen the
captive screw securing the pump to the
instrument frame.
4. Pull pump out slightly and disconnect the
sensor cable W301.
5. Remove the pump.
Replacement
Install Trigger
Pump
1. Connect the home sensor cable W301 to the pump.
2. Secure the pump to the instrument using the green captive screw.
3. Connect the pump motor cable W301 to the pump.
4. Connect the TP<->TH (upper outlet) and T<->TP (lower inlet) tubing to the designated ports of
the pump.
5. Place the RV loader assembly onto the mounting feature in the processing center and secure it
with the captive screw.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.07 Sensor #8 Bd Version - 201975-103_545_2
List/Part Numbers
7-76480-01 BD, Sensor #8
7-900265-01 Sensor Board #8 (RoHS)
H1.07 Sensor #8 Bd

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Preparation
2. Locate the trigger and/or pre-trigger pump(s).
Remove Sensor #8 Board

(Trigger Pump only)
1. Remove screw securing sensor #8 board to trigger pump. Retain screw for
use later.
2. Slightly lift the sensor out of the pump and disconnect the sensor cable W301.
3. Remove the sensor.
Remove Sensor #8 Board (Pre-

Trigger Pump only)
1. Use a right angle ratchet driver to loosen the green captive screw securing
the pre-trigger pump to the instrument frame.
2. Pull pump out slightly and disconnect the pre-trigger pump home sensor cable
W301
3. Turn pump on its side to access sensor #8 board.
4. Remove screw securing sensor #8 board to pre-trigger pump. Retain screw
for use later.
5. Remove the sensor from the pump.
Replacement
Install Sensor #8 Board (Trigger Pump

only)
1. Connect the home sensor cable W301 to the sensor #8 board.
2. Secure the sensor to trigger pump using screw from previous removal
step.
Install Sensor #8 Board (Pre-Trigger
Pump only
1. Secure the sensor to pre-trigger pump using screw from previous
removal step.
2. Connect the sensor cable W301 to the sensor.

errors.
filled with fluid.
H1.08 Manifold Valve Kit and 2 Way Bypass Valve (written to be
Version - 201975-103_546_3
customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-200607-01 Valve, Bypass, 2 way
7-77612-01 Valve, Manifold Kit
H1.08 Manifold Valve Kit and 2-Way Bypass Valve (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Note
Valve Removal Tool,

Tools/Materials
O-Ring Removal Tool
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Chemical Hazard
Removal
Prerequisite The processing module status must For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
be Ready, Stopped or Offline. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
WARNING ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 9: Service and
Avoid skin and eye contact maintenance, Subsection: Component replacement.
with pre-trigger and trigger
solutions.
1. Open the supply and waste

center door.
2. Remove tubing from the buffer

reservoir.
3. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray

out.
4. Unscrew and pull up on the

level sensor for the pre-
trigger/trigger.
5. Angle both sensors (pre-

trigger/trigger) in their container
so that the assembly is out of
the solution.
6. Perform M&D 2136 Air Flush to

purge the pre-trigger/trigger
pumps and tubing with air.
Note
Failure to remove the
tubing for the bottle will
result in a leak once the
tubing is removed.
7. Power OFF the processing

module.
8. Open the processing center

cover and remove the internal
cover to access the pre-
trigger/trigger manifold and the
wash zone manifold.
Note
Refer to the processing
center map for the
manifold (WZ or PT/T)
locations.
VIDEO
Remove WZ Note
Manifold Valves Video contains no audio sound.
VIDEO
Remove Pre- Note
Manifold Valves
Remove Pre-
Trigger/Trigger
1. Remove valve cables from clip.
Manifold or Wash
Zone Manifold 2. Disconnect the WZ or pre-
Valves trigger/trigger manifold valve
cables from connectors V1-V4
on the WZ or pre-trigger/trigger
heater bracket. [1]
Note
Prevent manifold
damage and avoid
unnecessary lateral force
to the valves.
3. Use the valve removal tool [2]

to remove valves.
4. Use O-ring removal tool [3] to

remove gaskets.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Valve(s) Note
(WZ Manifold Video contains no audio sound.
only)
Install Valve(s)
(WZ Manifold Note
only) Verify that the manifold
valve ports openings do not
have any old gasket
material.

manifold [3] and ensure that they
are fully seated to prevent
damage.
Note
The O-ring removal tool [1]
can be used to install the
gaskets.

valves into ports V1 - V3 of the
WZ manifold and the blue collar
2-way bypass valve into port V4 of
the WZ manifold.

ports are properly seated, and
resistance.
Note
damage and create leaks.
Note
Prevent manifold damage
and avoid unnecessary
lateral force to the valves.
placing the valve removal tool [2]
over the retaining ring and tighten
it ONLY another 1/6 to 1/4 turn
using the valve removal tool
(about one flat on the hexagonal
top).

5. Repeat these steps for all valve
ports.
6. Connect the valve cable(s) to their

respective connectors on the WZ
heater bracket. [3]
7. Secure the valve cables into the

routing clip.
VIDEO
Install Valve(s) Note
(Pre- Video contains no audio sound.
Trigger/Trigger
Manifold only)
Install Valve(s)
(Pre- Note
Trigger/Trigger Verify that the manifold
Manifold only) valve ports openings do not
have any old gasket
material.
manifold [3] and ensure they are
fully seated to prevent damage.
Note
The O-ring removal tool [3]
can be used to install the
gaskets.

valves into ports V1 and V3 of the
Pre-Trigger/Trigger and the blue
collar 2-way bypass valve into
ports V2 and V4 of the Pre-
Trigger/Trigger manifold.

ports are properly seated, and
resistance.
Note
damage and create leaks.
Note
Prevent manifold damage
and avoid unnecessary
lateral force to the valves.

placing the valve removal tool [2]
over the retaining ring and tighten
it ONLY another 1/6 to 1/4 turn
using the valve removal tool
(about one flat on the hexagonal
top).
5. Repeat these steps for all valve

ports.
6. Connect the valve cable(s) to their

respective connectors on the Pre-
Trigger/Trigger Heater bracket. [1]
7. Secure valve cables into the

routing clip.

Prepare for
Operation 1. Open the supply and waste center
door.
2. Ensure that the following is

performed:
Wash Buffer - Replace the
tubing in the buffer
reservoir.
Pre-trigger/trigger - Slide
the tray out and replace the
level sensors.
3. Replace the internal processing

center cover.

Note
initialization.

Ready.
open/close freely.
filled with fluid.
J1.08 SOLID WASTE CONTAINER Version - 96728-111_170_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77161-01 Container, Solid Waste
J1.08 SOLID WASTE CONTAINER
12 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Prerequisite For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.
1. The processing module can
be in any status.
Remove
Waste
1. Open the supply and waste
Container
center door.
2. Slide the waste container out
of the module.
3. Verify that the trap door on
the waste chute is closed.
Replacement
Install Waste Container

1. Slide the solid waste container into the processing module.
2. Verify that the waste chute opened.
3. Close the supply and waste center door.
4. If the solid waste container was emptied update the supply status screen at the SCC.

errors.
2 3400 - Interlock Sensor Test
K1.01 Fluidics Distribution Board Version - 201975-103_547_2
List/Part Numbers
7-98010-01 Bd, Fluidics Distribution
7-98010-02 Bd, Fluidics Distribution (RoHS)
K1.01 Fluidics Distribution Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Electrostatic Discharge
Removal
Shutdown For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

Processing System Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or
Module function, Subsection: System status.
Preparation
1. Remove the rear fluidics panel.
Caution
Before continuing, take the appropriate electrostatic
discharge (ESD) precaution. Use a ground strap or

instrument.
Remove
Fluidics
1. Disconnect the following cables from the fluidics
Distribution
Board
W300 at J1
W301 at J2
W302 at J3
W313 at J4
Vacuum Pump Motor at J5
W310 at J6
W312 at J7
W305 at J8
W011 at J9
W314 at J10
W303 at J11
W010 at J12
W304 at J13
W308 at J14
W012 at J15
W309 at J16
W307 at J19
Liquid waste Level sensor at J20
2. Unscrew the six (6) green captive screws securing board

to instrument
3. Place the removed circuit board on or in nonconductive
material.
Replacement
Install Fluidics Distribution

Board
1. Secure the fluidics distribution board to the frame of the instrument with the six (6)
green captive screws
2. Reconnect all cables to fluidics distribution board that were disconnected during
removal step.
Note
Reference previous removal step for correct cable connection to fluidics board.
3. Install rear fluidics panel.

errors.
filled with fluid.
N/A
G110 - After repair is complete, verify per
K1.02 Vacuum Accumulator Version - 201975-103_548_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200085-01 Assy, Vacuum Accumulator, Complete
K1.02 Vacuum Accumulator

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
1. Remove right rear fluidics panel.
VIDEO
Remove
Note
Vacuum
Accumulator
Remove
Vacuum
1. Disconnect the 4 quick disconnect
Accumulator
tubing attached to the top of the
vacuum accumulator. [1]
Note
Carefully remove accumulator
tubing connections to prevent
cap and connector damage.
2. Disconnect the accumulator vacuum
sensor cable (W303). [2]
3. Disconnect the gray accumulator

level sensor cable. [3]
4. Remove the vacuum accumulator.

[1]
Replacement

VIDEO
Install
Note
Vacuum
Accumulator
Install
Vacuum
1. Install the vacuum accumulator.
Accumulator
2. Connect the 4 quick disconnect
tubing to the top of the vacuum
accumulator. The connector should
snap into place when connected
correctly.
Note
Ensure cap and connector are
undamaged. Carefully
reconnect the accumulator
tubing to prevent cap and
connector damage.
Note
Verify tubing is not crimped or
obstructed when installing
accumulator.
3. Reconnect the accumulator vacuum

sensor cable W303. [1]
4. Reconnect the gray level sensor

cable. [2]
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install right rear fluidics panel.
2. Perform

errors.
2 3180 - Vacuum System Test
K1.03 Vacuum Switch Version - 201975-103_549_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77716-01 Switch, Vacuum
K1.03 Vacuum Switch

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown Processing Module
Remove Vacuum Switch

1. Remove right rear panel.
2. Disconnect the vacuum switch cable W303.
3. Unscrew the vacuum switch from the vacuum accumulator and remove.
Replacement

Install Vacuum Switch
1. Add TEFLON tape to the threads on the vacuum switch.
2. Screw the vacuum switch into the vacuum accumulator.
3. Connect cable W303.
4. Install right rear panel.

errors.
K1.04 Liquid in Accumulator Sensor Version - 201975-103_550_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200089-01 Sensor, Liquid in Accumulator
K1.04 Liquid in Accumulator Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown Processing
Module
Remove Vacuum
Accumulator
2. Disconnect the tubing attached to vacuum
accumulator.
3. Disconnect the accumulator sensor cable
(W303).
4. Remove the vacuum accumulator.
Remove Liquid in
Accumulator Sensor
1. Unscrew sensor [1] from top of the
accumulator and remove.
Replacement

Install Liquid in Accumulator Sensor
1. Place sensor in accumulator and screw on to secure to top of accumulator.
2. Connect the accumulator sensor cable (W303) and tubing to accumulator.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K1.05 Trap Door Magnetic Switch Version - 201975-103_551_2
List/Part Numbers
7-91543-01 Magnetic Switch Kit, Trap Door
K1.05 Trap Door Magnetic Switch

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown Processing
Module
Remove Trap Door

Magnetic Switch and
Bracket
2. Disconnect the liquid waste sensor cable from
the fluidics distribution board connection J20.
3. Remove the screw securing bracket [1] to
frame of instrument.
4. Remove bracket with magnetic switch.
5. Remove magnetic switch from bracket by
removing the two (2) screws securing it to the
bracket.
Replacement

Install Trap Door Magnetic
Switch and Bracket
1. Attach the trap door magnetic switch to bracket using two (2) screws.
2. Secure bracket to the frame of the instrument and connect cable to the fluidics
distribution board connection J20.

errors.
2 3190 - Waste Sensors Test
K1.06 Upper Waste Manifold Complete Version - 201975-103_552_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200080-01 Assy, Upper Waste Manifold, Complete
K1.06 Upper Waste Manifold Complete
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown. For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
Module
Preparation
2. Remove internal processing center

covers.
Note
RV Loader may be removed
for better access. [3]
VIDEO
Remove Note
Upper Video contains no audio sound.
Waste
Manifold
Remove
Upper
1. Remove the cables from the clamp on
Waste
top of the waste manifold. [1]
Manifold
manifold and disconnect the three
tubings screwed into the upper waste
manifold [2] labeled:
TV<>UWM
PTV<>UWM
WZV<>UWM
3. Disconnect the thermistors (WZTS1-

WZTS3) from the top of the manifold.
[3]
4. Disconnect the solenoid cable. [4]
5. Disconnect the wash zone tubings

from the manifold barbs. [5]
6. Remove the screw holding the

manifold to the instrument. [6]
7. Lift the manifold and remove the

clamp holding the accumulator tubing
to the fitting on the bottom of the
manifold. [7]
8. Remove the manifold.

Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Upper Video contains no audio sound.
Waste
Manifold
Install
Upper
1. Connect the accumulator tubing to the
Waste
bottom of the waste manifold by
Manifold
pushing the tubing onto the barb fitting
at least 3/8 of an inch. [7]
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer
concentrate can be placed on
the barb fitting to lubricate it and
to easily slip the tubing onto the
barb.
2. Secure tubing to barb fitting with

clamp.
3. Align the wash manifold with guide pin

on mount and secure with screw. [6]
4. Attach the wash zone tubing to the

manifold and seat it in the appropriate
slot on the manifold. [5]
Note
A few drops of buffer or buffer
concentrate can be placed on
the barb fitting to lubricate it and
to easily slip the tubing onto the
barb.
5. Connect solenoid cable. [4]
6. Connect thermistors (WZTS1-WZTS3)

to wash zone tubing. [3]
Note
Ensure that the thermistor and
cable numbers match to prevent
errors. (Example: WZTST1
connects to probe 1 on location
label 1 of the manifold.)
7. Route cables in clamp. [1]
8. Connect the following waste tubing to

the manifold to any port where the
tubing fits easily without damage. [2]
TV<>UWM
PTV<>UWM
WZV<>UWM
Prepare
for
1. Replace RV loader if removed earlier.
Operation
[3]
2. Replace internal processing center

cover.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K1.07 Upper Waste Manifold ONLY Version - 201975-103_553_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200081-01 Manifold, Upper Waste (RoHS)
K1.07 Upper Waste Manifold

Tools/Materials #1 and #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove Upper
Waste Manifold
2. Remove cables from clamp on top of the waste
manifold.
3. Remove screw securing the clamp on top of the
upper waste manifold.
4. Remove cable clamp.
5. Place absorbent towel under manifold and
disconnect tubing:
a. TV<>UWM
b. PTV<>UWM
c. WZV<>UWM
6. Disconnect the three (3) temperature sensors

(WZTS1-WZTS3) [1] on top of the upper waste
manifold.
7. Remove the tubing from the tubing guide [2] on top
of the upper waste manifold.
8. Place absorbent towel under manifold and
disconnect the tubing from the three small barb
fittings. [3]
9. Disconnect the solenoid cable.
10. Unscrew solenoid [4] from upper waste manifold and
remove.
11. Remove screw securing the upper waste manifold to
the mount.
12. Lift the manifold and open clamp holding
accumulator tubing to barb fitting on bottom of
manifold.
13. Remove manifold.
14. Unscrew and remove the three barb fittings from
manifold using a 5/16 hex driver.
15. Unscrew and remove the 0.25" barb fitting from the
bottom of the manifold and remove.
16. Unscrew and remove the plug from the manifold.
Replacement

Install Upper
Waste
1. Insert the three (3) small barb fittings into the manifold
Manifold
and tighten using a 5/16" hex driver.
2. Install the large barb fitting and plug and hand tighten
until snug.
3. If required, apply TEFLON tape to the threaded portion
of the plug and hand tighten until snug.
4. Insert the solenoid into manifold and hand tighten until
solenoid fits snug against manifold.
5. Connect the accumulator tubing to 0.25" barb fitting on
bottom of manifold.
6. Secure manifold to mount with screw that was
previously removed.
7. Connect the cable of solenoid to cable connector.
8. Attach the wash zone tubing to the three (3) small
fittings and route tubing through tubing guide [1] on top
of manifold.
9. Connect the three (3) temperature sensors.
10. Connect the following tubing to the upper wash
manifold:
TV<>UWM
PTV<>UWM
WZV<>UWM
11. Install cable clamp.

12. Route cables through clamp.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K2.01 Vacuum Pump Assembly Version - 201975-103_554_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200612-01 Assy, Vacuum Pump, Complete
7-200612-02 Assy, Vacuum Pump, Complete with Silencer
K2.01 Vacuum Pump Assembly
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Processing
Module
Preparation
1. Remove rear fluidic panel. [1]
2. Open left front panel to access

waste container area.
3. Disconnect the liquid waste

tubing and remove the fluid and
solid waste containers.
4. Unclamp muffler assembly [2]

and position near vacuum pump
assembly in order to remove
muffler from the back of the
instrument.
VIDEO
Release Cable Note
Connections, Video contains no audio sound.
Tubing and
Vacuum Pump
Assembly
Release Cable
Connections and
1. Disconnect the vacuum filter
Tubing
quick disconnect tubing attached
to the top of the vacuum
accumulator. [1]
Note
Carefully remove
accumulator tubing
connections to prevent
cap and connector
damage.
2. Disconnect the vacuum filter

solenoid cable W314 or W303
from the vacuum accumulator
solenoid. [2]
3. Disconnect the vacuum pump

motor cable at J5 on the fluidics
distribution board. [3]
4. Pull small locking tab [4] and
undo tie wraps securing vacuum
accumulator tubing, if necessary.
Remove Vacuum
Pump Assembly
1. Loosen the two (2) green
captive screws that secure
vacuum pump assembly to
instrument. [1]
Note
Take caution to free
tubing and muffler
assembly from
obstructions when
removing pump.
2. Slide pump out of the

instrument.
Replacement
VIDEO Note
Install Cable Video contains no audio sound.
Connections,
Tubing and
Vacuum Pump
Assembly
Install Vacuum
Pump
1. Route muffler assembly back
Assembly
through opening to waste
container area as you slide
vacuum pump into the instrument.
Caution
Verify that vacuum pump
cables are routed to prevent
damage and crimping.
2. Tighten two green captive screws

to secure the pump to the
instrument. [1]
Install Cable
Connections
1. Install vacuum accumulator tubing
and Tubing
connections. [1] The connector
should snap into place when
connected correctly.
Note
Ensure that the cap and
connector are undamaged.
Carefully reconnect the
accumulator tubing to
prevent cap and connector
damage.
2. Tie wrap accumulator tubing (if

opened previously during
removal). [4]
Caution
Loosely close the tie wraps.
Overtightening a tie wrap
can obstruct fluid flow for
accumulator tubing.
3. Connect the vacuum pump motor

cable at J5 to the fluidic
distribution board.
4. Connect the vacuum filter solenoid

cable W314 to the vacuum
accumulator solenoid. [2]
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install rear fluidic panel. [1]

3. Install the fluid and solid waste

containers and connect the liquid
waste tubing.
4. Position and clamp the muffler

assembly.
5. Perform
open/close freely.

errors.
2 G33 - Vacuum Pump Verify vacuum pump turns on during
initialization and instrument can reach Ready
status.
K2.02 Waste Pump Assembly Version - 201975-103_423_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200082-01 Assy, Waste Pump, Complete
K2.02 Waste Pump Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Waste
Pump
1. Remove rear fluidic panel.
Removal
2. Unscrew the three (3) screws securing the waste pump
assembly to the instrument.
3. Disconnect the waste pump cable from fluidic distribution
4. Open the large clamp securing tubing 200116, LWM<-
>WP, to the pump.
5. Open the small clamp securing tubing 202660, WP<-
>WPS at the waste pressure switch elbow and open the
small clamp (at top of black tubing) securing 200116,
LWM<->WP then disconnect black pump tubing from
fitting.
6. Remove waste pump.
Replacement
Install Waste
Pump
1. Connect the tubing 200116, LWM<->WP, the waste pump, and 202660, WP<->WPS to the waste
pressure switch elbow.
2. Switch the tubing with clamps.
3. Connect the waste pump cable to fluidics distribution board at connection J19.
4. Secure the waste pump to the frame of the instrument using the three (3) screws and verify that
the ground wire is connected.
Note
Verify the cable is not lodged between the pump and the wall.
5. Using the large clamp on the pump, secure tubing 200116, LWM<->WP to the pump assembly.
6. Reinstall the rear fluidic panel.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K2.03 Waste Pressure Switch Version - 201975-103_424_2
List/Part Numbers
7-200371-01 Switch, Assy, Waste Pump Pressure
K2.03 Waste Pressure Switch

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
1. Remove Rear Fluidic panel.
Remove Waste
Pressure Switch
1. Disconnect the waste switch cable from the fluidics
distribution board connection J14.
2. Disconnect the waste pressure switch from tubing
200127, WPS<->LWC.
3. Remove switch assembly from clamp securing it to
structure.
4. Open the tubing clamp securing the waste pressure
switch elbow to the waste pump.
5. Firmly pull elbow out of the tubing WP<->WPS,
202660 and remove the waste pressure switch.
Replacement
Install Waste
Pressure Switch
1. Connect the elbow of waste pressure switch to tubing WP<->WPS, 202660 and secure
with tubing clamp.
2. Connect the waste pressure switch tubing to liquid waste container tubing WPS<->LWC,
200127.
3. Seat switch into the clamp to secure it to structure. Verify that the WP<->WPS tubing is
not kinked or bent to restrict fluid flow.
4. Connect the waste pressure switch cable to the fluidics distribution board connection J14.
5. Install rear fluidic panel.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K2.05 Vacuum Pump Muffler Version - 201975-103_426_2
List/Part Numbers
7-203317-01 Muffler
K2.05 Vacuum Pump Muffler

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove Muffler
1. Open left front panel to access waste container
area.
2. Disconnect the liquid waste tubing and remove the
fluid and solid waste containers.
3. Remove muffler assembly from the securing clamp.
4. Disconnect the tubing VP<->VPM. Do not discard
clamp.
5. Remove muffler.
6. Remove elbow fitting from muffler and remove the
TEFLON tape from the elbow fitting.
Replacement
Install Muffler
1. Wrap elbow threads with TEFLON tape.
2. Attach the elbow fitting to the muffler.
3. Connect the muffler to tubing VP<->VPM.
4. Secure tubing elbow and tubing connection with clamp.
5. Place muffler back into securing clamp in waste container area.
6. Install the solid waste container.
7. Connect the liquid waste tubing to the liquid waste container and install container.
8. Close the left front panel.

errors.
status.
K2.06 Vacuum Pump Filter Assembly Version - 201975-103_427_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200370-01 Filter Assy, Vacuum Pump, Complete
7-200370-02 Filter Assy, Vacuum Pump, Complete
K2.06 Vacuum Pump Filter Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
1. Remove right rear fluidic panel [1].
Video -
Remove Note
Filter Video contains no audio sound.
Assembly
Remove
Filter
1. Press the quick disconnect to
Assembly
release the filter tubing (VA<->VF)
at the vacuum accumulator
connector [1].
2. Remove filter assembly from the

securing clamp [2].
3. Disconnect the tubing to the valve

(DV<->VF) at the filter assembly [3].
4. Disconnect the tubing to the pump

(VP<->VF) at the filter [4].
Replacement
Video -
Install Filter Note
Assembly Video contains no audio sound.
Install Filter
Assembly
1. Connect the tubing (DV<->VF) to the
filter assembly [1] and secure the
tubing clamp.
2. Connect the tubing (VP<->VF) to the

filter assembly [2] and secure the
tubing clamp.
3. Place filter into the securing clamp

[3].
4. Snap the filter quick disconnect

tubing (VA<->VF) fitting on to the
top of the vacuum accumulator bottle
connector [4].
Prepare for
Operation
1. Replace the right rear fludics panel.
2. Perform P-248 Startup and

Shutdown.
open/close freely.

errors.
status.
K2.07 Lower Waste Manifold Tee Version - 201975-103_428_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201252-01 Manifold, Lower Waste Tee
7-205710-01 Solenoid, Manifold Mount, TESTED, with Keys
K2.07 Lower Waste Manifold Tee
Note

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Processing
Module
Preparation Remove the rear fluidics panel.
VIDEO
Remove Lower Note
Waste Manifold Video contains no audio sound.
Tee
Remove Lower
Waste Manifold
1. Disconnect the two (2) solenoid
Tee
cable connections. [1]
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2]

securing the waste manifold to the
frame of the instrument.
3. Open the clamps three (3)

securing the tubing to the
manifold.
4. Remove the following tubing from

the lower waste manifold:
200114-102, Dr<>LWM [3]
200125-103, VA<>LWM [4]
200116-102, LWM<>WP [5]
Remove
Solenoids
1. Loosen and removed the solenoid
screw [1] and nut from the end. [2]
2. Unscrew the solenoid body. [3]
3. Remove the plunger [4] from the

manifold.
Replacement

VIDEO
Install Note
Solenoids Video contains no audio sound.
Install
Solenoids
1. Insert the solenoid plunger [1] into the
manifold. [2]
2. Place the solenoid screw [2] on over the

plunger and ensure it is correctly seated.
3. Add the solenoid body [3] and washer

[4] and ensure that it is seated to the
manifold.
4. Tighten the nut [5] on the screw and

tighten the solenoid screw [6] to the
manifold tee.
Install
Lower
1. Connect the following tubing to lower
Waste
waste manifold and secure with clamps:
Manifold
200114-102, Dr<>LWM [3]
200125-103, VA<>LWM [4]
200116-102, LWM<>WP [5]
2. Secure the lower waste manifold to the

frame of the instrument using two (2)
screws. [2]
3. Connect the two (2) solenoids cables
[1], verify that the right solenoid
connects to the drain S2 (right)
connector and that the left solenoid
connects to the condensate S1 (left)
connector.

1. Reinstall rear fluidics panel.
Note
initialization.

Stopped to Ready.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K2.08 Waste Pump Head Version - 201975-103_429_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200378-01 Head, Waste Pump
K2.08 Waste Pump Head

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Waste Video contains no audio sound.
Pump Head
Remove
Waste
1. Remove two (2) screws [1] securing
Pump Head
waste pump head to bracket.
2. Open the clamp on the waste pump

bracket [2] and free the top right
assembly (LWM<->WP 200116)
waste pump tubing.
3. Loosen the tubing clamp and free the

waste pump tubing (LWM<->WP
200116) [3] from the top right of the
black pump head tubing.
4. Loosen and disconnect the tubing

(WP<->WPS 202660) [4] at the waste
pump by removing the tubing clamp
at the top left of the black pump head
tubing.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Note
Waste Video contains no audio sound.
Pump
Head
Install
Waste
1. Connect and secure waste pump top
Pump
left tubing (WP<->WPS 202660) [1]
Head
with a clamp at the waste pump head.
2. Connect and secure waste pump top

right tubing (LWM<->WP 200116) [2]
with a clamp to the waste pump head.
3. Orient waste pump [3] to align with

shaft [4] of waste pump motor.
4. Mount waste pump head onto waste

pump motor.
5. Install waste pump to bracket using two

(2) screws. [5]
6. Secure the top right tubing (LWM<-

>WP 200116) to the pump bracket
clamp. [6]
Prepare
for
1. Install right rear fluidics panel.
Operation
open/close freely.

errors.
filled with fluid.
K2.09 Dryer Valve Version - 201975-103_430_2
List/Part Numbers
7-77678-02 Valve, Buffer
K2.09 Dryer Valve

Tools/Materials Standard Tool KIt
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Preparation
1. Open left front panel to access waste container
area.
2. Disconnect the liquid waste tubing and remove
the fluid and solid waste containers.
3. Unclamp muffler assembly and position near
vacuum pump assembly in order to remove
muffler from the back of the instrument.
Release Cable
Connections, Tubing
and Accumulator
2. Disconnect the tubing at the vacuum accumulator.
3. Disconnect the accumulator sensor cable W303 at
J11 on the fluidics distribution board.
4. Disconnect the vacuum filter solenoid cable W314
from vacuum accumulator solenoid.
5. Disconnect the vacuum pump motor cable at J5
on the fluidics distribution board.
6. Pull small locking tab and undo tie wraps securing
vacuum accumulator tubing.
7. Remove vacuum accumulator from module.
Remove Vacuum
Pump Assembly
1. Unscrew two (2) captive screws that secure
vacuum pump assembly to instrument.
Note
Take caution to free tubing and muffler
assembly from obstructions when removing
pump.
2. Slide pump out of instrument.
Remove Vacuum
Pump Bracket
1. Disconnect the tubing pump to filter tubing at the
vacuum pump.
2. Disconnect the muffler assembly tubing at the
vacuum pump.
3. Remove four (4) screws securing vacuum pump to
bracket.
4. Remove vacuum pump from bracket.
Remove Dryer Valve

1. Disconnect the DV<->VF tubing at the dryer valve
fitting.
2. Remove fitting from dryer valve.
3. Remove two (2) screws securing dryer valve to
bracket.
4. Remove dryer valve.
Replacement
Install Dryer Valve

1. Remove any residual material from fitting threads.
2. Wrap new TEFLON tape around threads of fitting.
3. Attach the fitting to valve and tighten until snug.
4. Connect the DV<->VF tubing to the dryer fitting secure with clamp.
5. Secure dryer valve to bracket with two (2) screws from previous removal
step.
Install Vacuum Pump Bracket

1. Mount vacuum pump onto four (4) bracket mounts.
2. Secure the vacuum pump with (4) screws from previous removal step.
3. Verify that the ground cable is secured the screw.
4. Connect the tubing pump to filter tubing at the vacuum pump.
5. Connect the muffler assembly tubing at the vacuum pump.
Install Vacuum Pump Assembly

1. Route muffler assembly through opening to waste container area as you
slide vacuum pump into instrument.
Note
Verify no tubing from vacuum pump is crimped, pinched or
obstructed.
2. Tighten two captive screws to secure pump to instrument.

Install Cable Connections, Tubing
and Accumulator
1. Install vacuum accumulator and tubing connections.
2. Tie wrap accumulator tubing.
Note
Loosely close tie wraps. Do not over tighten tie wrap and obstruct
flow for accumulator tubing.
3. Connect the following cables to the fluidic distribution board.
Vacuum pump motor cable at J5

Accumulator motor cable W303 at J11
4. Connect the vacuum filter solenoid cable W314 to vacuum accumulator

solenoid.
5. Clamp muffler assembly into position in waste container area.
6. Connect the tubing to liquid waste container.
7. Install liquid and solid waste containers and slide into module.
8. Close the left front panel.
9. Install rear fluidics panel.
open/close freely.

errors.
status.
K2.10 Vacuum Pump Diaphragms and Valve Plate Seals Version - 201975-103_5036_2
K2.10 Vacuum Pump Diaphragms and Valve Plate Seals
Note

Indelible felt pen or scribe
Very fine steel wool or stiff non-scratching brush
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Caution
Hot Surface
Removal
Shutdown Perform
Processing P-248 Startup and Shutdown.
Module
Preparation
1. Remove rear fluidic
panel. [1]
2. Open left front panel to

access waste container
area.
3. Disconnect the liquid

waste tubing and remove
the fluid and solid waste
containers.
4. Unclamp muffler
assembly [2] and position
near vacuum pump
assembly in order to
remove the muffler from
the back of the
instrument.
VIDEO
Release Note
Cable Click the video and arrow
Connections, icon in the reference
Tubing and section to access the
Vacuum video in the K2.01
Pump Vacuum Pump
Assembly Assembly action section:
"VIDEO - Release Cable
Connections, Tubing
and Vacuum Pump
Assembly".
Release
Cable
Connections
filter quick disconnect
and Tubing
tubing attached to the top
of the vacuum
accumulator. [1]
Note
Carefully remove
accumulator tubing
connections to
prevent cap and
connector
damage.

filter solenoid cable W314
or W303 from the
vacuum accumulator
solenoid. [2]

pump motor cable at J5
on the fluidics distribution
board. [3]
4. Pull small locking tab [4]

and undo tie wraps
securing the vacuum
accumulator tubing.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Loosen the two (2) green
Pump
captive screws that
Assembly
secure the vacuum pump
assembly to the
instrument. [1]
Note
Take caution to
free tubing and
muffler assembly
from obstructions
when removing
the pump.
2. Slide the pump out of the

instrument.
VIDEO
Remove Note
Vacuum Video contains no audio
Pump Valve sound.
Plate Seals Note
And Video demonstrates
Diaphragms removal of one
Valve Plate diaphragm, and both are
Seals recommended to be
replaced concurrently.
Remove
Vacuum Note
Pump Valve Perform the
Plate Seals following Action
items for both
sides of the dual-
headed pump.
1. Use an indelible marker

to mark a single long line
on the side of one pump,
from the top of the pump
head plates (top) and
housing (bottom) to
ensure proper alignment
during reassembly. [1]
2. Repeat step 2 on the

other side of the pump
and identify this as side
2. [2]
3. Loosen the 8 screws

(with washers) [3] that
secure the two head
plates. [4]
4. Remove the head plates

together with the tubing
and muffler
Note
Valve seals may
be stuck to head
plates or
intermediate
plates.
5. Remove the old valve

plate seals [5] and clean
the plate with dry lint-free
tissues.
Remove
Vacuum
1. Mark the intermediate
Pump
plates as 1 and 2 to
Diaphragms
match the previously
marked pump heads,
using an indelible marker.
[1]
2. Remove the intermediate

plates from the pump
assembly.
Note
Some pumps may
have access
covers on the
sides and some on
the ends of the
pump.
3. Lift the diaphragm edge

and unscrew it from the
pump.
Note
Shims [2] are on
the threaded
shafts of the
diaphragms.
Use
CAUTION
to capture
all the
shims when
removing
the
diaphragms.
The number
of shims
must be
replaced
exactly as
found on
each shaft.
Some shims
may stick to
the top of
the
connection
rod when
the
diaphragm
is removed.
4. Carefully clean the head
plates and intermediate
plates of any residue
using water and a stiff
non-scratching brush
and/or new fine steel
wool, if available.
Note
DO NOT scratch
the parts.
5. Clean inside the pump

housing with a soft brush,
removing any residue.
Replacement
VIDEO
Install Vacuum Note
Pump Video contains no audio sound.
Diaphragms Note
and Vacuum Video demonstrates installation of
Pump Valve one diaphragm, and both are
Plate Seals recommended to be replaced
concurrently.
Install Vacuum
Pump
1. Add the exact number of
Diaphragms
shims to each new pump
diaphragm threaded stud.
Note
You can also place
the exact number of
shims on the hole of
the pump connection
rod. [2]
2. Hold the pump connecting

rod vertical. [2]
3. Hand-tighten the new

diaphragms firmly into the
connecting rods [2] to
prevent damage to the
diaphragm.
4. Ensure that the entire

diaphragm is seated into the
center of the opening and
the edges are seated flush in
the grooves. [3]
Install Vacuum
Pump Valve
1. Lay the clean intermediate plates
Plate Seals
onto the pump housing [1] so:
plate 1 is on pump housing 1
plate 2 is on pump housing 2
2. Add the new valve plate seals on

top of the intermediate plates. [2]
3. Ensure that the seals are seated

flush on the plates to prevent
damage.
Note
Seal orientation is not
significant.
4. Loosely tighten the four screws on

each head in an "X" pattern, and
then repeat to tighten. [3]
Note
OVERTIGHTENING screw
heads may cause damage.
VIDEO
Install Cable Note
Connections, Click the video and arrow icon in
Tubing and the reference section to access the
Vacuum Pump video in the K2.01 Vacuum Pump
Assembly Assembly action section: “VIDEO -
Install Cable Connections, and
Tubing And Vacuum Pump
Assembly.”
Reinstall
Vacuum Pump
1. Route the muffler assembly back
Assembly
through the opening to the waste
container area as you slide the
vacuum pump into the instrument.
Caution
Verify vacuum pump cables
and routed to prevent
damaged and crimping.
2. Tighten two, green captive screws

to secure pump to instrument. [1]
Install Cable
Connections
1. Install vacuum accumulator tubing
and Tubing
connection. [1] The connector
should snap into place when
connected correctly.
Note
Ensure that the cap and
connector are undamaged.
Carefully reconnect the
accumulator tubing to prevent
cap and connector damage.
2. Tie wrap accumulator tubing, if
opened previously during removal.
[4]
Caution
Loosely close the tie wraps.
Overtightening a tie wrap can
obstruct fluid flow for the
accumulator tubing.
3. Connect the vacuum pump motor

cable at J5 [3] to the fluidic
distribution board.
4. Connect the vacuum filter solenoid
cable W314 to the vacuum
accumulator solenoid. [2]
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install rear fluidic panel. [1]
3. Install the fluid and solid waste
containers and connect the liquid
waste tubing.
4. Position and clamp the muffler
assembly.
5. Perform
open/close freely.

errors.
status.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-103) • © 2007, 2015 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. •
Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
L1.01 Power Supply Version - 201975-103_431_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97306-01 Supply, Assy, DC Power
L1.01 Power Supply

WARNING
Removal

Stopped or Offline.
Preparation For information on loading reagents, refer to the ARCHITECT i System

Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
1. Power OFF processing module.
Reagent inventory management.
2. At the rear of the instrument disconnect
the power cord from the power supply.
3. Remove the SCC rear panel and power
supply rear panel to access the power
supply.
Remove
Power
1. Remove the two (2) screws on top of
Supply
power supply [1] that secures the
power supply to retaining bracket.
2. In the SCC area remove the three (3)
screws [2] that secures the power
supply on left side.
3. Pull the power supply straight out to
disconnect from card cage backplane.
Replacement

Install Power
Supply
1. Slide the replacement power supply in until it connects to the card cage backplane.
Note
Verify that the connection to card cage backplane is secure.
2. Install three (3) screws on the left side of power supply. Install two (2) screws on the top of
power supply.
3. Install panels and reconnect the power cord.

errors.
status.
4 G35 - Refrigerator Verify refrigerator is running by verifying that
cold air is blowing from the cooler duct.
5 G36 - Heater Verify that the heaters are powered and
heating.
2 G61 - LED Operation Verify correct LED operation.
L1.14 FUSE REPLACEMENT, PS Version - 96728-111_194_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-01 Fuse Kit, Card Cage P/S
7-78164-02 Fuse Kit, Card Cage Pwr. Supply and RSH
7-78164-03 FUSE KIT, Card Cage, Power Supply, RSH
L1.14 FUSE REPLACEMENT, PS
11 min
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
2. Locate the fuse (look for a mechanical arm
extruding from the fuse body) on the back of the
processing module.
Remove
Fuse
1. Pull the body of the fuse straight back to
remove.
Replacement
Install Fuse
1. Push the fuse onto its casing.
Prepare for
Operation
1. Measure the AC input voltage at the wall plug.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the power
supply cover to the power supply and remove the
cover.
3. Verify or set the voltage setting connector to the
correct frequency.
Note
Failure to perform this step causes damage
and/or incorrect operation of the module.
4. Install the power supply back cover.

5. Install the line cord on the power supply.
6. Plug the power supply cord into the outlet.
7. Close the lower left and right access door.
Note
2 3520 - Temperature Status Normal temperature Ranges:
Process path: 36.4° C-37.6° C
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6° C
Wash zone: 34.0° C-36.5° C
Reagent cooler: 2.0° C-12.0° C
M1.01 Card Cage With Backplane Version - 201975-103_432_2
List/Part Numbers
7-97010-01 Card Cage, i1000SR
7-97010-02 Card Cage, i1000SR
M1.01 Card Cage With Backplane
Time Required 1 hour

Small Phillips (Stuby)
Caution
Removal
Preparation For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT

Access
Card Cage
1. Open both front doors.
2. Lift up the latches on the card cage cover door and turn
both counterclockwise, then pull open to access the card
cage.
3. Remove the center back panel by loosening the seven
captive screws until the panel can be removed.
Caution
appropriate grounding tool. Do not wear gloves.
Not following these precautions may damage or

instrument.
Remove
Card Cage
1. Disconnect ALL connections on the card cage back plane
board:
Reagent Cooler TEDS W006 at J51

Fluidics Solenoids W010 at J50
Processing Center Solenoids - Fans W003 at J46
Processing Center Motor - Heaters W004 at J48
Fluidics Motors W011 at J52
RSH Motors W015 at J53
TR DRV #1 Resolution/Max Current W018 at J45
Reagent Area Motors W007 at J44
LLS Sample Antenna Board Power W014 at J42
Cardcage Fans at J25 and J26
Processing Center Digital W002 at J32
Fluidics Sensors W012 at J29
CMIA Optics Power W019 at J27
CMIA Optics Input W019 at J30
Reagent Area Sensors W008 at J31
Pipettor Sensors - PM W017 at J35
RSH Sensors - Communications W016 at J34
Processing Center Analog W001 at J37
Reagent Cooler Thermistors - Fans W009 at J39
LLS Sample Antenna Input W013 at J40
Note
Use extreme caution when disconnecting
Ethernet port cable W005 from J36 on the
backplane. Be careful not to grab or wiggle
the J36 connector.
Ethernet Port W005 at J36

CLI/Debug Port at J38
2. Remove the LLS ESD PCB from the backplane and retain
for later use.
3. Remove the six (6) securing screws, located in the SCC
compartment, which secure the card cage assembly to
the frame wall.
4. Remove the lower card cage filter, then slide the card
cage assembly from the instrument.
Replacement
Install Card
Cage
1. Install LLS ESD PCB to the backplane.
2. Transfer all PCB's from the removed card cage and install them into the appropriate location within
the new card cage.
3. Place the card cage onto the base of the instrument card cage compartment.
4. Slide the assembly back into the compartment area until the card cage fully engages the power
supply connector.
5. Install the six (6) securing screws within the SCC compartment to secure the card cage assembly.
6. Reconnect all cable connections to the card cage assembly. Refer to the previous removal steps
for the correct cable and backplane connection.
Install Back
Panel
1. Install the center back panel by tightening the seven captive screws until the panel is secured.
2. Close and lock the front card cage access door
3. Close the front doors.
12 G5 - Precision Verify precision is within instrument Precision within specifications = Pass
specifications.

errors.
13 G114 - Software Backup / Restore Verify data is backed up from and/or restored
to instrument using appropriate medium.
4 3240 - Bar Code Calibration
6 3310 - RSH Test
10 3630 - LLS Test
5 5550 - RSH Motor Test
11 6440 - Daily Maintenance
M1.02 FUSE REPLACEMENT, CCAGE Version - 96728-111_200_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78164-01 Fuse Kit, Card Cage P/S
7-78164-02 Fuse Kit, Card Cage Pwr. Supply and RSH
M1.02 FUSE REPLACEMENT, CCAGE
Time Required Not Assessed

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10 liters, unload
buffer.
Select As needed from the maintenance

screen under the system icon.
Perform maintenance procedure 2185 Wash
Buffer Unload.

3. Open the front, lower left access door.
4. Open the front, lower right access door to access
the fuse.
Remove
Buffer
1. Slide the container out and place it outside the
Reservoir
module on the floor.
Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate ESD
precautions.
Remove
Fuse
1. Release the card cage and swing it forward to gain
access to the connectors on the rear of the card
cage.
2. Locate the fuse (look for the mechanical arm
extruding from the fuse body).
3. Pull the body of the fuse straight back to remove
the fuse.
Note
See Fuse Location on Card Cage Back
Plane Board (i2000 only) or Fuse Location
on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i2000SR
only) for the card cage fuse layout.
Replacement
Install
fuse
1. Push the fuse onto its casing.
2. Swing the card cage to the closed position.
3. Latch the card cage to the back frame.

1. Close the lower access doors.
Note
must be ON prior to turning on the
processing module for proper
initialization.
Note
Reload buffer if unloaded earlier.
3. To change the status of the processing

module and sample handler from Stopped
to Ready, perform the Startup procedure.

errors.
2.1 Fuses
Sections
Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 only)

Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 SR only)
Fuse Location for Power Supply
Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 only)

i 2000 Backplane Grid Locator
i 2000 Card Cage Fuse
Connector # /
Fuse Value Voltage PCB Type/ # Destination
Cable I.D.#
J101/ W85 LUI

J102/ W86 Reagent BCR
PM CONTROLLER
J103/ W87 Pwr Supply I/O
F1 3A 5V LGC
J175/ W36 Wash Zone #2
DC DRIVER I/O J177/ W35 Wash Zone #1
LLS# 0 J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 1 J326/ W74 R1 Pip Press Mntr
12V
F2 2A LLS# 2 J426/ W79 R2 Pip Press Mntr
LGC
CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
F3 2A N12V CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
LGC
J152/ W104 RV Loader Transport Snsr Bd, RV Hopper Lvl Snsr
J153/ W105 Solid Wst, Trig Bot, Pre-trig Bot Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS
J154/ W107 LID Snsrs
F4 2A 5V LGC PM CONTROLLER J614/ W108 Process Q Window Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS J156/ W109 Reagent LID Snsr
DC DRIVER I/O J176/ W32 RV Unload Snsr + Sol, RV Load Diverter + Snsr
J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 0 J227/ W70 Smpl Probe Crash Snsr
J200/ W48 Proc Path, Encoder & Snsr
J201/ W49 In/Out Crsl Mtrs, Snsr
F5 2A 5V LGC J202/ W51 Disp Mtr Snsr
INDEXER# 0 J203/ W52 Smpl Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
J204/ W161 Wash Zone Bypass Diverter Home Snsr
J275/ W5 Smpl Syringe
J326/ W74 R1 Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 1 J327/ W75 R1 Probe Crash Snsr
J300/ W53 R1 Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
J301/ W54 Wash Zone #2 Snsr
F6 2A 5V LGC J302/ W55 Trig/Pre-trig, Pump Snsrs
INDEXER# 1
J303/ W56 CMIA Optics Shtr Snsr
J304/ WSpare
STEPR MTR DRVR# 1 J376/ W7 R1 Syringe
J400/ W57 R2 Pip Theta Snsr
F7 2A 5V LGC J401/ W58 Wash Zone #1 Snsr
INDEXER# 2
J402/ W59 RV, Wash 1 Snsrs
STEPR MTR DRVR# 2 J476/ W13 R2 Pip Theta, Z mtr, R2 Syringe
J500/ W61 R1+R2 Wash Cup Pump Snsr, Smpl Pip Pump Snsr, R1 Pip
Pump Snsr
F8 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 3
J501/ W63 R2 Pip Pump Snsr, Wash Zone 1,2 Pump Snsrs
J601/ W111 LQ LUI
F9 7.5A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J604/ WSpare
SSH CONTROLLER (Carrier Present J606/ W114 LQ1, T1 (Load Transfer) Snsr, BCR Full, Carrier Present at
Only), INDEXER# 0 LQ
J607/ W115 Unload Gate, T1 (Unload Transfer) Snsr
F10 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 0 J608/ W116 T3 (Unload Queue) Snsr, Unload Queue Full
SSH CONTROLLER (PQ Full Only), J609/ W117 SQ1 (Process Queue) Snsr, Star 1, Proximity Snsr, Carrier
INDEXER# 0 Present at PQ BCR, PQ Full
INDEXER# 1 J625/ W65 T4 (Unload Queue) Home Snsr
SSH CONTROLLER J610/ W118 LQ 2 Snsr
J611/ W119 SQ (Process Queue) 2, Star 2 Snsrs, Carrier Present at PQ
BCR, Proximity Snsr
F11 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 1 BCR, Proximity Snsr
BCR, Proximity Snsr
STEPR MTR DRVR# 0, INDEXER# 0 J674/ W44 T1 (Load Transfer) Sol, T1 Sol Snsr
DC DRIVER I/O, INDEXER# 0 J675/ W45 T2 (Unload Transfer) Sol, T2 Sol Snsr
J180/ W28 Vortexer #1
5V J181/ W31 Vortexer #3
F12 2A DC DRIVER I/O
PWR
J614 Sample Q Window SNSR Mod 1
F13 2A 5V LGC SSH CONTROLLER J617 Sample Q Window SNSR Mod 4
J618 Bypass Q
J619 Outer Load Que
F14 7.5A 36V SSH CONTROLLER J615 LQ Lane 1 Sol
PWR
F15 2A 36V SSH Bar Code T Board J53/W156 BCR PWR TBOARD
PWR
Fuse Location on Card Cage Back Plane Board (i 2000 SR only)

i 2000 SR Backplane Grid Locator
i 2000 SR Card Cage Fuse
Connector # / Cable
Fuse Value Voltage PCB Type/ # Destination
I.D.#
J101/ W85 LUI

J102/ W86 Reagent BCR
PM CONTROLLER
J103/ W87 Pwr Supply I/O
F1 3A 5V LGC
J175/ W36 Wash Zone #2
DC DRIVER I/O J177/ W35 Wash Zone #1
LLS# 0 J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
F2 2A 12V LGC
LLS# 3 J526/ W29 STAT Pip Press Mntr
CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
F3 2A N12V CMIA/ OPTICS J150/ W102 PMT
LGC
J152/ W104 RV Loader Transport Snsr Bd, RV Hopper Lvl Snsr
J153/ W105 Solid Wst, Trig Bot, Pre-trig Bot Snsr
CMIA/ OPTICS
J154/ W107 LID Snsrs
F4 2A 5V LGC PM CONTROLLER
CMIA/ OPTICS J156/ W109 Reagent LID Snsr
DC DRIVER I/O J176/ W32 RV Unload Snsr + Sol, RV Load Diverter + Snsr, STAT Diverter +
Snsr
J226/ W69 Smpl Pip Press Mntr
LLS# 0 J227/ W70 Smpl Probe Crash Snsr
J200/ W48 Proc Path, Encoder & Snsr
J201/ W49 In/Out Crsl Mtrs, Snsr
F5 2A 5V LGC J202/ W51 Disp Mtr Snsr
INDEXER# 0 J203/ W52 Smpl Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
J204/ W161 Wash Zone Bypass Diverter Home Snsr
J275/ W5 Smpl Syringe
LLS# 3 J526/ W29 STAT Pip Press Mntr
J300/ W53 R1 Pip Theta, Z Snsrs
F6 2A 5V LGC
J302/ W55 Trig/Pre-trig, Pump Snsrs
INDEXER# 1
J303/ W56 CMIA Optics Shtr Snsr
J305/ W16 STAT Pipettor - Theta Axis
STEPR MTR DRVR# J376/ W7 R1 Syringe
1
J400/ W57 R2 Pip Theta Snsr
F7 2A 5V LGC J402/ W59 RV, Wash 1 Snsrs

INDEXER# 2
J480/W14 STAT Pipettor Syringe
J305/ W16 STAT Pipettor Z Axis
STEPR MTR DRVR# J476/ W13 R2 Pip Theta, Z mtr, R2 Syringe
2
J500/ W61 R1+R2 Wash Cup Pump Snsr, Smpl Pip Pump Snsr, R1 Pip Pump
Snsr
F8 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 3
J501/ W63 R2 Pip Pump Snsr, Wash Zone 1,2 Pump Snsrs
J601/ W111
J701/W510
RSH Keypad
F9 7.5A 5V LGC RSH CONTROLLER J702/W520
J603/W540 RSH Bar Code Reader
J701/W510 Carrier Positioner #1, Carrier Transport X Axis, Rail Guide
F11 2A 5V LGC INDEXER# 1 J702/W520 Carrier Positioner #2, Carrier Transport Z and Theta Axis
J179/ W37 Vortexer ST
F12 2A 5V PWR DC DRIVER I/O J181/ W31 Vortexer #3
F13 2A 5V LGC LLS BOARD #3 J527/ W43 STAT Pipettor Crash Limit Sensor
F16 10A 5V LGC RSH SIB J703/W500 Sensor Interface Board, RSH
Fuse Location for Power Supply
Original Power Supply
ARTESYN Power Supply

Heater Zone Description Fuse Heater Zone Description Fuse
Process Path Zone 1 Trigger

1 5A 125V 7 1.33A 125V
Process Path Zone 2 Pre-Trigger
2 5A 125V 8 1.33A 125V
Process Path Zone 3 NOT USED
3 5A 125V 9 1.33A 125V
Process Path Zone 4 Wash Zone #1 Buffer
4 5A 125V 10 1.33A 125V
Process Path Zone 5 Wash Zone #2 Buffer
5 5A 125V 11 1.33A 125V
Process Path Zone 6 Ion Fan (NOT USED)
6 5A 125V 12 5A 125V
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-117) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
M1.03 BD, INDEXER (written to be customer–replaceable with Abbott
Version - 96728-111_201_2
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204347-01 Indexer Board, Tested
7-204347-02 Indexer Board, Tested (RoHS)
7-76170-01 BD, Indexer
7-90370-01 Bd, Indexer
M1.03 BD, INDEXER (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)
Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
3. Open the card cage door.
card cage cover. [1]
5. Open the card cage cover.
Attach
Wrist Strap Note
discharge (ESD) precaution. Use the wrist strap
supplied with the board and do not wear gloves.
1. Place the wrist strap snugly onto your wrist.

2. Attach the wrist strap to the card cage.
Remove
Indexer
1. Locate the desired board.
Board
Note
Refer to the card cage cover for board
locations.
2. Rotate the ejector tabs outward toward the upper

and lower edge of the board.
Note
This disconnects the board from the
connection on the card cage.
3. Slide the board out of the card cage.
Replacement
1. Remove the new board from the antistatic bag.
Note
The board should be handled on the edges
only.
Note
Perform Step2 and Step3 only if 76170. The
new indexer board 90370 does not have any
jumpers.
2. Place the board on the antistatic bag.

3. Remove and install the jumpers on position J3, if
required, to match the graphic.
4. Remove the jumpers on position J6, if required, to
match the graphic.
5. Compare the jumper configuration of the new board
to the configuration of the board which was removed
to verify the jumpers are configured properly.
Note
If J5, J7 and J8 are on the board, no jumpers
should be installed on them.
6. Discard any unused jumpers.
Install
Jumpers
Install
Indexer
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the board in the
Board
guides and place the board in the card cage.
2. With the ejector tabs rotated away from the board,
slide the board into the card cage until it stops.
3. Rotate the ejector tabs toward the board and verify
that they hook onto the metal lip of the card cage.
Continue rotating until the tabs are seated against
the board.
Note
Seating the tabs against the board ensures
that the board is properly seated in the
connector.
4. Verify that the board is fully seated by slightly

tugging on the board.
Prepare
for
1. Close the cover to the card cage and tighten the
Operation
screws securing it in place.
2. Remove and discard the wrist strap.
3. Close the processing module doors.
Note

errors.
M1.04 Indexer PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott
Version - 201975-103_436_1
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204347-01 Indexer Board, Tested
7-204347-02 Indexer Board, Tested (RoHS)
7-90370-01 Bd, Indexer
M1.04 Indexer PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

Caution
Removal
Preparation For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System

Offline.
2. Power OFF the processing module
Access
Card Cage
2. Open the SCC and card cage door.
3. Lift up the latches on the card cage cover door and
turn both counterclockwise, then pull open to access
the card cage.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

the instrument.
material.
Remove
Card Cage
1. Locate the appropriate board.
Board
2. Push the top ejector tab up and the bottom ejector
tab down (open position).
Note
This disengages the board from the card
cage.
3. Slide the board from the card cage.
Replacement
Install Card Cage

Board
1. Align the new board with the top and bottom guide rails within the card cage.
2. Verify the ejector tabs are in the open position and slide the board into the appropriate slot
until the tab seats against the frame.
3. Push the top ejector tab down and the bottom ejector tab up (locked position) to fully seat the
board in the chassis.
Prepare to
Operation
1. Close the front card cage door.
2. Close the SCC and card cage door.
4. Power the process module ON.
M1.05 BD,TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Version - 96728-111_202_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78560-01 Bd, Temperature Controller
7-78560-03 Bd, Temperature Controller (RoHS)
M1.05 BD,TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. Use the
wrist strap supplied with the board and do not
wear gloves. Not following these precautions may
damage or destroy the electronic circuitry of the
board.

Remove
Temperature
Controller
Board Note
locations.

Note
Replacement
Install
Temperature
Controller
Board Note
The board should be handled on the
edges only.
2. Align the top and bottom edges of the board in

the guides and place the board in the card cage.
3. With the ejector tabs rotated away from the
board, slide the board into the card cage until it
stops.
4. Rotate the ejector tabs toward the board and
verify that they hook onto the metal lip of the card
cage. Continue rotating until the tabs are seated
against the board.
Note
connector.

Prepare for For information on the startup procedure, refer to the

Operation ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause,
and shutdown.
Note

errors.
M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER Version - 96728-111_203_1
List/Part Numbers
7-204164-01 CPU Board, Tested
7-78665-04 Controller Board, All Modules
7-78665-06 Controller Board, All Modules
M1.06 BD,CONTROLLER

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Preparation
Attach Wrist
Strap Note
Before continuing, take the appropriate
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. Use the
wrist strap supplied with the board and do not
wear gloves. Not following these precautions may
damage or destroy the electronic circuitry of the
board.

Remove
CPU Board
Note
locations.

Note

Verify
Jumper
1. Verify the part number of the board. Jumper
Configuration
configuration is dependent on the part number of
the board.
Note
The board should be handled on the
edges only.
3. Place the board on the antistatic bag.

4. If installing a 76165 controller board, remove and
install the jumpers on position JU1 and JU2, if
required, to match the appropriate graphic.
5. If installing a 78665 controller board, no jumpers
are required.
Note
For type 78665-109 or later be sure that
JU-3 is OPEN (not LAS position), unless
the board is being used in the LAS
carousel position. For LAS carousel
control, close JU-3(LAS position) or use a
red-tabbed controller board type 90905.
Replacement

Install
CPU
1. Align the top and bottom edges of the board in the
Board
guides and place the board in the card cage.
2. With the ejector tabs rotated away from the board,
slide the board into the card cage until it stops.
3. Rotate the ejector tabs toward the board and verify
that they hook onto the metal lip of the card cage.
Continue rotating until the tabs are seated against
the board.
Note
connector.


and shutdown.
Note

errors.
2 6008 - Controller Configuration
M1.07 ESD PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott
Version - 201975-103_439_4
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-94008-01 Board, ESD
7-94008-02 Board, ESD (RoHS)
M1.07 ESD PCB

Caution
Note
When assisting customers performing this procedure, Abbott personnel should ensure that a disposable ground strap is
shipped with the circuit board.
Removal

Offline.
Access
Card Cage
1. Remove the center back panel by loosening the seven (7)
captive screws until the panel can be removed.
Caution

instrument.
Remove
ESD PCB
1. Locate the ESD PCB [1].
2. Remove the ESD PCB by pulling it straight from the card
cage backplane.
Replacement
Install ESD
PCB
1. Install the new ESD PCB on the card cage.
Note
The ESD PCB is bi-directional therefore when installing no keying is required.
2. Verify ESD PSB is pressed fully down onto card cage connector.
3. Install the center back panel using the seven (7) captive screws to secure to the process module
frame.

errors.
2 3630 - LLS Test
M1.08 Controller PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott
Version - 201975-103_440_2
assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204164-01 CPU Board, Tested
M1.08 Controller PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

Tools/Materials Not Assessed
Caution
Note
Removal

Offline.
Access
Card Cage
the card cage.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

the instrument.
material.
Remove
Card Cage
Board
Note
cage.
Replacement
Install Card Cage

Board
Prepare to
Operation
2 6008 - Controller Configuration
M1.09 Motor Controller Driver PCB (written to be customer-replaceable
Version - 201975-103_441_2
with Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-204346-01 Motor Driver Board, Tested
7-900080-01 Bd, Motor Driver
M1.09 Motor Driver Bd (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

Caution
Note
Removal

Offline.
Access
Card Cage
3. Lift up the latches on the card cage cover door and turn
both counterclockwise, then pull open to access the card
cage.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

instrument.
material.
Remove
Card Cage
Board
2. Push the top ejector tab up and the bottom ejector tab
down (open position).
Note
This disengages the board from the card cage.
Replacement
Install Card Cage

Board
Prepare to
Operation
M1.10 Heater/Cooler PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with
Version - 201975-103_442_2
Abbott assistance)
List/Part Numbers
7-97280-01 Bd, Heater_Cooler
7-97280-02 Bd, Heater_Cooler (RoHS)
M1.10 Heater/Cooler PCB (written to be customer-replaceable with Abbott assistance)

Caution
Note
Removal

Offline.
Access
Card Cage
the card cage.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

the instrument.
material.
Remove
Card Cage
Board
Note
cage.
Replacement
Install Card Cage

Board
Prepare to
Operation
2 3535 - Temperature Check - Manual
M1.10A R1 and R2 ESD BOARD Version - 96728-111_332_2
List/Part Numbers
7-92375-03 LLS/PM Bd with Slope Score Option
7-94008-01 Board, ESD
7-94008-02 Board, ESD (RoHS)
M1.10A R1 and R2 ESD BOARD

Caution
Removal

System status.
Offline status.
Access
Buffer
Reservoir
Preparation For further information on performing maintenance
procedures, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
1. If buffer volume is greater than 10 liters, unload
Manual, Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
buffer.
As-needed maintenance procedures.
Select As needed from the maintenance
screen under the system icon.
Perform maintenance procedure 2185 Wash
Buffer Unload.
Remove
Wash
1. Remove the buffer inlet tube by unscrewing the
Buffer
cap and removing the inlet tube.
Reservoir
2. Remove the buffer outlet tube by unscrewing the
cap and removing.
3. Slide the container out and place it outside the
module on the floor.
Power OFF
Module
Disconnect
Cable
1. Disconnect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR cable.
Attach
Wrist Strap Note
supplied with the board and do not wear gloves.

Access
ESD
1. Loosen the screw securing the card cage cover in
Boards
place.
3. Release the card cage and swing it forward.
Note
Check the rear of the card cage and
reconnect any cable connections that may
have pulled loose.
Remove
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate the ESD
Boards
boards.
2. Locate the ESD board to be replaced.
3. Pull the ESD board out and away from the card
cage.
Replacement
Install
ESD
1. From the rear of the card cage, locate
Boards
the JU pins for the ESD board being
replaced.
2. Verify the board and pins are aligned,
and insert the new ESD board.
Note
ESD board orientation is not
critical

Secure
Card
1. Check the rear of the card cage and
Cage
reconnect any cable connections that
may have pulled loose.
2. Swing the card cage to the closed
position.
Note
As the card cage is moved to the
closed position, assist the cables
as they are flexed.
3. Latch the card cage closed.
Connect
Cable
1. Connect the W88 BUFF BTL SENSOR
cable.
Install For further information on loading wash buffer, refer to the ARCHITECT
Buffer System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
1. Install the buffer inlet tube and secure
Reservoir Subsection: Setup and Consumable inventory management.
the cap.
2. Install the buffer outlet tube and secure
the cap.
3. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the
buffer reservoir and slide the reservoir
into the processing module.
Note
If buffer was unloaded to allow
the removal of the buffer reservoir
from the processing module, add
wash buffer.

1. Close the processing module door(s).
Note
must be ON prior to turning on
the processing module for proper
initialization.
3. To change the status of the processing

module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
1 3600 - LLS Test
N1.01 RSH Carrier Transport Assembly Version - 201975-103_443_4
List/Part Numbers
7-97008-01 Assy, Carrier Transport, Complete
N1.01 RSH Carrier Transport Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
Note
Ensure the pipettor is over

the wash cup to prevent
damage.
2. Move the carrier transport [1] to the

far left position on the guide rail.
3. Remove the carrier transport cover

[2] and the upper left panel [3] of
module.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Transport
Assembly
Remove
Carrier
1. Remove transport rail stop on left
Transport
end of guide rail. [4]
Assembly
2. Disconnect the flex cable
connectors at J2 and J3 [5] on the
carrier transport board.
3. Push or pull up to remove the

retaining pin securing the flex cable
to the carrier transport frame. [6]
4. Remove the carrier transport from

the RSH by sliding it to the left off
the guide rails.
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install Note
Transport
Assembly
Install
Carrier
1. Slide the carrier transport onto the
Transport
guide rail.
Assembly
2. Lift up on transport assembly when
middle roller is positioned in transport
rail to prevent the base of the
transport assembly from scraping the
base of the RSH.
3. Connect the flex cables to J2 and J3

on the carrier transport board. [1]
Note
Ensure the locking tabs are

pressed down and the Cables
seated flush to prevent
transport damage and errors.
4. Insert the retaining pin [2] securing

the flex cable to the transport.
Note
Ensure the cables are tucked

back toward the transport to
avoid damaged when the pin is
inserted.
5. Install the transport rail stop. [4]
Prepare for
Operation
1. Install carrier transport cover.
2. Install upper left panel.
4. Power on the processing module main

switch in the back of the system.
5. Ensure the status of the processing

module and sample handler goes to
Stopped.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.02 RSH Carrier Transport Frame Version - 201975-103_445_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97092-01 Frame, Carrier Transport
N1.02 RSH Carrier Transport Frame

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH
2. Manually park the pipettor away from the RSH
assembly and move the carrier transport fully the left
position on the guide rail.
3. Remove the carrier transport cover [1] and left side
cover of module.
4. Remove transport rail stop on left end of guide rail.
5. Disconnect the flex cable connectors at J2 and J3 on
the carrier transport PCB.
6. Remove the retaining pin securing the flex cable to
the carrier transport frame. [4]
Remove Carrier
Transport from
1. Remove the carrier transport from the RSH by sliding
RSH (continued)
it off the guide rail.
Electrostatic
Precaution Before continuing, take the appropriate (ESD)
precaution. Use a ground strap or appropriate
grounding tool. Do not wear gloves. Not following
these precautions may damage or destroy the
electronic circuitry of the board.

the instrument.
material.
Remove Carrier
Transport PCB Note
Turn theta shaft clockwise to verify that the flag is
not in a position to damage the sensor.
1. Disconnect the following cables from the carrier

transport PCB:
Carrier Transport Arm Sensor at J1

X-home sensor at J10
Theta-motor encoder at J5
Z-motor at J8
X-motor encoder at J4
Theta motor at J6
X-motor at J7
Ribbon cable at J9
2. Loosen the adjustment clip set screw [5] for theta

home sensor using 0.05 hex driver.
Note
Do not remove the screw. A screw comes
with the frame.
Remove Carrier
Transport PCB
1. Remove four (4) non-captive screws [7] securing
(continued)
carrier transport PCB to transport frame.
2. Remove two (2) posts for each of the connectors J2
and J3 using a 3/16-socket driver. Retain for use
later.
Note
Nut for socket is located at the base of the
screw.
3. Carefully press theta home sensor out of the frame

and remove carrier transport PCB. Retain clip for
theta home sensor.
Remove Theta
Shaft
1. Remove two (2) screws securing theta motor to
transport frame.
2. Carefully pull theta shift arm from lead screw
(L_screw) lifter. [9]
3. Slide theta shaft from transport frame.
Remove
L_Screw from
1. Remove two screws securing the L_screw motor [10]
Carrier
to frame.
Transport Frame
2. Remove the L_screw and motor. [10]
Remove X-Axis
Home Sensor
1. Loosen the screw securing home sensor to frame.
from Carrier
2. Slide X-Axis sensor from transport by releasing three
Transport Frame
(3) tabs with flat blade screwdriver. [11]
3. Remove sensor.
Remove X-
Motor from
1. Remove four (4) screws securing X-Motor to frame.
Carrier
2. Remove X-motor.
Transport Frame
Replacement
Install L_Screw
1. Orient the L_screw with cables facing towards the left, and install the L_screw onto the
carrier transport Frame.
Install Theta Shaft

Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging theta shaft. Do not handle by the shaft or
turn by the flag at the top of the shaft.

2. Attach the theta shaft arm to L_screw lifter before sliding theta shaft into top of carrier
transport frame.
3. Orient alignment pins on gearbox to holes on transport frame with motor power cables to
the left.
4. Secure theta shaft motor to carrier transport frame with two (2) screws from removal
steps.
Note
Verify lifter moves up and down smoothly, and that arm can turn freely.
Install X-Home
Sensor and X-Motor
1. Snap X-motor sensor into transport carrier frame with cable oriented towards frame.
2. Secure X-motor sensor to frame using screw from previous removal step.
Note
Do not over tighten screw and damage sensor.
3. Secure X-Axis motor to frame using four (4) screws from removal step.
Note
Verify that the cable is oriented upward.
Install Carrier
Transport PCB Note
Turn theta shaft clockwise to verify that the flag is not in a position to damage the sensor.
1. Install clip for theta home sensor.
Note
Do not tighten screws to frame before adjusting setscrew for clip.
2. Install carrier transport PCB and secure to frame using four (4) screws from previous
removal steps. Do not tighten.
3. Adjust clip using setscrew so that PCB sensor is flush with the left side of the carrier
transport frame.
4. Tighten four (4) screws to secure carrier transport PCB to the frame.
5. Connect the following cables to the carrier transport PCB:

Z-motor at J8
Theta motor at J6
X-motor at J7
Ribbon cable at J9
6. Install two (2) posts for each of the connectors J2 and J3 using a 3/16" socket driver.
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Slide the carrier transport onto the guide rail.
2. Lift up on transport assembly when middle roller is positioned on transport rail to prevent
the base of the assemble from scraping the base of the RSH.
3. Connect the flex cables connections to J2 and J3 on the carrier transport PCB.
4. Insert the flex cable bracket into routing feature on frame.
5. Install the transport rail stop.
7. Install left side cover.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.03 Carrier Transport Leadscrew with Lifter Assembly Version - 201975-103_2803_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97078-01 Motor, Z, with Leadscrew and Lifter
N1.03 Carrier Transport Leadscrew with Lifter Assembly

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH
assembly and move the carrier transport fully the
left position on the guide rail.
3. Remove the carrier transport cover [1] and left
side cover of module.
4. Remove transport rail stop on left end of guide
rail.
5. Disconnect the flex cable connectors at J2 and J3
on the carrier transport PCB.
6. Remove the retaining pin securing the flex cable
Remove Carrier
Transport from
1. Remove the carrier transport from the RSH by
RSH (continued)
sliding it off the guide rail.
Remove Theta
Shaft
1. Disconnect the cables at J1, J5, and J9 on carrier
transport PCB. [6]
2. Remove two (2) screws [5] securing theta motor
to transport frame.
3. Carefully pull theta shaft arm from lead screw
(L_screw) lifter.
4. Slide theta shaft from transport frame
Remove L_Screw
from Carrier
1. Disconnect the Z motor cable at J8 and Z encoder
Transport Frame
cable at J6 on the carrier transport PCB. [2]
2. Remove two (2) screws [3] securing the L_screw
motor to frame.
3. Remove the L_screw and motor.
Replacement
Install L_Screw
Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging the Leadscrew. Do not handle by the shaft or
turn by the disc at the top of the shaft.
1. Orient the L_screw with cables facing towards the left, and install the L_screw onto the carrier
transport frame.
3. Connect the Z motor cable to J8 and the Z encoder cable to J6 on the carrier transport PCB.
Install Theta
shaft Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging theta shaft. Do not handle by the shaft or turn
by the flag at the top of the shaft.
2. Attach the theta shaft arm to the L_screw lifter before sliding theta shaft into top of carrier
transport frame.
3. Orient alignment pins on gearbox to holes on transport frame with motor power cables to the left.
4. Secure theta shaft motor to carrier transport frame with 2 screws from removal steps.
Note
Verify lifter moves up and down smoothly, and that arm can turn freely.
Install Carrier
Transport
2. Lift up on transport assembly when middle roller is positioned on transport rail to prevent the
base of the assembly from scraping the base of the RSH.
3. Connect the cable to J2 and J3 and insert flex cable bracket into routing feature.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.04 Carrier Transport Assembly PCB Version - 201975-103_447_4
List/Part Numbers
7-97285-01 Bd, Carrier Transport
7-97285-02 Bd, Carrier Transport (RoHS)
N1.04 Carrier Transport Assembly PCB

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove
Carrier
Transport from
RSH
assembly and move the carrier transport fully the left
position on the guide rail.
3. Remove the carrier transport cover [1] and left side
cover of module.
5. Disconnect the flex cable connectors at J2 and J3 on
6. Remove the retaining pin securing the flex cable to
the carrier transport frame. [4]
Remove
Carrier
Transport from
RSH
(continued)
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution
(ESD) Before continuing, take the appropriate (ESD)
Precaution precaution. Use a ground strap or appropriate

the instrument.
material.
Remove
Carrier Note
Transport PCB Turn theta shaft clockwise to verify that the flag is not
in a position to damage the sensor.
1. Disconnect the following cables from the carrier

transport PCB:

Z-motor at J8
Theta motor at J6
X-motor at J7
Ribbon cable at J9
2. Loosen the adjustment clip set screw for theta home

sensor using 0.05 hex driver.
Note
Do not remove the screw. A screw comes with
the frame.
3. Remove four (4) non-captive screws securing carrier

transport PCB to transport frame. [5]
4. Remove two (2) posts for each of the connectors J2
and J3 using a 3/16-socket driver. Retain for use later.
Note
Nut for socket is located at the base of the
screw.
5. Carefully press theta home sensor out of the frame

and remove carrier transport PCB. Retain clip for theta
home sensor.
Replacement

Install Carrier
Transport Note
PCB Turn theta shaft clockwise to verify that the flag is not
in a position to damage the sensor.
1. Install clip for theta home sensor.
Note
Do not tighten screws to frame before adjusting
setscrew for clip.
2. Install carrier transport PCB and secure to frame using

four (4) screws from previous removal steps. Do not
tighten.
3. Adjust clip using setscrew so that PCB sensor is flush
with the left side of the carrier transport frame.
4. Tighten four (4) screws to secure carrier transport PCB
to the frame.
5. Connect the following cables to the carrier transport
PCB:

Z-motor at J8
Theta motor at J6
X-motor at J7
Ribbon cable at J9
6. Install two (2) posts for each of the connectors J2 and

J3 using a 3/16" socket driver.
Install Carrier
Transport
Note
Lift the assembly when middle roller is on guide
rail to prevent the base of the transport from
scraping the base of the RSH.
2. Connect the flex cables connections to J2 and J3 on

3. Insert the flex cable bracket into routing feature on
frame.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.05 Carrier Transport Theta Shaft Version - 201975-103_448_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97082-01 Motor, Theta, with Leadscrew and Arm
N1.05 Carrier Transport Theta Shaft

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH
rail.
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH (continued)
Remove Theta
Shaft
1. Disconnect the cables at J1, J5, and J9 on carrier
transport PCB.
2. Remove two (2) screws securing theta motor to
transport frame.
3. Carefully pull theta shaft arm from lead screw
(L_screw) lifter.
4. Slide theta shaft from transport frame
Replacement

Install Theta
Shaft Note
Use caution while handling to prevent damaging theta shaft. Do not handle by the shaft or turn
by the disc at the top of the shaft.

2. Attach the theta shaft arm to the L_screw lifter before sliding theta shaft into top of carrier
transport frame.
3. Orient alignment pins on gearbox to holes on transport frame with motor power cables to the left.
4. Secure theta shaft motor to carrier transport frame with 2 screws from removal steps.
5. Connect theta-motor encoder cable to PCB connector J5, ribbon cable to PCB connector J9 and
carrier transport arm sensor cable to PCB connector J1.
Note
Verify lifter moves arm up and down smoothly, and that arm can turn freely.
Install Carrier
Transport

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.06 Carrier Transport Assembly X Motor Version - 201975-103_449_3
N1.06 Carrier Transport Assembly X Motor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal

Shutdown
Processing Module
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH
rail.
Remove Carrier
Transport from
RSH (continued)
Remove X-Motor
from Carrier
1. Disconnect the encoder and X motor cables from
Transport Frame
PCB connectors J4 and J7.
2. Remove four (4) screws securing X-Motor to
frame and remove x-motor.
Replacement

Install X-Motor
1. Secure X-Axis motor to frame.
Note
Verify that the cable is oriented upward.
2. Connect the encoder and X motor cables to PCB connectors J4 and J7.
Install Carrier
Transport

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.07 Carrier Transport Arm Sensor Version - 201975-103_450_5
N1.07 Carrier Transport Arm Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
CAUTION
Possible Electrostatic Discharge
Shock
Removal
Preparation
1. Perform For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
P-248 Startup and Shutdown. Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection: System status.

Note
Ensure the pipettor is over the

wash cup to prevent damage.
3. Move the carrier transport [1] to the

far left position on the guide rail.
4. Remove the carrier transport cover.

[2]
5. Remove the upper left panel [3] of
module.
VIDEO -
Remove Note
Carrier
Transport
Remove
Carrier
1. Remove transport rail stop on left end
Transport
of guide rail. [4]
Assembly
2. Disconnect the flex cable connectors
at J2 and J3 [5] on the carrier
transport board.
3. Push or pull up to remove the

retaining pin securing the flex cable
4. Remove the carrier transport from the

RSH by sliding it to the left off the
guide rails.
VIDEO -
Carrier Note
Transport Video contains no audio sound.
Arm Sensor Note
The transport is displayed laying
sideways in the video.
Remove
Carrier
1. Manually move pipettor away from
Transport
the RSH assembly and move the
Arm Sensor
carrier transport to the far left position
on the guide rail.
Note
Remove cable tie if present.
3. Use the small opening [1] in the front

of the transport arm to push the
sensor out the back of the arm.
CAUTION
Do not pull very hard on cable.
It may be necessary to use a
small blunt object (Example:
flat head screw drive) to push
sensor out of arm.
4. Push the bottom of the white pin to

pop it out the top. The pin holds the
cable securely on the arm. [2]
5. Disconnect the carrier transport arm

sensor cable at J1 [3] on the carrier
transport PCB.
6. Uncoil sensor cable from theta shaft

and remove. [4]
Replacement
VIDEO -
Install Carrier Note
Transport
Arm Sensor
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Coil carrier transport arm sensor
Arm Sensor
cable around theta shaft. [1]
2. Connect the cable to J1 [2] on the
carrier transport PCB.
3. Insert and push the white cable pin

in the arm. [3]
4. Insert the sensor into the carrier

transport arm slot from the back of
the arm. [4]
5. Verify the sensor is pressed fully

into the arm slot.
Note
The sensor is flush to the
back when pushed all the
way in and the sensor will be
evenly spaced inside when
viewed from the top.
6. Add a tie wrap to the transport arm

to secure the cable.
VIDEO -
Install Carrier Note
Transport
Install Carrier
Transport
1. Slide the carrier transport onto the
Assembly
guide rail.
2. Lift up on transport assembly when

middle roller is positioned in
transport rail to prevent the base of
the transport assembly from
scraping the base of the RSH.
3. Connect the flex cables to J2 and J3

on the carrier transport board.
Note
Ensure the locking tabs are
pressed down and the Cables
seated flush to prevent
transport damage and errors.
4. Insert the retaining pin securing the

flex cable to the transport.
Note
Ensure the cables are tucked
back toward the transport to
avoid damaged when the pin
is inserted.
Prepare for
Operation
2. Install upper left panel.
4. Power on the processing module

main switch in the back of the
system.
5. Ensure the status of the processing

module and sample handler goes to
Stopped.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.08 Flex Cable with Pin Version - 201975-103_451_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97210-01 Cable, RSH Flex, with Pin, i1000SR, W500
N1.08 Flex Cable with Pin

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove
Carrier
Transport
2. Manually move pipettor away from the RSH assembly
Assembly
and move the carrier transport to the far left position on
the guide rail.
3. Remove the carrier transport cover [1] and the side
cover of module.
4. Remove transport rail stop on left end of guide rail. [2]
5. Disconnect the flex cable from carrier transport by
disconnecting cables at connectors J2 and J3 on the
carrier transport PCB. [3]
6. Disconnect the flex cable from the RSH carrier
transport frame.
7. Remove the carrier transport from the RSH by sliding it
off the guide rail.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution
(ESD) Before continuing, take the appropriate (ESD)
Precaution precaution. Use a ground strap or appropriate
grounding tool. Not following these precautions may
damage or destroy the electronic circuitry of the board.

the instrument.
material.
Remove Flex
Cable
1. Remove RSH cover.
2. Disconnect the following cable connection from the
RSH distribution board:
Reagent bottle sensor at J2

Barcode Reader at J5
Bottle Rotator at J9
Load/Unload board at J8
RSH motor cable at J10
RSH sensor/com. cable at J11
3. Loosen the four green captive screws that secure the

RSH distribution board to the instrument frame. [4]
4. Carefully pull out the RSH distribution board to access
and disconnect the following cables:
Flex cable motor signal at J13

Flex cable data signal at J12
5. Place RSH distribution board on or in nonconductive

material for use later.
6. Remove flex cable from instrument.
Replacement
Install Flex Cable

1. Route flex cable into instrument.
2. Connect the following cables from the flex cable to the rear of the RSH distribution board:
Flex cable motor signal at J13

Flex cable data signal at J12
3. Using the four green captive screws secure the RSH distribution board to the instrument
frame.
4. Connect the following cables to the RSH distribution board:
Reagent bottle sensor at J2

Bottle Rotator at J9
Load/Unload board at J8
RSH motor cable at J10
RSH sensor/com. cable at J11
5. Install RSH cover.
Install Carrier
Transport Assembly
Note
Lift up on transport assembly when middle roller is positioned in transport rail to
prevent the base of the assembly from scraping the base of the RSH.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N1.09 Carrier Transport X Home Sensor Version - 201975-103_452_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97220-01 Sensor, Transport X Home
7-97220-02 Sensor, Transport X Home (RoHS)
N1.09 Carrier Transport X Home Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Remove X
Home Sensor
1. Manually move pipettor away from the RSH assembly
and move the carrier transport to the far left position
on the guide rail.
3. Disconnect X-home sensor cable at J10 on carrier
transport PCB. [1]
4. Loosen the screw [2] securing the X home sensor to
the carrier transport frame.
5. Slide X-Axis sensor from transport by releasing three
(3) tabs [3] with flat blade screwdriver.
Replacement
Install X Home
sensor
1. Snap X-motor sensor into transport carrier frame with cable oriented towards frame. Secure
with screw from previous removal step.
2. Connect the sensor cable to J10 on the carrier transport PCB.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N2.01 Bar Code Reader Version - 201975-103_453_2
List/Part Numbers
7-207194-01 Barcode Reader - Aggressive
7-97325-01 Bar Code Reader
N2.01 Bar Code Reader

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Class 2 Laser Radiation
Removal
Prerequisite
Preparation
1. Open the processing center cover to access the bar
code reader.
2. Remove the RSH distribution board cover by
pressing on the side tabs of the cover and lifting
outward and upward.
3. Locate the bar code reader.
Attach
Wrist Strap Caution
supplied with the board and do not wear gloves. Not
following these precautions may damage or destroy
the electronic circuitry of the board.

2. Attach the wrist strap to the any grounded part of the
instrument frame. Examples: card cage, RSH frame,
etc.
Remove
Bar Code
1. Disconnect the bar code reader cable from J5 [2] of
Reader
the RSH distribution board.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [1] securing the bar
code reader to the bracket.
Note
Retain screws for installation of barcode
reader.
Replacement
Install Bar Code

Reader
1. Attach the bar code reader to the bracket with the two screws from the removal step.
Note
Position cable downward when installing barcode reader.
2. Connect the bar code reader cable to the RSH distribution board at J5.
Note
Verify the barcode reader cable connection is secure before installing the RSH
cover.
3. Install the RSH cover.


errors.
N2.02 Bottle Rotator Assembly, Wheel and Cap Version - 201975-103_454_4
List/Part Numbers
7-200055-01 Wheel, Bottle Rotator
7-200065-01 Reagent Bottle Rotator, Assy, Complete
7-203324-01 Cap, Wheel, Bottle Rotator
N2.02 Bottle Rotator Assembly, Wheel and Cap
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
1. Perform
Module
Preparation
access the bottle rotator assembly.
2. Remove the RSH distribution board

cover on the standalone system by
pressing on the side tabs of the
cover [1] and lifting outward and
upward.
VIDEO
Remove
Note
Bottle
Rotator
Wheel and
Cap Only
Remove
Bottle
1. Remove the screw securing the
Rotator
bottle rotator wheel and cap to the
Wheel and
bottle rotator assembly. Retain screw
Cap Only
for later use. [1]
2. Remove the rotator wheel and cap.
Remove
Bottle
1. Perform the following based on the
Rotator
system configuration:
Assembly
a. Disconnect the bottle rotator
assembly cable from J9 [1] on
the RSH distribution board on
standalone systems.
b. Disconnect the bottle rotator

connector [2] on integrated
systems.
2. Remove the two (2) screws [2]

securing the bottle rotator assembly
to the instrument.
3. Remove the bottle rotator assembly.

Replacement
VIDEO
Install Bottle
Note
Rotator Wheel
and Cap Only
Install Bottle
Rotator Wheel
1. Align the rotator wheel to align with
and Cap Only
the bottle rotator assembly. [1]
2. Mount the cap onto the bottle

rotator assembly.
3. Insert the screw in the center of

the bottle rotator wheel and cap
and secure it to the bottle rotator
assembly.
Install Bottle
Rotator
1. Secure the bottle rotator assembly
Assembly
to the bracket with the two (2)
screws from the previous removal
step.
2. Perform the following based on the

system configuration:
a. Connect the bottle rotator
cable to J9 on the RSH
distribution board [1] for
standalone systems.
b. Connect the bottle rotator

connector [2] on the
integrated systems.
3. Install the RSH distribution board

cover.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N2.03 Carrier Sensor, Spring and Access Cover Version - 201975-103_456_4
List/Part Numbers
7-200049-01 Access Cover, Arm Load-Unload
7-201833-01 Spring, Carrier Arm
7-98220-01 Arm, Carrier Sensor
N2.03 Carrier Sensor Arm, Spring and Access Cover
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown Processing
Module
Preparation
pressing on the side tabs [1] of the cover and
lifting outward and upward.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable to the priority
load-unload board.
4. Loosen the four (4) screws securing load-
unload assembly to instrument.
5. Remove load-unload assembly.
Remove Carrier
Sensor Arm and
1. Turn load_unload assembly over to access the
Load_Unload Arm
carrier sensor arm and arm cover.
Cover
2. Remove screw that secures arm and cover to
section tray. Use caution not to lose spring.
3. Remove arm and cover.
Replacement
Install Carrier Sensor Arm and Load_Unload

Arm Cover
1. Install arm onto tray.
2. Position the spring and screw onto the cover.
3. Secure cover and arm to tray with spring and screw.
Install Load - Unload Assembly

1. Install load-unload assembly.
2. Tighten four (4) captive screws to secure load-unload assembly
to instrument.
3. Connect the ribbon cable to the priority load_unload board.
4. Install the RSH distribution board cover.

errors.
4 5555 - RSH Sensor Tests
N2.04 RSH Distribution Board Version - 201975-103_457_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97265-01 Bd, RSH Distribution
N2.04 RSH Distribution Board

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
1. Open the processing center cover to access the bottle
rotator assembly.
2. Remove the RSH distribution board cover by pressing
on the side tabs of the cover [1] and lifting outward and
upward.
Remove RSH
Distribution
1. Disconnect the following cables from the RSH
Board
distribution PCB:
Bottle Rotator Sensor cable W506 at J2
Load_Unload board cable W504 at J8
Bottle Rotator Assembly W505 at J9
Flex Cable Motor Signal W015 at J13
RSH Sensor cable W0116 at J11
Data Signal cable at J12
2. Loosen the four (4) green captive screws and carefully

pull RSH PCB out from instrument frame to access
cables connected to the rear of board.
3. Disconnect the following two (2) cables [3] from the
rear of the RSH PCB:
Cable W500 Connector P13 at J13

4. Remove the RSH distribution board.
Replacement
Install RSH
Distribution Board
1. Connect the following cable to the rear of the RSH distribution board:

2. Verify load_unload board cable is not behind RSH PCB and secure to instrument frame
with the four (4) green captive screws.
3. Connect to following cables to the RSH distribution board:
Bottle Rotator Sensor cable W506 at J2
Load_Unload board cable W504 at J8
Bottle Rotator Assembly W505 at J9
Flex Cable Motor Signal W015 at J13
RSH Sensor cable W0116 at J11
Data Signal cable at J12

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N2.05 Carrier Transport Rail Version - 201975-103_458_3
List/Part Numbers
7-97326-01 Rail, Carrier Transport
N2.05 Carrier Transport Rail

Grease Lubricant
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
2. Move the pipettor arm over the reagent carousel
area.
3. Position the carrier transport in the middle of the
aspiration platform.
Caution
Do not contact the carrier transport board
when removing the aspiration platform.
4. Remove the aspiration platform.
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution
(ESD)

the instrument.
material.
Remove LLS
Sample
1. Remove screw [1] that secures LLS Sample PCB to
Antenna PCB
aspiration platform bracket.
2. Press the LLS cover slightly toward you to clear
bracket and slide up to remove.
3. Slide the LLS sample PCB up and disconnect the
following cables [2] from the PCB:

LLS Process Path coax cable W400 at J4
(RED)
LLS reagent antenna W401 at J2 (RED).
Remove Carrier
Transport
1. Move the pipettor away from the RSH assembly and
Assembly
move the carrier transport to the far left position on
the guide rail.
2. Remove the carrier transport cover and the side cover
of module.
4. Disconnect the flex cable from carrier transport by
disconnecting cables at connectors J2 and J3 on the
carrier transport PCB.
5. Disconnect the flex cable from the RSH carrier
transport frame.
Remove
Aspiration
1. Remove the six (6) screws [3] that secure the
Platform
aspiration platform bracket to the carrier transport rail.
Bracket
2. Remove the aspiration platform bracket.
Remove Carrier
Transport Rail
1. Remove three (3) screws [4] that secure rail to
and Wire Duct
instrument frame.
Conduit
2. Remove the tubing vacuum to wash cup tubing (VA<-
>WC), buffer flush to upper waste manifold tubing
(WZV<->UWM) valve and the wash valve cable W102
cable from the wire duct conduit.
3. Remove the carrier transport rail from instrument.
4. Remove three (3) screws that secure wire duct
conduit to carrier transport rail.
Replacement
Install Carrier
Transport Rail
1. Install wire duct conduit to carrier transport rail using screws from removal step.
2. Route VA<->WC, WZV<->UWM tubing and cable W102 through the wire duct conduit.
3. Install carrier transport rail onto the instrument frame by aligning holes on rail with guide
pins.
4. Secure to instrument frame using three screws from removal step.
5. Apply lubricant to gear teeth and transport rail forming a thin layer.
Note
Apply lubricant using a wood applicator stick or a similar lint free object.
Install Aspiration
Platform Bracket
1. Install the aspiration platform bracket onto the carrier transport rail.
2. Secure using five (5) screws from previous removal step.
Install LLS Sample

Antenna PCB
1. Install the following cables to the LLS sample PCB:
Note
Align the colors on the coax cables with the colors on the aspiration platform bracket.

LLS reagent antenna W401 at J2 (RED).
2. Slide the LLS sample PCB down into the first slot on the aspiration platform bracket.
3. Slide the LLS cover down into the second slot of the aspiration platform bracket.
Note
You may need to press cover slightly toward you in order to clear solenoid bracket.
Cover should slide down below screw hole.
4. Use screw from previous removal step to secure LLS PCB to aspiration platform bracket.
5. Install the aspiration platform.
Install Carrier
Transport Assembly
Note
Lift up on transport assembly when middle roller is positioned in transport rail to
prevent the base of the assembly from scraping the base of the RSH.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N2.06 Bottle Rotator Sensor Version - 201975-103_459_3
List/Part Numbers
7-200686-01 Sensor, Reagent Bottle Rotator, Cable W506
N2.06 Bottle Rotator Sensor

WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Preparation
1. Open the processing center cover to access the bottle
rotator assembly.
2. Remove the RSH distribution board cover by pressing
on the side tabs of the cover [1] and lifting outward
and upward.
3. Locate the bottle rotator assembly.
Remove Bottle
Rotator Sensor
1. Remove two screws securing bottle rotator to bracket
and lay rotator aside.
Note
Do not disconnect bottle rotator cable from
RSH distribution board.
2. Remove screw securing bottle rotator sensor to

bracket.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from J2 on RSH
distribution board [2] and remove sensor.
Replacement
Install Bottle Rotator Sensor

1. Secure the bottle rotator assembly to bracket using screw.
2. Connect the sensor cable to J2 on the RSH distribution board.
Install Bottle Rotator Assembly

1. Secure the bottle rotator assembly to the bracket using two (2) screws.

errors.
4 3310 - RSH Test
N2.07 Priority and Standard Load_Unload Boards Version - 201975-103_460_3
List/Part Numbers
7-900050-01 Bd, Priority Load_Unload
7-900055-01 Bd, Standard Load_Unload
7-900055-02 Bd, Standard Load_Unload (RoHS)
N2.07 Priority and Standard Load_Unload Boards
Caution
Removal
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Electrostatic
Precaution Before continuing, take the appropriate (ESD)
precaution. Use a ground strap or appropriate

2. Attach the ground strap to any grounded element
on the instrument.
3. Place removed circuit board on or in
nonconductive material.
Remove Priority
Load_Unload
Board and
Standard
pressing on the side tabs [1] of the cover and
Load_Unload
lifting outward and upward.
Board
3. Loosen the four (4) screws securing load-unload
assembly to instrument.
4. Pull out load-unload assembly slightly to access
the ribbon cable to the priority load_unload board.
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the priority
load_unload board.
6. Remove three screws securing sensor overlay to
the load_unload tray.
7. Remove sensor overlay.
Note
Boards are separate components and are
not locked to each other.
8. Remove priority load_unload board and standard

load_unload board.
Replacement
Install Priority Load_Unload Board and

Standard Load_Unload Board
1. Join the two PCBs together at their connectors.
2. Align the three (3) PCB notches with the three (3) tray tabs and
snap bottom of PCB into place.
3. Install sensor overlay.
Note
Slide top of sensor overlay into tray first to engage the
three (3) over lay tabs.

errors.
4 5555 - RSH Sensor Tests
P1.01 SCC Side Panel Version - 201975-103_461_3
List/Part Numbers
7-201816-01 Panel, SCC Interface, Assy
P1.01 SCC Interface Panel

Removal
Shutdown SCC and

Processing Center Module
Remove SCC Interface

Panel
1. Remove rear SCC panel. [1]
2. Disconnect any cable connections to SCC
side panel
3. Remove four (4) screws securing interface
panel to instrument.
4. Remove interface panel. [2]
Replacement
Install Interface
Panel
1. Install SCC interface panel using screws from previous removal step.
2. Reconnect all cables that were removed in previous removal steps.
Note
If needed refer to the installation procedure for cable connections to SCC interface
panel.
2 G12 - Printer Verify printer prints reports and/or performs a
screen print.

errors.
4 G34 - Laboratory Information System (LIS) Verify instrument is able to send and receive
test.
3 G67 - Reagent Reservoirs Verify that all Reagent Reservoirs fill properly.
P1.02 Internal Covers
Version - 201975-103_4349_2
Part Number Description
7-203133-01 Cover, Processing Center (Internal)
7-97117-01 Cover, Processing Center Distribution Bd
Time Required 5 min
Removal
Prerequisite 1. The processing module status must be in For further information, refer to the ARCHITECT System
Ready, Stopped, Offline or powered off. Operations Manual, Section 1: Use or function, Subsection:
System status.
Remove 1. Raise the RV loader lower chute.
Processing 2. Press the latch tab [1] and raise the front of
Center Cover the cover, at the front edge of the
processing center cover.
3. Lift the cover out of place.
Caution
Be very careful to avoid contacting
the pipettor probe.
Remove 1. Loosen the three (3) captive screws at the

Distribution top edge of the cover and lift the cover off.
Board Cover
Replacement
Install 1. Locate the two (2) bracket features. [2]

Distribution
Board Cover
Install 1. Install the distribution board cover, ensuring that the
Distribution bottom edge fits inside the two bracket features. [3]
Board Cover
(continued) Note
The cover must NOT rest outside the bracket
features.
2. Ensure that the top edge of the cover is properly

seated and that the silk screening lines up with the
indicator LEDs.
3. Tighten the three (3) captive screws on the top of
the cover.
Install 1. Position the rear edge of the processing center

Processing cover into place, carefully aligning the tabs at the
Center Cover back edge with the holes in the distribution board
cover.
2. Lower the front of the cover and allow the latch to
clip into place. [1]
Note
The cover should easily rest in position
without interference and the front clip should
latch easily.
Verification
Option Description Order VP Description VP Detail VP Note
1 P-248 Startup and Shutdown
released Operation and Service Procedures.
If the system/instrument produces results,
Q1.01 CPU, System Control Center Version - 96728-111_211_3
List/Part Numbers
07D01-02 ARC SCC CPU
07D01-05 ARC SCC "E" Platform
07D01-06 ARC SCC "F" Platform
07D01-07 ARC SCC "F+" Platform
Q1.01 CPU, System Control Center
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
1. Observe ESD precautions.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the ARCHITECT

SCC System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select
Shutdown System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Overview, Snapshot.
2. Select F3 (Shutdown).
3. Select OK to confirm the Shutdown
request.
Note
A message displays
informing you that Shutdown
is complete and you can turn
off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC.

5. Turn off all peripherals connected to
the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables
and disconnect cables connected to
the rear of the computer.
Remove
SCC
1. Lift and remove the SCC from its
location.
Replacement
1. Place the new SCC into position.

2. Reconnect the following cables:
Keyboard [16]
Bar Code Wand (Optional) [via Keyboard] [17]
Video Monitor Touchscreen [2]
Video Monitor [3]
Mouse [14]
Printer [13]
Ethernet Hub [15]
Speakers (Optional) [7]
Power Cord
Note
This is an example of one possible SCC configuration. Refer to the appropriate ISA for other SCC
configurations.
Replace SCC
Install ARCHITECT
Software
1. Perform the most recent ARCHITECT software TSB.
Restore Database
1. If a backup is available, restore the customer database.

errors.
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C) Version - 96728-111_215_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-02 CD-RW Drive (RHOS)
Q1.05 Hard Drive, Backup,CPU (Platform C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation
Note Primary Drive (SYSTEM)
Depending on the SCC CPU configuration, the hard
drive with the system software is typically located in
the following location:
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - mounted on a bracket

under the CD.
drive and is next to the D: drive. Its ribbon cable is
connected to the Primary IDE. Secondary Drive (BACKUP)
Platform C (P4) - mounted in a bracket next tot the
floppy drive. Its ribbon cable is connected to the
Primary IDE.

2. Identify the correct drive by the jumpering for the
primary (SYSTEM) and secondary (BACKUP) drives.
Note
Graphics are only examples. Refer to information
shipped with the new hard drive.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer to the
SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview,
Shutdown Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Snapshot.
pause, and shutdown.
3. Select OK to confirm the Shutdown request.
Note
A message displays informing you that
Shutdown is complete and you can turn off
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC.

5. Turn off all peripherals connected to the computer.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect
cables connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must
be off prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing
module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
1. At the back of the CPU chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Two (2)

screws
Platform C (P4) - Three (3) screws
2. Lift up the back of the cover to a 45 degree angle

(approximately), then pull it out from the CPU
chassis while maintaining the same angle.
Access
Drive
1. Access the hard drive carrier.
Carrier
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove RAM
(Platform C (P4)).
If Platform C (P4), go to Remove CD-ROM
drive (Platform A and B).
Remove
RAM
1. Disconnect and remove any expansion boards
(Platform C
restricting access to the RAM slots.
(P4))
2. Press back the retaining clips [2] holding the RAM
board [1] into the socket and tilt the top of the RAM
board away from the clips.
3. Remove the RAM board.
4. Locate and unplug the multicolored power and
ribbon cables to the floppy drive [3].
5. Go to Disconnect Drive Cables.
Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolor power, ribbon and audio
drive
cables at the rear of the CD-ROM.
(Platform A
2. Remove the CD-ROM by pushing the two (2) side
and B)
tabs toward the center and pulling the drive forward.
Disconnect
Drive Note
Cables To prevent bent pins, pull ribbon cables off carefully.
1. Locate and unplug the multicolored power and

ribbon cables to the hard drive(s) [1].
Remove
Drive Note
Carrier If an expansion board restricts the clearance of the
carrier, remove the expansion cover retaining
bracket and the expansion board.
1. Loosen securing screw(s).
Platform C (P4) - Loosen the three (3) screws

holding the carrier to the CPU chassis. [2]
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Loosen the
screw holding the carrier to the CPU
chassis. [1]
2. Remove the drive carrier.

Platform C (P4) - Slide the carrier to the rear
as far as it will go, then lift up the back of the
carrier and pull it out at about a 45 degree
angle. Take care that all cabling is clear when
removing the carrier.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lift the carrier
out of the CPU chassis.
Remove
Backup SYSTEM Drive
1. Observe the jumpers on the back of the drive and
Hard Drive
locate the backup drive.
2. Remove the four (4) screws securing the hard drive
to the carrier.
3. Slide the drive out of either end of the carrier.
BACKUP Drive
Note
Graphics are only examples. Refer to information
shipped with the new hard drive.
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the hard drive from its wrapper, and
place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
Install Backup
Hard Drive
1. If required, refer to the hard disk drive
manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers
or switches and termination resistors.
2. With the connectors toward the rear of the
drive carrier, slide the disk drive into the
5.25-inch drive bay until the screw holes are
aligned.
3. Secure the hard disk drive to the drive carrier
with three (3) screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in
the same approximate position as when it
was removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an
approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward

until the floppy disk drive clears the
slot in the CPU chassis and aligns with
the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower
the back of the carrier until it rests on
the 5.25-inch drive bay and the CPU
chassis transverse brace.
3. Fasten the carrier to the CPU chassis.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1)

screw
Platform C (P4) - three (3) screws
4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive

carrier.
Install RAM
(Platform C (P4))
1. Holding the RAM board [1] at an angle, align
the notch in the board with the alignment tab
in the socket.
2. Press down and tilt the board up until it snaps
into the retaining clips. [2]
3. Install and reconnect any expansion boards
removed to access the RAM.
Install CD ROM
Drive (Platform A
1. From the front, align the rails on the CD ROM
(PII) and B (PIII))
drive with the tracks in the bay.
2. Slide the drive back until rails latch.
3. Connect the multicolor Power, ribbon and
audio cables to the drive.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the
computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees
with the front end pointing at the insertion
point on the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the
way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the screws at the back panel.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4)

screws
Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and
turn on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear
power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1. Power ON the CPU assembly.

errors.
2 P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC
Platform C)
4 P-206 Printer Configuration
3 P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
Q1.07 CD ROM Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C) Version - 96728-111_217_1
List/Part Numbers
7-99024-02 CD-RW Drive (RHOS)
Q1.07 CD ROM Drive,CPU (Platform A, B, and C)
Not Assessed
Time Required
Screwdriver
Tools/Materials
Removal

Offline status.
Preparation

SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5:
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview,
Shutdown Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Snapshot.
pause, and shutdown.
Note
A message displays informing you that
Shutdown is complete and you can turn off
the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power

enable switch down to the O position.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect
cables connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
components.
Remove
CPU Cover
1. At the back of the CPU chassis, remove the screws
from the cover.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - Two (2)

screws
Platform C (P4) - Three (3) screws
2. Lift up the back of the cover to a 45 degree angle

(approximately), then pull it out from the CPU
chassis while maintaining the same angle.
Remove
CD-ROM
1. Disconnect the multicolored power, ribbon, and
Drive
audio cables at the rear of the CD ROM.
2. Remove the CD ROM by pushing the two (2) side
tabs toward the center and pulling the drive forward.
Replacement
Preparation
2. Remove the CD-ROM drive from its wrapper, and place it on a grounded, static-free surface,
component-side up.
Install CD-
ROM drive
1. If required, refer to the CD-ROM disk drive manufacturer's instructions to set any jumpers or
switches and termination resistors.
2. With the CD-ROM connectors facing the rear of the computer, slide the drive into the carrier until
the screw holes align.
3. Secure the CD-ROM disk drive to the drive carrier with screws.
Install Drive
Carrier
1. Position the carrier above the CPU chassis in the same approximate position as when it was
removed.
2. Lower the carrier into the CPU chassis at an approximate 45 degree angle.
Platform C - Move the carrier forward until the floppy disk drive clears the slot in the CPU
chassis and aligns with the front.
Platforms A (PII) and B (PIII) - Lower the back of the carrier until it rests on the 5.25-inch
drive bay and the CPU chassis transverse brace.
3. Fasten the carrier to the CPU chassis.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - one (1) screw

4. Connect the cables to devices in the drive carrier.
Install Cover
1. Verify that no tools or loose parts are in the computer.
2. Angle the cover at approximately 45 degrees with the front end pointing at the insertion point on
the CPU chassis.
3. Move the cover into the insertion point all the way and then lower the back of the cover into
place.
4. Reinstall the screws at the back panel.
Platform A (PII) and B (PIII) - four (4) screws

Prepare for
Operation
1. Reconnect all cables to the computer and turn on peripheral equipment.
2. Power ON the computer by flipping the rear power enable switch up to the I position.
Power ON
1. Power ON the CPU assembly.
1 G93 - CD-ROM Verify read / write access operation (example:
perform a restore procedure and an archive
procedure).
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin Version - 96728-111_219_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78822-01 Keyboard Skin, SCC
Q2.01 Keyboard Skin
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal

1. The processing module must be in Stopped, or Offline
status.
Perform For information on the shutdown procedure, refer

SCC to the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. From the SCC Main Menu, select Overview, Snapshot.
Shutdown Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Note
A message displays informing you that Shutdown is
complete and you can turn off the power.
4. Power OFF the SCC by flipping the rear power enable

switch down to the "O" position.
6. Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables
connected to the rear of the computer.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be off
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
Replacement
1. Removal and replacement steps are left to the discretion of

the Abbott trained repair person.
Prepare For information on the startup procedure, refer to

for the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
1. Power OFF the processing module(s).
Operation Section 5: Operating instructions, Subsection:
Note System startup, pause, and shutdown.
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF
prior to turning on the power to the system control
center. If the processing module(s) power is ON,
communication is not properly initialized between the
system components.
2. Power ON the system control center.

3. Power ON the monitor.
4. Power ON the processing module(s).
5. To change the status of the processing module and sample
handler from Stopped to Ready, perform the Startup
procedure.
1 G62 - Hardware Installation Verify hardware is securely installed.
Check for leaks as appropriate.
Q2.03 Keyboard,SCC Version - 96728-111_222_1
List/Part Numbers
07D11-01 Keyboard, English
07D11-20 Keyboard, French
07D11-30 Keyboard, German
07D11-40 Keyboard, Italian
07D11-50 Keyboard, Spanish
07D11-60 Keyboard, Japanese
Q2.03 Keyboard,SCC
10 min
Time Required
Removal

SCC ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, Section 5: Operating
1. Access the Snapshot screen by selecting
Shutdown instructions, Subsection: System startup, pause, and shutdown.
Overview and then Snapshot.
2. Select F3-Shutdown.
4. When the screen turns blue, and a message
about shutting down the SCC displays,
press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys
simultaneously.
5. A popup message displays. Select
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
Wait while the software applications
shut down. A message displays
informing you that it is safe to turn off
the computer.
6. Press the power switch on the front of the

central processing unit (CPU) to power OFF
the system control center.
Remove
Keyboard
1. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the port
on the back of the CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Keyboard
1. Connect the keyboard to the port on the back of the
CPU. [1]

Note and shutdown.
be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
components.
2. Power ON the system control center by pressing the

power switch on the front of the CPU.
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system
control center displays the Snapshot screen.

Startup procedure.
1 G8 - Keyboard/ Keypad Verify keyboard / keypad / LUI is functional by
selecting different key commands.
Q2.06 Printer Version - 96728-111_224_1
List/Part Numbers
07D08-11 Printer 110V
07D08-22 Printer 220V
Q2.06 Printer
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Remove
Printer
1. Power OFF the printer.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the
wall outlet.
3. Disconnect the printer from the port
marked PARALLEL on the back of the
CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Printer
1. Connect the printer cable to printer.
2. Connect the printer power cord to the printer.
3. Connect the printer cable to the port marked
PARALLEL on the back of the CPU. [1]
4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet.
Note
If your System Control Center is connected to a
UPS, the printer should not be plugged into the
UPS.
1 G12 - Printer Verify printer prints reports and/or performs a
screen print.
Q2.07 UPS, SCC Version - 96728-111_225_1
List/Part Numbers
07D06-11 UPS 110V
Q2.07 UPS, SCC
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal

Preparation
WARNING
Do not perform this activity with the
UPS plugged in.
1. Unpack the new UPS.

2. Locate the enclosed graphical instructions.
3. Remove the UPS cover.
4. Connect battery according to the graphical
instructions included in packet.
5. Replace the UPS cover.
request.
4. When the screen turns blue, press the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
informing you that it is safe to turn
off the computer.

central processing unit (CPU) to power
OFF the system control center.
Remove
UPS
1. Power ON the UPS. [1]
I is ON.
O is OFF.
Note
Circuit breaker in rear pops
straight out if power input
surge occurs that UPS
cannot handle.
2. Unplug all power cords plugged into the

UPS.
3. Unplug the UPS from the wall outlet.
Replacement
Install
UPS
1. Plug the UPS into the wall outlet.
2. Plug power cords into the UPS.

1. Power ON the UPS. [1]
I is ON. and shutdown.
O is OFF.
Note
Circuit breaker in rear pops straight out
if power input surge occurs that UPS
cannot handle.
Note
be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
components.
1 G15 - UPS Verify UPS is able to maintain a continuous
supply of electric power to connected
equipment.
Q2.08 Mouse,SCC Version - 96728-111_226_1
List/Part Numbers
07D01-99 Mouse, SCC
07D02-01 Mouse, SCC, Black
Q2.08 Mouse,SCC
10 min
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Removal


request.
4. When the screen turns blue, press the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
off the computer.

central processing unit (CPU) to power
OFF the system control center.
Remove
Mouse
1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the port
in the back of the CPU. [1]
Replacement
Install
Mouse
1. Connect the mouse cable to the port in the back of
the CPU. [1]

1. Power OFF the processing module (s).
Note and shutdown.
components.
Note
3. Power ON the processing module (s).

Startup procedure.
1 G13 - Mouse Verify mouse if functional by selecting different
cursor commands.
Q2.10 Network Hub & Cables Version - 96728-111_227_1
List/Part Numbers
07D04-01 Network Hub & Cables,AA
07D04-12 Network Hub & Cables,AE
07D04-24 Network Hub & Cables,AX
07D04-36 Network Hub & Cables,AZ
07D04-48 Network Hub & Cables,BJ
Q2.10 Network Hub & Cables
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials Standard FSE Tool Kit
Removal

System status.

4. When the screen turns blue, and a
message about shutting down the SCC
displays, press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys
simultaneously.
Shutdown, then OK.
Note
off the computer.

central processing unit (CPU) to power OFF
the system control center.
1. Unplug the network hub power cord from
the wall outlet or UPS. [1]
2. Disconnect the communication cables from
the network hub. [2]
Note
The cables can be connected to any
position on the network hub. Exact
location of the connectors is not
necessary.
Remove
Network
Hub
Replacement
Install
Network
1. Plug the new network hub power cord [1] into an SCC
Hub
USB port. [2]
2. Connect the communication cables into the ports of
the network hub.
Note
The cables can be connected to any position on
the network hub. Exact location of the
connectors is not necessary.
Operation Operating instructions, Subsection: System startup,
Note pause, and shutdown.
The power to the processing module(s) must be
OFF prior to turning on the power to the system
control center. If the processing module(s)
power is ON, communication is not properly
initialized between the system components.
2. Power ON the system control center by pressing the

power switch on the front of the CPU.
Note

Startup procedure.
1 P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification
R1.01 BD,STEPPER MOTOR,ARM Version - 96728-111_228_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78194-01 Bd, Stepper Motor, ARM
R1.01 BD,STEPPER MOTOR,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
1. Power OFF the ARCHITECT ARM.
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the module.
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from the
module.
4. Open the fluidics access door.
Remove PCX25
PCB
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the
PS/BD access door.
2. Disconnect the 36V DC power cord from J4.
3. Disconnect the cable from J2.
4. Disconnect the cable from J5.
5. Disconnect the 5V DC power cable from J3
6. Remove the four (4) screws that secure
PCX25 PCB.
Replacement
Install PCX25 PCB

1. Align PCX25 PCB mounting holes to mounting posts and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect 36V DC power cable to J4.
3. Connect 5V DC power cable to J3.
4. Connect cable to J2.
5. Connect cable to J5.
6. Close the PS/BD access door and secure.
7. Close the fluidics access door.
8. Connect water inlet tubing to ARCHITECT ARM.

1. Plug in the AC power cord to the module.
2. Power ON the ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Connect the inlet water tubing from the module.
1 P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and
Verification
R1.02 BD,MAIN,ARM Version - 96728-111_229_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78182-01 Bd, Main, ARM
7-78182-02 Main Board, ARM
R1.02 BD,MAIN,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from the module.
Remove
PC1119X1
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the PS/BD
PCB
access door.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J5.
3. Disconnect the cable from J14 (RS232).
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J3 (meter).
5. Disconnect the cable from J19 (inlet cell).
6. Disconnect the cable from J20 (outlet cell).
7. Disconnect the cable from J21 (meter/P2).
8. Disconnect the cable from J22 (meter/P3).
9. Disconnect the cables from J34 (5V motor).
10. Disconnect the cables from J23 (motor).
11. Disconnect the cables from J12 (pressure).
12. Disconnect the cable from J36 (flood).
13. Disconnect the following cables and label them as
directed: J24 and J25 (label SV1); J26 and J27
(label SV2); J28 and J29 (label SV3); J30 and J31
(label SV4); J32 and J33 (label SV5).
14. Disconnect the cable with red-brown-wires from
J13, level.
15. Disconnect the 36V DC power cable from J7.
16. Disconnect the 36V DC power cable from J6.
17. Remove the six (6) screws that secure PC1119X2
PCB.
Replacement
Install
PC1119X2
1. Align the board and secure with six (6) screws.
PCB
2. Connect the 36V DC power cable to J6.
3. Connect the 36V DC power cable to J7.
4. Connect the cable with red-brown-wires to J13, level.
5. Connect the following cables according to the labels previously attached: J24 and J25 (label SV1);
J26 and J27 (label SV2); J28 and J29 (label SV3); J30 and J31 (label SV4); J32 and J33 (label
SV5).
6. Connect the cables to J12 (pressure) and to J36 (flood).
7. Connect the cables to J34 (5V motor) and to J23 (motor).
8. Connect the cable to J22 (meter/P3).
9. Connect the cable to J21 (meter/P2).
10. Connect the cable to J20 (outlet cell).
11. Connect the cable to J19 (inlet cell).
12. Connect the ribbon cable to J3 (meter).
13. Connect the cable to J14 (RS232).
14. Connect the ribbon cable to J5.
15. Close the PS/BD access door and secure with the captive screw.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.03 BD,SENSOR,ARM Version - 96728-111_230_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78192-01 Bd, Sensor, ARM
R1.03 BD,SENSOR,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Caution
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Middle
PCB
access door.
2. Disconnect the cable from P1.
5. Remove the four (4) screws that secure middle
board.
Replacement
Install Middle Board

1. Align middle board mounting holes to mounting posts and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect cable to P1.

Verification
R1.04 POWER SUPPLY,ARM Version - 96728-111_231_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78189-01 Power Supply, ARM
R1.04 POWER SUPPLY,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Power Supply
access door.
2. Remove nut that secures three (3) red wires to
upper power supply terminal post and remove
wires.
3. Remove nut that secures three (3) black wires to
lower power supply terminal post and remove
wires.
4. Remove the four (4) screws and nuts that secure
power supply.
5. Unscrew and remove the two (2) black wires from
terminals L1 and L2/N terminals.
6. Unscrew and remove Green/Yellow striped ground
wire from ground terminal.
Replacement
Install Power Supply

1. Insert and secure ground wire (Green with Yellow stripe) to power supply AC terminal
ground post.
2. Insert and secure two (2) black wires to power supply AC terminal L1 and L2/N posts.
3. Secure the Power Supply to the panel with 4 screws and nuts.
4. Connect three (3) black wires over the lower terminal post and secure with one nut.
5. Connect three (3) red wires over the upper terminal post and secure with one nut.
8. Connect water input to ARCHITECT ARM.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.05 BLOCK,VALVE,ARM Version - 96728-111_233_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78197-01 Block, Valve, ARM
R1.05 BLOCK,VALVE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Valve Block
1. Remove hose clamps on two (2) tubings on rear
of valve block and disconnect both tubings.
2. Unscrew and remove inlet cell from top, left side of
valve block.
3. Remove hose clamp and disconnect the tubing
from upper left side of valve block.
4. Unscrew and disconnect the tubing from lower left
side of valve block
5. Unscrew and disconnect the two (2) tubings from
bottom of valve block
6. Disconnect the two (2) wires from each of two (2)
valves on front left side of valve block.
7. Disconnect the two (2) wires from each of three
(3) valves on front right side of valve block
8. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the left
bracket to the shelf.
9. Remove the two (2) screws that secure the right
side of valve block to the vertical bracket.
Replacement
Install Valve Block

1. Secure the right side of valve block to the vertical bracket with two (2) screws.
2. Secure the left bracket to the shelf with two (2) screws.
3. Connect two (2) wires to each of three (3) valves on front right side of valve block.
4. Connect two (2) wires to each of two (2) valves on front left side of valve block.
5. Connect and screw on two (2) tubings to bottom of valve block
6. Connect and screw on tubing to lower left side of valve block.
7. Connect tubing to upper left side of valve block and secure with hose clamp.
8. Insert and screw on inlet cell to top, left side of valve block. Install o-ring, if included.
9. Connect two (2) tubings to rear of valve block and secure both with hose clamps.
11. Connect water supply to ARCHITECT ARM.

Verification
R1.06 REG,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM Version - 96728-111_234_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78179-01 Reg, Input Pressure, ARM
R1.06 REG,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
None
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Input
Regulator
1. Disconnect the four (4) tubes connected to
the input regulator.
Replacement
Install Input Regulator

1. Position regulator and connect four (4) tubings.
2. Verify that all four (4) fittings are secure.
3. Close fluidics access door.

Verification
R1.08 PUMP,ARM Version - 96728-111_235_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78190-01 Pump, ARM
R1.08 PUMP,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Dual
Head Pump
1. Loosen the captive screw and open the
PS/BD access door.
2. Remove the four (4) screw-on fittings from
pump heads.
3. Disconnect the drive cable from pump.
4. Disconnect the sensor cable from PCX25
PCB J2 and J6.
pump bracket to chassis.
Replacement
Install Dual Head Pump

1. Position and secure pump to chassis with four (4) screws.
2. Connect drive cable to pump.
3. Connect sensor cable to PCX25 PCB J2 and J6.
4. Connect four (4) tubings to pump heads.
5. Close PS/BD access door and secure.

Verification
R1.09 SENSOR,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM Version - 96728-111_236_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78180-01 Sensor, Input Pressure, ARM
R1.09 SENSOR,INPUT PRESSURE,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Input
Pressure Sensor
1. Locate input pressure sensor on rear panel.
2. Unscrew and disconnect the tubing from the
pressure sensor.
3. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from
pressure sensor terminals marked NO and C.
4. Remove the two (2) screws that secure
pressure sensor.
Replacement
Install Input Pressure Sensor

1. Secure pressure sensor to rear panel with two (2) screws.
2. Connect two (2) black wires to input pressure sensors terminals marked NO and C.
3. Connect tubing to lower sensor port.

Verification
R1.11 KEYPAD,ARM Version - 96728-111_237_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78181-01 Keypad, ARM
R1.11 KEYPAD,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the
module.
3. Disconnect the inlet water tubing from
the module.
Remove
ARCHITECT ARM
Keypad
top cover on left and right sides.
2. Lift off top cover and unplug ribbon
cable.
3. Remove four (4) nuts that secure
keypad to top cover.
keypad to panel.
Replacement
Install ARCHITECT ARM Keypad

1. Secure keypad to panel with four (4) screws.
2. Secure keypad assembly to top cover with four (4) nuts.
3. Connect ribbon cable to keypad.
4. Secure top cover to ARCHITECT ARM with four (4) screws.

Verification
R1.12 PANEL,POWER ENTRY,ARM Version - 96728-111_238_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78188-01 Panel, Power Entry, ARM
R1.12 PANEL,POWER ENTRY,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Not Assessed
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove Power Entry

Panel
1. Loosen the two (2) screws (captive) that secure the PS/BD access door and open the
door.
2. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from the top lugs of the power entry panel.
3. Disconnect the ground wire (green/yellow stripe) from the bottom lug of the power
entry panel.
4. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the power entry panel.
Replacement
Install Power Entry

Panel
1. Install the replacement power entry panel and secure with four (4) screws.
2. Connect the two (2) black wires to the top lugs of the power entry panel.
3. Connect the ground wire (green/yellow stripe) to the bottom lug of the power entry
panel.
4. Close the PS/BD access door and secure with two (2) screws (captive).

1. Connect the inlet water tubing from the processing module.
Verification
R1.15 CASTERS,ARM Version - 96728-111_239_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78170-01 Casters, ARM
R1.15 CASTERS,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove
Wheel
1. Loosen captive screw and open PS/BD access
door.
2. Remove the four (4) bolts and nuts that secure
wheel.
Replacement
Install Wheel
1. Align wheel holes to ARCHITECT ARM base holes and secure wheel with four (4) bolts and
nuts.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
R1.17 BLOCK,OUTLET CELL,ARM Version - 96728-111_240_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78184-01 Block, Outlet Cell, ARM
R1.17 BLOCK,OUTLET CELL,ARM
Not Assessed
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Outlet Cell
Block
access door.
2. At the pump assembly, locate the three (3) tubings
from the output cell block and remove the tube
clamps on the pump heads end.
3. Remove the two tubings from both fittings.
4. Remove tubing clamp that secures tubing from
inlet cell block to output cell block fitting.
5. Remove tubing from fitting.
6. Disconnect the two (2) black wires from outlet cell
pressure sensor terminals marked C and NC.
7. Unscrew and remove outlet cell from outlet cell
block.
8.
Remove the two (2) screws that secure outlet cell
block to right panel.
9. Remove outlet cell block.
Replacement
Install Outlet Cell

Block
1. Secure Outlet Cell block to right side panel with two (2) screws.
2. Insert and screw on outlet cell.
3. Connect two (2) black wire, each to Outlet Cell Pressure sensor terminals marked C and
NC.
4. Connect tubing from Output Cell block to inlet cell block and secure with tubing clamp.
5. Connect three (3) tubings from Outlet Cell block to Dual Head pump heads. and secure with
tubing clamps.
Prepare for
Operation
Verification
R1.18 FUSE,250V/2A,PACK,ARM Version - 96728-111_241_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78177-01 Fuse, 250V/2A, ARM
R1.18 FUSE,250V/2A,PACK,ARM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials Small flat blade screwdriver
Removal
Preparation
Remove
Fuse(s)
1. Locate fuse holder at upper end of power input
panel.
Note
The cutout in the access door is designed to
provide access to the fuse holder without
opening the door.
2. With a small flat screw driver, lift the fuse holder

release tab.
Note
The fuse holder should pop out.
3. Remove fuse holder.

4. Remove fuse(s).
Replacement
Install Fuse(s)
1. Insert fuse(s) into the holder.
2. Insert fuse holder into its slot on input power panel.
3. Push the fuse holder until it snaps into place.
Verification
R1.19 CELL,INLET,ARM Version - 96728-111_242_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78178-01 Cell, Inlet, ARM
R1.19 CELL,INLET,ARM
15 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Inlet
Cell
1. Loosen the captive screw and open lower door.
2. Unscrew the inlet cell from valve block.
3. Unplug the cord from PC1119X1 PCB connector
J19.
4. Remove the cord through the two (2) routing
holes and cord clamp.
Replacement
Install Inlet Cell

1. Screw inlet cell into valve block. Install o-ring, if included.
2. Route cable through two (2) mounting holes and cable clamp.
3. Plug cable into PC1119X1 PCB connector J19.
4. Close lower door and secure.

Verification
R1.20 DOOR,SERVICE,ARM Version - 96728-111_244_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78193-01 Door, Service, ARM
R1.20 DOOR,SERVICE,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the
module.
module.
Remove Fluidics
Access Door
1. Remove the six (6) screws that secure the
door to the cabinet.
2. Remove the fluidics access door.
Replacement
Install Fluidics Access Door

1. Align hinge to holes in cabinet and secure with the six (6) screws.


errors.
R1.21 DOOR,ELECTRONICS BAY,ARM Version - 96728-111_245_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78173-01 Door, Electronics Bay, ARM
R1.21 DOOR,ELECTRONICS BAY,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Lower
Door
access door.
2. Remove the four (4) screws and nuts that
secure door to hinge.
3. Remove the four (4) screws that secure board
panel to lower door.
Replacement
Install Lower Door

1. Align door to hinge holes and secure door to hinge with four (4) screws and nuts.
2. Align board panel mounting holes to stand-off on lower door and secure with four (4)
screws.
Prepare for
Operation

errors.
R1.22 COVER,TOP,ARM Version - 96728-111_246_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78195-01 Cover, Top, ARM
R1.22 COVER,TOP,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
module.
Remove Top
Cover
1. Remove the four (4) screws from left and right
sides of cover.
2. Lift cover and disconnect the ribbon cable from
the keypad.
3. Locate and disconnect the cable from PC1119X1
PCB connector J13.
4. Remove cable through two (2) routing holes.
Replacement
Install Top Cover

1. Route cable through two (2) mounting holes to PC1119X1 PCB
2. Plug cable into PC1119X1 PCB connector J13.
3. Plug ribbon cable into the keypad.
4. Position cover on ARCHITECT ARM top and align mounting holes.
5. Secure cover on left and right sides.


errors.
R1.25 POWER CORD,ARM Version - 96728-111_247_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78186-01 Power Cord, US, ARM
7-78187-01 Power Cord, Europe, ARM
R1.25 POWER CORD,ARM
10 min
Time Required
Removal
Remove Power
Cord
2. Unplug the AC power cord from the power
source.
3. Unplug the AC power cord from the module
power supply entry panel.
Replacement
Install Power Cord

1. Plug replacement power cord to module power entry panel.
2. Plug replacement power cord to power source.
Verification
R1.27 CABLE,RS232,KIT,ARM Version - 96728-111_248_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78191-01 Kit, Cable, RS232, ARM
R1.27 CABLE,RS232,KIT,ARM
10 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Remove
RS232
Cable
2. Loosen the two (2) screws that secure the RS232
cable to the rear panel.
3. Disconnect the RS232 cable from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
4. If the ARCHITECT ARM is connected to the SCC
by serial cable, disconnect the RS232 cable from
the SCC.
Replacement
Install RS232
Cable
1. If the ARCHITECT ARM is connected to the SCC by serial cable, connect the RS232 cable to
the SCC.
2. Connect the RS232 cable to the ARCHITECT ARM and secure the two (2) screws.
Verification
R1.28 KIT,TUBING,ARM Version - 96728-111_249_1
List/Part Numbers
7-92484-02 Tubing, ARM to Instrument
R1.28 KIT,TUBING,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Remove ARCHITECT ARM
Tubing
1. Power OFF the
ARCHITECT ARM.
2. Disconnect the inlet water
tubing.
Replacement
Install ARCHITECT ARM Tubing

1. Connect the inlet water tubing.
Verification
R1.29 FUSE,250V/1A,PACK,ARM Version - 96728-111_250_1
List/Part Numbers
7-78214-01 Fuse, 250V/1A, ARM
R1.29 FUSE,250V/1A,PACK,ARM
5 min
Time Required
Tools/Materials
Removal
Preparation
Remove Fuse
1. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder.
Replacement
Install Fuse
1. Install the fuse in the fuse holder.

Verification
CLI Commands
Command Locator
Group Command
HOME V1 V2
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Motor Commands OMS V1 V2
VACUUM V1
Temperature Commands TCB V1
DIO Commands DIO V1 V2
Solenoid Commands SOL V1 V2 Value
ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
FLUSH_WASHER 1
GET_LLS_DATA 0
LLS V1 V2 value
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands
PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
PROBE_RAISE V1
TRIGGER1_DISPENSE V1
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
CMIA_READ V1
OPTICS V1
Optics Commands
READ V1 V2
DISPERSION V1
Reagent Carousel Commands REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
PROC_PATH V1
Process Path Commands
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
BOOT_DIAGS
CLEAR_LOG V1
Software Commands
GET_LOG V1 V2
Introduction
This document contains general commands for use with the ARCHITECT system. Use these commands when diagnosing
hardware issues. Maintenance and diagnostic procedures use a series of these commands (in a short program) and are the
preferred method of diagnostics. There are cases, however, when using individual CLI commands is necessary.
Commands are classified as either high level or low level commands. Low level commands are singular commands that go directly
to software drivers and hardware controllers. High level commands are implemented in software by using one or more low level
commands. Caution must be used when mixing low level commands in a sequence with high level commands, because the high
level commands may produce unexpected side-effects on low level software drivers and hardware controllers. Also, modules must
be reinitialized after using CLI commands.
CLI commands can be entered in several areas. Commands can be entered using maintenance and diagnostic procedure 6200
which produces an interactive window for the user to enter the commands and produces responses with the appropriate
commands. Commands may also be entered into the SCC Hyperterminal windows or, for some low level commands only, in the
individual module Hyperterminal (IALV) window when debug cables are installed.
Command Format
The basic command format is:
COMMAND V# V# V#
where "COMMAND" is a specific function to be performed and each "V#" is a variable that specifies the parameter required to
perform the function. Commands are not case sensitive.
Example Description
1>HOME The set module is 1 or processing module, the command is HOME, the first value 1 designates motor 1 (reagent
10 carousel), and the second value 0, designates the step number that is set as home.
1>SOL 0 The set module is 1 or processing module; the command is SOL, which directs the command to a solenoid,
SET 1 specifically solenoid 0, which is the syringe valve. The value SET 1 turns the valve on, SET 0 would turn it off.
Prerequisite Commands
Prerequisite commands are entered to direct the next command at a specific part of the instrument. At power on, default values are
established for these values. However, when issuing commands from CLI, the state of the system should not be assumed.
Example Description
SET_MODULE V1 V1 =
0 = RSH
1 = processing module
SET_PROTOCOL V1 V1 =
PRE_REAGENT1
PRE_REAGENT2
PRE_SAMPLE1
PRE_SAMPLE2
REAGENT1
REAGENT2
REAGENT3
SAMPLE
SET_TEST_TYPE V1 V1 =
ROUTINE_TYPE = default
STAT_TYPE
Motor Commands
HOME V1 V2
Purpose This low level command initializes the position of the specified motor by homing it and establishing the specified
step number as the home step number.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - V1 Motors)

SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - V1 Motors)
V1= motor number, See V1 Motors.
V2= step number.
Example Description
1>HOME 0 0 Homes the process path motor and 0 is the home step
V1 Motors
Motor # Description Motor # Description
0 Process Path Motor 8 Carrier Transport X Motor
1 Reagent Carousel Motor 9 Carrier Transport Theta Motor
2 Reagent Access Door Motor 10 Carrier Transport Z Motor
3 RV Loader Motor 11 Wash Zone Motor
4 Pipettor-Theta Axis Motor 12 Pre-Trigger Pump Motor
5 Pipettor- Z Axis Motor 13 Trigger Pump Motor
6 Pipettor Syringe Motor 14 Reagent Bottle Rotator Motor
7 Buffer Pump Motor 15 Wash Zone Pump Motor
MOD_COMP_INIT V1
Purpose This high level command allows you to initialize the specified component by homing all its associated motors,
initializing the state of the valves, etc. This command places the component in a known state so it is ready to
accept all other high level commands. This command is only used by a processing module.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1
V1 = Component. See V1, Components
Example Description
1>MOD_COMP_INIT ITV1 Initializes vortexer #1
1>MOD_COMP_INIT PROCESS_PATH Initializes the process path
V1, Components
Example Description
CMIA_READER CMIA reader
ITV1 In-Track Vortexer #1
ITV2 In-Track Vortexer #2
PROCESS_PATH Process Path Carousel
RGNT_CAROUSEL Reagent Carousel
RV_LOADER RV Loader
RV_UNLOADER RV Unloader
PIPETTER_FLUIDICS Pipettor Fluidics (syr & pmp)
PIPETTER_THETA Pipettor Theta Axis
PIPETTER_Z Pipettor Z Axis
SHUTTER CMIA Shutter Mechanism
SYSTEM_VACUUM System vacuum
TRIGGER1 Pre-trigger Dispenser
TRIGGER2 Trigger Dispenser
WASH_ZONE Wash Zone Fluidics
WASH_ZONE_ASP Wash Zone Aspirate Mechanism
WASH_ZONE_SWITCH1 Wash Zone Bypass Switch 1
WASH_ZONE_SWITCH2 Wash Zone Bypass Switch 2
OMS V1 V2
Purpose Low level Oregon Micro System (OMS) commands are used to move a motor or obtain data from it.
Prerequisite SET_MODULE 1 (for processing module motors - V1 Motors)

SET_MODULE 0 (for sample handler motors - V2 OMS Commands)
V1= motor number. See V1 Motors.
V2 = any single OMS command. See V2 OMS Commands.

Example Description
1>OMS 5 MR4000 moves the Pipettor z motor 4000 steps down
1>OMS 0 JG2000 runs the process path at a steady velocity
0>OMS 0 ST stops the process path motor
V2 OMS Commands
Commands Description Example
JG velocity Move motor at velocity (steps/sec) forward or backward indefinitely. Range 0>OMS 0 JG4000
is between 0 and 128000. Runs the process path motor 4000
steps/minute.
MA step Move to absolute step number. 1>OMS 0 MA3000

number Moves the process path 3000 steps.
MR number Move number of steps from current position (can be plus or minus) 1>OMS 0 MR536
steps Moves the process path one RV
position.
RE Return current encoder position (Motors 0,1,2,and 3 only). 1>OMS 1 RE

Returns position of Reagent
Carousel.
RP Return the current absolute position. 1>OMS 5 RP

Reports the pipettor z motor
position.
ST Stop motor using deceleration values set in mot.dat file 1>OMS 5 ST

Stops the pipettor z motor.
VACUUM V1
Purpose This high level command turns the vacuum pump on or off.
V1 = Command, ON or OFF.
Example Description
1>VACUUM ON Turns the vacuum pump on
Temperature Commands
TCB V1
Purpose This low level command allows for low level control over the functions on the Temperature Controller Board.
V1 = Command, See V1 Commands.
Example Description
1>TCB READ 21 Reads channel 21, Wash Zone Buffer Heater in degrees C. Returns 37000 = 37.0 C.
1>TCB CHAN_STATUS 5 Shows status of Process Path Heater Zone 2.
1>TCB CHAN_CTRL 21 1 Turns on Wash Zone Buffer Heater.
V1 Commands
Example Description Command Output
CHAN_CTRL Enable or Disable the control and None

channel value alarms for a specified channel. See
Temperature Channel Descriptions
for channel descriptions.
value = 1 (Enable)
value = 0 (Disable)
CHAN_STATUS Returns channel status information. Returns thirteen columns with information about a given channel. The
channel See Temperature Channel information appears on a single line (32 lines when all channels are
Descriptions for channel specified), with each column separated by a space. See
descriptions. CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions for column descriptions.
READ channel Read temperature on specified Integer temperature(s) in thousands of a degree (6 chars per value, 4
channel. See Temperature Channel values per line when all channels are read, each separated by a space,
Descriptions for channel e.g. 37.000 C = 37000).
descriptions.
Temperature Channel Descriptions

Channel # Temperature Channel Descriptions
4 Process Path Zone 1
6 Wash Zone 1, Position 1- WAM
7 Reagent Cooler Temperature
10 Wash zone 1, Position 2 - WAM
14 Wash Zone 1, Position 3- WAM
16 Pre-Trigger/Trigger Heater
17 Reagent Cover Heater
21 Wash Zone, Buffer Heater
28 Ambient Temperature
32 All Channels
CHAN_STATUS Column Descriptions

Column # Description Reference
1 channel number 0-31
2 channel type 0=reference,1=monitor, 2=control, 3=WAM
3 on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
4 temperature Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
5 high alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
6 low alarm limit Integer temperature, in thousands of a degree
7 alarm on/off state 0=channel off, 1=channel on
8 alarm pending 0=no alarm pending, 1=alarm pending
9 alarm count number of samples which had alarm conditions
10 set point the PID temperature set point
11 heater ticks the current heater tick count (0-960)
12 heater on ticks output of PID determines how many ticks the heater needs to be on (0-960)
13 heater period ticks the number of ticks in the heater update period (960)
DIO Commands
DIO V1 V2
Purpose This is a low level I/O command to read, set, or clear I/O bits on the CPU and optics board. Note that the
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses. If the SET_MODULE is set to
the sample handler, bits 48-95 are not accessible and an error results. Processing module bits are in V1, DIO Bit
Identifiers, 0-23 are read only, 24-47 are read/write, 48-94 are read only.
V1 = bit. See V1, DIO Bit Identifiers.
V2 = command. See V2, Commands
Example Description
0>DIO 25 SET 1 Vacuum pump turns on.
0>DIO 39 READ Reads condition of Reagent Cooler Power.
V2, Commands
Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the specified bit.
Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set specified bit to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
V1, DIO Bit Identifiers

Bit Active
Input/Output Description If Active Notes
# Logic
0 Input AC failed 0 No AC input
1 Input Over Voltage 0 AC input too high
2 Input Under Voltage 0 AC input too low
3 Input Over Temperature 0 Power Supply hot
8 Input Wash Zone Inlet Diverter OFF Sense 1 Solenoid de-energized
9 Input Wash Zone Outlet Diverter OFF Sense 1 Solenoid de-energized
10 Input Unload Diverter OFF Sense 1 Solenoid de-energized
11 Input Waste Pump Pressure Switch 1 Pressure too high / sensor disconnected
16 Input Motor Driver Overtemperature 1 Driver Bd in cardcage too hot
17 Input Power Board Fault 1 Fault condition on power board
18 Input Backplane +12V Fuse 0 Fuse Blown
19 Input Backplane -12V Fuse 1 Fuse Blown
24 Output Power Supply All OFF 0 Power OFF
25 Output Vacuum Pump on/off 1 Vacuum pump ON
26 Output RSH Reset 1 Reset RSH distribution board
27 Output Heaters ON / OFF 0 Heater Power Off
37 Output Power Supply Maintenance Mode 1 Turn OFF +36 V output
38 Output Transfer Pump On / Off 1 Transfer pump on
39 Output Coolers On / Off 0 Reagent Cooler power off
46 Output Reagent Carousel Cover Powerless 1 Access condition is cleared

Monitor Sensor Access Clear
47 Output Waste Pump On / Off 1 Waste pump on
57 Input Unload Diverter ON Sensor 1 Solenoid energized

58 Input Washzone Inlet Diverter ON Sensor 1 Solenoid energized
59 Input Washzone Outlet Diverter ON Sensor 1 Solenoid energized
60 Input Trigger Pump Home Sensor 1 Pump is home
61 Input Pre-Trigger Pump Home Sensor 1 Pump is home
62 Input Reagent Bottle Rotator Home Sensor 1 Rotator at home
63 Input Buffer Pump Home Sensor 1 Pump is home
64 Input Washzone Pump Home Sensor 1 Pump is home
65 Input Shutter Open Sensor 1 Shutter is open
66 Input Shutter Closed Sensor 1 Shutter is closed
67 Input RV Picked Sensor 0 RV present at drop point
68 Input Lower Hopper Level Sensor 0 RV Lower Hopper level low
69 Input RV Present Sensor 0 RV present in process path
70 Input Reagent Access Door Open Sensor 0 Reagent access door open
71 Input Reagent Carrier Detect Sensor 1 Reagent carrier present
72 Input Reagent Carousel Cover Interlock 1 Access Cover is open
73 Input Solid Waste Container Present Sensor 1 Waste container not present or sensor
disconnected
75 Input Liquid Waste Container Sensor 1 Liquid Waste is full or sensor disconnected
77 Input RV Unloader Sensor 0 RV eject plug is installed
79 Input Carrier Transport Arm Sensor 0 Carrier present in Carrier Transport Arm
80 Input Reagent Carrier Latch Sensor 0 Reagent carrier free to be picked
81 Input Buffer Transfer Air Detect Sensor 0 Fluid is in the transfer line
84 Input Vacuum Pressure Low Sensor 0 Vacuum pressure sufficient or sensor

disconnected
88 Input Buffer Full Sensor 0 Buffer level is full or sensor disconnected
89 Input Buffer Low Sensor 0 Buffer level is low or sensor disconnected
90 Input Buffer Empty Sensor 0 Buffer level is empty or sensor disconnected
91 Input Trigger Level Sensor 0 Trigger level is low or sensor disconnected
92 Input Pre-trigger Level Sensor 0 Pre-trigger level is low or sensor

disconnected
93 Input Top Cover Sensor (used by Assay 1 Top Cover is closed

Module software)
94 Input Reagent Carousel Cover Powerless 1 Reagent Carousel Cover remained closed
Monitor Sensor during power off
95 Input Top Cover Sensor (used by RSH 1 Top Cover is closed

Module software)
Solenoid Commands
SOL V1 V2 Value
Purpose This is a low level command that can actuate, retract, or read the control state of a solenoid on the processing
module. This command supplies access to the solenoid control on the Solenoid/DC Driver Board. The
SET_MODULE command indicates the module that the CLI command accesses.
V1 = solenoid. See V1, Solenoid Identifiers.
V2 = command. See V2 Commands.
Example Description
1>SOL 1 SET 1 Actuates solenoid 1, Washzone pump valve.
V2 Commands
Commands Description
READ Return the current value of the solenoid.

Returns:
0 = off
1 = on
SET value Set solenoid to value.

Value:
0 = off
1 = on
V1, Solenoid Identifiers

Solenoid # Description Active Logic If Active Notes
0 Pipettor Syringe Valve 1 Opens valve
9 Wash Zone, Dispense Valve #1 1 Opens valve
12 Wash Zone, Bypass Valve 1 Opens valve
17 Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
18 Trigger Bypass Valve 1 Opens valve
19 Pre-Trigger Dispense Valve 1 Opens valve
20 Pre-Trigger Bypass Valve 1 Opens valve
29 RV Hopper Door Solenoid 1 Opens door

30 Wash Zone Aspirate Valve 1 Apply vacuum
32 Washzone Outlet Diverter Solenoid 1 Diverts RV to inner lane
33 Shutter Solenoid 1 Closes shutter
34 Unload Diverter Solenoid 1 Diverts RV to waste
35 Reagent Cooler Condensate Valve 1 Drain Reagent Cooler Condensate
36 Washzone Inlet Diverter Solenoid 1 Diverts RV to outer lane
38 Washcup Upper Valve 1 Apply vacuum
39 Washcup Outer Drain Valve 1 Allow washcup to drain
40 Washcup Inner Drain Valve 1 Allow washcup to drain
41 Buffer Inlet Valve 1 Allow buffer to be transferred
42 Vacuum Filter Valve 1 Allow filter to be dried
43 Accumulator Drain Valve 1 Drain liquid waste
Fluidics/Pipettors/Wash Zones/LLS Commands
ASPIRATE V1 V2 V3 V4
Purpose This high level command is used to aspirate the specified volume of liquid from the specified well.
Prerequisite SET MODULE 1

SET_TEST_TYPE type type = either ROUTINE_TYPE or STAT_TYPE
SET_PROTOCOL protocol
V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL).
V2 = Name of Well. See V2, Well Designations.
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off).
V4 = Depth of probe in liquid while aspirating (z steps).
Protocol Types
Protocol Description
PRE_REAGENT1 Pretreatment Reagent pipetting protocol #1
PRE_REAGENT2 Pretreatment Reagent pipetting protocol #2
PRE_SAMPLE1 Pretreatment Sample Pipetting protocol #1 (return pretreat sample to the process path position 1)
PRE_SAMPLE2 Pretreatment Sample Pipetting protocol #2 (return pretreat sample to the process path position 1 a second
time)
REAGENT1 Reagent #1 pipetting protocol

SAMPLE Sample pipetting protocol
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Get 50 uL from the sample cup with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
1>SET_TEST_TYPE Get 50 uL from the sample cup at the STAT pipettor with no wick-off and go 53 steps into the liquid.
STAT_TYPE (Valid only for i1000SR).
1>SET_PROTOCOL
SAMPLE
1>ASPIRATE 50 SAMPLE
0 53
Note
The Well Names (V2, Well Designations) can have different meanings based on the current protocol setting.
V2, Well Designations

Well Name Description
RV Reaction Vessel into which the sample and primary assay reagents are dispensed.
WASH_CUP Location where probe washing is executed.
WASTE_CUP Location at which probe liquid waste is dispensed.
REAGENT_1 The outer reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where the Specimen Diluent Bottle primary
assay reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_2 The inner reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where the microparticle primary assay
reagent has been positioned.
REAGENT_3 The middle reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where the conjugate primary assay
REAGENT_4 The outer reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment assay
REAGENT_5 The inner reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment assay
REAGENT_6 The middle reagent bottle location on the reagent carousel where a secondary or pretreatment assay
SAMPLE The location where the Pipettor aspirates sample.
PRETREAT_START Location at which pretreatment reagents and sample are dispensed to initiate a pretreatment step.
PRETREAT_COMPLETE Location at which the pretreatment step has been completed. The pretreated sample is aspirated from
the PRETREAT_COMPLETE location and placed in the RV location to continue normal assay
processing.
PREDILUTE Location into which a multi-RV dilution is initiated,
PREDILUTE_PRETREAT Location into which a pretreatment and predilution are done concurrently.
DISPENSE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
Purpose This high level command dispenses the specified volume (uL) into the specified well.

V1 = Volume (uL) of liquid to be aspirated (10 - 1200uL).
V3 = Number of steps to raise the probe before performing a wick-off (0 = no wick-off).
V4 = Number of steps from the bottom of the specified well to start dispense ( 0).
V5 = Number of steps to raise the boom while performing dispense (0 = do not move).
Example Description
1>SET_PROTOCOL Put 50uL of liquid from the pipettor in a RV in processing position 1, 0 wick-off, 400 steps above
SAMPLE bottom, no z travel.
1>DISPENSE 50 RV 0
400 0
FLUSH_PIPETTER V1
Note
Pipetter is not the Abbott standard spelling, but it is the CLI command.
Purpose This is a high level command that is used to flush a default volume (uL) of buffer through the pipettor, repeatedly
cycling the syringe during the buffer flush. Part of this command moves the pipettor to the waste cup. Probe crash
may occur if module is not in Ready state.
VACUUM ON
V1 = Pipettor (i1000SR pipettor = 1)
Example Description
1>FLUSH_PIPETTER 1 Flush i1000SR Pipettor
FLUSH_TRIGGER1
Purpose This high level command dispenses to waste the amount of pre-trigger specified by a system file which defines a
default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER1 Flushes pre-trigger
FLUSH_TRIGGER2
Purpose This high level command dispenses to waste the amount of trigger specified by a system file which defines a
default flush.
Example Description
1>FLUSH_TRIGGER2 Flushes trigger
FLUSH_WASHER 1
Purpose This high level command dispenses to waste the amount of buffer specified by a system file which defines a
default flush.
1 = i1000SR wash zone
Example Description
1>FLUSH_WASHER 1 Flushes i1000SR wash zone
GET_LLS_DATA 0
Purpose This low level command retrieves the Liquid Level Sense (LLS) data log from the LLS monitoring hardware. The
command is executed after issuing a LLS ENABLE command. A string of data is output. The values are useful in
troubleshooting LLS errors.
The output consists of 32 values separated by a space. The first line of values of the output are: Minimum,
Average, Maximum, (Maximum-Minimum), (Maximum-Average), (Average-Minimum), Mode, Noise Reading, ADA
Count, and FNF count. The Mode value should be a value 0 through 15. The noise reading is calculated by the
FPGA. For good performance, the noise level value is expected to be less than 1/3 of the threshold value. The
ADA count is the Air During Aspiration count, the value of which increments if the LLS is enabled and the probe
loses contact with the fluid before the LLS is disabled. The FNF count 10 is the Fluid Not Found counter, the
value of which increments if the LLS is enabled and then disabled before the LLS detects fluid.
Values 13-31 of the output are data points collected by the 12 bit A/D converter. A value of 2000 to 4095 is output
if the probe is in liquid or near an LLS antenna. The last data value output is one of two special end of data
markers: 65535 = normal end of data, 65534 = overflow of 8K data buffer.
0 = i1000SR Pipettor
Example Description
Sequence: Output:
LLS 0 ENABLE 00300 00330 00400 00100 00070 00030 00000 00000 00000 00000
LLS 0 DISABLE 00333 00333 00335 00335 00333 00333 00336 00331 00332 00334
GET_LLS_DATA 0 00333 00327 00323 00327 00325 00328 00334 00337 00337 0334
00336 65534
LLS V1 V2 value
Purpose This is a low level Liquid Level Sense board command set.
V1 = Pipettor board to address. For i1000SR this is always 0. See V1 Pipettor Board Mechanism Identification
V2 = any level sense command from V2, Level Sense Command
Example Description
1>LLS 0 ENABLE Enables LLS mode on sample Pipettor
1>LLS 0 CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register on the Pipettor
V1 Pipettor Board Mechanism

Identification
Pipettor Board # Description
0 I1000SR Pipettor
V2, Level Sense Command

Command Description
ENABLE Enable level sense mode
DISABLE Disable current mode
STATUS Retrieve contents of LLS Status/Events register
CLR_STATUS Clears the LLS/Event register
LLS_LIMIT Enable or disable Z-axis limits interrupt generation to indexer board upon level sense. value: 0 = disable, 1 =
value enable
Z_LIMIT value Enable or disable Z-axis limit sensor detection and interrupt generation to indexer board upon probe crash.
value: 0 = off, 1 = on
PROBE_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This high level command moves the probe arm to align the probe over the specified well at the specified offset
from the calibrated well location. The theta axis may be offset from this fixed position by use of the offset
parameter. The Pipettor movement is indirectly specified by use of the SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL
commands. This command first moves the probe to the Z-CLEAR position, then moves in theta axis to the well.
The probe is left at the Z-CLEAR position above the target well.

Refer to list of protocol types at beginning of Fluidics section
V2 = Offset is the number of steps to offset the Theta Boom Arm from the center of the well. 0 = no offset.
Example Description
1>SET_TEST_TYPE ROUTINE_TYPE Moves the probe 10 steps from its wash cup.
1>SET_PROTOCOL SAMPLE
1>PROB_MOVE WASH_CUP
PROBE_RAISE V1
Purpose This high level command positions the Z-axis of the pipettor boom at the height specified by the height parameter.
This command does not change theta axis of the boom. The probe movement is indirectly specified by use of the
SET_MODULE and SET_PROTOCOL commands.

Refer to list of protocol types at beginning of Fluidics section
V1 = Height. See V1 Height
Example Description
1>PROBE_RAISE Z_ABOVE_WASH Puts probe above the wash cup.
V1 Height
Height Description
Z_ABOVE_RV Probe at the top of the RV

Z_ABOVE_WASH Probe at the top if the wash cup and reagent bottles.
Z_CLEAR Probe clears everything in process area.
Purpose This high level command dispenses the amount of pre-trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the
RV in the current process path carousel location.
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER1_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of pre-trigger into a RV.
Purpose This command dispenses the amount to trigger solution specified by the volume parameter into the RV in the
current process path carousel location.
V1 = volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL)
Example Description
1>TRIGGER2_DISPENSE 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger into a RV.
WASHER_ASPIRATE V1
Purpose This high level command aspirates the fluid out of the RVs in the process path that are currently aligned with the
wash zone. Due to the nature of the mechanism, the aspirate is exercised across all positions with aspirate
probes in the wash zone. This command includes the steps to lower the probes, turn on the vacuum, and raise
the probes.
VACUUM ON
V1 = 1 for i1000SR Wash Zone
Example Description
1>WASHER_ASPIRATE 1 Aspirates fluid present in RVs under i1000SR Wash Zone

WASHER_DISPENSE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This high level command dispenses a volume of fluid into the RV in the process path that is currently aligned with
the specified wash zone dispense nozzle.
V2 = Station, identifies a specific dispense position on a wash station (1, 2, or 3).
V3 = Volume to dispense in uL (must be an integer multiple of 100uL).
Example Description
1>WASHER_DISPENSE 1 3 500 Dispenses 500uL of fluid from probe 3 on i1000SR Wash Zone
WASHER_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This high level command moves the washer probe assembly to the specified position.
V2 = Position, specifies the calibrated washer position to move to. See V2 Position.
Example Description
1>WASHER_MOVE 1 START Moves i1000SR wash zone probes to the aspiration start level.
V2 Position
Position Description
BOTTOM Wash probes at aspiration stop level (RV bottom).
PARK Wash probes above RV.
START Wash probes at aspiration start level.
Optics Commands
CMIA_READ V1
Purpose This high level command performs a complete CMIA assay read. This command includes moving the shutter,
turning on the PMT, background read, Trigger dispense, signal read, and turning off the PMT. The Trigger
dispense volume may be set to 0 to inhibit the Trigger dispense during read.
V1 = Volume of Trigger dispensed in uL (must be in increments of 100 uL and 0).
Example Description
1>CMIA_READ 500 Dispenses 500 uL of trigger and reads signal.
1>CMIA_READ 0 Dispenses no trigger and reads signal.
OPTICS V1
Purpose This low level command allows for low level control over the functions on the CMIA optics reader board.
V1 = Command. See V1 Commands.
Example Description
1>OPTICS PMT 1 Turns on high voltage to optics for optics read.
V1 Commands
Command Description
PMT value Turn the PMT high voltage on/off. value: 0 = off, 1 = on
START Start a read sequence. Clears the read counter and the latch. This command should be issued first to start a read
sequence.
STATUS Retrieve board status:

Returns the following:
PMT high voltage status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.

Mode status where, I = ISA clock mode, N = normal mode, F = Factory test mode.
Blue LED value, with range of -32768 to +32767
Pass LED status, where 0 is off, 1 is on.
READ V1 V2
Purpose This low level command executes an optics read by taking the specified number of subreads at the specified read
interval. Then the command returns the subread count values at the conclusion of execution. Prior to executing
this command, separate commands should be issued to close the shutter and turn on the PMT high voltage.
V1 = Interval, time interval between subreads (integer number of msec) (50-3000).
V2 = Numreads, number of subreads to take (1-200).
Example Description
1>READ 100 Reads 5 subreads at every 100 msec. Returns 8 characters/ value, each separated by a single space. For
5 example:
01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567
Reagent Carousel Commands
DISPERSION V1
Purpose This high level command can activate or deactivate the dispersion of micro-particles on the reagent carousel.
Once dispersion is activated, it continues indefinitely until deactivated.
V1 = Command, ON = activate, OFF = deactivate.
Example Description
1>DISPERSION ON Activates dispersion ring on reagent carousel.
REAGENT_RING_MOVE V1 V2 V3
Purpose This high level command allows movement of a specified reagent carousel ring to a specified location, at a
specified station.
V1 = Reagent ring ID, 1 for i1000SR reagent carousel.
V2 = Locnum, Carousel location number (0 = deadwedge, or 1-25).
V3 = Station, See V3 Station.
Example Description
1>REAGENT_RING_MOVE 1 7 LOAD Moves the i1000SR reagent carousel position 7 to the reagent carrier load position.
V3 Station
Station Description
PIPE1 Pipetting station.
LOAD Reagent Carrier load position at reagent access door.
Process Path Commands
PROC_PATH V1
Purpose This high level command moves the process path carousel V1 positions relative to its current position in the
counter clockwise direction.
V1 = The number of carousel locations to move (1-23).
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH 6 Moves the process path 6 positions counter clockwise.
PROC_PATH_MOVE V1 V2
Purpose This high level command moves the process carousel location specified by V1 to the location specified by V2. The
process path only moves in the counter clockwise direction.
V1 = Carousel location number (1-23).
V2 = Station. See V2 Station.
Example Description
1>PROC_PATH_MOVE 4 ACCESS Moves the #4 position counter clockwise to the access door.
V2 Station
Station Description
i1000SR
ACCESS Access port to processing lane 1
CMIA CMIA optical read and trigger addition station 6
ITV1 Vortexing station 3
ITV2 Vortexing station 2

PRETREAT Pre-Treated Sample pipetting station 2
REAGENT1 Reagent 1 pipetting station 2
RV_PASSIVE_UNLOAD Passive RV Unload Position 11
RV_UNLOAD RV unload position 11
RV_XFER Point where RVs are loaded from the RV Loader onto the inner process path 17
SAMPLE Sample Dispense Station 1
STAT_SAMPLE STAT Sample Dispense Station 1
WASH_1 Wash Station Position 1 18
WASH_BP1 Wash Station Bypass 1 15
WASH_BP2 Wash Station Bypass 2 22
Software Commands
BOOT_DIAGS
Purpose This command is used to execute a sequence of boot diagnostics and initializations on the following
subassemblies:
CPU Board
Motor Indexer Boards
Solenoid / DC Motor Driver Board
Optics / Digital I/O Board
LLS /PM Boards
Barcode Reader
Sensor Interface Board
Each subassembly on the associated module is tested and reinitialized. The results of each test are reported in
the command output, as PASS or FAIL. Note that this command may require up to one minute to complete its
execution. Also note that this command leaves all subassemblies in their bootup initialization state. All tested
subassemblies may require further initialization prior to use.
Example Description
1>BOOT_DIAGS After about one minute, a list of subassemblies, with a PASS or FAIL associated with it, is printed.
CLEAR_LOG V1
Purpose This command clears all entries from the specified log.
V1 = Log. See V1 Log.
Example Description
1>CLEAR_LOG LLS Clears all entries from the LLS log.
V1 Log
Log Description
ASSAY Assay activity log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
CAL Assay calibration log. One assay calibration log is maintained for the entire system. All assay calibrations for all
modules are contained in one log.
HISTORY Permanent message history log. One message history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how
many modules are configured.
LLS Liquid Level Sense log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
MAINT Maintenance History log. One maintenance history log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many
modules are configured.
OPTICS Logs the optics read for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
QC QC log. One QC log is maintained for the entire system, independent of how many modules are configured.
PM Pressure Monitoring log for a processing module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
POST Power On Self Test log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
REAGENT Reagent log to record all the significant events associated with reagent handling.
RESULT Result log. One result log is maintained for the entire system. All test patient, control, and calibrator test results for
all modules are contained in one log.
SAMPLE Sample log to record all the significant events associated with sample management.
SCRIPT Contains detailed information from performance of M&D procedures. Information includes some screen text and all
CLI commands and responses to CLI commands within M&D procedures.
TEMP Temporary Message log. Logs the most recent events that have been generated.
TRACE Trace log for a module. The module is selected by the SET_MODULE command.
WAM Wash Aspirate Mechanism log. One WAM log is maintained for each module.
GET_LOG V1 V2
Purpose This command extracts the data from the specified log into a text file. The log is placed in the file specified by the
file parameter.
V1 = Log, See V1 Log.
V2 = File, name of file on the SCC (including path) into which the assay log is to be placed.
Example Description
1>GET_LOG LLS A:\LLS.LOG Copies the LLS log to the floppy disk in drive A:\ to a file called LLS.LOG.
1>GET_LOG HISTORY Copies the HISTORY log to the location LOGS\00001HIS.LOG on the D:\
D:\LOGS\00001HIS.LOG drive.
rights reserved.
P-11 ARCHITECT ARM Installation and Verification
Version - 96756-111_309_3
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
produces results, ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
Purpose This procedure provides instructions for the installation and verification of the Module ARCHITECT
ARCHITECT ARM. ARM
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 1.5 hrs
Required ARCHITECT ARM (LN 8C95-88, -89 or -90)
Preparation 1. Verify the power switch on the ARCHITECT ARM

is in the OFF position.
Connect the 1. Connect the white connector of the 10 ft (3.05 m)

Water Source to polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in shipping box)
ARCHITECT ARM to the deionized water source in the laboratory.
Module 2. Flush the DI water line to a drain for two minutes.
3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the water
inlet port. [3]
Note
Connector [2] is not used during normal
ARCHITECT ARM operation. It is used only
during decontamination.
Waste Tubing 1. Connect the white connector of the other 10 ft

Connections (3.05 m) polyethylene tubing (white tubing - in
shipping box) to the waste 1 (pressurized) drain
port. [4]
2. Connect the right-angled quick disconnect fitting of
the polyvinyl chloride (clear tubing - in shipping
box) tubing to the waste 2 (gravity) port. [5]
3. Connect the waste lines.
If connecting the two waste lines to a floor
drain, continue with Step4.
If connecting the two waste lines to the
waste pump, go to P-12 External Waste
Pump Installation and Verification. Return to
this procedure when completed.
4. Ensure the two waste tubing lines run downhill to
the drain.
If the lab has a floor drain, run both lengths
of waste tubing to the floor drain.
To prevent accidental flooding caused by
tubing movement, it is recommended that
the waste 1 pressurized drain tubing be
fastened to the drain.
Route the waste 2 gravity drain tubing
downward.
Note
The waste 2 drain must be
atmospherically vented.
Caution
Verify waste connections are properly
installed.
5. Perform procedure P-56 ARCHITECT ARM

Decontamination, then continue with installation.
Connect 1. Locate the 20 ft (6.09 m) polyurethane tubing with

ARCHITECT ARM gray disconnects on each end (92484 Tubing,
Buffer Output to ARCHITECT ARM to Instrument).
Processing 2. Connect one end of the tubing to the wash buffer
Module Buffer outlet port [1].
Inlet 3. Connect the other end of the tubing to the buffer
inlet port on the rear of the processing module.
Note
Refer to procedure P10 for use of the ARM
with IA multimodule systems. (i4000,
i4000SR, i6000, i8000)
RS-232 1. Connect the RS-232 serial cable from the
Connection ARCHITECT ARM to the SCC.
i2000 or i2000SR - connect the provided
RS-232 serial cable from the port on the
ACHITECT ARM [6] to:
Edgeport - Port 2 on the serial
expansion
DIGI - connect directly to P5.
i1000SR - use the DB25-DB9 cable
supplied with the i1000SR ARM Adapter Kit.
Connect the cable from the DB25 port on
the ARCHITECT ARM to the DB9 connector
labeled ARM on outside of the SCC
Interface Panel. (If the DB25-DB9 cable is
not long enough, use the long cable
supplied with the ARM, then use the DB25 -
DB9 cable as an adapter.)
Note
Installation instructions for the ARM
Adapter Kit are found in the
Installation section ofthe i1000SR
Service and Support Manual.
Connect Power Note

The ARCHITECT ARM module can be connected
to the same utility service as the ARCHITECT
system, but on a different branch circuit or fuse.
1. Install the appropriate fuse (fuses are taped to

power cords) in the ARCHITECT ARM power entry
module. [1]
2. Install the power cord into the power entry
module. [4]
3. Connect the ARCHITECT ARM module to a
properly grounded electrical outlet using the
appropriate power cord (2 versions - in shipping
box).
Calibrate Level 1. Turn the ARCHITECT ARM power on at the power
Sense entry module.
2. Press the Stop key. [1]
The red indicator beneath the Stop key

illuminates. [2]
3. Connect the buffer pickup assembly sensor cable

to the console. [3]
Note
Allow the assembly to hang freely.
4. Press the Bottle Load key. [4]
The amber indicator beneath the Bottle Load key

flashes. [5]
Load 1. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from

Concentrated the new concentrated wash buffer cubitainer.
Wash Buffer 2. Place the buffer pickup assembly into the
Container cubitainer and tighten the fitting.
Note It may be necessary to disconnect the pickup

assembly cable and tubing connectors [2], [1] to
get into the container. This will not affect sensor
calibration. Reconnect the cable and tubing when
the assembly is in place.
3. On the keypad, press the Bottle Load [5] key. The

following occurs:
The Stop indicator light [6] is no longer
illuminated.
The amber Bottle Load indicator [7]
illuminates briefly while the sensor
automatically recalibrates to full.
The Flush indicator [8] illuminates briefly.
The green Start indicator [9] illuminates
steadily.
Note
The Start indicator [9] flashes green
when buffer is flowing to the wash
buffer reservoir.
Configure System 1. Log in as FSE.

Software 2. Select System and Configuration.
3. With the System Settings radio button selected,
select Reagents - Supplies.
4. Select F6 - Configure.
5. Under IA Supply Options, change Wash Buffer
Transfer from Manual to Automatic.
6. Select Done.
7. Verify on the System Snapshot screen that ARM
displays.
Fill Buffer 1. If buffer transfer does not automatically begin for

Reservoir this first fill, select F2-Update Supplies (from the
Supply Status screen).
2. In the Wash Buffer field, select Add Buffer.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the buffer reservoir on the processing
module is filling, then press the ARM STOP key if
the instrument is new. Complete the fill after
instrument decontamination.
Note
If the ARM is a replacement for an existing
instrument, let the buffer reservoir fill
completely.
Verification 1. Once the ARCHITECT ARM shuts down, verify

that the buffer reservoir is full.
2. Visually inspect the area around the
ARCHITECT ARM and the buffer valve on the
processing module for leaks.
3. Visually verify that the wash buffer reservoir on the
processing module is full.
P-12 External Waste Pump Installation and Verification
Version - 201985-104_678_1
Purpose To provide instructions for the installation and verification of the external waste pump. Module Waste Pump
Materials Required None Time 1.5 hrs
Preparation 1. Verify that the power switch on the external

waste pump is in the OFF position.
Position Waste 1. Place the waste pump as close to the back

Pump of the processing module as possible.
Connect Waste 1. Cut a piece of the waste tubing long enough

Pump to Back of to run from the back of the processing
Processing Module module to one of the four (4) inlet ports of
the waste pump. [2]
2. Install one end of the tubing to the
processing module waste port. [1]
Note
Use a cable tie or clamp to secure
the tubing to the barb fitting.
3. Install a quick connect fitting (14603) to the

other end of the tubing (secure the tubing to
the barb fitting with a cable tie or clamp). [3]
4. Connect this fitting to one of the four (4)
inlet ports of the waste pump. [2]
Note
This tubing must be below the level
of the waste port of the processing
module.
Connect Waste 1. Cut enough of the remaining tubing to run
Pump Outlet to from the waste pump outlet to the drain.
Drain 2. Install a quick connect fitting to one end of
the tubing (secure the tubing to the barb
fitting with a cable tie or clamp).
3. Connect this fitting to the waste pump
outlet. [1]
4. Run the other end of the tubing to the drain.
Note
This tubing should not be over 30'
(9.1m) long or run higher than 8'
(2.4m).
Assemble Tube to Note

Pipe Thread Perform this Action only if connecting
Connector ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Visual Verification.
1. Cut the existing tube to pipe thread

connector off of the polyethylene tubing
(white tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM
Waste 1 connector).
Note
Verify that the tubing is cut squarely
and remove any burrs.
2. Make a mark [1] on the tubing [2] 0.75

inches (1.9 cm) from the end of the tube.
3. Loosen the nut portion [3] of the connector
(92526-shipped in the pump box) until three
threads are visible.
4. Moisten the end of the tube with water.
5. Push the tube straight through the hole in
the nut on the connector until it bottoms on
the shoulder in the connector. [4]
6. Tighten nut [3] by hand.
Note
Additional tightening should not be
necessary, but 1/4 additional turn
may be added if desired. Over
tightening the nut results in stripped
threads and a fitting that does not
function properly.
Note
A proper assembly does not show
the insertion mark extending beyond
the nut. If the insertion mark is
visible, repeat Step1 -Step6.
7. Assemble the pipe thread pump connector

(92527, shipped in the pump box) to the
assembled connector. [5]
Connect Connector Note

to Waste Pump Perform this Action only if connecting
ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Visual Verification.
1. Connect the connector to one of the four

input connectors on the External Waste
Pump. [2]
Connect Polyvinyl Note
Chloride (clear Perform this Action only if connecting
tubing from Waste ARCHITECT ARM to waste pump. If not
2 connector) to connecting to waste pump, go to Perform
Waste Pump Visual Verification.
1. Assemble the 3/8 inch barb pump connector

(92529 in pump box) to the clear tubing
(ARCHITECT ARM waste 2).
2. Secure the connector with a hose clamp
(14331-010 in pump box).
3. Connect the connector to one of the four
input connectors on the external waste
pump [2].
Note
Verify the waste tubing line runs
downhill to the pump connector.
Perform Visual 1. Verify that there are not any male quick
Verification disconnect fittings installed without being
tubed up.
Note
Any unused inlet fittings left
connected to sump pump leak when
the pump is in use.
Verify Waste Pump 1. Move the toggle switch to the ON (to the Switch Positions:
Manual Setting left) position to verify that the pump starts.
2. If the pump comes on, move the toggle ON (left) - Pump is in a manual control mode. The
switch to the AUTO (to the right) position pump remains on until the operator turns the pump
immediately. The pump starts only when the off.
float sensors are tripped. AUTO (right) - Pump turns on as internal floats are
triggered.
OFF (middle)
Note
The pump is designed to run wet. Running
the pump for an extended time without fluid
causes early failure.
Verify Waste Pump 1. Perform three flushes on the system

Automatic Setting consecutively (maintenance procedure 2130
Flush Fluids) and verify that the pump turns
on and pumps the waste fluid to the drain.
P-24 Precision Run Version - 201985-104_652_4

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results,
ENSURE appropriate Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
P-24 Precision Run
Purpose The precision verification is used to verify that the instrument is functioning properly prior to releasing the system to Module i2000,
the customer. i2000SR
The procedure consists of calibrating and running specific assays with multiple replicates to test the pipetting, wash
system, and optical precision of the instrument. The acceptance criterion is listed in the assay package insert and
will determine if the instrument has passed or failed the verification.
Materials Time 90 min

Required TSH (1 set or reagents)
B-hCG (1 set or reagents)
Trigger/Pre-Trigger (1 Bottle each)
Wash Buffer (The wash buffer bottle should be full)
TSH Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
B-hCG Calibrators (1 box of Calibrator)
TSH Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
B-hCG Controls (1 Bottle of low Control)
Assay Disk (1)
Sample Carriers ( Set of at least 4 sequentially numbered carriers)
RV/Sample Cups ( 1 bag each)
Load Bulk
Solutions
1. Verify that all bulk solutions are loaded and have been updated in the
and
supplies screen.
Reagents
2. Load the appropriate reagents. (TSH, B-hCG)
Verify TSB
Status
1. Verify that all required Technical Service Bulletins have been
completed.
Install 6114
Install/Delete
1. Logon as FSE.
Assays
2. Select System Diagnostics.
3. Select the radio button (5) for module 5 (SCC).
4. Select Utilities tab, then select 6114 Install/Delete Assays.
5. Select F5 Perform, then OK followed by Install.
6. Select i2000, Proceed, All Groups.
Note
Enter the appropriate number for the following assays: TSH, B-
hCG (the numbers should be separated by a comma).
Example: 3,11
7. Select Continue, Return to Previous Menu, Return to Main Menu,

Exit, and Done.
Configure
Single
1. At the snapshot screen select SYSTEM,
Analyte
CONFIGURATION. Select QC-Cal settings, QC-Single Analyte.
Control
2. Select TSH and then select Configure F6.
Precision
File Note
Use the arrow button to scroll down if needed.
3. Click on the Drop Down Menu Box next to Lot no:
4. Select NEW LOT and type Service Precision.
Note
Enter the information contained in table below in the New Level
Screen.
5. Select Add Level then select Done.
6. Deselect the previously entered assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-5 for B-hCG.
Perform Run
Initialization
1. Select the SSH and the i2000 processing module on the Snapshot
on
screen.
Processing
2. Select F8-Run.
Module and
Sample Note
Handler To save time, while the processing module is performing the run
initialization, enter calibration and control orders.
Order
Calibration
Note
Gather two consecutively numbered carriers. Consecutively numbered
carriers are required for six point calibration assays.
1. Select ORDERS, CALIBRATION ORDER

2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position
Number (P).
3. Select Assay TSH, and B-hCG, then select F2-ADD ORDER.
Note
4. Select Exit.
Print the
Order List
1. Print the Order List to determine the minimum sample volume required
and Load
per calibrator.
Calibrators
2. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
into the
3. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
Sample
4. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Carrier
5. Pipette the appropriate calibrator into the sample cups and load in the
correct C/P(carrier/position) per the Order List Report.
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of calibrator to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
6. Place the Carrier onto the sample loader.
Verify
Calibration
1. When the run has completed, select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and
then select Calibration status.
2. Verify that the Cal Status for TSH, BhCG are listed as Active.
Order
Precision
1. Select ORDERS, CONTROL ORDER then select SINGLE ANALYTE. Note
Run
2. Type in the Carrier Bar Code ID Number (C) and an unused Position The Precision Control was created earlier
Number (P) during the Configure Single Analyte Control
3. Select Assay(TSH), Lot(Service Precision), and Level(FSRPrec 1). Activity.
Note
4. Select F5 ASSAY OPTIONS.
Note
In the number of replicates, UNDILUTED box enter 10.
5. Select Done and then select F2 ADD ORDER.

6. Repeat steps 3-6 for TSH. This will create a total of 20 samples for
each assay.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for twice for B-hGC. This will create a total of 20
samples for each assay.
Note
Carrier and position will be automatically assigned when each
order is added.
8. Once all orders have been placed, print the Order List.
9. Select Orders from the Snapshot screen.
10. Select Order Status and then select Print F4.
11. Select Order List Report and then select Done.
Load Low
Controls into
1. Pipette the correct amount of low control for each assay and place the
Carriers
cups in the correct carrier positions, as per the printed Order List.
Note
The Order List provides the correct amount of control to be
dispensed into each sample cup.
2. Place the Carriers into the sample handler.

3. If the modules are not in the Run mode select the SSH and i2000 and
then select F8-Run.
Print QC
Summary
1. Select QC Summary from the Snapshot screen.
Report
2. Select the appropriate module number radio button.
3. Select (highlight) the assays that were run for Service Precision (level-
FSRprec 1).Select Print F4.
4. Verify that the Selected Items radio button is selected. Select QC
Summary Report, then select Done.
Confirm
Precision
1. Confirm the precision results are acceptable using the Total %CV
Data Results
value listed in the appropriate assay package insert.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-56 ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination
Version - 96756-111_244_2
Purpose This procedure is used to decontaminate the ARCHITECT ARM module. Perform this protocol on Module ARCHITECT
an annual basis. ARM
Materials ARCHITECT ARM Decontamination Kit C/N: 7-78172-02 (This kit contains a Decon Manifold, a Time 45 min
Required Decon Jumper Tube, and the tubing and fittings required to replace tubing removed during the
decontamination procedure.)
0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
2 Empty cubitainers or other suitable 5L substitutes
1 to 3 Multimodule tubing kits: 7-96485-01 for each added module of an i4000, i4000SR, i6000 or
i8000 instrument.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
Prerequisite 1. Verify that the ARCHITECT ARM cubitainer is

empty or near empty.
Note
Use another 5L or larger container if an
empty cubitainer is not available. Two 5L
or larger containers will be required.
Note
Concentrate remaining in the cubitainer
is discarded after decontamination.
2. Dilute the bleach (10% sodium hypochlorite)

with water at a 1:20 ratio (one part bleach to 20
parts water to make the 0.5% solution).
Caution
Full strength bleach cannot be used for
decontamination.
Disconnect 1. Press the STOP key.

Tubing for
Decontamination The red indicator beneath the STOP key
illuminates.
2. Disconnect the buffer outlet tube from the ARM

to the instrument. Discard the tube and any
multimodule manifold tubing except for a first
time decontamination.
3. Disconnect and discard the water inlet supply
tubing. Discard this tubing except for first time
decontamination.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]

Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Disconnect 1. Disconnect the sensor cable.

Cables and 2. Disconnect the concentrate wash buffer inlet
Tubing tubing from the ARCHITECT ARM console.
Connection Legend:
1-Sensor Cable
2-Concentrated Wash Buffer Inlet
3-Decontamination Port 2
Prepare 1. Fill an empty cubitainer or other suitable

Cubitainer container with 5L (1.32 gal) of 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite solution.
2. Remove the empty cubitainer from the
ARCHITECT ARM and set it on the floor next
to the container with decontamination solution.
The process will empty one container and fill
the other.
3. Place the pickup tube assembly from the empty
container and place it in the decontamination
cubitainer. The tube must be nearly vertical in
the container.
Connect Decon 1. Lift the filled decontamination cubitainer into

Manifold position on the ARCHITECT ARM.
Note
Verify that the white bracket is
positioned against the pickup tube
assembly, so that the pickup tube is
properly positioned to pickup bleach
solution from the cubitainer as the
cubitainer is emptied.
2. Connect one end of the decon manifold to

Decon Port #2 [2] and the other end to the
concentrated wash buffer inlet port. [1]
Note
Both ports are located on top of the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Connect the concentrated wash buffer inlet

tubing to the center of the decon manifold.
4. Connect the sensor cable to the
ARCHITECT ARM.
Connect Decon 1. Connect the decon jumper tube to the diluted

Jumper Tube wash buffer outlet port [1] and to Decon Port #1
[2].
Note
Both fittings are located on the back of
the ARCHITECT ARM.
Connection Legend:
Diluted Wash Buffer Outlet [1]

Decontamination Port 1 [2]
Water Inlet [3]
Waste1 (pressurized) [4]
Waste 2 (gravity) [5]
RS232 Port [6]
Perform 1. Press the DECONTAMINATION and START

Decontamination keys at the same time (these keys are next to
each other).
The ARCHITECT ARM begins pumping
the bleach solution through the fluidics
system and into the drain.
The first decontamination indicator
flashes.
When bleach reaches the drain, and the
system is filled (about three (3) minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and incubates (approximately 15
minutes).
2. When the amber LED illuminates, connect the
new water inlet tubing.
3. Remove the concentrated wash buffer inlet
tubing from the decon manifold.
4. Disconnect the electrical connection of the
concentrate sensor assembly.
5. Remove the decontamination cubitainer and
any remaining bleach solution from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
6. Discard any remaining bleach solution and the
cubitainer, if used. Rinse any other container in
deionized water to remove the bleach. Rinse
the pickup tubing assembly and flush the
interior tubing with deionized water.
7. Press the DECONTAMINATION key.
The ARCHITECT ARM pumps water
through the fluidics and into the drain
(flushes the bleach).
The first decontamination indicator turns
off as the second decontamination
indicator flashes.
When water reaches the drain, and the
system is flushed (about 15 minutes),
the ARCHITECT ARM stops pumping
and the amber light illuminates.
8. Press the STOP key.
Discard and 1. Disconnect both the decon jumper tubing and

Replace Used decon manifold. Discard all items.
Items 2. Connect the new buffer outlet tubing (reconnect
original tubing for first time decontamination)
from the ARM to the instrument. Use
multimodule tubing kits 7-96485-01 as
necessary for reconnecting to multimodule
systems.
3. Remove the concentrate sensor assembly from
the Decontamination Kit.
4. Connect the electrical connection of concentrate
sensor assembly to the ARCHITECT ARM.
Caution
Do not insert the concentrate sensor
assembly into the cubitainer at this time.
Refill and Verify 1. Press the BOTTLE LOAD key (next to the
Operation STOP key). The bottle load indicator flashes.
2. While the bottle load indicator flashes,
disconnect the sensor assembly from the
ARCHITECT ARM.
3. Remove the cardboard cutout and the cap from
the new container of concentrated wash buffer.
4. Place the concentrated wash buffer tubing
assembly into the cubitainer.
5. Twist the fitting to tighten.
6. Place the container into position on the
ARCHITECT ARM and verify that the white
bracket is near the tubing assembly.
7. Reconnect the sensor cable and supply tubing
quick-disconnect fitting to the
ARCHITECT ARM.
8. Verify that the instrument wash buffer reservoir
is filled without error when requested through
the Supply Status screen on the SCC.
Note
The sensor automatically recalibrates
during this process.
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure
Version - 96756-111_341_2
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to document how to log on and log off as FSE. Log off is documented Module SCC
so that the system can be returned to normal operation after service or support.
Materials FSE Date Code List Time 1

Required min
Log On as FSE
Select 1. Select Log on F2 from the

Log Snapshot screen.
On
Log 1. Enter FSE in all capital letters Note
On in the User name field. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the system to operator
2. Enter the FSE logon date code level of access. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
in the password field.
Note
Enter the date code in
reverse order.
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that the Operator listed
on the Snapshot screen lists
FSE.
Log Off as FSE
Select Log 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Note

On Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
Note system to operator level of access.
The User Name field is selected and
populated with the name FSE.
Log On as 1. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.

Operator
Note
The password field disappears.
2. Select Done.
3. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup
screen after Operator:.
P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure Version - 96756-111_338_2

At the completion of this VP: G110 - After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument
P-204 Log Retrieval Procedure
This procedure documents retrieval of current logs, copying the database to CD, copying archived logs SCC
Purpose to CD, and retrieval of a Memory Dump file. If requested by Abbott personnel, the logs may be cleared Module
from the system.
Retrieve current logs: This option copies the following logs to the D drive and floppy or CD if
selected: Assay Activity, Assay Calibration, Assay Parameter, Assay QC Result Data, Liquid
Level Sense, Maintenance History, Permanent Message History, Pressure Monitoring, Quality
Control, Result, Scripting, Temporary, Temporary Message History, Sample Activity, Dr. Watson,
Host, LAS, ARM, Arch, Unhandled, Application Event, CDRecord, Monitorlog, Printed Reports.
In addition, the iSystem copies: Power On Self Test, PM Trace, Wash Aspirate
Monitoring.
In addition, the cSystem copies: Optics
In addition, the i1000SR copies: Regeant
Copy database to the CD: This option compresses and copies the database to the D drive and
CD.
Copy archive logs to CD: This option copies up to 5 previously retrieved compressed logs from
the D drive to a CD.
Retrieve memory dump file: (FSE only) This option compresses and copies a memory dump file
to a CD.
Refer to the tables below for additional information regarding each option.
Materials vary depending on the option selected. Required materials may include CD, or Floppies Variable
Materials Time
Required
Prerequisites P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure

1. The system should be powered ON.
2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or
Ready state.
Access 6009
Log Utilities
1. Select the System icon, then select Diagnostics from the drop-
Procedure
down menu.
2. Select the radio button for module 5.
3. Select the Utilities category.
Retrieve Logs
Note
1. Select 6009 Log Utilities procedure. Logs should not be cleared unless
2. Select Perform F5. A confirmation popup displays. specifically requested by in-house
3. Select OK to perform the procedure. The diagnostic perform Abbott personnel.
dialog window displays. A description of the procedure displays
on the instruction window.
4. Select Proceed to continue the log retrieval procedure.
5. Select the appropriate option. Refer to the tables below for
additional information.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
7. When the procedure is complete, select Done.
File Transfer
(Optional)
1. Perform P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure to transfer the
logs via modem.
Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action
Not enough free space on A temporary copy of the files is copied to the C: drive before copying them to
C: drive to create the CD. There is not enough space on the C: drive to copy the temporary files.
Perform the
temporary image files One of the following could have occurred:
appropriate
drive recovery
Non-ARCHITECT software was installed on the SCC. procedure
The C: hard drive contains bad sectors. Replace the
hard drive
No CD recorder detected
The CD drive is not a read/write drive. Perform the
The Gearworks drivers are corrupted. appropriate
CD drive hardware failure drive recovery
procedure
Replace the
CD drive
Unknown error The COPY2CD_2 program was executed but did not respond.
Perform the
The COPY2CD_2 program has been moved or is corrupted. appropriate
drive recovery
procedure
Retrieve Current Logs Option
This option captures logs for troubleshooting or software investigation. The table below details each log and describes when that log
is used. The log name has the following format: date_24time_serial#_logname.xxx (where x-axes is the extension of the log file). The
files may be copied to a floppy disk, CDR/CDRW disk or hard drive. If floppy disk is selected the logs are compressed and saved to
1 or more floppies. If CD is selected the files are recorded uncompressed to a blank or appendable CDR or CDRW disk. If hard
drive is selected the files are saved uncompressed to D:\Logs. In addition, all logs are saved in an archive file (refer to Copy Archive
Logs to the C Drive option for additional information).
Capture Log Module

Log Log Name Steps Log Format Capacity
When Specific
Application eventapp.txt Records the Format-specific for the application event 9900 or 9077 No
Event application error errors
event error occurred and
information. the SCC has
shut down.
Dr. Watson
errors
Arch arch Records Format-specific for architecture errors Architect No
architect exception
exception error errors
information.
ARM debugcom7.log Records all Format-specific for ARM communication ARM Issues
debugcom7.log.bak communication event. No
between the
SCC and ARM.
Assay assayactivity Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Lockstep 24000 per Lockstep or
Activity assay Count | Lockstep Time | Test ID | module Timing errors Yes
performance Mechanism ID | Duration | Event | Error for i System or
activities Code c System
associated with
performing tests
Assay assaycal Records for the Assay ID | Assay Status | Reagent Master 600 Cal or Result
Calibration last 600 Lot | Calibrator Lot | Calibration Type | Issues for No
attempted Completion Date | Completion Time | i System and c
calibrations. Module ID | Module SN | Operator ID | System
Curve Exception String | Curve Type |
Calibration Summary | Curve Parameters |
RMSE | Adjuster Ratios | Linear XFRM
Slope | Linear XFRM Intercept
Assay assayparameter Records a copy Formatted as an assay parameter report A copy of When you No
Parameter of the assay in assay numerical order. the assay need to review
parameters for parameter or verify the
each assay report for assay
installed. every parameter for
assay an i System
installed. and c System.
Assay QC ReleasedQC.csv CVS format log Control Name | SID | Control Level | Stored >Control No
Result Log that contains all Control Lot Number | Control Comment | QC Issues for the i
stored QC Assay Name | Assay Number | Module | results System and c
results currently Serial Number | Cal Lot | Cal Date and currently System
in the database. Time | Reagent Master Lot | Reagent in the
Serial Number | Date Time Completed | database.
Carrier | Position | Result | Units | Min
Range| Max Range | Dilution | Flags |
Read Values | Absorbance Cuvette | Mv
Cuvette | Operator ID | System Serial
Number
CDRecord CDRecord.log Captures a copy N/A N/A Problems No
of the log reading or
associated with writing to a
the CD CD-ROM.
recording
software.
Dr. Watson user.dmp Records Dr. Format-specific for Dr. Watson events. Dr. Watson
drwtsn32.log Watson event errors No
information.
Host debugcom5.log Records all See RS-232 Manual for format Host Issues
debugcom5.log.bak communication information. No
between the
SCC and Host.
LAS debugcom6.log Records Date/Time of Event | Communication 1000 LAS Issues
debugcom6.log.bak transferred Direction | Event No
between system
and LAS
Liquid Level lls Records for fluid Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Level Sense
Sense aspirate events Assay ID | Pipetting Context | Pipetting per Issues for Yes
including Step Number | Well Name | Level Sense module i System and c
aspirate and Category | Level Sense Event | Step System
wickoff. Number
Maintenance maintenancehistory Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Maintenance
History maintenance Completion Status | Frequency | Operator or Diagnostic No
performed. One ID | Event Procedure
log is Issues for
maintained for i System and c
all modules. System
Monitorlog Monitorlog.txt Fan and Date, Time, Error N/A When you No
(Note: only temperature need to review
valid on monitor errors from the
SCC information from intel monitor
platform C the intel monitor software.
and higher) software.
Optics optics Records the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Dilution ID | 10,000 Need to view
optics reads for Sample ID | Test Completion Date | Test per absorbance Yes
a c8000 Completion Time | Module ID | Cuvette | module data for
module. Concentration | 16 wavelengths with 33 wavelengths
reads other than
primary and
secondary for
c System
Permanent messagehistory Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 12000 Hardware or
Message last 12000 error Category | Message Text Software No
History codes logged in issues for
the message i System and c
history category. System
Power On post Last record for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Event Bootup Issues
Self Test each i System Generated for i System or Yes
processing sample
module, SCC or handler
sample handler
power on
sequence.
Captures
processing
module, SCC,
or sample
handler bootup
execution or
error messages.
Pressure pm Records for Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Test ID | 10,000 Pressure
Monitor pressure Assay Number | Protocol | Step Number | per Monitoring Yes
monitoring Well Name | Pipetting volume | PM Status module Issues for
results of fluid | Front End Pressure | Aspirate Pressure | i System and c
aspirate events. Back End Pressure | Aspirate Error Sum | System
Actual Theoretical Ratio | Pressure Error |
Stuff
Printed *.rtf An RTF version Formatted as the specific report One RTF To obtain a No
Reports of each report version of copy of the
type. each printed report.
report
type
printed.
Quality qc Event recorded Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Operator 5000 QC event
Control any time a user ID | Assay Name | Control Name | Control details for No
performs the Lot Number | Control Level Name | Detail i System and c
following: | Event System
includes or
excludes a QC
point, edits
configuration
parameters,
changes
Westgard rules,
recalibrates
reagent lot,
edits QC lot
default.
Reagent reagent Records the Reagent Carrier Detected I Reagent 4000 Reagent Yes
Activity reagent Carrier Load Complete I Reagent Carrier carrier load
activities Unload Complete I Carrier Removed I and unload
associated with Reagent Carrier Load I Reagent Carrier issues for
loading and Unload I Reagent Carrier Error I Create c1000
unloading Reagent Pack I Delete Reagent Pack I
reagent carriers Report Mixing Status I Reagent Pack Last
Aspiration I Disposition Reagent Pack I
Carousel Window I Request Carousel I
Request Carousel Response I Release
Carousel I Reagent Pack Unload Time I
Carrier Inventory I Aliquot Created I
Reagent Pack Available
Result result Records for the Replicate ID | Assay ID | Assay Status | 11200 Result, LLS,
last 11,200 Dilution ID | Sample ID | Sample Type | and PM Issues No
attempted tests Patient ID | Test Order Date | Test Order for i System
run on the Time | Test Initiation Date | Test Initiation and c System
system. Time | Test Completion Date | Test
Completion Time | Assay Calibration Date
| Assay Calibration Time | Module ID |
Module SN | Operator ID | Dark Subreads
| Signal Subreads | Dark Count | Signal
Count | Corrected Count | Std Bak | Ave
Bak | Std For | Ave For | Shape |
Exception String | Result | Reported
Result | Reported Result Units | Result
Flags | Reagent Master Lot | Result
Interpretation | Dilution Protocol | Result
Details | Result Comment
Sample sampleactivity Records all Format-specific for each significant event. 1200 Sample
Activity significant Handler Issues Yes
sample
management
events.
Scripting Script Records script Format is specific for the maintenance or 10,000 Need exists to
commands and diagnostic procedure. review specific No
responses from errors that
a maintenance occurred when
or diagnostic running the
procedure. maintenance
or diagnostic
procedure
Temporary temporary_*.log Records the log No
data into a
temporary log
as a backup.
Temporary tempmessage Records for the Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Error 200 Bar code read
Message last 200 Category | Message Text errors or Host No
History messages communication
logged in the errors for
temporary i System and c
category (ie. System
Bar code read
errors, host
communication
errors)
Trace trace Hardware Date/Time of Event | Module ID | Ticks | 10,000 Hardware
interactions to Event per issues for Yes
and from module i System or
hardware sample
devices (ie. handler
Temperature
controller, OMS
boards)
Unhandled unhandled Records Format-specific for software error Non-specific No
software error software errors
information.
Wash wam Records for Date/Current_Time | Module_ID | 3200 Wash Aspirate
Aspirate wash aspiration Zone_Number | St1test# | St1Max | Issues for Yes
Mechanism results of wash St1Delta | St2test# | St2Max | St2Delta | i System
aspirate events. St3test# | St3Max | St3Delta
Copy Database to CD Option
This option backs up the database to the C: drive, compresses the database and records it to a CD. Once copied, the compressed
file is deleted from the C: drive. This option may be required when requested for software investigation.
Copy Archive Logs to CD Option
This option allows the user to copy previously retrieved logs from the hard drive to a CD. When the Retrieve Current Logs option is
selected, copies of the logs are compressed into one file and stored in D:\LOGS\ARCHIVEDLOGS. The file is named with the
following format: date_24time_serial#_[1-5}.zip. Up to five compressed archived logs are saved on the hard drive with 1 being the
newest and 5 being the oldest. The user is able to copy one or more archive files to a CD at a time.
Retrieve Memory Dump File Option (FSE only)
This option compresses and records the memory dump file to a CD. The memory dump file is used to gather data (debug
information) on the utilization of system memory for the SCC.
Laboratories. c4000, c4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen Version - 96756-111_337_3

P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen
Purpose To calibrate the touchscreen on the SCC. Module SCC

Materials Required None Time 3 min
Access Explorer
1. Select the System icon.
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer opens.
Calibrate
Touchscreen
1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select Control Panel.
2. Double-click ELO Touchscreen to open it.
3. Select Align.
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to calibrate the touchscreen.
5. Select OK to complete the calibration.
Note
For some touchscreen monitors, better touchscreen response is achieved by
performing the touchscreen calibration twice.
Verify Touchscreen
Calibration
1. Move through at least four screens, using the touchscreen, to verify touchscreen
operation.
Laboratories. c4000, c4100, i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights
reserved.
P-206 Printer Configuration Version - 96756-111_305_2

P-206 Printer Configuration
To configure the printer during installation, or when a new printer is installed. SCC/Printer
Purpose Module
None 15 min
Materials Required Time
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
screen. system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the
Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down
menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Rename
Architect Note
Printer to If this is a new printer and no Architect
Printer Product Printer is listed, go to Load Printer Driver.
Name
1. Using Explorer, select the Printers folder.
Note
The printers folder is located in the
C:\Control Panel directory.
2. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights

printer name) and select Rename from the
drop down menu (selects printer name for
editing).
Note
If a menu doesn't display when you
right-click the name, select File,
Rename from the menu bar.
3. Enter the printer product name (example

OKI B4350).
4. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Load Printer
Driver Note
If this is a new printer and the printer
driver is already listed in the printers
directory, skip this Action.
1. Insert the printer driver CD into the CD-

ROM drive.
Note
If the CD starts automatically, stop
that action. Exit the opening screen
from the CD and return to the
desktop.
2. Access the Printers folder and double-

click Add Printer.
3. Select Next (starts the Add Printer
Wizard).
4. Select the Local printer radio button.
5. Select Next.
6. Select LPT1 (connection port).
7. Select Next.
8. Select Have Disk.
9. Select Browse and locate the desired
printer driver file on the CD-ROM.
Note
Refer to the appropriate ISA for the
appropriate printer driver file name.
10. Select the driver and select Open.

11. Select OK, then Next several times until
the Completing the Add Printer Wizard
pop-up displays.
Note
Do not change any of the settings
on these screens.
12. Select Finish.
Note
The Wizard loads the new driver.
13. Remove the printer driver CD from the CD-
ROM drive.
Rename
Printer to
1. Right-click the name of the newly added
Architect
printer (highlights printer name) and select
Printer
Rename from the drop down menu
(selects printer name for editing).
Note
Rename from the menu bar.
2. Enter Architect Printer as the new name.

3. Press Enter to rename the printer.
Set Paper
Size
1. Right-click Architect Printer and scroll
down to Printing Preferences.
Note
Properties from the menu bar.
2. Select the Paper/Quality tab.

3. Select the Advanced button.
4. Select the desired paper size.
5. Select OK.
6. Go to Set Architect Printer as Default.
Set Architect
Printer as
1. Right-click Architect Printer (highlights
Default
printer name) and select Set as Default
Printer.
Note
right-click the highlighted item,
select File, Set as Default Printer
from the menu bar.
2. Verify that Set as Default Printer is

checked in the menu that displays.
3. Repeat this step to verify that when you
right-click the Architect Printer, a
checkmark displays in front of Set as
Default Printer.
4. Go to ARCHITECT Print Screen
Verification.
ARCHITECT
Print Screen Note
1. From any ARCHITECT screen, press If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs
Verification
Alt+Print Screen and verify that the for information on Properties and Document Defaults for
screen prints. the printer.
ARCHITECT
Report Print Note
1. From the Snapshot screen, select the If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as
Test
Results icon. the default printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current
2. From the dropdown menu, select Results ARCHITECT ISAs for information on Properties and
Review. Document Defaults for the printer.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
Log Off as
FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot
screen.
Note
The User Name field displays and is
populated with the name FSE.
2. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.
Note
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup
screen after Operator:.
Note
Prior to leaving the site, FSE is
required to return the system to
operator level of access.
P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test
Version - 96756-111_354_2
Purpose Verify printer is configured correctly. Module SCC/Printer
Verify 1. From any ARCHITECT screen, Note

ARCHITECT select the Alt+Print Screen keys If this print test fails, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for information
Print Screen and verify that the screen on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
prints.
Verify 1. From the Snapshot screen, Note

ARCHITECT select the Results icon. If this print test fails, verify that the printer is selected as the default
Prints 2. From the dropdown menu, printer. If it continues to fail, refer to current ARCHITECT ISAs for
Report select Results Review. information on Properties and Document Defaults for the printer.
3. Select Print F4.
4. Select Results List Report.
5. Select Done to print.
6. Verify that the report header
prints.
P-210 Modem Test Version - 96756-111_292_2

P-210 Modem Test
Purpose To be performed on installation of a system SCC, or modem. Module SCC/Modem

Verify System
is Ready
1. Verify system power is ON.
2. Verify modem is connected and ON.
3. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify status is Waiting.
Modem Into
System
1. Contact Country Support to dial in using PCANYWHERE Version 10.0 (or higher), or use a
separate computer equipped with PCANYWHERE (the FSR laptop) and a modem connection to
dial into the SCC.
Verify Remote
User
1. Remote user verifies that they are able to connect to the SCC and see the ARCHITECT user
Connection
interface.
2. Remote user verifies that they can move through at least four different screens without losing
connection.
3. Close remote user connection.
Verify System
is Ready
1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status has returned to Waiting.
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup
Version - 96756-111_290_2
Purpose This procedure is used to configure PCANYWHERE to manual startup (no modem installed), Module SCC/Modem
reconfigure automatic startup after a modem is installed, and restart PCANYWHERE.
Materials None Time 15 min

Required
Log On 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot Note

screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
User name field. Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse
order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the
Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Access 1. Select the System icon.

Explorer 2. Select Task Manager from the drop-
down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
6. Minimize Task Manager when Explorer
opens.
Access Control 1. Using Explorer, scroll down and select

Panel Control Panel.
2. Select it to display the icons on the right
side of the screen.
Access 1. Scroll down the Explorer window to find

Services the Administrative Tools icon.
2. Double-click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3. Double-click the Services icon.
4. Verify that the Services window opens.
5. Scroll down to find PCANYWHERE Host
Service and double-click the icon to
select it.
PCANYWHERE 1. View the Service status and the
Settings Startup type.
The Startup type [1] indicates

PCANYWHERE status during power ON.
Automatic indicates
PCANYWHERE starts
automatically at power ON.
Manual indicates the user must
start PCANYWHERE in the
Services Control panel
The Service status [2] indicates if the

service is or is not active.
Started in the status field

indicates that the PCANYWHERE
service is running.
Stopped indicates that the
PCANYWHERE service is not
running.
Disable Note
PCANYWHERE Perform this procedure if a modem is
not installed on the SCC.
1. Set to Manual Startup:

From the services window, select
PCANYWHERE Host Service
from the list.
Set the Startup type to
Manual. [1]
Select OK to save the setting.
2. Stop the service:
If the Service status indicates
Started, select Stop to stop the
PCANYWHERE Host Service. [2]
A message displays indicating that
the system is attempting to stop
the PCANYWHERE service.
3. Select OK to save the setting.
4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC and verify that
PCANYWHERE does not start
automatically.
Verify/Configure to Automatic Startup and Start the Service
This is only required if PCANYWHERE does not go to the waiting mode when the SCC is restarted. This may occur if the service
setting for PCANYWHERE was changed from Automatic to Manual start.
Note
Verify that a modem is connected, turned on, and the telephone line is functional.
Verify/Configure to 1. In the Services window, with PCANYWHERE Host Service selected, double-click.
Automatic Startup 2. Select the Automatic Startup type.
Start Service 1. If the Service status lists Started, verify the modem is operational according to P-
210 Modem Test.
2. If the Service status lists Stopped, select Start to start PCANYWHERE Host
Service. A message displays attempting to startup PCANYWHERE and then puts it
in Waiting.
Note
If an error message is received select OK.
3. Select OK to save the setting.

4. Close the Services window.
5. Restart the SCC.
Verify 1. Switch (Alt+Tab) to the PCANYWHERE window and verify the status is Waiting.
PCANYWHERE
Starts Automatically
Verification 1. Verify modem operation using P-210 Modem Test.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2008 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci8200, and c8000 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c16000, ci16200, iSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All
rights reserved.
P-213 Modem Connection to an SCC Version - 96756-111_289_2

P-213 Modem Connection to an SCC
Purpose This procedure documents how to use PCANYWHERE to modem into an ARCHITECT Module SCC/Modem
SCC.
Materials None Time N/A
Required
Contact
Customer
1. Contact the customer and obtain permission to
modem into their system.
2. Inform them why you are modeming in and what
activities you expect to perform while connected
to their system.
3. Ask the customer to verify that the modem is on
and connected to a telephone line.
Verify
PCANYWHERE
1. Have the customer press Alt+Tab to locate the
Status
PCANYWHERE icon.
Note
If the icon is not available, then
PCANYWHERE is not open or is not in a
waiting status.
2. Have the customer verify that the

PCANYWHERE dialog indicates
PCANYWHERE in a waiting status.
If PCANYWHERE is waiting, go to Open

PCANYWHERE.
If PCANYWHERE is not waiting, ask the
customer to restart the SCC, or refer to
P-212 PCANYWHERE Startup.
The customer may have closed

PCANYWHERE accidentally
PCANYWHERE has been changed
from Autostart to Manual start.
Open
PCANYWHERE
1. Start PCANYWHERE.
2. Select the Remotes button. [1]
3. Double-click the ARCHITECT icon. [2]
Note
If you work with pre-configured accounts,
double-click the account icon and the
computer automatically dials the number.
Enter Modem
Number
1. Enter the modem number for the ARCHITECT
SCC. [1]
Be sure to enter any necessary access codes

(for outside line, etc.)
2. Select OK.
Log In
1. Enter FSE in the Username field.
2. Enter fse in the Password field.
3. Enter SCC in the Domain field.
Note
The PCANYWHERE file manager window
displays.
Once connected to an SCC, an image of

the SCC screen displays on your system.
You can perform:
All on-screen operations.

Most keyboard operations.
Note
Response to mouse clicks and keyboard
entries is slower than when you are
working directly on an SCC. Also, the
colors used in the ARCHITECT software
are not correctly presented in the
PCANYWHERE screen image. This does
not impact available functionality.
Complete
Modem
1. Refer to the functions and activities listed under
Activities
Accessing Different Applications on the SCC to
complete the call.
If file transfer is required, refer to P-221

Modem File Transfer Procedure.
Close Call
1. If you logged onto the system as FSE at any
time during your call, log off at this time (refer to
P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure.)
2. Select the End Remote Control Session
icon. [1]
3. Contact the customer to let them know that you
have completed your modem activities.
4. Document your activities according to local
country call management procedures.
Accessing Different Applications on the SCC
Note
The ALT+TAB key combination cannot be used to move between applications from a remote computer. Use Windows NT
Task Manager to switch between programs, end programs, or launch new programs on the SCC.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to return the
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User system to operator level of access. To do this, perform
name field. Log Off as FSE, or restart the SCC.
password field.
Note
Enter the date code in reverse order.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot
screen lists FSE.
Launch
Task
1. Select the System icon on the SCC image.
Manager
2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down
menu.
Switch
Programs
1. Open Task manager.
2. Select the program you want to use.
3. Select the Switch To button. [1]
Close
Application
2. Select the program you want to end.
3. Select End Task. [1]
4. Select Wait in the next dialog.
Note
If the same dialog displays and the
application did not quit, select End
Task in the dialog.
Open
Programs
2. Select the New Task button. [1]
If you know the name and the path of

the application you want to start, you
can type it in the dialog box. [2]
If you want to select the application by
browsing, select Browse [3] and find
the program in the Browse window.
3. Select OK.
4. Minimize the Task manager window.
P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C) Version - 96756-111_276_1

P-218 C: Drive Recovery Procedure (SCC Platform C)
Purpose This procedure is used when the integrity of the system software (SCC Platform C) is suspect (incorrect Module SCC
shutdown of the SCC is a possible cause) or to install software when replacing the C: drive. This
procedure includes making a backup of the database, rewriting the C: drive, reconfiguring the SCC, and
restoring the database.
Materials ARCHITECT System Software Configuration Media Time 30
Required min
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or
Offline status.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. return the system to operator level of access.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen
lists FSE.
Verify
Current Note
1. Select the System icon, then Utilities. If this cannot be performed, go directly to
Backup
2. Select Backup software from the Utilities screen. Insert CD and Restart SCC.
3. Verify that a current backup displays in the Available
Backups field.
Insert CD
and Restart
1. Insert the ARCHITECT System Software
SCC
Configuration Media in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Shutdown [F3] from the Snapshot screen.
4. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del keys simultaneously.
5. When the Confirm exit window displays, select
Shutdown and restart the computer and then select
OK.
Note
When the SCC restarts, a WARNING! You are
about to install ... message displays.
6. Press any key to pass the WARNING screen.
Note
The R:\> prompt displays.
Rewrite C:
Drive Note
1. At the R:\> prompt, type 2 (Software Restore for C:) The ARCHITECT Software Configuration CD
REWRITE platform... "C", Drive C: and press Enter. is a service tool and should be taken from the
2. Press Enter to pass the WARNING! screen. site when the service engineer leaves.
Note
The system starts rewriting and the C: drive is
rewritten with a clean installation of the operating
system, application programs, and default system
files.
3. When prompted to insert the next media, remove Disk 1

of 2, insert Disk 2 of 2, and select Enter (continues the
process).
4. When the rewriting process is complete and the R:\>
prompt displays, remove Disk 2 of 2 from the CD-ROM
drive.
5. Reboot the computer by simultaneously pressing the
Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys.
Note
The system restarts. When the System Settings
Change window displays, the version splash
screen displays 2.01 rather than 2.02 because
the changes made between software version
2.01 and 2.02 affect only the c8000 module
firmware.
6. When the "Do you want to restart your computer

now?" displays, select Yes.
Note
This reboot ensures all of the hardware is
recognized before continuing.
Note
If the display graphics mode is not correct, select
Shutdown [F3] to shutdown and then restart the
SCC to correct the condition.
Configure
First Module Note
When the SCC reboots, the Configure first module
window displays.
1. Press the Num Lock key to activate the number

keypad.
2. Enter the FSE logon code.
3. Select the first processing module type from the list.
Note
If installing a ci8200, the first processing module
is c8000.
4. Enter the Serial No. of the first module being installed.

5. Select OK to shutdown and restart the SCC.
Note
After the SCC reboots a new database is
created. This may take up to 20 minutes. When
complete, the Snapshot screen displays.
6. When 0537 Improper shutdown on SCC error

message displays, select OK.
Note
If a modem is not installed, the software displays
a Dr. Watson error. Perform procedure P-212
PCANYWHERE Startup to set the service to
manual.
Verify
Software
1. When the Snapshot screen displays, log on as FSE (P-
Version
201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure).
2. Select the System icon, then Utilities.
3. Select Software install and verify software version 2.02
displays.
Restart SCC
and Locate
1. From the Utilities screen, select Backup software.
Backups
2. Verify that the last backups display in the Available
Backups field.
3. Locate the backup that you want to restore.
Restore
Database
1. Select the database backup that you wish to restore.
2. Select Restore, and restore the:
Module Calibration - System calibration files,

robo.cal and ish.cal files.
System Configuration - Default host and system
parameters.
Database - System database file, icw.odb.
Contains M&D procedures, assay files, assay
calibrations, results, module and SCC
configuration.
3. The system restarts and the module calibration, system

configuration, and database are restored.
Log On as
FSE Note
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen. Prior to leaving the site, FSE is required to
2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field. return the system to operator level of access.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field. To do this, perform Log Off as FSE, or restart
the SCC.
Note
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen
lists FSE.
Access
Explorer
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Calibrate Perform P-205 Calibrate Touchscreen.

Touchscreen
Configure Perform P-206 Printer Configuration.
Printer
Identify and
Perform Note
1. Determine if the software version installed requires any Reinstalling software on the C: drive erases
Required
upgrades. any upgrades performed after the installation
Upgrades
of the latest software version using the
Compare the TSB sticker on the SCC and the Software Configuration CD-ROM. It is
processing module to the latest version of the necessary to reinstall those upgrades.
TSB/ISA listing.
Use Explorer to view the folders on the D: drive.
If a Change or Upgrade folder exists, and has
content, an upgrade has been performed.
2. Perform any required upgrades per the instructions

documented in the TSB or ISA.
Startup
Processing
1. Perform startup on the processing module(s) and
Module(s)
sample handler.
and Update
2. Update Inventory.
Inventory
Perform
Control Run
1. Using the reagents that shipped to the site, calibrate
and run at least two (2) sets of 10 (total of 20) replicates
of each level of control for one Two Step Assay
Protocol.
2. Verify that each of the results are within the ranges
published.
3. Print the QC report and verify that the CVs are under
10%. (Refer to P-24 Precision Run)
Note
Use all positive results for the calculation.
P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification Version - 96756-111_294_2

P-219 Ethernet Communication Verification
Purpose This procedure verifies that Ethernet communication has been established between the SCC and the Module SCC
processing module(s) or sample handler.
Materials None Time 15
Required min
Power ON SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot
screen.
Power ON the
Module(s)
2. Verify that the status of the attached module(s) goes from Offline to Stopped.
Note
During data transfer, the corresponding LED on the Ethernet hub blinks rapidly.
Perform Startup
1. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
perform the Startup procedure.
P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure Version - 96756-111_281_1

P-221 Modem File Transfer Procedure
Purpose Use to transfer files to and from an ARCHITECT SCC. This allows you to retrieve system logs, Module Modem
verify system files, or download updated files to the customer SCC.
Materials None Time N/A
Required
Access SCC
PCANYWHERE
1. Select the File Transfer icon. [1]
File Manager
Locate File(s)
1. Locate the file(s) you want to transfer on the
remote system or on the host system.
Transfer File(s)
1. Open the folder to which you want the file(s)
transferred.
2. Select the file(s) you want to transfer.
3. Select the Transfer icon. [1]
Note
The folder D:\Service\Temporary is on
every SCC as a temporary folder for files
that you want to transfer. The folder is a
temporary storage location; once file
transfer is complete and the files are
used appropriately, delete the files in this
folder. Reference:
Verify Transfer
The remote system (your PC) is on the left-hand
1. Verify that the file(s) that you transferred side of the screen. [2]
displays in the receiving folder. The host system (SCC) is on the right hand side
2. Complete the call according to P-213 Modem of the screen. [3]
Connection to an SCC.
P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions
Version - 96756-111_214_5
At the completion of this VP: After repair is complete, verify per released Operation and Service Procedures. If the system/instrument produces results, ENSURE appropriate
Quality Control is in specification and calibrate as necessary.
Purpose This procedure is used to reduce the frequency of the invalid bar code read errors by editing the transition field of the appropriate bar code Module SCC
calibration file to a value correct for the bar code type, presentation, or number of characters being used.
Materials Example Sample Tubes with customer bar code labels, pretreatment tubes or other tubes with special labels. Time 15
Required min
Prerequisites 1. Power ON the system.

2. The processing module must be in the Stopped, Warming, or Ready state.
Preparation 1. Obtain a variety of sample bar codes to be used.
Note
Some sites use a variety of bar code types and number of characters. To ensure that the
file is set properly to read all tubes, it is advised to determine the minimum number of
characters used.
2. Find out the bar code type (symbology) that is used.
Log On as 1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen.

FSE 2. Enter FSE in all capital letters in the User name field.
3. Enter the FSE logon date code in the password field.
4. Select Done.
5. Verify that the Operator listed on the Snapshot screen lists FSE.
Determine 1. At the Snapshot screen, select Orders and then Patient order.
Number of 2. Select the SID field.
Characters 3. Using the SCC bar code scanner, scan the bar code label on a tube.
4. Count the number of characters entered into the field.
5. Repeat the process for the next tube.
6. Of the labels scanned, determine the minimum number of characters.
Perform 1. Perform 3253 Bar Code Configuration, Transition Value option (System, Diagnostics, SCC Option,
3253 Bar Utilities), and go to Shutdown and Restart SCC.
Code
Configuration
Manually Set Note Bar Code Transitions
Number of The following steps are an optional method to manually enter transition values to the BCR.Cal
Transitions File. This is required for values greater than those shown in the Bar Code Transitions table. Use
(Optional) minimum value that gives reliable results.
1. Using Bar Code Transitions, locate the bar code symbology and the number of characters.
2. Determine the recommended number of transitions.
Note
Barcode types serve as examples. Special labels may use transition settings closest to
those shown on the table for the example type. All settings are verified prior to use by
performing the appropriate test listed at the end of this procedure. Both tube and empty
positions are checked. Transitions as high as 120 would be acceptable.
Access 1. Select the System icon.
Explorer 2. Select Task Manager from the drop-down menu.
3. Select New Task.
4. Type Explorer.
5. Select OK.
Open Bar 1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
Code Cal RSH and/or LSH (Sample Carousel) = C:\IPLS\RSH\System
File iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) = C:\IPLS\iRSH\System
SSH = C:\IPLS\ISH\System
LAS = C:\IPLS\LASB\System
2. In the right field, select and double-click on BCR.CAL.
3. If the Open With pop up screen displays, select NOTEPAD.
Edit 1. In the BCR.CAL file, locate the value for the transition value number under the Value column.
Transition 2. Change the number to the new value determined above.
Value 3. Edit only the numerical value. DO NOT edit or delete any of the characters.
Note
The information for the Microscan MS3 barcode reader is not used at this time. This
information will only be present on instruments at v5.00 software or higher. If an error
occurs during the editing process go to Restore Default File.
Save File 1. At the top of the screen, select FILE then SAVE.
Restore Note
Default File This action is only required if there was an error in editing the BCR.CAL file.
1. Navigate in Explorer on the left side to the desired folder for the type of sample handler.
Note
Example: For the RSH you would navigate to C:\IPLS\RSH.
2. In the right field, select and double-click on the default directory and select BCR.CAL.
3. From the menu, select EDIT then COPY.
4. Navigate in Explorer to the appropriate sample handler system directory.
5. From the menu, select EDIT then Paste.
6. Go to Open Bar Code Cal File.
Shutdown 1. Perform P-248 Startup and Shutdown to shutdown and restart the computer and processing For information on the startup procedure,
and Restart modules. refer to the ARCHITECT System Operations
SCC 2. Go to Perform Diagnostic Procedure Bar Code Reader Test. Manual, Section 5: Operating instructions,
Subsection: System startup, pause, and
shutdown.
Perform 1. Perform the appropriate Maintenance and Diagnostic procedure For further information on performing
Diagnostic SSH - 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test diagnostic procedures, refer to the
Procedure RSH - 3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test ARCHITECT System Operations Manual,
Bar Code Section 10: Troubleshooting and
iRSH (c4000, i1000SR, ci4100) - 3230 Bar Code Reader Test
Reader Test diagnostics, Subsection: System
LAS - 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics.
LSH / Sample Carousel - 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test
Note
Use at least 10 bar coded tubes from the site when performing Maintenance and
Diagnostics.
2. Verify that all the bar coded tubes used scan correctly.
i System Service and Support Manual (Version 96661-116) • © 2002, 2010 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200 are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in
various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification
Version - 96756-111_327_1
Purpose This procedure is used to verify bar code scanner functionality. Module Bar Code Scanner
Materials Required Bar Code Labels Time 3 min
Verify SCC BCR Functionality 1. From the Snapshot screen, select the Orders icon.
2. From the drop-down menu, select Patient orders.
3. Select the SID field.
4. Place the SCC bar code scanner over the bar code label.
5. Verify that the number from the label displays in the SID field.
P-248 Startup and Shutdown Version - 96756-111_234_3

P-248 Startup and Shutdown
Purpose Identify the recommended steps for a successful startup and shutdown. Module SCC
Startup
Power ON
UPS and
1. Power ON the UPS.
Peripherals
2. Power ON the peripherals (modem, printer, monitor, etc.).
3. Verify that power to the processing module(s) is OFF.
Note
The power to the processing module(s) must be OFF prior to turning on the power to the
system control center. If the processing module(s) power is ON, communication is not
properly initialized between the system components.
Power ON
SCC
Note
Do not go to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot screen.
Power ON
Modules
2. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready,
perform the Startup procedure.
Shutdown
Prerequisite
1. The processing module must be in Stopped, Ready, or Offline status.
Perform SCC Shutdown

1. Access the Snapshot screen by selecting Overview and then Snapshot.
2. Select Shutdown F3.
4. When the screen turns blue, and a message about shutting down the SCC displays,
press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys simultaneously. Select Shutdown the computer, then
OK.
Note
Wait while the software applications shut down. A message displays informing
you that Shutdown is complete and you can turn off the power.
Note
You can choose to restart the SCC at this point.
5. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the central processing unit (CPU) for
10 seconds to power OFF the SCC.
Shut Down Processing

Module(s) and
1. Power OFF the processing module(s) and all peripherals.
Peripherals
P-401 Alignment of i1000SR Processing Center Cover Version - 201976-103_3848_1

P-401 Alignment of i1000SR Processing Center Cover
Purpose Alignment procedure for the i1000SR processing Center Cover Module i1000SR
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time 30 min
Loosen
Front Panel
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [1] that mount front
Note
This sometimes allows the front panel to re-align.
3. Close the lid and check alignment.
Note
If the cover overhangs the front panel or is
misaligned to the right or left, proceed to the next
step. If the panels line up OK, the procedure may
be terminated.
Remove
Front Panel
2. Loosen the two (2) captive screws [2] that mount front
3. Loosen the left and right front panel brackets and
retighten the brackets to ensure the brackets are
properly installed on the mounting posts.
4. Install the front panel using two (2) captive screws and
check alignment.
Note
be terminated.
Right
Support
1. Loosen the three (3) screws [3] that mount the right
Preparation
support.
Note
This will allow the right side of the skin to be re-
centered in relation to the processing center
cover.
Note
If alignment check reveals that the left side needs
alignment proceed to next step.
Left Support
Preparation
1. Loosen the three (3) screws [4] that mount the left
support.
Note
This will allow the right side of the skin to be re-
centered in relation to the processing center
cover.
Check Fit
and
1. Close the processing center cover and check alignment.
Alignment
Note
If the processing center cover overhangs the front
panel or is misaligned to the left or right, move the
left and right support as far as they go toward
aligning the processing center cover.
2. Tighten the three (3) screws on the left and right

supports.
3. Close the cover and check the alignment.
Note
be terminated.
Latch
Adjustment
1. Loosen two (2) screws [5] on each latch and move up or
down to align for proper closing.
2. Tighten the screws on the each latch.
3. Open and close the lid several times to ensure proper
alignment.
Note
This procedure may have to be done several
times to get the proper alignment.
Note
be terminated.
Cover
Adjustment
1. Loosen the twelve (12) screws [6] that hold the cover
assembly.
Note
Six screws are located on the left side and six
screws are located on the right side.
Cover
Adjustment
1. Close and open the lid 2 - 3 times. [7]
(continued)
2. Tighten all twelve (12) screws on the cover assembly.
Note
This will relieve potential stress on the processing
center cover, which can cause twisting and apply
torque to the lid during closing.
P-402 Heater Cooler Board Diagnostic Version - 201976-103_3849_2

P-402 Heater Cooler Board Diagnostic
Purpose This procedure documents how to troubleshoot the reagent cooler via the Heater Cooler Module i1000SR
Board.
Materials 92391 Debug Ribbon cable, Time Not
Required 203670 Heater Cooler Debug Cable, Assessed
14207-113 Laptop cable adapter
Electrostatic
Discharge Caution

the instrument.
Prerequisite
Note
The TEC temperature controller can be accessed either
through the FSE laptop or the SCC module on the
instrument.
Caution
The ribbon cable must be used when connecting to the
RS232 port on the Heater Cooler board. This will allow
the front of the Card Cage compartment to be closed
and help prevent any temperature variability during
diagnostics.
1. Open front of SCC card cage.

2. Connect to the RS232 debug port on the Heater Cooler
Board using the appropriate cable configuration below.
Note
Do not power off the Processing Center Module,
SCC or Laptop. Connect to SCC Interface panel
only if the multi-port has not been installed
and/or a LIS is not connected.
Laptop configuration: Heater Cooler bd RS232

port - Ribbon Cable - Debug Cable - Laptop
adapter cable - RS232 Laptop. [1]
SCC Interface Panel configuration: Heater
Cooler bd RS232 port - Ribbon Cable - Debug
Cable - Laptop adapter cable - LIS port on SCC
control panel. [2] (Only if LIS is not connected
and/or multi-port has not been installed).
Prerequisite
(continued)
Multi-port configuration: Heater Cooler bd RS232 port -
Ribbon Cable - Debug Cable- Port 3 on Multi-port. [3]
The Multi-port and SCC interface panel provides access to the

SCC hyper terminal.
Access
Laptop Hyper
1. Select Start.
Terminal
2. Select Run.
3. Type Hypertrm.exe.
4. Select OK.
5. If CLI terminal; has not been saved type CLI and select
OK.
6. Select Com1 from the Connect Using list.
7. Select OK.
8. Enter the following parameters for each field:
Bits/s = 9600
Data bits = 8
Parity = none
Stop bits = 1
Flow control = none
9. Select OK, then OK again.
Access SCC
Hyper
Terminal
3. Select New Task from the Windows Task manager
window.
4. Type Hypertrm.exe.
5. Select OK.
6. If CLI terminal has not been saved type CLI and select
OK.
7. Select Com5 from the Connect Using list.
8. Select OK.
9. Enter the following parameters for each field:
Bits/s = 9600
Data bits = 8
Parity = none
Stop bits = 1
Flow control = none
10. Select OK, then OK again.

Accessing the TEC Temperature Micro controller
The RS232 Debug Serial Port implements an interactive command line interface (CLI) that accepts one command at a time
(terminated by a carriage return), and sends any command completion status back to the serial port prior to accepting another
command. The Debug Serial Port will output a prompt to indicate that it is ready to receive a new command. The prompt follows the
following format: <CR><LF>#.
Where:
<CR> = Carriage Return Character
<LF> = Line Feed Character
# = Pound Sign Character
Each CLI command consists of a four-character command name string optionally followed by a space and one parameter. A carriage
return character terminates each CLI command.
Command Set
Description DBUG Read or Write the debug mode value for the TED cooler controller
Summary ERRS Read the TED cooler controller alarm & error status
HELP Display the Help Menu
STAT Read the current controller status
TEMP Read the current control thermistor temperature value (in degrees C)
DBUG
Command Set DBUG [debug_mode_value (0 to 9)]
Description Read or Write the debug mode value for the TED cooler controller. The debug mode value is an integer with the
Details following possible values:
0 = Debug Mode OFF (default)
1 = Display controller status
2 = Display thermistor temperature
3 through 9 are Undefined
If the debug mode value is non-zero, the requested debug information is sent to the CLI terminal window at each 1-
second interval. If the debug mode value equals 1, the following information is reported to the CLI terminal window
at each 1-second interval:
a. Timestamp (elapsed time in seconds since last reset)

b. R: Control Thermistor Resistance in Ohms
c. T: Control Thermistor Temperature in Degrees C
d. CPWM: Cooler TED PWM Output Duty Cycle in Percent
e. FPWM: Fan PWM Output Duty Cycle in Percent
f. FSPD: Fan Rotational Speed in Cycles/Second
g. ERRS: Controller Alarm & Error Status (see ERRS command description in below)
Example of CLI terminal screen:
86905: R=74492 T=4.98 CPWM=67.0 FPWM=67.0 FSPD=45 ERRS=0x00

Alarm & Error Conditions:
If T > 10C, a Temperature High Alarm is generated

If T < 0C, a Temperature Low Alarm is generated
If T > 50C (R < 10.968 kOhms), a Thermistor Shorted Error is generated
If T < -50C (R > 1692.965 kOhms), a Thermistor Open Error is generated
If FSPD < 5 CPS, a Stalled Fan Error is generated
Normal Reagent Cooler operating ranges:
The debug mode value is stored permanently in flash memory on the temperature controller. If a debug mode value
is not specified, the current value of the debug mode parameter stored in flash memory is returned. The default
value for the debug mode parameter is 0, which corresponds to debug mode OFF.
ERRS
Command ERRS reads the TED cooler controller alarm & error status. The alarm & error status is reported as a single byte in
Description hexadecimal notation. Each bit in the hex byte represents a particular status condition according to the following
table:
ERRS
Command
Hexadecimal to Bit Number Conversion
Description
(continued) ERRS will be in a hexadecimal format. You must first convert Hexadecimal to Binary. Translate each hexadecimal
digit into its 4-bit binary equivalent. See Hexadecimal/Binary chart below. Hexadecimal numbers will have an 0x
prefix. For example: 0x31.
0x31 translates into a 0011 0001 binary number. 0011=3 and 0001=1
To reference a particular Bit number of the Binary number:
The last four bits of the Binary number correspond to Bit numbers 3-0
The first four bits of the Binary number correspond to Bit numbers 7-4
Example: Binary number 0011 0001 translates into the following bit numbers:
Examples of Hex to Bit Conversion
Reagent Cooler is operating normally. No errors:

ERRS=0x00
Hex to Binary conversion using table above = 0000 0000
Binary to Bit conversion see table below:
ERRS
Command
Lower Reagent Cooler Fan error:
Description
(continued) 383410: R=74453 T=4.99 CPWM=0.0 FPWM=19.7 FSPD=0 ERRS=0x10
ERRS=0x10
Lower reagent cooler fan error and high temp alarm:

ERRS=0x11
ERRS
Command
High temp alarm:
Description
(continued) 383639: R=54767 T=11.50 CPWM=100.0 FPWM=100.0 FSPD=61 ERRS=0x01
ERRS=0x01
Cycle Power
to Processing
Module 1. Close the terminal by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the window.
2. Select Yes to disconnect the terminal.
3. Select No so the session is not saved.
4. Cycle power to the processing module.
Log Off as
FSE
1. Select Log on F2 from the Snapshot screen.
Note
The User Name field displays and is populated with the name FSE.
2. Press Delete to delete the FSE name.

Note
3. Select Done.
4. Verify that nothing is listed on the startup screen after Operator.
P-403 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i1000SR) Version - 201976-103_516_3

P-403 Pre-Installation Power Measurement Procedure (i1000SR)
Purpose This procedure is used to verify power requirements during the pre-site, installation, or an Module i1000SR
onsite visit.
Materials Multimeter Time 5 min
Required
WARNING
Measure
Voltage with
1. Plug the Black wire lead into the port labeled Com on the
Breaker
bottom of the digital volt meter and plug the Red wire lead into
Closed
the port labeled "+" (plus) on the bottom of the digital volt
(Power ON)
meter.
2. Select the setting for AC voltage reading (usually represented
by the symbol V~).
Note
The display should read VAC.
3. Measure the power readings at the outlet and record in the

Note
Breaker Closed section of the Pre-Site Checklist.
Conduit measurement can be at the
WARNING metal box the outlet is in, the metal
Line 1 and 2 contain electrical current! Never touch pipe the electrical wires are running up
the exposed metal probes of the digital meter with the wall in, or the outlet faceplate
your fingers, or touch the two probes together at screw.
the exposed metal areas, or an electrical shock
could occur.
4. Verify that the readings fall within the ranges specified in the
Pre-Site Checklist.
Measure
Voltage with
1. Locate the instrument breaker switch. See Pre-Site Checklist
Breaker
(60 Hz Power Measurements or 50 Hz Power Measurements)
Open (Power
for circuit breaker identification and proper power line
OFF)
amperage.
Note
A 220V breaker requires a double switch.
2. Flip the breaker switch to OFF.
Note
No other analyzers, lights or outlets should have gone
off since this is a dedicated power line.
3. Go back to the outlet, measure the power and record the

readings in the breaker off section of the Pre-Site Checklist.
4. Verify that all readings fall within the specification ranges listed
in the Pre-Site Checklist.
5. If the readings are outside of the specification range, the
customer should contact a qualified electrician for resolution.
P-404 Reagent Access Door Lubrication Version - 201976-103_3850_2

P-404 Reagent Access Door Lubrication
Purpose This procedure documents information about the Reagent Access Door Lubrication on the Module i1000SR
i1000SR.
Materials Super Lube Grease (2-94851-02) Time 15 min
Required
Shutdown
Processing
Module
Removal of
Reagent
1. Remove the Reagent Access Door mechanism cover.
Access
2. Remove the four (4) screws that mount the TOP plate
Doors
of the Reagent Access Door.
Check Pin for

Lubrication
1. Pull the top plate off carefully.
2. Check for lubrication on the pin located on the drive
gear.
Note
If little or no lubrication exists, place a small
bead of Super Lube Grease along the length of
the shaft at 90°, 180°, 270° and 360° places
around the Reagent Lid drive pin.
Install
Reagent
1. Install the Reagent Access Door mechanism.
Access Door
Note
Ensure that the drive pin engages the slot in the
Door Plate.
Startup
Processing
Center
Module
Verification
1. Test the Reagent Access Door Motor using 5550 RSH
Motor Test Diagnostic procedure.
or
1. Type the following commands in the SCC terminal.
1>SET_MODULE 0
0>RSH_COMP_INIT COOLER_DOOR
0>RSH_COOLER_DOOR OPEN
0>RSH_COOLER_DOOR CLOSE
P-405 Wash Cup Assembly Check Version - 201976-103_4325_2

P-405 Wash Cup Assembly Check
Purpose This procedure provides instructions on performing M&D (Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedure) Module i1000SR
6200 CLI Terminal Simulator to verify the proper operation of the wash cup assembly.
The wash cup solenoids S1, S2 and S3 will be opened so that liquid is evacuated from the inner and
center wells of the wash cup assembly.
Note
Valve S3 is never used and may not be present in some systems. Follow instructions in Step
5f if S3 is not present.
Materials Disposable pipette, Time 15 min

Required DI water
Prepare Processing
Module
1. Prepare Processing Module
Verification of the
Wash Cup
1. Collect a small container of DI water and a syringe.
Assembly
2. Open the processing module cover.
3. Use the syringe to fill Center and Inner Wells of the
wash cup assembly to the top with DI water.
4. Select System > Diagnostics > Module 5 > Utilities
> 6200 CLI Terminal Simulator > Perform > OK >
Proceed.
5. Type the following commands in the User Input field
to test each solenoid valve:
a. vacuum on
b. sol 38 set 1 to open the S1 (upper valve) and
observe that water is evacuated out of the
Center Well.
c. sol 38 set 0 to close the S1 valve.
Note
Refill the Center Well if needed.
d. sol 39 set 1 to open the S2 (middle valve) and

Inner Well.
e. sol 39 set 0 to close the S2 (middle valve).
Note
If Valve S3 is not present, proceed to
Step 6.
f. sol 40 set 1 to open the S3 (lower valve) and
Center Well.
g. sol 40 set 0 to close the S3 (lower valve).
6. Exit 6200 CLI Terminal Simulator.
Log Off as FSE

1. Select Done.
2. Log off as FSE.
3. Set the system to READY status.
P-55 3 Point Optics Verification Procedure Version - 96756-111_235_1

P-55 3 Point Optics Verification Procedure
This procedure verifies the installation of a new reader. Diagnostic procedure 1045 Optics Verification i2000,
Purpose (i2000/i2000SR) and 1047 Optics Verification (i1000SR) check the optics at three (3) points on the Module i2000SR,
curve. i1000SR
Note
Diagnostic 1045 is available in Maintenance and Diagnostic CD 3.0 and higher.
Optics Verifier Reagent Kit 1 hr

Materials Time
Required
Prepare Optics Verifier Kit

Reagents
1. Thaw solutions two (2) hours at room temperature and mix by inversion.
2. Remove any bubbles and place a septum on each bottle.
Perform Optics Verification

Procedure (i2000/i2000SR)
1. Remove any reagent bottles from the inner carousel.
Note
Note bottle location. Bottles must be removed from the system and
returned to their original positions after completing this procedure.
2. Perform diagnostic procedure 1045 Optics Verification.

3. When prompted, load Verifier Solutions #1, #2, and #3.
4. When procedure is completed, remove, cap, and refrigerate the Optics Verifier
Solution bottles.
Note
Once thawed, verifier solution remains stable for 12 days at 2-8° C
(35.6-46.4° F).
5. Reinstall any reagent bottles removed from the inner carousel.
Perform Optics Verification

Procedure (i1000SR)
1. Perform diagnostic procedure 1047 Optics Verification.
2. When prompted, load Verifier Solutions #1, #2, and #3.
3. When the procedure is completed, remove, cap, and refrigerate the Optics
Verifier Solution bottles.
Note
Once thawed, verifier solution remains stable for 12 days at 2-8° C
(35.6-46.4° F).
P-672 Articulated Arm Tension Adjustment Version - 204739-101_5008_2

P-672 Articulated Arm Tension Adjustment
Purpose To provide articulated arm tension adjustment Module c4000, i1000sr

Materials Required Standard FSE toolkit Time 15 min
Adjust
Arm
Tension
1. To adjust the arm tension so it will stay where you set it, use a 13mm wrench
and rotate the angled bolt (see caution note below).
Continue to adjust the arm until it will stay stationary when moved to a new position
(several turns may be required).
CAUTION!
The bottom nut will turn during adjustment of the top nut; DO NOT apply any tool
to the bottom nut. Serious damage to the Arm may occur if these instructions are
not followed
ARCHITECT c4000 Service and Support Manual (Version 204733-102) • © 2009, 2012 • ARCHITECT, i1000SR, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, c16000, ci16200, ci4100
are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in various jurisdictions. c4000, i4000, i6000, i8000 and ARCHITECT�ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories in
various jurisdictions. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
null
P-673 Articulated Arm Monitor Adjustment Version - 204739-101_5009_2

P-673 Articulated Arm Monitor Adjustment
Purpose To provide articulated arm keyboard adjustment Module c4000, i1000sr

Monitor Tilt Forward

and Backward
1. Tilt the monitor up and down and ensure it moves freely as
shown.
2. To adjust the monitor’s ability to tilt, remove the monitor top

cover and locate the adjustment screw.
3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, adjust the arm until the monitor

moves freely as shown.

null
P-674 Articlated Arm Keyboard Angle Adjustment Version - 204739-101_5010_2

P-674 - Articulated Arm Keyboard Angle Adjustment
Purpose To provide articulated arm Monitor adjustment Module c4000, i1000sr

Set Keyboard
Angle
1. Tilt the monitor up and down and ensure it moves freely as shown.
2. To adjust the monitor’s ability to tilt, remove the monitor top cover and
locate the adjustment screw.

3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, adjust the arm until the monitor moves freely
as shown.

null
Field Updates are distributed in ISA EDOC-022 current version. See History Report for change listing. Developed by GSS ePublishing. Abbott Service and Support Information • Copyright 2015 •
Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064. All rights reserved. Trademark references listed in the ISA and TSB databases. Procedure Database control number DA-S00787 current version.

M & D Search Criteria Revision Date --- 2/2/2012
UsedOn: Procedure Number:
c16000
c4000 Description:
c8000
i1000SR Scope:
i2000

User: Type: Software Category:
Version:
ADMIN Diagnostics 2.6/3.1x As Needed
CSC Maintenance 3.0 Bar Code Readers
FSE 4.0x Carousels
Operator 5.0x Daily
5.1x Fluidics Wash

80 Record(s) returned.
= Click to sort
UsedOn Software Procedure User Type // Module Category Status Scope Option Time Special Tools
Description Module// Number
Version
i1000SR 8.0x 1005 Optics Test CSC Diagnostics // 1,2 Optics/ Stopped, CMIA Reader is tested none 5
i1000SR Temperature Ready, with low level
Warming commands. Twenty
sets of reads are taken
at 3 different delay
times. If any reads are
zero the test fails.
i1000SR 8.0x 1022 Optics Operator Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Ready, Note 2 min None
Background i1000sr Temperature Warming Verify that the
covers are
closed and
that the
sensors are
not bypassed
prior to
running this
procedure.
Three background
readings are taken
during this procedure.
One with no RV in
position, the second
with an empty RV and
the third with Pre-
Trigger solution in the
RV.
Normalization and
linearity parameters
are not used during
this procedure. Raw
counts must be
between 3 RLU - 500
RLU.
i1000SR 8.0x 1032 Shutter Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Stopped, The shutter moves to Open and 1 min None
i1000sr Temperature Ready, two positions during check sensors
Warming this procedure, Closed test
and Open to verify Close and
correct operation. check sensors
test
Open/close
repeatedly test
i1000SR 8.0x 1047 Optics FSE Diagnostics// 1 Optics/ Ready, To verify the optics 15 min Optics Verifier Solution (LN06F75-
Verification i1000SR Temperature Warming CMIA reader is working 60)
as expected.
Normalization and
linearity factors are
verified by taking five
reads from the three
levels of optics
normalization solution
and comparing the
reads to the standard.
The three reads taken
are 376, 1,504, and
94,000 attomoles.
Background levels are
also verified.
i1000SR 8.0x 1109 Wash Cup FSE Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, To set the pipettor 3 min Lint-free tissues
Pre-alignment i1000SR Ready, probe position at the Deionized water
Warming wash cup required for
flushing the system.
This procedure is used
during i1000SR
installation.
i1000SR 8.0x 1110 Pipettor Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, Pipettor probe 10 min Cotton swab or lint-free
Calibration i1000SR Ready, positioning is set for all tissue
Warming positions required for Deionized water
aspirating and Sample carrier
dispensing specimens Carrier calibration tool
and reagents during (01P16-01)
processing.
Probe straightness is
determined.
i1000SR 8.0x 1152 Probe Operator Diagnostics// 1 Pipettors Ready, Probe straightness Probe 3 min none
Straightness/Align i1000SR Warming and/or alignment are straightness
Test tested during this Probe
procedure. Probe alignment
straightness measures
the difference at 2
positions of the probe
and compares the
position to the previous
pipettor calibration.
Probe alignment
moves the probe to
positions allowing
visual observation of
the probe position in
the wash cup and
process path.
i1000SR 8.0x 1165 Pipettor Operator Diagnostics// 1 Pipettors Stopped, The pipettor is moved Wash cup 1 min none
Move i1000SR Ready, to the wash cup to Process path
Warming remove the pipettor
probe or toward the
rear of the process
path for accessing
processing center
components during this
procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 1246 Visual CSC Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Microparticles are 20 min Microparticle bottle from reagent kit
Particle Capture i1000SR Wash Warming dispensed into 15 RVs (once the microparticle bottle is
Check during this procedure. used for this procedure the kit is
The microparticles are no longer used)
washed so that 5 RVs
are washed with only
probe 1, 5 RVs with
only probe 2 and 5
RVs with only probe 3.
RVs are moved to the
RV access door for
removal and visual
inspection.
i1000SR 8.0x 1254 Residual FSE Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Fifteen numbered and 15 min Gravimetric Balance
Volume i1000SR Wash Warming weighed RVs are
loaded by the user
Wash Buffer is
dispensed into then
aspirated out of the
RVs. After aspiration
the user removes and
reweighs the RVs to
determine residual
volume.The difference
between the weights
for each RV is
determined. This
average difference
should be <9 µL (mg)
and a S.D. <2 µL (mg).
Visual inspection:
(No special tools
required)
The fluid remaining in
the RVs may be used
as a qualitative visual
indication of Wash
Zone function. The
final RV should have
approximately 2 drops
in the bottom and no
evidence of splashing
in the RV.
i1000SR 8.0x 2052 WZ Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, Wash zone aspiration 10 min none
Aspiration Test i1000SR Wash Warming is tested during this
procedure. The wash
zone dispenses and
aspirates buffer from
14 RVs. The operator
is instructed to remove
the RVs and determine
if the RV is half full of
buffer.
i1000SR 8.0x 2057 WZ Valve FSE Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Fluidics Ready, The pressure is none 12 min none
Pressure Check i1000SR Wash Warming measured in the wash
zone manifold tubing to
test for highly restictive
valves.
i1000SR 8.0x 2060 Pipettor CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming dispensing precision Tap water
and accuracy of the Sample cup
pipettor by gravimetric Sample carrier
measurement. Liquid is
aspirated and
dispensed into 20 pre-
weighed RVs. 50 µL of
tap water or saline is
aspirated and
dispensed into the first
15 RVs. 1000 µL of
buffer is dispensed into
the last 5 RVs
(bypassing the
syringe). RVs are
weighed empty and
weighed again after
liquid is dispensed.
The operator then
calculates the
difference.
For the first 15 RVs,

The final result must
be between 46 µL
(mg) and 51 µL (mg)
and the CV must be
less than or equal to
1.0%.
For the last 5 RVs,

each result must be
greater than or equal
to 900 µL (mg).
Visual inspection:
Perform diagnostic
procedure 2070
Pipettor Check.
i1000SR 8.0x 2062 Pre-Trigger CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the 15 min Gravimetric balance
Gravimetric i1000SR Warming dispensing precision
and accuracy of Pre-
Trigger by gravimetric
measurement. Fifteen
RVs are weighed
empty and weighed
again after 100 µL of
Pre-Trigger is
dispensed. The
operator then
calculates the
difference. The final
result must be between
95 µL (mg) and 105 µL
(mg) and the CV must
be 1.0%.
Visual inspection:
(No special tools
required)
The fluid in the RVs
may be used as a
qualitative visual
indication of Pre-
Trigger function. The
final volume should be
approximately 100 µL.
i1000SR 8.0x 2063 Trigger CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the 15 min Gravimetric balance
and accuracy of
Trigger by gravimetric
RVs are weighed
empty and weighed
Trigger is dispensed.
The operator then
calculates the
285 µL (mg) and 315
µL (mg) and the CV
must be 1.0%.
Visual inspection:
(No special tools
required)
may be used as a
qualitative visual
indication of Trigger
function. The final
volume should be
i1000SR 8.0x 2065 Wash Zone CSC Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, To measure the 15 min Gravimetric balance
and accuracy of the
wash zone by
gravimetric
RVs are weighed
empty and weighed
buffer is dispensed.
The operator then
calculates the
360 µL (mg) and 440
µL (mg) and the CV
must be 2.0%.
Visual inspection:
(No special tools
required)
may be used as a
qualitative visual
indication of Wash
Zone function. The
final volume should be
i1000SR 8.0x 2070 Pipettor Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, The pipettor aspirates 50 10 min Saline or tap water
Check i1000SR Warming and dispenses either a 250 Sample carriers
single 50 µL or 5 Sample cups
dispenses of 50 µL of Calibrated manual pipettor
liquid into 5 RVs. The (capable of pipetting 50 µL
sample pipettor also or 250 µL and 900µL)
dispenses 1000 µL of
buffer from the pump
(bypassing the
syringe) into 5 RVs.
The user is instructed
to use a calibrated
pipettor to dispense 50
µL or 250 µL of saline
or tap water into an
empty RV and 900 µL
of saline or tap water
into a second RV to be
used as a reference.
The user removes the
RVs from the RV
access door and
compares the amount
of liquid dispensed by
the pipettor to the
reference.
i1000SR 8.0x 2072 Pre-Trigger Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 100 µL 10 min Saline or tap water
Check i1000SR Warming dispense or 3 Calibrated manual pipettor
dispenses of 100 µL of (capable of pipetting 100
Pre-Trigger is µL or 300 µL)
dispensed into 5 RVs.
to use a calibrated
pipettor to dispense
100 µL or 300 µL of
saline or tap water into
an empty RV to be
RVs from the RV
access door and
compares the amount
of Pre-Trigger
dispensed by the Pre-
Trigger /Trigger
manifold to the
reference.
i1000SR 8.0x 2073 Trigger Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 300 µL 10 min Saline or tap water
Trigger is dispensed µL or 900 µL)
into 5 Rvs. The user is
instructed to use a
calibrated pipettor to
dispense 300 µL or
900 µL of saline or tap
water into an empty
RV to be used as a
reference. The user
removes the RVs from
the RV access door
and compares the
amount of Trigger
dispensed by the Pre-
Trigger /Trigger
manifold to the
reference.
i1000SR 8.0x 2075 Wash Zone Operator Diagnostics// 1 Precision Ready, Either a single 400 µL 10 min Saline or tap water
buffer is dispensed into µL or 1200 µL)
15 RVs (5 RVs per
wash zone nozzle).
to use a calibrated
pipettor to dispense
400 µL or 1200 µL of
saline or tap water into
an empty RV to be
RVs from the RV
access door and
compares the amount
of buffer dispensed by
wash zone to the
reference.
i1000SR 8.0x 2136 Air Flush Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, Wash buffer, Trigger Wash Buffer 5 min Wash buffer transfer tubing
i1000SR Warming and Pre-trigger tubing Trigger Empty wash buffer reservoir
are flushed with air Pre-trigger
during this procedure Wash buffer
input tubing
End testing
i1000SR 8.0x 2137 Flush Fluids Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, This procedure flushes Operator Logon: 3 min none
i1000SR Warming the tubings with wash No Options
buffer, trigger and pre- CSC Logon:
trigger solutions. Select:
The following amounts
are flushed: Pipettor
Buffer: minimum 75 Wash zone
mL Pre-trigger
Pre-Trigger: 14 mL Trigger
Trigger: 14 mL All
Exit
Note
Performing
this
procedure
does not
reset the
clock for the
automatic
flush.
Note
To flush
wash buffer,
inventory
status must
be greater
than 25%
i1000SR 8.0x 2138 Long Term Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Ready, All pumps are flushed 30 min 4 Liter container of
Shutdown i1000SR Warming with air, then water, deionized water
then air, and all RVs Empty 4 Liter container
are removed. The Wash buffer reservoir
pressure monitor will Wash buffer transfer
be left dry. tubing
Deionized water
i1000SR 8.0x 2160 Prime Wash Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 100 µL Wash Buffer 1 min none
Zone i1000SR Warming dispenses through the
valves into 3 RVs in
the Wash Zone during
this procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 2162 Prime Pre- Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, 200 µL Pre-Trigger 1 min none
Trigger and i1000SR Warming and Trigger Solutions
Trigger dispense into two RVs
at the valves in the
pre-trigger/trigger
manifold.
i1000SR 8.0x 2182 ARM FSE Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, The ARCHITECT ARM 45 min ARM decontamination kit (7-
Decontamination // Ready, accessory is 78172-01) 0.5% Sodium
SCC Warming decontaminated during hypochlorite
this procedure ARM Concentrated wash buffer
(LN06C54)
i1000SR 8.0x 2190 Internal Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, The Wash Buffer 90 min Absorbent tissues/towels
Decontamination i1000SR Warming fluidics system is Bleach preparation
decontaminated during container with 5L 0.5%
this procedure. sodium hypochlorite
solution
Sodium hypochlorite is Buffer filter
pumped into the buffer Concentrated Wash Buffer
fluidics and allowed to (1L bottle)
remain for 10 minutes. Internal Decon Extension
After 10 minutes the Tubing/Cable Kit
sodium hypochlorite is Probe Conditioning
pumped out as waste Solution
and buffer is pumped Reagent carrier
through the system to Wash buffer preparation
clear the fluidic tubing. container
Wash buffer transfer
tubing
i1000SR 8.0x 3002 Reagent Operator Diagnostics// 1 Carousels Stopped, The reagent carousel Carriers 10 min Reagent carriers
Carousel Test i1000SR Ready, is moved and checked currently
Warming for step loss during this loaded in
procedure. reagent
carousel
Single reagent
carousel
position
All reagent
carousel
positions
Exit
i1000SR 8.0x 3120 Vortexer Operator Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, Vortexer function is Vortexer # 1 2 min none
Test i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, tested. The vortexers Vortexer # 2
Warming are tested at eight All
different speeds in up
and down positions.
Speeds tested (RPMs):
1502; 1755; 2016;
2264; 2520; 2765;
3034; 3289
i1000SR 8.0x 3122 Vortexer CSC Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, This procedure tests Vortexer # 1 5 min Dye diluted with buffer
Splash i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, splashing of the Vortexer # 2
Warming vortexer.
i1000SR 8.0x 3145 RV CSC Diagnostics// 1 or 2 Reaction Ready, All 23 RVS (reaction 20 min none
Load/Unload Test i1000SR Mechanisms Warming vessels)are unloaded.
The operator has the
option to have the
system load 23 new
RVs or leave the
process path empty.
i1000SR 8.0x 3155 Diverter Operator Diagnostics// 1 Reaction Stopped, The wash zone inlet, RV unload 2 min none
Test i1000SR Mechanisms Ready, wash zone outlet, and Wash zone
Warming RV unload diverters inlet
are tested during this Wash zone
procedure. Diverters outlet
are moved 10 times. All
i1000SR 8.0x 3180 Vacuum Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Ready, Operation of the Wash zone 5-10 none
System Test i1000SR Warming vacuum system, Individual wash min
vacuum accumulator zone positions
and drain valves is Wash cup
tested during this Vacuum
procedure. system integrity
Turn vacuum
On or Off
Run all tests
sequentially
i1000SR 8.0x 3190 Waste Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The waste pump Waste pump Variable Tap water
Sensors Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, pressure switch, liquid pressure switch
Warming waste container full Liquid waste
sensor, and solid container full
waste container sensor
present switch are Solid waste
tested during this container
procedure. present sensor
i1000SR 8.0x 3230 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, The bar code reader is 1-4 min Sample carriers
Reader Test RSH Readers Ready, tested during this SH bar code tool (06E69-
Warming procedure. Only the 01) or bar coded sample
first 20 characters of tubes (optional)
each bar code label Reagent carriers
are displayed. Reagent kit bottles (100
test kits only)
i1000SR 8.0x 3240 Bar Code Operator Diagnostics// 0 Bar Code Stopped, This procedure 2 min Sample carrier
Calibration RSH Readers Ready, calibrates positions for SH bar code tool (06E69-
Warming bar coded sample 01)
tubes and reagent
bottles.
i1000SR 8.0x 3253 Bar Code FSE Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows Code 39 large 3 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, the configuration of intercharacter
Warming additional bar code gap
parameters. Codabar start
stop character
match
Codabar large
intercharacter
gap
Transition
value
Exit
i1000SR 8.0x 3310 RSH Test Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The operation of the Carrier test 5-10 Sample carriers
RSH Ready, RSH and bar code Lights test min 5 bar coded sample tubes
Warming reader are tested Carrier Reagent carriers
during this procedure. transport Reagent kit bottles (100
motion test test kits only)
i1000SR 8.0x 3312 Carrier FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, The carrier transport is 1 min none
Transport Move RSH Ready, moved to the
Warming maintenance location
i1000SR 8.0x 3330 RSH FSE Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedure allows Initialize carrier 5-15 Sample carriers
Alignment Test RSH Ready, the user to visually transport min Reagent carriers
Warming check the carrier Check sample Sample cups/tubes
transport alignment at carrier at RSH
various RSH positions, section(s)
to include the Check sample
load/unload area, carrier at
aspiration area, and aspiration area
reagent carousel. Check reagent
carrier at RSH
section(s)
Check reagent
carrier
placement on
carousel
i1000SR 8.0x 3405 Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The sensors for the Reagent 5 min none
Interlock/Carousel i1000SR Sensors Ready, processing center carousel home
Sensor Test Warming cover and reagent Reagent carrier
carousel cover are latch
tested during this Reagent carrier
procedure. detect
Reagent
carousel cover
interlock
Reagent
carousel cover
integrity
Processing
center cover
interlock
i1000SR 8.0x 3420 Level Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/Stopped, Wash buffer, Pre- Wash buffer 1-2 min none
Sensors Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, trigger and Trigger Pre-trigger
Warming Level Sensors are Trigger
checked during this All
procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 3535 Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, RVs containing buffer 75 min External thermometer
Temperature i1000SR Warming are equilibrated in each (LN08C94-88)
Check - Manual of the 3 process path WZ probe maintenance
zones during this water bottle (LN 6E68)
procedure. Tap water
in the WZ probe
maintenance water
bottle is loaded on the
reagent carousel by
the RSH. When
instructed, the user
inserts a thermometer
probe to measure the
temperature. Process
path temperature must
be between 36.4° C-
37.6° C and reagent
cooler temperature
must be between .0°
C-12.0° C.
i1000SR 8.0x 3540 Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Stopped, Temperatures in the Process path 1 min none
Temperature i1000SR Ready, Processing Module are Trigger & pre-
Status Warming read and their status trigger
displayed. Wash zone
Normal temperature Reagent cooler
Ranges: Ambient
Process path: 36.4° C- All
37.6° C
Triggers: 32.0° C-37.6°
C
Wash zone: 34.0° C-
36.5° C
Reagent cooler: 2.0°
C-12.0° C
Note
Ambient
temperature
does not
have a
range and
will not pass
or fail. The
value is for
informational
use only.
The ambient
temperature
value is not
available for
the ci4100
system.
i1000SR 8.0x 3630 LLS Test Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, The ability of the RV2 8 min Sample cups
i1000SR Wash Warming pipettor probe to detect Sample Sample tubes
liquid at the RV2, Reagent One - three reagent
sample, and reagent carousel: bottles (100 test kit)
carousel inner, middle, Inner reagent
and outer locations is carousel
tested during this Middle reagent
procedure. carousel
Outer reagent
If logged on as FSE carousel
and the Reagent All locations
carousel option is
selected, the
procedure will allow
the FSE to specify the
reagent bottle location
to test.
i1000SR 8.0x 3810 Pressure Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Ready, The pipettor board and 2 min none
Monitoring Test i1000SR Wash Warming pressure monitor of the
pipettor are tested
i1000SR 8.0x 3850 PC Board FSE Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, The power supply, 1 min none
Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, motor driver boards,
Warming and DC driver I/O
boards are tested for
power interrupt error
conditions during this
procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 4100 Buffer Run Operator Maintenance// 1 As Needed Ready, This procedure allows 60 min 2 Reagent kits (3 bottles
i1000SR Warming the simulation of per kit) - bottles must be
running assays using empty
wash buffer instead of 5 Sample carriers
reagents to 2 Reagent carriers
troubleshoot system Sample cups/tubes
failures.
Note: You can enter

the number of tests to
be run when logged on
as FSE.
i1000SR 8.0x 4110 Module Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows 1 min none
Initialization i1000SR Ready, you to perform a
Warming processing module
initialization with the
processing center
covers open.
i1000SR 8.0x 4120 RSH Operator Diagnostics// 0 Modules Stopped, This procedures allows 1 min none
Initialization RSH Ready, you to perform a
Warming sample handler
initialization with the
processing center
cover open.
i1000SR 8.0x 4150 Functional Operator Diagnostics// 1 Modules Stopped, This procedure RV loading Variable none
Area Tests i1000SR Ready, provides the ability to Process path:
Warming exercise and test the Process path
functionality of various only
areas of the Process path
processing center and complete
reagent carousel. The Wash zone Z-
following functional axis only
area options are: Reagent
carousel:
RV loading Dispersion
Process path Reagent
Reagent carousel
carousel complete
Pipettor Pipettor:
All areas Z-axis only
Simulated
assay
movement
All areas
i1000SR 8.0x 5145 Wash cup Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, To verify the wash cup None 3 min
valves Test i1000SR Sensors Ready, valves are correctly
Warming connected.
i1000SR 8.0x 5150 Motor Tests Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedures tests Pipettor and 2 min none
i1000SR Motors Ready, the homing of the syringe:
Warming pipettor, syringe, Pipettor Z axis
process path, and Pipettor theta
reagent carousel axis
motors. Pipettor syringe
Home all
Process path:
Process path
RV loader
Wash zone
Home all
Reagent
carousel:
Reagent
carousel
Reagent
access door
Home all
i1000SR 8.0x 5160 Pump Motor Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure tests Pre-trigger 2 min none
Tests i1000SR Motors Ready, the homing of the pre- Trigger
Warming trigger, trigger, wash Buffer
buffer, and wash zone Wash zone
pump motors. Home all
i1000SR 8.0x 5165 Valve Tests Operator Diagnostics// 1 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests Wash zone: 1-2 min none
i1000SR Sensors Ready, the wash zone, pre- WZ dispense
Warming trigger, trigger, valve 1 (V1)
vacuum, pipettor WZ dispense
syringe, wash cup valve 2 (V2)
drain, and liquid waste WZ dispense
valves. valve 3 (V3)
WZ bypass
valve 4 (V4)
WZ aspirate
valve
All
Pre-
trigger/trigger:
Pre-trigger
dispense valve
(V1)
Pre-trigger
bypass valve
(V2)
Trigger
dispense valve
(V3)
Trigger bypass
valve (V4)
All
Wash cup:
Wash cup
upper valve
Wash cup
outer drain
valve
Wash cup
inner drain
valve
All
Other:
Pipettor syringe
valve
Reagent cooler
condensate
valve
Buffer inlet
valve
Accumulator
drain valve
Vacuum filter
valve
All
i1000SR 8.0x 5420 Crash Operator Diagnostics// 1 Pipettors Stopped, This procedure tests 1 min none
Sensor Test i1000SR Ready, the pipettor probe
Warming crash sensor.
i1000SR 8.0x 5550 RSH Motor Operator Diagnostics// 0 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure tests Carrier 2 min none
Test RSH Motors Ready, the motors associated transport:
Warming with the carrier Carrier
transport, reagent transport Z-
bottle rotator, and the axis
reagent carousel Carrier
access door. transport theta-
axis
Carrier
transport X-
axis
Home all
Bottle rotator
Reagent
access door
i1000SR 8.0x 5555 RSH Operator Diagnostics// 0 Solenoids/ Stopped, This procedure tests Rail guide 5 min Reagent carrier with at
Sensor Tests RSH Sensors Ready, the sensors associated Load/unload least one reagent bottle
Warming with the carrier area Sample carrier
transport, load/unload Reagent
area, and reagent access door
access door.
i1000SR 8.0x 5716 Turn 36V FSE Diagnostics// 1 Modules Stopped, This procedure turns 1 min none
Power Off and i1000SR Ready, off and on the 36 volt
On Warming power to all motors,
valves and solenoids
for the processing
module and RSH.
i1000SR 8.0x 5720 Fuse Status Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fuses/ Stopped, This procedure 1 min none
i1000SR Motors Ready, displays the status of
Warming the +5, +12, -12, and
+24 volt fuses.
i1000SR 8.0x 6000 Retrieve FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, Determines the total 1 min none
Test Counts SCC Ready, number of tests
Warming initiated and tests
completed for the
selected processing
module. Test counts
may be cleared during
this procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 6004 Copy Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, Copies system Copy Backup Variable Blank or appendable CDR/CDRW
Backup Software SCC Ready, software backup to a software from or
Warming CD or replace a D: drive to CD CDR/CDRW containing
backup on the D drive Copy Backup compressed backup software
with one on a CD. software from
Note: Performing this CD to D: drive
procedure does not
backup the system
software.
i1000SR 8.0x 6007 SCC Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows Touch screen variable none
Utilities SCC Ready, the user to perform the calibration
Warming following functions: USB utilities
Check/Repair
Calibrate the ARCHITECT
touch screen database
monitor Clear CLI Port
View the USB
(i2000SR LAS
drive(s) only)
Eject the USB Abbottlink
drive(s) utilites
Check and (AbbottLink
repair the consolidated
ARCHITECT configuration
database only)
Clear the CLI Backup utilities
port (i2000SR
LAS only)
Initiate
AbbottLink
connector
utilities
(AbbottLink
consolidated
configuration
only)
If logged on as FSE, in
addition to the above
operations you will be
able to view backup
drives and look for
missing backup files.
i1000SR 8.0x 6008 Controller Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, To configure the PM 1 min none
Configuration SCC Ready, controller board after
Warming replacement. Bootcode
is downloaded to the
PM CPU.
i1000SR 8.0x 6009 Log Utilities Operator Diagnostics// 5 Utilities Stopped, To retrieve current logs Retrieve and Time Materials vary depending on the
SCC Ready, and memeory dump Copy Current variable option selected. Required
Warming file, copy the database Logs to USB materials may include:
to CD, and copy drive, CD CDR or CDRW disks
archived logs to CD. and/or Hard USB drive
If logged on as FSE a Drive
copy of the memory Copy database
dump can be retrieved to CD
without current logs. If Copy Archived
requested by Abbott Logs from Hard
personnel, the logs Drive to CD
may be cleared from Retrieve
the system. Memory Dump
File (FSE only)
Retrieve and Copy
Current logs to USB
drive, CD and/or Hard
Drive:
This option will copy
logs to the D drive and
USB drive or CD if
selected. In addition a
compresses archive
file containing the logs
is saved. Up to 5
archived files can be
saved.
For a complete list of
logs refer to P-204
Log Retrieval
Procedure
Note: An
AchivedLogModem.zip
file is generated when
logs are copied to the
hard drive. This file
contains all of the logs
except the Optics log.
This file is smaller and
should be used when
transferring logs via a
modem.
Copy Database to the

CD: This option will
compress and copy
the database to a CD.
Copy Archive Logs

from Hard Drive to
CD: This option will
copy up to 5
previously retrieved
compressed logs from
the D drive to a CD.
Retrieve Memory
Dump File: (FSE
only)
This option will
compress and copy a
memory dump file to a
CD. Refer to P-204
Log Retrieval
Procedure for
additional information.
i1000SR 8.0x 6029 Assay Operator Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Any This procedure prints Show installed 2 min None
Information SCC state one of the following: assay
information
A complete list Print IA
of all assays calibration bar
currently code labels
installed on Print CC
the system calibration bar
and their code labels
version Print a range
number. The of numbered
list contains bar code labels
the assay
number, assay
name and
version.
Calibration bar
code labels
A range of
numeric SID
bar code labels
i1000SR 8.0x 6038 External Operator Maintenance 5 As Needed Stopped, This procedure gives Supply and 5 min 0.5% Sodium hypochlorite
Decontamination // Ready, instructions for pump center Lint free tissue or gauze
SCC Warming decontaminating the (c system only)
external surfaces of Supply and
the ARCHITECT waste center (i
modules. system only)
Sample
handler
accessories
System control
center
Processing
module
external
surfaces
High
concentrated
waste bottle
(c system only)
ARM (i
System only)
i1000SR 8.0x 6100 Na Operator Maintenance// 5 As Needed Stopped, Procedure to calculate None 1min None
Hypochlorite SCC Ready, the volume of sodium
Calculator Warming (Na) hypochlorite
required to make a
specific volume of
sodium hypochlorite
solution.
i1000SR 8.0x 6114 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used Install: 2 min Assay CD-ROM
Install/Delete SCC Ready, to install all or selected or
Assays Warming assays. The procedure All groups ARCHITECT c System Assay CD-
is also used to delete Specific assay ROM
selected assays group (These or
NOTE: Prior to options will e-assay file
installing a new or depend on the
updated assay file, assay CD)
refer to the assay Return to main
CDROM or e-assay menu
customer information
for any special
instructions. When
installing an e-assay
file from Abbott mail,
the customer
information may be
viewed during the
installation procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 6115 ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used Install: 2 min D:\
Install/Delete SCC Ready, to install all or selected Single SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Procedures Warming procedures. The Multiple directory
procedure is also used All System Software CD-ROM
to delete selected USB drive associated with
procedures. Delete: a TSB or ISA
Single
Multiple
i1000SR 8.0x 6116 Update ADMIN Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Stopped, This procedure is used Install media options: 2 min D:\
6115 Procedure SCC Ready, to update diagnostic USB drive SERVICE\PROCEDURES\
Warming procedure 6115 CD directory
Install/Delete Hard Drive System Software CD-ROM
Procedure. USB drive associated with
a TSB or ISA
i1000SR 8.0x 6200 CLI FSE Diagnostics // 5 Utilities Ready, This procedure allows Time None
Terminal SCC Warming service to issue CLI variable
Simulator commands through an
M/D interface.
i1000SR 8.0x 6220 User- ADMIN Diagnostics// 5, Utilities Stopped, This procedure allows Create/Edit Time Materials vary depending on the
Defined SCC Ready, you to create, edit, Export variable option selected:
Maintenence Warming import, export, print Import CD-R or unformatted CD-RW
and view user-defined, View/Print Floppy disk
text-based USB flash drive
maintenance
procedures.
i1000SR 8.0x 6400 RSH Operator Maintenance// 0 As Needed Stopped, This procedure RSH sections 5 min 0.1% sodium hypochlorite
Cleaning RSH Ready, provides instructions Transport arm Deionized water
Warming for cleaning the Bar code Cotton swabs
following RSH reader Lint-free tissues
components: Bottle rotator
Aspiration area
RSH sections All
Carrier
transport arm
Bar code
reader
Bottle rotator
Aspiration area
i1000SR 8.0x 6405 Air Filter Operator Maintenance// 1 Monthly Stopped, This procedure 10 min Air filters
Cleaning i1000SR Ready, provides instructions Tap water
Warming for manually removing
dust buildup from the
card cage/SCC door
and card cage air
filters. Since the filters
must be reinstalled
dry, it is recommended
the filters be rotated
between two filters to
improve efficiency.
i1000SR 8.0x 6407 Probe Operator Maintenance// 1 Weekly Ready, This procedure 5 min Wash bottle with deionized
Cleaning - i1000SR Warming provides instructions water
Manual for manually cleaning Cotton swabs
the outside of the
pipettor and wash zone
probes to remove salt
buildup.
i1000SR 8.0x 6410 WZ Probe Operator Diagnostics// 1 Fluidics Stopped, This procedure 2 min none
Straightness i1000SR Wash Ready, provides instructions
Warming for visually checking
the straightness of the
wash zone probes.
Procedure 2052 WZ
Aspiration Test, should
be run at the
completion of this test.
i1000SR 8.0x 6440 Daily Operator Maintenance// 1 Daily Ready, This procedure 10 min WZ probe maintenance
Maintenance i1000SR Warming performs the following: water bottle (06E68-01)
Tap water or saline
Cleans the Reagent carrier
outside of the
wash zone
probes with
tap water or
saline
Mixes the
microparticle
bottles on the
reagent
carousel
Dries the
vacuum pump
filter
Flushes the
Wash zones,
pre-trigger and
trigger
manifolds
Primes the
Wash zones,
pre-trigger and
trigger
manifolds (five
200uL primes)
Verify that a
backup has
been
performed in
the last thirty
(30) days
Check the
database
integrity
NOTE: The backup

verification and
database integrity
check are only
performed on the
i1000SR processing
module when it is
module 1.
i1000SR 8.0x 6445 Pipettor/WZ Operator Maintenance// 1 Weekly Ready, The wash zone probes, 15 min Maintenance cleaning
Probe Cleaning i1000SR Warming temperature tubing and bottle (LN02G16-99)
sensors, and pipettor 0.5% sodium hypochlorite
probe are cleaned with solution
0.5% sodium Probe Conditioning
hypochlorite solution Solution (LN01L56)
and then conditioned
with probe conditioning
solution during this
procedure.
i1000SR 8.0x 6450 Wash Cup Operator Maintenance// 1 Weekly Stopped, The procedure 2 min Cotton swabs
Cleaning i1000SR Ready, provides instructions Deionized water
Warming for manually cleaning
the wash cup and
wash cup baffle with
deionized water to
remove salt buildup.
Server Host=gssweb.add.abbott.com; Database Host=ADDDALQ05; Database Catalog=MD

Field Updates are distributed in ISA EDOC-022 current version. See History Report for change listing. Developed by GSS ePublishing. Abbott Service and Support
Information • Copyright 2015 • Abbott Laboratories, Abbott Park, IL 60064. All rights reserved. Trademark references listed in the ISA and TSB databases. Procedure
Database control number DA-S00787 current version.

M & D Search Criteria Revision Date --- 2/2/2012
UsedOn: Procedure Number:
c16000
c4000 Description:
c8000
i1000SR Scope:
i2000

User: Type: Software Category:
Version:
ADMIN Diagnostics 2.6/3.1x As Needed
CSC Maintenance 3.0 Bar Code Readers
FSE 4.0x Carousels
Operator 5.0x Daily
5.1x Fluidics Wash

1 Record(s) returned.
= Click to sort
UsedOn Software Procedure User Type // Module Category Status Scope Option Time Special Tools
Module// Number
Version Description
i1000SR 4.0x, 1114 Carrier Operator Maintenance// 0 As Stopped, To align the carrier 12 min Sample
5.0x, Transport RSH Needed Ready, transport to the reagent (standalone) carriers
5.1x, Calibration Warming carousel latch actuator and 20 min Carrier
6.0x a sample carrier to the (ci4100) calibration
load/unload area. tool
(01P16-
01)
Cotton
swab or
lint-free
tissue
Deionized
water
Server Host=gssweb.add.abbott.com; Database Host=ADDDALQ05; Database Catalog=MD

Planned Maintenance
Process ISA Link
Preventive Maintenance Refer to ISA 117-020 (current version)
ABBOTT INSTRUMENT SERVICE ADVISORY
ADD ISA 117-020C
5132013-92616-JS
Active
Subject: Architect i1000SR Standardized Preventative Maintenance Document #: ISA 117-020C
and Total Call Procedures
Originator: Charlie Fang Product: ARCHITECT i1000SR (117)
Approved For Release: Heidi Syndergaard/ADD_DAL_HUB/ADD_HUB/ADD/US Site of Document Control: Dallas
Published Date: 05/13/2013 Effective Date:05/07/2012
Part / Kit #: See FSR Guide Procedure for Recommended Parts Part Availability: See Procedure
Classification: Preventive Maintenance (PM)

@ This document supersedes ISA 117-020B. @ = Change to information in the section
I. Distribution:
Worldwide
@ II. Purpose:
The purpose of this ISA is to notify the Area Service & Support Organizations of the Recommended
Standardized Preventative Maintenance and Total Call Procedures for the Architect i1000SR system.
@ Summary of changes:
Changed the subject line to Architect i1000SR Standardized Preventive Maintenance

and Total Call Procedures.
Removed frequency of performing preventative maintenance based on cycle counts.
Removed required PM parts and added them to recommended on-hand parts.
Added "as needed" to the previous required PM parts replacement steps.
Updated picture for comparison of a worn and new reagent carousel motor gear.
Updated PM checklist and Total Call Guide accordingly.
Added recommended on-hand part (7-202411-XX) Pinion gear kit i1000SR (used with
reagent carousel motor with replaceable gear 7-200635-XX)
III. Administrative Notes:

Activity items in the recommended PM can be performed in any order that fits the needs of the customer and
country/area service organization.
IV. Parts:
All required & recommended parts are highlighted in the PM FSR Guide attachment listed below. The Total
Call procedure does not specify any part requirements.
@ V. Attached Files:
Title Attachment Filename Filesize, Intended Use

Date, Time
& Zone
i1000SR i1000SR-PM-FSR-Guide (v1.4).pdf 1402 FSR Guide for
PM FSR @ KBytes, the Preventative
Guide @ @ 05/08/2013, Maintenance of
2:38 PM the Architect
GMT-6 i1000SR by
@ Abbott
Personnel.
i1000SR i1000SR-Customer-PM-Checklist 147 For distribution
Customer (Editable).docx @ KBytes, to customers
PM @ 05/06/2013, after completion
Checklist 10:07 AM of the Annual
@ GMT-6 @ Preventative
Maintenance of
the Architect
i1000SR by
Abbott
Personnel.
i1000SR i1000SR-Total-Call-FSR-Guide 328 FSR Guide for
Total Call (V1.3).pdf @ KBytes, the Total Call of
FSR Guide @ 05/08/2013, the Architect
@ 02:41 PM i1000SR by
GMT-6 @ Abbott
Personnel
i1000SR i1000SR-Total-Call-Customer- 69 KBytes, For distribution
Total Call Checklist 05/06/2013, to customers
Customer Editable).docx @ 10:10 AM after completion
Checklist @ GMT-6 @ of the Total Call
@ of the Architect
i1000SR by
Abbott
Personnel
Trademark: ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, i1000SR, ci4100, c8000, ci8200, c16000 and ci16200 are registered trademarks
of Abbott Laboratories. i4000, i6000, i8000, c4000, iSystem, cSystem and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories.
All other trademarks, brands, product names and trade names are the property of their respective
companies. All rights reserved. This document is Confidential for use by Abbott trained personnel only.
Admin Maintenance & Document # History:
END OF DOCUMENT
Reminders
 See Information Details table  Picture/info below
Safety Warning – See Hazards  i1000SR Service Manual
Table
Red Link = Live (Intranet)
Blue Link = Local (DVD set)
Overview i1000SR Total Call (@ISA 117-020C)  Target 20 Minutes

1 Instrument Review
1.1 Wear appropriate PPE & follow safety requirements for area
1.2 Review Levi-Jennings for one assay from each of the four groups (if applicable) for trends / issues
1.2a One Step 25: Examples include Progesterone, Cortisol, Testosterone
1.2b One Step 25(20-4) delayed: Examples include Estradiol, T-Uptake
1.2c Two Step 18-4: Examples include TT3, TT4, TSH
1.2d Two Step 4-4: Examples include B-hCG Stat, CK-MB Stat
1.3 Review maintenance is being completed on time & as required
1.4 Review message history for issues & trending
2 Lower Fluidics Area

2.1 Inspect area for leaks & dry buffer build up. Clean as needed.
2.2 Verify all tubing connections are tight & secure.
2.3 Check fittings on vacuum accumulator cap for cracks & kinked tubing.  1 1
2.3a Flush out vacuum accumulator bottle if build-up is present. Ensure cap is tight
 1 2.3
3 Bulk Solution / Solid Waste Area

3.1 Verify tubing connections are tight.  2
3.2 Verify waste platform movement is not obstructed.
3.3 Inspect Pre-Trigger / Trigger level sensor fittings for cracks and / or kinked tubing.  3 2
2 3.1  3 3.3
4 Reagent Carousel Area

4.1 Inspect reagent carousel for proper fit & function
4.2 Inspect cooling chamber gaskets for tears & wear; replace as needed.  4
4.3 Inspect & clean cooler condensation collection ring.
4.4 Re-install reagent carousel. Before securing the motor latch verify the carousel rotates freely on the v-wheels.
 4 4.2
5 Process Path
5.1 Inspect & clean as necessary the Wash zone & PT / T manifold assemblies.  5  6
5.2 Verify valves are tight 3
5.2a Utilize ISA 117-007(latest revision) for cleaning tips & techniques 
 5 5.1  6 5.1
6 Pipettor / LLS Antenna / Distribution PCB’s

6.1 Pipettor assembly
6.1a Check tubing connections for leakage & tighten as needed
6.2 Check pressure monitor connections for leakage and tighten as needed 4
7 Wash Cup / Upper Waste Manifold

7.1 Wash Cup assembly
7.1a Remove & clean wash cup baffle & check for leakage  7
7.1b Verify cable connections are secure  8
7.2 Upper Waste Manifold
7.2a Inspect thermistor tubing & connections  9
 7 7.1a  8 7.1b
9 7.2a
8 Pumps & Syringe

8.1 Pumps
8.1a Upper Pumps / Syringe
8.1b Inspect Trigger / Pre-trigger pumps & Sample Syringe for leakage & check all connections  10
8.1c Lower Pumps (located behind Trigger / Pre-trigger sliding tray)
8.1d Inspect Buffer & Transfer pumps for leakage & check all connections  11  12
 10 8.1b  11 8.1d
 12 8.1d
9 RSH
9.1 Clean BCR lens with lint free wipe such as lens paper or Kim Wipe 13
 13 9.1
10 Verify TSB Status

10.1 Verify all appropriate TSB’s are completed & documented
11 Exit Interview
11.1 Review Total Call checklist with customer
11.2 Customer confirms instrument operation
 Information Details  Checklist

1 If cracks found replace cap assembly Review Instrument History
2 If cracks found replace T/PT fitting Inspect bulk solution, waste, & reagent carousel area
3 If leakage is found at valves check gaskets
Inspect process path, pipettor, & wash cup area
4 If leakage is found replace pressure monitor. DO
NOT attempt to repair with teflon tape Inspect pumps & RSH area
Hazards
Potential Biohazard- Identifies an activity or area where
potentially infectious materials may be present.
Refer to Biological Hazards
Class 2 Laser Product - Warns against direct viewing
into the barcode laser beam or reflections from the beam.
Refer to Laser Hazards
Chemical Hazard - Identifies an activity or area where
hazardous chemicals are present. Refer to the Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert for specific
safety information.
Refer to Chemical Hazards
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
Reminders Red Link = Live (intranet)  See Tools & Materials table
Safety Warning – See Hazards  Picture/info below Blue Link = Local (DVD Set)
Table
 See Information Details table  i1000SR Service Manual
See Contact
Information
Overview i1000SR Preventative Maintenance (@ISA 117-020C)  4 Hours

1 Pre-Site Investigative Procedures
1.1 Review AbbottLink logs (if applicable) for issues
1.2 Prior to site visit, interview 1 for any ongoing problems / issues
1.3 Assemble necessary parts
2 Initial On-Site Investigative Procedures

2.1 Wear appropriate PPE & follow safety requirements for area
2.2 Review customer logs, noting any ongoing problems / issues
2.3 Review QC & Calibration history
2.4 Review TSB & ISA status of instrument
2.5 Verify customer has current backup of Hard Drive to Flash Media (or HDD) and CD
3 SCC / Module Shutdown

3.1 Perform system backup, if needed (M&D 6004)
3.2 Perform unload of reagent kits from reagent carousel. Store in refrigerated area.
3.3 Check power supply (P/S) LEDs
3.3a All voltage LEDs & temperature LEDs should be lit GREEN  1
3.3b UV (Under Voltage), OV (Over Voltage), & MM (Maintenance Mode) LEDs should NOT be lit  1
3.3c Additional information for the P/S LEDs  (P/S LEDs)
3.4 Verify reagent cooler, power supply, & card cage fans for proper operation  2  3
3.5 Check reagent cover LEDs on reagent distribution board to verify reagent cover battery condition.  4
3.5a Blinking ALIVE (upper) & STATUS (lower) LEDs indicate battery needs to be replaced  5
3.5b NOTE: Replacement batteries (type BR2032) are not stocked by Abbott & should be sourced locally
3.6 Inspect doors, covers, & hinges for misalignment, squeaks, etc.
3.7 Power off SCC & Processing Module  P-248 Startup and Shutdown / P-248 Startup and Shutdown
1 3.3a 3.3b  2 3.4  3 3.4

 4 3.5 5 3.5a
4 SCC / Card Cage / Power Supply Areas

4.1 Clean SCC / Card Cage / Power Supply compartments
4.2 Inspect & secure cable connections, as needed.
4.3 Inspect & clean card cage and SCC door air filters.  6  7
6 4.3  7 4.3
5 Lower Fluidics Area

5.1 Inspect area for leaks & dry buffer build up. Clean as needed.
5.2 Verify all tubing connections are tight & secure.
5.3 @Replace vacuum filter, as needed  8   (R&R K2.06 Vacuum Pump Filter) /
(R&R K2.06 Vacuum Pump Filter Assembly)
5.4 @ Replace reagent cooler condensate inline filter, as needed.  8 
5.5 @ Replace waste pump head, as needed.  9   (R&R K2.08 Waste Pump Head) / (R&R K2.08 Waste
Pump Head)
5.5a @ Replace in-line waste pump to pressure switch tubing check valve, as needed.  9 
5.6 Inspect & secure cable connections on fluidics distribution board & sensors, as needed.  10
5.7 Check fittings on vacuum accumulator cap for cracks & kinked tubing.  11
5.7a Flush out vacuum accumulator bottle if build-up is present. Ensure cap is tight
 8 5.3 5.4  9 5.5 5.5a
 10 5.6  11 5.7
6 Bulk Solution / Solid Waste Area

6.1 Inspect area for leaks & dried buffer buildup; clean as needed
6.2 Clean area of RVs, dust, etc.
6.3 Verify tubing connections are tight.  12
6.4 Check waste platform movement is not obstructed.
6.5 Inspect Pre-Trigger / Trigger level sensor fittings for cracks and / or kinked tubing.  13
6.6 Clean out Pre-Trigger / Trigger tray
6.7 Lubricate quick disconnect fitting on liquid waste reservoir with o-ring grease. DO NOT use Super Lube.  14

 12 6.3  13 6.5
 14 6.7
7 Reagent Carousel Area
7.1 Lubricate reagent access door gear pin.  (P-404 Reagent Access Door Lubrication) /
(P-404 Reagent Access Door Lubrication)
7.1a Utilize Super Lube Grease for lubrication  15 
7.2 If this is the First PM for the system, a one-time step needs to be performed: every screw used in the cooler
area will need to be removed & lubricated with Green Grease / Aqua lube. See Steps 4 and 5 in this section
when replacing the v-wheels & v-wheel lever screw. 
7.2a IF A SCREW IS DIFFICULT TO REMOVE & there is sufficient concern that it cannot be successfully
removed without damaging the screw, component, or structure, DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREW DURING
THE PM. It may be removed at a future date if the component fails & needs to be replaced, or the seized
screw may be fixed at a more convenient time. There is currently no ‘Structure Repair Kit’ to repair the
structure supports if broken during the removal of a seized screw.
7.2b When re-installing the carousel home sensor, loosely mount the sensor & then move the sensor toward the
ring gear before tightening the screws. (D1.04 Reagent Carousel Home Sensor) /
(D1.04 Reagent Carousel Home Sensor)
7.3 @Replace v-wheels & shoulder screws, as needed.   (R&R D1.09 V-Wheel Lever and V-Wheels) /
(R&R D1.09 V-Wheel Lever and V-Wheels)
7.3a Use a small amount of Green Grease / Aqua Lube on the shoulder screw threads  16 
7.3b Clean & lightly grease hole in V-Wheel Adjust Lever with Super Lube Grease
7.3c Utilize Green Grease / Aqua Lube on new shoulder screw for lever 
7.3d Use small amount of Super Lube Grease at interface between shoulder screw & lever  17 
7.4 Clean dust & dried liquid from reagent cooling chamber.
7.5 Clean reagent carousel & inspect each position for proper slide / spring function.  18
7.6 Clean & inspect reagent antenna board @ 20
7.7 Inspect reagent carousel motor gear for wear @ 19
7.8 Clean all sensors in reagent cooling chamber  20
7.9 Inspect cooling chamber gaskets for tears & wear; replace as needed.  21
7.10 Inspect & clean cooler condensation collection ring.
7.11 Re-install reagent carousel. Before securing the motor latch verify the carousel rotates freely on the v-wheels.
 15 7.1a  16 7.3a  17 7.3d
 18 7.5 @ 19 7.6 7.7
@ 20 7.8  21 7.9
8 RV Loader Assembly  (R&R A1.01 RV Loader Assembly) / (R&R A1.01 RV Loader

Assembly)
8.1 Remove RV Loader
8.2 Inspect RV pickup screw for tightness.  22
8.3 Verify RV pickup movement is not obstructed or contacts the RV Picked sensor arm when rotated. It is OK if
the pick-up arm slightly touches the upper chute.
8.4 Clean all RV Loader sensors – Hopper (proximity sensor), RV Picked, & RV Loader Home sensors.  23
 22 8.2  23 8.4
9 Process Path
9.1 Inspect & clean the Wash zone & PT / T manifold assemblies.  24  25
9.1a Verify valves are tight
9.1b Utilize ISA 117-007(latest revision) for cleaning tips & techniques
9.1c Verify date codes for Trigger / Pretrigger manifold valves and replace if > 2years  25
9.1d Write installation date on replacement Trigger / Pre-Trigger Valves for future 2 yr date verification
9.2 Inspect & clean the Process Path cover.
9.2a Clean all buffer build-up & ensure lane rotators do not bind  26
9.3 Remove, inspect, & clean (2) Vortexers
9.3a Verify Vortexer cups move freely & cable connections are secure
9.4 Inspect for Trigger leakage around CMIA Reader & Shutter solenoid, clean as needed.  27
9.4a If optics must be removed for cleaning, ensure the maintenance cap is applied to the light pipe
9.5 Verify shutter solenoid movement is not obstructed  28
9.6 Clean & inspect process path disk, track, and home sensor  29
9.6a Inspect disc for grooves, etching, & wear
9.6b Common process path problem areas: wash zones, vortexers, diverters, & optics
9.7 Verify RV Present switch arm moves freely.  30
9.8 Clean & inspect process path LLS antenna; verify cable connections are secure.  31
9.8a  (R&R E2.02 LLS Antenna Process Path) / (R&R E2.02 LLS Antenna Process Path)
 24 9.1  25 9.1
 26 9.2a  27 9.4  28 9.5
 29 9.6  30 9.7  31 9.8

10 Pipettor / LLS Antenna / Distribution PCB’s
10.1 Clean processing center area.
10.2 Pipettor assembly
10.2a Check tubing connections for leakage & tighten as needed
10.2b Remove pipettor cover & verify cable connections are secure
10.2c Clean & inspect pipettor assembly.
10.2d Lubricate metal shaft with Super Lube Oil / DO NOT lubricate teflon (plastic) shaft  32 
10.2e Check pressure monitor connections
10.3 Clean aspiration platform  33
 32 10.2d  33 10.3
11 Wash Cup / Upper Waste Manifold
11.1 Wash Cup assembly
11.1a Remove & clean wash cup assembly with deionized water.  (R&R E3.02 Wash Cup Body and Insert) /
(R&R E3.02 Wash Cup Body and Insert)
11.1b Inspect drain tubing for kinks and leakage
11.1c Inspect solenoids for leakage and tighten  34
Note: Some wash cup assemblies will only have (2) valves
11.1d Inspect wash cup capillaries between the valves & center column of the wash cup. Remove & clean main
wash well with fine, soft pipe / tubing cleaning straw.  35
11.1e Remove & clean wash cup baffle & check for leakage  35
11.1f Verify cable connections are secure  36
11.2 Upper Waste Manifold

11.2a Inspect thermistor tubing & connections  37
11.2b Verify tubing connections are tight
11.2c Inspect solenoid tightness  38
 34 11.1c  35 11.1d 11.1e
 36 11.1f  37 11.2a  38 11.2c

12 Pumps & Syringe
12.1 Pumps
12.1a Upper Pumps / Syringe
12.1b Inspect Trigger / Pre-trigger pumps & Sample Syringe for leakage & check all connections  39
12.1c Clean Sample Syringe lead screw & lubricate with Super Lube Grease  40 
12.1d Lower Pumps (located behind Trigger / Pre-trigger sliding tray)
12.1e Inspect Buffer & Transfer pumps for leakage & check all connections  41  42
 39 12.1b  40 12.1c
 41 12.1e  42 12.1e
13 RSH
13.1 @Replace reagent bottle rotator wheel, as needed.  43
13.2 Clean BCR lens with lint free wipe such as lens paper or Kim Wipe 43
13.3 Inspect & clean load platform  44
13.4 Verify all cable connections at the RSH distribution bd. & carrier transport
13.5 Inspect & clean carrier transport assembly
13.6 Clean & lubricate carrier transport rail with a small amount of Super Lube Grease on lint free cloth  45 
 43 13.1 13.2  44 13.3
 45 13.6
14 Miscellaneous
14.1 Verify UPS system batteries are functional
14.1a Reference UPS operations manual delivered with system for procedures
14.2 If AbbottLink is present, verify connectivity
15 System Verification
15.1 Power ON the SCC & wait for Snapshot screen
15.2 Power ON processing module
15.3 Verify the RSH & processing module reach STOPPED status
15.4 Perform the following Maintenance & Diagnostic (M&D) procedures:
15.4a 2055 – Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check for Wash Zone Valves (replace valves that fail test)
(Install TSB 117-029 to load the M&D procedure onto the SCC)
15.4b 1114 - Carrier Transport Calibration
15.4c 1110 – Pipettor Calibration
15.4d 3240 – Barcode Calibration
15.4e 3180 – Vacuum System Check
16 Verify Performance
16.1 Run all control levels of any single two step assay
17 System Backup
17.1 Backup system to hard drive / flash drive & CD (M&D 6004)
18 Exit Interview
18.1 Review PM checklist with customer
18.2 Review QC run with customer
18.3 Review customer’s current consumable part inventory
18.4 Have customer verify instrument operation
 Pre-Checks (before starting this procedure) People (required or to be notified)
Verify On-Hand Consumable Supplies
1 Customer: Manager / Supervisor
Verify On-Hand PM Parts
 Tools & Materials  Information Details
CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES
(7-14233-01) Aqua Lube / Green Grease
(2-94851-02) Super Lube Grease
Hazards
(14237-015) Super Lube Oil Potential Biohazard- Identifies an activity or area where
potentially infectious materials may be present.
Refer to Biological Hazards
(1-14205-01) Kit, Activator Cap Lube (o-ring grease kit) Class 2 Laser Product - Warns against direct viewing
into the barcode laser beam or reflections from the beam.
Refer to Laser Hazards
(N/A) Canned Air / Source Locally Chemical Hazard - Identifies an activity or area where
hazardous chemicals are present. Refer to the Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or package insert for specific
safety information.
Refer to Chemical Hazards
Electrostatic Discharge - Identifies an area where
electrostatic discharge may be present. A ground strap
must be worn while servicing the system.
Refer to Electrostatic Discharge
RECOMMENDED ON-HAND PARTS

@(7-100302-XX) Reagent Cooler In-Line Filter
@ (7-200055-XX) Reagent Bottle Rotator Wheel
@ (7-200370-XX) Vacuum Filter Assembly
@ (7-200378-XX) Pump Head, Liquid Waste
@ (7-202660-XX) Tubing, Waste Pump to Pressure
Switch
@ (7-204783-XX) V-Wheel Assembly (Pack of 3)
 (7-77612-XX) Manifold Valve
@ (7-202411-XX) Pinion gear kit i1000SR (used with
reagent carousel motor with replaceable gear 7-200635-XX)
Talsico® Process Picture Maps™ & all associated intellectual property are owned by Talsico International, ABN 20 419 167 619, & subject to licensing Agreement
End of document
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Customer Name Serial Number
Customer Number Ticket Number
City FSR Name
Telephone Date
L Complete
1. Instrument Review
Review Levy-Jennings for one assay from each of the four groups (if applicable) for
trends / issues
One Step 25
One 25 (20-4) delayed
Two Step 18-4
Two Step 4-4
Review maintenance is completed on time and as required
Review message history for issues and for trends
2. Lower Fluidics Area
Inspect area for leaks & dry buffer build-up
Verify all tubing connections are tight & secure
Check fittings on vacuum accumulator cap for cracks & kinked tubing
Flush out vacuum accumulator bottle if build-up is present. Ensure cap is tight
3. Bulk Solution / Solid Waste Area
Verify tubing connections are tight
Verify waste platform movement is not obstructed
Inspect PT / T level sensor fittings for cracks and/or kinked tubing
4. Reagent Carousel Area
Inspect reagent carousel for proper fit and function
Inspect cooling chamber gaskets for tears and wear, replace as needed
Inspect and clean cooler condensation collection ring
5. Process Path
Inspect and clean as necessary the Wash Zone and PT / T manifold assemblies
Verify valves are tight
6. Pipettor / LLS Antenna / Distribution PCB’s
Check pipettor tubing connections for leakage and tighten as needed
Check pressure monitor connections
The above comprehensive checklist of service procedures ensures applicable system checks and diagnostic tests have been
performed to verify proper instrument operation. This checklist should be used in conjunction with the Preventive
Maintenance guidelines contained within Abbott i2000SR Service Manual or appropriate Abbott Instrument Service
Advisory
Page 1 of 2
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
7. Wash Cup / Upper Waste Manifold
Remove and clean wash cup baffle and check for leakage
Verify cable connections are secure
Inspect thermistor tubing and connections at upper waste manifold
8. Pumps & Syringe
Upper Pumps and Syringe
Inspect PT / T pumps and sample syringe for leakage and check all connections
Lower pumps
Inspect Buffer and Transfer pumps for leakage and check all connections
9. RSH
Clean BCR lens
10. Verify TSB status
Verify all appropriate TSB’s are completed and documented
11. Exit Interview
Review Total Call checklist with customer
Customer confirms instrument operation
Additional Parts or Notes
Date: ____________________________________________
Service Engineer Signature: ____________________________________________
Customer Signature: _____________________________________________
Advisory
Page 2 of 2
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
Customer Name Serial Number
Customer Number Ticket Number
City FSR Name
Telephone Date
L Complete
1.Pre-Site Investigative Procedures
Review AbbottLink logs (if applicable) for problems / issues
Interview customer for any on-going issues
Assemble necessary parts
2. Initial On-Site Investigative Procedures
Review customer logs noting any discrepancies
Review QC and Calibration history for trending / issues
Verify TSB and ISA status of instrument
Verify customer has current back-up
3. SCC/ Module Shutdown
Perform system backup, if needed
Perform unload of reagent kits and store in designated refrigerator
Check power supply LEDs
Verify proper operation of reagent cooler, power supply and card cage fans
Verify condition of reagent cover battery
Inspect doors, covers and hinges for misalignment, squeaks, etc.
4. SCC / Card Cage / Power Supply Areas
Clean SCC / Card Cage / Power Supply compartments
Inspect and secure cable connections, as needed
Inspect and clean card cage / SCC door air filters
5. Lower Fluidics Area
Inspect area for leaks and dry buffer build-up
Verify all tubing connections are tight and secure
Replace vacuum filter, as needed
Replace reagent cooler condensate in-line filter, as needed
Replace waste pump head, as needed
Replace in-line waste pump to pressure switch tubing check valve, as needed
Inspect and secure cable connections on fluidics distribution board and sensors
Check fittings on vacuum accumulator cap for cracks and kinked tubing
Flush out vacuum accumulator bottle if build-up is present. Ensure cap is tight
Advisory
Page 1 of 4
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
6. Bulk Solution / Solid Waste Area
Inspect area for leaks and dried buffer build-up
Clean area of RV’s, dust, etc.
Check waste platform movement is not obstructed
Inspect Pre-Trigger / Trigger level sensor fittings for cracks and / or kinked tubing
Clean Pre-Trigger / Trigger tray
Lubricate quick disconnect fitting on liquid waste reservoir with O-Ring Grease
7. Reagent Carousel Area
Lubricate reagent access door gear pin
Replace v-wheels and shoulder screws, as needed
Clean dust and dried liquid from reagent cooling chamber
Clean reagent carousel and inspect each position for proper slide / spring function
Clean and inspect reagent antenna board
Inspect reagent carousel motor gear for wear
Clean all sensors in reagent cooling chamber
Inspect cooling chamber gaskets for tears and wear: replace as needed
Inspect and clean cooler condensation collection ring
8. RV Loader Assembly
Inspect RV pickup screw for tightness
Verify RV pickup movement is not obstructed or contacts the RV Picked sensor arm
when rotated
Clean all RV loader sensors
9. Process Path
Inspect and clean the Wash Zone / Pre-Trigger-- Trigger manifold assemblies
Verify valves for proper tightness
Verify date code and replace Pre-Trigger / Trigger valves > 2 years
Inspect and clean the process path cover
Clean all buffer build-up and ensure lane rotators do not bind
Remove, inspect and clean (2) vortexers
Verify vortexer cups move freely and cable connections are secure
Inspect for trigger leakage around the CMIA reader and shutter solenoid
Verify shutter solenoid movement is not obstructed
Clean and inspect process path disc, track and home sensor
Inspect disc for grooves, etching and wear
Verify RV present switch arm moves freely
Clean and inspect process path LLS antenna; verify cable connections are secure
Advisory
Page 2 of 4
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
10. Pipettor / LLS Antenna / Distribution PCB’s
Clean processing center area
Check tubing connections for leakage and tighten as needed
Remove pipettor cover and verify cable connections are secure
Clean and inspect pipettor assembly
Lubricate metal shaft
Check pressure monitor connections
Clean aspiration platform
11. Wash Cup / Upper Waste Manifold
Wash Cup
Remove and clean assembly
Inspect drain tubing for kinks and leakage
Inspect solenoids for leakage and tighten
Inspect wash cup capillaries
Remove and clean wash cup baffle and check for leakage
Verify cable connections are secure
Upper Waste Manifold
Inspect thermistor tubing and connections
Verify solenoids are tight
12. Pumps and Syringe
Upper Pumps / Syringes
Inspect PT / T pumps and sample syringe for leakage an check all connections
Clean sample syringe lead screw and lubricate
Lower Pumps
Inspect Buffer and Transfer pumps for leakage and check all connections
13. RSH
Replace reagent bottle rotator wheel, as needed
Clean BCR lens
Inspect and clean load platform
Verify all cable connections at the RSH distribution board and carrier transport
Inspect and clean carrier transport assembly
Clean and lubricate carrier transport rail
14. Miscellaneous
Verify UPS batteries are functional
Verify AbbottLink connectivity (if applicable)
15. System Verification
2055 - Wash Zone Valve Pressure Check (WZ valves only)
1114 - Carrier Transport Calibration
1110 - Pipettor Calibration
3240 - Barcode Calibration
3180 – Vacuum system check
Advisory
Page 3 of 4
ARCHITECT i1000sr®
16. Verify Performance
Run all levels of any single two step assay
17. System Backup
Backup system to hard drive / flash drive and CD
18. Exit Interview
Review PM checklist with customer
Review customers current consumable inventory
Customer verifies instrument operation
Review QC run with customer
Additional Parts or Notes
Date: ____________________________________________
Service Engineer Signature: ____________________________________________
Customer Signature: _____________________________________________
Advisory
Page 4 of 4
System Specifications
System Specifications (i1000SR)
Note
The following system specifications are included in this section:
Links
Approximate Physical Measurements

Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service
Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Floor Loading Specifications
Seismic Anchoring Specifications
Water and Waste Specifications
Approximate Physical Measurements
Processing Module
See Dimensional Layout Drawings
59"/149.9 cm Includes 4" brace for monitor support arm at right side
77"/195.6 cm With keyboard platform in "normal" operator position
Width
81"/205.7 cm With keyboard platform extended to right (to allow Rgt Cover to be opened)
30"/76.2 cm With front doors closed and top cover closed
40"/101.6 cm With front doors closed and top cover open (adds 10" at rear)
Depth
60"/152.4 cm With front doors open, top cover open and waste tray extended; doors extend 18" beyond front bezel
when open; waste tray extends 20" beyond front bezel when fully extended.
49"/124.5 cm* On casters, with top cover closed
68"/172.7 cm* With top cover fully open (on casters)

Height
68"/172.7 cm* To top of monitor when monitor adjustment is at highest point (MP monitor and arm configuration)
* Add +.75"/1.9 cm With instrument stabilization feet fully extended

-> max.
Optional Devices
Depth Width Height Weight
Waste Pump 13" (33.0 cm) 13" (33.0 cm) 13" (33.0 cm) 18 lbs. (8.2 kg)
Clearance Measurements for Operation and Service
Device Location Clearance Description
Note
See Approximate Physical Measurements.
Left Side 3" (7.6 cm) Left side clearance - minimal required during operation
Processing Module
(including monitor Right Side 22" (55.9 cm) Right side clearance - for access to rear of module (to access module
support arm) circuit breaker) and to allow movement of keyboard tray/monitor support
arm
(Does not include
optional external Rear 20" (50.8 cm) For safety access to module circuit breaker and for instrument air flow
system/module UPS Above 20" (50.8 cm) Required above top of module to open top cover
or printer stand.) 72" (182.9 cm) Total vertical space needed from floor (to open top cover)
80" (203.2 cm) Total vertical space needed from floor (to allow FSE to remove top cover)
Front 34" (86.4 cm) Clearance in front of modules (for work space and to allow access for
removal and replacement of bulk liquids/waste)
Door and Entry Doorways 31" (78.7 cm) Measurements indicated allow for 1/2" (1.3 cm) of space on each side.
Requirements And Entry as shipped The i1000SR module, as shipped, requires 31" (78.7 cm) wide openings for
ways doorways, hallways and elevators between the delivery area and the
30" with some laboratory. Verify door width for each door (including elevators) from dock
disassembly to lab is 31" (78.7 cm) or wider.
In some cases, removal of a door (and hinges) may be required to gain
These figures extra space.
allow for 1/2" Approximately 1" (2.5 cm) may be gained by removing the top cover, front
(1.3 cm) space panel and load/unload platform from the module.
on each side For door openings less than 30" (76.2 cm) wide, an alternate method of
getting the module into the lab is necessary.
Printer Approximately Installation location of the printer is left to the discretion of the customer. A
18" x 18" printer stand or nearby table is necessary.
(45.7 cm x 45.7
cm) minimum
space required
for printer
Front/Rear 9" (22.9 cm) Tubing and fitting clearance

Waste Pump
Sides 5" (12.7 cm) Access
(optional)
Electrical, Power, and Heat Output Specifications
Estimated
50Hz Outlet 60Hz Outlet Cabling / Power
System Outlet Type Heat
Specification Specification Outlets
Output
Note
It is recommended that the entire i1000SR system be supported by an Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) to avoid
interruptions during a power outage. At a minimum, the SCC must be supported to protect the CPU from sudden power
loss, which can result in data loss and/or physical damage to the system's hard drive.
Note
All AC power uses single phase connections.
U.S. - 110VAC - NEMA L5-20R 5119

(20A 250V Twist-Lock) BTUs
For 110 VAC Operation 220VAC - NEMA L6-20R (20A
One 110 VAC, 20 Amp circuit 250V Twist-Lock) -
required| OUTSIDE U.S. - Country specific -
(99-127 VAC @ 47-63 HZ) must meet country/area safety
Isolated, dedicated line. code/standard.
Resettable circuit breaker.
Processing Module
For 220 VAC Operation
The i1000SR
One 220 VAC, 10 Amp circuit U.S. Connector Style for Processing Module
Processing Module
required
has an auto-sensing
(180-264 VAC @ 47-63 HZ)
power supply and
Isolated, dedicated line.
requires no manual
Resettable circuit breaker.
switching.
(See SCC CPU for
Note
SCC power
If a dedicated/isolated line
requirements)
is not used, line should be
rated accordingly to
accommodate other items
being operated on the
International Connector Style for Processing Module
same circuit.
Country specific
Processing Module
Power Cord Length (orderable - country specific) ---- 8' (2.44 m)
Power Cord Length 3' (91.4 cm) custom power cord
The SCC plugs into For power source, the internal Included
internal power strip. power strip plugs into either: in above
SCC CPU A single customized - a SCC UPS, with provided cord. estimate
The Platform E CPU power cord is SCC UPS plugs into country
has an auto-sensing 99-264 VAC, 50-60 Hz provided in the specific wall outlet rated as
power supply and 15 Amps minimum for 99-127 Installation Kit for indicated at left.
requires no manual VAC use in every OR
switching. 12 Amps minimum for 180-264 situation. - a module UPS using country
VAC specific power cord orderable from
Abbott. The module UPS plugs
into country specific wall outlet
rated as indicated at left.
Modem (optional) Country USB powered USB cable provided Included

Specific with modem in above
estimates
Analog telephone line available at SCC location. Direct line (no switchboard interface) is required.
Dedicated line is recommended, but is not required.
Modem Phone Line

Modem line does not route through an internal facility switchboard.
Modem line does not have voice mail enabled.
Options
Power Cord Length 6' (1.8 m)
220 VAC, 12 110 VAC, 14 1 Outlet 110V - NEMA 5-15 3-prong N/A
Printer Amp Circuit Amp Circuit 220V - IEC 320 M grounded
(Do not plug the (180 - 264 VAC (90 - 132 VAC
printer into the UPS.) @ 47 - 63 HZ) @ 47 - 63 HZ)
Resettable Resettable
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
UPS (110) (SCC Only) N/A 110 VAC, 14 1 Outlet 110V - NEMA 5-15 3-prong N/A
Amp Circuit
(90 - 132 VAC
@ 47 - 63 HZ)
Resettable
Circuit Breaker
UPS (220) (SCC Only) Contact ACS Contact ACS 1 Outlet Contact ACS Contact
ACS
Waste Pump 220 VAC, 0.8 115 VAC, 1.6 1 Outlet 110V - NEMA 5-15 3-prong N/A
Switch must be Amp Circuit Amp Circuit 220V - IEC 320 M grounded
manually set. (207 - 253 VAC (104 - 126 VAC
(Plug the waste pump @ 47 - 63 HZ) @ 47 - 63 HZ)
into the UPS, if one is Resettable Resettable
provided.) Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
Water and Waste Specifications
Minimum resistivity 1 MegOhm-cm @ 25° C (77° F)

Water
Maximum Bacterial Content 1000 colony forming units per mL (cfu/mL)
Quality
Optional external waste output is driven by an internal peristaltic waste pump. The External Waste Tubing must
be installed to use this option. If installed, the external waste connection is approximately 4 inches (10 cm) above
the floor at the rear of the instrument, at the base of the fluidics panel.
The high concentration waste line can be pumped vertically to a maximum of 40" (1m) to a sink drain, if needed.
The waste line may extend horizontally up to 50' (15.24m). If an external drain is not available or not permitted,
the default high concentration waste container can be used. (High concentration waste collection/handling as per
Liquid local requirements/regulations.) The instrument runs 15 minutes without the liquid waste container in place before
Waste alerting the operator and shutting down.
Average Output When Running
0.40 Gal / 1.5 Liters per hour
Waste Pump
Requirement If floor drain is not available and elevated drain (sink) is used and the distance exceeds the specification above,
an external Waste Pump is required.
A Waste Pump is available from Abbott that has four (4) input lines and one output line. One of these waste
pumps can handle up to four (4) i1000SR processing modules.
Waste pump maximum outlet tubing guidelines:
Length of 30 feet (9.1m) and height of up to 5 feet (1.5m)

Length of 10 feet (3m) and height of up to 8 feet (2.4m)
Solid Waste
Operational Output of 100 reaction vessels per hour.
Waste Container Capacity sized for ten hours of operation (over 1000 reaction vessels).
Container can be changed during operation.

With container removed, the Solid Waste (RVs) falls into the drain pan situated beneath the solid waste
container.
Seismic Anchoring Specifications
SCC - per site specific requirements
No tie down points are provided for the SCC inside the i1000SR cabinet. To secure
the SCC, site personnel should follow internal procedures for securing business
equipment.
Waste Pump - per site specific requirements
No tie down points are provided for the Waste Pump. To secure the Waste Pump,
site personnel should follow internal procedures for securing business equipment.
i1000SR Module - Four (4) threaded holes suitable for bolts are available
Four (4) anchoring points are used during shipping. Based on site approval, these
points can be used to secure the assay module to the floor after the shipping pallet
is removed.
The four (4) holes are threaded for bolts and are located on the bottom of the
module, at each corner, approximately 2" (5.1 cm) from the outside edge.
Site specific anchoring should be performed by site personnel and coordinated with
Seismic Anchoring (optional,
the Abbott installation.
information provided for site specific
Length of bolts used is site specific. The table below is provided to assist in
needs)
determining hardware requirements.
Diameter
1/2"
Threads
per Inch 13
Length
Determine the 2 site specific lengths and add the three lengths to obtain a total
length:
Add 0.75" 1.9 Thread engagement into bottom of module.

cm
+ 3" 7.6 Approximate distance from floor to bottom of module at attachment

cm point. (May be site specific and should be confirmed during
installation.)
+ __" ___ (Site specific) Additional length if needed to go through anchoring

cm platform
= ___" ___ Total length of bolt needed for anchoring.

cm
Environmental Specifications
Operational Temperature and 15° C to 30° C (59° F to 86° F) noncondensing relative humidity of 10% to 85%, at 25° C
Humidity (77° F).
Storage Temperature 5° C to 50° C (41° F to 122° F)
Approved Operating Altitude 8500 ft. (2590.7 m) or below
Lab Environment Instrument is for Indoor Use Only.

Avoid direct sunlight, drafts from heating and cooling vents, and excessive dust.
Instrument should not be placed next to a heat or vibration generating device.
Acoustical Noise Acoustical noise output from the system: 62 dBA maximum, and less than 58 dB during
normal operation.
Estimated Heat Output 2,200 Watts
Floor Loading Specifications
Instrument Weight at each Foot Pressure at each Foot
Note
See Approximate Physical Measurements.
Left Front = 150 lbs. (68 kg) [1] 65 lbs/in2 (4.53 kg/cm2)
i1000SR Right Front = 190 lbs. (86 kg) [2] 82 lbs/in2 (5.74 kg/cm2)
Left Rear = 128 lbs. (58 kg) [3] 55 lbs/in2 (3.87 kg/cm2)
Right Rear = 168 lbs. (76 kg) [4] 72 lbs/in2 (5.07 kg/cm2)
i1000SR total weight = 636 lbs. (288 kg)
Pre-Site Checklist
This checklist is used for the i1000SR system.
Note
Obtain from Customer Additional

Customer Data
Purchase Order Comment
Account Name
Country
Delivery Address (Street)
City
State
Zip Code
Building and Floor
Laboratory Telephone
Laboratory Fax
Primary Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Second Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Hospital Maintenance Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
List the System Configuration to be Installed
List Optional/Country Specific Items to be Supplied by Customer or Abbott

(what, manufacturer, and model)
No, Does not

Yes,
meet
Description Meets Specification / Criteria
Criteria/Open
Criteria
Action Item
Space
Required Laboratory meets criteria according to instrument dimensions and required clearances.
Refer to Processing Module in System Specifications. Site has adequate clearance for
operator access.
As shipped, the i1000SR requires a minimum 31" (78.7 cm) clearance for doorways
and entryways between the delivery area and the laboratory. Verify that door width for
each door from the dock to the lab, including the elevator, is at least 30" (76.2 cm)
wide.
i1000SR Door
and Entry
Requirements For doorways less than 31" (78.7 cm), but greater than or equal to 30" (76.2 cm),
some disassembly of the i1000SR processing module is required - that is, removal of
instrument top cover, front panel and load/unload platform (this makes the instrument
width approximately 29" (73.7 cm). For doorways less than 30" (76.2 cm) wide, an
alternate means of getting the i1000SR to the lab is necessary.
ARCHITECT SCC CPU, Ethernet hub, serial adapter and SCC UPS (if present) are
installed inside the i1000SR cabinet. The printer is installed on a bench or printer cart
outside the system (not included).
Printer to be used is compatible with ARCHITECT software: The following printer

drivers are installed.
OKI B4350
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP
HP DeskJet 890C
Optional
HP DeskJet 895CXi
Equipment
Requirements HP LaserJet 1200 (C7044#ABA (110VAC))
HP LaserJet 1200 (C7044A#ABB (220VAC))
HP LaserJet 1300
List Type of
Printer:_____________________________________________________
If the printer is supplied by the customer, is printer be available for installation and
startup? (If not, Abbott representative must supply a printer to complete the installation
and startup.) Table space or printer stand is required within 6 ft. (1.8 m) of the i1000SR
for installation of the printer.
Analog telephone line available at SCC location. Direct line (no switchboard interface)
is required. Dedicated line is recommended, but is not required.
Modem Modem line does not route through an internal facility switchboard.
(optional)
Modem line does not have voice mail enabled.
Modem Phone Line Number: _________________________
Note
It is recommended that the entire i1000SR system be supported by an
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS). At a minimum, the SCC should be
supported to protect the CPU from sudden power loss, which can result in data
loss and/or physical damage to the systems hard drive.
SCC Electrical 110 VAC, minimum 15 Amp Circuit (99 - 127

Supply VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ) Resettable Circuit Breaker 220 VAC, minimum 12 Amp Circuit
Requirements (180 - 264 VAC @ 47 - 63 HZ)
Resettable Circuit Breaker
The AC input can range from 99-264 VAC, 47-63 HZ. Custom power cords are
provided to connect the CPU and monitor to an internal IEC power strip.
Country specific power cords (available List Numbers) should be ordered to connect
the power strip to a SCC UPS, system UPS or wall outlet. All connections must meet
country and site wiring codes.
Note
It is recommended that the entire i1000SR system be supported by an
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS). At a minimum, the SCC should be
supported to protect the CPU from sudden power loss, which can result in data
loss and/or physical damage to the systems hard drive.
Note
All AC power uses single phase connections.
For 110VAC operation - dedicated line, 20 Amps minimum, 99-127VAC, 43-63 HZ

For 220VAC operation - dedicated line, 10 Amp minimum, 180-264VAC, 43-63-HZ.
AC Outlet within 7' (2.1m) of the i1000SR processing module.
Maximum power consumption - 1760 VA
Contact site electrician to verify wiring. Verify no other electrical devices should be
i1000SR attached to the same line. For non-dedicated lines, circuits must be rated higher
Module accordingly. Line should be shielded with Metal Conduit and wire size shall conform to
Electrical local code.
Supply Verified by Site Electrician:
Requirements
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
i1000SR
Power Cord North America - For 110VAC operation - NEMA L5-20R (20A 250CV Twist-lock)
Connection For 220V operation - NEMA L6-20R (20A 250V Twist-lock)
International - Requires country specific connection style. Abbott List Numbers are
provided for several power cord/connector styles. Refer to the ordering matrix or FRU
database.
List the Measurement taken at Room Outlet Breaker Closed Breaker Open
Line 1 to Line 2 = 180 - 264 VAC <0.5 VAC

200 to 240
VAC Line 1 to GND = 90 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC
47 - 63 Hz
Power Line 2 to GND = 90 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC
Measurements
GND to Conduit = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
List the Measurement taken at Room Outlet Breaker Closed Breaker Open
Line 1 to Line 2 = 99 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC

110 to 120
Line to Neutral = 99 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC
VAC
47 - 63 Hz Line to Earth = 99 - 132 VAC <0.5 VAC
Power
Measurements Neutral to Earth = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
Neutral to Case = less than 0.5 VAC <0.5 VAC
Lab Operating
Temperature Cooling System able to maintain 15º C to 30º Cº (59º F to 86º F), and relative humidity
between 10% to 85% noncondensing with system installed.
Laboratory is air conditioned? _______ YES _______ NO

Verified by Site Maintenance Engineer:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Water supply must have a minimum resistivity of 1 MegOhm-cm @ 25º C (77º F).
Verify 1 MegOhm Indicator Light is present and indicating good quality water.
Customer has confirmed that less than 1000 colony forming units (CFU) of
Water Quality bacteria per mL are present in water supply line.
Customer agrees to culture water supply bimonthly and confirm water quality of
1000 cfu/mL or less.
Flow Rate
Water only required to reconstitute
buffer
Floor Level Drain (no more than 40" (101 cm)
Liquid Waste - high Within 30' (9.15 m) of rear of assay
i1000SR module
(Options)
Elevated Drain located in Sink - if higher than

Complete Waste Pump (if required) if
40" (1 m) and/or further than 50' (15.24 m),
a Waste Pump is used
Waste Pump is recommended
Sodium Azide This instrument uses products that contain sodium azide. Detailed information about the
Awareness potential hazards associated with azides in laboratory drains is available in the NIOSH
bulletin (cdc.gov/niosh) and at abbottdiagnostics.com.
Verify customer is aware of the CDC guidance to reduce to potential for the
formation of metallic azides in plumbing.
Customer has confirmed that the floor drain and associated plumbing for the
system does not contain pipes or solder containing lead, copper, silver, or brass.
Concern is limited to pipes that primarily carry instrument waste.
If the composition of the drain/plumbing is as described above or unknown, the

customer understands they should flush drains thoroughly with water several times a
day to prevent metal azides from forming.
Waste Pump Electrical Requirements
115 VAC Operation
220 VAC Operation
Waste Pump 1.6 Amp Circuit (104-126 VAC) @ 47-63 HZ

(if required) Resettable Circuit Breaker 0.8 Amp Circuit 207-253 VAC @ 47-
63 HZ Resettable Circuit Breaker
110V NEMA 5-15

220V IEC 320M grounded 3 - prong
Required Capacity
1.5 L/hour maximum
Determine who provides the (optional) waste pump (Abbott or Customer)?
____________________________________________________________________
Storage
Requirements Refrigerated storage space (2-8º C) for Reagents, Calibrators, and Controls?
Non-refrigerated storage space for solutions, consumables, and disposables?
Is the bar code type listed below (ARCHITECT compatible bar code)? Circle bar code
type and obtain a sample.
Codabar
Code 3 of 9
Interleaved 2 of 5
Sample Bar Code 128 subset A, B, and C
Code Labels
Circle Features used:
Start & Stop Characters
Checksum
Maximum character length of the sample barcode label less than or equal to 20.
List the number of characters used: _____________________
Obtain from Customer Additional

LIS Interface Data
Purchase Interview Comments
Company Name
Primary LIS Contact Name
Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Secondary LIS Contact Name

Telephone Number
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Has the ARCHITECT System ABBOTT Standard Interface RS-232 Manual

been supplied to the LIS company?
Pre-Site Open Action Item Summary
List open action items that are required to be completed prior to system installation.
WHAT WHO PHONE NUMBER WHEN COMPLETE
(Describe action(s) required to (Who is (How to contact (When will the activity (Record date
meet specification.) responsible.) responsible person.) be completed.) completed.)
Customer Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Abbott Signature and Date:
__________________________________________________
(name printed)
__________________________________________________
(name signature)
________________________
(date)
Installation & Setup
Links
i1000SR Installation Checklist

i1000SR Installation
i1000SR Installation Checklist
Print and complete this checklist during installation to successfully verify the device performs as intended. The completed checklist
and a printout from the final control run performed on the system are left with a copy of the service order invoice for the customer.
This Installation Checklist contains verification steps that must be entered on the install ticket to complete the installation test
and inspection summary.
1. Add Product List # NNNN-Install as a part used.

2. Select the Install part where NNNN = 0 plus the 3 digit product code of the instrument. Example: 0170-INSTALL for C-D
Ruby.
3. Use Action Taken code: N360 Installed Instrument with Reason for Action: FA68 Install VP Documentation.
4. Select Get Verification Procedure. This will force the required verification onto the ticket. This part usage can be added
when the ticket is created. This will flag users to document the required VPs prior to closing the ticket.
Verify if there are any Active Field Action Mandatory TSBs for this instrument and install prior to closing the
Installation ticket.
Note
Note
Installation does not include assay correlation or performance testing that would be included in integration and startup
activities.
Note
A translated, locally approved, copy of this checklist may be provided by the local service area/country organization.
Action Notes Complete?
Unpack
Open Crate and Unpack
Remove Hold-down Brackets
Prepare for Pallet Ramp Installation
Install Pallet Ramp
Remove and Position Module
Remove Packing Material
Module Component Installation
Installation Option
Install Pipettor Probe
Open Probe Latches
Install Wash Zone Probes
Close Probe Latches
RV Loader Installation
Install the RV Loader

Install the RV Pickup Assembly
Install RV Loader Assembly
Off-White Monitor Support Arm Installation
Preparation
Attach Support Arm to Instrument
Install Keyboard Tray
Off-White Touchscreen Monitor Installation
Remove Stand and Install Monitor

External Drain Tube Installation (Optional)
Disconnect Waste Pump

Install External Drain Kit
Install Waste Pump
Off-White SCC - Hardware and Cabling Installation
Verify Correct Line Voltage Configuration

Install SCC, Optional Serial Expansion and Optional SCC Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)
Install Keyboard and Mouse
Install Touchscreen Monitor Cables
Label Mouse and Keyboard Extension Cables
Wrap Cables with Corrugated Tube
Install Cable Covers
Install Cables Plug and Attach Cable Ties
Complete Mouse Installation
Complete Keyboard Installation With Hand Held Bar Code Wand
Complete Keyboard Installation Without Hand Held Bar Code Wand
Connect Mouse, Keyboard and Monitor Cables to CPU
Connect Hub and Ethernet Cables
Connect Internal Cables for SCC Interface Panel
Install Printer
Connect Laboratory Information System (LIS) (optional)
Connect External USB Modem (optional)
Connect Power for SCC Components
Connect Module AC Power

Install System Software (See note below)
Black Monitor Support Arm Installation
Preparation
Install Black Articulated Arm
Remove Stand and Install Black Touchscreen Monitor
Install Black Monitor Cables
Black SCC - Hardware and Cabling Installation
Verify Correct Line Voltage Configuration

Install SCC, Optional Serial Expansion and Optional SCC Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)
Remove Black Articulating Arm Covers
Label Mouse and Keyboard Extension Cables
Route Cables and Install Black Arm Covers
Add Arm Cover
Install Cable Plug and Check Arm Movement
Install BCR / Mouse Holder
Connect Power for SCC Components
Connect Mouse, Keyboard and Monitor Cables to CPU
Connect Hub and Ethernet Cables
Connect Internal Cables for SCC Interface Panel
Install Printer
Connect Laboratory Information System (LIS) (optional)
Connect External USB Modem (optional)
Connect c4000 External Waste Level Sensor (optional)
Install EMSA (optional)
Processing Module Preparation
Verify TSB Status and Perform TSBs as Necessary

Verify Reagent Carousel Installation
Verify Cable and Tubing Connections and PC boards
Power On Processing Module
Load Consumables and Buffer
Perform 1109 Wash Cup Pre-alignment

Processing Module Calibrations
Startup System
Flush the Pipettor
Perform 1114 Carrier Transport Calibration
Perform 1110 Pipettor Calibration
Perform 3240 Bar Code Calibration
Processing Module Internal Decontamination
Decontaminating the Processing Module

Perform 2190 Internal Decontamination
Perform 2137 Flush Fluids
Processing Module Verification
Perform a Startup on the Processing Module and RSH

Perform 5555 RSH Sensor Tests
Perform 3310 RSH Test
Perform 3230 Bar Code Reader Test
Perform 3540 Temperature Status
Perform 1022 Optics Background
Perform 5420 Crash Sensor Test
Perform 3630 LLS Test
Perform 6440 Daily Maintenance
Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays
Configure QC-Cal Settings
Set Processing Module and Sample Handler to Run Status
Perform Calibration on Appropriate Assays
Perform Precision Run

Evaluate Control Run Data (Optics Verification) (Document "Passed" in Verification of Install Ticket)
Verify Processing Module is in Stopped or Ready Status

Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays to Delete Assay Files (Optional)
Perform System Backup
Perform 6004 Copy Backup Software
Stabilize and Level Instrument (as necessary)
SCC Installation Verification
Log on as FSE
Perform P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions
Perform P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification
Perform P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test
Verify UPS Operation
Complete Checklist
Installation Documentation
Serial Numbers:
ARCHITECT System: _________________________________________
SCC: ______________________________________________________
i1000SR Processing Module:____________________________________
Note
Verify that the processing module serial number on the instrument matches the serial number configured in the SCC.
Correct any discrepancies, as required.
System Software Version: ______________________________________
ABBOTT Field Service Representative:
Printed Name: _______________________________________________
Signature: __________________________________________________
Date: ______________________________________________________
i1000SR Installation
Purpose To provide instructions to install an ARCHITECT i1000SR system. Module i1000SR
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time 16 hr

Required 3/4" (19 mm) combination or ratchet wrench for bracket bolts
9/16" (14 mm) wrench or ratchet wrench for crate bolts
01L56-40 Probe Conditioning Solution - for 2190 Internal Decontamination procedure
For performance verification testing, B-hCG and TSH Reagent (or other one and two step
assays), Calibrators and Controls.
Note
B-hCG or TSH Reagents, controls, and calibrators or other one step and two step
assays can be used if the optics verification solutions are not available.
Links
Unpack
Monitor Support Arm Installation
Touchscreen Monitor Installation
SCC - Hardware and Cabling Installation
Unpack
Open Crate 1. Remove the banding, top and sides from the crate.
and Unpack 2. Unwrap the instrument. Remove and set aside the
boxes containing the installation kit, monitor support
arm and RV loader. [1]
Remove 1. Remove the bolts from the four (4) tie-down

Hold-down brackets at the pallet [2] and underneath the
Brackets instrument. [3]
2. Unlock the casters by lifting the lock levers up. [2]
Prepare for 1. Remove only the nuts from the three points
Pallet Ramp indicated, at the back end of the pallet. [4]
Installation
Note
DO NOT remove the bolts and spacers.
2. Remove the metal ramp from the pallet (four

screws).
3. Roll the instrument to the back edge of the pallet,
stopping against the wood block. [5]
4. Remove the hardware at the ramp end, securing the
spacers and completely remove the three
spacers. [6]
Install Pallet 1. Set the ramp in place with textured surface up and
Ramp insert two bolts. [7]
Remove and 1. With a second person to stabilize the instrument,
Position carefully roll the instrument down the ramp, assuring
Module the wheels remain on the ramp. [8]
2. Move the instrument to the desired position for
installation.
Note
Once the module is in the desired location
and further moving is not necessary (after the
installation), lock the wheels or lower the
leveling feet and level the instrument as
necessary.
Remove 1. Remove the tape and packing material from the

Packing following areas:
Material external covers and doors
air filter (SCC/Card Cage door)
waste drawer
trigger/pre-trigger tray and sensors
SCC area shelf
Note
Use caution when removing the
packaging from the trigger and pre-
trigger sensors as tubing is connected.
2. Disconnect the liquid waste tubing from the waste

bottle.
3. Open the waste drawer and remove the liquid waste
bottle and solid waste container. Remove the
adjacent packing material.
4. Install a biohazard bag (from the Accessory Kit) in
the solid waste container and place it back in the
waste tray.
5. Install the liquid waste container and close the
drawer, being careful to not pinch the waste
container tubing.
6. Reconnect the tubing to the waste container.
7. Remove the buffer inlet straw from the aspiration
platform and set aside. [4]
8. Remove the packing material from the Carrier
Transport rail. (two places). [1]
9. Cut and remove the tie-wraps securing the Pipettor
Assembly [2] and the Syringe Assembly. [3]
10. Remove the tape from the processing center cover
near the pipettor. (two places)
Installation 1. As desired, to save approximately 30 minutes of

Option installation time, before setting up the processing
module, proceed to perform the following:
Monitor Support Arm Installation
Touchscreen Monitor Installation
SCC - Hardware and Cabling Installation
Begin software installation (via latest TSB).
2. Once the software begins loading, proceed to Install
Pipettor Probe to install the processing module
components.
Install 1. Grasp the pipettor arm near the leadscrew and

Pipettor manually lift the arm above the wash cup.
Probe
Note
Never lift the pipettor arm from the probe end.
Always lift near the leadscrew.
2. Rotate the arm toward the front of the instrument for

easy access.
3. Loosen and open the probe clamp. [1]
4. Insert the probe into the probe hole in the end of the
arm. [2]
5. Secure the probe tubing to the connection on the
pipettor arm [3] and fully seat the probe into the
clamp. [4]
6. Close and finger-tighten the probe clamp thumb
screw. [5]
7. Raise the probe to test the crash mechanism and
ensure the probe returns to the down position without
binding. If binding occurs, loosen the probe clamp
screw and bias the clamp toward the probe end of the
pipettor arm. Finger tighten the screw and recheck the
crash mechanism.
8. Rotate and lower the arm so the probe enters the
wash cup.
Note
For further detail, refer to the probe replacement
procedure in the ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual.
Open 1. Remove the processing center cover.
Probe 2. As necessary, raise the wash zone (WZ) mechanism.
Latches
3. Loosen the probe latch thumbscrews and rotate the
latches. [1]
Install 1. For each probe, attach the appropriate tubing from the
Wash upper waste manifold to approximately 1/4 to 3/8" (6 to
Zone 9.5 mm) past the retaining features on the probes. [1]
Probes 2. Insert the probes into position in the wash
mechanism [2], ensuring the probes enter the holes in
the WZ manifold below the probe mount. [3]
Note
If a probe is obstructed entering the hole, it may
be blocked by the process path disc. Open the
RV access cover and manually rotate the disc
to allow the probe to drop into place. Close the
RV access cover.
3. Secure each tube in the appropriate mounting feature

on the probe mount. [4]
4. Trace the tubing from each probe back to the upper
waste manifold and verify they are connected
appropriately.
Close 1. Rotate the latches [1] and tighten the thumbscrews.
Probe 2. Lower the wash zone mechanism.
Latches
Install the 1. Unpack the RV loader and pickup assembly (separate

RV box inside RV loader box) and set on a work surface.
Loader 2. Remove the packing tape securing the cover and the
chute.
3. Loosen the two top RV cover thumbscrews and
carefully set the cover aside. It is not necessary to
detach the sensor cable(s). Pull the main cable out of
the hopper.
4. Remove the screw from the motor hub. [1]
5. Orient the hub so the pin on the hub is at the 10:00
position. [2]
6. Align the pin hole on the RV pickup assembly [3] with
the pin on the hub. [2]
Install the 1. Secure the pickup assembly onto the hub post and
RV secure with the screw [4]. Verify that the screw is tight
Pickup but DO NOT overtighten.
Assembly 2. Carefully rotate the pickup assembly and verify that it
turns freely and that the pickers pass inside (not
outside) the upper chute cover. [5] It is acceptable for
one or more of the pickup arms to slightly rub the upper
chute casting as it passes through the chute.
3. Reinstall the RV loader top cover.
Install RV 1. If the distribution board cover is present, remove it.
Loader 2. Hold the RV Loader with one hand near its mounting
Assembly area [1] or set inside top cover behind the distribution
board panel.
3. With the other hand, connect the cable to J16 on the
processing center distribution board. [2]
4. Set the loader onto its mounting platform. [3]
5. Align the mounting screw with the hole in the bracket
and tighten the screw [4] with a screwdriver (do not
overtighten).
Note
Verify that the RV loader cable is secure and
not interfering with another device.
rights reserved.
Disconnect 1. Locate the External Drain Tubing, 201825 in the

Waste Accessory Kit.
Pump 2. Remove the fluidics area rear panel.
3. As desired, remove the accumulator assembly.
4. Remove the three screws securing the waste pump
assembly.
5. Unclamp the waste pump pressure switch. [1]
6. Disconnect the internal waste bottle tubing from the
back side of the waste pressure switch. [2]
Install 1. Connect the external waste tube, 201825, to the waste

External pressure switch [3] and route it along the structure
Drain Kit base between the motor mounts and into the tubing
clamp. [4]
Install 1. Install the waste pump. Verify that:
Waste the waste tubing is positioned under the
Pump bracket and not pinched [4]
the ground lug is positioned, between the
motor mount and the structure base. [5]
2. The rear panel may remain off until the installation is
complete.
rights reserved.
Off-White Monitor Support Arm Installation
Preparation 1. Unpack and inventory the following parts. Verify

that these parts are present from the support arm
box before discarding the packaging.
Support arm assembly
Keyboard Tray
Side cable cover
Support post cap
Rubber bumper
Screws, cable ties, hex wrench
Optional hook and loop material for
keyboard
Attach Support 1. Place the support arm assembly onto structure

Arm to support post. [1]
Instrument 2. Install the post cap and tighten hex screws with
included hex wrench. [2]
3. Attach the rubber bumper (hand tighten). [3]
Install 1. Lower the support arm (using adjustment

Keyboard Tray lever). [1]
2. Using the four long flat head screws provided,
align and secure the keyboard tray to the support
arm. [2]
Loosely install all screws prior to tightening to
ensure proper alignment.
Black Monitor Support Arm Installation - i1000sr
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The monitor is heavy and unwieldy and the monitor arm may move during installation. You
may need two people to do this safely.
Preparation
1. Unpack and verify inventory for the following parts
before discarding packaging
Monitor Support arm assembly with Keyboard Tray Slide

Mouse and Scanner Holder
Cap, spacer, and 3 washers
Screws, black cable ties, hex wrench
Optional: Velcro for keyboard
Install Black
Articulated Arm 1. Install the two plastic washers and a spacer onto the
post as shown.
2. Install articulated arm onto the post.

Note: Be sure the cables are placed behind the
articulated arm or to the back of the i1000SR.
3. Place washer then cap on articulated arm post and

tighten 2.5mm hex screw using the supplied tool.
4. Install monitor support arm onto articulated arm.

Note
To adjust the arm tension, go to P-672
Articulated Arm Tension Adjustment
Remove Stand and

Install Black 1. Remove the four screws that attach the stand to the
Touchscreen Monitor back of the Black Monitor and discard the stand.
2. Attach the Black Monitor support to the back of the
monitor using the four black screws provided in the kit.
Note
To adjust the monitor, go to P-673 Articulated
Arm Monitor Adjustment
Install Black Monitor

Cables 1. Attach the monitor power, video and USB touchscreen
cables.

Note
Do not use the cables that ship with the monitor.
Use the 11’ cables that are shipped in the
upgrade kit.
Cable Part #s:

100848-101 Monitor Power (11 ft or 3.5m)
100849-101 SVGA Monitor (11 ft or 3.5m)
100417-101 USB Cable (10 ft or 3m)
2. Clean the area just below the power connection on the

monitor with an alcohol prep pad. Place an adhesive tie
wrap mount on the monitor back.

3. Secure the monitor power cable with a black tie wrap

as shown.
Note
White tie wrap shown to easily demonstrate
location.
Black SCC–Hardware and Cabling Installation
Note
A 9-pin serial connector–on the back of the SCC–is configured for the LIS connector. This connector will be configured for
COM 5 (for LIS). If the only non-USB peripheral attached to the SCC is an LIS connection, a 4-port Edgeport EMSA is not
required. The EMSA must be installed if an ARM, serial modem, serial touchscreen or other peripherals are interfaced with
the SCC; and the LIS system must be connected to the EMSA.
Note
The COM port for the USB modem is configured automatically. Use the USB monitor touchscreen cable when connecting
the monitor cables to the SCC. If a USB cable is not available, attach the serial touchscreen cable to the SCC serial port.
The touchscreen cable and the 4-port EMSA must be attached to the SCC prior to base configuration software installation.
This ensures the COM ports are configured correctly and the correct driver is configured for the touchscreen. If the Edgeport
EMSA is attached to the SCC and a USB modem is not detected during base configuration installation, the SCC will be
configured for a serial modem.

Caution
Lifting Hazard - The monitor is heavy and unwieldy and the monitor arm may move during installation. You
may need two people to do this safely.
Verify Correct Line Voltage

Configuration 1. Unpack the SCC CPU and peripheral components.
2. Verify all components are set up appropriate line
voltage.
SCC - self adjusting AC input (99-240V, 50-
60Hz)
Touchscreen Monitor - self-adjusting AC
input (100-240V, 50-60Hz)
HUB - default HUB is USB-powered with no
AC requirement.
Printer - default ARCHITECT printer is 115V
or 220V depending on the list number;
otherwise dependent on specific printer in
use.
Modem (optional) - default modem is USB-
powered with no AC requirement.
If a SCC or module UPS is used, verify that
each device's power configuration is set
properly for the specific UPS output voltage.
Install SCC, Optional Serial

Expansion and Optional SCC 1. Place the CPU onto the i1000 SR cabinet with the
Uninterruptible Power floppy drive at top. [1]
System (UPS)
Note
Verify a minimum of 1-2” (3-5 cm) of air
space at the left side of the CPU. To prevent
overheating, the CPU must not be placed
against the UPS or cabinet wall or
overheating may occur.
2. If an optional SCC UPS is used, unpack and

prepare the UPS for installation, including activating
the battery connections. See the instructions
provided with the UPS.
3. Place the optional UPS inside the SCC cabinet. [2]
The power cord routes out the back of the
instrument.
4. If a module UPS is used, install it per manufacturer
instructions within 6 feet (1.8 meters) of the
processing module.

1. Place the keyboard on the stand and note the
correct positioning.

2. Clean the bottom of the keyboard and the stand
with alcohol prep pads.
3. Remove one side of the adhesive backing from the

Velcro and place on the bottom of the keyboard.
Keeping the 2 pieces stuck together, remove the
other adhesive backing and place the keyboard on
the stand.
4. Remove the adhesive backing for the wrist pad and

place it on the stand as shown.
Note
To adjust the keyboard tray, go to P-674
Articulated Arm Keyboard Angle Adjustment.
5. Install the mouse, route, and secure cables with tie

wrap as shown.
Note
Use only white tie wraps in concealed areas.

6. Install the mouse and keyboard cable cover.
Remove Black Articulating

Arm Covers 1. Remove the top support cover [1] and then the
upper monitor cover [2].
2. Remove both parts of the lower monitor support

cover. Carefully pry open at bottom arrow and lift
off.
3. Remove bottom cover by removing two screws

(one on each side), then slide down and off.
Note
To adjust the keyboard, go to P-674
Articulated Arm Keyboard Angle Adjustment.
4. Remove the Articulating Arm Bottom Cover.
Note
Release the two locking tabs first and then
slide the cover forward to remove the
articulating arm bottom cover.
5. Remove mouse and keyboard cable cover.
Label Mouse and Keyboard

Extension Cables 1. Locate the 100508, PS-2 extension cables in the
Installation Kit.
2. Label BOTH ends of one cable with “M” for mouse.
[1]
3. Label BOTH ends of the other cable with “K” for
keyboard. [2]

Route Cables and Install
Black Arm Covers 1. Attach 11 foot (100151) keyboard and mouse
extension cables.
Note
The keyboard will be attached to the barcode
reader splitter.
Note

Use white tie wraps in areas that will be
concealed and save black tie wraps for
dressing cables. Leave tie wraps loose until
full movement of arm is confirmed.
2. Route mouse and keyboard cables in the bottom
cover of the monitor support arm and secure with 2
screws.

3. Add 2 tie wrap mounts to the monitor support as

shown. Route monitor cables through the support
channels and loosely tie wrap in place. Check the
monitor is able to move freely in all directions prior
to securing the cables.
4. Replace upper and top monitor support covers.
5. Route all cables at the monitor arm lower cover

and wrap cables with the black cable sheath [1]
provided. Be sure to include the straight cable from
the Bar Code Scanner.
Secure ends with black tie wraps.
Note
Monitor, keyboard, and mouse cables are
bundled together.
6. Next bundle cables and loosely add 2 black tie

wraps through the cover slots provided; keep tie
wraps loose until arm movement is checked.
Add the BCR Splitter [2] to the inside of the

cover securing it with a white tie wrap as
shown.
Add excess cable length inside the bottom
cover.
Add Arm Cover

1. Loosely add cover to arm and check arm movement
in all directions prior to securing tie wraps. Ensure:
Movement is silent
Arm moves freely in all directions
Cables move smoothly with arm
Keyboard and mouse connections should
hang outside the arm
Note
Install this cover only after you confirm
that the arm can move freely. This
cover is difficult to remove and can be
easily damaged during installation and
removal.
2. Move the articulated arm as directed below, check
all cables remain connected, and the arm has
smooth movement.
Lift monitor all the way up and down.
Move the arm all the way in and out.
Lift the arm to the maximum position and
then retract it down.
Swing the arm all the way right then left.
Add Arm Cover & Install

Cable Plug 1. Route all five cables into the hole [1] in the
instrument structure. Guide the cables down and
out through the bottom [3].
2. Remove the rear SCC panel on the i1000SR.
3. Route all five cables into the hole [1] in the
instrument structure.
4. Place cables into a loop as shown. Add 3 black tie
wraps [2] at the areas indicated.
Note
White tie wraps are shown to easily
demonstrate their location.
Note
Be sure the arm moves freely prior to
securing tie wraps.
Note
Keyboard and Mouse connections should be
accessible for customer reseating or
component replacement.
5. Position the 5 cables into the rubber cable plug [3]
and postion the cable plug in the hole in the
instrument casting.
Note
White tie wraps are shown to demonstrate
their location.
Note
Be sure the arm moves freely prior to
securing tie wraps.
Note
Keyboard and Mouse connections should be
accessible for customer reseating or
component replacement.
Install BCR / Mouse Holder

1. Install mouse and barcode reader holder. Insert the
right side (mouse) into the slot while squeezing the
left (BCR) side. Snap the left side into place.
2. Add hand-held barcode scanner and mouse to the
holder

Connect Mouse, Keyboard

and Monitor Cables to CPU 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC Connections
Diagram–for Platform E or Platform F–to connect
the Mouse, Keyboard and Monitor to the CPU.
2. At the rear of the CPU, connect the mouse
extension cable (labeled M) to the mouse port
(green) on the CPU. [1]
3. Connect the keyboard extension cable (labeled K)
to the keyboard port (purple) on the CPU. [2]
4. Connect the VGA cable to the VGA port on the
CPU. [3]
5. Connect the monitor USB cable to one of the USB
ports at the front of the CPU, near the bottom. [4]
Connect Hub and Ethernet

Cables 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC Connections Diagram
– for Platform E or Platform F–as needed for the
following connections.
2. Attach the four magnetic pads included in the hub
packaging to the bottom of the hub.
3. Connect the hub's power cable from the hub to one
of the USB ports on the front panel of the CPU. [5]
4. Connect the short Ethernet cable (provided with
hub) from port 5 (preferred) on the hub to the
indicated Ethernet connector on the CPU. [6]
5. Connect the long Ethernet cable (provided with
hub) from port 1 (preferred) on the hub to the
processing module's Ethernet connector located on
the interface panel adjacent to the cooler. [7]
6. Connect one of the provided 100349 Ethernet
cables from port 2 (preferred) on the hub to the #2
Ethernet connection on the inside of the SCC
Interface Panel. [8]
7. Connect the other provided 100349 Ethernet cable
from the AbbottLink port on the CPU to the #1
Ethernet connection on the inside of the SCC
8. Attach the hub to the side of the CPU so that its
display is visible from the front of the instrument.
Connect Internal Cables for

SCC Interface Panel 1. As necessary, remove the SCC interface panel.
2. Connect the printer extension cable, 100351, from
the printer port on the CPU to the connector labeled
Printer on the inside of the SCC interface panel.
[10]
3. Connect the four USB pigtails from the interface
panel in any order to the four open USB ports on
the rear of the CPU. [11]
4. Connect the serial extension cable, 100350, from
the 9-pin serial port on the rear of the CPU to the
connector labeled LIS on the inside of the SCC
interface panel. [12]
Install Printer
1. Unpack and place the printer in its desired location
near the instrument.
2. Install the ink cartridge and paper per the
instructions provided with the printer.
3. Connect the printer cable from the printer, to the
connector labeled "Printer" on the outside of the
SCC interface panel.
4. Connect the power cord to the printer.
Connect Laboratory
Information System (LIS) 1. If an LIS is to be used, contact the site LIS
(optional) personnel to connect to the LIS system using an
appropriate cable.
Connect External USB

Modem (optional) 1. Connect the external modem’s USB cable to any
one of the USB connectors on the outside of the
SCC interface panel.
2. Connect the customer’s dedicated telephone line to
the modem.
ActionSCC Connections Diagram - Platform E

ActionSCC Connections Diagram - Platform F
Connect Power for SCC
Components 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC power connection
diagram depending on whether a SCC UPS (SCC
Power Connections with SCC UPS Diagram) or
module/system UPS (SCC Power Connections with
Module UPS Diagram) is being installed.
2. Plug the power cords, for the monitor, 202887, and
CPU, 100346, into the power strip inside the SCC
cabinet and tighten the clamp screws.
If module/system UPS is used, proceed to
Step7.
If a 120VAC SCC UPS is used, connect the
original SCC CPU power cord, from the
power strip to one of the battery backup
receptacles on the UPS.
If a 220VAC SCC UPS is used, connect a
100347 power cord (or other custom cord as
needed for UPS), from the power strip to one
of the battery backup receptacles on the
UPS.
3. Secure the UPS AC input power cord into the
adjustable cable strap at the base of the cabinet
adjacent to the power strip. [1]
4. Neatly, secure all excess cabling into cable tray. [2]
5. Reinstall SCC area rear panel now or if desired, at
the completion of the system installation.
6. Plug the UPS power cord into the wall outlet.
Caution
Do not plug the SCC UPS into a larger
system UPS.
7. If a module/system UPS is used, connect a country
specific AC cord from the power strip to the module
UPS or wall outlet. Route the cord through the
adjustable cable strap at the base of the cabinet
adjacent to the power strip. [1]
Caution
If a UPS is not installed, data loss and/or
hard drive damage is possible in the event of
a power disruption
Note
There should be only one power cord coming
out of the SCC area rear panel in addition to
the module power cord from the system
power supply.
8. Turn UPS power on.
9. Connect the printer power cord to an appropriate
outlet outside the i1000SR module.
Note
Do not plug the printer into the UPS and, if
possible, do not plug the printer into the
same circuit as the UPS.

1. Connect the cord from the AC input on the power
supply of the i1000sr module to the wall outlet or to
a module/system UPS, if present.
Install System Software

1. Refer to the most recent software installation TSB
for instructions to install the system software.
2. When the software installation is complete,
complete installation of module components, as
needed, then proceed to Processing Module
Preparation.
SCC Power Connections with SCC UPS Diagram

SCC Power Connections with Module UPS Diagram

Off-White Touchscreen Monitor Installation
Remove Stand and 1. Remove the monitor stand from the monitor
Install Monitor and retain the four (4) screws. [1]
2. Attach the monitor to the vertical bracket
using the four (4) screws retained in
Step1. [2]
rights reserved.
Off-White SCC - Hardware and Cabling Installation
Purpose To provide instructions for installing the SCC module and all associated cabling. Module SCC
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time N/A
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The monitor is heavy and unwieldy. You may need two people to do this safely.
Verify Correct Line Voltage 1. Unpack the SCC CPU and peripheral
Configuration components.
2. Verify all components are set up
appropriate line voltage.
SCC - self adjusting AC input
(99-240V, 50-60Hz)
Touchscreen Monitor - self-
adjusting AC input (100-240V,
50-60Hz)
HUB - default HUB is USB-
powered with no AC
requirement.
Printer - default ARCHITECT
printer is 115V or 220V
depending on the list number;
otherwise dependent on
specific printer in use.
Modem (optional) - default
modem is USB-powered with
no AC requirement.
If a SCC or module UPS is
used, verify that each device's
power configuration is set
properly for the specific UPS
output voltage.
Install SCC, Optional Serial 1. Place the CPU into the i1000SR
Expansion and Optional cabinet with the floppy drive at top. [1]
SCC Uninterruptible Power
System (UPS) Note
Verify there is a minimum of 1-
2" (3-5 mm) of air space at the
left side of the CPU. The CPU
must not be placed against the
UPS or cabinet wall or
overheating may occur.
2. If an optional SCC UPS is used,
unpack and prepare the UPS for
installation, including activating the
battery connections. See the
instructions provided with the UPS.
3. Place the optional UPS inside the
SCC cabinet. [2] The power cord
routes out the back of the instrument.
4. If a module UPS is used, install it per
manufacturer instructions within 6 feet
(1.8 meters) of the processing
module.
Install Keyboard and CAUTION

Mouse Close the instrument's top cover to
avoid head injury when working
behind the instrument.
1. Attach hook and loop material

(provided) to keyboard tray and
bottom of keyboard.
2. Place the keyboard and mouse on
the keyboard tray.
3. Route the keyboard cable through the
hole at the back of the keyboard tray.
4. Secure the mouse cable at
approximately 12" (30.5 cm) to allow
for free movement of mouse [1],
using cable tie [2].
Note
Securing keyboard cable is
optional. Customer may want
to reposition keyboard.
Install Touchscreen Monitor Note

Cables None of the cables included with
the touchscreen monitor are used
for the i1000SR system installation,
as they are too short. The proper
cables to use, as indicated in step
1, are located in the i1000SR
Installation Kit.
1. In the 202376 Installation Kit, locate

the bag labeled Monitor Cables and
find the following cables:
202887 - monitor power cord,
10' (3 m)
100417 - USB cable, 10' (3 m)
100418 - VGA cable, 10' (3 m)
2. Connect the power cord [1],
touchscreen USB cable [2], and VGA
signal cable [3] to the bottom of the
monitor.
3. Route the cables to the vertical
support. Configure with a short
service loop and secure with a cable
tie (provided with the monitor support
arm) using the hole in vertical
support. [4]
Label Mouse and Keyboard 1. Locate the 100151, PS-2 extension

Extension Cables cables in the Installation Kit.
2. Label BOTH ends of one cable with
"M" for mouse. [1]
3. Label BOTH ends of the other cable
with "K" for keyboard. [2]
Wrap Cables with 1. Route the male ends of the mouse

Corrugated Tube and keyboard extension cables along
with the three monitor cables into the
full length of the 201639 corrugated
tube (in Installation Kit). [1]
2. Leave 4" (10 cm) of the female ends
of the cables extending from the end
of the corrugated tube. [2] To
preserve space in the tube, try to
keep the cables from crossing over
each other.
Install Cable Covers 1. Remove the side cable cover from the
support arm and reinstall it over the
corrugated tube, leaving 1.5" (4 cm)
extending beyond the side cover. [1]
2. Attach a black cable tie. [2]
3. Align the upper and lower support
arms in a straight line.
4. Install the lower cable cover at the
underside of the horizontal arm,
allowing for 2" (5 cm) of service loop
at the center joint of the support
arm. [4]
Install Cables Plug and 1. Remove the SCC area rear panel.
Attach Cable Ties 2. Route all five cables into the hole in
the structure.
3. Position all the cables into the rubber
cable plug (in Installation Kit). [1]
4. Position the plug with cables into the
hole in the casting. [2]
Complete Mouse 1. Wind the mouse cable around the
Installation cable storage brackets under the
keyboard tray and attach to extension
cable [1]. The cable is secured with
cable ties in following steps.
Complete Keyboard 1. If a hand-help bar code wand is used,

Installation With Hand Held loop the cable through the holder [1]
Bar Code Wand then place the wand in the holder.
2. Wind the keyboard and bar code
reader cabling around the cable
storage brackets under the keyboard
tray. [2]
3. Connect one end of the bar code
reader Y cable to the keyboard
cable [3] and one end to the keyboard
extension cable. [4]
4. Secure with cable ties. [5]
5. Verify keyboard tray rotates right to
left without stressing cable
connections at rear of keyboard.
Complete Keyboard 1. If a hand-held bar code wand is NOT

Installation Without Hand used, allow for a short service loop
Held Bar Code Wand then wind the keyboard cable around
the cable storage brackets under the
keyboard tray and connect to the
keyboard extension cable [1]. Secure
cables with cable ties. [2]
2. Verify that the keyboard tray rotates
to the right and left without stressing
or pinching any cables or connection
cables or connections at rear of
keyboard.
Connect Mouse, Keyboard 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC

and Monitor Cables to CPU Connections Diagram–for Platform E
or Platform F–to connect the Mouse,
Keyboard and Monitor to the CPU.
2. At the rear of the CPU, connect the
mouse extension cable (labeled M) to
the mouse port (green) on the
CPU. [1]
3. Connect the keyboard extension
cable (labeled K) to the keyboard port
(purple) on the CPU. [2]
4. Connect the VGA cable to the VGA
port on the CPU. [3]
5. Connect the monitor USB cable to
one of the USB ports at the front of
the CPU, near the bottom. [4]
Connect Hub and Ethernet 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC

Cables Connections Diagram–for Platform E
or Platform F–as needed for the
following connections.
2. Attach the four magnetic pads
included in the hub packaging to the
bottom of the hub.
3. Connect the hub's power cable from
the hub to one of the USB ports on
the front panel of the CPU. [5]
4. Connect the short Ethernet cable
(provided with hub) from port 5
(preferred) on the hub to the indicated
Ethernet connector on the CPU. [6]
5. Connect the long Ethernet cable
(provided with hub) from port 1
(preferred) on the hub to the
processing module's Ethernet
connector located on the interface
panel adjacent to the cooler. [7]
6. Connect one of the provided 100349
Ethernet cables from port 2
(preferred) on the hub to the #2
Ethernet connection on the inside of
the SCC Interface Panel. [8]
7. Connect the other provided 100349
Ethernet cable from the AbbottLink
port on the CPU to the #1 Ethernet
connection on the inside of the SCC
8. Attach the hub to the side of the CPU
so that its display is visible from the
front of the instrument.
Connect Internal Cables for 1. As necessary, remove the SCC

SCC Interface Panel interface panel.
2. Connect the printer extension cable,
100351, from the printer port on the
CPU to the connector labeled Printer
on the inside of the SCC interface
panel. [10]
3. Connect the four USB pigtails from
the interface panel in any order to the
four open USB ports on the rear of
the CPU. [11]
4. Connect the serial extension cable,
100350, from the 9-pin serial port on
the rear of the CPU to the connector
labeled LIS on the inside of the SCC
interface panel. [12]
Install Printer 1. Unpack and place the printer in its

desired location near the instrument.
2. Install the ink cartridge and paper per
the instructions provided with the
printer.
3. Connect the printer cable from the
printer, to the connector labeled
"Printer" on the outside of the SCC
interface panel.
4. Connect the power cord to the printer.
SCC Connections Diagram– Platform E
SCC Connections Diagram– Platform F

Connect Power for SCC 1. Refer to the appropriate SCC power
Components connection diagram depending on
whether a SCC UPS (SCC Power
Connections with SCC UPS Diagram)
or module/system UPS (SCC Power
Connections with Module UPS
Diagram) is being installed.
2. Plug the power cords, for the monitor,
202887, and CPU, 100346, into the
power strip inside the SCC cabinet
and tighten the clamp screws.
If module/system UPS is used,
proceed to Step7.
If a 120VAC SCC UPS is
used, connect the original SCC
CPU power cord, from the
power strip to one of the
battery backup receptacles on
the UPS.
If a 220VAC SCC UPS is
used, connect a 100347 power
cord (or other custom cord as
needed for UPS), from the
power strip to one of the
battery backup receptacles on
the UPS.
3. Secure the UPS AC input power cord
into the adjustable cable strap at the
base of the cabinet adjacent to the
power strip. [1]
4. Neatly, secure all excess cabling into
cable tray. [2]
5. Reinstall SCC area rear panel now or
if desired, at the completion of the
system installation.
6. Plug the UPS power cord into the
wall outlet.
Caution
Do not plug the SCC UPS into
a larger system UPS.
7. If a module/system UPS is used,

connect a country specific AC cord
from the power strip to the module
UPS or wall outlet. Route the cord
through the adjustable cable strap at
the base of the cabinet adjacent to
the power strip. [1]
Caution
If a UPS is not installed, data
loss and/or hard drive damage
is possible in the event of a
power disruption.
Note
There should be only one
power cord coming out of the
SCC area rear panel in
addition to the module power
cord from the system power
supply.
8. Turn UPS power on.

9. Connect the printer power cord to an
appropriate outlet outside the i1000SR
module.
Note
Do not plug the printer into the
UPS and, if possible, do not
plug the printer into the same
circuit as the UPS.
Connect Module AC Power 1. Route the module power cord through

the hole in the center rear panel.
2. Connect the cord from the AC input
on the power supply to the wall outlet
or to a module/system UPS, if
present.
Install System Software 1. Refer to the most recent software

installation TSB for instructions to
install the system software.
2. When the software installation is
complete, complete installation of
module components, as needed, then
proceed to Processing Module
Preparation.
SCC Power Connections with Module UPS Diagram
SCC Power Connections with SCC UPS Diagram

Purpose To provide instructions how to prepare the processing module for calibrations, internal Module i1000SR
decontamination and startup.
Materials Standard Tool Kit Time N/A

Required
Verify TSB 1. Look at the processing module TSB sticker to determine Refer to the TSB database.
Status and current TSB status to determine if any TSBs need to be
Perform TSBs installed before proceeding.
as Necessary
Verify Reagent 1. Open the reagent carousel cover to verify that the reagent
Carousel carousel is installed properly.
Installation 2. Disengage the motor latch and turn the carousel by hand. It
should rotate freely and engage all three V-wheels.
3. Re-engage the motor latch.
4. Close and latch the reagent carousel cover.
Verify Cable 1. If present, remove the internal process path cover and
and Tubing internal processing center distribution board cover.
Connections 2. Remove the three rear panels from the system.
and PC boards 3. Systematically check each cable connection at each
distribution board and subassembly throughout the
instrument.
4. Systematically check each tubing connection on the
instrument for tightness. Verify that the cooler overflow drain
tubing is situated in the overflow pan but not directly in the
pan's drain hole.
5. Open the card cage door and verify that all the circuit boards
are fully seated.
6. Verify that the front doors open and close freely and do not
squeak or rub on the structure. Adjust hinges as necessary.
Verify that all screws on both sides of the front door hinges
are tight.
7. Install the internal covers. The rear panels may be installed
now or at the end of the installation procedure. Refer to
P1.02 Internal Covers.
Power On 1. Verify that the SCC is at the Snapshot screen. Refer to

Processing 2. Turn processing module power on. P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure.
Module 3. Verify that both processing module and the RSH come to
Stopped status (approximately four minutes).
4. Log on as FSE.
Load 1. Remove buffer reservoir and install the buffer level sensor
Consumables (inlet straw).
and Buffer 2. Since the reservoir extension tubings and cable will be
needed for the internal decontamination, proceed to attach
them at this time between the system and the buffer
reservoir and place the reservoir on the floor in front of the
wash buffer storage area.
3. Do not install the buffer filter. It will be installed after the
internal decontamination is complete.
4. Fill the upper hopper with RVs.
6. Prepare 10L of buffer in one of the provided buffer
preparation containers. (Later, when performing the 2190
Internal Decontamination procedure, disregard the
instructions to prepare buffer, as the remainder of this
mixture will be used at that time.)
Note
Only a small amount of buffer will be loaded initially in
order to perform a system flush and calibrations. The
remainder will be loaded after the system is flushed
with bleach solution.
7. Place the sinker of the buffer transfer tubing into the

prepared buffer.
8. Attach the transfer tubing to the buffer inlet port on the
analyzer.
9. Access the Update supplies screen. Check to update each of
the consumables, including the option to Add buffer.
10. Select OK to perform the supplies update and start the buffer
transfer. Remove the transfer tubing from the prepared buffer
as soon as 1.5L of buffer has been transferred to the
reservoir! (See 1.5L marking on side of reservoir). The
system will stop the transfer.
Note
The default count for RVs is 160 when new software
is loaded. The RVs will not drop until the system is
initialized (Startup). Do not manually force/fill the RVs
into the lower hopper.
Perform 1109 1. From the Snapshot screen, select System> Maintenance

Wash Cup 2. Select Module 1.
Pre-alignment 3. Select the As Needed tab.
4. Perform 1109 Wash Cup Pre-alignment.
5. Perform P-405 Wash Cup Assembly Check
Purpose To provide instructions on how to calibrate the processing module prior to use. Module i1000SR
Materials Required Standard Tool Kit Time N/A

3-prong calibration tool
Bar code calibration tool
Startup System 1. Perform a startup on both the processing module and RSH.
Flush the Pipettor. 1. Select System, Maintenance.

2. Select Module 1.
3. Select the As Needed tab.
4. Perform 2137 Flush Fluids. Perform option 1 two (2) times to flush the pipettor and
ensure that a strong fluid stream is coming from the probe.
Perform 1114 Carrier 1. Select System, Maintenance.

Transport Calibration 2. Select Module 0.
4. Perform 1114 Carrier Transport Calibration.
Perform 1110 Pipettor 1. Select System, Maintenance.

Calibration 2. Select Module 1.
4. Perform 1110 Pipettor Calibration.
Perform 3240 Bar Code 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Calibration 2. Select Module 0.
3. Select the Bar Code Readers tab.
4. Perform 3240 Bar Code Calibration.
Purpose To provide instructions for performing the internal decontamination of the i1000SR system Module i1000SR
during installation.

Required
Decontaminating Note
the Processing Prior to installation of the buffer filter, the
Module i1000SR system must be decontaminated to
ensure the buffer intake and dispense systems
are free of microbial contamination (before being
used by the customer). Maintenance procedure
2190 Internal Decontamination is used to
perform the required flushes with sodium
hypochlorite.
Perform 2190 1. Perform a Startup on both the processing

Internal module and the RSH. Ensure both modules
Decontamination reach the Ready state.
2. Initiate the 2190 Internal Decontamination
(Maintenance). Select Yes to the new installation
option.
3. Because of the need to pre-load buffer to flush
and calibrate, a few steps of the 2190 procedure
will not be performed. Use these guidelines
when performing the procedure:
Load Probe Cleaning Solution (PCS) as
directed.
Disregard steps to remove and empty the
liquid waste container, if present and in
use.
Disregard steps to disconnect the tubings
and cable and remove the buffer reservoir
as it has already been removed.
Empty the buffer reservoir as directed.
Prepare bleach solution as directed.
Reattach the extension tubings and cable
as directed.
If the liquid waste container is not
installed, install it as directed.
Follow instructions to load bleach solution.
Empty, rinse and reinstall the reservoir
outside the system.
Note
When directed to prepare and load
buffer, use the remaining buffer
previously prepared during the
above.
Complete remainder of procedure as

directed.
4. As instructed, install a new buffer filter. To install
the filter, attach the tubing from the bottom of
the buffer pump to the bottom of the buffer filter
[1] and place the filter into the filter bracket [2].
Verify that the tubing is routed as shown.
Reinstall the buffer reservoir.
5. At the end of the procedure, as directed, make
10L of fresh buffer and load it on the system.
Perform 2137 1. Perform a Startup on the processing module and

Flush Fluids verify it comes to Ready status.
2. Select System, Maintenance.
3. Select Module 1.
5. Select 2137 Flush Fluids.
6. Repeat 2137 Flush Fluids as necessary to
visually check for leaks at all fluidics
components.
Note
While 2137 Flush Fluids is running,
visually verify that there are no leaks at
the pipettor, syringe, all tubing
connections, all pumps including the
waste pump and external waste tubing if
in use.
7. Proceed to the Processing Module (Verification)

section in the Installation chapter of the i1000SR
Service and Support Manual.
Purpose To provide instructions on the verification of the processing module during installation. Module i1000SR

Required B-hCG and TSH Reagent (or any other one and two step assays), Calibrators and Controls.
Note
B-hCG or TSH Reagents, controls, and calibrators can be used if the optics
verification solutions are not available.
Any two step assay to be used by the site.
Perform a Startup on the 1. Perform a Startup on the processing module and RSH.
Processing Module and RSH 2. Verify that both modules arrive at Ready status.
3. Log in as FSE, if not already.
Perform 5555 RSH Sensor 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Tests 2. Select Module 0.
3. Select the Solenoids & Sensors tab.
4. Perform 5555 RSH Sensor Tests.
5. Verify the operation of all the RSH sensors.
Perform 3310 RSH Test 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

2. Select Module 0.
3. Select the Modules tab.
4. Perform 3310 RSH Test.
Perform 3230 Bar Code 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Reader Test 2. Select Module 0.
3. Select the Bar Code Readers tab.
4. Perform 3230 Bar Code Reader Test. Use samples of the
customer's labels for this test.
Perform 3540 Temperature 1. Select System, Maintenance.

Status 2. Select Module 1.
4. Perform 3540 Temperature Status.
Perform 1022 Optics 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Background 2. Select Module 1.
3. Select the Optics/Temperature tab.
4. Perform 1022 Optics Background.
Perform 5420 Crash Sensor 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Test 2. Select Module 1.
3. Select the Pipettors tab.
4. Perform 5420 Crash Sensor Test.
Perform 3630 LLS Test 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

2. Select Module 1.
3. Select the Fluidics/Wash tab.
4. Perform 3630 LLS Test. Test all possible locations.
Perform 6440 Daily 1. Select System, Maintenance.

Maintenance 2. Select Module 1.
3. Select the Daily tab.
4. Perform 6440 Daily Maintenance.
Perform 6114 Install/Delete 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Assays 2. Select Module 5 (for SCC).
3. Select Utilities tab.
4. Using the appropriate ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM,
perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays to install the assays to be used
for precision testing.
Configure QC-Cal Settings 1. Before placing the system in Run status, verify that the QC-Cal
Settings for the assay(s) are correct.
2. To set QC-Cal Settings, select System and Configuration.
3. Select the QC-Cal Settings radio button.
4. Select the appropriate assay(s) and F6 - Configure.
5. Configure the appropriate control levels.
6. Load all required reagents.
Set Processing Module and 1. On the Snapshot screen, select both the processing module and
Sample Handler to Run RSH.
Status 2. Select Run.
Note
To save time, while the processing module is performing
the run initialization, enter calibration and control orders.
Perform Calibration on 1. Order a calibration for assays to be used for the performance Refer to the
Appropriate Assays verification precision run. ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual.
Note
Consecutively numbered carriers are required for six point
calibration assays.
2. Verify that each assay calibration passes.
Perform Precision Run 1. Order a precision run of at least ten replicates for each control Refer to the
level for each assay being tested. ARCHITECT System
2. For further information on performing control runs, refer to Operations Manual.
P-24 Precision Run.
Evaluate Control Run Data 1. When all control results are available, select QC-Cal and QC
(Optics Verification) Result Review.
2. Select the control results and select F8 - Release.
3. Select QC-Cal and QC Reports.
4. Print the reports for the assays which were run to obtain the
mean, SD, and percent (%) CV.
5. Verify that the results for each assay are within the published
ranges.
Note
For TSH, the %CV should be less than 10%. For B-hCG
and STAT B-hCG, the %CV should be equal to or less
than 7.5%.
Note
If %CVs are outside of range, refer to the i1000SR
eSolutions and ISA databases for troubleshooting
information.
Verify Processing Module is 1. If the processing module in Running status, select the processing
in Stopped or Ready Status module icon on the Snapshot screen.
2. Select F7 - Pause. Wait for the processing module to change to a
Ready status.
Perform 6114 Install/Delete 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Assays to Delete Assay Files 2. Select Module 5 (SCC).
(Optional) 3. Select Utilities tab.
4. Perform 6114 Install/Delete Assays to delete the assays which
were installed earlier.
Perform System Backup 1. Set the processing module to Stopped status.
Note
System must be in a Stopped status prior to performing
backup or the system software stops executing.
2. Select System, Utilities.

3. Select Create Backup. Follow the on screen instructions.
4. In the Comment field, type Backup after system installation.
5. Select Done.
6. Verify that the backup completes without error.
Perform 6004 Copy Backup 1. Select System, Diagnostics.

Software 2. Select Module 5.
3. Select the Utilities tab.
4. Perform 6004 Copy Backup Software.
5. Select option 1 to copy backup software from F: to CD.
Stabilize and Level 1. Verify that there is appropriate clearance to access the module's
Instrument (as necessary) power switch at the rear of the instrument.
2. Once the module is in the desired location and further moving is
not necessary, lock the wheels or lower the leveling feet and level
the instrument as necessary.

WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard
Purpose To provide procedures verifying installation of the SCC. Module SCC
Materials Required FSE Date Code List Time N/A

Example Sample Tubes with customer bar code labels
Bar Code Labels
Log on as FSE 1. Perform P-201 Service Log On/Log Off Procedure.

Enter Logon ID of FSE
Enter password code
Perform P-226 Set Bar 1. Perform P-226 Set Bar Code Transitions. Use the (optional) Manually Set number
Code Transitions of Transitions because there is no automatic configuration for the i1000SR System
at this time.
Perform P-228 SCC Bar 1. If a bar code scanner is installed, perform

Code Scanner P-228 SCC Bar Code Scanner Verification.
Verification
Perform P-207 1. Perform P-207 ARCHITECT Print Test.

ARCHITECT Print Test
Verify UPS Operation 1. If the UPS's battery is charged, disconnect the UPS plug from the wall outlet.
2. Verify that the SCC (and processing module if a system UPS is in use) remains
powered without error for at least 5 minutes.
Note
If the battery indications begin to show battery depletion, plug the UPS back
in immediately. Retest the UPS after charging for 24 hours.
3. Reconnect the UPS to the wall outlet and verify that the UPS returns to on-
line/ready status.
Installation Documentation
Purpose Document and Complete Installation Checklist Module RSH
Materials Required N/A Time 0.5 hr
Checklist 1. Review the checklist for completeness and confirm that all required TSB actions are
Completion completed.
2. Sign and date the checklist.
3. Leave a copy of the checklist with the customer, along with a copy of the reports of the
final Control run.
Document
Installation 1. Ensure that P/N “0117-Install” is documented in Usage.
Completion a. Use Action Taken code: N360 Installed Instrument with Reason for Action: FA68
Install VP Documentation.
b. Click Get Verification Procedure.
c. Enter Verification test summary. For example, mark “Passed” or enter results if
required by verification procedure.
2. Document successful completion of the installation in your local call management

system. If TSBs have been installed, you must close those tickets to report TSB
completion.
Relocation
Links
i1000SR System Preparation for Relocation

i1000SR System Packing
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-101) • Copyright 2007 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, and c16000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
i1000SR System Preparation for Relocation
Refer to the Abbott ARCHITECT i System Operations Manual, Section 2, Relocation. After decontaminating the system, proceed to
i1000SR System Packing.
i1000SR Service and Support Manual (Version 201970-101) • Copyright 2007 • ARCHITECT, i2000, i2000SR, c8000, ci8200, and c16000 are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories. i1000SR, i4000, i6000, i8000, and ARCHITECT ARM are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. • Abbott Park, IL 60064 • All rights reserved.
i1000SR System Packing
Purpose The following procedure is used to prepare and package a system for relocation. The Abbott Module i1000SR
Field Representative performs the following tasks.
Materials Pallet Time 4 hours

Required Accessory box or other appropriate box
Bubble wrap
Tape
Anti-static stretch film
Standard tool kit
Sterile latex gloves
Lab coat
Safety glasses
Detergent and disinfectant for decontamination
Caution
Potentially infectious material may be present. Gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses
must be worn while preparing the instrument for shipment.
WARNING
Potential Biohazard
WARNING
Probe Stick Hazard
Caution
Lifting Hazard
Prepare System 1. If the instrument is leaving the account, delete all Results and Stored Results from the
system.
2. Unload all reagents and store or dispose appropriately.
Perform 2190 1. Perform 2190 Internal Decontamination. Abort the procedure after the bleaching process.
Internal Do not load more buffer or install a new buffer filter on the system.
Decontamination
Perform 2138 1. Perform 2138 Long Term Shutdown. Long Term Shutdown will flush the system with DI
Long Term water and perform an air purge.
Shutdown 2. When instructed, turn AC Power OFF to the processing module, SCC, and, if present, the
UPS and ARCHITECT ARM.
Perform 6038 1. Perform 6038 External Decontamination.

External
Decontamination
Remove SCC & 1. Remove and appropriately pack the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and CPU and all
Components associated components and cabling.
Caution
Lifting Hazard - The monitor and CPU are heavy. Use proper technique when lifting
these components. Obtain assistance, if necessary.
2. Disconnect and pack the printer and associated cabling.
i1000SR Module Caution

Preparation for Probe Stick Hazard - The probe and aspiration probe are sharp. Avoid contact with the tip
Packing of a probe.
1. Remove all bulk solutions. Dispose of the solutions using proper disposal procedures.
2. Disconnect the inlet waste tubing (if ARCHITECT ARM is installed) and discard.
3. Remove all probes from the system. If instrument is not being returned for investigation,
dispose of the probes in accordance with site safety requirements. If an investigation is to
be performed, wrap the probes in bubble wrap and place in the accessory kit.
4. Secure the pipettor arm in its shipping position (see Installation procedure)
5. Lower the wash zone assembly to the down position.
6. Move the carrier transport to the center of the load platform and insert packing material
(i.e., bubble wrap) on both sides to prohibit the transport from moving during shipment.
7. Remove the biohazard bag from the solid waste container. Perform a surface
decontamination of the solid waste container and place the container in its compartment.
8. Remove the buffer bottle and waste container and dispose them.
9. Verify that any residual buffer is cleaned (using tap water) off pumps, waste area, sample
and processing areas.
10. Verify that all PC boards are securely seated and verify that the card cage door is securely
latched.
11. Verify that all system covers are in place and secure.
12. Verify the reagent access cover latch is closed and in a locked position.
13. Tape the internal covers.
14. Close the processing area cover and tape the front and sides.
15. If available, wrap the instrument with stretch wrap.
Load/Secure Caution
Instrument to This procedure constitutes a possible safety and/or ergonomic hazard. Care must be
Pallet exercised to prevent injury to persons performing this task.
Caution
Lifting Hazard - Move the instrument to the shipping area for packing. Do not attempt to
move the pallet (>100 lbs) without powered assist.
Caution
This operation requires two people; one person pushes the instrument while another person
pulls and guides the instrument up the ramp.
1. Refer to Unpack for illustrations of the following steps.
Note
To pack the instrument, perform Unpack in reverse order.
2. Carefully, roll the instrument onto the pallet. The rear of instrument must face outside of the
edge of the pallet.
3. Place the pallet ramp in position.
4. Align the instrument with the bracket mounting holes.
5. Attach the brackets (one near each caster) to the bottom of the instrument and to the
pallet. Verify that the bolts going into the pallet are tight, but DO NOT over-tighten.
6. Lock all the casters.
7. Place the accessory components box and monitor support arm box on the pallet at the
ramp end.
8. Wrap the instrument and boxes with shrink wrap, if available.
9. Place cardboard sleeves around the instrument.
10. Place the cardboard top onto the sleeves.
Note
The shipper is responsible for banding the package.
11. System packing is complete.

i1000SR Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

i1000SR Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ARCHITECT i1000SR Service and Support Manual

Manual Revision Number

Front Matter Content Control Number

Other revision history is located in the table.

REVISION DATE SECTIONS REVISED/ADDED TSBs INCORPORATED ISAs INCORPORATED

201970-115 APR//2015 i1000 Revision 201970-115 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-113 NOV/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-113 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-111 JUL/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-111 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-110 MAY/2010 i1000 Revision 201970-110 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-109 JUN/2009 i1000 Revision 201970-109 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-107 DEC/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-107 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-106 SEPT/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-106 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-105 MAY/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-105 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-104 MAR/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-104 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-103 MAR/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-103 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-102 JAN/2008 i1000 Revision 201970-102 Change Listing N/A N/A

201970-101 JAN/2007 ALL (NEW PUBLICATION) N/A N/A

(Document Control Number 204668-102)

the copyright notice appears on all copies;

FRONT TItle Change Manual Revision Number to 201970-102

FRONT TItle Change Front Matter Content Control Number to 201971-102

FRONT Prop Info Update trademark and copyright information

FRONT Rev Log Add 201970-102 Change Listing

1 Gen Data Changed Document Control Number 201972-102

1.1 Updated text in Overview table

1.1 Updated text in Instrument or Part Decontamination

1.1 Deleted table in ESD Procedure

1.2 Updated text in title Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste

1.2 Updated text in Hardware Description of Fluidics, Vacuum, and Waste

1.2 Updated and added text to Wash Cup Assembly

1.2 Updated graphic 5A_9010b

1.2 Updated text in Vacuum Subsystem

1.2 Updated and added text in Liquid Waste

1.2 Updated i1000SR Pumps table

1.2 Updated and added text in RSH Sample Processing

1.2 Updated text in Overview of Temperature and WAM

1.2 Updated text in Hard Description of Temperature and WAM

1.2 Updated and added text to Temperature Set Points table

1.2 Updated text in Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

1.2 Updated and added text in Temperature Subsystem Channels table

1.2 Added text to Reagent Carousel Area in Reagent Management

1.2 Updated graphics 5A_1050b and 5A_1051b

1.2 Added Carrier Positioner to Reagent Management

1.2 Updated text to Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly

1.2 Added text to Carrier Latch Actuator Assembly

2 Troubleshooting Changed Document Control Number 201973-102

2 Updated graphic 5A_9001b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9006b 1 of 2

2 Updated graphic 5A_9006b 2 of 2

2 Updated graphic 5A_9007b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9009b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9008b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9005b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9014b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9025b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9045b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9026b

2 Updated graphic 5A_9048b

2 2.3 Updated table in i1000 System Electronic

2 Updated table in CMIA Optics Board

2 Updated table in Limit Switch Inputs

2 Updated table in Stepper Motor Driver Boards

2 Updated table in 97280 HEater Cooler Board Fuses